SP8400 Services Manual

M0AN
SERVICE MANUAL
Rev. 02/16/2022
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh USA, Inc. and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH USA, Inc.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any
trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
 2022 RICOH USA, Inc. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information regarding
service techniques, procedures, processes and
spare parts of office equipment distributed by Ricoh
USA, Inc. Users of this manual should be either
service trained or certified by successfully
completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information
contained in this service manual to repair or modify
Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to
property or loss of warranty protection.
Ricoh USA, Inc.

LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN
M0AN SP 8400DN SP 8400DN SP 8400DN
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 06/2017 Original Printing
1 09/2021 Converted to RUS format
SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND TRADEMARKS
Symbols, Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations
are as follows:
Symbol What it means
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
B/W, BW Black and White
FC Full color
[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox is a registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google, Android and Chrome are trademark of Google Inc.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer and Microsoft Edge are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other countries.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and BSAFE are
registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 7 and 8 are as follows:
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 7

The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 MultiPoint Premium Server
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
M0AN MAIN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................................... 1-1

1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ............................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 PAPER PATH................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT............................................................................................... 1-4
1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS CONFIGURATION ..................................... 1-4
1.2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND OPTIONS................................................... 1-4
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... 1-5
2. INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 2-1

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS............................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 MACHINE DIMENSIONS................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................. 2-5
2.2 WHO INSTALLS THE PERIPHERALS AND OPTIONS .............................................. 2-5
2.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION ............................................................................... 2-6
2.3.1 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART........................................................................ 2-6
2.3.2 ACCESSORY CHECK ..................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................................ 2-9
2.3.4 CHECK IMAGE QUALITY / SETTINGS ......................................................... 2-16
2.3.5 SECURITY SETTINGS .................................................................................. 2-18
2.3.6 AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (ARFU) SETTINGS .......................... 2-35
2.3.7 MOVING THE MACHINE ............................................................................... 2-42
2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3240 (M494-17, -21)............................................................ 2-43
2.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-43
2.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 2-43
2.5 LCIT PB3260 (M496-17, -27) ................................................................................... 2-48
2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-48
2.6 LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27).................................................................................... 2-56
2.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-56
2.7 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ............................................................................ 2-65
M0AN i SM
2.7.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 2-66
2.7.2 HEATER BOARD........................................................................................... 2-66
2.7.3 PCU HEATER................................................................................................ 2-73
2.7.4 TRAY HEATER FOR MAIN UNIT ................................................................... 2-81
2.7.5 TRAY HEATER FOR PAPER FEED UNIT PB3240 ........................................ 2-83
2.7.6 TRAY HEATER FOR LCIT PB3260 ................................................................ 2-86
2.8 BRIDGE UNIT BU3070 (D685-18) ........................................................................... 2-88
2.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-88
2.9 INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT FD3000 (M482-17).................................................. 2-94
2.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................... 2-94
2.9.3 WHEN ATTACHING A FINISHER DOWNSTREAM FROM THE INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD
UNIT 2-113
2.10 FINISHER SR3230 (D3BA-17, -21) ................................................................. 2-114
2.10.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-114
2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................... 2-115
2.10.3 ATTACHING A SUPPORT TRAY.................................................................. 2-121
2.11OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE M25 (D3CJ-01) .................................................... 2-123
2.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-124
2.12 PUNCH UNIT PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02) ...................................................... 2-134
2.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-134
2.13 FINISHER SR3210 (D3B8-17, -21).................................................................. 2-147
2.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-147
2.13.3 ATTACHING A PROOF SUPPORT TRAY .................................................... 2-158
2.13.4 STAPLELESS STAPLER INITIAL SETTINGS .............................................. 2-159
2.14 PUNCH UNIT PU3050..................................................................................... 2-160
2.14.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-161
2.15 MAIL BOX CS3010 (M481-17)......................................................................... 2-171
2.15.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-171
2.16 ATTENTION LIGHT AL3000 (M500-36) ........................................................... 2-196
2.16.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................................ 2-196
2.16.3 INDICATOR BEHAVIOR .............................................................................. 2-207
SM ii M0AN
2.17 NFC CARD READER TYPE P11 (M512-18) .................................................... 2-207
2.17.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-207
2.18 EXTERNAL NFC CARD READER BRACKET TYPE P11 (M512-17) ............... 2-218
2.18.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-218
2.19 INTERNAL OPTIONS ...................................................................................... 2-228
2.20 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 (D3C0-17) .................................. 2-229
2.20.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-229
2.21 IEEE 802.11A/B/G/N INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BR-01) ...................... 2-231
2.21.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-231
2.21.3 USER TOOL SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11A/B/G/N .................................... 2-235
2.21.4 SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11 WIRELESS LAN .......................... 2-236
2.22 HDD OPTION TYPE P13 (M513-19) ............................................................... 2-236
2.22.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................................ 2-236
2.23 EXTENDED USB BOARD TYPE M19 (D3BS-01) ............................................ 2-240
2.23.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................................ 2-240
2.24 SD CARD OPTIONS ....................................................................................... 2-242
2.24.1 SD CARD SLOTS ........................................................................................ 2-242
2.24.2 LIST OF SLOTS USED................................................................................ 2-242
2.25 SD CARD APPLI MOVE .................................................................................. 2-242
2.25.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 2-242
2.25.2 MOVE EXEC ............................................................................................... 2-244
2.25.3 UNDO EXEC ............................................................................................... 2-246
2.26 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE P13 (M513-22, -23, -24) ...................................... 2-247
2.26.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-247
2.26.2 OVERVIEW OF POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE P13 (ADOBE PS) .................. 2-247
2.26.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (ADOBE PS) ............................................... 2-248
2.27 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE P13 (M513-09, -10, -11) ......................... 2-251
2.27.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-251
2.28 VM CARD TYPE P13 (M513-25, -26, -27) ....................................................... 2-252
2.28.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-252
2.29 IPDS UNIT TYPE P13 (M513-13, -14, -15) ...................................................... 2-253
M0AN iii SM
2.29.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................................. 2-253
2.30 @REMOTE SETTINGS ................................................................................... 2-255
2.31 OPERATION GUIDANCE FOR USERS........................................................... 2-260
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 3-1

3.1 PM PARTS SETTINGS .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OF THE PM PARTS ...................................... 3-1
3.1.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS .................................................... 3-3
3.2 PM PARTS LIST ........................................................................................................ 3-4
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 4-1

4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH ................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 PUSH SWITCH ............................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 BEFOREHAND .......................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ....................................................................... 4-3
4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................................ 4-4
4.4.2 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... 4-4
4.4.3 QUICK REFERENCE FOR REMOVING COVERS .......................................... 4-6
4.4.4 FRONT COVER............................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.5 CONTROLLER COVER................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.6 LEFT UPPER COVER ..................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.7 LEFT REAR COVER ....................................................................................... 4-9
4.4.8 LEFT COVER .................................................................................................. 4-9
4.4.9 REAR LEFT COVER ..................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.10 REAR COVER ............................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.11 REAR LOWER GAP COVER......................................................................... 4-12
4.4.12 REAR LOWER COVER ................................................................................. 4-12
4.4.13 RIGHT REAR COVER ................................................................................... 4-13
4.4.14 RIGHT UPPER COVER................................................................................. 4-14
4.4.15 RIGHT COVER.............................................................................................. 4-14
4.4.16 UPPER FRONT COVER ............................................................................... 4-16
4.4.17 MAIN POWER SWITCH COVER ................................................................... 4-17
4.4.18 PAPER EXIT TRAY........................................................................................ 4-18
4.4.19 PAPER EXIT COVER .................................................................................... 4-18
4.4.20 PAPER EXIT LOWER COVER ...................................................................... 4-19
4.4.21 UPPER INNER COVER................................................................................. 4-20
4.4.22 PAPER EXIT FRONT COVER ....................................................................... 4-21
4.4.23 TOP RIGHT COVER...................................................................................... 4-21
4.4.24 TOP REAR COVER ....................................................................................... 4-22
SM iv M0AN
4.4.25 INNER COVER.............................................................................................. 4-23
4.4.26 TONER SUPPLY HOUSING .......................................................................... 4-24
4.5 SMART OPERATION PANEL .................................................................................. 4-26
4.5.1 OPERATION PANEL UNIT ............................................................................ 4-26
4.5.2 INTERNAL PARTS ........................................................................................ 4-30
4.5.3 USB CABLE / HARNESS .............................................................................. 4-30
4.6 LASER UNIT............................................................................................................ 4-32
4.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION ....................................................................... 4-32
4.6.2 LASER UNIT ................................................................................................. 4-32
4.6.3 QUENCHING LAMP ...................................................................................... 4-36
4.6.4 PCL (PRE-CLEANING LIGHT) ...................................................................... 4-36
4.7 PCDU ...................................................................................................................... 4-37
4.7.1 PCDU ............................................................................................................ 4-37
4.7.2 PCU/DEVELOPMENT UNIT .......................................................................... 4-39
4.7.3 OPC DRUM ................................................................................................... 4-42
4.7.4 CHARGE ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER ..................................................... 4-43
4.7.5 PICK-OFF PAWLS ......................................................................................... 4-44
4.7.6 CLEANING BLADE........................................................................................ 4-45
4.7.7 DEVELOPER................................................................................................. 4-46
4.7.8 DEVELOPMENT FILTERS ............................................................................ 4-51
4.7.9 TD SENSOR.................................................................................................. 4-52
4.7.10 DEVELOPMENT MIXING AUGER BEARINGS .............................................. 4-53
4.7.11 DEVELOPMENT MIXING AUGER (L / R) ...................................................... 4-55
4.8 WASTE TONER ....................................................................................................... 4-57
4.8.1 WASTE TONER BOTTLE .............................................................................. 4-57
4.8.2 TONER COLLECTION FULL SENSOR ......................................................... 4-58
4.8.3 RECYCLING SHUTTER ................................................................................ 4-58
4.9 TRANSFER UNIT .................................................................................................... 4-61
4.9.1 TRANSFER UNIT .......................................................................................... 4-61
4.9.2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT ........................................................................... 4-63
4.9.3 ID SENSOR................................................................................................... 4-64
4.9.4 TRANSFER UNIT OPEN/CLOSED LED ........................................................ 4-65
4.9.5 TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR .......................................................... 4-66
4.9.6 FUSING ENTRANCE SENSOR ..................................................................... 4-66
4.9.7 TRANSFER UNIT OPEN/CLOSED SENSOR ................................................ 4-67
4.10 DRIVE UNIT ...................................................................................................... 4-67
4.10.1 DRUM/WASTE TONER MOTOR ................................................................... 4-67
4.10.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR.............................................................................. 4-68
4.10.3 FUSING MOTOR ........................................................................................... 4-68
M0AN v SM
4.10.4 PAPER EXIT MOTOR .................................................................................... 4-69
4.10.5 REGISTRATION MOTOR .............................................................................. 4-69
4.10.6 PAPER FEED MOTOR .................................................................................. 4-70
4.10.7 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................................. 4-70
4.10.8 TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR..................................................... 4-70
4.10.9 TONER HOPPER .......................................................................................... 4-71
4.10.10 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR ....................................................................... 4-73
4.11FUSING UNIT .......................................................................................................... 4-75
4.11.1 REPLACEMENT ............................................................................................ 4-75
4.11.2 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE............................................................. 4-77
4.11.3 FUSING EXIT GUIDE PLATE ........................................................................ 4-77
4.11.4 FUSING UPPER COVER .............................................................................. 4-78
4.11.5 FUSING LOWER COVER ............................................................................. 4-79
4.11.6 HEATING SLEEVE BELT UNIT...................................................................... 4-79
4.11.7 PRESSURE ROLLER, PRESSURE ROLLER BEARINGS AND PRESSURE ROLLER
IDLER GEARS......................................................................................................... 4-82
4.11.8 THERMOSTAT UNIT ..................................................................................... 4-84
4.11.9 FUSING ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSORS............................................. 4-85
4.11.10 PRESSURE ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSORS ................................ 4-85
4.11.11 FUSING THERMOPILES ........................................................................ 4-86
4.11.12 NOTES WHEN REASSEMBLING THE FUSING UNIT ............................ 4-86
4.12 PAPER EXIT ..................................................................................................... 4-87
4.12.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT......................................................................................... 4-87
4.12.2 PAPER EXIT SWITCHING SOLENOID.......................................................... 4-88
4.12.3 PAPER EXIT SENSOR .................................................................................. 4-89
4.12.4 REVERSE SENSOR ..................................................................................... 4-90
4.12.5 PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR ........................................................................ 4-91
4.12.6 REVERSE MOTOR ....................................................................................... 4-91
4.12.7 FUSING EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................ 4-93
4.12.8 INVERTER GUIDE COVER SENSOR ........................................................... 4-93
4.13 PAPER FEED .................................................................................................... 4-95
4.13.1 PAPER FEED UNIT ....................................................................................... 4-95
4.13.2 PAPER DUST COLLECTION UNIT ............................................................... 4-99
4.13.3 PICK-UP ROLLER, PAPER FEED ROLLER, SEPARATION ROLLER, TORQUE LIMITER
4-100
4.13.4 1ST / 2ND PAPER FEED TRAY LIFT MOTOR ............................................. 4-102
4.13.5 1ST / 2ND PAPER FEED SENSOR ............................................................. 4-103
4.13.6 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR ............................................................. 4-104
4.13.7 LIMIT SENSOR ........................................................................................... 4-105
SM vi M0AN
4.13.8 1ST PAPER END SENSOR / 2ND PAPER END SENSOR .......................... 4-105
4.13.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR .......................................................................... 4-106
4.14 DUPLEX UNIT................................................................................................. 4-107
4.14.1 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR ........................................................................ 4-107
4.14.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE MOTOR .................................................................... 4-108
4.14.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR .................................................................. 4-109
4.14.4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR ............................................................................. 4-111
4.15 BYPASS TRAY UNIT ....................................................................................... 4-111
4.15.1 BYPASS TRAY ............................................................................................ 4-111
4.15.2 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR ................................................................. 4-113
4.15.3 BYPASS PICK-UP ROLLER ........................................................................ 4-115
4.15.4 BYPASS PAPER FEED ROLLER ................................................................ 4-115
4.15.5 BYPASS SEPARATION ROLLER ................................................................ 4-116
4.15.6 TORQUE LIMITER ...................................................................................... 4-116
4.15.7 BYPASS WIDTH SENSOR .......................................................................... 4-117
4.15.8 BYPASS LENGTH SENSOR ....................................................................... 4-119
4.16 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS ............................................................................. 4-120
4.16.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 4-120
4.16.2 CONTROLLER BOX COVER ...................................................................... 4-120
4.16.3 IPU .............................................................................................................. 4-121
4.16.4 BCU............................................................................................................. 4-122
4.16.5 CONTROLLER BOARD............................................................................... 4-124
4.16.6 HVPS .......................................................................................................... 4-130
4.16.7 PSU ............................................................................................................. 4-130
4.16.8 CONTROLLER BOX.................................................................................... 4-132
4.16.9 TEMPERATURE SENSOR .......................................................................... 4-135
4.16.10 DC SW BOARD..................................................................................... 4-136
4.17 FANS/FILTERS ............................................................................................... 4-136
4.17.1 ODOR FILTER............................................................................................. 4-136
4.17.2 PARTICULATE FILTER (EU/AA ONLY) ........................................................ 4-137
4.17.3 DUST FILTER.............................................................................................. 4-138
4.17.4 DEVELOPMENT EXHAUST FAN ................................................................ 4-139
4.17.5 PAPER EXIT COOLING FAN ....................................................................... 4-140
4.17.6 FUSING FAN ............................................................................................... 4-141
4.17.7 DEVELOPMENT BEARING COOLING FAN ................................................ 4-142
4.17.8 PSU COOLING FAN .................................................................................... 4-144
4.17.9 FRONT DEVELOPMENT COOLING FAN.................................................... 4-144
4.18 ADJUSTMENT AFTER REPLACEMENT ......................................................... 4-145
4.18.1 TEST PATTERN PRINTING......................................................................... 4-145
M0AN vii SM
4.18.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................ 4-146
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................................................. 5-1

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE .................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 ENTERING SP MODE ..................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 EXITING SP MODE ......................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 TYPES OF SP MODES ................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.4 REMARKS....................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2 SP MODE TABLES .................................................................................................... 5-6
5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SD CARD) ............................................................................. 5-6
5.3.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.2 FIRMWARE TYPE ........................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.3 PROCEDURE.................................................................................................. 5-7
5.3.4 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING ...................................................... 5-12
5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE) ......................................... 5-16
5.4.2 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION ............................................................... 5-16
5.5 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SMART FIRMWARE UPDATE) ............................................ 5-16
5.5.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-17
5.5.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE .................................................................................... 5-17
5.5.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE) ................................................... 5-20
5.5.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD ................................................................................. 5-27
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE (AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE)............................... 5-29
5.6.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-29
5.6.2 DOWNLOADING AND UPDATING PROCESS .............................................. 5-31
5.6.3 CHECKING THE ARFU RESULT ................................................................... 5-36
5.6.4 CHECKING THE RESULT USING THE LOGGING DATA .............................. 5-36
5.6.5 RELATED SP ................................................................................................ 5-36
5.7 UPDATING JAVAVM ................................................................................................ 5-39
5.7.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-39
5.7.2 DEACTIVATING SDK APPLICATIONS AND REMOVING THE VM CARD ..... 5-39
5.7.3 UPDATING JAVAVM AND INSERTING THE VM CARD ................................. 5-42
5.7.4 ACTIVATING SDK APPLICATIONS ............................................................... 5-43
5.8 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ..................................................................... 5-43
5.8.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD ................................ 5-43
5.8.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM ................................................. 5-44
5.9 UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT .............................................................................. 5-46
5.9.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-46
5.9.2 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT .......................................................................... 5-46
5.9.3 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT .......................................................................... 5-49
SM viii M0AN
5.9.4 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS ..................... 5-51
5.10 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ......................................................... 5-52
5.10.1 INFORMATION LIST ..................................................................................... 5-52
5.10.2 DOWNLOAD ................................................................................................. 5-53
5.10.3 UPLOAD........................................................................................................ 5-54
5.11CAPTURING THE DEVICE LOGS ........................................................................... 5-55
5.11.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-55
5.11.2 STORING THE DEVICE LOGS ON AN SD CARD (WHEN THE HDD OPTION IS NOT
INSTALLED) ............................................................................................................ 5-57
5.11.3 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA OPERATION PANEL ........................ 5-57
5.11.4 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA WEB IMAGE MONITOR ................... 5-61
5.12 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION.................................................................. 5-63
5.12.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 5-63
5.12.2 PROCEDURE................................................................................................ 5-63
5.12.3 NOTES ON USING THE SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION....................... 5-66
5.12.4 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS ................................................... 5-66
5.12.5 ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................... 5-67
5.13 CARD SAVE FUNCTION ................................................................................... 5-67
5.13.1 CARD SAVE .................................................................................................. 5-67
5.13.2 PROCEDURE................................................................................................ 5-67
5.13.3 ERROR MESSAGES..................................................................................... 5-71
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................... 6-1

6.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ....................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ........................................................................ 6-1
6.1.2 SC LOGGING .................................................................................................. 6-2
6.1.3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT .............................................................................. 6-2
6.1.4 SC MANUAL REBOOT .................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.5 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSIS OUTLINE.................................................. 6-5
6.1.6 HDD-RELATED MESSAGE ............................................................................. 6-6
6.2 LIST OF AUTOMATIC REBOOT TARGET SC............................................................ 6-7
6.2.1 ENGINE SC..................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.2 CONTROLLER SC ........................................................................................ 6-10
6.3 SC CODE CLASSIFICATION................................................................................... 6-11
6.4 SC TABLES: SC2XX (IMAGE WRITING) ................................................................. 6-11
6.4.1 SC202-00 TO SC272-10 ................................................................................ 6-11
6.5 SC TABLES: SC3XX (IMAGE PROCESSING 1: CHARGE, DEVELOPMENT, AROUND THE
DRUM) ........................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.5.1 SC302-00 TO SC396-01 ................................................................................ 6-15
M0AN ix SM
6.6 SC TABLES: SC4XX (IMAGE PROCESSING 2: TRANSFER/ SEPARATION, CLEANING AND
OTHERS) ....................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.6.1 SC440-00 TO SC498-00 ................................................................................ 6-18
6.7 SC TABLES: SC5XX (PAPER FEED, DUPLEX, TRANSPORT, FUSING AND OTHERS)6-20
6.7.1 SC501-01 TO SC589-02 ................................................................................ 6-20
6.8 SC TABLES: SC6XX (COMMUNICATION AND OTHERS)....................................... 6-49
6.8.1 SC621-01 TO SC687-00 ................................................................................ 6-49
6.9 SC TABLES: SC7XX (PERIPHERALS) .................................................................... 6-59
6.9.1 SC720-03 TO SC792-00 ................................................................................ 6-59
6.10 SC TABLES: SC8XX (CONTROLLER) .............................................................. 6-74
6.10.1 SC816-01 TO SC877-00 ................................................................................ 6-74
6.11SC TABLES: SC9XX (OTHERS) .............................................................................. 6-87
6.11.1 SC900-00 TO SC998-00 ................................................................................ 6-87
6.12 JAM DETECTION.............................................................................................. 6-92
6.12.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY ................................................................................... 6-92
6.12.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES ............................................................ 6-92
6.12.3 SENSOR LOCATIONS ................................................................................ 6-100
6.12.4 PAPER SIZE CODES .................................................................................. 6-101
6.13 .............................................................................................................................. 6-101
6.14 OTHER PROBLEMS ....................................................................................... 6-102
6.14.1 WHEN SC670 IS DISPLAYED ..................................................................... 6-102
6.14.2 WHEN SC672 (CONTROLLER START UP ERROR) IS DISPLAYED .......... 6-102
6.14.3 FINISHER REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ................................................ 6-111
6.14.4 STACKING PROBLEM AT THE FINISHER SR3210 .................................... 6-115
6.14.5 FINISHER JOGGER PROBLEM FOR FINISHER SR3210 (D3B8) .............. 6-118
6.14.6 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SHEETS FOR STAPLING AND WHAT HAPPENS WHEN THE
JOB HAS TOO MANY PAGES ............................................................................... 6-119
6.14.7 FUSING OFFSET OCCURS AT THE EDGE OR CENTER OF THE PAPER 6-120
6.14.8 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR TONER DENSITY ........................................... 6-123
6.14.9 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR BLOTS ON MIDDLE THICK GLOSSY OR COATED PAPER
6-124
6.15 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS.......................................................................... 6-125
7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................... 7-1

7.1 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS7-1
7.1.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN SIMILAR MODELS AND PREVIOUS MODELS ... 7-1
7.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................................................. 7-5
7.2.1 PAPER FEED UNIT ......................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.2 LASER UNIT / PCDU....................................................................................... 7-6
SM x M0AN
7.2.3 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................................. 7-7
7.2.4 WASTE TONER BOTTLE ................................................................................ 7-8
7.2.5 DUPLEX/BYPASS UNIT .................................................................................. 7-9
7.2.6 PAPER EXIT/REVERSE UNIT ....................................................................... 7-10
7.2.7 AIR FLOW ..................................................................................................... 7-11
7.2.8 DRIVE UNIT .................................................................................................. 7-13
7.2.9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ...................................................................... 7-14
7.3 IMAGE PROCESSING............................................................................................. 7-15
7.3.1 STRUCTURAL BLOCK DIAGRAM ................................................................ 7-15
7.3.2 IPU MECHANISM .......................................................................................... 7-16
7.4 LASER EXPOSURE ................................................................................................ 7-16
7.4.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-16
7.4.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC).................................................................. 7-17
7.4.3 LD SAFETY SWITCH .................................................................................... 7-18
7.5 PCDU (PHOTO CONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT ............................................ 7-18
7.5.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-18
7.5.2 OPC DRUM DRIVE MECHANISM ................................................................. 7-19
7.5.3 DRUM CHARGE ........................................................................................... 7-20
7.5.4 DRUM CLEANING, TONER DISCARDING.................................................... 7-20
7.5.5 ID SENSOR................................................................................................... 7-21
7.6 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................................... 7-21
7.6.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-21
7.6.2 DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM ..................................................................... 7-22
7.6.3 DEVELOPMENT BIAS................................................................................... 7-23
7.6.4 DRIVE ........................................................................................................... 7-23
7.6.5 TONER SUPPLY ........................................................................................... 7-24
7.6.6 TONER DENSITY CONTROL........................................................................ 7-25
7.6.7 TONER END DETECTION ............................................................................ 7-25
7.6.8 TONER END RECOVERY ............................................................................. 7-26
7.7 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION .............................................................................. 7-26
7.7.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-26
7.7.2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT CHARGE ........................................................... 7-27
7.7.3 TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT AND RELEASE MECHANISM ................... 7-27
7.7.4 NEW UNIT DETECTION OF THE TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT ...................... 7-28
7.8 FUSING ................................................................................................................... 7-29
7.8.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-29
7.8.2 MECHANISM................................................................................................. 7-30
7.9 WASTE TONER ....................................................................................................... 7-35
7.9.1 TONER DISCARDING ................................................................................... 7-36
M0AN xi SM
7.9.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLE .............................................................................. 7-38
7.10 FEED/ TRANSPORT PART ............................................................................... 7-40
7.10.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-40
7.10.2 FEED / TRANSPORT PART .......................................................................... 7-40
7.10.3 BYPASS FEED SECTION ............................................................................. 7-48
7.10.4 DUPLEX SECTION ....................................................................................... 7-50
7.10.5 PAPER EXIT UNIT......................................................................................... 7-52
7.10.6 PAPER PATH AND SENSOR LOCATIONS.................................................... 7-55
7.11AIR FLOWS (FAN CONTROL)................................................................................. 7-56
7.11.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-56
7.11.2 MECHANISM................................................................................................. 7-61
7.12 ELECTRICAL PARTS ........................................................................................ 7-64
7.12.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM ......................................................................................... 7-64
7.12.2 BOARD OUTLINE ......................................................................................... 7-65
7.12.3 FEED TRAY DEHUMIDIFIER HEATER, PCDU ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER7-65
7.13 ................................................................................................................................ 7-66
7.14 ONE-WAY CLUTCHES...................................................................................... 7-67
7.14.1 PAPER FEED/BYPASS ................................................................................. 7-67
7.14.2 DUPLEX ........................................................................................................ 7-67
7.15 PROCESS CONTROL....................................................................................... 7-68
7.15.1 IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL (PROCESS CONTROL) .................................. 7-68
7.15.2 MECHANISM................................................................................................. 7-71
7.16 ENERGY SAVE ................................................................................................. 7-73
7.16.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES ............................................................................. 7-73
7.16.2 POWER STATES OF THIS MACHINE ........................................................... 7-75
7.16.3 VERIFICATION OF UP TIME FOR EACH ENERGY SAVING STATE ............ 7-77
7.16.4 CHECKING THE UP TIME BY DEVICE STATE ............................................. 7-77
7.16.5 RECOMMENDATION .................................................................................... 7-78
7.17 ADOBE PS VS. CLONE PS............................................................................... 7-78
7.17.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 7-78
7.17.2 HOW TO DISTINGUISH ADOBE PS FROM CLONE PS................................ 7-79
7.17.3 DIFFERENCE IN DEVICE FONTS ................................................................ 7-82
7.17.4 DIFFERENCES IN DRIVER FUNCTIONS ..................................................... 7-88
SM xii M0AN
PRODUCT INFORMATION
Product Overview
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
Information
0BProduct
1.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
No. Description No. Description

1 Paper Exit Unit 6 Vertical Transport
2 Fusing Unit 7 Paper Feed Unit
3 OPC Drum 8 Laser Unit
4 Duplex Unit 9 Toner Supply Unit
5 Bypass Tray Unit
M0AN 1-1 SM
Product Overview
1.1.2 PAPER PATH

1 LCIT 3 Finisher
2 LCIT (Tandem Tray) 4 Internal Multi-Fold Unit
SM 1-2 M0AN
Product Overview
Information
0BProduct
1 Mail Box 3 Paper Feed Unit
2 LCIT 4 Internal Multi-Fold Unit
M0AN 1-3 SM
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration
1.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1 Paper exit motor 8 Development motor
2 Reverse motor 9 Vertical transport motor
3 Fusing motor 10 Duplex/bypass motor
4 Drum/waste toner motor 11 Paper feed motor
5 Duplex entrance motor 12 Paper feed tray lift motor
6 Transfer roller contact motor 13 Polygon motor
7 Registration motor 14 Toner supply motor
1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS CONFIGURATION

1.2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND OPTIONS
SM 1-4 M0AN
Specifications
Information
0BProduct
No. Product Name Code
1 LCIT PB3260 M496-17,27
2 LCIT RT3030 D696-17,27
3 Paper Feed Unit PB3240 M494-17
4 Bridge Unit BU3070 D685-18
5 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 M482-17
6 Mail Box CS3010 M481-17
7 Finisher SR3210 D3B8-17
8 Finisher SR3230 D3BA-17
9 Output Jogger Unit Type M25 D3CJ-01
10 Attention Light AL3000 M500-36
- External NFC Card Reader Bracket Type P11 M512-17
- NFC Card Reader Type P11 M512-18
- Punch Unit PU3060 D706-00,01,02
- Punch Unit PU3050 D717-17,27,28
- Extended USB Board Type M19 D3BS-01
- IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n Interface Unit Type M19 D3BR-01
- IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 D3C0-17
- VM Card Type P13 M513-25,26,27
- XPS Direct Print Option Type P13 M513-09,10,11
- IPDS Unit Type P13 M513-13,14,15
- HDD Option Type P13 M513-19
- PostScript3 Unit Type P13 M513-22,23,24
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS
See “Appendices” for the following information:
• General Specifications
• Supported Paper Sizes
M0AN 1-5 SM
Specifications
• Software Accessories
• Optional Equipment
SM 1-6 M0AN
INSTALLATION
Installation Requirements
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1BInstallation
1. Temperature Range: 10 °C to 32 °C (50 °F to 89.6 °F)
2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.)
4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 3 times/hr/person
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3
6. Avoid an area which is exposed to sudden temperature changes. This includes:
• Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.

• Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater.
7. Do not place the machine in an area where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level. (In NA, it can be
installed only up to 2,500m (8,202 ft.))
9. Place the copier on a strong and level base. (Inclination on any side should be no more than 5 mm.)
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
M0AN 2-1 SM
2.1.2 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Machine Level
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Place the machine near the power source, and provide clearance as shown:
2.1.3 MACHINE DIMENSIONS

Main frame
W x D x H: 587 x 653 x 720 mm (23.2 x 25.7 x 28.3 inches)
SM 2-2 M0AN
With peripherals
Configuration 1:
SP 8400DN with Mail Box CS3010, Bridge Unit BU3070, Finisher SR3210, Paper Feed Unit PB3240,
and LCIT RT3030.
1BInstallation
A 1569.3mm G 587mm (23.11")
(61.78")
B 1105.3mm H When the 1000-sheet finisher is installed: 575 to 658mm (22.63 to
(43.51") 25.98")
When the 3000-sheet finisher is installed: 657 to 756mm (25.86 to
29.76")
C 967mm (38.07") I When the 1000-sheet finisher is installed: 575mm (22.63")
When the 3000-sheet finisher is installed: 657mm (25.86")
D 290mm (11.41") J When the 1000-sheet finisher is installed: 1045mm (41.14")
E 1683mm (66.25") K When the 1000-sheet finisher is installed: 986mm (38.81")
F 340mm (13.38") - -
M0AN 2-3 SM
Configuration 2:
SP 8400DN with Mail Box CS3010 (with stabilizers) and Paper Feed Unit PB3240.
L 917mm (36.10")
M 587mm (23.11")
N 765mm (30.11")
O 653mm (25.71")
Configuration 3:
SP 8400DN with Paper Feed Unit PB3240.
A 1105.3mm (43.51") L 668mm (26.29")

B 967mm (38.07") M 587mm (23.11")
- - N 738mm (29.05")
- - O 653mm (25.71")
SM 2-4 M0AN
Who Installs the Peripherals and Options
2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
• Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.

• Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.
• Ground the machine.
1BInstallation
Input voltage level
Destination Power supply Rated current Permissible voltage fluctuation
voltage consumption
NA 120 to 127V 12A or more Image quality guaranteed: 108V(120V-10%) to
138V(127V+8.66%)
Machine operation guaranteed: 102V(120V-
15%) to 138V(127V+8.66%)
EU 220 to 240V 8A or more Image quality guaranteed: 198V(220V-10%) to
264V(240V+10%)
AA
Machine operation guaranteed: 187V(220-
15%) to 276V(240V+15%)
2.2 WHO INSTALLS THE PERIPHERALS AND OPTIONS

U: User installation, S: Service installation
Peripherals and Options Remarks
Paper Feed Unit PB3240 (2-Tray) U
LCIT PB3260 (2000 sheets) U
LCIT RT3030 (1500 sheets) S
Mail Box CS3010 (4-Bin) S
Bridge Unit BU3070 S
Finisher SR3210 (1000 sheets) S
Finisher SR3230 (3000 sheets) S
Output Jogger Unit Type M25 S
Punch Unit PU3050 S
Punch Unit PU3060 S
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 S
PostScript3 Unit Type P13 U
XPS Direct Print Option Type P13 U
IPDS Unit Type P13 U
VM CARD Type P13 U
HDD Option Type P13 U
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n Interface Unit Type M19 U
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 U
Extended USB Board Type M19 U
External NFC Card Reader Bracket Type P11 S
NFC Card Reader Type P11 S
Attention Light AL3000 S
If you want to use three or more SD card options, you can merge multiple SD card applications. (SD
Card Appli Move)
M0AN 2-5 SM
Main Machine Installation
2.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

2.3.1 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART
SM 2-6 M0AN
When installing the Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 and the Mail Box CS3010 at the same time, first
install the base plate [A] of the internal multi-fold unit, then install the mailbox [B]. Then, finish installing
the internal multi-fold unit.
1BInstallation
Put the machine on the paper feed tray (2 trays) or the LCT (tandem tray) first, then install the machine
and other options.
You need Paper Feed Unit PB3240 (M494) or LCIT PB3260 (M496) to align the paper transport path if
you want to install the following peripherals.
• Finisher SR3210 (D3B8-17)

• Finisher SR3230 (D3BA-17)
• LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27)
2.3.2 ACCESSORY CHECK

Description Q'ty
NA EU/AA
Power Supply Cord 1 1
Rear Lower Cover 1 1
(Used when installing an optional paper tray unit.)
NFC Tag 1 1
Caution: NFC Tag 1 1
Decal: Paper Tray/Paper Size 1 1
Decal: Bluetooth 1 1
Decal: Inkjet (EN) 1 1
Decal: Inkjet (FR) 1 1
Decal: Inkjet (ES) 1 1
Decal: Inkjet (BR) 1 0
Decal: Inkjet (DE) 0 1
Decal: Inkjet (IT) 0 1
Decal: Inkjet (NL) 0 1
Decal: Inkjet (PT) 0 1
Seal: Caution (21 Languages) 1 1
Warranty 1 0
Caution: FCC 1 0
Caution: CAN 1 0
Caution: CE 0 1
M0AN 2-7 SM
Description Q'ty
NA EU/AA
Caution: Cheetah (TAI) 1 0
Caution: Cheetah (GB) 0 1
Sheet: EULA (21 Languages) 1 1
Sheet: Customer Registration 1 0
Sheet: QIG (10 Languages) 1 1
Sheet: QIG (11 Languages) 0 1
Sheet: Notes for Users (Security) 1 1
Sheet: Airprint 1 0
Sheet: Airprint (9 Languages) 0 1
Sheet: Airprint (10 Languages) 0 1
Sheet: Helpdesk 1 0
User manual: Read This First 1 1
User manual: Start Guide 1 1
CD-ROM 1 1
SM 2-8 M0AN
2.3.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
• Be sure to secure space around the machine in advance.

• The power cord is placed under the machine, so be sure to take it out.
Removal of Packing Materials and Shipping Retainers
1BInstallation
1. Remove the shipping box [A].
2. Remove the retainer [A] at the lower front right before lifting up the machine, because the handle for
lifting the machine is hidden by the retainer [A].
3. Hold the handles located on both sides (blue circles), and then lift it slowly. Lifting it carelessly or
M0AN 2-9 SM
dropping it may cause an injury.
• The printer weighs approximately 57 kg (125.7 lb.). Four or more people are required to
lift the printer.
• Do not lift by holding the operation panel, because this might break the operation panel.
• Do not lift by holding the area shown below. Doing so may damage the exterior, and you
may drop the printer.
SM 2-10 M0AN
4. Remove the orange tape and retainers on the outside.
1BInstallation
5. Open the front cover.
6. Remove the orange tape.
7. Close the front cover.

8. Pull out the 1st/2nd paper feed trays, and then remove the orange tape.
M0AN 2-11 SM
Pulling out the Feeler of the Paper Exit Full Sensor
• When a finisher is installed, the feeler does not need to be pulled out.
1. Pull the sensor feeler [A] out.
Checking the Position of the Paper Exit Feeler

Check the following points for the paper exit feeler [A] installed at the paper exit.
• It can move in line with the ejection of paper.

• It holds contact with the surface of the ejected paper and is still movable.
Paper will get jammed in the following cases.
• The paper exit feeler does not function due to obstacles (such as cables).
• The paper exit feeler does not function when the paper is pulled out and pushed back again.
SM 2-12 M0AN
Attaching the Decals

1. Attach the tray number and paper size decals provided with the machine accessories.
1BInstallation
No. Name
[A] : Upper Tray Number
[B] : Lower Paper Size
2. Attach the inkjet decals provided with the machine accessories.
M0AN 2-13 SM
3. Attach the NFC tag and Bluetooth decal provided with the machine accessories to the operation
panel.
Toner Bottle Installation
In this machine, the PCDU seal is automatically wound in on turning the power on, so there is no
PCDU-related task such as pulling out the seal.

2. Shake the toner bottle (Bk) 7 to 8 times.
3. Remove the toner bottle protection cap [A].
SM 2-14 M0AN
4. Push the toner bottle [A] into the machine slowly.
1BInstallation
6. Connect the power cord to the machine.
• Use the power cord that is provided with the machine. Do not use any other power cord.
Also, do not use an extension cord.
7. Turn ON the main power.
Do not execute the initial toner supply with SP mode, because it is not required. If you perform the
initial toner supply with SP mode, the toner density in the development unit may increase. This will
cause abnormal images and machine contamination.
M0AN 2-15 SM
2.3.4 CHECK IMAGE QUALITY / SETTINGS
Loading Paper
2. The paper size is detected automatically.
1. Pull out the paper feed tray slowly until it stops.
2. Load the paper.
3. While pressing the release lever, adjust the side fences [A] to the paper size to be set.
4. Set the end fence to fit the paper size that will be used.
Paper Settings
If necessary, adjust the registration for the paper feed tray.
Print the test pattern (14: Trimming Area) with SP2-109-003 for the registration adjustment. For details,
see Test Pattern Printing.
1-002-001 Side-to-Side Registration By-pass Tray [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
1-002-002 Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 1 [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
1-002-006 Side-to-Side Registration Duplex [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
1-002-007 Side-to-Side Registration Large Capacity Tray [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
• To enter the SP mode, there are two ways to display the number keyboard on screen;
1. Press the "Printer (Classic)" icon on the home screen.
2. Press and hold the button [A] located at the left side of the operation panel and "Check Status
SM 2-16 M0AN
[B]" at the same time, until the number keyboard is displayed.
1BInstallation
• For details of the key code to enter the SP mode, ask your supervisor.
SP descriptions
• SP1-002 (Side-to-Side Registration)

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each mode and
tray.
Increasing a value: The image is moved towards the rear edge of the paper.
Decreasing a value: The image is moved towards the front edge of the paper.
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract

Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service contract.
SP No. Function Default
SP5-930-001 Enables or disables the meter click charge setting. ("1" ON, "0" "0": OFF
Meter Click Charge OFF)
When enabled ("1" ON):
• The counter menu appears immediately after you push the
"counter" key.
• You can print the counter from the counter menu.
When disabled ("0" OFF):
• The counter menu does not appear.
• To check the counter, the technician must print the SMC report
(SP 5-990).
SP5-930-010 Enables or disables the PM alert for the PCU. If this SP is "1": No
enabled, an alert message is displayed when the PCU needs to alert
Meter Click
be replaced.
Charge: PCU
M0AN 2-17 SM
SP No. Function Default

SP5-930-014 Enables or disables the PM alert for the transfer roller unit. "1": No
alert
Meter Click If this SP is enabled, an alert message is displayed when the
Charge: Transfer transfer roller unit needs to be replaced.
Roller Unit
SP5-930-016 Enables or disables the PM alert for the fusing unit. "1": No
alert
Meter Click If this SP is enabled, an alert message is displayed when the
Charge: fusing unit needs to be replaced.
Fusing Unit
SP5-104-001 Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT paper. "1":
(SSP) Double
A3/DLT double counting
count
SP5-812-001 and - -001: shows or sets the telephone number of the service representative.
002 -002: shows or sets the fax number of the service station. The number is
Service Tel: printed on the counter list when the "Meter Click Charge" is enabled. Users can
Telephone / send the counter list as a fax message.
Facsimile
Installation is now completed.
2.3.5 SECURITY SETTINGS
Configuring Administrator Authentication

About Administrator and Supervisor
Administrator
Their main role is to specify the settings for operating the machine. Their access privileges depend on
the administrator type. Administrators cannot perform normal operations, such as printing.
There are 4 types of administrators for the machine: user administrator, machine administrator, network
administrator, and file administrator.
In the factory default, four administrator's privileges assign to a "Administrator 1".
Supervisor
There is only one supervisor. The supervisor can specify each administrator's password.
Enabling Administrator Authentication
To specify administrator authentication, set "Administrator Authentication Management" to [On]. If this

setting is enabled, administrators can configure only settings allocated to them.
1. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.

2. Flick the screen to the left, and then press "User Tools" .
3. Press [Machine Features].
4. Press [System Settings].
5. Press [Administrator Tools].
SM 2-18 M0AN
6. Press [Next].
7. Press [Administrator Authentication Management].
1BInstallation
8. Press [User Management], [Machine Management], [Network Management], or [File Management]
to select which settings to manage.
9. Set "Admin. Authentication" to [On].

"Available Settings" appears.
M0AN 2-19 SM
10. Select the settings to manage from "Available Settings".
The selected settings will be unavailable to users.

The available settings depend on the administrator type.
To specify administrator authentication for more than one category, repeat Steps 7 to 9.
11. Press [OK].

12. Press [User Tools] ( ) on the top right screen.
13. Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom of the screen in the center.
Changing Administrator/Supervisor's User Name and Password
If you forget an administrator login user name or password, you must specify a new password using the
supervisor's privilege.
Be sure not to forget the supervisor login user name and password. If you forget them, a machine will
have to return to its default state. This will result in the machine setting data, counters, logs and other
data being lost.
1. Log in as an administrator from the control panel.

To changing the supervisor’s login user name or password, log in as the supervisor.
The default login user name for administrator is "admin" and "supervisor" for the supervisor. No
login password is set up.

5. Press [Next].
SM 2-20 M0AN
6. Press [Program / Change Administrator].
1BInstallation
7. Press [Change] under "Administrator 1".
To change supervisor’s user name and password, press [Change] under "Supervisor".
8. Press [Change] for "Login User Name".

9. Enter the new login user name, and then press [OK].
M0AN 2-21 SM
10. Press [Change] for "Login Password".

11. Enter the new login password, and then press [OK].
12. Enter the new login password for confirmation again, and then press [OK].
13. Press [OK] twice.
You will be automatically logged out.
Registering and Changing the Administrator
1. Log in as an administrator from the control panel.

5. Press [Next].
6. Press [Program / Change Administrator].
7. In the line for the administrator whose privileges you want to specify, press [Administrator 1],
[Administrator 2], [Administrator 3] or [Administrator 4], and then press [Change].
When allocating admistrators' privileges to one person each, select one administrator under each
category as shown below.
SM 2-22 M0AN
1BInstallation
To combine multiple administrator privileges, assign multiple administrator privileges to a single
administrator.
For example, to assign machine administrator privileges and user administrator privileges to
[Administrator 1], press [Administrator 1] in the lines for the machine administrator and the user
administrator.
8. Press [Change] for "Login User Name".

9. Enter the login user name, and then press [OK].
10. Press [Change] for "Login Password".
11. Enter the login password, and then press [OK].
12. Enter the login password for confirmation again, and then press [OK].
13. Press [OK] twice.
You will be automatically logged out.
Security Function Installation

The machine contains the Security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit) in the
controller board.
If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD
Encryption by selecting "Format All Data" from "System Settings" on the operation panel.
• This method is recommended because there is no user data on the hard drive yet (Address
Book data, image data, etc.).
If the customer wishes to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on a machine
that is already running, it is recommended to activate the unit by selecting "All Data" from "System
Settings" on the operation panel.
M0AN 2-23 SM
• Selecting "All Data" will preserve the data that has already been saved to the HDD. (If "Format
All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the HDD up to that point will be erased).
Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes to
complete before you can begin using the machine.
• If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the HDD, or of the encryption key is
changed, this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
Make sure that the machine's main power is not turned off while the encryption process is in progress.
If the machine's main power is turned off while the encryption process is in progress, the HDD will be
damaged and all data on it will be unusable.
Print the encryption key and keep the encryption key (which is printed as a paper sheet).
Keep the encryption key in a safe place. If the encryption key is lost and is needed, the controller board,
HDD and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time.
• "NVRAM" mentioned in here means the NVRAM on the Controller Board.

• "NVRAM" or EEPROM on the BCU has nothing to do with this.
Please use the following procedure when the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption are
reinstalled.
Data Overwrite Security

Before You Begin the Procedure
1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be
changed before you do the installation procedure.
2. Make sure that "Admin. Authentication" is on.

[User Tools] icon -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] ->
[Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Admin. Authentication]
If this setting is off, tell the customer this setting must be on before you do the installation
procedure.
SM 2-24 M0AN
3. Make sure that "Administrator Tools" is enabled (selected).

[User Tools] icon -> [Machine Features] -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] ->
[Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected)
before you do the installation procedure.
Installation Procedure
1BInstallation
1. Connect the network cable if it needs to be connected.
3. Go into the SP mode and push "EXECUTE" in SP5-878-001.
4. Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch. Then turn off the main power switch.
5. Turn on the machine power.
6. Do SP5-990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise, the
latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
7. Go into the User Tools mode, and select [Machine Features] [System Settings] [Administrator
Tools] [Auto Erase Memory Setting] [On].
8. Exit the User Tools mode.
Icon This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks
[1] during overwriting.
Icon This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.

[2]
9. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon appears.
M0AN 2-25 SM
10. Check the overwrite erase icon.

The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting.
The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
Using Auto Erase Memory
The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the control panel.

2. Press the [User Tools] icon.
6. Press [Next] twice.
7. Press [Auto Erase Memory Setting].
8. Press [On].
9. Select the method of overwriting.
If you select [NSA] or [DoD], proceed to step 12.
If you select [Random Numbers], proceed to step 10.
10. Press [Change].

11. Enter the number of times that you want to overwrite using the number keys, and then press [#].
12. Press [OK]. Auto Erase Memory is set.
13. Log out.
14. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon appears.
15. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting.
The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
SM 2-26 M0AN
1BInstallation
Icon This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks
[1] during overwriting.
Icon This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.

[2]
HDD Encryption (When the HDD option is installed)

Before You Begin the Procedure:
1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at the factory default settings.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be
changed before you do the installation procedure.
2. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on:

[User Tools] icon - [Machine Features] - [System Settings] - [Administrator Tools] - [Administrator
Authentication Management] - [Admin. Authentication] - [On]
If this setting is off, tell the customer that this setting must be on before you can do the installation
procedure.
3. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled.

[User Tools] icon - [Machine Features] - [System Settings] - [Administrator Tools] - [Administrator
Authentication Management] - [Available Settings]
"Available Settings" is not displayed until step 2 is done.
If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can do
the installation procedure.
Installation Procedure:
M0AN 2-27 SM
1. Turn ON the main power, and then enter the SP mode.

2. Select SP5-878-002, and then press "Execute" on the LCD.
3. Exit the SP mode after "Completed" is displayed on the LCD.
4. Turn OFF the main power.
Enable Encryption Setting
Machine Data Encryption Settings can be enabled by the following procedure.
• When setting up encryption, specify whether to start encryption after deleting data (initialize) or
encrypt and retain existing data. If data is retained, it may take some time to encrypt it.

7. Press [Next] three times.
8. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
SM 2-28 M0AN
9. Press [Encrypt].
1BInstallation
10. Select the data to be carried over to the HDD and not be reset.
To carry all of the data over to the HDD, select [All Data].
To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only].
To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
11. Select the backup method.
If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
control panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Start] key. Print out the machine's data encryption
key.
M0AN 2-29 SM
12. Press [OK].

13. Press [Exit].
14. Press [Exit].

15. Log out.
16. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn the main power back ON.
The machine will start to convert the data on the memory after you turn on the machine. Wait until
the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off." appears, and then
turn the main power off again.
Check the Encryption Settings

SM 2-30 M0AN
7. Confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.
1BInstallation
Print the encryption key
Use the following procedure to print the key again if it has been lost or misplaced.

If this item is not visible, press [Next] to display more settings.
7. Press [Print Encryption Key].
Encryption key sample
M0AN 2-31 SM
8. The encryption key is printed out as a sheet of paper like the example shown above.
Please instruct the customer to keep it in a safe place.
Backing Up the Encryption Key
The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it.
• The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure to store
the encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.

8. Press [Print Encryption Key].
9. Select the backup method.

If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of the
control panel and press [OK]; once the machine's data encryption key is backed up, press [Exit].
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Start] key. Print out the machine's data encryption
key.
10. Press [Exit].

11. Log out.
SM 2-32 M0AN
Encryption Key Restoration
How to restore the old encryption key to the machine
The following message appears after the controller board is replaced. In such a case, it is necessary to
restore the encryption key to the new controller board.
1BInstallation
To do this, follow the procedure below.
1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.

2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the "restore_key" folder and name it the same as machine’s serial number,
"xxxxxxxxxxx" (11 digits).
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and save it in the "xxxxxxxxxxx" folder. Write the
encryption key in the text file.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
• Ask an Administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been printed out by
the user and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" file. (The function of
back-up the encryption key to the SD card directly is provided 11A products or later.)
5. Turn ON the machine’s main power.

6. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains the
encryption key.

8. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD card slot 2 (the lower slot).
• The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on the
controller board.
10. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
M0AN 2-33 SM
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
• The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up.

• Encrypted data will be deleted.
• User settings will be cleared.
1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named "restore_key" inside the root directory of the SD card. Then, save the
"nvram_key.txt" file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
3. Create a text file and write "nvclear".
• Write this string at the head of the file.

• Use all lower-case letters.
• Do not use quotation marks or blank spaces.
• It is judged that a forced start has been selected when the content of "nvclear" is executed
and the machine shifts to the alternate system (forced start).
4. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains the
encryption key.
5. Turn off the main power.

6. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD card slot 2 (the lower slot).
The machine automatically clears the HDD encryption.
8. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
9. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot 2.
11. Memory clear SP5-801-xxx (Exclude SP-5-801-001: All Clear and SP-5-801-002: Engine), and
clear SP5-846-046: address book.
12. Set necessary user settings in User Tools.

SP descriptions
• SP5-878-002 (Option Setup: HDD Encryption)

Executes the setup for encryption.
• SP5-990-005 (SP Print Mode: Diagnostic Report)

Prints the configuration sheets of the system and user settings: SMC.
SM 2-34 M0AN
• SP5-801-001 (Memory Clear: All Clear)

Resets all correction data for process control and all software counters, and returns all modes and
adjustments to their default values.
• SP5-801-002 (Memory Clear: Engine)
1BInstallation
Clears non-volatile memory of engine.
• SP5-846-046 (UCS Setting: Addr Book Media)

Displays the slot number where the address book data is.
0: Unconfirmed
1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
3: SD Slot 3
4: USB Flash ROM
10: SD Slot 10
20: HDD
30: Nothing
2.3.6 AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (ARFU) SETTINGS

Specify ARFU settings as required.
Operating Conditions:
• ARFU requires connection to the Internet. Be sure to get permission from the customer before
setting ARFU up. Otherwise, it may cause an incident.
• ARFU is available only for machines that contain a HDD. If the machine does not have a HDD,
an option HDD must be installed.
• The connection is one-way, so the user’s data cannot be accessed from the firmware server.
Procedure:
1. ARFU enable setting

2. Server connection check
3. Prohibited date and time setting
M0AN 2-35 SM
(1) Enable ARFU
1. Set SP5-886-111 (Auto Update Setting) to "1 (ON)".

1: ON / 0: OFF (Default)
To download the firmware only using SFU (Smart Firmware Update), and not by ARFU, specify the
settings as follows:
- SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) to "0 (OFF)"
- SP5-886-115 (SFU Auto Download Setting) to "1 (ON)"
(2) Server connection check
1. Enter the SP mode.

2. Press [Firmware update] > [Update] > [Execute update].
3. Check if one of the following messages appears: "Will you download the latest package Ver *** and
update?" or "The installed package is the latest version.".
If the message appears, it is possible to execute ARFU. Press “No” and close SP mode to
complete the configuration.
The update will run immediately if you press “Yes” at the message "Will you download the latest
package Ver *** and update?" The update cannot be canceled if it is run by SFU. (The update can
be canceled if ARFU is used.)
SP5-886-116 (Auto Update Prohibit Term Setting) displays the scheduled date and time of the next
ARFU.
If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click “Execute update”, see
troubleshooting below.
SM 2-36 M0AN
(3) Prohibited date and time setting
Ask the customer for the prohibited times and days of the week for ARFU execution and set the
following as needed. The default prohibited time is from 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. and there is no prohibited day.
• SP5-886-112 (Auto Update Prohibit Term Setting) Default: 1 (ON)

• SP5-886-113 (Auto Update Prohibit Start hour) Default: 9
1BInstallation
• SP5-886-114 (Auto Update Prohibit End hour) Default: 17
• SP5-886-120 (Auto Update Prohibit Day Of Week Setting) Default: 00000000 [00H]
Set the bits for the days of the week to prohibit updating.
Prohibited (Monday - Sunday): bit 7, Monday: bit 6, Tuesday: bit 5
Wednesday: bit 4, Thursday: bit 3, Friday: bit 2, Saturday: bit 1, Sunday: bit 0
e.g.) Prohibited on Mon., Fri., Sat., and Sun.: 01000111 [47H]
They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from the
device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1 (ON)". For details, see Specifying the Time
and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor.
Troubleshooting: If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears
If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click [Firmware update] > [Update] >
[Execute update] in SP mode, check the following.
• 4-1. IPv4 address, Subnet mask of the machine and Gateway IPv4 address
• 4-2. IPv4 address of the DNS server
• 4-3. Proxy server settings
• 4-4. Encryption level setting SP
4-1. IPv4 address, Subnet mask of the machine and Gateway IPv4 address
Check the machine’s IPv4 address, subnet mask, and gateway IPv4 address.
(In User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Interface Settings)
M0AN 2-37 SM
4-2. IPv4 address of the DNS server

Check the DNS IPv4 address and check the connection.
(In User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Interface Settings > DNS configuration)
How to find the IP address:

Ask the customer to tell you the IP address of the DNS server. If the customer does not know it, ask the
customer to check the IP address by one of the following ways:
1. Run "ipconfig / all" at the command prompt on the computer, then check the IP address of the DNS
server.
2. Open the IPv4 properties dialog box on the computer, then check whether the IP address setting of
the DNS server is manual or automatic.
• If the setting of the DNS IP address is automatic, select [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)] at the main
machine's DNS settings.
• If the setting of the DNS IP address is manual, select [Specify] and specify the DNS server 1 to
3.
• Press [Connection Test] to check the connection with the input address. Make sure that it is
connected successfully.
SM 2-38 M0AN
1BInstallation
4-3. Proxy server settings
Check the user’s network environment and, as required, specify the proxy server settings in the
following SPs:
• SP5-816-062 (Use Proxy) 1: Used / 0: Not used

• SP5-816-063 (Proxy Host)
• SP5-816-064 (Proxy PortNumber)
• SP5-816-065 (Proxy User Name)
• SP5-816-066 (Proxy Password)
If access to the external server is restricted, request the network administrator (customer) to permit the
following FQDN name for communication.- FQDN: p-rfu-ds2.support.ricoh.com
They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator from the
device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1(ON)". For details, see Specifying the Time and
Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image Monitor.
4-4. Encryption level setting SP
Check SP5-816-087 (Remote Service: CERT:Macro Ver) and make sure the encryption level is [2]:
2048 bit.
If SP5-816-087 is [1]: 512 bit, specify the settings as follows:

1. Initialize the encryption level by executing SP5-870-003 (Common Key Info Writing: Initialize)
2. Rewrite as 2048 bit in SP5-870-004 (Common Key Info Writing: Writing 2048 bit).
3. Turn the main switch off and on.
Make sure to check the conditions before changing the encryption level and do the corresponding
workaround. ARFU uses the same certificate as @Remote to communicate with the Global Server. This
may cause failure in connecting with the Center Server, if the device is to be installed in the following
M0AN 2-39 SM
conditions.
Conditions
1) Customer uses RC Gate Type BN1.
RC Gate Type BN1 does not support 2048 bit encryption level communication with Ricoh devices
(HTTPS Managed device). Therefore, the device cannot be registered under RC Gate Type BN 1.
2) Ricoh device (HTTPS Managed) that supports only 512 bit encryption level is registered as an
external appliance.
Only one encryption level can be set for an external appliance for its communication with imaging
devices. If a 512 bit encryption level Ricoh device (HTTPS Managed) is registered, the external
appliance as well as other devices must also use 512 bit encryption even if 2048 bit encryption is
supported on those devices.
Workaround
For Condition 1:
Advise your customer to change to the latest appliance that supports 2048 bit encryption level
communication.
For Condition 2:
1. Manage the device with embedded RC Gate (2048 bit)
2. Exclude non-supported devices (i.e., those devices that cannot be changed from 512-bit to 2048-bit)
from the external appliances, then change the encryption level of external appliances and all managed
devices (from 512 bit to 2048 bit).
Specifying the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image
Monitor
1. Start Web Image Monitor.
2. Log in as the machine administrator.
3. Point to [Device Management], and then click [Configuration].
SM 2-40 M0AN
4. Click "Auto Firmware Update".
1BInstallation
Turn the main power OFF and back ON again after setting SP5-886-111 (AutoUpdateSetting) to "1
(ON)". "Auto Firmware Update" will appear in the menu list of Web Image Monitor.
5. Specify the times and days of the week to prohibit updating.

Select the check boxes of the applicable days of the week to prohibit updating on that day
M0AN 2-41 SM
2.3.7 MOVING THE MACHINE

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor.
• Turn off the main power.

• Disconnect the power plug from the outlet.
• Close all covers and paper trays, including the front cover and bypass tray.
• Keep the machine level and carry it carefully, taking care not to jolt or tip it, and protect the machine
from strong shocks.
• Do not push the center part of the rear cover. Do not hold the covers of the stabilizers.
• Do not put hard pressure on the rear cover [A] when moving or picking up the machine
because it is fragile. This also applies to the operation panel [C]. Hold parts [B] when moving
the machine.
• Hold 4 corners on the bottom base when holding the machine with the optional paper feeding
SM 2-42 M0AN
Paper Feed Unit PB3240 (M494-17, -21)
tray joined to the main machine. Do not hold any other parts.
1BInstallation
2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3240 (M494-17, -21)
No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 Securing Bracket 2
2 Long Screws (M4 × 10) 2
3 Coin Screw (M4 × 10) 1
• The main machine weighs approximately 57 kg (125.7 lb.). The printer should always be lifted
by at least four people.
• The machine should be held at the correct locations and lifted gently. If it is lifted without care,
handled carelessly or dropped, it may result in an injury.
• When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket. If installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may
M0AN 2-43 SM
occur.
• Be sure to join the machine to the paper feed unit so as to prevent equipment from falling over.
If they are not connected, they may move and fall over, resulting in injury.
1. Remove the orange tape and retainers.
2. Remove the accessories (fixing screws, etc.) from the package.

3. Holding the grips on the machine, align the machine with the locating pins [A], and place the
machine on the paper feed unit.
SM 2-44 M0AN
• When you lift the machine, hold the correct locations [A].
1BInstallation
• Do not hold any other parts of the machine when lifting it, because this may cause the
machine to deform.
• Do not put the machine down on the paper feed unit as a temporary resting place. This
may cause the paper feed unit to deform. Always connect the machine and paper feed
unit properly.
4. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray of the main machine.
5. Fix the machine to the feed unit (coin screw x1: M4x10).
Tighten the screw firmly using a coin.
M0AN 2-45 SM
6. Slide the tray carefully into the main unit until it stops.
7. Attach the securing brackets to two positions on the left and right at the rear of the machine (long
screw x2: M4x10).
Tighten the screws firmly using a coin.
SM 2-46 M0AN
8. Attach the decals as shown below.
1BInstallation
[A]: Tray number decal
[B]: Paper size decal
• The tray number decal and paper size decal are packaged together with the main
machine.
9. Lock the casters of the paper feed unit.
10. Attach the rear lower gap cover [A].
M0AN 2-47 SM
LCIT PB3260 (M496-17, -27)
• Stabilizers are attached to the machine when it is shipped. Do not remove them.

13. Load the paper, and check that the size of paper loaded in the paper feed tray is displayed on the
operation panel.
14. Adjust the registration for the paper feed unit.

• SP1-002-004 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 3)
• SP1-002-005 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 4)
SP descriptions

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each mode
and tray.
2.5 LCIT PB3260 (M496-17, -27)

No. Descriptions Q’ty Remarks
1 Securing Bracket 2
2 Long Screws (M4 × 10) 2
3 Coin Screw (M4 × 10) 1
4 Hexagonal Bolt 1 Not used in this machine
5 Screw (M4 × 10) 2 Not used in this machine
- Caution sheet (screw)
SM 2-48 M0AN
LCIT PB3260 (M496-17, -27)
1BInstallation
• The main machine weighs approximately 57 kg (125.7 lb.). The printer should always be lifted
by at least four people.
• The machine should be held at the correct locations and lifted gently. If it is lifted without care,
handled carelessly or dropped, it may result in an injury.
occur.
• Be sure to join the machine to the paper feed unit so as to prevent equipment from falling over.
If they are not connected, they may move and fall over, resulting in injury.
2. Remove the accessories (fixing screws, etc.) from the package.

3. Holding the grips on the machine, align the machine with the locating pins [A], and place the
M0AN 2-49 SM
LCIT PB3260 (M496-17, -27)
machine on the paper feed unit.
• When you lift the machine, hold the correct locations [A].
• Do not hold any other parts of the machine when lifting it, because this may cause the
machine to deform.
• Do not put the machine down on the paper feed unit as a temporary resting place. This
may cause the paper feed unit to deform. Always connect the machine and paper feed
SM 2-50 M0AN
LCIT PB3260 (M496-17, -27)
unit properly.
4. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray.
1BInstallation
M0AN 2-51 SM
LCIT PB3260 (M496-17, -27)
5. Fix the machine to the feed unit (coin screw x1: M4x10).
Tighten the screw firmly using a coin.
6. Slide the tray carefully into the main unit until it stops.
7. Attach the securing brackets [A] to two positions on the left and right at the rear of the machine (long
screw x2: M4x10).
Tighten the screws firmly using a coin.
SM 2-52 M0AN
LCIT PB3260 (M496-17, -27)
8. Attach the decals as shown below.
1BInstallation
[A]: Tray number decal
[B]: Paper size decal
• The tray number decal and paper size decal are packaged together with the machine.
9. Lock the casters of the paper feed unit.
M0AN 2-53 SM
LCIT PB3260 (M496-17, -27)
• The stabilizers are attached to the LCIT when it is shipped. Do not remove any of them.

13. Load the paper, and check that the size of paper loaded in the paper feed tray is displayed on the
operation panel.
14. Adjust the registration for the paper feed unit.

SP1-002-004 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 3)
SP descriptions

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each mode
and tray.
Changing the paper size

Paper size is set as shown below when the machine is shipped from the factory.
• NA: LT LEF
• EU, AA: A4 LEF
The paper size can be changed to A4 or LT.
1. Pull out the left tray and right tray.

2. Remove the screws on the right tray side fences (front [A], rear [B]) and right tray end fence [C] (
SM 2-54 M0AN
LCIT PB3260 (M496-17, -27)
×3).
1BInstallation
3. Remove the screws on the left tray side fences (front [A], rear [B]).
M0AN 2-55 SM
LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27)
4. Slide the fences to the required position (A4 or LT), and then tighten the screws.
[A]: A4 position
[B]: LT position
5. Make sure that the spring [A] is attached.
6. Adjust the following SP to set the paper size of the tandem paper tray.
SP5-181-009 (Size Adjust: TRAY 3/T-LCT: 1)
0: A4 LEF
1: LT LEF
2.6 LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27)
• To install this optional unit, Paper Feed Unit PB3240 (M494) or LCIT PB3260 (M496) is
required.

1 Connector Cover 1
2 Front Bracket 1
3 Rear Bracket 1
4 Harness 1
5 Stud screw 4
SM 2-56 M0AN
LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27)

6 Joint Pins 2
7 Tapping Screw – M3 × 6 1
8 Screw – M3 × 6 1
1BInstallation
occur.
• LCIT RT3030 [1] can be connected to Paper Feed Unit PB3240 [2] or LCIT PB3260 [3] only in
one of the following two combinations.
M0AN 2-57 SM
LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27)
2. Remove the accessories (stud screws, etc.) from the package.
SM 2-58 M0AN
LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27)
3. Remove the eight covers on the right of the paper feed unit of the machine.
1BInstallation
Insert the flat-headed screwdriver into the cover and push and turn the driver counterclockwise to
remove it.
4. Attach the joint pins [A] to the front and rear on the right of the paper feed unit.
M0AN 2-59 SM
LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27)
5. Attach the front bracket [A] and rear bracket [B] at the positions of the joint pins (Stud screw: ×4).
6. Remove the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit.( ×2).
SM 2-60 M0AN
LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27)
7. Connect the harness.

For a machine with LCIT PB3260
Remove the connection cover [A], and connect the harness [B].
1BInstallation
For a machine with Paper Feed Unit PB3240
Connect the harness [A].
M0AN 2-61 SM
LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27)
8. Clamp the harness.

For a machine with LCIT PB3260
For a machine with Paper Feed Unit PB3240
9. Attach the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit.( ×2)
SM 2-62 M0AN
LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27)
1BInstallation
11. Attach the hooks of the side LCIT to the brackets.
12. Connect the cable [A] of the side LCIT to the machine ( ×1).
M0AN 2-63 SM
LCIT RT3030 (D696-17, -27)
13. Attach the connector cover [A] ( ×1).
14. Push the side LCIT towards the machine.
15. Turn on the main power.

16. Set the paper, and check that the paper size set in the paper feed tray is displayed on the control
unit.
17. Do the registration adjustment for the large capacity tray.

SP1-002-007 (Side-to-Side Registration Large Capacity Tray)
SP descriptions

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each mode and
tray.
SM 2-64 M0AN
Anti-Condensation Heater
Changing the Paper Size

Paper size is set as shown below when the machine is shipped from the factory.
NA: LT LEF
EU, AA: A4 LEF
The paper size can be changed to A4, LT, or B5.
1BInstallation
1. Open the tray cover.
2. Remove the upper screw at the front side fence, and after setting the side fence to the position of the
paper (outer: A4 LEF, center: LT LEF, inner: B5 LEF), tighten the screw that was removed.( ×1)
3. Also change the rear side fence to the same size position.( ×1)
4. Change the paper size according to the new side fence position.
SP5-181-024 (Size Adjust: LCT)
• 0: A4 LEF
• 1: LT LEF
• 2: B5 LEF
2.7 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
• Turn off the main power and disconnect the power supply cord when installing this option.
M0AN 2-65 SM
2.7.1 OVERVIEW
The following diagram shows the heater configuration. When installing a heater, the heater board is
required.
Part description Tray Tray PCU Tray Tray Tray

heater heater Heater heaters heater heaters
(Main (Op (Main + (main (Main +
unit) tray) Op) unit) + Op) +
PCU PCU
heater heater
Heater PCB:DHB:CORONA-C1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Board
(Assembly-
1)
Tray HEAT SINK: HEATER:ASS'Y 1 1 1 1
Heater for TAPPING SCREW - M3X8 1 1 1 1
Main Unit
PCU THERMOSTAT:ASS'Y 1 1 1
Heater HEATER:OPTION:9W 1 1 1
SCREW:POLISHED 2 2 2
ROUND/ SPRING:M3X5
COVER:PLATE:HEATER 1 1 1
DECAL:WARNING (HIGH 1 1 1
TEMPERATURE)
DECAL:WARNING (HIGH 1
TEMPERATURE)(HEATER
OPTION)
Harness for HARNESS:DEHUMIDIFIER: 1 1 1
PCU SCANNER:PCU
Tray HEATER:ASS'Y *1 *1 *1
Heater for
PB3240
Tray HEATER:ASS'Y *1 *1 *1
Heater for
PB3260
* : Choose one.
2.7.2 HEATER BOARD
• Turn off the main power and disconnect the power supply cord when installing this option.
SM 2-66 M0AN
Accessory Check
Description Q’ty Shown in the Overview as
Tapping Screw: M3x6 3 -
Clamp: LWSM-0306A 7 -
Clamp: LWS-1211A 1 -
Heater Board 1 #3
1BInstallation
BCU Harness 1 #2
PSU Harness 1 #1
PFU Harness 1 #5
2. Remove the paper exit tray [A].
M0AN 2-67 SM
3. Remove the left upper cover [A].
• Slide the cover in the direction of the blue arrow.
4. Remove the rear left cover [A] (coin screw x 2).
5. Release the two bosses at the back, and remove the controller cover [A].
6. Open the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays slightly.
SM 2-68 M0AN
7. Remove the left cover [A].
1BInstallation
8. Remove the rear cover [A].
Each part enclosed by a red dotted circle has a tab. Be careful not to damage it when attaching
and detaching.
M0AN 2-69 SM
9. Remove the rear lower gap cover [A] (hook×2).
10. Remove the rear lower cover [A].
11. Attach the heater board [A].
12. Attach the clamps (LWSM-0306A). Connect the PSU harness [A] to CN904 of the PSU and CN920
SM 2-70 M0AN
of the heater board, and clamp the harness [A].
1BInstallation
13. Connect the BCU harness [A] to CN121 of the BCU and CN930 of the heater board.
14. Clamp the harness [A] which was connected in step 13.
M0AN 2-71 SM
15. Connect the PFU harness [A] to CN921 of the heater board.
16. Attach the socket on the PFU harness [A] to the rear frame of the main unit.
17. Connect the connector.
SM 2-72 M0AN
18. Clamp the PFU harness.
1BInstallation
2.7.3 PCU HEATER
• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
• Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses.
• Check that harnesses are not damaged or pinched after installation.
Accessory Check
Description Q'ty Shown in the Overview as
PCU Harness 1 #4
Clamp: LWSM-0511A 3 -
PCU Heater 1 #6
THERMOSTAT:ASS'Y 1 -
SCREW:POLISHED ROUND/SPRING:M3X5 2 -
DECAL:WARNING (HIGH TEMPERATURE) 1 -
DECAL:WARNING (HIGH TEMPERATURE) (HEATER OPTION) 1
Heater Cover 1 -
M0AN 2-73 SM
1. Install the heater board. (Installation Procedure)
2. Connect the PCU harness [A] to CN922 of the heater board and clamp the harness.
3. Attach the clamps (provided with this unit) around the controller board in the rear main unit.
4. Route the heater cable [A] to the rear of the main unit.
SM 2-74 M0AN
At the blue circle position shown below, position the clamp between the two cable ties [A].
1BInstallation
6. Open the right cover.
7. Open the transfer unit [A].
8. Release the lever [A] then remove the PCDU [B].
M0AN 2-75 SM
Carefully and slowly pull out the PCDU without tilting, to prevent toner spillage.
9. Lift the lever [A] then pull out the waste toner bottle [B].
10. Take off the heater bracket [A].
SM 2-76 M0AN
11. Attach the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [A] to the heater bracket [B].
• Fit the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [A] into the tab [C] on the heater bracket [B].
1BInstallation
12. Attach the thermostat [A] to the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [B] ( x1).
• Fit the thermostat [A] into the tab [C] on the heater bracket [B].
M0AN 2-77 SM
13. Remove the development bearing cooling fan [A].
14. Put back the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [A], and then pass the harness out through the guide
[B] at the rear lower part of the PCU rail.
15. Connect the harnesses of the thermostat [A] and of the anti-condensation heater (PCU) [B] to the
harnesses [C] which were routed in step 4.
• You can connect the harnesses [C] up to either harness [A] or [B].
SM 2-78 M0AN
16. Attach the DECAL:WARNING (HIGH TEMPERATURE) to the bracket.
1BInstallation
17. Attach the heater cover [A].
18. Fix the anti-condensation heater (PCU) and the heater cover with the SCREW:SMALL
ROUND/SPRING:M3X5 (provided with this unit).
19. Reattach the development bearing cooling fan, PCDU, waste toner bottle, and all covers which
have been removed.
M0AN 2-79 SM
20. Attach the DECAL:WARNING (HIGH TEMPERATURE) (HEATER OPTION).
SM 2-80 M0AN
2.7.4 TRAY HEATER FOR MAIN UNIT
• Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord when installing this
option.
Accessory Check
1BInstallation
Tray Heater for Main Unit 1 #7
TAPPING SCREW - M3X8 1 -
In North America, this option has a decal [A] attached that says 110V-130V. Peel off this decal.

2. Pull out the first and second paper feed trays.
3. Connect the harness of the tray heater [A] for the main unit to the socket in the inner rear frame of
M0AN 2-81 SM
the main unit ( x1).
4. Insert the tabs of the tray heater for the main unit in the cutouts in the inner rear frame of the main
unit, and then attach the heater ( x1).
5. Reattach all the paper feed trays, covers, etc. which have been taken off.
Do the following step to set the Anti-Condensation Heater to be constantly ON.
1. Set SP5-805-001 (Anti-Condensation Heater ON/OFF setting) to [1].
SM 2-82 M0AN
2.7.5 TRAY HEATER FOR PAPER FEED UNIT PB3240
Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord when installing this option.
Accessory Check
1BInstallation
Tray Heater 1 #8
SCREW:SPRING WASHER:ROUND POINT:M4X10 1 -

2. Pull out the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays of the paper feed unit.
3. Pass the harness of the heater [A] for the optional paper feed unit through the hole in the inner rear
frame of the optional paper feed unit, and then attach it ( x1).
M0AN 2-83 SM
4. Remove the bracket [A].
5. Remove the rear cover [A] of the optional paper feed unit.
6. Connect the PFU harness [A] of the optional paper feed unit to the relay harness [B] of the main unit
and the heater harness [C].
• Put the PFU harness through the hole which is revealed when the bracket is removed in
step 4.
SM 2-84 M0AN
1BInstallation
7. Reattach the rear cover of the optional paper feed unit, securing brackets, and rear lower cover of
the main unit.
8. Connect the power supply cord and turn ON the main power.
Do the following step to set the anti-condensation heater to be constantly ON.
M0AN 2-85 SM
2.7.6 TRAY HEATER FOR LCIT PB3260
Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord when installing this option.
Accessory Check
Tray Heater 1 #8
SCREW:SPRING WASHER:ROUND POINT:M4X10 1 -

2. Pull out the paper feed tray of the optional LCT unit.
3. Pass the harness of the heater [A] for the optional tray out through the hole in the inner rear frame of
the optional LCT unit, and then attach it ( x1).
SM 2-86 M0AN
1BInstallation
5. Remove the rear cover [A] of the optional LCT unit.
6. Connect the PFU harness [A] of the optional LCT unit to the relay harness [B] of the main unit and
the heater harness [C].
• Put the PFU harness through the hole which is revealed when the bracket is removed in
step 4.
M0AN 2-87 SM
Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685-18)
7. Reattach the rear cover of the optional LCT unit, securing brackets, and rear lower cover of the main
unit.
8. Connect the power supply cord and turn ON the main power.
Do the following step to set the anti-condensation heater to be constantly ON.
2.8 BRIDGE UNIT BU3070 (D685-18)

No. Description Q’ty
1 Tapping screw- M3 × 8 1
2 Screw - M4 1
3 Knob Screw - M4 1
4 Right Front Bracket 1
5 Upper Left Cover 1
6 L type connecting bracket 1
7 Paper Support Guide 1
8 Driven Roller (Flat) 1
SM 2-88 M0AN
1BInstallation
occur.
• The bridge unit cannot be used together with the internal multi-fold unit.
1. Remove the orange tapes, shipping retainers, and the accessories (fixing screws, etc.) provided with
this unit.
M0AN 2-89 SM
3. Remove the connector cover [A].
4. Remove the paper exit feeler [A].
5. Tuck in the lever [A] for detecting when the tray is full.
6. Remove the driven roller [B] at the machine’s exit tray and attach the supplied driven roller [A].
• Insert a flat-headed screwdriver into the depression in the center, and then, lifting the driven
roller, unlock the part indicated by the red arrow.
• When attaching the driven roller, push its center all the way in until it clicks.
SM 2-90 M0AN
1BInstallation
[A]: The supplied driven roller has flat rollers.
[B]: The machine’s standard driven roller has drum-type rollers (as indicated by red frames).
7. Attach the paper support guide [A] (hook x 4).

The screw removed is used again in step 14.
M0AN 2-91 SM
10. Remove the small cover [A].
• The screw removed is used again in step 12.
11. Attach the right front bracket [A]. (Tapping screw- M3 × 8)
SM 2-92 M0AN
12. Reattach the small cover [A] using the screw removed in step 10, and close the right door.
1BInstallation
13. Attach the bridge unit [A] to the machine. (Screw-M4 and Knob screw-M4)
14. Attach the upper left cover [A] using the screw removed in step 9.
15. Attach the L type connecting bracket [A].

To fix the bridge unit securely on the machine, tighten the finisher's joint bracket and L type
connecting bracket [A] together when installing the finisher.
M0AN 2-93 SM
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482-17)
16. Complete the bridge unit attachment. Refer to the procedure for connecting the optional unit
downstream of the bridge unit.
• Finisher SR3230 (D3BA) (Finisher SR3230 (D3BA-17, -21))

• Finisher SR3210 (D3B8) (Finisher SR3210 (D3B8-17, -21))
17. After the finisher is installed, turn ON the main power.
18. Check that the finisher can be selected at the operation panel.
2.9 INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT FD3000 (M482-17)

1 Paper Exit Tray 1
2 Base Plate 1
3 Correction Plate for Side-to-side 1
Registration
4 Coin Screw M4 1
5 Screw M4x6 1
6 Screw M3x6 1
7 Bind Screw M3x6 3
8 Coin Screw M4x8 4
9 Paper Exit Guide (Relay) 1 Use this when connecting a finisher downstream
from the internal multi-fold unit.
10 Paper Relay Cover 1
11 Left Upper Cover 1 Use this when connecting a finisher downstream
from the internal multi-fold unit.
12 Support Tray : Shift 1 Use this for the Finisher SR3230 shift tray.
13 Support Tray : Proof 1 Use this for the Finisher SR3230 proof tray.
14 Driven Roller (Flat) 1
15 Paper Support Guide (Small) 1
16 Cushion (Top/Front) 1
SM 2-94 M0AN

17 Cushion (Rear) 1
18 Cushion (Paper Entrance) 1
19 Cushion (Short) 1
- Sheet (applying pressure to the 1
folding roller)
- Sheet (attaching the paper support 1
1BInstallation
guide)
- Sheet (keeping the accessories) 1
- Sheet (about interference with the 1
finisher's I/F cables)
When installing the internal multi-fold unit alone
Do not use the Paper Exit Guide (Relay) [9], Left Upper Cover [11], Support Tray : Shift [12] and
Support Tray : Proof [13].
When connecting the finisher SR3230 downstream from the internal multi-fold unit
Do not use the Paper Exit Tray [1] and Paper Relay Cover [10].
When connecting the finisher SR3210 downstream from the internal multi-fold unit
Do not use the Paper Exit Tray [1], Paper Relay Cover [10], Support Tray : Shift [12] and Support Tray :
Proof [13].
The customer should keep the unused accessories included with the product. When connecting a
finisher that was purchased separately or when disconnecting the finisher that is connected
downstream from the internal multi-fold unit, if the customer did not keep the necessary accessories,
order them as service parts.
M0AN 2-95 SM
SM 2-96 M0AN
occur.
1BInstallation
• When installing the Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 and the Mail Box CS3010 at the same time,
first install the base plate [A] of the internal multi-fold unit. Then install the mailbox [B]. Then
install the internal multi-fold unit.
1. Unpack the internal multi-fold unit [A].

Hold the parts circled in blue. Do not hold other parts. Doing so may damage the exterior cover or
deform the frame.
M0AN 2-97 SM
2. Remove the orange tapes and shipping retainers, and take out the accessories (fixing screws, etc.)
provided with this unit.
There are two mylar sheets inside this unit. Do not forget to remove them.
4. Open the right cover then remove the screw.
SM 2-98 M0AN
5. Release the hooks on the inside of the upper front cover [A] by pulling the cover's sides outward,
and remove the upper front cover [A].
1BInstallation
6. Remove the paper exit feeler [A].
The removed paper exit feeler can be discarded.
7. Tuck in the lever [A] for detecting when the tray is full.
M0AN 2-99 SM
8. Remove the paper exit cover [A] by sliding it to the right.
10. Open the front cover, and remove the left upper cover [A] by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
SM 2-100 M0AN
11. Release the hooks [A], and remove the left rear cover [B].
1BInstallation
13. Remove the driven roller [B] at the machine’s exit tray and attach the supplied driven roller [A].
• Insert a flat-headed screwdriver into the depression in the center, and then, lifting the driven
roller, unlock the part indicated by the red arrow.
• When attaching the driven roller, push its center all the way until it clicks.
M0AN 2-101 SM
[A]: The supplied driven roller has flat rollers.

[B]: The machine’s standard driven roller has drum-type rollers (as indicated by red frames).
14. Attach the paper support guide (small) to the exit tray (hook x2).
1. Align and insert the support guide’s tabs under the notches of the discharge brush frame [A]
upward at an angle.
2. Rotate the support guide upward so that the support guide’s hooks [C] become horizontal to
the discharge brush frame [B].
SM 2-102 M0AN
Do not continue to hold the support guide at an angle when pushing it in. Otherwise you might
cause faulty attachment or damage to the hooks.
1BInstallation
3. Holding the back of the discharge brush frame with the forefingers, push the hooks in
horizontally one at a time until they click.
M0AN 2-103 SM
Even if the discharge brush is trapped by the support guide, it is acceptable.

The following figure shows the mounted unit.
15. Remove the paper exit lower cover [A].
16. Attach the base plate [A]. Before you attach the screws, insert the base plate’s 2 tabs [B] into the
slots in the machine. (Bind screw M3x6)
SM 2-104 M0AN
When installing the Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 and the Mail Box CS3010 at the same time,
install the base plate [A], then install the mailbox.
Then install the internal multi-fold unit.
17. Reattach the covers in the following order: paper exit cover [A], upper front cover [B], and small
cover [C].
1BInstallation
18. Close the front cover and right door.
19. Attach the cushions to the internal multi-fold unit.
It is not necessary to attach the cushions [2] and [3] when the mailbox is attached.
• When attaching the cushion (paper entrance) [1], align the cutout [A] with the top of the upper
cover.
• When attaching the cushion (top/front) [2], align it with the slope [B] of the upper cover.
• When attaching the cushion (short) [3], align it with the slope [C] of the upper cover.
M0AN 2-105 SM
• When attaching the cushion (rear) [4], align it with a point 3 mm from the left edge [D].
SM 2-106 M0AN
20. Open the front cover of the internal multi-fold unit, and then tighten the 2 screws in the recesses.
1BInstallation
This operation is required to apply pressure to the internal multi-fold unit roller when attaching it.
The screw holes become inaccessible when the unit is attached to the machine, so be sure to
perform this in advance.
Be sure to turn the screws until they stop. It is not necessary to continue tightening them.
21. Temporarily place the internal multi-fold unit [A] on the base plate.
22. Open the front cover of the internal multi-fold unit, and then, holding the exit tray frame [A] and top
part of the opening [B], lift the internal multi-fold unit and attach it to the machine.
• Lower the lever [C] to keep the paper guide plate open during operation, because the plate
might be deformed if a strong force is applied while the guide plate is closed.
• Hold the metal frame part [B], not the exterior cover, to avoid damaging the cover.
M0AN 2-107 SM
• Be careful not to touch the mylar sheet [D] located behind.
Make sure that the securing bracket [A] is not caught between the internal multi-fold unit and
the machine.
23. Attach the securing bracket [A] (M4x6).
SM 2-108 M0AN
24. Temporarily attach the internal multi-fold unit with the supplied coin screw (M4x1).
The unit is only temporarily attached at this stage, so leave the screws loose.
Fix the screw to the left screw hole [A] of the two screw holes. Do not use the right screw hole [B].
1BInstallation
25. Attach the correction plate for side-to-side registration [A] to the machine (M3x6).
Partially secure the adjusting screw [B] on the upper part of the correction plate, and then secure
the screw [C] at the bottom part of the plate.
M0AN 2-109 SM
26. Connect the cable [A] of the internal multi-fold unit to the machine.

28. Feed A3/DLT paper (any brand) from Tray 2 and check the scale [A].
Select the [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features] > [Printer Features] > [List/ Test Print] >
[Operation Test].
29. Check the movement at the paper edge from the leading to trailing edges, and turn the adjusting
screws of the correction plate to adjust the internal multi-fold unit’s position until the deviation stays
within 2 markings on the scale. (Each marking represents 1 mm.)
• [A]: When the paper edge shifts towards the front, turn the adjusting screw clockwise.
SM 2-110 M0AN
• [B]: When the paper edge shifts towards the rear, turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise.
1BInstallation
30. After registration, tighten the coin screw [A] to secure the internal multi-fold unit.
When you fully open the front cover of the internal multi-fold unit, it may interfere with the
machine’s upper front cover, causing the internal multi-fold unit to become misaligned. Therefore,
tighten the screw [A] with a stubby screwdriver.
31. Reattach the hooks [A], and re-install the left rear cover [B].
32. When attaching a finisher downstream from the internal multi-fold unit, attach the supplied paper
exit guide (No.9). For details, refer to When Attaching a Finisher Downstream from the Internal
Multi-Fold Unit
33. Reattach the left upper cover.

• The exit tray of the internal multi-fold unit has mylar sheets [A] on it. When attaching the cover,
be careful not to damage the mylar sheets [A].
M0AN 2-111 SM
• The left upper cover bulges slightly because of the mylar sheets, but this does not cause any
problem if the mylar sheets are positioned correctly.
• Reattach the left upper cover with the mylar sheets [B] sandwiched behind it. The mylar sheets
must not catch on or hang over the left upper cover, as shown by [C].
34. Insert the 4 hooks on the paper exit tray [A] into the slots (hook x 4).
When attaching the paper exit tray, do not put the movable plate [B] under the paper exit tray,
because that would interfere with the operation of the internal multi-fold unit.
SM 2-112 M0AN
35. Tighten the screws to secure the paper exit tray (coin screw x2 :M4x8).
1BInstallation
36. Attach the paper relay cover (coin screw x2: M4x8).
2.9.3 WHEN ATTACHING A FINISHER DOWNSTREAM FROM THE

INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT
When attaching a finisher downstream from the internal multi-fold unit, attach the supplied left upper
cover [A] and paper exit guide (relay) [B].
1. Attach the paper exit guide (relay) [A] provided with this unit (coin screw x2).
When attaching the paper exit tray, do not put the movable plate [B] under the paper exit tray,
because that would interfere with the operation of the internal multi-fold unit.
M0AN 2-113 SM
Finisher SR3230 (D3BA-17, -21)
2. Attach the left upper cover [A] provided with this unit. (Use the screw removed in step 10 of
Installation Procedure.)
3. To complete installation of the finisher, refer to the finisher installation below.

• Finisher SR3230 (D3BA-17, -21)
• Finisher SR3210 (D3B8-17, -21)
2.10 FINISHER SR3230 (D3BA-17, -21)
• To install this optional unit, the following optional units are required.
1. Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685), or Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 (M482)
2. LCIT PB3260 (M496), or Paper Feed Unit PB3240 (M494)

1 Shift Tray 1
2 Cushion 1
3 Joint Bracket 1
4 Relay Guide Plate 1
5 Ground Plate 1
6 Tray Holder 1
7 Proof Support Tray 1
8 Screws (M3x6) 4
SM 2-114 M0AN

9 Screws (M3x8) 1
10 Round Rivets 2
11 Screws (M4x12) 4
1BInstallation
occur.
• When you unpack or move this unit, do not hold the paper exit guide [A]. Doing so may
damage the unit.
• Before installing this option, install the following options first;

M0AN 2-115 SM
1. Remove the orange tape on the exterior covers and remove the shipping retainers. Then remove the
accessories in the package (fixing screws, etc.).
2. Open the front cover, and remove the orange tapes and shipping retainers.
3. Remove the plate [A] only when installing the punch unit.
For details about the punch unit installation, refer to Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02).
SM 2-116 M0AN
1BInstallation
4. Attach the shift tray [A] ( ×1: M3x8).
5. Attach the ground plate [A] (M3x6).
6. Attach the relay guide plate [A] (M3x6).
M0AN 2-117 SM
7. Attach the joint bracket [A] to the main machine ( x4: M4x12).
If the machine is equipped with the bridge unit, attach the joint bracket [A] together with the L type
connecting bracket [B] of the bridge unit.
If the machine is equipped with the internal multi-fold unit, attach the joint bracket [A] only.
SM 2-118 M0AN
• Attach the screw so that the screw head is at the center of the mark.
1BInstallation
8. Clean the right side of the upper cover with a cloth moistened with alcohol, and then attach the
cushion [A] to the finisher.
• Make sure that the cushion is aligned with the rear-upper edge of the upper cover.
9. If the internal multi-fold unit is installed, connect the finisher cable to the connector on the internal
multi-fold unit.
M0AN 2-119 SM
Make sure that the finisher’s 2 cables are not crossing each other before you connect the finisher.
10. Remove the screw on the connection lever [A] and pull the lever.
11. Connect the finisher to the main unit, and then push in the connection lever [A] to fasten it to the
main unit.
SM 2-120 M0AN
12. If the bridge unit is installed, connect the interface cable [A] to the machine.
1BInstallation
13. Attach the tray holder ( x2).
14. Close the front cover of the finisher.

16. Deliver some A3/DLT paper to the proof tray and check if the vertical registration is correct
according to the adjustment scale for A3/DLT paper (Finisher Registration Adjustment).
17. Check that the finisher can be selected on the operation panel, and check the finisher’s operation.
2.10.3 ATTACHING A SUPPORT TRAY

Explain the following information to the users.
The sensor may detect that the exit tray is full prematurely when delivering z-folded sheets or curled
paper to the tray.
If a message reporting a full paper exit tray appears, the job is suspended until the paper is removed
from the paper exit tray. By attaching a support tray, you can prevent the premature full detection.
Three types of support tray are supplied with this finisher. Make sure that you understand the purpose
M0AN 2-121 SM
of each support tray before installing one of them.
Proof Support Tray ("1" marked on the back), provided with this finisher
When using B4, LG or larger paper, or when using limp paper, the sheet may become bent, resulting in
premature full detection.
This can be solved by attaching the proof support tray [B] on the proof tray [A].
Problem that may occur after attaching this support tray:

SM 2-122 M0AN
Output Jogger Unit Type M25 (D3CJ-01)
When printing A4, LT or smaller paper with the support tray, the machine stacks only 200 sheets, which
is less than the standard specification of 250 sheets.
When printing B4, LG or larger paper with the support tray, the machine stacks 50 sheets, which is the
same as the standard specification.
Support Tray: Proof ("2" marked on the back), provided with the multi-fold unit
1BInstallation
By attaching Support Tray: Proof [A], more sheets can be stacked when delivering z-folded sheets to
the proof tray, preventing premature full detection.
Support Tray: Shift ("3" marked on the back), provided with the multi-fold unit
By attaching Support Tray: Shift [A], more sheets can be stacked when delivering z-folded sheets to the
shift tray, preventing premature full detection.
The sensor is located at the paper exit. During the installation, be careful not to remove the feeler.
2.11 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE M25 (D3CJ-01)
• This jogger unit is installed and used with Finisher SR3230 only.
M0AN 2-123 SM

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
1 Jogger Unit Cover 1
2 Jogger Unit 1
3 Rear End Cover 1
4 Front End Cover 1
5 Cushions 5
6 Shoulder Screws 2
7 Screws (Blue) M3x6 2
8 Screws (Silver) M3x8 5
SM 2-124 M0AN
• Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing the following procedure.
1. Disconnect the finisher from the main frame.
2. Remove the rear cover.
1BInstallation
3. Remove the shift tray.
4. Push the paper guides to the center.
M0AN 2-125 SM
5. Remove the rear paper guide cover.
6. Remove the front paper guide cover.
7. Disconnect the main paper guide cover.
SM 2-126 M0AN
8. Carefully, separate the front tabs at [A], and then remove the main paper guide cover [B].
1BInstallation
9. Disconnect the cover installation bracket.
10. Slowly, disconnect the bracket from the rail above, and then remove it.
M0AN 2-127 SM
11. At the rear [A], set one shoulder screw.
12. At the front [A], set the other shoulder screw.
13. Spread the paper guides to the maximum width.
SM 2-128 M0AN
14. Move the jogger arms on the jogger unit to the center.
1BInstallation
15. Hold the jogger unit so the hooks [A] on both ends of the unit are in line with the installed shoulder
screws [B].
16. Rotate the jogger unit slightly up under the output tray so that the motors on both ends of the unit
go under the tray, and then hang the hooks on the shoulder screws at the front and rear.
17. Confirm that the rear bracket [A] is on the shoulder screw.
18. Confirm that the rear motor [B] is up under the tray.
19. Confirm that the front bracket [A] is on the shoulder screw.
M0AN 2-129 SM
20. Confirm that the front motor [B] is up under the tray.
21. Fasten the jogger unit at the rear [A] and front [B].
22. Connect the jogger unit at the rear.
23. Peel the back off the two accessory cushions.
SM 2-130 M0AN
24. Attach the cushions to the front [A] and rear [B] of the lower arms of the output tray.
1BInstallation
25. Set the front end cover [A]. Do not attach the screw yet.
26. Set the rear end cover [A], and then fasten it [B].
27. Look at the jogger cover. Note the tabs and slots on the rear end [A], center arm covers [B], and
M0AN 2-131 SM
front end [C].
28. Slowly, set the jogger cover [A] on the jogger unit.
29. At the rear [A] confirm that the tab inserts correctly.
30. At the front [B] confirm that both tabs set correctly.
31. In the center under the jogger unit, make sure the rear arm cover [A] and front arm cover [B] fit
SM 2-132 M0AN
over the edge of the plate as shown.
1BInstallation
32. After making sure that all tabs are set correctly, fasten the cover to the jogger unit.
33. Re-install the shift tray.
M0AN 2-133 SM
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
34. Check the center of the shift tray.

If the jogger arms are touching the surface of the shift tray as shown, this will cause a jam when
the machine is turned on because the arms will move and hit the tray.
35. To avoid a jam at power on, before you turn the machine on you can:
Raise the jogger arms [A] slightly so they are not touching the shift tray below.
-or-
You can spread the jogger arms [B] away from the center so they are not touching the surface of
the tray.
2.12 PUNCH UNIT PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
• This Punch Unit is for Finisher SR3230 (D3BA).

1 Punch Unit 1
2 Registration Guide Plate 1
3 Punch Waste Paper Guide 1
4 Hopper 1
SM 2-134 M0AN
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)

5 Hopper Bracket 1
6 Harness 1
7 Tapping Screw- M3×6 15
8 Clip Ring 1
9 Side-to-side Detection Unit 1
1BInstallation
10 Punch Unit Movement Motor Unit 1
11 Punch Unit Stay 1
12 Cover 1
occur.
M0AN 2-135 SM
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
1. Remove the rear upper cover [A] ( ×2)
2. Remove the rear lower cover [A] ( ×2)
3. Remove the plate [A].
4. Remove the inner cover [A] ( ×3, ×1)
• There is a connector on the back of the inner cover.
SM 2-136 M0AN
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
1BInstallation
5. Remove the punch guide plate [A].
6. Attach the punch unit stay [A] ( ×4).
[A]: Rear, [B]: Front
M0AN 2-137 SM
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
SM 2-138 M0AN
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
7. Attach the punch waste paper guide [A] ( ×1).
• After inserting the front tab of the punch waste paper guide into the frame [B] of the
finisher, insert the rear tab into the frame [C].
1BInstallation
8. Attach the hopper bracket [A], inserting from the outside frame of the finisher. ( ×2, 2 hooks)
M0AN 2-139 SM
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
• Hook the hooks of the hopper bracket [A] onto the back side of the frame.
SM 2-140 M0AN
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
• Hook the upper frame of the hopper bracket onto the outside frame of the finisher.
1BInstallation
9. Fix the harness of the hopper sensor. ( ×1)
10. Attach the registration guide plate [A]. ( ×2)
M0AN 2-141 SM
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
[A]: Rear, [B]: Front
11. Attach the side-to-side detection unit [A]. ( ×2)
SM 2-142 M0AN
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
• Insert the front pins of the side-to-side detection unit into the holes of the frame.
1BInstallation
12. Attach the punch unit [A]. ( ×2)
• After inserting the pins [B] of the punch unit stay into the front and rear holes of the punch
unit, fix the punch unit with two screws.
• Rear
M0AN 2-143 SM
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
• Front
13. Attach the punch unit movement motor unit [A]. ( ×2)
• Engage the gear [B] of the punch unit movement motor unit with the rack [C] of the punch
unit.
SM 2-144 M0AN
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
14. Connect the harness of the hopper sensor to the connector of the finisher.( ×1)
1BInstallation
15. Connect the harness of the punch unit to the connector of the registration drive unit.( ×1)
16. Connect the harness of the punch unit to the main board, and then clamp it. ( ×2, ×2)
17. Connect the harness [B] of the punch unit movement motor unit and the harness [C] of the side-to-
M0AN 2-145 SM
Punch Unit PU3060 (D706-00, -01, -02)
side detection unit to the punch unit board [A].
18. Attach the supplied cover [A] to the punch unit board.
19. Clamp all the harnesses of the punch unit PU3060. ( ×8)
SM 2-146 M0AN
Finisher SR3210 (D3B8-17, -21)
20. Attach the hopper [A].
1BInstallation
21. Attach the rear upper cover, the rear lower cover, the inner cover, and the punch guide plate.
2.13 FINISHER SR3210 (D3B8-17, -21)
• To install this optional unit, the following optional units are required.

1 Joint Bracket 1
2 Cushion 1
3 Relay Guide Plate 1
4 Shift Tray 1
5 Ground Plate 1
6 Stabilizer 1 This part must be attached to the finisher just after it is
taken out of the shipping box.
7 Screws - M4 × 12 4
8 Tapping screws - M3 × 6 4
9 Tapping screw - M4 × 8 1
10 Proof Support Tray 1
- Installation Instruction for 1
stabilizer
M0AN 2-147 SM
occur.
• Before installing this option, install the following options first;

• This finisher is light and has a high center of gravity, so it easily topples when installing or
moving it. Therefore, it is equipped with the stabilizer [A] attached to it when shipped.
• The following is important information when moving the finisher.

As a general rule for moving the finisher, move it from the front to the rear of the machine as indicated
with the arrows in green, by gripping the positions outlined in blue in the photo below.
SM 2-148 M0AN
Make sure to grip both front and back of the finisher at the top to prevent the unit from tipping over.
When connecting or disconnecting the finisher to or from the main frame, slightly move it in the direction
indicated with the yellow arrow. Grip here
Grip here
Direction for
1BInstallation
connecting/
disconnecting
Grip here
Move direction
Grip here
M0AN 2-149 SM
 When the finisher has to be lifted up, for instance, when moving it over an object on the
ground, hold the stay of the slide rail or the bottom frame. DO NOT hold the ground plate or
caster.
The parts to be holded for lifting up
Stay of slide rail
Caster
Ground plate
Bottom frame
Do not grip the following locations when moving the finisher:

• Proof tray
• Entrance guide plate
• Front and rear covers
• Shift Tray base
• Connection lever
• Door switch stay
• Booklet stapler unit
Rear cover
Proof tray
Connection lever
Door switch stay
Front cover
Shift tray base

Entrance guide plate
Booklet stapler unit
SM 2-150 M0AN
1. After unpacking, immediately attach the stabilizer [B] to prevent toppling.

Push it in thoroughly along the guide [A] until it clicks.
1BInstallation
2. Attach the ground plate [A] (M3×6).
3. Remove the external orange tape and shipping retainers.
M0AN 2-151 SM
4. Open the front cover, and then remove the orange tapes and shipping retainers.
5. Remove the accessories in the package (fixing screws, etc.).

6. Remove the fixing brackets of the stapleless stapler unit.
Remove the fixing brackets in the order of [A], [B], and [C].
The fixing brackets are hooked onto a metal plate, so lift them slightly and then remove them.
Be careful not to touch the encoder [D] at the back of the motor.
SM 2-152 M0AN
1BInstallation
Be careful so that the fixing brackets do not come into contact with the feedout pawl HP sensor [A].
If they come into contact, check that the feeler [B] for the feedout pawl HP sensor is positioned
correctly.
M0AN 2-153 SM
7. Attach the shift tray [A] ( ×1: M4 × 8).
8. Attach the relay guide plate [A]. (M3 × 6)
9. Clean the right side of the upper cover with a cloth moistened with alcohol, and then attach the
cushion to the finisher.
• Make sure that the cushion is aligned with the left-upper edge [A] of the upper cover.
SM 2-154 M0AN
If the internal multi-fold unit is installed on the main machine, cut off the section of the cushion
indicated by the notch so that the cushion does not interfere with the I/F connector [A] of the
finisher.
1BInstallation
10. Attach the joint bracket [A] to the main machine (M4x12).
If the machine is equipped with the bridge unit, attach the joint bracket [A] together with the L type
connecting bracket [B] of the bridge unit.
M0AN 2-155 SM
If the machine is equipped with the internal multi-fold unit, attach the joint bracket [A] only.
• Attach the screw so that the screw head is at the center of the mark.
SM 2-156 M0AN
11. If the internal multi-fold unit is installed, connect the finisher cable to the connector on the internal
multi-fold unit.
1BInstallation
12. Remove the screw on the connection lever [A] and pull the lever.
13. Connect the finisher to the main unit, and then push in the connection lever [A] to fasten it to the
main unit.
If the internal multi-fold unit is installed, make sure that the finisher’s 2 cables are not crossing each
other before you connect the finisher.
M0AN 2-157 SM
14. Connect the interface cable [A] to the machine (only when the bridge unit is installed).

17. Deliver some A3/DLT paper to the proof tray and check if the vertical registration is correct
according to the adjustment scale for A3/DLT paper (Finisher Registration Adjustment).
18. Check that the finisher can be selected on the operation panel, and check the finisher’s operation.
2.13.3 ATTACHING A PROOF SUPPORT TRAY

Explain the following information to the users.
The sensor may detect that the exit tray is full prematurely when delivering z-folded sheets or curled
paper to the tray.
If a message reporting a full paper exit tray appears, the job is suspended until the paper is removed
from the paper exit tray. By attaching a support tray, you can prevent the premature full detection.
SM 2-158 M0AN
Proof Support Tray ("1" marked on the back), provided with this finisher
When using B4, LG or larger paper, or when using limp paper, the sheet may become kinked, resulting
in premature full detection.
1BInstallation
This can be solved by attaching the proof support tray [B] on the proof tray [A].
Problem that may occur after attaching this support tray:

When printing A4, LT or smaller paper with the support tray, the machine stacks only 200 sheets, which
is less than the standard specification of 250 sheets.
When printing B4, LG or larger paper with the support tray, the machine stacks 50 sheets, which is the
same as the standard specification.
2.13.4 STAPLELESS STAPLER INITIAL SETTINGS
• To adjust the strength of the crimp between sheets of stapled paper, there is a setting to select
either single or double stapling.
• The crimp is weakened when there is an image (toner) at the point which is to be stapled.
There also is a setting to mask the image on the point for stapling, in order to prevent the
crimp from being weakened.
• Depending on users demands, explain the settings/methods of the settings by checking the
following instructions.
M0AN 2-159 SM
Punch Unit PU3050
How to change the setting of Staple Method for Stapleless Stapler

Use this procedure to select the type of stapling that is done by the stapleless stapler.
1. Press the [User Tools] icon on Home screen.

2. Press [Machine Features] > [System Settings] > [General Settings] > [Stapling Method for Stapleless
Stapler].
3. Select [Double] or [Single].
How to set Margin Erase for Stapleless Stapler

2. Press [Machine Features] > [System Setting] > [General Setting].
3. Press [Erase Margin for Stapleless Stapler].
2.14 PUNCH UNIT PU3050
• This Punch Unit is for the Finisher SR3210 (D3B8).
SM 2-160 M0AN
Punch Unit PU3050

1 Punch unit 1
2 Cover 1
3 Stay 1
4 Hopper 1
1BInstallation
5 Side-to-side detection unit 1
6 Punch unit movement motor unit 1
7 Hopper guide plate 1
8 Guide plate 1
9 Tapping screws - M3 × 6 16
10 Harness (Short) 1 Not used in this machine
11 Harness (Long) 1
M0AN 2-161 SM
Punch Unit PU3050
occur.
1. Take out of the box, and remove the orange tape and shipping retainers.
2. Pull out the finisher interface cable, and move it away from the machine.
3. Remove the finisher rear cover [A] ( ×3).
4. Open the top cover, and then remove the arm [A].
SM 2-162 M0AN
Punch Unit PU3050
5. Open the finisher front cover, and remove the two knobs.
• Knobs with a lock mechanism are removed using a knob screwdriver or similar while
releasing the lock.
1BInstallation
6. Remove the finisher inner cover [A] ( ×3).
• Disconnect the connector at the back of the inner cover.
M0AN 2-163 SM
Punch Unit PU3050
7. Cut off part of the finisher inner cover [A].
8. Remove the guide plate [A] ( ×4).
9. Insert and attach the hopper guide plate [A] from the front ( ×4).
At this time, pass the harness [B] through the clamp [C].
SM 2-164 M0AN
Punch Unit PU3050
1BInstallation
10. Attach the stay [A] ( ×3).
Front [B]: Insert the holes in the stay over the embossed parts on the finisher.
Rear [C]: Place the axis of the stay through the notch in the finisher.
M0AN 2-165 SM
Punch Unit PU3050
11. Insert and attach the guide plate [A] from the rear ( ×2).
12. Insert and attach the side-to-side detection unit [A] from the rear ( ×2).
Front: The two shafts of the unit are passed through bearings in the finisher.
SM 2-166 M0AN
Punch Unit PU3050
1BInstallation
13. Connect the harness [A] of the hopper guide plate to the relay connector [B] of the side-to-side
detection unit, and then clamp the harness.
M0AN 2-167 SM
Punch Unit PU3050
14. Insert and attach the punch unit [A] from the rear.
15. Attach the punch unit movement motor unit [A] so that the gear [B] meshes firmly ( ×2).
16. Insert the hopper [A].
SM 2-168 M0AN
Punch Unit PU3050
17. Connect the provided harness to the punch unit board [A] and the control board [B] of the finisher
( ×6).
Use Harness (long) for Finisher SR3210.
1BInstallation
18. Remove the harness [A] from the clamp [B], and connect it to the punch unit board [C] ( ×1).
19. Connect the harness [A] of the side-to-side detection unit to the relay connector [B] of the harness
M0AN 2-169 SM
Punch Unit PU3050
( ×1).
20. Connect the harness [A] of the punch unit movement motor unit to the punch unit board [B] (
×1).
21. Attach the supplied cover [A] to the punch unit board.
SM 2-170 M0AN
Mail Box CS3010 (M481-17)
22. Clamp the harnesses.
1BInstallation
23. Reattach the finisher rear cover.
24. Reattach the finisher inner cover and three knobs.
26. Close the top cover.
27. Reconnect the finisher to the machine, and connect the interface cable.
29. Check that the punch can be selected at the operation panel, and check the operation.
2.15 MAIL BOX CS3010 (M481-17)

1 Rear bracket (with shoulder screw) 1 For this machine, use the shoulder screw
only.
2 Support bracket A 1 Not used for SP 8400DN
3 Support bracket B 1
4 Front securing bracket (with M4x6 screw 1

and nut)
5 Rear securing bracket (with M4x6 screw 1
and nut)
6 Shoulder screw 1
7 Screw M4x6 7
M0AN 2-171 SM

8 Screw M3x6 3
9 Clamp 1
10 Top right cover 1
11 Rear cover 1
12 Rear top cover 1
13 Paper exit tray 4
14 Inverter tray 1
15 Right stabilizer 1
16 Left stabilizer 1
17 Right arm 2
18 Left arm 2
19 Securing bracket 4
20 Coin screw 10
21 Tray information decal 1
22 Caution decal 1
- Sheet: EMC address 1
SM 2-172 M0AN
1BInstallation
• With this model, use decal [B]. (The illustrations on the decals look similar, but the shape of
the tray is different.)
M0AN 2-173 SM
occur.
• When installing the Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 and the Mail Box CS3010 at the same time,
first install the base plate [A] of the internal multi-fold unit. Then install the mailbox [B]. Then
install the internal multi-fold unit.
Removal of the Machine Exterior

SM 2-174 M0AN
1BInstallation
4. Remove the right upper cover [A] as shown by the arrow.
5. Open the cover [A].
M0AN 2-175 SM
6. Remove the top right cover [A].
7. Remove the rear left cover [A] (coin screw × 2).
and detaching.
SM 2-176 M0AN
1BInstallation
9. Using a flat-headed screwdriver, remove the cover [A].
10. Remove the top rear cover [A].
Transferring the Operation Panel

To secure space for installing Mail Box CS3010, move the operation panel to the front. Also, pull out the
M0AN 2-177 SM
USB cable connected to the operation panel as far as needed for the move.
1. Release the USB cable and the harness of the operation panel, and secure sufficient length to move
the operation panel.
When installing the Mail Box CS3010 and the Attention Light AL3000 at the same time, install the
attention light (Installation Procedure) after doing step 1.
Then install the mail box.
2. Reattach the covers in the following order: top rear cover, rear cover, rear left cover (coin screws).
3. Remove the operation panel upper cover [A].
4. Remove the operation panel [A] from the machine while keeping the USB cable connected to the
SM 2-178 M0AN
machine.
1BInstallation
5. Place the operation panel [A] on the top rear cover with LCD facing down.
6. Open the inverter guide cover [A], and remove the inverter guide cover and its exterior cover.
Lift the exterior cover from the screw bosses [B], and then slide the inverter module in the direction
of the blue arrow and remove it.
M0AN 2-179 SM
7. Release the harness [A] of the inverter guide cover sensor from the harness guide.
8. Remove the inverter guide [A].
9. Remove the inverter guide bracket [A].
10. Attach the operation panel more forward than before.

[A]: Installed position: After moving
[B]: Installed position: Before moving
[C]: Adjust the tab at the base of the operation panel to the indicated position
SM 2-180 M0AN
[D]: Position of screw holes for operation panel securing brackets: After moving
[E]: Position of screw holes for operation panel securing brackets: Before moving
1BInstallation
11. Fasten the USB cable and the harness at the position [A] using the supplied clamp.
12. Reattach the harness.
M0AN 2-181 SM
Pass all the harnesses [A] below the guide [B].
13. Pass the USB cable [B] between the ribs at the indicated locations ([A]).
SM 2-182 M0AN
Check that the harness [A] is not outside of the guide.

If the harness is outside of the guide, the harness may become damaged.
1BInstallation
Installation of the Mailbox
• When lifting the mailbox to unpack it, hold the parts circled in blue.
• Be sure not to hold the unit’s upper central part, where the feeler [A] to detect when the paper
tray is full is located.
• Do not hold other parts. Doing so may damage the exterior cover or deform the frame.
M0AN 2-183 SM
1. Attach the shoulder screw [A] (provided with this unit) to the base of the operation panel.
2. Attach the support bracket [A] (M4x6).

Use the bracket with “B” stamped on it.
3. Remove the shoulder screw from the bracket (provided with this unit), and attach the shoulder screw
[A].
SM 2-184 M0AN
4. Attach the rear cover [A] provided with this unit (hook x 2).
1BInstallation
5. Attach the rear top cover [A] provided with this unit (M3x6, hook x 1).
6. Place the mailbox on a flat surface.
• Put the mailbox on a table so that the rear part [A] is over the edge. Be careful not to drop
the mailbox.
7. Remove the orange tapes.
M0AN 2-185 SM
8. Open the right door and remove the indicated screw (M3x8).
9. Release the rear cover’s hooks [A] and [B], and then remove the rear cover by holding it at the top
and pulling it.
SM 2-186 M0AN
10. Hold the areas shown by the blue circles, and mount the mailbox on the machine.
When you mount the mail box, it is easier if you stand at the right side of the machine, facing the
bypass tray.
1BInstallation
11. Slide the mailbox from left to right as viewed from the front.
• Mount the bracket [A] on the support bracket [B] at the rear of the mailbox, and then slide it to
align the screw holes.
• Align the shoulder screw [C] with the positioning hole [D], and then slide it until it engages with
the groove behind the hole.
• Align the shoulder screw [E] with the positioning hole [F], and then slide it until it engages with
the groove behind the hole.
• Slide the mailbox plate [G] toward the stopper [H] on the machine’s mounting base until it
M0AN 2-187 SM
stops.
12. Attach the rear securing bracket [A] (hook x1).
SM 2-188 M0AN
13. Attach the front securing bracket [A] (hook x1).
1BInstallation
14. At the rear side of the mailbox, fasten the joint [A] to the indented part of the support bracket [B]
(M4x6 screw) as shown.
15. Connect the harness [A] to the relay connector on the machine, and insert the clamp attached to
the harness into the hole [B] in the machine frame.
16. Insert the top right cover [A] (provided with this unit) beneath the mailbox, and secure it to the
M0AN 2-189 SM
machine (M3x6).
17. Reattach the rear cover [A] of the mailbox. (M3x8)
18. Attach the supplied inverter tray.
19. Attach the four supplied paper exit trays.
SM 2-190 M0AN
20. Remove the canopy [A] of the upper front cover.
1BInstallation
21. Reattach the right upper cover, upper front cover, and small cover.
22. Reattach the operation panel top cover.
Make sure that the harness and USB cable are not caught when attaching the operation panel top
cover.
Installation of Stabilizers
Install stabilizers according to the following table.
Configuration Securing Right stabilizer Left stabilizer
brackets
Main unit only Not Not required Not required
required
With 2-tray PFU (or Required Required Required

Tandem Tray)
With 2-tray PFU (or Required Not required Required

Tandem Tray) and Side (Cannot be installed
LCIT because it interferes
with the LCIT.)
With Finisher Required Required Not required

(The connection between the
main unit and the finisher
functions as a stabilizer.)
With Internal Multi-fold Required Required Required

Unit
M0AN 2-191 SM
Configuration Securing Right stabilizer Left stabilizer

brackets
With Finisher and Side Not required Not required

LCIT Required (Cannot be installed (The connection between the
because it interferes main unit and the finisher
with the LCIT.) functions as a stabilizer.)
1. Remove the rear lower gap cover [A]. (hook×2)
2. Remove the brackets that secure the optional paper feed unit to the machine, and replace them with
the securing brackets [A] provided with the mailbox.
• Use the screws from the removed brackets.
3. Reattach the rear lower gap cover.
SM 2-192 M0AN
4. Remove the two covers for the stabilizers [A] at the right of the paper feed unit.
1BInstallation
5. Remove the two arms [A].
Pull out the arms while pressing the lock [B].
6. Insert the two right arms [A] (provided with the mailbox) where the old ones went (M4x6).
7. Place the right stabilizer [A] on a level floor, push it against the paper feed unit, and tighten the arms
and stabilizer together (coin screw x 4).
M0AN 2-193 SM
8. Insert the two left arms [A] until they stop.
9. Place the left stabilizer [A] on a level floor, push it against the paper feed unit, and tighten the arms
and stabilizer together (coin screw x 6).
10. Attach the caution decal at the position [A]. Two decals come with the accessories. One of them is
SM 2-194 M0AN
for use with another model, so make sure you attach the correct one.
1BInstallation
The decal cautions users not to pull out more than one tray at the same time. Be sure to instruct
users to pull out the paper feed trays one at a time when using the machine with the mailbox.
Pulling out more than one paper feed tray at the same time may cause the machine to overbalance
and topple forward.
11. Give the tray decals to the customer.

The customer will write down information such as department name or location on the decals and
attach them to the front cover.
M0AN 2-195 SM
Attention Light AL3000 (M500-36)
2.16 ATTENTION LIGHT AL3000 (M500-36)

2.16.1 COMPONENT CHECK
1 Attention Light 1
2 Harness 1
3 Bracket 1
4 Large Clamp 1
5 Small Clamp 8 Use only two in this machine.
6 Screw (M3x8) 2
7 Screw (Round-headed) (M3x8) 3
occur.
SM 2-196 M0AN
When installing the Attention Light AL3000 and the Mail Box CS3010 at the same time, install the
attention light after step 1 of Transferring the Operation Panel in the mail box installation procedure.
1. Unpack the attention light and the accessories (fixing screws, etc.) provided with this unit.
1BInstallation
and remove the upper front cover. Remove the upper front cover [A].
M0AN 2-197 SM
6. Remove the cover [A].
SM 2-198 M0AN
8. Remove the rear left cover [A] (coin screw x2).
1BInstallation
and detaching.
M0AN 2-199 SM
10. Using the flat-headed screwdriver, remove the cover [A].
12. Remove the controller box cover [A].

Red Circle: Remove, Blue Circle: Loosen
SM 2-200 M0AN
1BInstallation
14. Remove the screws and clamps securing the operation panel to the hinge.
15. Spread out the service mat [A] on top of the machine, detach the operation panel from the hinge,
and then place the operation panel face down on the mat.
Be sure the service mat remains spread out underneath the operation panel to protect the display.
M0AN 2-201 SM
16. Remove the rear center cover [A].
17. Connect the 5-pin connector [B] to the operation panel connector [A].
18. Secure the harness with the clamp and route the harness [A] along the USB cable.
19. Reattach the rear center cover of the operation panel, and then reattach the operation panel.
20. Reattach the operation panel upper cover.
SM 2-202 M0AN
21. Attach the clamps (provided with this unit) on the rear side.
1BInstallation
22. Route the harness on the rear side.
EU/AA:
23. Fix the harness on the front side.
M0AN 2-203 SM
24. Release the USB cable [A] from the cable guide.
25. Route the harness as shown below, then reattach the USB cable.
Attach the surplus length of the harness as shown below. (EU/AA only)
26. Position the clamp between the two cable ties [A]. (This is in order to prevent the harness from
SM 2-204 M0AN
coming off.)
1BInstallation
27. Connect the white 3-pin connector to CN543 [A] on the IPU.
28. Reattach the top rear cover.

29. Pull out the white 5-pin connector of the harness [A] routed in steps 22-25.
30. Reattach the covers in the following order: controller box cover, rear left cover, and rear cover.
M0AN 2-205 SM
31. Attach the bracket [A] (M3x8).
32. Attach the large clamp (provided with this unit) on the bracket.
33. Connect the harness to the connector of the attention light.
SM 2-206 M0AN
NFC Card Reader Type P11 (M512-18)
34. Attach the attention light [A] on the main machine (M3x8 round-head screws).
Make sure the harness does not get caught when attaching the attention light.
1BInstallation
35. Reattach the covers in the following order: top right cover, upper front cover, and small cover.
2.16.3 INDICATOR BEHAVIOR

When multiple conditions coincide, statuses are indicated in the following order:
Priority Indication Machine Status
1 Lights in red Unable to execute a job.
User intervention required to resume job.
For example, a condition such as the following has occurred:
• Normal SC (SC type D)
• Fatal SC (SC type A)
• Paper misfeed
• Memory full
• Paper end
• Toner end
2 Flashes in yellow The following borderline condition occurred while executing a job:
• Toner near end
• Waste toner near end
• Paper near end*1
3 Flashes in blue Data-in
4 Lights in blue Printing
5 Unlit Status other than those described in 1, 2, 3, and 4.
*1: For the paper near-end status, the indicator flashes yellow only if "Low Paper Indicator (Yellow
Flashing)" is set to "Active" in "User Tools" icon > "Machine Features" > "System Settings" > "Basic
Settings".
2.17 NFC CARD READER TYPE P11 (M512-18)

1 Reader Spacer 1
2 Reader Cover 1
M0AN 2-207 SM

3 Reader Holder 1
4 NFC Reader 1
5 Sponge Cushions 2
6 Lower Cover 1
7 Upper Cover 1
8 Screw (M3x20) 3
9 Screw (M3x10) 1
10 Screw (M3x8) 6
11 Tapping screw (M5x13) 1 This screw is used for making threaded holes in the cover.
12 Clamp 4 Not used in this machine
13 Stick-type Clamp 5
14 Bracket A 1 Not used in this machine
15 Bracket B 1
16 Bracket for Side Table 1
17 USB cable 800mm 1
18 Ferrite Core 2
- Decal: RoHS 1
occur.
SM 2-208 M0AN
1BInstallation
2. Open the right cover, then remove the screw.
M0AN 2-209 SM
6. Remove the operation panel right cover [A].
SM 2-210 M0AN
7. Connect the USB cable (800mm) to the machine’s operation panel connector.
1BInstallation
M0AN 2-211 SM
8. Pass the connector at the other end of the cable through the gap in the hinge.
If it is difficult to pass the cable through, loosen the two screws of the hinge to widen the gap. After
passing the USB cable through, fasten the screws again.
9. Make a single loop in the part of the cable which has passed through the gap in the hinge, and
attach the ferrite core [A] to it.
10. Reattach the operation panel right cover.

When reattaching the cover, pass the USB cable through the U-shaped groove [A] at the hinge of
the operation panel and notch [B] on the cover under the cover.
SM 2-212 M0AN
11. Pass the USB cable through the hole at the front [A].
1BInstallation
12. Reattach the operation panel upper cover.
Depending on the part where the NFC reader is attached, store the surplus part of the USB cable
under the operation panel upper cover.
Store the ferrite core behind the operation panel upper cover as shown below:
When attaching the cover, be careful not to trap the USB cable or harness between the covers.
13. Attach Bracket B [A] to the machine’s right frame (M3x8).
M0AN 2-213 SM
14. Thread holes in the removed right upper cover (3 points).
• Using the supplied tapping screw (M5x13) [A], position the screw at the center part of the
guide rib and thread each hole. After threading each hole, use a tool such as a
screwdriver to enlarge the hole so that the fastening screw (M3x20) can go through it.
• Be careful not to drop the shavings into the machine (do not leave shavings around the
holes).
15. Reattach the covers in the following order: right upper cover [A], upper front cover [B], small cover.
When attaching the right upper cover, pass the USB cable through the notch [C] in the right upper
cover.
16. Pass the USB cable through the groove in the cover.
SM 2-214 M0AN
17. Attach the bracket for side table [A] to the right upper cover (M3x20).
1BInstallation
18. Attach the lower cover [A] by engaging it with the two tabs on Bracket B (M3x8).
19. Attach the upper cover [A] (M3x10).
M0AN 2-215 SM
20. Attach the reader spacer [B] to the reader holder [A].
21. Attach the sponge cushions [A] to two points on the reader spacer as shown.
22. Make a single loop in the USB cable, and then attach the ferrite core [A].
Attach the ferrite core to the cable 45 mm away from the cable end.
SM 2-216 M0AN
23. Connect the USB cable to the NFC reader.
1BInstallation
24. Place the NFC reader [A] on the spacer [B], and then attach the reader cover [C].
Be careful not to trap the USB cable between the covers.
25. Remove the release paper [A] at the back of the reader holder, and then secure the NFC reader
on the table.
M0AN 2-217 SM
External NFC Card Reader Bracket Type P11 (M512-17)
26. As required, use the stick-type clamps [A] to secure the USB cable.
2.18 EXTERNAL NFC CARD READER BRACKET TYPE P11

(M512-17)
1 Reader Spacer 1
2 Reader Cover 1
3 Reader Holder 1
4 Sponge Cushions 2
5 Lower Cover 1
6 Upper Cover 1
7 Screw (M3x20) 3
8 Screw (M3x10) 1
9 Screw (M3x8) 6
10 Tapping screw (M5x13) 1 This screw is used for making threaded holes in the cover.
11 Clamp 4
12 Stick-type Clamp 5
13 Bracket A 1 Not used in this machine
14 Bracket B 1
15 Bracket for Side Table 1
16 Ferrite Core 2
- Decal: RoHS 1
SM 2-218 M0AN
1BInstallation
An IC card reader and a USB cable (recommended length: 800 mm) are not included with this unit. The
customers must obtain these themselves, and the technicians must install them.
The installation procedure depends on whether the USB type is a USB mini [A] or standard type A [B]
connector.
In the case of USB mini, connect directly to the control panel (in the same way as for the NFC Card
Reader Type P11); in the case of standard type A, connect to the machine’s interface connector.
Procedure for Connecting to the Operation Panel USB Slot

The installation procedure is the same as for NFC Card Reader Type P11. For details, see NFC Card
Reader Type P11 (M512-18)
M0AN 2-219 SM
The IC card reader provided by the customer may be too thick to attach to the reader cover. If this
happens, it is not necessary to attach the spacer to the reader holder. Directly attach the sponge
cushions [B] to the IC card reader holder [A].
Procedure for Connecting to the Main Machine USB Slot
When installing this option, turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If
installing without turning OFF the main power, an electric shock or a malfunction may occur.
SM 2-220 M0AN
1BInstallation
and remove the upper front cover. Remove the upper front cover [A].
M0AN 2-221 SM
and detaching.
6. Remove the cover [A] over the machine’s USB slot and pass the cable through.
SM 2-222 M0AN
1BInstallation
8. Connect the USB cable [A] to the machine’s USB port.
There are two USB ports. You can connect to either.
9. Pass the USB cable from the back to the right side of the machine.
Pass the cable behind the pillar [A].
10. Clamp the cable at four points on the right side.

Use the clamps supplied with this option.
M0AN 2-223 SM
11. Attach Bracket B [A] to the machine’s right frame (M3x8).
12. Thread the holes in the removed right upper cover (3 points).
• Using the supplied tapping screw (M5x13) [A], position the screw to the center part of the
guide rib and thread each hole. After threading each hole, use a tool such as a
screwdriver to enlarge the hole so that the fastening screw (M3x20) can go through it.
• Be careful not to drop the shavings in the machine (do not leave shavings around the
holes).
13. Reattach the covers in the following order: right upper cover [A], upper front cover [B], small cover.
SM 2-224 M0AN
When attaching the right upper cover, pass the USB cable through the notch [C] in the right upper
cover.
1BInstallation
14. Pass the USB cable through the groove in the cover.
15. Attach the bracket for side table [A] to the right upper cover (M3x20).
M0AN 2-225 SM
16. Attach the lower cover [A] by engaging it with the two tabs on Bracket B (M3x8).
17. Attach the upper cover [A] (M3x10).
18. Attach the reader spacer [B] to the reader holder [A].
The IC card reader may be too thick to attach the reader cover. If this happens, it is not necessary
to attach the spacer to the reader holder.
19. Attach the sponge cushions [A] on two points on the reader spacer as shown.
SM 2-226 M0AN
If you do not attach the spacer, attach them to the reader holder.
1BInstallation
Attach the ferrite core to the cable at a point 45 mm away from the cable end.
21. Connect the USB cable to the NFC reader.
M0AN 2-227 SM
Internal Options
22. Place the NFC reader [A] on the spacer [B], and then attach the reader cover [C].
Be careful not to trap the USB cable between the covers.
23. Remove the release paper [A] at the back of the reader holder, and then secure the NFC reader
on the table.
24. As required, use the stick-type clamps [A] to secure the USB cable.
2.19 INTERNAL OPTIONS
SM 2-228 M0AN
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0-17)
1BInstallation
Slot Option
[A] USB mini Usually the cover is attached. It is not used by the user.
[B] USB port (type A) Used for IC card authentication *1
[C] USB port (type B) For printing via USB, a USB port on the Extended USB Board is used.
[D] Ethernet port Used for the print function (via network)
[E] SD card slot Refer to SD Card Slots
[F] I/F slot Used for one of the following internal options:
• Extended USB Board Type M19 (D3BS-01)
• IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0-17)
• IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n Interface Unit Type M19 (D3BR-01)
• RC-GATE
*1 There is no difference between the left and right USB ports.
2.20 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 (D3C0-17)

1 IEEE 1284 Interface Board 1
2 FCC document 1
3 Notes for users 1
M0AN 2-229 SM
IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19 (D3C0-17)
occur.
• Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury.
• Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body. There
is a possibility that the IEEE 1284 Interface Board may malfunction due to static electricity.
1. Remove the slot cover. (coin screw x2)
2. Insert the IEEE 1284 Interface Board into the I/F slot. (coin screw x2)

SM 2-230 M0AN
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n Interface Unit Type M19 (D3BR-01)
4. Print out the "Configuration Page", and then check if this option is correctly recognized.
• User Tools > Machine Features > Printer Features > List/Test Page > Configuration Page
• The customer should keep the slot covers which were removed.
2.21 IEEE 802.11A/B/G/N INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BR-

01)
1BInstallation
1 IEEE802.11a/b/g/n Unit 1
2 Clamps 8
3 Velcro Fasteners 2
4 Notes for Users 2
• Since disassembly/alteration of a wireless LAN board is illegal, during service replacements,

replace the whole PCB assembly.
• Be sure to give the provided leaflet to the customer.
M0AN 2-231 SM
occur.
SM 2-232 M0AN
• Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body. There
is a possibility that the extension wireless LAN board may malfunction due to static electricity.
• When using wireless LAN (IEEE802.11 b/g/n:2.4-GHz band), this radio product uses the 2.4-
GHz band. Check that industrial, scientific and medical devices using the same frequency
bands, such as a microwave oven or a cordless telephone, are not used nearby.
1BInstallation
• If there is interference, communication may become unstable. Check that there are no devices
likely to cause interference in the surrounding area.
Attaching the boards

1. Remove the slot cover [A] (coin screw x 2).
2. Insert the extended wireless LAN board [A] into the slot (coin screw x 2)
• Press the extended wireless LAN board firmly in, and check it is firmly connected.
M0AN 2-233 SM
Attaching the Antenna

1. Attach the velcro fastener [B] (provided with this unit) on the antenna [A].
• Attach the velcro fastener to the bottom half of the case (where the cable is located).
• You may attach the velcro fastener on either side of the case.
2. Peel the backing paper off the velcro fastener, and attach the antennas [A] and [B] as shown.
• When attaching 2 antennas, attach them at least 12 cm or more away from each other.
• Take care to loop it around so that it does not interfere with other options or I/F cables.
SM 2-234 M0AN
2.21.3 USER TOOL SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11A/B/G/N

Go into the User Tools mode and do the procedure below. These settings take effect every time the
machine is powered on.
• IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n function is disabled while using Ethernet.
1BInstallation
1. Press the "User Tools" icon.
2. Press "Machine Features" > "System Settings".
• Select "Interface Settings"> "Network" > "LAN Type". The "LAN Type" (default: Ethernet)
must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.
3. Select "Interface Settings"> "Wireless LAN". Only the wireless LAN options show.
4. Set the "Communication Mode".
5. Enter the "SSID setting". (The setting is case sensitive.)
6. Set the "Ad-hoc Channel". You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected. The allowed range
for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
• For mainly Europe and Asia

2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
5180 - 5240 MHz (36, 40, 44 and 48 channels)
(default: 11)
• In some countries, only the following channels are available: 2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11
channels)
• For mainly North America

2412 - 2462 MHz (1 - 11 channels)
5180 - 5240 MHz (36, 40, 44 and 48 channels)
(default: 11)
7. Set the "Security Method" to specify the encryption of the Wireless LAN.
• The "WEP" (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless data
transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded
data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
• Range of Allowed Settings:

64 bit: 10 characters
128 bit: 26 characters
M0AN 2-235 SM
HDD Option Type P13 (M513-19)
• Specify "WPA2" when "Communication Mode" is set to "Infrastructure Mode". Set the "WPA2
Authent. Method".
• WPA2 Authent. Method:

Select either "WPA2-PSK" or "WPA2".
If you select "WPA2-PSK", enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8-63 characters in ASCII
code.
When "WPA2" is selected, authentication settings and certificate installation settings are
required.
8. Press "Wireless LAN Signal" to check the machine's radio wave status using the operation panel.
• Press "Restore Factory Defaults" to initialize the wireless LAN settings.
2.21.4 SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11 WIRELESS LAN

The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11
SP No. Name Function
SP5-840- Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the country.
006
SP5-840- Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed for your
007 country.
SP5-840- WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
011
UP mode Name Function
SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used
for the WEP Key entry.
WPA2 Authent. Used to confirm the current WPA authentication setting and pre-
Method shared key.
2.22 HDD OPTION TYPE P13 (M513-19)

1 HDD 1
2 Power Cord 1
3 FFC 1
4 Coin Screw 3
- EMC Address 1
SM 2-236 M0AN
1BInstallation
occur.
• Before beginning work, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static
electricity. Static electricity can damage the HDD option.
• Do not give a physical shock to an HDD.
1. Remove the rear left cover (coin screw x 2).
M0AN 2-237 SM
2. Install the HDD option in the indicated position.
3. Connect the power cord and FFC to the HDD option.
4. Hook the mounting indents on the HDD option onto the tabs on the side frame.
SM 2-238 M0AN
5. Fasten the HDD option (coin screw x2).
1BInstallation
6. Fasten the HDD option to the controller board (coin screw x1).
7. Connect the power cord and FFC to the controller board.
M0AN 2-239 SM
Extended USB Board Type M19 (D3BS-01)
8. Reattach the rear left cover (coin screw x 2).

Initialization (formatting) of the HDD automatically starts.
11. Select "HDD" in "Advanced Options" tab of the printer driver.
Follow the procedure below on Windows 7 as an example;
(1) Point to the "Start" menu > "Devices and Printers", and right click the printer icon.
(2) Click "Printer Properties", and click the "Advanced Options" tab.
(3) Select "HDD".
2.23 EXTENDED USB BOARD TYPE M19 (D3BS-01)

No Items Q’ty Remarks
1 Extended USB Board 1
SM 2-240 M0AN
Extended USB Board Type M19 (D3BS-01)
occur.
1BInstallation
• Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body.
1. Remove the slot cover. (coin screw x 2)
2. Insert the Extended USB Board into the I/F slot. (coin screw x 2)

•
M0AN 2-241 SM
SD Card Options
2.24 SD CARD OPTIONS

2.24.1 SD CARD SLOTS
[A]: SD card slot 1 (option slot)

[B]: SD card slot 2 (service slot)
2.24.2 LIST OF SLOTS USED

Optional SD cards can be set in either slot 1 or slot 2. But slot 2 is the service slot, so we recommend
that you use slot 1 to install the SD card options.
SD card options for this machine
• VM Card Type P13 (VM Card Type P13 (M513-25, -26, -27))
• IPDS Unit Type P13 (IPDS Unit Type P13 (M513-13, -14, -15))
• XPS Direct Print Option Type P13 (XPS Direct Print Option Type P13 (M513-09, -10, -11))
• PostScript3 Unit Type P13 (PostScript3 Unit Type P13 (M513-22, -23, -24))
• In this machine, it is possible to transfer data from a "Postscript3 Unit" SD card, unlike in
earlier models, due to a change in the software licensing (the part of the Postscript software
that requires licensing is now built into the controller, so the portion on the SD card can be
moved to another SD card).
2.25 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

2.25.1 OVERVIEW
Since there are only two SD card slots (one of them is a service slot), three or more SD card
applications cannot be used simultaneously.
However, if multiple SD card applications are merged, three or more SD card options can be used.
This function is referred to as the "SD card merge function".
The "SD card merge function" is a function which enables the use of three or more functions within
SM 2-242 M0AN
SD Card Appli Move
the capacity of two SD cards by physically transferring the function of one SD card to other SD cards
(all SD card options can be stored in two SD cards).
However, SD card applications are under license, therefore, since an SD card license after merge is
transferred to the target SD card, it cannot be used even if it is moved to the target machine.
Also, a process to prevent illegal copying is performed.
1BInstallation
• After merge, store the empty SD card in the location shown below.
M0AN 2-243 SM
SD Card Appli Move
4. Insert the SD card in the storage location [A] inside the cover.
5. Reattach the upper front cover and small cover.
2.25.2 MOVE EXEC

"Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you move application programs from the original SD card to another
SD card.
• When merging SD cards, any type of SD card can be used.

1. Turn the OFF the main power.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]. (coin screw x 1)
3. Set the destination SD card (SD card where data is to be stored) in Slot 1 [A], and set the original
SM 2-244 M0AN
SD Card Appli Move
SD card (SD card from which data is to be transferred) in Slot 2 [B].
1BInstallation
4. Turn ON the main power, and press [ENTER] in SP5-873-001 (SD Card Appli Move: Move Exec).
5. When a confirmation screen is displayed, press [ENTER] (it takes about 2 - 3 minutes).
• If [CANCEL] is pressed, the display returns to the previous screen.

• Note that if the power supply is turned off, a panel operation is performed, or the cover is
opened during merge, it will result in a malfunction.
6. When merge is complete, and the following screen is displayed, press [CLOSE].
• If the process is terminated abnormally, perform the merge in SP mode again.

• If the capacity of the destination SD card is insufficient, the merge operation cannot be
performed.
7. Press [END] twice.

9. Remove the empty SD card after transfer from Slot 2.
10. Reattach the slot cover [A]. (coin screw x 1)
11. Turn ON the main power, output the system setting list, and check that the options are recognized
correctly.
M0AN 2-245 SM
SD Card Appli Move
2.25.3 UNDO EXEC

"Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you move back application programs from an SD card in Slot 1 (upper)
to the original SD card in Slot 2 (lower). You can use this program when, for example, you have
mistakenly copied some programs by using "Move Exec".

2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]. (coin screw x 1)
3. Insert the integrated SD card in Slot 1 [A: Upper].
4. Insert the SD card which became empty after integration in Slot 2 (B: lower slot).
5. Turn On the main power, and press [ENTER] in SP5-873-002 (SD Card Appli Move: Undo Exec).
6. When a confirmation screen is displayed, press [ENTER].
• If [CANCEL] is pressed, the display returns to the previous screen.

• Note that if the power supply is turned off, a panel operation is performed, or the cover is
opened during cancellation, it will result in a malfunction.
7. When cancellation is complete, press [CLOSE].

8. Press [END] twice.
SM 2-246 M0AN
PostScript3 Unit Type P13 (M513-22, -23, -24)
10. Reattach the SD card slot cover [A]. (coin screw x 1)
1BInstallation
11. Turn ON the main power, and check that the application has been deleted.
2.26 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE P13 (M513-22, -23, -24)

1 SD Card (PostScript3 Unit) 1
2 PS3 Decal 1
2.26.2 OVERVIEW OF POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE P13 (ADOBE PS)

This machine is equipped with a clone program for emulating Adobe PostScript/PDF (hereafter “Clone
PS”) as a standard feature. So, by factory default, it can perform printing using PostScript 3 and PDF
Direct Print, in addition to RPCS.
However, the variety and number of built-in fonts (device fonts) differ between Adobe PS and Clone PS,
sometimes resulting in different printing results.
To address the possible customer needs listed below, the PostScript3 Unit Type P13 is made available
as an option.
• When you want to use device fonts supplied with Adobe PS.
• Since forms and ledgers have been created based on device fonts supplied with Adobe PS, a
changeover to Clone PS requires redesign of these documents.
• From the viewpoint of precise printing operation, it is impossible to accept any differences in output
M0AN 2-247 SM
results in comparison with Adobe PS.
For details of the functions of Adobe PS and Clone PS, refer to Adobe PS vs. Clone PS.
2.26.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (ADOBE PS)
occur.
• Clone PS and Adobe PS cannot be run simultaneously. If PostScript3 Unit Type P13 (Adobe
PS) is installed, Clone PS will be disabled.
• When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation (SD Card Appli Move).
1. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] (coin screw x 1).
2. Insert the PS3 SD card in SD card slot 1 [A: Upper Slot].
3. Reattach the SD card slot cover (coin screw x 1).
SM 2-248 M0AN
4. Stick the "Adobe PostScript3" decal [A] on the front face of the machine.
1BInstallation
Adobe PostScript3 installation starts.
6. Press [Restart] when the following message appears.
Note that the description of Firmware Version shown in the printed Configuration Page differs
between Clone PS and Adobe PS.
PS type Description of Firmware Version
When PostScript3 Unit Type P13 (Adobe RPCS [x.xx.xx] Adobe PostScript 3 [x.xx],
PS) is installed Adobe PDF [x.xx]
Clone PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] PS3 [x.xx], PDF [x.xx]
Initial Settings for the Printer Driver

After installation of an SD card, configure the settings for the printer driver in accordance with the type
of PS to be used.
The same printer driver, PS3 printer driver, can be used for printing either for Adobe PS or Clone PS.
• Setting items (Windows):

In an environment where interactive communication is enabled, the machine attempts to acquire
information to perform automatic configuration.
When manual configuration is to be performed, select “Adobe PostScript” if Adobe PS is used, and
choose “Emulated PostScript” if Clone PS is used.
M0AN 2-249 SM
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].

2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Printer properties].
4. Click the “Accessories” tab and configure settings for Adobe PS/Clone PS using the PostScript pull-
down menu.
• Setting items (Mac OS X):

If the driver is installed by means of the Bonjour function or “HP Jetdirect - Socket”, the settings will
be automatically configured.
Automatic configuration will not work if any other protocol is used for installation. In this case,
manual configuration is required.
When manual configuration is to be performed, select “Adobe PostScript” if Adobe PS is used, and
“Emulated PostScript” if Clone PS is used.
Switching back to Clone PS from Adobe PS

Clone PS can be resumed by removing the Adobe PS card from the SD card slot and applying the
firmware for Clone PS/PDF (“.fwu” or “.rfu”).
Note: The work should be carried out by customer engineers.
In doing this, be sure to apply both PS3 and PDF firmware modules. If only one of them is applied, the
machine will not operate properly. (As a stopgap measure to fix the malfunction, insert the optional
Adobe PS card again into the SD card slot to enable the use of Adobe PS. Then, Clone PS can be
resumed by applying both the PS3 and PDF firmware modules once again.)
Classification Firmware name Software part number
Clone PS IRIPS Font M1365277
IRIPS PS3 M0AN5544
component firmware
IRIPS PDF M0AN5546
Adobe PS Adobe PS3 M5135731
Adobe PDF M5135733
SM 2-250 M0AN
XPS Direct Print Option Type P13 (M513-09, -10, -11)
Classification Firmware name Software part number

component firmware PS3 Font D2415681
2.27 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE P13 (M513-09, -10, -11)
No. Description Q'ty Remarks
1BInstallation
1 SD Card (XPS Direct Print) 1
occur.
1. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] (Coin screw x 1).
M0AN 2-251 SM
VM Card Type P13 (M513-25, -26, -27)
2. Insert the XPS SD card in SD card slot 1 [A: Upper Slot].

2.28 VM CARD TYPE P13 (M513-25, -26, -27)

1 SD Card (VM Card) 1
occur.
• If using the VM Card, it is necessary to install the hard disk.

SM 2-252 M0AN
IPDS Unit Type P13 (M513-13, -14, -15)
1BInstallation
2. Insert the VM card in SD card slot 1 [A: Upper Slot].
3. Reattach the SD card slot cover (coin screw x 1).

2.29 IPDS UNIT TYPE P13 (M513-13, -14, -15)

No. Description Q'ty Remarks
1 SD Card (IPDS Unit) 1
M0AN 2-253 SM
IPDS Unit Type P13 (M513-13, -14, -15)
occur.
2. Insert the IPDS card in SD card slot 1 [A: Upper Slot].
3. Reattach the SD card slot cover (Coin screw x 1).

SM 2-254 M0AN
@Remote Settings
2.30 @REMOTE SETTINGS
• Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site. For details,
ask the @Remote key person.
Check points before making @Remote settings
1BInstallation
1. The setting of SP5-816-201 in the mainframe must be "0".
2. Print the SMC with SP5-990-002 and then check if a device ID2 (SP5-811-003) must be correctly
programmed.
• 6 spaces must be put between the 3-digit prefix and the following 8-digit number (e.g.
xxx______xxxxxxxx).
• ID2 (SP5-811-003) and the serial number (SP5-811-001) must be the same (e.g. ID2:
A01______23456789 = serial No. A0123456789)
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise, the
3. The following settings must be correctly programmed.

• Proxy server IP address (SP5-816-063)
• Proxy server Port number (SP5-816-064)
• Proxy User ID (SP5-816-065)
• Proxy Password (SP5-816-066)
4. Get a Request Number
Execute the @Remote Settings

2. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then enter [OK]
with SP5-816-202.
3. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5-816-203.
4. Check the confirmation result with SP5-816-204.
Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround
0 Succeeded -
3 Communication error (proxy Check the network condition.
enabled)
disabled)
5 Proxy error (authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
6 Communication error Check the network condition.
8 Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this.
9 Request number confirmation Processing… Please wait.
M0AN 2-255 SM
@Remote Settings

executing
11 Already registered -
12 Parameter error -
20 Dial-up authentication error * These errors occur only in the modems that
support @Remote.
21 Answer tone detection error
22 Carrier detection error
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
24 Low power supply current
25 unplugged modem
26 Busy line
5. Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5-816-205 only when it has
been input at the Center GUI.
6. Click [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5-816-206.

7. Check the registration result with SP5-816-207.
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
2 Already registered Check the registration status.
enabled)
disabled)
5 Proxy error (Authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
8 Other error See "SP5-816-208 Error Codes" below this.
9 Request number confirmation Processing… Please wait.
executing
11 Already registered -
12 Parameter error -
20 Dial-up authentication error * These errors occur only in the modems that
support @Remote.
21 Answer tone detection error
22 Carrier detection error
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
24 Low power supply current
25 unplugged modem
26 Busy line
8. Exit the SP mode.

SP5-816-208 Error Codes
Caused by Operation Error, Incorrect Setting
SM 2-256 M0AN
@Remote Settings
Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround

- Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring Obtain a Request Number before
12002 Request No. attempting the Inquiry or Registration.
- Attempted registration without execution of a Perform Confirmation before
12003 confirmation and no previous registration. attempting the Registration.
- Attempted setting with illegal entries for Check ID2 of the mainframe.
12004 certification and ID2.
1BInstallation
- @Remote communication is prohibited. The Make sure that "Remote Service" in
12005 device has an Embedded RC gate-related User Tools is set to "Do not prohibit".
problem.
- A confirmation request was made after the Execute registration.
12006 confirmation had been already completed.
- The request number used at registration was Check Request No.
12007 different from the one used at confirmation.
- Update certification failed because mainframe was Check the mainframe condition. If the
12008 in use. mainframe is in use, try again later.
- The ID2 in the NVRAM does not match the ID2 in Check ID2 of the mainframe.
12009 the individual certification.
- The certification area is not initialized. Initialize the certification area.
12010
M0AN 2-257 SM
@Remote Settings
Error Caused by Response from GW URL

Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
-2385 Other error
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for the same mainframe Check the registration condition of the mainframe
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 External RCG not managed
-2394 Mainframe not managed
-2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal.
-2396 Mainframe ID for external RCG is illegal.
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format Check the ID2 of the mainframe.
-2398 Incorrect request number format Check the Request No.
SP descriptions
• SP5-816-201 (Remote Service: Regist Status DFU(SSP))

Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the registered device by the external nor embedded RCG device is set.
1: The embedded RCG device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this status, this
unit cannot answer a polling request from the external RCG.
2: The embedded RCG device is set. In this status, the external RCG unit cannot answer a polling
request.
3: The registered device by the external RCG is being set. In this status the embedded RCG device
cannot be set.
4: The registered module by the external RCG has not started.
• SP5-990-002 (SP Print Mode: SP(Mode Data List)

• SP5-811-003 (Machine No. Setting: ID2 Code Display)

Sets the ID-2 code used to identify the @remote device at installation.
SM 2-258 M0AN
@Remote Settings
• SP5-816-063 (Remote Service: Proxy server IP address)

This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between the RCG device and
the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address.
The address is necessary to set up the embedded RCG-N.
The address display is limited to 127 characters. Characters beyond the 127
characters are ignored.
1BInstallation
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
• SP5-816-064 (Remote Service: Proxy server Port number)

This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between the embedded
RCG-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up the embedded RC Gate-N.
This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
• SP5-816-065 (Remote Service: Proxy User ID)

This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character is
ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
• SP5-816-066 (Remote Service: Proxy Password)

This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character is
ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
• SP5-816-202 (Remote Service: Letter Number DFU(SSP))

Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the RCG-N device.
• SP5-816-203 (Remote Service: Confirm Execute)

Executes the inquiry request to the @Remote GW URL.
• SP5-816-204 (Remote Service: Confirm Result DFU(SSP))

Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203.
• SP5-816-205 (Remote Service: Confirm Place DFU(SSP))

Displays the installed section informed from G/W for response of request number inquiry if the
section is enrolled on the G/W.
• SP5-816-206 (Remote Service: Register Execute)

Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
• SP5-816-207 (Remote Service: Register Result DFU(SSP)

Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
M0AN 2-259 SM
Operation Guidance for Users
2.31 OPERATION GUIDANCE FOR USERS

Function/Operation Instruction to provide
Basic machine functions, • How to load the toner bottle
operations • How to load paper and other consumables/supplies
• How to turn the main power switch ON/OFF
• How to clear paper jams
• How to program, modify, and delete Address Book entries
• How to customize the UI and home screen
• Overview of machine options/peripherals
• How to take the proper action for SC errors (clearing the error,
contacting service and support, etc.), how to interpret @Remote
notifications
• Important notes to keep in mind whenever moving the machine
• Product limitations
Printer • How to install printer drivers (using the recommended method)
• How to connect to a PC (performing the port settings)
• How to print out a test page
• Overview of various settings inside each tab in the printer driver (e.g.
duplex printing)
SM 2-260 M0AN
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PM Parts Settings
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 PM PARTS SETTINGS
3.1.1 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OF THE PM PARTS
2BPreventive
Maintenance
When you replace the PM parts, you need to reset the PM counter manually.
There are two ways to reset the PM counter for this machine.
• Method 1: Reset by SP3-701 (Manual New Unit Set). This is the conventional method.
• Method 2: Reset by [PM Counter / New Unit Set] Menu.
"Method 2" is recommended for its ease of operation.
• For the following units, there is a new unit detection mechanism. It is not necessary to reset
PM counters.
- Fusing unit
- PCDU
- Waste Toner Bottle (When the machine stopped because the waste toner bottle was full)
- Transfer Roller Unit
• If you only replace the development unit (not replacing the PCU), the PCU counter will not be
cleared when you set SP3-701-023 (Manual New Unit Set: Development Unit) in advance.
• Toner recycling mode is not available.
Method 1: By SP3701
2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004.
Set the following SPs (New Unit Detection) to "1".
Item SP
PCU SP3-701-002
Development Unit SP3-701-023
Waste Toner Bottle SP3-701-142
(When the bottle is replaced before the machine detects bottle full and stops)
3. Turn the main power switch OFF, and disconnect the power cord from the outlet.
M0AN 3-1 SM
PM Parts Settings
4. Replace the PM parts and turn the main power ON.

The machine will reset the PM counters automatically. In the case of the development unit,
developer initialization will also be done automatically.
Method 2: By [PM Counter / New Unit Set] Menu

2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004.
3. Press [PM Counter / New Unit Set].
4. Press [All PM Parts List : New Unit Set].
5. Set the PM part that you want to replace to "YES" under "New Unit Set".
After pressing "YES", the [Exit] key will not be available.
SM 3-2 M0AN
PM Parts Settings
2BPreventive
Maintenance
6. Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
7. Replace the PM parts and turn the main power ON.
The machine will reset the PM counters automatically. In the case of the development unit,
developer initialization will also be done automatically.
3.1.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS

1. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter values.
2. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-621, or SP7-944. If the PM
counter for a unit was not reset, then execute the new unit detect setting with SP3-701 again and
turn the machine OFF/ON.
3. Make sure that the exchange counter counts up with SP7-853.

4. Make sure that the counters for the previous units (SP7-908) on the new SMC logging data list (from
step 2 above) are equal to the counters (SP7-621, or SP7-944) for these units on the previous
SMC logging data list (the list that was output in the "Before removing the old parts" section).
5. Make sure that the unit replacement date is updated with SP7-950.
SP descriptions
• SP7-621-001 (PM Counter Display: Paper)
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed.
Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter – Previous (SP7-
906-2 to 10) and is reset to "0".
• SP7-625 (Previous Unit Counter: Pages)

Displays the number of sheets printed for the previous unit.
M0AN 3-3 SM
PM Parts List
• SP7-853 (Replace Counter)

Displays the number of times each PM part has been replaced.
• SP7-906 (Previous Unit Counter:Distance)

Displays the rotation distance of the previous drum.
• SP7-908 (Previous Unit Counter: Pages (%))

Displays the PM counter of the previous PM Part which was replaced last time.
• SP7-944 (PM Counter Display: Distance)

Displays the rotation distance of the current drum.
• SP7-950 (Unit Replacement Date)

Displays the replacement date of each PM unit.
• SP5-990
3.2 PM PARTS LIST

See “Appendices” for the following information:
• Preventive Maintenance Items
SM 3-4 M0AN
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Notes on the Main Power Switch
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH
4.1.1 PUSH SWITCH
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch from the
conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications different from the
rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch)

Power is supplied to the machine even when the main power switch is turned OFF.
The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if the AC power cord is connected
to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller board, the operation unit and other modules
even when the main power is turned OFF. When replacing the controller board and the operation unit in
this state, not only these boards, it will damage other electrical components.
So, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning off the main
power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine there
is still residual charge.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine for a while there is still
residual charge. Therefore, if you remove boards in this state, it can cause a blown fuse or memory
failure.
• How to remove the residual charge inside the machine

After you unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlet, in order to remove the residual charge
from inside the machine, be sure to press the main power switch. Thus, the charge remaining in
the machine is released, and it is possible to remove boards.
When you reconnect the AC power cord into an AC wall outlet, the machine will start
automatically.
In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch while you disconnect the AC power
cord. At that time, the power ON flag inside the machine is set. Therefore, after you finish work on the
machine and reconnect the power cord to the AC, even if you do not press the main power switch, the
machine will start automatically and the moving parts will begin to move. When working on moving
parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get caught.
M0AN 4-1 SM
Notes on the Main Power Switch
• Automatic restart deals with cases when you accidentally unplugged the AC power cord or
unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after the resumption of power, the
machine will start up automatically.
In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does not start
automatically. In this case, the machine has not failed. The cause is due to the timing of releasing the
residual charge. If you press the main power switch while the residual charge was already released, the
power ON flag will not be set. At this time, start the machine manually by pressing the main power
switch.
Shutdown Method
1. Press the main power switch [A] on the machine.
2. The shutdown message appears. After the shutdown process, the main power is turned off
automatically.
The operation panel and the main power indicator are turned off when the machine completes the
shutdown.
• Even after the shutdown message disappears, do not disconnect the power cord while the
main power indicator [A] is flashing to indicate that the machine is still shutting down.
SM 4-2 M0AN
Beforehand
• Before removing and adjusting electrical boards, do the following procedure. Otherwise, the
board can be damaged by the residual charge inside the machine and must be replaced.
1. Take out the power cord after shutdown.

2. Press the power switch for a second to remove the residual charge inside the machine.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
Forced Shutdown
In case normal shutdown does not complete for some reason, the machine has a forced shutdown
function.
To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds.
In general, do not use the forced shutdown.
• Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to the
machine. Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable.
4.2 BEFOREHAND
• Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord.
• After replacing, make sure that all removed harnesses are connected up again and secured in
their clamps.
4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

The following special tools should be prepared for maintenance of this model in the field.
Unique or Common:
U: Unique for this model
C: Common with listed model
Item Part Number Description Q’ty Unique or Common
1 B6455020 SD Card (1GB) 1 C (General)
2 B6455060 SD Card (16GB) 1 C (General)
3 A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1 C (General)
4 C4019503 20× Magnification Scope 1 C (General)
5 VSSG9002 FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE: 100G 1 C (General)
• A PC (Personal Computer) is required for creating the Encryption key file on an SD card when
replacing the controller board in which HDD encryption has been enabled.
M0AN 4-3 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS

Precautions concerning Stabilizers
The stabilizers [A] are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the international
standard for safety.
The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy, from toppling as a result of
people running into or leaning onto the products, which can lead to serious accidents such as persons
becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1)
4.4.2 OVERVIEW
Front and Rear Covers
No. Cover name

1 Upper front cover
2 Front cover
3 Main power switch cover
4 Rear left cover
5 Rear cover
6 Rear lower cover
SM 4-4 M0AN
Exterior Covers
Left and Right Side Covers
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
No. Cover name
1 Left rear cover
2 Controller cover
3 Left cover
4 Left upper cover
5 Right upper cover
6 Right door
7 Right rear cover
Paper Exit Covers/Top Covers
No. Cover name

1 Paper exit cover
2 Upper inner cover
3 Top rear cover
4 Top right cover

5 Operation panel upper cover
6 Paper exit front cover
7 Paper exit lower cover
8 Paper exit tray
M0AN 4-5 SM
Exterior Covers
Inner Cover
The colors of parts and decals may vary depending on the model.
No. Cover name

1 Inner cover
4.4.3 QUICK REFERENCE FOR REMOVING COVERS
4.4.4 FRONT COVER

1. Open the front cover [A].
SM 4-6 M0AN
Exterior Covers
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
2. Unhook the belt tip and detach it [A].
3. Pressing down the stopper [A], slide the front cover [B] to the right and detach it.
M0AN 4-7 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.5 CONTROLLER COVER

1. Remove the rear left cover.(Rear Left Cover)
2. Release the two bosses at the back, and remove the controller cover [A].
4.4.6 LEFT UPPER COVER
• Each part enclosed by a blue circle has a tab. Be careful not to damage it when attaching and
detaching.
1. Open the front cover. (Front Cover)

2. Remove the paper exit tray. (Paper Exit Tray)
• Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow.
SM 4-8 M0AN
Exterior Covers
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.4.7 LEFT REAR COVER
1. Remove the left upper cover. (Left Upper Cover)
2. Release the hooks [A], and remove the left rear cover [B].
4.4.8 LEFT COVER
Each part enclosed by a blue circle has a tab. Be careful not to damage it when attaching and
detaching.
1. Remove the left rear cover. (Left Rear Cover)

M0AN 4-9 SM
Exterior Covers
2. Remove the controller cover. (Controller Cover)

3. Remove the rear lower gap cover. (Rear Lower Gap Cover)
4. Pull out the 1st and 2nd paper feed trays.
5. Remove the left cover [A].
Order to remove
1. Front cover 2. Controller cover

3. Paper exit tray 4. Rear lower gap cover
5. Left upper cover 6. 1st paper feed tray
7. Left rear cover 8. 2nd paper feed tray
9. Rear left cover 10. Left cover
SM 4-10 M0AN
Exterior Covers
4.4.9 REAR LEFT COVER

1. Remove the rear left cover [A] (coin screw x 2).
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.4.10 REAR COVER
Each part enclosed by a red dotted circle has a tab. Be careful not to damage it when attaching and
detaching.
1. Remove the rear left cover. (Rear Left Cover)

M0AN 4-11 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.11 REAR LOWER GAP COVER

1. Remove the rear lower gap cover [A]. (hook×2)
4.4.12 REAR LOWER COVER

2. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
SM 4-12 M0AN
Exterior Covers
4.4.13 RIGHT REAR COVER

1. Remove the right upper cover. (Right Upper Cover)
3. Remove the right rear cover [A]. ( x4, among them, tapping screw [B] x1)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
• When installing, insert the projections [A] in the holes [B], taking care not to trap the
harness.
M0AN 4-13 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.14 RIGHT UPPER COVER

1. Remove the upper front cover. (Upper Front Cover)
4.4.15 RIGHT COVER

1. Remove the main power switch cover. (Main Power Switch Cover)
3. Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)
4. Remove the rear lower cover. (Rear Lower Cover)
SM 4-14 M0AN
Exterior Covers
5. Remove clamps and connectors.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
6. Release the right cover arms [A] [B]. ( ×2)
M0AN 4-15 SM
Exterior Covers
7. Slide to the left and remove the right cover [A]. ( ×1)
4.4.16 UPPER FRONT COVER

SM 4-16 M0AN
Exterior Covers
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.4.17 MAIN POWER SWITCH COVER
1. Pull out paper trays 1 [A] and 2 [B].
2. Remove the main power switch cover [A].
M0AN 4-17 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.18 PAPER EXIT TRAY

4.4.19 PAPER EXIT COVER

2. Remove the paper exit tray. (Paper Exit Tray)
3. Remove the paper exit cover [A].
SM 4-18 M0AN
Exterior Covers
4.4.20 PAPER EXIT LOWER COVER

2. Remove the paper exit cover. (Paper Exit Cover)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4. Remove the paper exit lower cover [A].
M0AN 4-19 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.21 UPPER INNER COVER

1. Remove the paper exit lower cover. (Paper Exit Lower Cover)
2. Turn over the operation panel. (Operation Panel Unit)
3. Remove the inverter guide cover sensor. (Inverter Guide Cover Sensor)
4. Remove the inverter guide [A].
5. Remove the cap [A].
6. Remove the screw of the upper inner cover [A].
SM 4-20 M0AN
Exterior Covers
7. Remove the upper inner cover [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.4.22 PAPER EXIT FRONT COVER
2. Remove the paper exit front cover [A].
4.4.23 TOP RIGHT COVER

2. Remove the right upper cover. (Right Upper Cover)
3. Open the cover [A].
M0AN 4-21 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.24 TOP REAR COVER

1. Remove the top right cover. (Top Right Cover)
3. Using a flat-headed screwdriver, remove the cover [A].
SM 4-22 M0AN
Exterior Covers
4.4.25 INNER COVER

1. Pull out the toner bottle.
2. Remove the PCDU. (PCDU)
3. Remove the waste toner bottle. (Waste Toner Bottle)
4. Remove the front cover. (Front Cover)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
5. Remove the support [A].
6. Remove the laser unit cover [A].
M0AN 4-23 SM
Exterior Covers
7. Lift the lever [A].
8. Pull the 1st paper feed tray a short way out.

9. Remove the inner cover [A].
4.4.26 TONER SUPPLY HOUSING

3. Remove the upper inner cover. (Upper Inner Cover)
4. Remove the development exhaust fan. (Development Exhaust Fan)
SM 4-24 M0AN
Exterior Covers
5. Remove the duct [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
6. Remove the brackets [A] and [B].
7. Remove the screws on the toner supply housing [A].
M0AN 4-25 SM
Smart Operation Panel
8. Remove the toner supply housing [A].
4.5 SMART OPERATION PANEL

This section explains how to remove the Smart Operation Panel from the machine. For details about
disassembling the Smart Operation Panel, See the service manual for Smart Operation Panel 2nd
Generation.
4.5.1 OPERATION PANEL UNIT

SM 4-26 M0AN
2. Remove the screws and clamps that secure the operation panel.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Spread a cloth or service mat [A] on the machine's top panel to protect the display. Place the
operation panel on the exposure glass so that the display faces down.
4. Remove the rear center cover [A].
5. Release the clamp, and then make the cable straight [A].
M0AN 4-27 SM
6. Remove the bracket [B].
When installing, attach the bracket [B] first, and then bend the cable [A] and secure it.
Do not apply excessive force on the connector part. Applying excessive upward force on the
connector may cause connection failure.
7. Disconnect the USB cable [A] and the harness [B].
SM 4-28 M0AN
8. Remove the left small cover [A] and right cover [B].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
9. Remove the right small cover [A] and right hinge cover [B]. (Hook x 2)
10. Remove the left hinge cover [A] and right medium cover [B].
M0AN 4-29 SM
11. Remove the hinges [A] [B].
4.5.2 INTERNAL PARTS

Refer to the FSM for the Smart Operation Panel.
4.5.3 USB CABLE / HARNESS

1. Disconnect the USB connector and the harness on the operation panel. (Operation Panel Unit)
3. Remove the top rear cover. (Top Rear Cover)
4. Remove the controller box cover. (Controller Box Cover)
5. Disconnect the USB cable on the IPU and release the harness.
SM 4-30 M0AN
6. Remove the USB cable [A] and the harness [B] from the harness guide.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
• When connecting the USB cable, position the clamp between the two cable ties [A].
M0AN 4-31 SM
Laser Unit
4.6 LASER UNIT
• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the
procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
4.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION

Caution decals are placed as shown below.
• Be sure to turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet
before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This copier uses a class IIIb
laser beam with a wavelength of 660 nm and an output of 17 mW. The laser can cause serious
eye injury.
4.6.2 LASER UNIT
Removing the Laser Unit

2. Remove the laser unit cover [A].
SM 4-32 M0AN
Laser Unit
3. Release the stopper [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4. Pull out the laser unit [A]. ( x 3)
Installing a New Laser Unit

1. Replace the laser unit with a new laser unit.
2. Insert the new laser unit [A] halfway.
M0AN 4-33 SM
Laser Unit
3. Connect three harnesses to the new laser unit ( x 3).
4. Insert the new laser unit along the guide frame [A].
• Make sure that the new laser unit claws fit into two mainframe claws as shown below.
Mainframe Claws
Laser Unit Claws
SM 4-34 M0AN
Laser Unit
5. Set the laser unit with the stopper [A].

• Use a screw driver to pry in the stopper.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
6. Attach the laser unit cover [A].
After Installing the New Laser Unit

Download new data stored in a new laser unit to the mainframe.

2. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
4. Download the new data stored in the new laser unit to the mainframe with SP2-110-005.
• If the error message indicating the failure of the data download appears, execute SP2-
110-005 again.
• If this step is not correctly done, an image problem may occur on printouts.
5. Perform image adjustments if needed (Adjustment after Replacement).
M0AN 4-35 SM
Laser Unit
4.6.3 QUENCHING LAMP

2. Remove the quenching lamp [A].
4.6.4 PCL (PRE-CLEANING LIGHT)

2. Remove the fusing unit. (Replacement)
3. Remove the PCL [A].
SM 4-36 M0AN
PCDU
4.7 PCDU
• To prevent damage from toner spillage during the PCDU removal, be sure to place a ground
cloth on the floor.
• To prevent damage from excess light, wrap the OPC drum with protective paper and store the
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
OPC drum in a cool dark place.
• Do not touch the OPC drum, cleaning blade, or any seals or tapes.
• Do not use any alcohols or solvents to clean the OPC drum; Be sure to wipe with a dry cloth.
If excess dirt exists, first wipe with a damp cloth, and next wipe off completely with a dry cloth.
• Do not rotate the OPC drum clockwise after the PCDU has been installed.
4.7.1 PCDU
• If you install a complete new PCDU, you do not need to perform SP 3-701. This is because the
machine detects a new unit automatically when you cycle the main power off/on, and performs
the initial adjustment automatically.

3. Tilt the transfer unit [A].
M0AN 4-37 SM
PCDU
4. Release the lever [A] then remove the PCDU [B].
Carefully and slowly pull out the PCDU without tilting, to prevent toner spillage.
When installing the PCDU, push the PCDU [A] into the machine while screwing it in, as shown below,
and then lock the lever [B]. If the PCDU is not installed straight, the transfer roller contact and release
mechanism does not work properly and dirt may appear on the 2nd side of outputs.
SM 4-38 M0AN
PCDU
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.7.2 PCU/DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Before Replacing the PCU or Development Unit
• Before replacing the PCU, set SP3-701-002 (Manual New Unit Set: PCU) to “1” and turn off
the main power switch. After replacing the PCU, turn on the main power.
• Before replacing the development unit, set SP3-701-023 (Manual New Unit Set: Development
Unit) to "1" and turn off the main power switch. After replacing the development unit, turn on
the main power.
Replacement Procedure
2. Remove the face plates [A] [B].
M0AN 4-39 SM
PCDU
3. Split the assembly into the PCU [A] and development unit [B].
Notes When Installing the Face Plates
When installing the face plates, check the fitting points as shown below.
[A]: The bearing of the face plate fits the OPC drum.
[B]: The bearing of the face plate fits the bearing of the development roller.
Face plate for rear side
The ball bearing [A] may come off or move.

If the ball bearing moved, push it in.
SM 4-40 M0AN
PCDU
Installing a PCU
1. Disassemble the PCDU into PCU and development unit (PCU/Development Unit).
2. Replace the used PCU with a new one.
3. Reassemble the PCDU.
Installing a Development Unit
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
1. Disassemble the PCDU into PCU and development unit (PCU/Development Unit).
2. Replace the used development unit with a new one.
3. Reassemble the PCDU.
4. Remove the cap [A].
• Attach the removed cap to the used development unit.

5. Attach the development unit to the main machine.
6. Pull out the heat seal [A].
M0AN 4-41 SM
PCDU
4.7.3 OPC DRUM
• Before replacing the OPC drum, set SP3-701-021 to “1” and turn off the main power switch.
• If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again before
replacing the part.
• After replacing the OPC drum, turn on the main power on.
1. Remove the PCU. (PCU/Development Unit)
2. Remove the face plate [A].
3. Remove the stopper for the PCU.
4. Pull out the OPC drum [A].
SM 4-42 M0AN
PCDU
Notes When Installing the Face Plates
When installing the face plates, check the fitting points as shown below.
[A]: The bearing of the face plate fits the OPC drum.
Face plate for front side
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.7.4 CHARGE ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLER
• Before replacing these rollers, set SP3-701-018 for the charge roller and/or SP3-701-019 for
the cleaning roller to “1” and turn the main power switch OFF.
replacing the part.
• After replacing the rollers, turn the main power switch ON.
1. Remove the OPC drum. (OPC Drum)
2. Remove the charge roller and cleaning roller [A] with its bearing.
M0AN 4-43 SM
PCDU
3. Split the assembly into the charge roller [A] and cleaning roller [B].
4.7.5 PICK-OFF PAWLS
• Before replacing the pick-off pawls, set SP3-701-022 to “1” and turn off the main power switch.
replacing the part.
• After replacing the pick-off pawls, turn on the main power on.
1. Remove the PCU. (PCU/Development Unit)
2. Remove the pick-off pawls [A].
• Use a screw driver to pry away the tabs of the pick-off pawl. If the pick-off pawl has
SM 4-44 M0AN
PCDU
marked the drum with a line, the pick-off pawl position can be moved from 1 to 2.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.7.6 CLEANING BLADE
• Before replacing the cleaning blade, set SP3-701-009 to “1” and turn the main power switch
OFF.
replacing the part.
• After replacing the cleaning blade, turn the main power switch ON.
1. Remove the charge roller and cleaning roller. (Charge Roller, Cleaning Roller)
2. Remove the cleaning blade [A]. ( x2)
• The cleaning blade [A] has two different types of holes: a circle ( ), and an oval ( ).
M0AN 4-45 SM
PCDU
Remove the screw on the circle side first, and then, remove the oval side.
4.7.7 DEVELOPER
• These sheets used in steps 6, 11, and 12 are not provided as accessories; please do not
forget to order them with the developer.
• Before replacing the developer, set SP3-701-024 to “1” and turn the main power switch OFF.
replacing the part.
• After replacing the developer, turn the main power switch ON.
• If you replace developer together with the development filters, first replace the developer, then
replace the filters.
1. Remove the development unit. (PCU/Development Unit)
SM 4-46 M0AN
PCDU
2. Remove the bearing (front) [A]. (E-ring x1)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Pull the shaft toward the blue arrow shown below, then remove the pin [A] and the gear [B].
4. Remove the gear [A]. ( x1)
5. Remove the bearing (rear) [A].
M0AN 4-47 SM
PCDU
6. Remove the development side seal and development case entrance seal [A] at each end.
7. Lift up the development sleeve unit [A].
• Do not touch or hold the development sleeve edge [A] when holding the sleeve unit.
Otherwise, it may cause an injury.
8. Remove the developer after turning the development unit upside down in the reverse direction of the
SM 4-48 M0AN
PCDU
development filter.
• Rotate the gear to remove as much toner as you can.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
9. Stand the development unit up, and add new developer evenly across the width of the development
unit while rotating the gear.
10. Reassemble the development sleeve unit, gear and bearing.
• The sheets for the development sleeve unit [A] must be under the sheets [B] for the
development unit.
M0AN 4-49 SM
PCDU
Correct Wrong
11. Wipe off the areas [A] indicated by the red-dashed line and paste new development case entrance
seals to cover the blue-circled position.
• These seals are part of the development seal set, which must be ordered together with the
new developer.
• The seal [A] for the front side is not the same shape as the one [B] for the rear side, as
SM 4-50 M0AN
PCDU
shown below. Be careful when you paste them.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
12. Paste the new development side seals [A] on the face of the development sleeve unit as shown
below.
• These seals are part of the development seal set, which must be ordered together with the
new developer.
13. Reassemble the PCU and development unit.

14. Turn on the main power switch.
The machine detects the new developer and starts the initial adjustment.
4.7.8 DEVELOPMENT FILTERS
• Before replacing the development filters, set SP3-701-025 to “1” and turn the main power
M0AN 4-51 SM
PCDU
switch OFF.
replacing the part.
• After replacing the development filters, turn the main power switch ON.
• If you replace the development filter together with developer, first replace the developer, then
replace the filters.

2. Remove the development filters [A].
4.7.9 TD SENSOR
2. Remove the TD sensor cover [A].
• Use a screw driver to release the tab(s) of the cover.
SM 4-52 M0AN
PCDU
3. Remove the TD sensor [A]. ( x1)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.7.10 DEVELOPMENT MIXING AUGER BEARINGS
• Before replacing the development mixing auger bearings, set SP3-701-028 to “1” and turn the
main power switch OFF.
replacing the part.
• After replacing the development mixing auger bearings, turn the main power switch ON.
2. Pull the shaft toward you, and then pull out the pin [A] and remove the gear [B].
M0AN 4-53 SM
PCDU
3. Remove the gears [A] [B]. ( x1, E-ring x1)
4. Remove the two development mixing auger bearings [A] (E-ring x1).
5. Remove the gears [A] [B] [C]. (E-ring x2)
SM 4-54 M0AN
PCDU
6. Remove the two development mixing auger bearings [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
• The development mixing auger bearings are D-shaped. Make sure that you install them in the
orientation exactly as shown above.
4.7.11 DEVELOPMENT MIXING AUGER (L / R)
• [A]: Development Mixing Auger (L)

• [B]: Development Mixing Auger (R)

2. Remove the developer. (Developer)
3. Remove the development mixing auger bearings. (Development Mixing Auger Bearings)
M0AN 4-55 SM
PCDU
4. Remove the development mixing auger (L) [A].
5. Remove the development mixing auger (R) [A].
• Each auger is different; please make sure that the augers are attached correctly.
• [A]: Development Mixing Auger (L)
• [B]: Development Mixing Auger (R)
SM 4-56 M0AN
Waste Toner
4.8 WASTE TONER

4.8.1 WASTE TONER BOTTLE
Before Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle
When the bottle is replaced after the machine detects that the waste toner bottle is full and stops, the
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
counter for the Waste Toner Bottle is reset automatically.
When the bottle is replaced before the machine stops due to a full bottle, it is necessary to reset the PM
counter manually (set SP3-701-142 to “1” before replacing the bottle, then switch the power off).
SP3-701 (Manual New Unit Set)
This SP is the new unit detection flag.

0: new unit detection flag OFF, 1: new unit detection flag ON
Item SP
Waste toner bottle SP3-701-142

2. Lift the lever [A] then pull out the waste toner bottle [B].
M0AN 4-57 SM
Waste Toner
4.8.2 TONER COLLECTION FULL SENSOR

2. Remove the toner collection full sensor [A].
4.8.3 RECYCLING SHUTTER

3. Remove the controller box. (Controller Box)
4. Remove the duct [A].
5. Remove the connectors.
SM 4-58 M0AN
Waste Toner
6. Remove the motor unit [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
7. Remove the recycling shutter bracket [A]. ( ×4)
• Spread paper on the floor to catch possible toner spills.

8. Remove the bracket [A] ( ×4).
M0AN 4-59 SM
Waste Toner
9. Remove the two pulleys [A] [B] and the belt [C]. ( ×1)
10. Remove the bracket [A]. ( ×2, ×1, bearing × 1)
• Place a sheet of paper underneath the bracket, and then put the bracket on the sheet.
Otherwise, the grease applied to the gear in the bracket may adhere to the floor.
11. Remove the recycling shutter unit [A]. ( ×3, Gear × 1)
• Place a sheet of paper underneath the recycling shutter unit, and then put the recycling
shutter unit on the sheet. Otherwise, the grease applied to the gear in the unit may adhere
to the floor.
SM 4-60 M0AN
Transfer Unit
4.9 TRANSFER UNIT

4.9.1 TRANSFER UNIT
2. Close the transfer unit [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Remove the clip of the transfer unit [A] and disconnect the connector.
4. Slide the bearing in the blue arrow direction to release it from the frame of the main machine.
M0AN 4-61 SM
Transfer Unit
6. Release the arm of the transfer unit [A] ( ×1).
7. Remove the transfer unit [A].
SM 4-62 M0AN
Transfer Unit
4.9.2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT
The transfer roller unit has a new unit detection mechanism, so it is not necessary to set SPs (New Unit
Detection) when replacing an old transfer roller unit.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Release the right and left locks, and remove the transfer roller unit [A].
M0AN 4-63 SM
Transfer Unit
4.9.3 ID SENSOR
Before Replacing the ID Sensor
• You must take note of the original value of SP3-331-061 to prepare for the possibility that the
process control after replacement will not be done properly.
A QR-code is pasted on the sensor head of an ID sensor, which includes the characteristic value for the
sensor. This characteristic value must be input into SP3-331-061 before replacing the ID sensor.
1. Take a note of the characteristic value on the new ID sensor (surrounded by a red dashed line in the
following photo).
2. Turn the main power ON and enter SP mode.

3. Input the characteristic value into SP3-331-061.
Replacement Procedure
1. Remove the transfer roller unit. (Transfer Roller Unit)
2. Remove the ID sensor [A]. ( ×1, ×1)
SM 4-64 M0AN
Transfer Unit
4.9.4 TRANSFER UNIT OPEN/CLOSED LED

1. Remove the transfer roller unit. (Transfer Roller Unit)
2. Remove the guide plate [A]. ( ×2)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Remove the LED cover [A]. ( ×1)
4. Remove the transfer unit open/closed LED [A]. ( ×1)
M0AN 4-65 SM
Transfer Unit
4.9.5 TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR

2. Inserting a driver through the frame hole, remove the screw of the temperature/humidity sensor.
3. Remove the temperature/humidity sensor [A].
4.9.6 FUSING ENTRANCE SENSOR

2. Remove the fusing entrance sensor [A] with bracket.
SM 4-66 M0AN
Drive Unit
3. Remove the fusing entrance sensor [A]. ( ×1)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.9.7 TRANSFER UNIT OPEN/CLOSED SENSOR
2. Remove the transfer unit open/closed sensor [A]. ( ×1, hooks)
4.10 DRIVE UNIT

4.10.1 DRUM/WASTE TONER MOTOR
2. Remove the drum/waste toner motor [A].
M0AN 4-67 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR

2. Remove the development motor [A].
4.10.3 FUSING MOTOR

2. Remove the fusing motor [A].
SM 4-68 M0AN
Drive Unit
4.10.4 PAPER EXIT MOTOR

2. Remove the paper exit motor [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.10.5 REGISTRATION MOTOR
2. Remove the registration motor [A].
M0AN 4-69 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.6 PAPER FEED MOTOR

2. Remove the paper feed motor [A].
4.10.7 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR

2. Remove the vertical transport motor [A].
4.10.8 TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR

1. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)
2. Remove the transfer roller contact motor [A].
SM 4-70 M0AN
Drive Unit
4.10.9 TONER HOPPER

3. Remove the upper inner cover. (Upper Inner Cover)
4. Remove the development exhaust fan. (Development Exhaust Fan)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
5. Remove the toner supply housing. (Toner Supply Housing)
6. Remove the controller box. (Controller Box)
7. Remove the screws on the toner hopper [A]. ( ×3)
8. Remove the gear [B] on the gearbox [A]. ( ×1)
M0AN 4-71 SM
Drive Unit
9. Remove the screws and tab on the gearbox [A]. ( ×3, tab×1)
10. Remove the toner hopper [A].
• Toner remains in the toner hopper [A]. Be sure to place the toner hopper on a sheet of
paper to protect against toner spillage.
• Attach the toner supply pipe [A] before installing the gear box and toner hopper.
SM 4-72 M0AN
Drive Unit
• Fit the pin [B] into the hole in the supply pipe assembly and then stabilize the pipe.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.10.10 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR
1. Remove the toner hopper. (Toner Hopper)
2. Remove the screws and connector on the gearbox [A]. ( ×3, ×1)
3. Remove the gear [A] and part [B] from the gear box cover [C].
M0AN 4-73 SM
Drive Unit
• Make sure that the angle of the part [B] is as shown below when attaching the part [B] to
the gear box cover.
4. Remove the gear box cover [A].
5. Remove the toner supply motor [B] with its spacer from the gear box cover [A]. ( ×2)
SM 4-74 M0AN
Fusing Unit
6. Remove the spacer [B] from the toner supply motor [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.11 FUSING UNIT
4.11.1 REPLACEMENT
• In 100 V models, only one of the AC lines for the fusing unit is shut off when you turn off the
main power; the other line carries current even when you turn off the main power switch.
Because of this, turn off the main power switch, and also always pull out the AC power cord
from the wall socket before doing replacement.
• Because there is a danger of burns on contact with hot parts of the fusing unit, start work when
the temperature drops to a low enough temperature.
• To clear SC544-02 or SC554-02, replace the fusing unit or install a fuse (provided in the
heating sleeve belt unit) in the fusing unit. If you will install a new fusing unit, follow the
procedure below to clear SC544-02 or SC554-02.
1. Install a new fusing unit.
2. Clear SC544-02 or SC554-02 with SP5-810-002
3. Turn the machine off and on.
When the fusing unit is used past its PM cycle, the fusing unit may break, causing a service call.
Therefore, the machine displays a warning on the operation panel at 320K pages and stops at 350K
pages.
• If you replace a whole fusing unit, you do not need to perform SP3-701. This is because the
machine detects a new unit automatically. If you replace only a part of the fusing unit, however,
such as the pressure roller, you must set SP3-701 for that part.
M0AN 4-75 SM
Fusing Unit
1. Open the right cover and open the transfer unit [A].
2. Release the right and left locks [A].
3. Remove the fusing unit [A].
SM 4-76 M0AN
Fusing Unit
4.11.2 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE

2. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
Cleaning the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate
Carefully remove toner adhering as shown in the diagram below with a dry cloth. Then, wipe with a
cloth moistened with alcohol.
4.11.3 FUSING EXIT GUIDE PLATE

2. Open the fusing exit guide plate [A].
M0AN 4-77 SM
Fusing Unit
• Wipe clean with a dry cloth. Then wipe clean with a cloth dampened with alcohol.
4.11.4 FUSING UPPER COVER

2. Remove the levers [A].
Use a screwdriver with a shaft diameter of 5 mm.
3. Remove the fusing upper cover [A].
• You must route the harnesses for the pressure roller temperature sensor and the fusing
roller temperature sensor correctly when reassembling the fusing unit. See the notes
when reassembling the fusing unit. (Notes When Reassembling the Fusing Unit)
SM 4-78 M0AN
Fusing Unit
4.11.5 FUSING LOWER COVER

2. Remove the fusing upper cover. (Fusing Upper Cover)
3. Remove the screws and the connectors.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4. Remove the fusing lower cover [A].
• You must route the harnesses for the pressure roller temperature sensor and the fusing roller
temperature sensor correctly when reassembling the fusing unit. See the notes when
reassembling the fusing unit. (Notes When Reassembling the Fusing Unit)
4.11.6 HEATING SLEEVE BELT UNIT
• Set SP3-701-116 to “1” and turn the main power OFF before replacing.
replacing the part.
• After replacing the unit, turn the main power ON.
• To clear SC544-02 or SC554-02, replace the fusing unit or install a fuse (provided in the
heating sleeve belt unit) in the fusing unit.
• When clearing SC544-02 or SC554-02 by installing a fuse (provided in the heating sleeve belt
unit) in the fusing unit, see To Clear SC544-02 or SC554-02.
M0AN 4-79 SM
Fusing Unit
• The new unit detection fuse packed with the heating sleeve belt unit is used to cancel SC544-
02/554-02. Discard the fuse if these SCs did not occur.
• When replacing the heating sleeve belt unit at EM replacement, installing a fuse is not
necessary. Do not use the fuse for EM replacement.
Replacement
1. Remove the fusing lower cover. (Fusing Lower Cover)
2. Remove the two pressure springs.
3. Remove the screws from the left and right frames.
SM 4-80 M0AN
Fusing Unit
4. Remove the heating sleeve belt unit [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
To Clear SC544-02 or SC554-02
• To clear SC544-02 or SC554-02, attach the new unit detection fuse provided with the heating
sleeve belt unit or replace the fusing unit.
1. Prepare a new fuse provided with the heating sleeve belt unit.
2. Remove the fusing upper cover. (Fusing Upper Cover)
3. Install the fuse [A].
4. Reassemble the fusing unit.

5. Install the fusing unit in the machine.
6. Enter the SP mode, and then clear SC544-02 or SC554-02 with SP5-810-002.
7. Turn the machine off and on.
M0AN 4-81 SM
Fusing Unit
4.11.7 PRESSURE ROLLER, PRESSURE ROLLER BEARINGS AND

PRESSURE ROLLER IDLER GEARS
Adjustment before Replacing the Pressure Roller and Pressure Roller Bearings
Before replacing the pressure roller, set SP3-701-118 to "1" and switch the power OFF. Then replace
the pressure roller and turn the main power ON.
Before replacing the pressure roller bearings, set SP3-701-119 to "1" and turn the main power OFF.
Then replace the pressure roller bearings and turn the main power ON.
If you have to turn the power on again before replacing the part, execute the SP again before replacing
the part.
Replacement: Pressure Roller, Pressure Roller Bearings

1. Remove the heating sleeve belt unit. (Heating Sleeve Belt Unit)
2. Remove the pressure roller gear [A]. (C-ring x1)
3. Remove the pressure roller rear bearing [A].
SM 4-82 M0AN
Fusing Unit
4. Remove the pressure roller front bearing [A]. (C-ring x1)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
5. Remove the pressure roller [A].
Replacement: Pressure Roller Idler Gears

1. Remove the heating sleeve belt unit. (Heating Sleeve Belt Unit)
M0AN 4-83 SM
Fusing Unit
4. Remove the pressure roller idler gears [A].
4.11.8 THERMOSTAT UNIT

2. Remove the thermostats [A].
SM 4-84 M0AN
Fusing Unit
4.11.9 FUSING ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSORS

2. Remove the fusing roller temperature sensors [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.11.10 PRESSURE ROLLER TEMPERATURE SENSORS
2. Remove the screws of the pressure roller temperature sensors [A].
3. Remove the pressure roller temperature sensors from the harness guide.
M0AN 4-85 SM
Fusing Unit
4.11.11 FUSING THERMOPILES

2. Remove the fusing thermopile unit [A].
3. Remove the fusing thermopiles [A].
4.11.12 NOTES WHEN REASSEMBLING THE FUSING UNIT

Route the harnesses for the pressure roller temperature sensor and the fusing roller temperature
sensor correctly when reassembling the fusing unit.
The harness [A] for the pressure roller temperature sensor has black and white wires. Routing starts
from the bottom of the fusing unit, then the rear, and to the side.
SM 4-86 M0AN
Paper Exit
The harness [A] for the fusing roller temperature sensor has black, white, and blue wires.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.12 PAPER EXIT
4.12.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT
2. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)
3. Release the hook [A], and remove the inner cover [B].
4. Remove the paper exit cover. (Paper Exit Cover)
M0AN 4-87 SM
Paper Exit
5. Remove the paper exit unit [A].
4.12.2 PAPER EXIT SWITCHING SOLENOID

1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit)
2. Remove the paper exit switching solenoid [A].
SM 4-88 M0AN
Paper Exit
4.12.3 PAPER EXIT SENSOR

2. Remove the feeler [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Remove the paper exit sensor with bracket [A].
4. Remove the paper exit sensor [A].
M0AN 4-89 SM
Paper Exit
4.12.4 REVERSE SENSOR

2. Remove the reverse sensor [A].
When attaching the reverse sensor, if you screw too tightly in the direction of the blue arrow, it may
cause the gap between the guide plates [A] to be too narrow, resulting in paper jams. Make sure
that there is a gap [A] of 3mm or more after you fasten the screw.
SM 4-90 M0AN
Paper Exit
4.12.5 PAPER EXIT FULL SENSOR

2. Remove the paper exit full sensor with bracket [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Remove the paper exit full sensor [A].
4.12.6 REVERSE MOTOR

2. Remove the gear [A].
M0AN 4-91 SM
Paper Exit
3. Release the harness.
4. Remove the bearings [A].
5. Remove the reverse motor with bracket [A].
SM 4-92 M0AN
Paper Exit
6. Remove the reverse motor [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.12.7 FUSING EXIT SENSOR
2. Remove the fusing exit sensor [A].
4.12.8 INVERTER GUIDE COVER SENSOR

2. Turn over the operation panel. (Operation Panel Unit)
3. Remove the inverter guide cover [A].
Lift the exterior cover from the screw bosses [B], and then slide the inverter module in the direction
of the blue arrow and remove it.
M0AN 4-93 SM
Paper Exit
4. Release the harness [A] from the harness guide.
5. Remove the inverter guide cover sensor [A].
SM 4-94 M0AN
Paper Feed
4.13 PAPER FEED
• The 1st paper feed unit can be removed without removing the duplex unit (just open the right
cover), and you can remove the paper feed unit after pulling out the paper tray.
• Note that the 1st paper feed unit and 2nd paper feed unit are not interchangeable.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.13.1 PAPER FEED UNIT
1st Paper Feed Unit

1. Remove the right cover. (Right Cover)
2. Pull out the 1st paper feed tray.
3. Remove the screws attached to the 1st paper feed unit [A] ( x2).
4. Remove the stopper [A].
M0AN 4-95 SM
Paper Feed
5. Pull out the 1st paper feed unit [A] slightly toward the front.
6. Release the shaft [A] on the front side first to remove the paper feed guide plate [B].
• The following picture shows the shape of the guide plate at the front side.
7. Remove the 1st paper feed unit [A]. ( x1)
SM 4-96 M0AN
Paper Feed
2nd Paper Feed Unit

2. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
• Depending on the model, remove the right lower cover or open the paper transport cover.
3. Remove the bracket [A]. ( ×1)
4. Lift the harness guide [A], and then remove it ( ×1).
M0AN 4-97 SM
Paper Feed
• The harness guide has a claw, so make sure that you do not break it when removing.
5. Remove the stopper [A].
6. Release the front side first to remove the paper feed guide plate [A].
7. Remove the 2nd paper feed unit [A]. ( ×2, x1)
SM 4-98 M0AN
Paper Feed
4.13.2 PAPER DUST COLLECTION UNIT

2. Remove the screw on the paper dust collection unit [A]. ( ×1)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Release the tab on the paper dust collection unit [A] ( ×1).
4. While slightly opening and holding the transfer unit [A] with your hand, remove the paper dust
collection unit [B] in the order shown in the picture below.
• The right side of the paper dust collection unit has a C-shaped cutout. Do not pull the unit
by force during removal. When installing, open the transfer unit [A] to prevent the sheet
M0AN 4-99 SM
Paper Feed
[B] from breaking.
4.13.3 PICK-UP ROLLER, PAPER FEED ROLLER, SEPARATION

ROLLER, TORQUE LIMITER
1. Remove the roller holder [A]. ( ×1)
2. Remove the pickup roller [A].
SM 4-100 M0AN
Paper Feed
3. Remove the paper feed roller [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4. Remove the separation roller [A]. ( ×1)
5. Remove the torque limiter [A].
M0AN 4-101 SM
Paper Feed
4.13.4 1ST / 2ND PAPER FEED TRAY LIFT MOTOR

1. Remove the development bearing cooling fan. (Development Bearing Cooling Fan)
2. Remove the HVPS [A] along with the bracket.
3. Remove the 1st paper feed tray lift motor [A].
4. Remove the 2nd paper feed tray lift motor [A].
SM 4-102 M0AN
Paper Feed
4.13.5 1ST / 2ND PAPER FEED SENSOR
• There is no difference in removal procedure between 1st paper feed sensor and 2nd paper
feed sensor.
1. Remove the paper feed unit. (Paper Feed Unit)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
2. Remove the paper feed sensor bracket [A]. ( ×1, ×1)
3. Remove the paper feed sensor [A] (hooks).
M0AN 4-103 SM
Paper Feed
4.13.6 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR

2. Remove the vertical transport sensor unit [A]. ( ×1, ×1)
3. Remove the vertical transport sensor [A] (hooks).
SM 4-104 M0AN
Paper Feed
4.13.7 LIMIT SENSOR
• There are two limit sensors in this model but the removal procedure is the same.
2. Remove the limit sensor [A]. ( ×1)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.13.8 1ST PAPER END SENSOR / 2ND PAPER END SENSOR
• There is no difference in removal procedure between 1st paper end sensor and 2nd paper end
sensor.

2. Remove the feeler [A]. ( ×1)
M0AN 4-105 SM
Paper Feed
3. Remove the paper end sensor [A]. ( ×1)
4. After reinstalling the paper end sensor, check the operation of the actuator [A].
4.13.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Remove the transfer unit. (Transfer Unit)
2. Remove the inner guide bracket [A]. ( ×2)
SM 4-106 M0AN
Duplex Unit
3. Remove the registration sensor [A] (hooks, ×1, x1).
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.14 DUPLEX UNIT
4.14.1 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR
2. Remove the duplex inner cover [A]. ( ×4)
3. Remove the duplex/by-pass motor unit [A] ( ×3, ×1)
M0AN 4-107 SM
Duplex Unit
4. Remove the duplex/by-pass motor. ( ×2)
4.14.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE MOTOR

2. Remove the duplex inner cover [A]. ( ×4)
3. Remove the duplex entrance motor bracket [A]. ( ×2, ×1)
SM 4-108 M0AN
Duplex Unit
4. Remove the duplex entrance motor [A]. ( ×2)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.14.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR
1. Open the right cover wide. (Bypass Tray)
2. Remove the screws and stoppers for the paper transfer guide plate [A]. ( ×2, ×1)
3. Remove the duplex inner entrance guide [A].
M0AN 4-109 SM
Duplex Unit
4. Remove the duplex outer entrance guide [A]. ( ×8, ×1, ×1)
5. Remove the duplex entrance sensor [A] (hooks).
SM 4-110 M0AN
Bypass Tray Unit
4.14.4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR

2. Remove the duplex exit sensor bracket [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Remove the duplex exit sensor [A] (hooks).
4.15 BYPASS TRAY UNIT

4.15.1 BYPASS TRAY
2. Remove the wire [A].
M0AN 4-111 SM
Bypass Tray Unit
3. Release two arms [A] [B]. ( ×2)
4. Open the right cover [A] wide.
5. Remove the paper transport guide [A]. ( ×2)
SM 4-112 M0AN
Bypass Tray Unit
6. Remove the harness. ( ×1, ×1, ×1)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
7. Remove the bypass tray [A]. ( ×4)
4.15.2 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR

1. Open the bypass tray [A].
M0AN 4-113 SM
Bypass Tray Unit
2. Remove the bypass paper end sensor cover [A].
3. Remove the bypass paper end sensor unit [A]. ( ×1, ×1)
4. Remove the bypass paper end sensor [A] from the bracket (hooks).
SM 4-114 M0AN
Bypass Tray Unit
4.15.3 BYPASS PICK-UP ROLLER

1. Open the bypass tray (Bypass Tray).
2. Remove the bypass pick-up roller [A]. ( ×1)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.15.4 BYPASS PAPER FEED ROLLER
1. Remove the bypass paper end sensor unit. (Bypass Paper End Sensor)
2. Remove the bypass paper feed roller [A]. ( ×1)
M0AN 4-115 SM
Bypass Tray Unit
4.15.5 BYPASS SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Remove the paper transport guide. (Bypass Tray)
2. Remove the bypass separation roller [A]. ( ×1)
4.15.6 TORQUE LIMITER

1. Remove the bypass separation roller. (Bypass Separation Roller)
2. Remove the torque limiter [A].
SM 4-116 M0AN
Bypass Tray Unit
4.15.7 BYPASS WIDTH SENSOR

1. Remove the bypass tray. (Bypass Tray)
2. Remove the six screws on the bypass tray [A]. ( ×6).
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Release the hooks around the bypass tray [A].
• There is a hook in the tray cover. Be careful not to damage it during removal or
installation.
M0AN 4-117 SM
Bypass Tray Unit
4. Release the links.
5. Remove the bypass tray upper cover [A]. (pin x 1, x1)
6. Remove the bypass width sensor [A]. ( ×1, x2)
SM 4-118 M0AN
Bypass Tray Unit
• When installing, the holes must align as shown below.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.15.8 BYPASS LENGTH SENSOR
1. Remove the bypass tray upper cover. (Bypass Width Sensor).
2. Remove the bypass length sensor [A]. ( ×1, hooks)
M0AN 4-119 SM
PCBs and Other Items
4.16 PCBS AND OTHER ITEMS

4.16.1 OVERVIEW
Around the Controller Box
[A] IPU
[B] Controller Board
[C] BCU
[D] HVPS
Around the Power Supply Box
[A] PSU
4.16.2 CONTROLLER BOX COVER

SM 4-120 M0AN

3. Remove the controller box cover [A].
Red Circle: Remove, Blue Circle: Loosen
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4.16.3 IPU
For the FCC connector [A], pull out it by pressing the release levers on both sides.

2. Remove the IPU [A].
M0AN 4-121 SM
4.16.4 BCU
• The FFC connector has a lock mechanism. Do not use force to pull it out.
2. Remove the BCU [A].
When installing the new BCU

Remove the NVRAM (EEPROM) from the old BCU. Then install it on the new BCU after you replace the
BCU.
Replace the NVRAM (Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU) if the NVRAM on the old BCU
is defective.
• Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before you
replace the NVRAM (EEPROM).
SM 4-122 M0AN
• Keep NVRAMs (EEPROM) away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static
electricity can damage NVRAM data.
• Make sure the serial number is input in the machine for the NVRAM data with SP5-811-004, if
not, SC995-001 occurs
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine.
2. Output the SMC data (“ALL”) using SP5-990-001/SP5-992-001.
3. Turn off the main switch.
4. Insert a blank SD card in the SD slot #2, and then turn on the main switch.
5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the NVRAM data from the BCU.
6. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord.
Replace the NVRAM [A] on the BCU with a new one.
• Install a new NVRAM [C] so that the indentation [A] on the NVRAM corresponds with the
mark [B] on the BCU. Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the BCU and
NVRAM.
7. Plug in, and then turn on the main switch.

M0AN 4-123 SM
8. Select the destination setting. (SP5-131-001) (JPN: 0, NA: 1, EU/AA: 2)

9. Check the machine serial number with SP5-811-004, and then set the machine serial number of
SP5-811-001.
• For information on how to configure SP5-811-001, contact the supervisor in your branch
office.
10. Set the area selection with SP5-807-001.
• For information on how to configure SP5-807-001, contact the supervisor in your branch
office.
11. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
12. Use SP5-801-002 “Memory Clear Engine”.
• After changing the EEPROM, Some SPs do not have appropriate initial values. Because
of this, steps 10 to 12 must be done.
13. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
14. From the SD card where you saved the NV-RAM data in step 5, download the NV-RAM data with
SP5-825-001.
15. Turn off the machine, and then remove the SD card from SD slot 2.
16. Turn on the main switch.
17. Check the factory setting sheet and the SMC data printout from step 2, and set the user tool and
SP settings so they are the same as before.
4.16.5 CONTROLLER BOARD
• Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage NVRAM data.
Special Procedure for Machines that have a Self Encrypting Drive (SED) Installed
• The machine holds data, linking the controller board and SED, created automatically during
SED installation. The data, however, will not be deleted automatically at controller board
replacement. Therefore, before replacing a controller board, you must delete the link data
manually so that the machine can create new link data.
• Do the following steps when doing the replacement.

• Execute [Erase All Memory] on the operation panel
SM 4-124 M0AN
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Erase All Memory]
• Turn OFF the main power switch

• Replace the controller board
• Turn ON the main power switch
• Do not turn the main power ON after step 3, until after you replaced the board.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
2. Remove the controller cover. (Controller Cover)
4. Remove the screws of the controller bracket [A].
5. Remove the controller bracket [A].
M0AN 4-125 SM
6. Slide the controller board [A] to the right side to remove it.
7. Release the guide rail [A].
8. Remove the two used NVRAMs 1 [A] and 2 [B] from the old controller board and install them on the
new controller board.
• When installing a new controller board, install the NVRAM removed from the old board, or
a new NVRAM if the old NVRAM is defective. Install the NVRAM [C] so that the
indentation [B] on the NVRAM corresponds with the mark [A] on the controller board.
Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the controller board and the
SM 4-126 M0AN
NVRAM.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
Replacing the NVRAM on the controller board
• Referring to the previous procedure, be sure that there are no mistakes in the mounting
position and orientation of the NVRAM.
• If you mounted the NVRAM in the wrong direction, each component needs to be replaced
because a short circuit was caused in the controller board and the NVRAM.
1. Make sure you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine.
2. Output all the SMC data using SP5-990-001 (SP Print Mode: All (Data List)).
3. Turn off the main power switch.
4. Insert a blank SD card in SD slot 2, and then turn on the main power switch.
5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the NVRAM data from the controller board.
6. Make sure the customer has a backup of their address book data. If not, obtain the backup by
referring to the following procedure.
1. Insert an SD card into SD slot 2, and then turn the main power ON.
2. Save the address book data in the SD card using SP5-846-051.
M0AN 4-127 SM
• The address data stored in the machine will be discarded later during this procedure. So
be sure to obtain a backup of the customer’s address book data.
• Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup/restore of the
address book data.
• If they have a backup of the address book data, use their own backup data for restoring.
This is because there is a risk that the data cannot be backed up properly depending on
the NVRAM condition.
7. Turn the main power OFF and unplug the power supply cord.
8. Push the main power switch ON again to discharge the residual charge.
9. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2.
10. Replace the NV-RAM with a brand-new one.
11. Turn the power ON while the SD card is removed from SD slot 2.
• SC673 appears at start-up, but this is normal behavior. This is because the controller and
the smart operation panel cannot communicate with each other due to changing the SP
settings for the operation panel.
12. Change the SP settings for the operation panel.

If you switch the screen to enter the SP mode, SC995-02 is displayed. However, continue the
following steps.
• SP5-748-101: (OpePanel Setting: Op Type Action Setting): Change bit 0 from 0 to 1.

• SP5-748-201: (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect Setting): Change the value from 0
to 1.
13. Cycle the power OFF/ON.
• The model information is written on the NVRAM (Novita), so SC995-02 does not occur.
• Program/Change Administrator will be displayed in Japanese, but this is normal.
14. Turn OFF the main power, take the SD card to which the NV-RAM data has been uploaded, and
insert it into SD slot 2.

16. Download the NV-RAM data stored in the SD card to the brand-new NV-RAM using SP5-825-001
(NV-RAM Data Download).
• The download will take a couple of minutes.

17. Turn the power OFF and remove the SD card from slot 2.
SM 4-128 M0AN
18. Turn the power ON.

The screen "Program/Change Administrator" will be displayed in the language that is the same
language as the time when the data was uploaded to the SD card in step 5.
19. If the security functions (e.g. Stored file encryption/ Auto Erase Memory Setting) were applied, set
the functions again.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
20. Ask the customer to restore their address book. Or restore the address book data using SP5-846-
052 (UCS Setting: Restore All Addr Book), and ask the customer to ensure the address book data
has been restored properly.
• If you obtained the backup of the customer’s address book data in step 3, delete the
backup immediately after the NV-RAM replacement to avoid accidentally taking out the
customer’s data.
21. Output all the SMC data with SP5-990-001 and make sure all the SP/UP settings except for
counter information are properly restored, by checking the SMC data obtained in step 2.
• The counters will be reset.

22. If the setting is different from the original setting after the replacement of the NVRAM, then set it
again to the original setting.
23. Execute the process control (SP3-011-001).

24. Cycle the power OFF/ON.
• If you cannot execute SP5-824-001 or SP5-825-001 for some reason, try all the following
things.
- Check the changed SP value on the SMC which was output in step 2 and set it manually.
Especially, ensure that the values of the following SPs are same as the setting before the
replacement.
- a. SP5-104-001 (A3/DLT Double Count)
- b. SP5-104-002 (Bypass Paper Size Undetection)
- c. SP5-302-002 (Set Time: Time Difference)
• Because the PM counters have been reset during NV-RAM replacement, it is necessary
to replace all the PM parts for proper PM management.
• If a message tells you need a SD card to restore displays after the NV-RAM replacement,
create a “SD card for restoration” and restore with the SD card.
M0AN 4-129 SM
4.16.6 HVPS
2. Remove the HVPS [A].
4.16.7 PSU
• NEVER touch the areas outlined in red in the photos below, to prevent electric shock caused
by residual charge.
• A residual charge of about 100V-400V remains in the AC circuits on the PSU board for several
months even when the board has been removed from the machine after turning off the
machine power and unplugging the power cord.
• The procedure to discharge residual charge from the machine by unplugging the power cord
from the AC wall outlet and pressing the main power switch works only for the DC circuits on
SM 4-130 M0AN
this board. Residual charge remains in the AC circuits.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
1. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
3. Remove the PSU cooling fan. (PSU Cooling Fan)
M0AN 4-131 SM
4. Remove the PSU [A].
4.16.8 CONTROLLER BOX

4. Release the clamps and the connector on the upper side of the controller box.
5. Release the clamps on the side of the controller box.
SM 4-132 M0AN
6. Release the clamps in the controller box.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
7. Remove the connectors on the IPU [A].
8. Remove the FFC on the BCU [A].
M0AN 4-133 SM
9. Remove the cover [A].
10. Remove the connector.
11. Remove the controller box [A].
SM 4-134 M0AN
4.16.9 TEMPERATURE SENSOR

2. Remove the connector.
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Remove the PCL. (PCL (Pre Cleaning Light))
4. Remove the imaging temperature sensor (thermistor) [A].
M0AN 4-135 SM
Fans/Filters
4.16.10 DC SW BOARD
2. Remove the DC SW board [A].
4.17 FANS/FILTERS
4.17.1 ODOR FILTER
1. Remove the odor filter box [A].
EU/AA:
SM 4-136 M0AN
Fans/Filters
2. Remove the odor filter [A].
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
EU/AA:
4.17.2 PARTICULATE FILTER (EU/AA ONLY)

1. Remove the odor filter box [A].
M0AN 4-137 SM
Fans/Filters
2. Remove the particulate filter [A].
4.17.3 DUST FILTER

2. Remove the dust filter [A].
• Attach the right side [A] of the filter first when you mount it.
SM 4-138 M0AN
Fans/Filters
4.17.4 DEVELOPMENT EXHAUST FAN

3BReplacement
and Adjustment
3. Remove the development exhaust fan with duct [A].
4. Dismantle the duct [A]. ( ×4)
M0AN 4-139 SM
Fans/Filters
5. Remove the development exhaust fan [A].
• Pay attention to the direction of the fan when installing. The decal pasted on the fan must face
the outside.
4.17.5 PAPER EXIT COOLING FAN

2. Remove the paper exit cooling fan [A].
SM 4-140 M0AN
Fans/Filters
• Pay attention to the direction of the fan when installing. The decal pasted on the fan must
face the inside.
4.17.6 FUSING FAN

3BReplacement
and Adjustment
2. Remove the fusing exhaust heat fan [A] with duct.
EU/AA:
3. Remove the fusing exhaust heat fan [A]. ( ×4)
M0AN 4-141 SM
Fans/Filters
the outside.
4.17.7 DEVELOPMENT BEARING COOLING FAN

2. Remove the development bearing cooling fan with duct [A].
SM 4-142 M0AN
Fans/Filters
3. Dismantle the duct [A]. ( ×4)
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
4. Remove the development bearing cooling fan [A].
the outside.
M0AN 4-143 SM
Fans/Filters
4.17.8 PSU COOLING FAN

Remove the tie wrap band [A], and remove the PSU cooling fan [B].
• Pay attention to the direction of the fan when installing. The decal pasted on the fan must
face the inside.
4.17.9 FRONT DEVELOPMENT COOLING FAN

1. Remove the inner cover. (Inner Cover)
2. Remove the fan assembly [A].
3. Remove the front development cooling fan [A].
SM 4-144 M0AN
Adjustment after Replacement
4.18 ADJUSTMENT AFTER REPLACEMENT

4.18.1 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
Printing a test pattern: SP2-109-XXX
After changing an SP value for registration or image adjustment, print a test pattern to check the
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
adjustment result.
• Some of these test patterns are used for print image adjustments but most are used primarily
for design testing.
• Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, SC will
occur.

2. Select SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern: Pattern Selection).
3. Select the pattern number for print from the list, then press [OK].
No. Pattern No. Pattern
0 None (Default value) 13 Independent Pattern (4dot)
1 Vertical Line (1dot) 14 Trimming Area
2 Vertical Line (2dot) 15 Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
3 Horizontal Line (1dot) 16 Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
4 Horizontal Line (2dot) 17 Band (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 18 Band (Vertical)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 19 Checker Flag Pattern
7 Grid Pattern Small 20 Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
8 Grid Pattern Large 21 Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 22 2 Beam Density Pattern
10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern
11 Independent Pattern (1dot) 24 All White Pattern
12 Independent Pattern (2dot)
4. When changing the density of the test pattern, select the density with SP2-109-006 (Test Pattern
Density).
5. Execute SP5-990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).

6. After checking the test pattern, SP2-109-003 must be set to "0: None".
M0AN 4-145 SM
4.18.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side
A: Leading Edge Registration (4.2 ± 1.5 mm)

B: Side-to-side Registration (2 ± 1.5 mm)
Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown above.
After doing the registration adjustment, do the Blank Margin Adjustment in the next section.
1. Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper feed station, and adjust them using SP1-001.
Tray SP No. Threshold
Tray1: Thin SP1-001-001 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Tray1: Plain SP1-001-002
Tray1: MidThick SP1-001-003
Tray1: Thick1 SP1-001-004
Tray2: Thin SP1-001-008 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Tray2: Plain SP1-001-009
Tray2: MidThick SP1-001-010
Bypass: Thin SP1-001-015 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Bypass: Plain SP1-001-016
Bypass: MidThick SP1-001-017
Bypass: Thick1 SP1-001-018
SM 4-146 M0AN

Duplex: Thin SP1-001-022 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Duplex: Plain SP1-001-023
Duplex: MidThick SP1-001-024
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
Duplex: Thick1 SP1-001-025
Tray1: Thin: 1200 SP1-001-028 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Tray1: Plain: 1200 SP1-001-029
Tray1: MidThick: 1200 SP1-001-030
Tray1: Thick1: 1200 SP1-001-031
Tray1: Thick2: 1200 SP1-001-032
Tray1: Thick3: 1200 SP1-001-033
Tray1: Thick4: 1200 SP1-001-034
Tray2: Thin: 1200 SP1-001-035 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Tray2: Plain: 1200 SP1-001-036
Tray2: MidThick: 1200 SP1-001-037
Tray2: Thick1: 1200 SP1-001-038
Tray2: Thick2: 1200 SP1-001-039
Tray2: Thick3: 1200 SP1-001-040
Tray2: Thick4: 1200 SP1-001-041
Bypass: Thin: 1200 SP1-001-042 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Bypass: Plain: 1200 SP1-001-043
Bypass: MidThick: 1200 SP1-001-044
Bypass: Thick1: 1200 SP1-001-045
Duplex: Thin: 1200 SP1-001-049 4.2 ± 1.5 mm
Duplex: Plain: 1200 SP1-001-050
Duplex: MidThick: 1200 SP1-001-051
Duplex: Thick1: 1200 SP1-001-052
2. Check the side-to-side registration [B] for each paper feed station, and adjust them using SP1-002.
M0AN 4-147 SM

Tray 1 SP1-002-002 2 ±1.5 mm
Tray 2 SP1-002-003
Tray 3 (Optional PFU tray 1 or LCT) SP1-002-004
Tray 4 (Optional PFU tray 2) SP1-002-005
Duplex (side 1) SP1-002-006
LCT SP1-002-007
Blank Margin
• After adjusting the Leading Edge Registration and Side Registration settings (see the previous
section), do the Blank Margin Adjustment. To do this, check the values of Margins C and D.
• If they are not within the specifications (see below), then adjust C and D with SP2-103-001 to -
020 as explained below. Then check Margins A and B again.
A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin

B: Right Edge Blank Margin
C: Leading Edge Blank Margin
D: Left Edge Blank Margin
1. Check the trailing edge [A], right edge [B], leading edge [C], left edge [D] blank margins, and adjust
them using the following SP modes.
Edge SP No. Adjustment Range
Leading Edge SP2-103-001 4.2 ± 1.5 mm (Plain, Thin)
Trailing Edge SP2-103-002 More than 0.5 mm
Left Edge SP2-103-003 2.0 ±1.5 mm
Right Edge SP2-103-004 2.0 +2.5 /-1.5 mm
Duplex: Trailing Edge: SP2-103-006 2.0 ±2.0 mm
SM 4-148 M0AN
Edge SP No. Adjustment Range

L Size: Plain
Duplex: Trailing Edge: SP2-103-007
M Size: Plain
S Size: Plain
Duplex: Left Edge SP2-103-009 -2.0 ±1.5 mm
3BReplacement
and Adjustment
Plain
Duplex: Right Edge: SP2-103-010 2.0 +2.5 /-1.5 mm
Plain
Duplex: Trailing Edge: SP2-103-011 2.0 ±2.0 mm
L Size: Thick
M Size: Thick
S Size: Thick
Duplex: Left Edge SP2-103-014 -2.0 ±1.5 mm
Thick
Duplex: Right Edge: SP2-103-015 2.0 +2.5 /-1.5 mm
Thick
Duplex Trail. L Size:Thin SP2-103-016 -4.0 ± 4.0 mm
Duplex Trail. M Size:Thin SP2-103-017
Duplex Trail. S Size:Thin SP2-103-018
Lead Edge Width:Thin SP2-103-019 0.0 ± 9.9 mm
Trail. Edge Width:Thin SP2-103-020
• L Size: Paper Length is 297.1 mm or more

• M Size: Paper Length is 216.1 to 297 mm
• S Size: Paper Length is 216 mm or less.
Parallelogram Image Adjustment

Laser unit adjustment is to fix parallelogram images that developed as a result of the laser operation, by
means of adjusting the physical angle of the laser unit itself. This adjustment must be done after the
skew-correction for the paper feed unit.
1. Enter into the SP mode.

2. Using SP2-109-003, output a trimming pattern to measure the parallelogram.
• It is not necessary to do this step if output image is developed properly.
• If the laser unit causes a parallelogram image, there is a slanted line in the main-scan
direction, and there is a straight line in the sub-scan direction.
M0AN 4-149 SM
3. Remove the laser unit (Laser Unit).

4. Paste the adjustment sheet(s) on the reference points located on the back side of the laser unit (two
points on the inside and/or one point on the front side).
• A set of four sheets is provided as service parts. The number of sheets to be pasted
depends on the condition of the image.
• If lines slant down to the left [A], paste one or two sheets on the front side.
• If lines slant down to the right [B], paste one or two sheets at each position on the rear
side.
• Adjustable amount: 0.5mm – 0.6mm/sheet
5. Do step 1 and 2 again to check that there is no parallelogram image.
SM 4-150 M0AN
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Service Program Mode
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
• Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED
Maintenance
4BSystem
indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to
process the data.
• The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If this mode is used by
anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be deleted or settings
might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.
5.1.1 ENTERING SP MODE

If there is no printer icon (Classic) on the HOME screen, follow the procedure below to display the
number keyboard.
1. Press and hold the button [A] located at the left side of the operation panel and "Check Status [B]" at
the same time, until the number keyboard is displayed.
M0AN 5-1 SM
2. Enter the key code for SP mode.
For details of the key code to enter the SP mode, ask your supervisor.
5.1.2 EXITING SP MODE

Press "Exit" on the LCD twice to return to the printer screen.
5.1.3 TYPES OF SP MODES

• System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions
• Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
Select one of the Service Program modes (System and Printer) from the touch panel as shown in the
diagram below after you access the SP mode.
SM 5-2 M0AN
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
Maintenance
4BSystem
1 Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
2 Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
3 Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press [#]. The
required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing [#]. If not, just press the required SP
Mode number.
4 Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the printer screen to resume normal
operation.
5 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
6 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
7 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display (page).
8 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
9 Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
Selecting the Program Number

Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Refer to the SP Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to
adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number that you want
to open.
4. Then press that number to expand the list.

5. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want to set
and press it.
The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below default or the current settings.
M0AN 5-3 SM
• Refer to the SP Tables for the range of allowed settings.

6. Do this procedure to enter a setting:
1. Press [./*] to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the appropriate
number.
The number you enter writes over the previous setting.
2. Press [#] to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that is out of
range.)
3. Press "Exit" to go back to user operation screen.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the
machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on
the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set
"Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in:
User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock >
OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The CE can service the machine and turn the machine power OFF then ON. It is not
necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the main power is turned ON.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5-169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5-169 from "1" to "0".
• Turn the machine power OFF then ON. Tell the administrator that you have completed
SM 5-4 M0AN
servicing the machine.
• The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
5.1.4 REMARKS
The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30
characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated. The
Maintenance
4BSystem
following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.
Item Description
Paper Weight Thin paper: 52-59 g/m2, 14-15lb. Bond
Plain Paper1: 60-74 g/m2, 16-20lb. Bond
Plain Paper2: 75-81 g/m2, 20lb. Bond
Middle Thick: 82-105 g/m2, 20-28lb. Bond
Thick Paper1: 106-169 g/m2, 28lb. Bond-90lb. Index
Thick Paper2: 170-220 g/m2, 65-80lb. Cover
Thick Paper3: 221-256 g/m2, 80lb. Cover-140lb. Index
Thick Paper4: 257-300 g/m2, 140lb. Index-110lb. Cover
Paper Type N: Normal paper
MTH: Middle thick paper
TH: Thick paper
Paper Feed Station P: Paper tray
B: By-pass table
Print Mode S: Simplex
D: Duplex
Others
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the following
way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
• If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of the SP
mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers. However,
the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.

Notation What it means
ENG Engine SP
CTL Controller SP
FA Factory setting: Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the
factory setting sheets enclosed. You can find it in the front cover.
DFU Design/Factory Use only: Do not touch these SP modes in the field.
* An asterisk (*) to the left side of ENG/CTL column means that this mode is stored in the
M0AN 5-5 SM
SP Mode Tables
Notation What it means

NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value. "ENG" and
"CTL" show which NVRAM contains the data.
• *ENG: NVRAM on the BCU board
• *CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
SSP This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode setting.
5.2 SP MODE TABLES

See "Appendices" for the following information:
• Engine SP1000
• Engine SP2000
• Engine SP3000
• Engine SP4000
• Engine SP5000
• Engine SP6000
• Engine SP7000
• Controller SP5000
• Printer SP Mode
• Input Check
• Output Check
5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SD CARD)

5.3.1 OVERVIEW
In order to update the firmware of this machine, it is necessary to download the latest version of
firmware on an SD card.
Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 beside the rear left of the controller box.
Types of firmware update files, supported update methods:

SFU SD Card RFU ARFU
Individual firmware N/A Available Available N/A
Package firmware Available Available Available Available
5.3.2 FIRMWARE TYPE

Firmware type Firmware location
System Controller Board
SM 5-6 M0AN
Firmware Update (SD Card)
Firmware type Firmware location

Engine BCU
Operation Panel Smart Operation Panel
Finisher1 Finisher
Bank Optional PFU
LCT LCIT
Mail Box
Maintenance
MailBox
4BSystem
Network Support Smart Operation Panel – CPU board
Bank2 Bank
BIOS BCU
HDD format option Controller Board
Folding unit Folding unit
RPCS Controller Board
PS Controller Board
PCL Controller Board
PDF Controller Board
PictBridge Controller Board
XPS Controller Board
MediaPrint: JPEG Controller Board
MediaPrint: TIFF Controller Board
FONT Controller Board
FONT2 Controller Board
FONT6 Controller Board
NetworkDocBox Smart Operation Panel – CPU board
Printer apl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board
Websupport Smart Operation Panel – CPU board
WebUapl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board
What is Included in the Firmware Package
Modules included in the firmware package are indicated by ticks ( ) in the firmware download web site.
Firmware not included in the package requires updating by SD cards, etc.
5.3.3 PROCEDURE
• An SD card is a precision device, so when you handle an SD card, respect the following.
• When the power is switched ON, do not insert or remove a card.
• During installation, do not switch the power OFF.
• Since the card is manufactured to high precision, do not store it in a hot or humid location, or
in direct sunlight.
M0AN 5-7 SM
• Do not bend the card, scratch it, or give it a strong shock.

• Before downloading firmware to an SD card, check whether write-protection of the SD card is
canceled. If write-protection is enabled, an error code (error code 44, etc.) will be displayed
during download, and the download will fail.
• Before updating firmware, remove the network cable from this machine.
• During software update, disconnect network cables and interface cables, remove wireless
boards, etc., (so that they are not accessed during the update).
SM 5-8 M0AN
Preparing the SD Card
• When preparing the SD card, do not include other applications in the one for the VM version
update.
1. Format an SD card.
Maintenance
2. Create a folder in the SD card and name it "romdata".
4BSystem
3. Download the firmware from SERES BB and store it in the "romdata" folder.
4. Unzip the downloaded file.
5. From the unzipped folder, move the necessary firmware files (e.g. M0ANxxxx.fwu)"fwu" file to the
"romdata" folder created in step 2.
• Do not remove the SD card from SD card slot until data writing is finished.
• Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only model
firmware you want.
Update Procedure
1. First download the new firmware to the SD card.
M0AN 5-9 SM
4. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 [A: Lower Slot].
• Check whether the card is properly in the SD card slot. When a SD card is inserted, a
click is heard, and it is locked.
• To remove the card, release by pressing once.

6. Wait until the update screen starts (about 45 seconds).
When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed.
7. Check whether a program installation screen is displayed. (English display) When the SD card
contains two or more software modules, they are displayed as follows.
<<When two or more software names are displayed>>

1. Press the module selection button or [1] - [5] on the 10-key pad.
2. Choose the appropriate module. (If already selected, cancel the selection)
Operation of keys or buttons
Keys or buttons to press Contents
[Exit] or 10-key pad [0] Returns to normal screen.
[Start] Key Select all modules.
[Clear/Stop] key Cancel all selections.
SM 5-10 M0AN
Display contents
On the above screen, two programs, i.e., engine firmware and printer application are displayed.
(The screen may change depending on the firmware or application).
The display contents are as follows:
Display Contents
ROM: Display installed module number / version information.
Maintenance
4BSystem
NEW: Display module number / version information in the card.
The upper row corresponds to the module name, the lower row corresponds to the version number.
8. Select the module with the module selection button or 10 key pad operation. The selected module is
highlighted, and [Verify] and [Update] are displayed.
• Depending on the combination of modules to update, it may not be possible to select all of
them simultaneously.
<<Key or button operations>>

Keys or buttons to press Contents
[Update] or [#] key Update the ROM of the selected module.
[Verify] button or [./*] key Perform verification of the selected module.
9. Press the [Update] or [#] key, and perform software update.

10. During firmware update, a "firmware update/ verification progress screen" is displayed. When
firmware update is complete, a "firmware update end screen" is displayed.
• In the middle row, the name of the module currently being updated is displayed. (in this case,
the printer module is being updated)
• In the lower row, a progress bar is displayed in ten steps. (The more *, the more the progress.)
<<Firmware update end screen>>
M0AN 5-11 SM
• This screen is displayed when all selected firmware modules are to be updated. "Printer" in the
second row shows that the module updated last is the printer. (When more than one were
updated simultaneously, only the module that was updated last is displayed.)
• When Verify has completed normally, the Update done display of the above screen is "Verify
done." If "Verify Error" is displayed, reinstall the software of the application displayed in the
lower row.
11. After turning the main power OFF, remove the SD card.
12. Turn the main power ON again, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
13. Return the SD card slot cover to the original position.
• When the power supply is switched OFF during firmware update, update is interrupted, and
the power is switched ON again, normal operation cannot be guaranteed.
• To guarantee operation, an update error continues to be displayed until update is successful.

In this case, insert the SD card again, switch the power ON, and continue download of
firmware from the SD card automatically.
5.3.4 ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING
EXX shows an error code.

For error codes, refer to the following table:
SM 5-12 M0AN
Error Code List

Code Contents Solutions
20 Physical address mapping cannot be • Switch the main power supply off and on to try
performed. again.
• Re-insert the SD card to reboot it.
• Replace the controller board if the above
solutions do not solve the problem.
Maintenance
21 Insufficient memory for the download • Switch the main power supply off and on to try
4BSystem
again.
• Replace the controller board if the updating
cannot be done by switching the power off
and on.
22 Decompression of compressed data • Switch the main power supply off and on to try
failed. again.
• Replace the SD card used for the update.
24 SD card access error • Re-insert the SD card.
• Switch the main power supply off and on to try
again.
• Replace the SD card used for the update.
32 The SD card used after download • Insert the SD card containing the same
suspension is incorrect. program as when the firmware update was
SD cards are different between the one suspended, and then switch the main power
which was inserted before power supply off and on to try again.
interruption and the one which was • There is a possibility that the SD card is
inserted after power interruption. damaged if the update cannot be done after
the correct SD card has been inserted. In
this case, try again with a different SD card.
Replace all relevant boards if the update is
done for the BCU and FCU.
Replace the operation panel unit if the
update is done for the operation panel.
33 Card version error. • Install the correct ROM update data for each
The wrong card version is downloaded. version in the SD card.
34 Destination error. • Install the correct ROM update data for each
A card for the wrong destination is destination (JPN/ EXP/ OEM) in the SD card.
inserted.
35 Model error. • Install the correct ROM update data for each
A card for the wrong model is inserted. model in the SD card.
36 Module error. • Install the program to be updated in advance.
The program to be downloaded does not • There is a possibility that the SD card
exist on the main unit. containing the program to be updated has
The download destination specified by not been mounted. Check to confirm that the
M0AN 5-13 SM

the card does not match up to the SD card has been correctly mounted.
destination for the main unit’s program. • The SD card is incorrect if the program to be
updated has been correctly installed. In this
case, insert the correct SC card.
38 The version of the downloaded program • Make sure that the program to be overwritten
has not been authorized for the update. is the specified version.
40 Engine download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to try
again.
• If the download fails again, replace the
controller board and the BCU.
42 Control panel / language download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to try
again.
• If the download fails again, replace the
controller board and the operation panel unit.
43 Printing download fails. • Switch the main power supply off and on to try
again.
• The SD card is damaged if the update fails
again. Replace the SD card.
44 The data to be overwritten cannot be • Switch the main power supply off and on to try
accessed when controller-related again.
programs are downloaded. • Install the correct ROM update data in the SD
card.
• Replace the controller board if the data to be
overwritten is contained on the controller
board.
49 Firmware updates are currently • The setting of Update Firmware in the
prohibited. Administrator Tools has been set to [Prohibit]
by an administrator. Amend the setting to [Do
not Prohibit] and try again.
50 The results of the electronic authorization • Install the correct ROM update data in the SD
check have rejected the update data. card.
57 @Remote is not connected at the • Check the @Remote connection.
date/time reserved for receiving the
package firmware update from the
network.
58 Update cannot be done due to a • Check the @Remote connection.
reception route problem.
59 HDD is not mounted. • Check the HDD connection.
60 HDD could not be used during the • Try again.
package firmware update. • Replace the HDD if the download fails again.
61 The module ID for the package firmware • Prepare the correct package files.
update is incorrect.
62 The configuration of the package • Prepare the correct package files.
firmware update files is incorrect.
63 Reception fails due to the power off at • Update is to be done automatically when the
the reserved date/time of the remote next reception time has elapsed.
firmware update from the network.
SM 5-14 M0AN

64 Reception fails due to the power off at • Reset the reservation date/time for the remote
the reserved date/time of the package update.
65 Reception fails due to the status error of • Update is to be done automatically when the
the machine at the reserved date/time of next reception time has elapsed.
the remote firmware update from the
network.
Maintenance
66 Reception failed due to the status error
4BSystem
• Reset the reservation date/time for the remote
of the machine at the reserved date/time update.
of the package firmware update from the
network.
67 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected correctly.
information from the Gateway fails at the
reserved date/time of the remote
68 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected correctly.
information from the Gateway fails.
69 Download fails at the reserved date/time • Check that the network is connected correctly.
of the remote firmware update from the
network.
70 Package firmware download from the • Check that the network is connected correctly.
network fails.
71 Network communication error occurs at • Check that the network is connected correctly.
the reserved date/time of the package
72 The setting of @Remote is invalid at the • Set the setting of @Remote Service in the
reserved date/time of the package Administrator Tools to [Do not Prohibit].
M0AN 5-15 SM
Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update)
5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE)

In this machine, software can be updated by remote control using @Remote.

5.4.2 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION

RFU is performable for a device which meets the following conditions.
1. The customer consents to the use of RFU.
2. The device is connected to a network via TCP/IP for @Remote.
5.5 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SMART FIRMWARE UPDATE)
• A HDD unit must be installed on the machine to enable the SFU or the package firmware
update via SD card.
SM 5-16 M0AN
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)
5.5.1 OVERVIEW
Each firmware module (such as System, Engine, etc.) used to be updated individually. However, an all-
inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
There are several ways to update using the firmware package.
Maintenance
4BSystem
Package Firmware Update via a network: SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
• There are two methods for SFU.

• Immediate Update: To update the firmware when visiting
• Update at the next visit: To set the date and time for downloading. The firmware will be
automatically downloaded beforehand and updated at the following visit.
• "Update at the next visit" is recommended since firmware download may take some minutes due to
the network condition.
• SFU requires the connection to @Remote via a device which has the embedded @Remote
communicating function. When a machine is connected to @Remote via an intermediate
device (RC Gate), the SFU function is disabled.
Other than SFU, package firmware update can also be performed by using the following three methods.
• Package Firmware Update via a network: ARFU (Auto Remote Firmware Update)
• Package Firmware Update via an SD Card
• Package Firmware Update via a network: RFU (Remote Firmware Update)

5.5.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
M0AN 5-17 SM
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote
with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating.

2. Touch [Firmware Update].
3. Touch [Update].
4. Touch [Execute Update].
5. Touch [YES].
SM 5-18 M0AN
6. The following will be displayed.
Maintenance
4BSystem
• If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed, is
displayed, go back to step 1.
• Update will be started automatically after the download is finished.

• When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a print job
is started. After the print job is finished, touch [YES] on the display shown below to restart
updating.
M0AN 5-19 SM
7. [Update done] is displayed.

• The machine will automatically reboot itself.
• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to
be updated".
5.5.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE)

It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU in
advance, and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit. This saves waiting time for
the firmware to download at the service visit.
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (Reserve)

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to @Remote
with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating function. If an
error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating.
SM 5-20 M0AN
Maintenance
4BSystem
3. Touch [Reserve].
4. Touch [Reservation setting].
M0AN 5-21 SM
5. Enter the dates and times of the next visit and the start of receiving data.
• "Next time to visit this customer": The package firmware will be automatically downloaded by
this time/date.
• "When to receive? (1-7)": The download of the package firmware will begin this number of
days before the next visit.
Successful Download
In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before the next scheduled
visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first try. In the second diagram, the
download fails three times and is successful on the fourth try.
• If the firmware download fails or cannot be completed due to the network settings/condition, no
power to the machine, or other reason, the machine will continue retrying every six hours until the
scheduled deadline (up to a maximum of four tries). For example, if the download is set for the day
before the next visit, the machine will attempt the download at 24 hours before the visit, and then
continue trying every six hours (max. four tries total).
• The retry is only performed in cases when the firmware download has failed.
• If the machine is in Energy Saver mode when the download is scheduled to begin, the download will
be performed in the background and the machine/panel will stay in Energy Saver mode.
• The download will continue uninterrupted even if the customer initiates a print job or other operation
while the download is in progress.
SM 5-22 M0AN
• The download will be terminated if the customer turns the power off while the download is in
progress.
• If the download cannot be completed successfully by the time of the next scheduled visit, the
machine will stop trying to download the firmware.
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with Reserve
Maintenance
4BSystem
3. Touch [Reserve].
M0AN 5-23 SM
4. Touch [Reserve and received package information].
5. Check the information displayed.

When the package firmware was downloaded successfully, the details of the download result are
displayed as the following picture shows.
• This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been
downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with "-".
SM 5-24 M0AN
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with Reserve

Maintenance
4BSystem
3. Touch [Update].
4. Touch [Execute Update].
M0AN 5-25 SM
5. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES].
• Update is started.
• If the version of the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version, the
messages shown in the following picture are displayed.
• If you wish to download the latest version, touch [Execute] beside the message
"Download and update the latest package." Then update of the package firmware will be
started.
• If you wish to update using the firmware in the HDD (old version), touch [Execute] beside
the message "Update to the received package."
SM 5-26 M0AN
6. [Update done] is displayed.

• The machine will automatically reboot itself.
Maintenance
4BSystem
be updated".
5.5.4 UPDATE VIA SD CARD

Update with an SD card, which is the conventional method, is available if you write the package
firmware to the SD card.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Error Screens During Updating.

1. Create a new folder in the SD card, and then name it "package".
M0AN 5-27 SM
2. Copy the package firmware (xxxxxxxx.pkg) to this folder.
• If you copy the package firmware into the conventional "romdata" folder, the update will
not work.
• Only one version of the package firmware should be copied into the folder. If you copy
multiple versions of package firmware to the SD card, the machine will select only one
version of the firmware randomly.
3. Turn the power OFF.

4. Insert the SD card which contains the package into SD card slot 2 (for service).
5. Turn the power ON and touch [Update].
• When the SD card contains both a firmware package and one or more modules, the
following display may show up. Select [Package] and touch [OK] to move to step 5 above.
SM 5-28 M0AN
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)
6. Update is started automatically after the package firmware download to the HDD has been
completed.
7. When update is completed, "Update done" is displayed.
Maintenance
4BSystem
be updated".
8. Turn the main power switch OFF, and then pull out the SD card from SD card slot 2.
9. Turn the power ON.
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE (AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE

UPDATE)
• Auto remote firmware update (ARFU) requires connection to the Internet. Be sure to get
permission from the customer before setting up this feature.
• ARFU can only be used on machines that have a HDD. If using ARFU at machine installation,
an optional HDD is required.
5.6.1 OVERVIEW
By Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), the firmware is updated by checking the global server every
76 hours and downloading the latest package if it is newer than the one installed on the machine.
Function Overview
M0AN 5-29 SM

What is Included in the Firmware Package
Modules included in the firmware package are indicated by ticks ( ) in the firmware download web site.
Firmware not included in the package requires updating by SD cards, etc.
SM 5-30 M0AN
5.6.2 DOWNLOADING AND UPDATING PROCESS
Maintenance
4BSystem
Downloads the Latest Package
The machine checks the server for the latest package version.
If the version of the package on the global server is later than that of the package installed on the
machine, or if the machine has not downloaded the firmware package, the machine downloads the
latest package in the background even when the customer is using the machine.
If download fails, the machine will retry downloading 76 hours later.
The downloaded package can also be used with SFU (Smart Firmware Update). A package
downloaded with SFU (Smart Firmware Update) can be used with ARFU (Auto Remote Firmware
Update) and vice versa.
When replacing the hard disk, the firmware package data becomes lost from the hard disk. Even if the
latest firmware is on the new hard disk, be sure to receive the latest package data.
When the machine connects to the server where the package files are stored, the DNS settings and the
name solution by DNS are needed. The machine will still try to download the package even if the name
cannot be resolved, but will fail as the name is not resolved.
The time and date to send the next inquiry to the global server can be checked with SP5-886-116 (Farm
Update Setting: Auto Update Next Date).
The auto remote firmware update is executed every 76 hours.
M0AN 5-31 SM
Judgement of ARFU
Update judgement is done when the latest update package is successfully downloaded, or the package
has already been downloaded.
If the judgement timing is in the range of the update prohibited time or day set with SP or WIM, the
machine will retry the update after 76 hours.
If the machine is in use when the judgement process runs, the process is retried. Retry is done up to
three times every hour (can be changed with SP) and if the machine is in use for all three retries, the
machine will retry the update after 76 hours
SM 5-32 M0AN
Maintenance
4BSystem
Situations judged as machine in use
No. Situations judged as machine in use
1 When the control panel is used within 30 seconds
2 During firmware update
3 While firmware update is disabled
4 While printing (re-printing via network)
5 Retrieving image data via network
6 While initial setting (User Tools settings) or SP is being set
7 While shifting to/from the energy server mode
8 When not being able to run firmware update due to the modules that are running
e.g.) Waiting for DCS transfer (refer to appendix), accessing devices such as HDD/SD card,
etc.
9 While displaying a preview
10 While displaying the printer menu
11 While writing log information
12 While accessing the address book
13 During SC
M0AN 5-33 SM
Update Process
When the machine has decided to run the auto firmware update, the following message is displayed.
The popup will have "Cancel" and "OK" buttons and the update process will start either when the "OK"
button is selected or 30 seconds has passed.
When the "Cancel" button is selected, the machine will run the "Retry update" process.
When the device update and three retries in recovery mode both fail, it is determined as a device defect
and will display an SC for the defective device. If such an SC appears, replace the indicated board. In
the case of SC845, the SC cannot be reported to the call center.
Device and corresponding SC number.

Device name SC number
Engine board SC845-01
Controller board SC845-02
Operation panel (normal panel) SC845-03
Operation panel (smart panel) SC845-04
SM 5-34 M0AN
Canceling the update
It is possible to cancel the Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU) or update in recovery mode from the
operation panel.
Maintenance
4BSystem
But this is not possible while updating the operation panel itself. On the other hand, the update for the
operation panel will run at the final stage of the update. Thus canceling the update at that stage has no
real effect.
When the update is cancelled, the machine will reboot when updates for all modules of one of the
following devices is done.
1. Engine Board
2. Controller Board
3. Operation Panel
For example, when the update process is cancelled while updating the first module of the operation
panel, the machine will reboot when all modules in the operation panel have been updated.
The firmware contents included in the package can be referred to in the release note in SERES release
of the package.
The next update will run 76 hours after the cancellation. The old (cancelled) package will be discarded if
the package downloaded 76 hours later is the latest.
M0AN 5-35 SM
5.6.3 CHECKING THE ARFU RESULT

2. Press [Firmware update].
3. Press [Update].
4. Press [Update Package Information].
5. If the firmware package is the same as the one on the global server, the update was completed
successfully. Otherwise, check the result using the logging data.
In SP7-520-041 to -045 (Update Log: Auto:Version), you can check the versions of the packages
updated by ARFU. (-041 displays the latest result. It is also printed on the SMC sheet.)
5.6.4 CHECKING THE RESULT USING THE LOGGING DATA

2. Press [System].
3. Check the results for ARFU by SP7-520-051 to 060 (Update Log: Auto:Result)
"-051" is the latest update result. For details about the number of each result log, see the next section
"Related SP".
5.6.5 RELATED SP
SP Number Selection Overview
Def.
SP5-886-111 0: OFF Sets auto update ON/OFF by ARFU.
1: ON
SP5-886-112 0: OFF Will not run the update when update prohibited time setting is ON and
1: ON the current time is in the range of the time set.
• Start time < End time: Prohibited time is from the start time to the
SP5-886-113 0 to 23
end time on the same day.
9
• Start time > End time: Prohibited time is from the start time to the
SP5-886-114 0 to 23 end time on the next day.
17 • Start time == End time: Prohibited time setting is disabled. (Update
will not be prohibited.)
SP5-886-115 0: OFF Even when the update function is disabled, downloading the package
1: ON is allowed.
The downloaded package can be used with SFU.
SP5-886-116 Display Displays when the latest package check will run.
only
SP5-886-117 1 to 24 Set time for the next version check after retry.
1
SP5-886-120 0x00 Update will not run if the corresponding bit for each day below is set to
1.
• Prohibited at all times: bit 7
• Monday: bit 6
SM 5-36 M0AN
SP Number Selection Overview

Def.
• Tuesday: bit 5
• Wednesday: bit 4
• Thursday: bit 3
• Friday: bit 2
• Saturday: bit 1
• Sunday: bit 0
Maintenance
4BSystem
This setting is not affected by the prohibited time setting.
e.g.) Prohibited on Mon., Fri., Sat., and Sun. : 0x47 (01000111)
SP7-520-011 Display History of date and time when update has started.
to 015 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
If the last update failed, this is not recorded.
SP7-520-021 Display History of date and time when update has finished.
recent.
The record is created when the update has successfully finished.
When the update is cancelled, no record is created.
SP7-520-031 Display History of the package number (including suffix) for which update has
to 035 only completed.
The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being most
recent.
SP7-520-041 Display History of the package version for which update has completed.
recent.
SP7-520-051 Display History of the result of the download and the update.
to 060 only Refer below for the numbers set.
Numbers set for the result history for SP7-520-051 to 060

No. Result Description
1 Downloading with SFU Cannot download or update as the machine is now
downloading the package for SFU.
2 HDD uninstalled Cannot download or update as the machine has no HDD.
3 Updating with SFU Cannot download or update as the machine is being
updated with SFU.
4 HDD error Cannot download or update as the HDD cannot be used.
5 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update as the version information
cannot be obtained.
6 Update download error Cannot download or update as the update download failed.
In non @Remote method, this shows that the download
failed because there was no proxy set.
M0AN 5-37 SM

7 Name resolution error Cannot download or update as the name cannot be
resolved upon downloading the update.
8 Auto update setting disabled The package has been downloaded but will not run the
update as SP5-886-111 (auto update setting) is disabled
and SP5-886-115 (auto download setting for SFU) is
enabled.
9 Update prohibited time Cannot start to update as the auto update prohibited time
setting (SP5-886-112) is enabled and the time update
initiated was in the range of prohibited time (SP5-886-113 to
114).
Or the day which update was initiated was a day for which
update was prohibited (SP5-886-120).
10 Update postponed due to Cannot start update due to the following conditions when
machine in use update was initiated.
• The machine is in use by a user (the panel was used
within 30 seconds)
• Machine offline for other reasons
• Operation prohibited
• Displaying SP/UP menu
• Firmware update is running with another method
• Configuration change prohibited
• Verifying the operation panel (smart panel)
11 Update cancelled by user Update was cancelled because a user selected "Cancel" in
the popup shown before starting the update.
12 Offline failed Cannot start to update as the machine is offline for other
reasons.
13 Update successful Update was started and successfully completed.
14 Update failed Update was started but failed.
15 Update deemed completed Update was cancelled after the process was initiated
because a user selected "Cancel". There is no need to
resume the update due to one of the following reasons:
• A newer update has been released and received.
• When retrying ARFU, the update has already been
completed by another method.
16 Update cancelled by user after Update was cancelled after the process initiated because a
update initiated user selected "Cancel" during the update.
17 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update as the name resolution failed
(communication failure caused when obtaining version information.
by host name)
18 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update as the proxy verification failed
(proxy verification failure) with proxy settings when obtaining version information.
19 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update as an error other than proxy
(other than proxy verification verification with proxy settings occurred when obtaining
failure when proxy is set) version information.
20 Update download error Cannot download or update as the proxy verification failed
(proxy verification failure) with proxy settings when downloading the package.
SM 5-38 M0AN
Updating JavaVM

21 Update download error Cannot download or update as an error other than proxy
(other than proxy verification verification with proxy settings occurred when downloading
failure when proxy is set) the package.
22 Update by retry successful After power failure, unsuccessful update, or rebooting,

update by retry is executed successfully.
However, this does not apply to the case where the update
was cancelled after the process was initiated because a
Maintenance
user selected "Cancel".
4BSystem
In this case, the update is "successful" if the retry is not
executed between the start and completion of the next
update (76 hours after the cancellation).
5.7 UPDATING JAVAVM

5.7.1 OVERVIEW
Updating Java VM is performed with a PC using the update tool.
• Prepare the following items in advance.

• SD memory card reader/writer
• PC
• The updating procedure is as follows.
1. Deactivate the SDK applications
2. Remove the VM Card Type P13 from the main machine.
3. Update Java VM with the PC using the update tool.
4. Insert the VM Card Type P13 in the main machine.
5. Activate the SDK applications
5.7.2 DEACTIVATING SDK APPLICATIONS AND REMOVING THE VM

CARD
Operation from Operation Panel

1. Enable [Machine Management] of the administrator authentication, and log in as the machine
administrator.
Select the [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features] > [System Settings] > [Administrator Tools] >
[Administrator authentication] > [Machine Management]. Enable [Machine Management] and login
as the machine administrator.
2. Press the [User Tools] icon on Home screen.

4. Press [Extended Feature Settings] twice.
5. Press the [Administrator Tools] tab and then [Heap / Stack Size Settings].
M0AN 5-39 SM
Updating JavaVM
6. Take a note of the current heap size settings in order to check them after version update.
7. Return to the [Extended Feature Settings] screen, and press the [Startup Setting] tab.
8. Disable all SDK applications except Java TM Platform.
9. Press the SDK applications until the status changes from "Starting Up"/"Suspend"/"Ending" to
"Stop".
10. Press the [Extended Feature Info] tab.

11. Press the stopped SDK applications to set "Auto Start" to "Off".
"Auto Start" settings can be enabled on this screen if Type-J SDK applications are enabled.
12. Select [OK] > [Exit].

13. Turn the main power OFF.
15. Remove VM Card Type P13 from the SD Card Slot 1 [A] (Upper slot).
Operation from Web Image Monitor

1. Log in as the administrator from Web Image Monitor.
2. Take a note of the current heap size setting in [Heap / Stack Size Settings].
SM 5-40 M0AN
Updating JavaVM
• [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Administrator
Tools] -> [Heap / Stack Size Settings]
3. Stop all SDK applications except for Java TM Platform.

1. Display the [Startup Setting] menu.
• [Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Startup
Setting]
Maintenance
4BSystem
2. Check the radio button of the SDK application which status is "Starting Up".
3. Click [Start Up/Stop] to stop the application.
4. "Stop" is displayed in the status column.
• Do not change the status of Java TM Platform to "Stop".

4. Make sure that "Auto Start" is set to "Off" for each SDK application.
1. Click the [Details] icon ( ) for each SDK application in [Startup Setting].
2. Make sure that "Auto Start" is set to "Off". (Default: On)
5. Turn the main power OFF.

7. Remove VM Card Type P13 from the SD Card Slot 1 [A] (Upper slot).
M0AN 5-41 SM
Updating JavaVM
5.7.3 UPDATING JAVAVM AND INSERTING THE VM CARD

1. Insert VM Card Type P13 into the SD memory card reader/writer of your PC.
2. Check that the SD memory card reader/writer is detected on your PC, and then write down the drive
letter. (If the SD memory card reader/writer is detected as (F:), the drive letter is "f")
3. Download the update modules from the Firmware Download Center.

4. Unzip the downloaded file, and then execute the .exe file.
5. The folder is generated.
6. Execute the .bat file in the folder.
7. Input the drive letter following the message "Please input drive letter of SD card [a - x]: ". (If the SD
memory card reader/writer is detected as (F:), input "f")
8. Press the [Enter] key to start updating Java VM.

It takes 3 minutes to update Java VM.
9. After completing the update, remove VM Card Type P13 from the SD memory card reader/writer of
your PC.
10. Insert VM Card Type P13 into SD Card Slot 1 (Upper slot) of the machine.
SM 5-42 M0AN
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
5.7.4 ACTIVATING SDK APPLICATIONS

1. Make sure that the VM card is fully inserted, and then turn the main power ON.
2. Log in as the machine administrator from Operation panel / Web Image Monitor.
3. Set "Auto Start" whose status is "OFF" to "On".
4. Compare the current heap size settings and the values recorded before update.
Maintenance
4BSystem
If the settings are not the same as the recorded values, correct the settings to the recorded values.
5. Enable the disabled SDK application.
5.8 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

5.8.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD
Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
• This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked.
1. Do SP5-990-001 (SP Print Mode: All(Data List)) before you switch the machine off. You will need a
record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.

M0AN 5-43 SM
4. Insert the SD card in Service Slot [A: Lower Slot].

6. Execute SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the "Execute" key.
7. The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload procedure is
finished. The file is saved to the path and the following filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number "K5000017114":
NVRAM\K5000017114.NV
8. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the
uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.
• You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.
5.8.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM

Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
• The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the
connection between the controller and BCU is defective.
• Do the download procedure again if the download fails.

• Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
• Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM
data.
SM 5-44 M0AN
2. Remove the SD slot cover [A] (Coin screw x 1).
Maintenance
4BSystem
3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2 [A: Lower Slot].

5. Do SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the "Execute" key.
• The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the machine
for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the serial numbers do
not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• C/O, P/O Count
M0AN 5-45 SM
UP/SP Data Import/Export
5.9 UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT

5.9.1 OVERVIEW
With this machine, you can save and restore the UP/SP setting data on the SD card.
You can import the data from another machine of the same series regardless of its model or option
configuration.
5.9.2 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
Data that Can Be Imported and Exported

• Printer Features
• Browser Settings
• Web Image Monitor Setting
• Web Service Settings
• System Settings
• Screen Features
• Home screen customization settings*1
*1
Wallpaper cannot be exported if "Live Wallpapers" is selected.
Data that Cannot Be Imported or Exported

• Some System Settings *1 *2*3*4
*1
The setting for the date, settings that require the device certificate, and settings that need to be
adjusted for each machine (for example, image adjustment settings) cannot be imported or
exported.
*2
Settings only for executing functions and settings only for viewing cannot be imported or
exported.
*3
Software setting for IC Card/Bluetooth cannot be imported or exported.
*4
Language switching cannot be imported or exported.
• Extended Feature Settings

• Address book
• Programs (printer function)
• Settings that can be specified via telnet
• @Remote-related data
• Counters
• Settings that can only be specified via Web Image Monitor or Web Service (for example, Bonjour,
SSDP setting)
SM 5-46 M0AN
Exporting Device Information

This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.
When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the control panel.
2. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
Maintenance
3. Press [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features] > [System Settings].
4BSystem
6. Press [Device Setting Information: Export (Memry Strge Devc)].
7. Set the export conditions.
• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device Unique
Information" includes the IP address, host name, etc.
• Specify an encryption key.

8. Press [Run Export].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Exit].
11. Log out.
M0AN 5-47 SM
• If export fails, you can check the log for the error. The log is stored in the same location as the
exported device setting information file.
• When device Information is periodically imported, it is necessary to create the device setting
information file with special software and store it on the web server.
Importing Device Information

This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.
Import device information saved on an SD card.
2. Log in from the control panel as an administrator with all privileges.
3. Press [User Tools] icon > [Machine Features] > [System Settings].
6. Press [Device Setting Information: Import (Memry Strge Devc)].
7. Configure the import conditions.
• Press [Select] of the "Device Setting Info. File" to select the file(s) to import.
• When inserting a file into a home screen, press [Select] for the Image for Home screen and
select the file. You cannot use this setting when using the Smart Operation Panel.
• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device Unique
Information" includes the IP address, host name, etc.
• Enter the encryption key that was specified when the file was exported.
8. Press [Run Import].
9. Press [OK].
10. Press [Exit].
The machine restarts.
SM 5-48 M0AN
• If import fails, you can check the log for the error. The log is stored in the same location as the
5.9.3 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
Data that can be imported and exported
Maintenance
4BSystem
• System SP
• Printer SP
Exporting Device Information

When exporting SP device information from the control panel, the data is saved on an SD card.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export)
4. Select "Target" SP settings (System/Printer/Smart Operation Panel) to be exported.
Select "Option" settings (Unique/Secret).
Item Specification Note
Unique Unique information of the Unique information that can be updated
machine is included in the #1. Items that are to be used to identify the machine.
exported file if you select
Example: Network Information/ Host name / Mail address
"Unique" setting.
assigned to the machine
#2. Items for specifying the options equipped on the
machine.
Example: Lot number for developer
• Import/export of the host name: Follow the rule

to use the default host name (RNP + MAC
address) only if the user setting of the host
name has not been specified.
• If the default host name is imported to the
machine on which the host name has been
specified, the host name is not overwritten, and
an error does not occur.
Unique information that cannot be updated
#1. Items that may cause a problem if imported
Example: Serial number / Information related to
@Remote / PnP name
#2. Items for managing the history of the machine
Example: Time and date / Counter information /
Installation date
#3. Items that vary between each machine even among
the same models.
Example: Setting values for the Engine
M0AN 5-49 SM
Item Specification Note

Secret Secret information is exported if Secret information
you select "Secret" setting. #1. Data that cannot be exported without being
encrypted.
(Exported data is encrypted.)
Example: Password / Encryption key / PIN code
#2. Confidential information for the customer
Example: User name / User ID / Department code /
Employee number / Mail address / Phone number
#3. Personal information
Example: Document name / Image data
#4. Sensitive information for the customer
Example: IP address / MAC address / Network
parameters / Characters that can be entered
#5. Data that can be exported to identify the user without
revealing personal information (unless the machine is
identified.)
Example: Registration number (abbreviated)
* The IP address is exported when both 'Unique' and 'Secret' are selected.
1. Select "Crpt config" setting (Encryption).

Encryption Select whether to encrypt or not If the encryption function is used, setting of
when exporting. an encryption key is required by direct input.
If you push the "Encryption" key, • Type the arbitrary password using the soft
you can export secret information. keyboard
• Can enter up to 32 characters
2. Press [Execute].
3. Press [OK].
• If export fails, you can check the log for the error. The log is stored in the same location as the
Importing Device Information

Import device information saved on an SD card.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-101(Import/Export: Import)
4. Select a unique setting.
• If you set "Device Unique Information" to [Exclude], the import of items categorized as the
device unique information is skipped.
5. Press [Encryption Key], if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.
SM 5-50 M0AN
6. Select an encryption setting.

Unique If you want to apply the unique information to the target Refer to the above
machine, select the "Unique" key. information.
Encryption If an encrypted file is selected as the import file, this
setting is required.
7. Press [Execute].
Maintenance
8. Press [OK].
4BSystem
• If import fails, you can check the log for the error. The log is stored in the same location as the
5.9.4 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS

The access log file is created when export/import is executed. The file is stored in the same location as
the exported device setting information file.
If an error occurs, check the log's result code in the access log file first. Values other than 0 indicate that
an error occurred.
The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file
If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note down the
error log entry, then contact your supervisor.
Result Code Cause Solutions
2 (INVALID A file import was attempted between Import files exported from the same
REQUEST) different models or machines with model with the same device
different device configurations. configurations.
4 (INVALID Failed to write the device information Check whether the destination device is
OUTPUT DIR) to the destination device. operating normally.
7( MODULE An unexpected error occurred during Switch the power off and then back on,
M0AN 5-51 SM
Address Book Upload/Download
Result Code Cause Solutions

ERROR) import or export. and then try the operation again. If the
error persists, contact your supervisor.
8 (DISK FULL) The available storage space on the Execute the operation again after making
external medium is insufficient. sure there is enough storage space.
9 (DEVICE Failed to write or read the log file. Check whether the path to the folder for
ERROR) storing the file or the folder in which the
file is stored is missing.
10 (LOG Failed to write the log file. Contact your supervisor.
ERROR) The hard disk is faulty.
20 (PART Failed to import some settings. The reason for the failure is logged in
FAILED) "NgCode". Check the code.
Reason for the Error (Ng-Name)
2. INVALID VALUE
The specified value exceeds the
allowable range.
3. PERMISSION ERROR
The permission to edit the setting is
missing.
4. NOT EXIST
The setting does not exist in the system.
5. INTERLOCK ERROR
The setting cannot be changed because
of the system status or interlocking with
other specified settings.
6. OTHER ERROR
The setting cannot be changed for some
other reason.
21 (INVALID Failed to import the file because it is Check whether the file format is correct.
FILE) in the wrong format in the external The import file should be a CSV file.
medium.
22 (INVALID The encryption key is not valid. Use the correct encryption key.
KEY)
• When exporting device information from the control panel, the data can be saved only on an
SD card.
• The file format for exports is CSV.
5.10 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

5.10.1 INFORMATION LIST
The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.
• Registration No.
• Key Display
• Select Title
SM 5-52 M0AN
• Display Priority
• User Code
• Auth. Info at Login for Basic, Windows, LDAP Authentication (User Name and Login Password)
• Available Functions
• Protect Destination
Maintenance
• Group Information
4BSystem
5.10.2 DOWNLOAD
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.
2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
5. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 [A: Lower Slot].
6. Turn ON the main power switch.

8. Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
9. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the main power switch.
10. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 (lower).
M0AN 5-53 SM
11. Install the SD slot cover.
• If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error message
is displayed.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked.

• Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back to your
location.
5.10.3 UPLOAD
3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into SD card slot 2 [A: Lower Slot].
• Check whether the card is properly in the SD card slot. When a SD card is inserted, a
click is heard, and it is locked.
• To remove the card, release by pressing once.

6. Do SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
SM 5-54 M0AN
Capturing the Device Logs
7. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the main power switch.
8. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 (lower).
9. Install the SD slot cover.
• The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.
Maintenance
• The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded.
4BSystem
• If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is displayed.
5.11 CAPTURING THE DEVICE LOGS

5.11.1 OVERVIEW
With this feature, you can save device logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation panel) on
an SD card. It allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
The Capturing Log feature can save the following logs.
• Controller device log including operation log

• Engine device log
• Operation panel log
• In older models, a technician enabled the logging tool after a problem occurred. After that,
when the problem had been reproduced, the technician was able to retrieve the device log.
• However, this new feature saves the device logs at the time that problems occur. Then you can
copy the logs to an SD card.
• You can retrieve the device logs using a SD card without a network.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before retrieving the Device Logs.
Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the device logs are retrieved.
Types of device logs that can be saved

Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum storage
capacity)
Controller device log • Saved at all times HDD (4 GB) or SD card
including operation log connected to the service slot.
When the data gets over 4.0 GB,
the older data is deleted.
Engine device log • When an engine SC occurs HDD or SD card connected to the
• When paper feeding/output stop service slot (Up to 300 times)
because of a jam
• When the machine doors are
M0AN 5-55 SM
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum storage

capacity)
opened during normal operation
Operation panel log • When an error related to the Memory in the operation panel.
operation panel occurs.
• Device logs are not saved in the following conditions:

• While erasing all memory
• While data encryption equipment is installed
• While changing the firmware configuration
• Forced power OFF (accidentally disconnecting the outlet)
• Engine device log while the machine is shutting down
• When the power supply to the HDD is off because of energy saving (engine OFF
mode/STR mode)
• When one of the following SCs occurs: SC672, SC816, SC819, SC878, SC899, SC859,
SC860, SC861, SC863, or SC864
• The following logs are not saved:

• Logs related to the energy saver mode (Engine-off, suspend-mode, or other cases)
• Network communication log
• Logs related to NRS
• Access log for unauthorized users (guests)
• HTTP session timeout log
• Auto log-out log
• IC card related log
• The default save destination is the HDD. Except when it cannot be saved to the HDD for some
reason, there is no need to change from the HDD to an SD card.
• If you want to change the save destination to an SD card, do the following.

1. Set SP5-858-002 (Collect Machine Info: Save To) to "1 (SD)"
2. Execute SP5-858-003 (Collect Machine Info: Make Log Trace Dir) to make a folder for the log
in the SD card.
3. Turn the power switch OFF and ON.
• It is recommended to use the SD card (8 GB) provided as a service part. The part number of
the SD card that is registered as a service part is "B6455040".
SM 5-56 M0AN
Security of the Operation Log

The following operation logs related to security are not saved.
• User ID
• Password
• IP address
Maintenance
• Telephone number
4BSystem
• Encryption key
• Transition to SP mode
5.11.2 STORING THE DEVICE LOGS ON AN SD CARD (WHEN THE

HDD OPTION IS NOT INSTALLED)
• The model without HDD does not have space to store device logs. To capture device logs from
such models, two SD cards are required. One SD card is used for storing the device logs via
SD card slot 2 and the other SD card is used for retrieving the device logs via the operation
panel.
• An SP 8400DN that has an optional HDD does not need this procedure if SP5-858-001 is "1
(ON)" and SP5-858-002 (Target) is "0 (HDD)". It is recommended to use the SD card (8 GB)
provided as a service part. The part number of the SD card that is registered as a service part
is "B6455040".
Procedure for Storing the Device Log on an SD Card
1. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2.

3. Enter SP mode.
4. Set SP5-858-001 (Save Machine Info) to "1 (ON)"
5. Set SP5-858-002 (Target) to "1 (SD)"
6. Execute SP5-858-003 (Make LogTrace Dir)
7. Turn the power switch OFF and ON.
• After the power switch is turned on, the machine starts to store the device logs on the SD card.
However, because the logs on this SD card are not organized, the procedure to retrieve the
logs with the other SD card via the operation panel (next section) is required.
5.11.3 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA OPERATION PANEL
• Retrieve device logs to identify the date of occurrence of the problems and to find details of the
M0AN 5-57 SM
problems
• e.g.: At around 8:00 am on March 10, an engine stall occurred. The operation panel does not
respond. Turn the main power supply off / on.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by hardware.
Procedure for Retrieving the Device Log with SD Card

1. Insert the SD card into the slot on the side of the operation panel or the service slot.
• It is recommended to use the SD card (2 GBs or 8 GBs) provided as a service part. This is
because the log data can be acquired much faster than when using commercially
available SD cards.
• Format the SD card by using SD Formatter from Panasonic before copying the logs:
https://www.sdcard.org/downloads/formatter_3/ (free software)
• Insert the SD card into the machine's service slot instead of the SD slot on the side of the
operation panel.

3. Enter SP mode.
4. Specify the date that the problem occurred in SP5-858-101 (Start Date) by setting it to the year-
month-day calendar format.
• For example, if a problem occurred on February 1, 2015, the date should be set to
"20150201", as shown above.
• Be sure to confirm the date when the problem occurred before obtaining the logs.
5. Specify the number of days to collect the logs in SP5-858-102 (Days of Tracing).
• "2" is set by default, which is the minimum needed for investigating the problem.
• A value of "1" to "180" can be set.
6. Execute SP5-858-111 (Acquire All Info & Logs) to copy all of the log types to an SD card.
It is possible to obtain the logs separately by the following SPs.
SP Collectable Information and/or Logs
SP5-858- All of the information and logs that are collected by executing the SPs from SP5-
111 858-121 to SP5-858-144, and SMC.
SP5-858- Configuration page
121
SP5-858- Font page
122
SP5-858- Print settings list
123
SP5-858- Printer Error log
SM 5-58 M0AN
SP Collectable Information and/or Logs

124
SP5-858- Controller log, engine log, operation panel log, and SMC.
141
SP5-858- Controller log
142
SP5-858- Engine log
143
Maintenance
4BSystem
SP5-858- Operation panel log
144
SP5-992- SMC
001
7. After executing the SP for copying the information and/or logs, a confirmation screen will appear. To
proceed with obtaining the information and/or logs, tap "Execute"
• The approximate time it takes to transfer the debug log is as follows. Transfer time may be
affected by the type or format of the SD card.
- Controller device log (GW device log): 2 - 20 minutes
- Engine device log: 2 minutes
- Operation panel device log: 2 - 20 minutes
If the estimated time is not calculated due to an error, an error code will be displayed.
Error Description
Code
-1 Other.
-2 No SD card is inserted in the service slot or in the SD slot on the side of the operation
panel. In this case, insert an SD card into either of the SD slots.
-3 The SD card is locked. In this case, unlock the SD card, as shown below.
M0AN 5-59 SM
Error Description
Code
[A]: Unlocked, [B]: Locked
8. Wait for the information and/or logs to be copied to the SD card.
9. After a message stating that the process has completed appears on the operation panel, confirm
that the LED light next to the SD card slot is not flashing and then remove the SD card.
10. Make sure that the SD card access LED is off, then remove the SD card.
• The process of obtaining logs fails in the following cases:

- When the size of the logs to obtain exceeds the amount of space available on the SD
card.
- When the SD card is removed while the logs are being copied to it.
- When the SD card is not formatted.
• If ‘failed’ appears on the touch panel display, turn the power off, and then recover from
step 1 again.
SM 5-60 M0AN
5.11.4 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA WEB IMAGE MONITOR

The device logs can be retrieved via the Web Image Monitor.
1. Access the following URL and logon as an administrator:

http://[IP address or host name]/web/entry/df/websys/direct/getSysInfo.cgi
Maintenance
4BSystem
2. Specify the date that the problem occurred and the number of days to download the logs, and then
click "Download".
• "2" is set by default for "Number of days, including date fault occurred, to obtain".
3. The confirmation screen will appear and the information and/or logs will start downloading. To
proceed to download the information and/or logs, wait for the open-or-save dialog to appear.
• To cancel downloading, click "Cancel".

• To reconfigure some settings, click "Download again".
M0AN 5-61 SM
• Operation panel when downloading the logs:
4. After a while, the open-or-save dialog will appear. Specify where to download and save the file.
• The debug logs are saved with the following file names. These names are the same as
the files downloaded with SD card.
The device logs are saved with the following file names.
Controller log /LogTrace/[the model number]/watching/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss]_[a unique value].gz

(mmesg)
Engine /LogTrace/[Machine Serial]/engine/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].gz
device log
Operation /LogTrace/[the model number]/opepanel/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].tar.gz
panel log
SMC /LogTrace/[the model number]/smc/[the model
number]_[5992XXX]_[yyyymmdd]_[hhmmss].csv
Configuration /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/ConfigrationPage/ConfigrationPage_
page [yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Font page • /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PCL_[the page
number]_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].jpg
• /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PDF_[the page
• /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/FontPage/FontPage_PS_[the page
Print settings • /LogTrace/[the model
list number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RPGL_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].txt
• /LogTrace/[the model
number]/gps/PrintSettingList/PrintSettingList_RTIFF_[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
Error log /LogTrace/[the model number]/gps/ErrorLog/[yyyymmdd_hhmmss].csv
SM 5-62 M0AN
SMC List Card Save Function
5.12 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION

5.12.1 OVERVIEW
The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD-
card inserted into the operation panel SD card slot or SD card slot 2 (lower - service slot) .
5.12.2 PROCEDURE
Maintenance
4BSystem
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before exporting the SMC sheet data.
Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is exported.

2. Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD-card slot, and then turn OFF the main power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select "System SP".
5. Select SP5-992-001 (SP Text Mode).
6. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.
SP5-992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
027 Smart Operation Panel SP
028 Smart Operation Panel UP
M0AN 5-63 SM
7. Press [EXECUTE].
8. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.
SM 5-64 M0AN
9. "It is executing it" is shown on the screen while executing.

Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until "Completed" is shown.
Maintenance
4BSystem
• The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.
• Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
10. After "Completed" is displayed, press [Exit].
M0AN 5-65 SM
5.12.3 NOTES ON USING THE SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION

• If you remove the SD card while executing the SMC List Card Save function, it may cause the
machine to stall.
• You can check the access (reading/writing) by the indicator on the slot.
• When you remove the SD card, be sure to check that the access indicator is off in advance.
• If the machine stalls, turn the power off and then back on.
5.12.4 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS

The SMC list data saved on the SD card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
follows.
Example:
A:
Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)
B:
SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP number(s). In
this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See the upper SP table for
the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
C:
File creation date
Year/Month/Day ("Zero" will be omitted if each is one digit.)
D:
File creation time
Hour/Minute/Second ("Zero" will be omitted if each is one digit.)
E:
File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.
SM 5-66 M0AN
Card Save Function
• A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this
function is executed.
• This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation panel
SD card slot.
Maintenance
5.12.5 ERROR MESSAGES
4BSystem
SMC List Card Save error message:
• Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, Unformatted device, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing "Exit" will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.
5.13 CARD SAVE FUNCTION

5.13.1 CARD SAVE
• The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no print
output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will remain
enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
• Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned sequentially
from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be created. This file contains
a list of all files created on the card by the card save function.
• Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has "Add" and
"New" menu items.
• Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If the card
becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the operation panel.
Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
• Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.

Limitation:
• Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Readback commands. PJL Status Readbacks will not
work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.
5.13.2 PROCEDURE
2. Insert the SD card into slot 2 (lower), then turn ON the main power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select the "Printer SP".
M0AN 5-67 SM
Card Save Function
5. Select SP-1001 "Bit Switch".
6. Select "Bit Switch 1 Settings" and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press the "#" to
register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, Card Save option will
appear in the "List/Test Print" menu.
7. Press "Exit" to exit SP Mode.

8. Press the "User Tools" icon > "Machine Features".
SM 5-68 M0AN
Card Save Function
9. Select "Printer Features".
Maintenance
4BSystem
10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add)
or Card Save (New).
M0AN 5-69 SM
Card Save Function
11. Press "OK" and then return to Home screen.
12. Press the "Printer (Classic)" icon.
13. "Hex Dump Mode" is be displayed in the top left of the display panel.
14. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking.
15. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print
output.
Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was successful.
SM 5-70 M0AN
Card Save Function
16. Press "Reset" to exit Card Save mode.
Maintenance
4BSystem
17. Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000, then press the "#" in the numeric
keypad to register the changes.
18. Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned OFF.
5.13.3 ERROR MESSAGES

Card Save error messages:
• Init error: A card save process (e.g. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to initialize.
• Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot.
• No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job.
• Write error: Failed to write to the card.
• Other error: An unknown error occurred.
If an error occurs, pressing "OK" will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.
M0AN 5-71 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Self-Diagnostic Mode
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
5BTroubleshooti
The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter are put into
four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the
ng
SC codes.
Type Display How to reset SC call or SC alarm in
customer support
system
A The SC is immediately displayed on Reset the SC (set SP5-810- Occurrence & alarm
the operation panel when SC occurs. 001) and then cycle the count
The error involves the fusing unit. The main power off and on.
machine operation is disabled. The
user cannot reset the error. Immediate alarm
B When a function is selected, the SC is Turn the operation switch off Occurrence & alarm
displayed on the operation panel. and on. count
The machine cannot be used (down-
time mitigation).
Power OFF and ON
Alarm count and

alarm only if reoccurs
C No display on the operation panel. Only the SC history is Occurrence
The machine operates as usual. updated.
Logging count &

alarm count
D The SC is displayed on the operation Turn the main power switch Occurrence & alarm
panel. off and on. count
The machine cannot be used
(machine-error SC).
Power OFF and ON
Alarm count and

alarm only if reoccurs
• When an ordinary SC (type D) is generated, an automatic reboot is performed. When an event

is reported by the customer support system, even in the event of an ordinary SC, reboot is not
performed. During automatic reboot, a confirmation screen is displayed after the reboot.
• When automatic reboot occurs twice continuously, an SC is displayed without rebooting, and
logging count is performed. Also, when an SMC print is output, an * mark is added alongside
the SC number for clarity.
M0AN 6-1 SM
• Automatic reboot can be enabled or disabled with SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting)
(default value: OFF).
SP descriptions
• SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot: Reboot Setting)

Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs.
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error
code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for the pattern A or C.
6.1.2 SC LOGGING
When an SC is generated, the "total count value when the SC is generated" and the "SC code" are
logged. However, if the total count value during the SC is the same as last time, logging is not
performed.
Logged data can be checked by outputting an administrative report (SMC print). The SC history is
logged up to the last 10 entries, and if there are more than 10 entries, data are progressively deleted
starting from the oldest.
6.1.3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT

When an ordinary SC (pattern D) is generated, automatically reboot is performed. Automatic reboot or
reboot by user operation can be set by SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting out) (default value: 1
"OFF").
When a type D occurs, automatic reboot is done or the machine display asks the customer if it can
reboot. However, when the SC occurs twice in a short time, the machine sends a report to the
@Remote server without rebooting. This is because just rebooting may not be a good solution if an SC
occurs twice.
When an automatic reboot is performed, a confirmation screen is displayed after reboot. The
confirmation screen can be cancelled by pressing the [OK] key (display is not cancelled only when the
main power switch is switched OFF to ON).
Screen display during reboot
• Status display on the current screen

• Post-processing ...... Post-processing during printing, etc.
• Automatic reboot .... After operation end
Post-processing
Until automatic reboot

SM 6-2 M0AN
• Reset key (Reboot key)

Key to perform reboot
# Cancel key is not displayed.
• Turn ON spanner LED (same as when an SC is generated).
5BTroubleshooti
Operation during SC reboot
ng
• Timing of SC reboot
When @Remote is enabled, and when a NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the corresponding SC is
the object of an automatic reboot.
*1 NRS alarm: Issued when an ordinary SC (type D) is generated twice while the total counter
counts 10 times.
• Time to automatic reboot

Reboot is performed 30 seconds after an engine reboot is possible, after the end of post-
processing during printing, etc.
At that time, a reboot is performed even if the printer is operating. The engine does not start
process control when a reboot is possible.
• Automatic reboot
See the flowchart below.
M0AN 6-3 SM
SM 6-4 M0AN
6.1.4 SC MANUAL REBOOT

When the automatic reboot is disabled in SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting), user reboot the
machine manually. See the flowchart below.
5BTroubleshooti
ng
6.1.5 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSIS OUTLINE

Controller self-diagnosis includes 3 types, i.e., "ordinary self-diagnosis", "detailed self-diagnosis", and
"SC detection". "Ordinary self-diagnosis" is diagnosis performed for every power ON, and "detailed self-
diagnosis" is diagnosis treated as part of the service tools. "SC detection" detects mechanical faults
when power is switched on or when the machine is operating.
M0AN 6-5 SM
Detailed self-diagnosis - Method
1. After attaching the option "IEEE 1284 board" to the controller board, connect the provided
conversion connector.
2. Set a loop back connector in the reference centronics I/F.
3. Press the main power supply switch while simultaneously pressing the "#" and "./* key. The display
changes to the following screen, and self-diagnosis starts.
4. After the end of detailed self-diagnosis, a "Self-diagnosis results report" is automatically printed.
• If a centronics loopback connector is not fitted, a centronics diagnosis error (SC 835) is
generated.
6.1.6 HDD-RELATED MESSAGE

When an error occurs to the HDD, the HDD abnormality message appears on the operation panel and
the screen for formatting is displayed. Also when replacing the HDD, a message "Hard Disk is
replaced." appears on the operation panel and the screen for formatting is displayed.
Refer to the table shown below for the conditions of the message display.
Even when replacing the controller board, a banner "Hard Disk is replaced." appears. It is because the
machine recognizes HDD has been replaced when the controller board that does not hold the HDD
identification information is attached.
Message list
Message Display Normal/ Error Condition/ Major Cause/ Solution
Type Abnormal
SC870 banner abnormal The HDD cannot be accessed at power-
on.
NVRAM defective
Turn the main power off/on to initialize the
machine.
*When replacing the NVRAM, if possible,
back up the address book before
replacing the NVRAM and restore it after
replacing the NVRAM.
SM 6-6 M0AN
List of Automatic Reboot Target SC
Message Display Normal/ Error Condition/ Major Cause/ Solution

Type Abnormal
Hard Disk will be formatted pop-up abnormal Management file on the HDD can not be
due to problem with Hard formatting read. Or the file system can not be
Disk. button mounted.
HDD defective
Replace the HDD.
5BTroubleshooti
Problem with the Encryption pop-up abnormal The encryption key for the HDD is
Key for Hard Disk. Format formatting abnormal.
ng
Hard Disk. button HDD defective
Replace the HDD.
Hard Disk is replaced. pop-up normal A new HDD is attached.
Format Hard Disk. formatting A new HDD attached
button
Push the formatting button.
Hard Disk is replaced. banner abnormal The HDD is replaced (Data can be read).
• Controller board replaced
• After starting the machine without an
HDD, a new HDD is attached to the
machine and then restart the
machine.
Turn the main power off/on.
Formatting Hard Disk... pop-up abnormal Pushing the formatting button.
Please wait, also make sure
Formatting the HDD
the main power switch is not
turned off. -
Hard Disk is formatted. Turn pop-up abnormal Formatting the HDD is finished.
main power switch off then
Formatting the HDD
on.
6.2 LIST OF AUTOMATIC REBOOT TARGET SC

6.2.1 ENGINE SC
Automatic reboot target SC is as follows. For details of Automatic reboot, refer to SC Automatic
Reboot.
SC code Name
202-00 Polygon Motor: ON Timeout Error
203-00 Polygon Motor: OFF Timeout Error
204-00 Polygon Motor: XSCRDY Signal Error
220-00 Laser Synchronization Detection Error: Leading Edge
230-00 FGATE ON Error
231-00 FGATE OFF Error
240-00 LD Error
272-01 LD Driver Communication Error
272-10 LD driver communication error: Others
M0AN 6-7 SM
SC code Name
302-00 High Voltage Power Source: Charge: Output Error
324-01 Development motor: Bk: Lock
360-01 TD sensor adjustment error
391-00 High Voltage Power Source: Development : Output Error
396-01 Drum Motor Lock
440-00 High Voltage Power Source: Paper Transfer : Output Error
452-00 Paper transfer contact motor error
460-00 High Voltage Power Source: Separation : Output Error
531-00 Development Bearing Cooling Fan Lock
533-00 PSU Cooling Fan Lock
533-01 Development Bearing Cooling Fan
534-00 Development Exhaust Fan
535-00 Paper Exit Cooling Fan Lock
540-00 Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: Lock
547-01 Zero cross error (relay-contact soldering)
547-02 Zero cross error (relay contact error)
547-03 Zero cross error (low-frequency error)
621-01 Finisher communication error
621-02 Mailbox communication error
622-11 Paper tray 1 communication error for Paper Feed Unit PB3160 (D693)
622-31 Paper tray 1 communication error for LCIT PB3170/PB3230 (D695)
623-00 Paper tray 2 communication error for LCIT RT3030 (D696)
664-01 Access Permission Error to VODKA SRAM
664-02 Write Error to VODKA SRAM
664-03 VODKA Program Startup Error
669-36 EEPROM: Verify Error
669-37 EEPROM: Failure Detection Error
682-01 Invalid Device ID
682-06 Channel Error
682-11 Device Error
682-16 Communication Aborted (error during communication)
682-21 Communication Timeout
682-26 Device Stopped (logically stopped)
682-31 Requested Buffer Full
682-36 PCU: Verify Error
687-00 PER Not Received Error
780-01 Tray 1 (Upper optional paper tray) Protection Device Intercept Error
781-01 Tray 2 (Lower optional paper tray) Protection Device Intercept Error
791-00 No Bridge Unit when Finisher is Present
SM 6-8 M0AN
5BTroubleshooti
ng
M0AN 6-9 SM
6.2.2 CONTROLLER SC
Automatic reboot target SC is as follows. For details of Automatic reboot, refer to SC Automatic
Reboot.
SC code Name
641-00 Communication error between BCU and Controller board
670-02 Engine start up error when the machine is in operation
673-10 Flair connection error of Smart Operation Panel
816-01 Subsystem error
816-02 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
816-03 Transition to STR was denied.
816-04 Interrupt in kernel communication driver
816-05 Preparation for transition to STR failed.
816-07 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
816-08 Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error
816-09 Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error
816-10 to 12 Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
816-13 open() error
816-14 Memory address error
816-15 to 18 open() error
816-19 Double open() error
816-20 open() error
816-22 Parameter error
816-23 read() error
816-24 read() error
816-25 write () error
816-26 write() communication retry error
816-29 read() communication retry error
816-30 read() communication retry error
816-35 read() error
816-36 to 99 Subsystem error
840-00 EEPROM access error
841-00 EEPROM read data error
865-00 HD access error
867-00 SD card removed
868-00 to 02 SD card authentication error
874-05 Delete all error (Delete data area) : No device file
874-06 Delete all error (Delete data area) : Start option error
SM 6-10 M0AN
SC Code Classification
SC code Name
874-09 Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated sector number
874-10 Delete all error (Delete data area) : failure in performing hdderase
874-12 Delete all error (Delete data area) : Other fatal errors
874-13 Delete all error (Delete data area) : End by cancellation
874-14 Delete all error (Delete data area) : library error
874-15 Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unavailable
874-16 Delete all error (Delete data area) : Erasing not finished
5BTroubleshooti
874-41 Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure (Normal)
874-42 Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure (Abnormal)
874-61 to 65 Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unauthorized library
ng
874-66 Delete all error (Delete data area) : Read error
874-67 Delete all error (Delete data area) : Write error
874-68 Delete all error (Delete data area) : No response from HDD
874-69 Delete all error (Delete data area) : Error in Kernel
874-70 Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated partition
875-01 Delete all error (HDD erasure) (hddchack –i error)
875-02 Delete all error (HDD erasure) (Data deletion failure)
990-00 Software operation error
992-00 Undefined SC issued.
997-00 Application function selection error
998-00 Application start error
6.3 SC CODE CLASSIFICATION

The table shows the classification of the SC codes:
Class Section
SC2xx Image Writing
SC3xx Image Processing 1: Charge, Development, Around the drum
SC4xx Image Processing 2: Transfer/ Separation, Cleaning and others
SC5xx Paper feed, Duplex, Transport, Fusing and others
SC6xx Communication and Others
SC7xx Peripherals
SC8xx Controller
SC9xx Others
6.4 SC TABLES: SC2XX (IMAGE WRITING)

6.4.1 SC202-00 TO SC272-10
SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC202- D Polygon Motor: ON Timeout Error
00
After the polygon motor turned on, or within 10 sec. after the rpm’s changed, the
M0AN 6-11 SM
SC Tables: SC2xx (Image Writing)

motor did not enter READY status.
• The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or not connected
correctly.
• Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective
• Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly. (Polygon controller)
• XSCRDY signal observation failing (Polygon controller)
• Turn the power off/on.
• Replace the laser unit.
• Replace the harness.
• Replace the IPU board.
SM 6-12 M0AN

SC203- D Polygon Motor: OFF Timeout Error
00
The XSCRDY signal (polygon ready) never becomes inactive (H) within 3 sec.
after the polygon motor went OFF.
correctly.
5BTroubleshooti
• Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly. (Polygon controller)
ng
• XSCRDY signal observation failing (Polygon controller)

SC204- D Polygon Motor: XSCRDY Signal Error
00
During polygon motor rotation, the XSCRDY signal was inactive (H) for longer
than one rotation of the polygon.
correctly.

SC220- D Laser Synchronization Detection Error: Leading Edge
00
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LD was not
output for 200msec. after LDB unit turned on with the polygon motor rotating
normally.
• The interface harness to the synchronization detection unit damaged or not
connected correctly.
• Synchronization detection board defective
• Beam does not enter photo detector.
• Abnormality around GAVD
• IDB (LED driver) defective
• LDB defective
• IPU defective
M0AN 6-13 SM

SC230- D FGATE ON Error
00
The FGATE signal did not turn ON within the given time period after the writing
process started.
• GAVD defective
• Image processing ASIC defective
• BCU, controller board not connected correctly or defective
• Harness between BCU and LDB defective
• Replace the harness between IPU and laser unit.
• Replace the controller board.

SC231- D FGATE OFF Error
00
The FGATE signal did not turn OFF within the given time period after the writing
process ended.
• GAVD defective
• Image processing ASIC defective
• IPU, controller board not connected correctly or defective
• Harness between IPU and LDB defective
• Replace the harness between IPU and laser unit.

SC240-00 D LD Error
• The LD error status of LD driver is asserted after the LD is initialized.
• The LD driver's error signal is detected during LD initialization.
• LD degradation (LD broken, shift of output characteristics etc.)
• The interface harness damaged or not connected correctly.
• LD driver defective
• Cycle the main power off/on.

SC272- D LD Driver Communication Error
01
If the value is not same when the machine reads and writes the same registration
at the machine start-up.
SM 6-14 M0AN
SC Tables: SC3xx (Image Processing 1: Charge, Development, Around the drum)

If the communication parity retries three consecutive times, the SC is generated.
• CPU defective
• IPU defective
• BCU defective
• Harness defective
Cycle the main power off/on.
5BTroubleshooti
•
ng

SC272-10 D LD Driver Communication Error: Others
If the “Door Open” status does not change to “Door Close” after closing the door.
• CPU defective
• IPU defective
• BCU defective
6.5 SC TABLES: SC3XX (IMAGE PROCESSING 1: CHARGE,

DEVELOPMENT, AROUND THE DRUM)
6.5.1 SC302-00 TO SC396-01
SC302- D High Voltage Power Source: Charge: Output Error
00
The machine detects the error detection signal “L (unexpected)” 10 times for 200
msec consecutively when monitoring the error signal every 20 msec during
outputting the PWM signal.
Hardware error
• Input / Output connector is disconnected.
• Input / Output harness is short-circuited.
• Surface/air clearance insufficient (arc discharge)
• BCU error (signal error)
• HVPS defective
Load error
• Grounding fault of charging output, short-circuit with other outputs
• Surface/air clearance insufficient in charging output path (including distance
from other outputs)
• Unexpected deterioration of drum and over current due to pinholes gap error
between the drum and charge roller (PCU error).
M0AN 6-15 SM

• Over current due to drum surface condensation
• PCU is disconnected.
• Replace the HVPS.
• Replace the harness of the HVPS.
• Replace the harness of the PCU.
• Replace the PCU.

SC324- D Development Motor: Bk: Lock
01
Lock signals are observed at 2 sec intervals during motor ON, and a High level is
detected at least 20 times.
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Unit torque increased
• Replace the development motor.
• Reconnect the connector.
• Replace the BCU.
• Replace the development unit.
• Replace the driven unit.

SC360- D TD Sensor Adjustment Error
01
• When Mu count exceeds the judgment threshold of no developer status.
• When Mu count does not satisfy the following target ranges for 3 times in a
row.
• Upper threshold
• Lower threshold
• TD sensor defective
• Loose connection
• Harness broken
• Developer toner density differs from initial developer
• Replace the TD sensor harness.
• Reconnect the TD sensor connector.
• Replace the TD sensor.
• Replace the development unit.

SC361- D TD Sensor Output Error: Upper Limit (K)
SM 6-16 M0AN

01 The following condition continuously exceeds the upper limit threshold value
(SP3-211-003).
• TD sensor output: Vt (SP3-210-001) > output upper limit error threshold (SP3-
211-002)
• TD sensor connector dropout (connection fault)
• Check if the TD sensor connector is connected.
5BTroubleshooti
• Check the harness of the TD sensor (disconnection, etc.).
ng
SC362- D TD Sensor Output Error: Lower limit (K)
01
TD sensor output: Vt (SP3-210-001) < output lower limit error threshold (SP3-211-
004) is continuously below the lower limit occurrence threshold value (SP3-211-
005)
TD sensor connector missing/dropout
• Check if the TD sensor connector is connected.
• Check the harness of the TD sensor (disconnection, etc.).

SC370- C ID Sensor Calibration Error
00
Regular reflection optical output voltage of the ID sensor: Vsg_reg cannot be
adjusted to within target range.
Upper limit (SP3-320-013: initial value 4.5V)
Lower limit (SP3-320-014: initial value 3.5V)
• ID sensor connector missing/connection fault
• ID sensor detection window dirt
• ID sensor malfunction
• Check the ID sensor connector. If it is not connected, reconnect it.
• Check for dirt on the ID sensor detection window. If the detection window is
dirty, clean by the predetermined method (do not wipe it dry).
• If neither of the above have occurred, replace the ID sensor.

SC391- D High Voltage Power Source: Development : Output Error
00
When the machine detects the error detection signal “L (abnormal)” 10 times for
200 ms consecutively by monitoring the error detection signal every 20ms during
output of the PWM signal used as an error detection target.
Hardware error
• Surface/air clearance insufficient (arc discharge)
M0AN 6-17 SM
SC Tables: SC4xx (Image Processing 2: Transfer/ Separation, Cleaning and others)

• HVPS defective
Load error
• Grounding fault of charging output, short-circuit with other outputs
• Surface/air clearance insufficient in charging output path (including distance
from other outputs)
• Unexpected deterioration of drum, and over current due to pinholes
• Over current due to drum surface condensation
• PCDU is not set properly.
• Cycle the main power off/on
• Replace the harness between the BCU and HVPS.
• Reconnect or replace the harness between the BCU and HVPS.
• Reinstall or replace the development unit.
• Check if the contact and separation movement of the transfer unit works
correctly.

SC396- D Drum Motor Lock
01
Lock signals are observed at 2 sec intervals during motor ON, and a High level is
detected at least 20 times.
• Motor defective
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• PCU torque increased
• Replace the harness of the drum/waste toner motor.
• Replace the drum/waste toner motor.
• Replace the PCDU.
6.6 SC TABLES: SC4XX (IMAGE PROCESSING 2: TRANSFER/

SEPARATION, CLEANING AND OTHERS)
6.6.1 SC440-00 TO SC498-00
SC440- D High Voltage Power Source: Paper Transfer : Output Error
00
Hardware error
SM 6-18 M0AN
SC Tables: SC4xx (Image Processing 2: Transfer/ Separation, Cleaning and others)

• HVPS defective
Load error
• Transfer roller's impedance increases.
• Transfer unit is not set properly.
5BTroubleshooti
• Reconnect or replace the harness of the HVPS (power pack).
ng
• Reconnect or replace the harness between the BCU and the HVPS.
• Reset or replace the transfer unit.
correctly.

SC452- D Transfer Roller Contact Motor Error
00
When the machine does not detect the high/low signal for a specified time after
the transfer roller contact motor has been turned on.
• Motor overload, Motor defective
• Harness broken
• Interlock mechanism is defective.
correctly.
• Replace the transfer roller contact motor.

SC460- D High Voltage Power Source: Separation : Output Error
00
Hardware error
• Transfer unit is not set properly.
• HVPS defective
Load error
• Grounding fault of separation power output, short-circuit with other outputs
• Surface/air clearance insufficient in separation power output path (including
distance from other outputs)
M0AN 6-19 SM
SC Tables: SC5xx (Paper feed, Duplex, Transport, Fusing and others)

• Reconnect or replace the harness of the HVPS (power pack).
• Reconnect or replace the harness between the BCU to the HVPS.
• Reset or replace the transfer unit.
correctly.

SC497-00 C Machine Temperature Detection Thermistor Error
The output of the temperature sensor is out of the following range.
• 0.56 V or less (90°C or more)
• 3.0 V or more (-18°C or less)
• Imaging temperature sensor is not set (connector disconnected or broken)
• Imaging temperature sensor defective
• Replace the connector.
• Replace the imaging temperature sensor (thermistor).

SC498-00 C Temperature and Humidity Sensor Error (Main machine)
The output of the temperature/humidity sensor is out of the following range.
• 0.76 V or less/ 2.90 V or more (temperature sensor)
• 2.4 V or more (humidity sensor)
• Temperature/Humidity sensor is not set (connector disconnected or broken)
• Temperature/Humidity sensor defective
• Replace the connector.
• Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
6.7 SC TABLES: SC5XX (PAPER FEED, DUPLEX,

TRANSPORT, FUSING AND OTHERS)
6.7.1 SC501-01 TO SC589-02
SC501- B 1st Tray Lift Error
01
The machine detects the error of the 1st paper feed tray lift motor 3 times
consecutively when the 1st paper feed tray is lifted.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the
error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• 1st paper feed tray limit sensor connector disconnection, malfunction or
SM 6-20 M0AN

sensor's dirt.
• 1st paper feed tray lift motor connector disconnection, malfunction
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray
and the paper feed tray lift motor.
• Paper set fault
• Reset the paper.
5BTroubleshooti
• Remove the foreign matter (1st paper feed tray limit sensor, 1st paper feed tray
lift motor).
ng
• Check the harness.
• Reset or replace the connector.
• Replace the 1st paper feed unit and 1st paper feed tray.
SC501- B 1st Tray Lowering Error
02
The machine detects the error of the 1st paper feed tray lift motor 5 times
consecutively when the 1st paper feed tray is lowered.
• 1st paper feed tray limit sensor connector disconnection, malfunction or
sensor's dirt.
• 1st paper feed tray lift motor connector disconnection, malfunction
and the paper feed tray lift motor.
• Paper set fault
• Paper overload
• Remove the foreign matter (1st paper feed tray limit sensor, 1st paper feed tray
lift motor).
• Replace the 1st paper feed unit, 1st paper feed tray.

SC502- B 2nd Tray Lift Error
01
The machine detects the error of the 2nd paper feed tray lift motor 3 times
consecutively when the 2nd paper feed tray is lifted.
• 2nd paper feed tray limit sensor connector disconnection, malfunction, dirt
• 2nd paper feed tray lift motor connector disconnection, malfunction
and the paper feed tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Remove the foreign matter (2nd paper feed tray limit sensor, 2nd paper feed
M0AN 6-21 SM

tray lift motor).
• Replace the 2nd paper feed unit, 2nd paper feed tray.
SC502- B 2nd Tray Lowering Error
02
The machine detects the error of the 2nd paper feed tray lift motor 5 times
consecutively when the 2nd paper feed tray is lowered.
• The 2nd paper feed tray limit sensor connector disconnection, malfunction, and
dirt
• 2nd paper feed tray lift motor connector disconnection, malfunction
and the paper feed tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Paper overload
• Remove the foreign matter (2nd paper feed tray limit sensor, 2nd paper feed
tray lift motor).
• Replace the 2nd paper feed unit, 2nd paper feed tray.

SC503- B 3rd Tray Lift Error (M494)
11
The machine detects the lift error of the tray lift motor for the PFU (M494) 3 times
consecutively when the 3rd tray is lifted at the machine’s initialization.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the machine detects the error
consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Tray lift motor connector disconnected
• Upper limit sensor harness disconnected or broken
• Controller board defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray and
the tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Remove the foreign matter.
• Replace the tray lift motor.
• Reset the connector.
• Replace the upper limit sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional PFU (M494).
SM 6-22 M0AN

• Replace the tray.
• Replace the paper feed roller.
• Replace the pick-up arm.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Lowering Error (M494)
12
The machine detects the lowering error of the tray lift motor for the PFU (M494) 3
times consecutively when the 3rd tray is lowered at the machine’s initialization.
5BTroubleshooti
2 times consecutively.)
ng
• Paper overload
the tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
• Replace the controller board for the optional PFU (M494).
SC503- B 3rd Tray Lift Error (LCIT: M496)
31
• The machine detects the lift error of the tray lift motor for the LCIT (M496) 3
times consecutively when the 3rd tray is lifted at the machine’s initialization.
• Limit sensor harness disconnected or broken
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the right tray and the
tray lift motor.
• Paper set fault
• Timing belt damage or dropout
• Timing pulley damage or dropout
• Base plate damaged or plate horizontality fault
• Paper feed roller missing
• Pickup arm damage
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the right tray.
M0AN 6-23 SM

• Replace the limit sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional LCIT (M496).
• Replace the timing belt.
• Replace the timing pulley.
• Replace the base plate.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Lowering Error (LCIT: M496)
32
times consecutively when the 3rd tray is lifted at the machine’s initialization.
• Lower limit sensor harness disconnected or broken
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the right tray and the
tray lift motor.
• Paper set fault
• Timing belt damage or dropout
• Timing pulley damage or dropout
• Base plate damaged or plate horizontality fault
• Replace the lower limit sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the LCIT (M496).
SC503- B 3rd Tray Paper Overload Error (LCIT: M496)
33
Both of the upper limit sensor and lower limit sensor detects the base plate 3 times
SM 6-24 M0AN

consecutively at the machine’s initialization.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the both sensors detect the
• Paper overload
• Paper set fault
5BTroubleshooti
• Lower limit sensor harness disconnected or broken
• Control board defective
ng
• Replace the lower limit sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the LCIT (M496).
SC503- B 3rd Tray Paper Position Error (LCIT: M496)
34
During left/right tray set, or when power is switched ON, or when transfer is
complete, "open" is detected 5 times consecutively by end fence open/close
detection.
• Paper set fault (paper is offset from position for pushing end fence)
• Foreign matter entry (foreign matter is caught in the position for pushing end
fence)
• Paper transport cover open/close switch error, connector missing
• Harness broken
• Bank controller board defective
• Replace the sensor.
• Replace the controller board for the optional paper feed tray.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Transfer Error (LCIT: M496)
35
• Transfer end detection error
At right tray paper end (right tray lower limit detection, left tray paper
detection), left tray paper is transferred to the right tray, but the left tray paper
sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed (transfer paper
missing is not detected), for 3 times consecutively.
(The message of resetting the tray is displayed when the both sensors detect
the error consecutively 2 times or less.)
• Paper transfer motor error/connector missing
• Left tray paper sensor error/connector missing
M0AN 6-25 SM

• Harness broken
• Bank control board defective
• Paper overload
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the left tray and the
paper tray transfer motor
• Paper set fault
• Timing belt damage/dropout
• Timing pulley damage/dropout
• Transfer fence defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the left tray
• Replace the motor.
• Replace the end fence of the left tray.
SC503- B 3rd Tray Transfer HP Error (LCIT: M496)
36
• HP detection error (during transfer start)
At right tray paper end (right tray lower limit detection, left tray paper
detection), left tray paper is transferred to the right tray, but the transfer fence
home position sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed
(home position sensor missing cannot be detected).
• HP detection error (during transfer fence HP return)
During transfer fence HP not detected (stop after paper transfer, during power
supply ON, during left tray set), the transfer fence is moved to HP, but the
transfer fence home position sensor is not detected although a predetermined
time elapsed.
*If an error occurs 3 times consecutively: LCIT transmits "3rd paper feed tray
transfer HP error" to the main machine.
• Paper transfer motor error/connector missing
• Transfer fence home position sensor error/connector missing
• Harness broken
• Paper overload
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the left tray and the
paper transport motor
• Paper set fault
SM 6-26 M0AN

• Transfer fence defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the left tray
5BTroubleshooti
ng
• Replace the end fence of the left tray.

SC504- B 4th Tray Lift Error (M494)
21
• Lift motor ascent error detection
During tray initialization (upper limit not detected/lower limit detection), the tray
base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, but the upper limit
sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed, for 3 times
consecutively.
• Tray lift motor error/connector missing
• Upper limit sensor error/connector missing
• Harness broken
the tray lift motor
• Paper set fault
SC504- B 4th Tray Lowering Error (M494)
22
• Lift motor descent error detection
During tray initialization, the tray base plate is lowered to check the tray base
M0AN 6-27 SM

plate position, but the upper limit sensor is detected although a predetermined
time elapsed, for 3 times consecutively.
• Harness broken
• Paper overload
the tray lift motor
• Paper set fault

SC505- B Side LCIT Limit Detection Error (D696)
41
• Upper limit detection error (during descent)
During tray initialization (upper limit detection/lower limit not detected), the tray
base plate is lowered to check the tray base plate position, but the upper limit
sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed.
• Upper limit detection error (during ascent)
During tray initialization (upper limit not detected /lower limit detection), the
tray base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, but the upper
limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed.
*If an error occurs for 3 times consecutively: the side LCIT transmits a "5th
paper feed tray upper limit detection error" to the main machine.
• Harness broken
• Paper set fault
• Base plate damage/horizontality fault
SM 6-28 M0AN

• Paper feed roller missing item
• Pickup arm defective
• Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the tray
5BTroubleshooti
ng
• Replace the controller board for the optional side LCT.
SC505- B Side LCIT Lower Limit Detection Error (D696)
42
• Lower limit detection error (during descent)
During tray initialization (upper limit not detected /lower limit eject detection),
the tray base plate is lowered to check the tray base plate position, but the
lower limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed.
Alternatively, at paper end, the tray base plate is lowered, but the lower limit
sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed.
• Lower limit detection error (during ascent)
During tray initialization (upper limit not detected/lower limit detection), the tray
base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, but the lower limit
sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed.
*If an error occurs for 3 times consecutively: the side LCIT transmits a "5th
paper feed tray upper limit detection error" to the main machine.
• Lower limit sensor error/connector missing
• Harness broken
• Paper set fault
• Base plate damage/horizontality fault
M0AN 6-29 SM

SC505- B Side LCIT Paper Overload Error (D696)
43
During tray initialization, both the upper limit and lower limit are detected for 3 times
consecutively.
• Paper overload
• Paper set fault
• Upper Limit sensor error/connector missing
• Lower limit sensor error/connector missing
• Harness broken

SC508- B Bypass Tray Size Detection Error
00 The paper size detected on the bypass tray is different from any of the pattern of
automatic size detection.
• Bypass Length Sensor or Bypass Width Sensor malfunction
• Bypass Length Sensor or Bypass Width Sensor harness disconnected
• Replace the Bypass Length Sensor, or Bypass Width Sensor.
• Replace the harness for Bypass Length Sensor, or Bypass Width Sensor.

SC520- C Registration Motor: Lock
01
SC520- C Paper feed Motor: Lock
02
SC520- C Vertical Transport Motor: Lock
03
During motor ON, after checking the motor error notification registers (err_velo and
err_posi) for 500msec, the error state of either register was detected at least 5
SM 6-30 M0AN

times.
• Motor defective
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Encoder defective
5BTroubleshooti
ng

SC521- C Duplex Entrance Motor: Lock
01
SC521- C Duplex By-pass Motor: Lock
02
times.
• Motor defective
• Harness broken
• BCU defective

SC522- C Paper Exit Motor: Lock
00
times.
• Motor defective
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
M0AN 6-31 SM

SC530-00 D Fusing Fan Lock
In the motor ON state, the value of the lock sensor is checked every 100msec.
If a lock signal is not obtained for 50 times consecutively.
• Motor defective
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Replace the fusing fan.

SC531-00 D Development Bearing Cooling Fan Lock
• Motor defective
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Replace the development bearing cooling fan

SC533-00 D PSU Cooling Fan Lock
SC533-01 D Development Bearing Cooling Fan
• Motor defective
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Replace the development bearing cooling fan.
SM 6-32 M0AN

SC534-00 D Development Exhaust Fan
• Motor defective
5BTroubleshooti
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
ng
• Replace the development exhaust fan.

SC535-00 D Paper Exit Cooling Fan Lock
• Motor defective
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Replace the paper exit cooling fan.

SC540- D Fusing/paper Exit Motor: Lock
00
During motor ON, after checking lock signals for 2sec, a High level was detected
at least 20 times.
• Motor defective
• Harness broken
• BCU defective
• Unit torque increased
• Replace the fusing/paper exit motor.

SC541- A Fusing Thermopile (Center) Disconnection
01
Below a predetermined temperature (or below CB) is detected for specified
M0AN 6-33 SM

seconds continuously.
Detection frequency: 10 times or more.
• Harness broken
• Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit and the BCU.
• Replace the thermopile (center).
• Replace the harness between the fusing unit and the BCU.
SC541- A NC Sensor (Center) Disconnection
02
3ED - 3FF (FB voltage: 3.243V-3.300V) is detected for specified seconds
continuously (NC sensor (center): detection & compensation, NC sensor (end):
detection & compensation).
Detection period: 100 ms, detection frequency: 10 times or more.
• Harness broken
• Replace the NC sensor (center).
SC541- A NC Sensor (Center) Short-circuit
03
AD value: 0-13 (FB voltage: 0.000V-0.041V) is detected for specified seconds
continuously.
• Harness broken
• Replace the NC sensor (center).
SM 6-34 M0AN

SC542- A Fusing Thermopile (Center) Thermopile Does Not Reload
02
When the thermopile (center) does not reach a predetermined temperature for 7
seconds consecutively.
SC542- A Fusing Thermopile (Center) Does Not Reload
03
5BTroubleshooti
When the thermopile (center) does not reach the permission temperature of heat
central reloading for specified seconds continuously.
ng
SC542- C Fusing Thermopile (Center) Does Not Reload (Low Voltage)
05
When the thermopile (center) does not reach a predetermined temperature for 7
seconds consecutively.
SC542- C Fusing Thermopile (Center) Does Not Reload (Low Voltage)
06
When the thermopile (center) does not reach the permission temperature of heat
central reloading for specified seconds continuously.
• Thermopile (center) lens dirt
• Thermopile (center) installed incorrectly
• Thermopile (center) deformed or not installed (or mounted) properly
• Outside input voltage guarantee
• After excessive temperature rise prevention unit operation
• Remove the jammed paper in the fusing unit.
• Check and replace the thermopile (center).
• Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the outlet.
• Replace the thermostat.

SC543- A Fusing Thermopile (Center) High Temperature Detection (Software)
00
When the thermopile (center) detects a predetermined temperature or above for
specified seconds consecutively.
Detection period 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more.
• Triac short-circuit
• Engine controller defective
• Fusing roller temperature sensor (center) defective
• Fusing control software defective
• Check the fusing unit.
• Check that the triac of the AC controller on the PSU does not short-circuit.
• Reconnect the following connectors: CN115 of BCU, connectors between the
fusing unit and the BCU, connectors connected to the fusing unit
• Replace the following harness: CN115 of BCU, connectors between the fusing
unit and the BCU, connectors connected to the fusing unit
• Replace the BCU board.
• Replace the fusing unit.
M0AN 6-35 SM

SC544- A Fusing High Temperature Detection (hardware)
01 (Fusing Thermopile (Center) High Temperature Error)
In the event of an error
• Triac defective (short-circuit)
• Fusing control software: out of control
• Check the sensor temperature with the following SPs. If the temperature is
lower than 250°C, replace the thermopile or thermistor.
• SP1-141-101 (Thermopile (center))
• SP1-141-102 (Thermopile (edge))
• SP1-141-103 (Thermistor (center))
• SP1-141-104 (Thermistor (edge))
• SP1-141-151 (Thermopile (center): 200 msec before the SC is generated)
• SP1-141-152 (Thermopile (edge): 200 msec before the SC is generated)
• SP1-141-153 (Thermistor (center): 200 msec before the SC is generated)
• SP1-141-154 (Thermistor (edge): 200 msec before the SC is generated)
Note: The high temperature state of the fusing unit is detected when the
temperature detected by the sensor is 250°C or more. Therefore, if the
temperature of the above SPs is lower than 250°C, the thermopile or
thermistor may be defective or out of position.
• Check the triac of the AC controller on the PSU and replace the PSU.

02 (Non-Contact thermistor High Temperature Error)
SM 6-36 M0AN

5BTroubleshooti
ng
• Check the triac of the AC controller on the PSU and replace the PSU.

SC545- A Fusing Central Heater Continuously Heat
01
After waiting for full power for more than specified seconds continuously, not
detected for specified seconds.
• Definition of heater full power
Continuously heating rate set point (maximum heating rate)
• Measurement start point
After reload (after heater extinguished, after rotation complete) below the
standby temperature (target temperature), measurement starts after a heater
heat-up request is issued.
• Measurement stop condition
Rotation started due to a print signal during measurement or other.
• Maximum heat-up Duty (SP interlinked value) 0% is excluded.
• Thermopile bracket deformation
• Heater disconnection
• After excessive temperature rise prevention unit operates
• Remove the jammed paper in the fusing unit
M0AN 6-37 SM

SC545- C Fusing Central Heater Continuously Heat (Low Voltage)
05
Rotation started due to a print signal during measurement or other.
• Maximum heat-up Duty (SP interlinked value) 0% is excluded.
• Thermopile bracket deformation
• After excessive temperature rise prevention unit operates
• Remove the jammed paper in the fusing unit

SC547- D Zero cross Error (relay-contact soldering)
01
• Fusing relay defective (contact soldering)
• Fusing relay drive circuit fault
• Turn the main power supply switch OFF/ON
• If the fusing relay is damaged, replace the PSU.
• Check the connection between PSU and controller board, and replace harness
and board if necessary.
SC547- D Zero cross Error (relay contact fault)
02
• Fusing relay damage (contact open)
• Fusing relay drive circuit fault
• PSU fuse (24VS) blowout
• Turn the main power supply switch OFF/ON.
• If the fusing relay is damaged, replace the PSU.
SM 6-38 M0AN

• If the PSU fuse (24VS) blows out, replace the fuse.
SC547- D Zero cross Error (low-frequency error)
03
Frequency instability of commercial power line
5BTroubleshooti
• Turn the main power supply switch OFF/ON.
• Check the power source.
ng

SC551- A Fusing Thermopile (Edge) Disconnection
01
When the thermopile (edge) detects a predetermined temperature or less for
• Harness broken
• Replace the thermopile (edge).
SC551- A NC Sensor (End) Disconnection
02
3ED - 3FF (FB voltage: 3.243V-3.300V) is detected for specified seconds
continuously (NC sensor (center): detection & compensation, NC sensor (end):
detection & compensation).
• Harness broken
• Reset the NC sensor.
SC551- A NC Sensor (End) Short-circuit
03
AD value: 0-13 (FB voltage: 0.000V-0.041V) is detected for specified seconds
continuously.
• Harness broken
• Reset the NC sensor.
M0AN 6-39 SM

SC552- A Fusing Thermopile (Edge) Does Not Reload
02
When the thermopile (edge) does not reach a predetermined temperature for
SC552- A Fusing Thermopile (Edge) Does Not Reload
03
Heating edge reload permission temperature not reached after heater 1 ON for
specified seconds.
SC552- C Fusing Thermopile (Edge) Does Not Reload (Low Voltage)
05
When the thermopile (edge) does not reach a predetermined temperature for
SC552- C Fusing Thermopile (Edge) Does Not Reload (Low Voltage)
06
When the thermopile (edge) does not reach the permission temperature of heat
edge reloading for specified seconds continuously.
• Thermopile (edge) lens dirt
• Thermopile (edge) installed incorrectly
• Thermopile modification
• After excessive temperature rise prevention unit operation
• Check and replace the thermopile (edge).

SC553- A Fusing Thermopile (Edge) High Temperature Detection (software)
00
Above a predetermined temperature detected for specified seconds continuously.
Detection period: 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more.
• Reconnect the following connectors CN115 of BCU, connectors between the
• Replace the following harness CN115 of BCU, connectors between the fusing
SM 6-40 M0AN

SC554- A Fusing Thermopile (Edge) High Temperature Detection (hardware)
01
5BTroubleshooti
ng
• Replace the PSU.
• Replace the following harness CN115 of BCU, connectors between the fusing
M0AN 6-41 SM

SC554- A NC Sensor (End) High Temperature Detection (hardware)
02
• Fusing roller temperature sensor defective (rear)
SM 6-42 M0AN

SC555- A Fusing Edge Heater Continuously Heat
01
SC555- C Fusing Edge Heater Continuously Heat (Low Voltage)
05
5BTroubleshooti
ng
Rotation started due to a print signal during measurement or other
• Maximum heat-up Duty (SP interlinked value) 0% is excluded
• Thermopile (edge) lens dirt
• Thermopile (edge) installed incorrectly
• Thermistor deformation
• After excess temperature rise prevention unit operation

SC557-00 C Zero Cross Frequency Exceeded
Frequency instability of commercial power line/Noise
-

SC558- C Low Input Voltage
01
On the mains power supply, detected the input voltage that is less than the
specification and is more than 50V.
Low input of mains power supply
-

SC559- A Fusing Jam Detected for 3 Times Consecutively
M0AN 6-43 SM

00 Fusing jam (does not reach fusing exit sensor) is detected for 3 times
consecutively.
• Detection conditions
Displays the SC559-00 at the time of integrating the counter each time fusing
jam occurs, became fusing jam counter value = 3.
The counter value is retained without fusing jam also reset by OFF/ON the
power supply.
• Control ON/OFF
And enables ON / OFF is this SC, the default is set to OFF, then ON at the
time of customer requirements.
SP1-142-001 0: OFF (default), 1: ON (Set at the time of customer
requirements)
• Counter reset condition occurs fusing jam
1. Normal paper exit has been done during this continuous fusing jam,
fusing jam counter is reset.
2. When "1" is changed to "0" SP1-142-001, to reset the (SP9-912-001)
fusing jam counter.
3. When after displaying SC559, SC release is made, reset the (SP9912-
001) fusing jam counter.
Fusing unit paper jam
Remove the jam.

SC561- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (Center) Disconnection
00
When the pressure roller thermistor (center) detects a predetermined temperature
or less for specified seconds consecutively.
Detection period 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more.
• Harness broken
• Replace the pressure roller thermistor (center).

SC562- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (Center) Does Not Reload
02 When the pressure roller thermistor (center) does not reach a predetermined
temperature for specified seconds consecutively.
• Thermistor dirt
• Thermopile deformed or not installed (or mounted) properly
• Check and replace the pressure roller thermistor (center).
SM 6-44 M0AN

• Replace the thermopile.
SC562- C Pressure Roller Thermistor (Center) Does Not Reload (Low Voltage)
05
When the pressure roller thermistor (center) does not reach a predetermined
5BTroubleshooti
temperature for specified seconds consecutively.
• Thermistor dirt
ng
• Check and replace the pressure roller thermistor (center).

SC563- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (Center) High Temperature Detection (software)
00
Above a predetermined temperature detected for specified seconds continuously.
Detection period: 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more.
• Pressure roller thermistor (end) defective

00 (Pressure Roller Thermistor Error)
• Fusing controller software defective
M0AN 6-45 SM

unit and the BCU, connectors connected to the fusing unit.

SC571- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (End) Disconnection
00
When the pressure roller thermistor (end) detects a predetermined temperature or
less for specified seconds consecutively.
Detection period: 100 ms, detection counts: 10 times or more.
• Harness broken
• Replace the pressure roller thermistor (end).

SC572- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (End) Does Not Reload
02
When the temperature does not reach 40 degrees Centigrade for 100 seconds
consecutively.
• Thermistor dirt
SM 6-46 M0AN

• Check and replace the pressure roller thermistor (end).
5BTroubleshooti
ng
SC573- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (End) High Temperature Detection (software)
00
When the pressure roller thermistor (end) detects a predetermined temperature or
above for specified second consecutively.
• Fusing controller software defective
M0AN 6-47 SM

SC574- A Pressure Roller Thermistor (End) High Temperature Detection (hardware)
00
• Fusing control: out of control
SM 6-48 M0AN
SC Tables: SC6xx (Communication and Others)

SC589- D Fusing center: Low Temperature Detection
01
When the thermopile (center) detects the temperature which is 180 degrees
Centigrade lower than target Temperature for 12 seconds consecutively.
• Central heater harness disconnected
5BTroubleshooti
• Connector defective
• After excess temperature rise prevention unit (thermostat) operation
ng
• Replace the jammed paper in the fusing unit.
SC589- D Fusing edge: Low Temperature Detection
02
When the thermopile (edge) detects the temperature which is 180 degrees
Centigrade lower than target Temperature for 12 seconds consecutively.
• Edge heater harness disconnected
• Connector defective
• After excess temperature rise prevention unit (thermostat) operation
• Replace the jammed paper in the fusing unit.
6.8 SC TABLES: SC6XX (COMMUNICATION AND OTHERS)

6.8.1 SC621-01 TO SC687-00
SC621- D Finisher communication error
01
SC621- D Mailbox communication error
02
• When the communication line has opened and the machine is in a normal
communication state, it has received a break signal from a connected device.
• There is not any response within 100 ms after the data frame transmission, and
retries have failed with timeout error for 3 times in a row.
• When changing the baud rate after program downloading starts, the machine
has failed to detect the break signal of the finisher or has failed to detect that
the break has been cleared.
• Connection error between finisher and main machine.
• The finisher-related firmware is not installed properly.
• The engine firmware is not installed properly.
• Finisher control board defective.
M0AN 6-49 SM

• BCU, or IOB defective
• Communication error caused by electrostatic noise
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs
again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after
each step.
1. Check if all connectors in the finisher/mailbox are connected securely.
Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or loose.
2. Update the firmware to the latest version.
3. Check all harnesses in the mailbox or finisher. Replace any harness that is
damaged.
4. Replace the BCU, or IOB.
5. Replace the controller board of the finisher or the mailbox.

SC622 D Paper Bank Communication Error
SC622- D Paper Bank 1 Communication Error (M494)
11
12
31
Detected an error when connecting the communication line.
• Paper bank control board defective
• BCU defective
• Paper bank-main machine connection fault
each step.
1. Check if all connectors in tray 1, 2, and optional paper tray are connected
securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or loose.
2. Check the harness in tray 1, 2, and optional paper tray. Replace the harness if it
is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit on the Bank Main Board. If there
are any defects, replace the board.

SC623- D Paper Bank Communication Error (D696)
00
When two trays PFU (M494) and side LICT (D696) or LCIT (M496) and side LCIT
(D696) are installed,
1. When the upper stream unit (M494 or M496) recognizes the lower stream unit
(D696), the break of the lower stream unit is not canceled within
predetermined milliseconds.
2. After the upper stream unit (M494 or M496) recognizes the lower stream unit
(D696), there is no ACK within predetermined milliseconds after transmission
of a data frame to the lower stream unit, and a timeout error occurs for 3 times
consecutively even if retransmission is performed.
SM 6-50 M0AN

• Bank control board fault
• Reset the optional paper tray connecting cable.
Replace the optional paper tray.
5BTroubleshooti
•
ng
SC641-00 D Communication error between BCU and Controller board.
Controller board does not respond after BCU tries to communicate three times.
• Controller board software error
• Connection error between BCU and Controller board
• Engine board software error
• Check connections between Controller board and BCU.
• Turn the main switch off and on.

SC664- D Access Permission Error to VODKA SRAM
01
SC664- D Write Error to VODKA SRAM
02
SC664- D VODKA Program Startup Error
03
The machine detects the communication error between VODKA and SRAM when
starting up, or recovery from energy saver mode.
• BCU defective (Parts implementation defect, solder scrap, implemented parts
defect, etc.)

SC665- D BCU-IPU Connection Error
01 The machine detects the communication error between BCU and IPU (No FFC
connection) when starting up, or recovery from energy saver mode.
• BCU defective, IPU defective (Parts implementation defect, solder scrap,
implemented parts defect, etc.)
• Reconnect the FFC.
• Replace the FFC.
• Replace the IPU.

SC665- D BCU (IOB Module) Does Not Start
M0AN 6-51 SM

04 The IOB does not start up when starting up, or recovery from energy saver mode.
• No power supply to the BCU (IOB module) (power supply connector installed
incorrectly, harness broken)
• Board defective (Parts implementation defect, solder scrap, implemented parts
defect, etc.)
• Reconnect the BCU power supply harness.
• Replace the BCU power supply harness.

SC665- D Master Device Communication Error
05
The machine detects the communication error between CPU and Slave1 when
defect, etc.)

SC665- D IPU signal Communication Error
07
• BCU defective, IPU defective (Parts implementation defect, solder scrap,
implemented parts defect, etc.)
• Reconnect the FCC.
• Replace the FCC.

SC665- D IOB signal Communication Error
08
defect, etc.)

SC667- D Master Device Mode Setting Error
01
The machine detects the CPU mode error when starting up, or recovery from
energy saver mode.
SM 6-52 M0AN

defect, etc.)
5BTroubleshooti
SC667- D Slave1 Device Mode Setting Error
10
ng
The machine detects the Slave1 mode error when starting up, or recovery from
energy saver mode.
defect, etc.)

SC667- D Macaron1 Mode Setting Error
40
The machine detects the Macaron1 mode error when starting up, or recovery from
energy saver mode.
defect, etc.)

SC669 EEPROM Communication Error
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: ID error
01
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Channel error
02
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Device error
03
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Communication abort error
04
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Communication timeout error
05
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Operation stopped error
06
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: Buffer full
07
SC669- D EEPROM OPEN: No error code
08
SC669- D EEPROM CLOSE: ID error
M0AN 6-53 SM

09
SC669- D EEPROM CLOSE: No error code
10
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: ID error
11
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Channel error
12
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Device error
13
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Communication abort error
14
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Communication timeout error
15
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Operation stopped error
16
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: Buffer full
17
SC669- D EEPROM Data write: No error code
18
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: ID error
19
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Channel error
20
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Device error
21
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Communication abort error
22
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Communication timeout error
23
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Operation stopped error
24
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: Buffer full
25
SC669- D EEPROM Data read: No error code
26
Received an error notification during EEPROM communication and does not
resume after 3 retries.
• Electrical noise
• EEPROM not connected fully
• EEPROM damaged
• BCU damaged
• Check the EEPROM.
• Replace the EEPROM.
SM 6-54 M0AN


SC669- D EEPROM: Verify Error
36
The machine receives an error notification during EEPROM (BCU) communication
and does not resume after 2 retries.
5BTroubleshooti
The machine detects an abnormal value in the EEPROM data when starting up, or
recovery from energy saver mode.
ng
• EEPROM damaged
• BCU damaged
SC669- D EEPROM: Failure Detection Error
37
The machine receives an error notification during EEPROM (BCU) communication
and does not resume after 1 retries.
The machine determined EEPROM failure in the EEPROM detection operation
when starting up, or recovery from energy saver mode.
• EEPROM damaged
• BCU damaged

SC670- D Engine start up error when the machine boots up
01
• /ENGRDY signal was not asserted when the machine was turned on.
• PCI I/F is not linked up when the machine returns from energy saver mode.
• /IPURDY signal was not asserted when the machine was turned on or returned
from energy saver mode.
• EC/PC/SC response was not received within specified time from power on.
• Writing to Rapi driver failed (the other party not found through PCI).
• Connection defect between controller board and BCU.
• BCU is down / unstable
• BCU defective
• PSU defective
M0AN 6-55 SM

Refer to When SC670 Is Displayed.

SC670-02 D Engine start up error when the machine is in operation
• CPU reset by software
• CPU reset by anomaly CPU
• CPU reset by hardware defect / noise
• Hardware defect
Engine board reset unexpectedly.
Refer to When SC670 Is Displayed.

SC672- D Controller start up error
00
After the machine was powered on, communication between the controller and the
operation panel was not established, or communication with controller was
interrupted after a normal startup.
• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective
• Controller late
Refer to When SC672 (Controller start up error) is displayed.

10
operation panel was not established.
• Controller late

11
operation panel was not established, or communication with controller was
interrupted after a normal startup.
• Controller late
SM 6-56 M0AN


SC672-12 D Controller start up error
Communication with controller was interrupted after a normal startup.
5BTroubleshooti
ng
• Controller late

The operation panel detected that the controller is down.
• Controller late

The operation panel software ended abnormally.
• Controller late

SC673- D Flair connection error of Smart Operation Panel
10
The SC is issued only when the Smart Operation Panel is installed.
The main machine does not respond to the smart operation panel with the Flair
communication.
The SP setting for the smart operation panel is mismatched.
• Turn the main power off/on.
• Set the SP5748-201 (OpePanel Setting) to [1: ON].
Note for the phone number:
There is a phone number column on the SC673-10 display, but the phone number
is not displayed because of this SC feature.
M0AN 6-57 SM

Other Information:
When the automatic reboot cannot be performed due to the hardware failure,
SC672 or SC673 is displayed.
The SC call is not issued.
You cannot reboot the machine manually regardless of SP5-875-002 setting.

SC682 PCU: ID Chip Communication Error
SC682- D Invalid Device ID
01
SC682- D Channel Error
06
SC682- D Device Error
11
SC682- D Communication Aborted (error during communication)
16
SC682- D Communication Timeout
21
SC682- D Device Stopped (logically stopped)
26
SC682- D Requested Buffer Full
31
Received an error notification during EEPROM communication and does not
• Device ID date error
• Mu sensor / EEPROM defective
• PCU is not set properly.
SM 6-58 M0AN
SC Tables: SC7xx (Peripherals)

SC682- D PCU: Verify Error
36
Received a error notification during EEPROM communication and does not
• Device ID date error
5BTroubleshooti
• Mu sensor / EEPROM defective
PCU is not set properly.
ng
•

SC687-00 D PER Not Received Error
Unable to receive the PER command from the controller.
• Communication error
6.9 SC TABLES: SC7XX (PERIPHERALS)

6.9.1 SC720-03 TO SC792-00
SC720 Finisher SR3230 Error
SC720- B Protection Device Intercept Error 1
03
Protection device intercept error state (fuse break) is detected.
• Short-circuit defective
• Overload defective
• Motor defective
• Solenoid defective
each step.
• The target parts are all the motors and the sensors.
1. Check if the connector of the target part is connected securely. Reconnect the
connector if it is disconnected, or loose.
2. Check the harness for the target part. Replace the harness if it is disconnected,
or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, sensors turn OFF/ON, has no overloads, and is
properly driven. Replace the parts if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit. Replace the parts if there are any
defects.
SC720- C Access error to NVRAM
06 Error occurs when accessing NVRAM.
Connection failure or malfunction of NVRAM
M0AN 6-59 SM

again, do the following steps.
1. Pull out and reinsert the NVRAM to check if the NVRAM is correctly inserted
into the IC socket. If the SC cannot be recovered, replace the main board.

SC720 Finisher SR3230 Error
SC720- B Entrance Transport Motor Error
10
SC720- B Horizontal Transport Motor Error
11
SC720- B Transport Motor Error
13
SC720- B Pre-stack Transport Motor Error
15
SC720- B Exit Motor Error
17
Error Condition of -06, -10, -11, -13, -15, -17
• Motor driver detects an error (DC motor control error) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification)
SC720- B Lower Junction Gate Motor Error
20
SC720- B Paper Exit Guide Plate Motor Error
24
SC720- B Punch Motor Error
25
SC720- B Punch Unit Movement Motor Error
27
SC720- B Punch Registration Motor Error
28
SC720- B Jogger Motor Error
30
SC720- B Positioning Roller Shift Motor Error
33
Error Condition of -20, -24, -25, -27, -28, -30, -33
• During movement to home, the home position could not be detected within a
predetermined pulse (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
• During movement from home, the home position was detected for longer than a
SC720- B Positioning Roller Motor Error
34
SC720- B Paper Stacking Holder Motor Error
35
predetermined time (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SM 6-60 M0AN

SC720- B Stack Feed-out Motor Error
41
5BTroubleshooti
ng
SC720- B Corner Stapler Movement Motor Error
42
SC720- B Corner Stapler Motor Error
44
SC720- B Booklet Jogger Motor Error
50
SC720- B Booklet Jogging Pawl Movement Motor Error
51
SC720- B Press Folding Motor Error
52
SC720- B Bottom Fence Motor Error
53
Error Condition of -50, -51, -52, -53
SC720- B Fold Roller Motor Error
54
Motor driver detects an error (short-circuit and overheating)
(1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC720- B Booklet Stapler Motor Error
60
SC720- B Tray Lift Motor Error
70
• Motor controller detects an error (overload) (1st time is jam notification, 2nd
time is SC notification).
• During descent, the paper surface sensor still detects paper even after a
predetermined time (t0sec) elapses (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is
M0AN 6-61 SM

SC notification).
• During ascent, the paper surface sensor could not detect the paper surface
even after a predetermined time (t1sec) elapses (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
SC720- B Shift Motor Error
71
SC720- B Shift Jogger Front Motor Error
72
SC720- B Shift Jogger Rear Motor Error
73
SC720- B Shift Jogger Retreat Motor Error
74
Error Condition of -71, -72, -73, -74
SC720- B Return Roller Motor Error
75
80
Fuse blowout is detected
SC720- B Shift Roller Drive Motor Error
81
Motor driver detects an error (DC motor control error) (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification)
SC720- B Edge Guide Motor Error
82
SC720- B Paper Guide Motor Error
83
Error Condition of -82, -83
• Harness short-circuit -80 only
• Overload
• Motor defective
• Solenoid defective -03, -80 only
• Encoder defective -10, -25, -34 -81 only
• Home position sensor defective
SM 6-62 M0AN

each step.
• The target parts are the motor and related HP sensor that SC occurred.
or damaged.
5BTroubleshooti
ng
defects.

SC722 Finisher SR3210 (D3B8) Error
03
Fuse blowout is detected
SC722- C See the descriptions next table below.
06
SC722- B Entrance Transport Motor Error
10
Motor driver detects an error state (DC motor control error) (1st time is jam
notification, 2nd time is SC notification).
SC722- B Proof Transport Motor Error
11
SC722- B Paper Exit Transport Motor 2 Error
17
SC722- B Paper Exit Guide Plate Open/Close Motor Error
24
SC722- B Punch Unit Drive Motor Error
25
• During movement from home, the home position was detected even after a
predetermined time elapsed (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
• Output from the encoder could not be counted for a predetermined number of
times within a predetermined time (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
SC722- B Horizontal Registration Unit Transfer Motor Error
27
SC722- B Horizontal Registration Correction Motor Error
28
SC722- B Jogger Motor Error
M0AN 6-63 SM

30
SC722- B Positioning Roller Motor Error
33
SC722- B Feedout Pawl Motor Error
41
predetermined pulse elapsed (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
SC722- B Stapler Transfer Motor Error
42
notification).
• During movement from home, retreat sensor ON could not be detected even
after a predetermined pulse elapsed (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is
SC notification).
• During initialization, retreat sensor ON was detected simultaneously when the
home position is detected (1st time is jam notification, 2ndbtime is SC
notification).
SC722- B Stapler Motor Error
44
• Motor driver detects an error (short-circuit or overheating) (1st time is SC).
• During movement to home, the home position could not be detected even after
a predetermined time elapsed (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
notification).
• During motor drive, the output from the encoder could not be counted for a
predetermined number of times within a predetermined time (1st time is jam
SC722- B Stapleless Stapler Transfer Motor Error
45
notification).
SC722- B Stapleless Stapler Motor Error
46
• During movement to home, the home position could not be detected even after
a predetermined time elapsed (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC
notification).
SM 6-64 M0AN

notification).
SC722- B Paper Guide Drive Motor Error
47
5BTroubleshooti
SC722- B Tray Lift Motor Error
70
ng
• During descent, the paper surface sensor still detects paper even after a
predetermined time (t0sec) elapses (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is
SC notification).
• During ascent, the paper surface sensor could not detect the paper surface
even after a predetermined time (t0sec) elapses (1st time is jam notification,
2nd time is SC notification).
SC722- B Shift Motor Error
71
SC722- B Paper Guide Drive Motor
81
• Overcurrent (-03 only)
• Staple jam (-44 only)
• Encoder error (-11, -11, -25, -44)
• Motor defective
• Connecter disconnected, or loose
• Motor overload
• HP sensor defective
• Paper surface sensor defective (-70 only)
Check if the SC occurs by opening/closing covers, and input/output check. If the
SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the
power after each step.
• The target parts are the motor and related HP sensor that SC occurred.
or damaged.
defects.

SC727 Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000 Error
M0AN 6-65 SM

SC727- B Connection Error to Downstream Unit
01
Communication error has occurred with the serial interface of the downstream unit.
This is displayed as an SC code from its initial detection.
• Downstream unit defective
• I/F connector defective
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do the
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Turn the power off, disconnect the interface connector connected to the
machine, connect the interface connector of the downstream unit to the
machine, and then turn the power on.
2. If the downstream unit does not operate, resulting in connection error, there is a
problem with the downstream unit, so repair the downstream unit.
3. Check the harness connections between the controller board and each
connector. Replace the harness if it is damaged, or connect it if it is
disconnected.
defects.
03
• Fuse (FU3) break is detected
• 24-V power supply line error
• Fuse (FU3) is blowout
• 24-V harness entrapment (short circuit)
1. Check that the harness between the PCB and motor/solenoid is not stripped or
entrapped. Replace the harness if there are any defects.
2. Rotate each motor shaft by hand to check for any overload. Replace the motor if
there are any defects.
3. Check if there is any unusual odor from the solenoid or any problem with its
appearance. Replace the solenoid if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit on PCB. Replace the PCB if there
are any defects.
04
• Poly-switch (FU4) break is detected
• Limit line disturbances from inrush currents has occurred to the interlock
system.
• This is displayed as an SC code from its initial detection.
SM 6-66 M0AN

• Poly-switch (FU4) trip (Trip refers to the phenomenon whereby an overcurrent
flows into the poly-switch, resulting in high resistance.)
• 24-V harness entrapment (short circuit)
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON, submitting a job, feeding paper,
5BTroubleshooti
opening/closing covers, and input/output check. If the SC occurs again, do the
ng
1. Check that the harness between the PCB and the motor/solenoid is not stripped
or entrapped. Replace the harness if there are any defects.
2. Rotate each motor shaft by hand to check for any overload. Replace the motor if
there are any defects.
3. Check if there is any unusual odor from the solenoid or any problem with its
appearance. Replace the solenoid if there are any defects.
4. Check if there are any signs of a short circuit on PCB. Replace the PCB if there
are any defects.
SC727- C NVRAM Error 1
06
An error has occurred during an access to the NVRAM.
NVRAM is disconnected, or defective
Turn the main power OFF then ON after checking whether there are no foreign
objects (such as remaining paper) in the tray. If the SC occurs again, replace the
controller board.
SC727- B Transport Motor Error
10
Motor error (Encoder error)
This is reported as a jam error when detected for the first time. If it occurs again in
a row, its SC code appears.
• Motor defective
• Motor harness entrapped (short circuit or breaking of wire)
following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step
1. Check if all connectors between the controller board and the motors are
connected securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or
loose.
2. Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
3. Check if the motor runs, has no overloads, and is properly driven. Replace the
parts if there are any defects.
defects.
SC727- B Registration Motor Error
12
M0AN 6-67 SM

• Motor defective
loose.
defects.
SC727- B JG Crease Motor Error 1
20
• Motor error (Encoder error)
• The junction gate is not at the HP position.
This is reported as a jam error when detected for the first time. If it occurs
again in a row, its SC code appears.
• Motor defective
• Motor/sensor harness entrapped (short circuit or breaking of wire)
• Junction Solenoid HP Sensor defective
1. Check if all connectors between the controller board and the motors/sensors are
loose.
4. Check if the sensor turns OFF/ON. Replace the parts if there are any defects.
defects.
SC727- B 1st Fold Motor Error
39
SM 6-68 M0AN

• Motor defective
5BTroubleshooti
ng
loose.
defects.
SC727- B JG Crease Motor Error 2
41
• Motor error (Encoder error)
• Crease Roller is not at the HP position.
• Motor defective
• Motor/sensor harness entrapped (short circuit or breaking of wire)
Connector disconnected
• Crease HP Sensor defective
loose.
defects.
SC727- B 2nd Fold Motor Error
71
Encoder error
• Motor defective
M0AN 6-69 SM

loose.
defects.
SC727- B The power supply for the sensor is defective.
72
The power supply for the sensor (5V_SN) is defective.
• Sensor harness entrapped (short circuit or breaking of wire)
• Sensor defective
Turn the main power OFF then ON after checking whether there are no foreign
objects (such as remaining paper) in the tray. If the SC occurs again, do the
1. Check if the harness is connected to the wrong sensor. Reconnect the
connector if there are any defects.
defects.
SM 6-70 M0AN

SC745 Mail Box CS3010 Error
SC745- D Protection Device Intercept Error 1
03
Protection device intercept error state (fuse break) is detected.
• Harness short-circuit
5BTroubleshooti
• Motor defective
ng
SC745- D Protection Device Intercept Error 2
04 Protection device intercept error state (fuse2 break) is detected.
• Harness short-circuit
• Motor defective
SC745- D The entrance fan motor lock is detected.
80
The entrance fan motor lock is detected.
• Motor defective
• Harness broken
• Controller board detective
loose.
defects.
M0AN 6-71 SM

SC761 Bridge Unit BU3070 (D685) Error
SC761- B Protection Device Intercept Error 5V
03
SC761- B Protection Device Intercept Error 24V
04
Fuse blowout occurs due to over current during power injection (output detected
for longer than 2 seconds).
• Over current of bridge unit motor
• Over current due to short-circuit in PCB
• Replace the bridge unit or side tray.
• Replace the PCB of bridge unit or side tray.

SC780- D Bank 1 (Upper optional paper tray) Protection Device Intercept Error
01
When original source of 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 24V
power system is detected.
In 24V power supply system:
• Motor defective
• Harness short- circuit
1. Check if all connectors in tray 1, 2, and optional upper tray are connected
securely. Reconnect the connectors if they are disconnected, or loose.
2. Check the harness in tray 1, 2, and optional upper tray. Replace the harness if it
is disconnected, or damaged.
defects.
SM 6-72 M0AN

SC781- D Bank 2 (Lower optional paper tray) Protection Device Intercept Error
01
When original source of 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 24V
power system is detected.
In 24V power supply system:
5BTroubleshooti
• Motor defective
ng
• Harness short- circuit
1. Check if all connectors in tray 1, 2, and optional upper/lower trays are
loose.
2. Check the harness in tray 1, 2, and optional upper/lower trays. Replace the
harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
defects.

SC791- D No Bridge Unit when Finisher is Present
00
When power supply is switched on or paper is transported, finisher set is detected
but bridge unit set is not detected.
(during internal finisher connection, not detected)
• Bridge unit not attached
• Bridge unit defective
• Reset the bridge unit.
M0AN 6-73 SM
SC Tables: SC8xx (Controller)

SC792- B No Finisher, Bridge Unit Provided
00
When power supply is switched on, it is recognized there is no finisher, and a
bridge unit is fitted.
• Finisher connector set incorrectly
• In a machine which has a bridge unit connected, a finisher is not fitted
• Finisher defective
Connect finisher or disconnect bridge unit, and turn the main power off/on.
6.10 SC TABLES: SC8XX (CONTROLLER)

6.10.1 SC816-01 TO SC877-00
SC816 [0x0000] Energy save I/O subsystem error
SC816-01 D Subsystem error
SC816-02 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-03 D Transition to STR was denied.
SC816-04 D Interrupt in kernel communication driver
SC816-05 D Preparation for transition to STR failed.
SC816-07 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-08 D Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error
SC816-09 D Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error
SC816-10 to D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
12
SC816-13 D open() error
SC816-14 D Memory address error
SC816-15 to D open() error
18
SC816-19 D Double open() error
SC816-20 D open() error
SC816-22 D Parameter error
SC816-23, 24 D read() error
SC816-25 D write () error
SC816-26 to D write() communication retry error
28
SC816-29, 30 D read() communication retry error
SC816-35 D read() error
SC816-36 to D Subsystem error
99
SM 6-74 M0AN

Energy save I/O subsystem detected some abnormality.
• Energy save I/O subsystem defective
• Energy save I/O subsystem detected a controller board error (non-
response).
• Error was detected during preparation for transition to STR.
5BTroubleshooti
ng
SC840- D EEPROM access error
00
• During the I/O processing, a reading error occurred. The 3rd reading failure
causes this SC code.
• During the I/O processing, a writing error occurred.
• Defective EEPROM
-

SC841-00 D EEPROM read data error
Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in EEPROM.
Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason.
-
M0AN 6-75 SM
No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC842- C Nand-Flash updating verification error
00
SCS write error (verify error) occurred at the Nand-Flash module when remote
ROM or main ROM was updated.
Nand-Flash defective
Turn the main power OFF/ON.

SC842- B Insufficient Nand-Flash blocks (threshold exceeded)
01
At startup, or when machine returned from low power mode, the Nand-Flash status
was read and judged that the number of unusable blocks had exceeded threshold,
and then SCS generated the SC code.
Number of unusable blocks exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash
Replace the controller board.

SC842- B Number of Nand-Flash block deletions exceeded
02
At startup, or when the machined returned from low power mode, the Nand-Flash
was read and judged that the number of deleted blocks had exceeded threshold,
and then SCS generated this SC code.
Number of blocks deleted exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash
Replace the controller board.

SC845 Hardware Error Detected when the automatic firmware update
SC845- D Engine Board
01
SC845- D Controller Board
02
SC845- D Operation Panel (Normal)
03
SC845- D Operation Panel (Smart Panel)
04
SC845- D FCU
05
When updating the firmware automatically (ARFU), the firmware cannot be read or
written normally, and the firmware update cannot be completed even by 3 retries.
Hardware abnormality of the target board
Replace the target board.
For SC845-02, HDD and memory may cause the problem. Replace the HDD or
memory if the SC cannot be recovered by replacing the controller board.
SM 6-76 M0AN

SC860- B HDD startup error at main power on (HDD error)
00
• The HDD is connected but the driver detected the following errors.
• SS_NOT_READY:/* (-2)HDD does not become READY*/
• SS_BAD_LABEL:/* (-4)Wrong partition type*/
• SS_READ_ERROR:/* (-5)Error occurred while reading or checking the
5BTroubleshooti
label*/
• SS_WRITE_ERROR:/* (-6)Error occurred while writing or checking the
ng
label*/
• SS_FS_ERROR:/* (-7)Failed to repair the filesystem*/
• SS_MOUNT_ERROR:/* (-8)Failed to mount the filesystem*/
• SS_COMMAND_ERROR:/* (-9)Drive not responding to command*/
• SS_KERNEL_ERROR:/* (-10)Internal kernel error*/
• SS_SIZE_ERROR:/* (-11)Drive size too small*/
• SS_NO_PARTITION:/* (-12)The specified partition does not exist*/
• SS_NO_FILE:/* (-13)Device file does not exist*/
• Attempted to acquire HDD status through the driver but there has been no
response for 30 seconds or more.
• Unformatted HDD
• Label data corrupted
• HDD defective
Format the HDD through SP mode.
M0AN 6-77 SM

SC865- D HD access error
00
During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864
(CRC error).
Replace the HDD.

SC866-00 B SD card authentication error
A license error of an application that is started from the SD card was detected.
Invalid program data is stored on the SD card.
Store a valid program data on the SD card.

SC867- C SD card removed
00
The SD card was removed while the machine is on.
An application SD card has been removed from the slot (mount point of
/mnt/sd0).

01
/mnt/sd1).

02
/mnt/sd2).

SC868-00 D SD card access error
The SD controller returned an error during operation.
(An error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd0)
• SD card defective
• SD controller defective
SM 6-78 M0AN

• Reformat the SD card (using the "SD Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
• Check the SD card insertion status.
• Replace the SD card.
* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only format
5BTroubleshooti
SD cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.
ng
SC868- D SD card access error
01
SD card that starts an application
• Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status.
• If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on.
• If an error occurs, replace the SD card.
• SD card for users
• In case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using the "SD
Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
• In case of a device access error, turn the main power off and check the
SD card insertion status.
• If an error occurs, use another SD card.
• If the error persists even after replacing the SD card, replace the controller
board.

SC868- D SD card access error
02
SD card that starts an application
• Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status.
• If an error occurs, replace the SD card.
• SD card for users
• In case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using the "SD
Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
• In case of a device access error, turn the main power off and check the
M0AN 6-79 SM

SD card insertion status.
• If an error occurs, use another SD card.
• If the error persists even after replacing the SD card, replace the controller
board.
SC869- Malfunction of the proximity sensor is detected
**
SC869- C Continuously detecting malfunction
01
The proximity sensor keeps in a detection state and accumulated time exceeds 24
hours.
The proximity sensor is disabled and is in the detection state at all times.
SC869- C Continuously non-detecting malfunction
02
In the non-detection state, the following operations are detected 20 times
continuously.
• Pressing "energy saver" key or touching the operation panel
• Opening/closing the plate cover or ADF
• Setting the original
• Opening the front cover
• Opening the paper feed tray
The proximity sensor is disabled and is in the non-detection state at all times.
1. Go to the SP5-102-203 (input check SP for the proximity sensor).
2. Cover the sensor with 10 sheets of plain paper, and then execute SP to confirm
if it becomes “0”. (Do not place your hand near the sensor even over the
papers when covering the sensor)
3. Remove the papers from the sensor and confirm if it becomes “1”.
4. If there is no issue after the confirmation in step 2 and 3, confirm that there are
no possible factors around the machine that may cause the temperature
change such as heater or fan. (Deal with the issue as necessary)
5. Replace the proximity sensors and proximity sensor board if the abnormal value
is detected after the confirmation in step 2 and 3.
6. Turn on the main power on and perform step 1, 2, and 3 again.
7. If SC is not solved, turn the main power off and replace the harness which
connects proximity sensors and proximity sensor board.
8. If SC is still not solved, there is a possibility that the other parts of the machine
such as the connector at the controller side or the harness between proximity
sensor board and IPU are broken.

SC870- B Address Book data error (Anytime: Address Book Error.)
00
SM 6-80 M0AN

SC870- B Address Book data error (On startup: Media required for storing the Address Book
01 is missing.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (On startup: encryption is configured but the module
02 required for encryption (DESS) is missing.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store internal
03 Address Book.)
5BTroubleshooti
SC870- B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store delivery
04 sender.)
ng
SC870- B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store delivery
05 destination.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store information
06 required for LDAP search.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to initialize entries required for
07 machine operation.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: HDD is present but the space for
08 storing the Address Book is unusable.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Inconsistency in the NVRAM
09 area used for storing settings required for Address Book configuration.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Cannot make a directory for
10 storing the Address Book in the SD/USB FlashROM.)
SC870- B Address Book data error(On startup: Inconsistency in Address Book entry
11 number.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to initialize file.)
20
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to generate file.)
21
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to open file.)
22
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to write to file.)
23
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to read file.)
24
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to check file size.)
25
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to delete data.)
26
SC870- B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to add data.)
27
SC870- B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache when
30 searching in the machine Address Book. delivery destination/sender.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Search:Failed to obtain data from cache during LDAP
31 search.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Search:Failed to obtain data from cache while searching
32 the WS-Scanner Address Book.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Cache: failed to obtain data from cache.)
M0AN 6-81 SM

41
SC870- B Address Book data error (On startup: Detected abnormality of the Address Book
50 encryption status.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to create directory required
51 for conversion between plaintext and encrypted text.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from plaintext to
52 encrypted text.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from encrypted
53 text to plaintext.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected data inconsistency when
54 reading the encrypted Address Book.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete file when changing
55 encryption setting.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to erase the file that records
56 the encryption key during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to move a file during an
57 attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete a directory during
58 an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected a resource shortage
59 during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870- B Address Book data error (Unable to obtain the on/off setting for administrator
60 authentication (06A and later).)
When an error related to the Address Book is detected during startup or operation.
• Software bug
• Inconsistency of Address Book source location (machine/delivery server/LDAP
server)
• Inconsistency of Address Book encryption setting or encryption key (NVRAM or
HDD was replaced individually without formatting the Address Book)
• Address Book storage device (SD/HDD) was temporarily removed or hardware
configuration does not match the application configuration.
• Address Book data corruption was detected.
Install a device that contains address book information correctly, and turn the main
power off/on. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
1. After installing the HDD, or SD/USB ROM, execute SP5-846-046.
2. Wait more than 3 seconds, then execute SP5-832.
3. Cycle the main power off and on.
Procedure after SC870 is cleared
1. If there is backup data in an SD card or Web Image Monitor, restore the
address book data.
(To restore from an SD card, enter the encryption password which is the same
as when you enter to back up.)

SC872- B HDD mail reception error
SM 6-82 M0AN

00 An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned on.
• HDD defective
• Power was turned off while the machine used the HDD.
• Format the HDD (SP5-832-007).
• Replace the HDD.
5BTroubleshooti
When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.
• Partly received partial mail messages.
ng
• Already-read statuses of POP3-received messages (All messages on the mail
server are handled as new messages).

SC873-00 B HDD mail reception error
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned on.
• HDD defective
• Power was turned of while the machine used the HDD.
• Format the HDD (SP5-832-007).
• Replace the HDD.
When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.
• Sender’s mail text
• Default sender name/password (SMB/FTP/NCP)
• Administrator mail address
• Scanner delivery history
M0AN 6-83 SM

SC874-05 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Read error
SC874-06 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Write error
SC874-09 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No response from HDD
SC874-10 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Error in Kernel
SC874-12 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated partition
SC874-13 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No device file
SC874-14 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Start option error
SC874-15 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : No designated sector number
SC874-16 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : failure in performing hdderase
SC874-41 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Other fatal errors
SC874-42 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : End by cancellation
SC874-61 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : library error
to -65
SC874-66 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unavailable
SC874-67 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Erasing not finished
SC874-68 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure (Normal)
SC874-69 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : HDD format failure (Abnormal)
SC874-70 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : Unauthorized library
SC874-99 D Delete all error (Delete data area) : other errors
An error occurred while data was being erased on HDD or NVRAM.
• Error detected in HDD data delete program
• Error detected in NVRAM data delete program
• The “Delete All” option was not set
• Turn the main power switch off and back on, and then execute "Erase All
Memory" under UP mode again. (However, if there is a defective sector or
other problem with the hard disk, the error will persist even after trying the
above.)
• If the "Delete All" option is not installed when this error occurs, install the
option.

SC875- D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (hddchack –i error)
01
SC875- D Delete all error (HDD erasure) (Data deletion failure)
02
An error was detected before HDD/data erasure starts. (Failed to erase data/failed
to logically format HDD)
• HDD logical formatting failed.
• The modules failed to erase data.
SM 6-84 M0AN

SC876- D Log Data Error
00
An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during
machine operation.
• Damaged log data file.
5BTroubleshooti
• Log encryption is enabled but encryption module is not installed.
• Inconsistency of encryption key between NV-RAM and HDD.
Software bug.
ng
•
Try the SC876-01 to -99 solutions listed below. If it is not solved, do the following
steps (for when only an HDD is replaced):
1. Disconnect the HDD and turn on the main power.
2. Execute SP5-801-019.
4. Connect the HDD and turn on the main power.
5. Execute SP5-832-004.
The following step is to configure the logging/encryption setting again.
7. Turn on the main power.
8. Set SP9-730-002 through -004 to 1.
9. Cycle the main power off and on.
M0AN 6-85 SM

SC876- D Log Data Error 1
01
machine operation.
Damaged log data file
Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

02
machine operation.
Log encryption is enabled but encryption module is not installed.
• Replace or set again the encryption module.
• Disable the log encryption setting.

03
machine operation.
Inconsistency of encryption key between NV-RAM and HDD.
• Disable the log encryption setting.
• Initialize LCS memory (SP5801-019).
• Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

04
machine operation.
• Log encryption key is disabled but the log data file is encrypted. (NVRAM data
corruption)
• Log encryption key is enabled but the log data file is not encrypted. (NVRAM
data corruption)
Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

05
machine operation.
• Only the NV-RAM has been replaced with one previously used in another
machine.
• Only the HDD has been replaced with one previously used in another
machine.
SM 6-86 M0AN
SC Tables: SC9xx (Others)

• Attach the original NV-RAM.
• Attach the original HDD.
• With the configuration that caused the SC, initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

5BTroubleshooti
99
machine operation.
ng
Other causes
-

SC877- B Data Overwrite Security card error
00
The "Auto Erase Memory" function of the Data Overwrite Security is set to on but it
cannot be done.
• Data Overwrite Security option SD card is broken.
• Data Overwrite Security option SD card has been removed.
• If the SD card is broken, prepare a new Data Overwrite Security option SD card
and replace the NVRAM.
• If the SD card has been removed, turn the main power off and reinstall a
working Data Overwrite Security option SD card.
6.11 SC TABLES: SC9XX (OTHERS)

6.11.1 SC900-00 TO SC998-00
SC900-00 A Electric counter error
The electric total counter value is out of specification.
Error is detected when increasing the total counter.
• Unexpected NV-RAM is attached.
• NV-RAM defective
• NV-RAM data corrupted.
• Data written to unexpected area because of external factor etc.
• The count requested by the SRM on receiving PRT is not completed.
Replace the NV-RAM.

SC940- C 1st Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid Non-Drive Error
01
SC940- C 2nd Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid Non-Drive Error
02
SC940- C Bypass Pickup Solenoid Non-Drive Error
03
M0AN 6-87 SM

SC940- C Paper Exit Switching Solenoid Non-Drive Error
04
When the solenoid is not moving, the registration value of the failure detection is
"0" three times consecutively.
• Harness broken
SC940-01: 1st Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid
SC940-02: 2nd Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid
SC940-03: Bypass Pickup Solenoid
SC940-04: Paper Exit Switching Solenoid
• Driver defective (which drive the solenoid)
• Reconnect the connector on the BCU.
• Reconnect the relay connector and electronic connector.
• Replace the solenoid.

SC940- C 1st Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid Drive Error
51
SC940- C 2nd Paper Feed Tray Pickup Solenoid Drive Error
52
SC940- C Bypass Pickup Solenoid Drive Error
53
SC940- C Paper Exit Switching Solenoid Drive Error
54
When the solenoid is moving, the registration value of the failure detection is "1"
three times consecutively.
• Driver defective (which drive the solenoid)

SC990-00 D Software operation error
Software attempted an unexpected operation.
• Parameter error
• Internal parameter error
• Insufficient work memory
• Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable.
SM 6-88 M0AN

• Reinstall the software of the controller and BCU board.

SC991-00 C Recoverable software operation error
Software attempted an unexpected operation.
SC991 covers recoverable errors as opposed to SC990.
5BTroubleshooti
• Parameter error
• Internal parameter error
ng
• Insufficient work memory
• Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable.
Logging only

SC992-00 D Undefined SC issued.
An SC, that is not controlled by the system, occurred.
• An SC for the previous model was used mistakenly, etc.
• Basically a software bug.

SC994- C Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable.
00
An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the limit for images
managed in the service layer of the firmware.
This can occur if there are too many application screens open on the operation
panel.
Logging only.

SC995- D CPM setting error 1
01
Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine identification code.
Details:
• Machine serial number cannot be identified because of BICU replacement or
malfunctioning.
• Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM replacement
Machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does not match.
• Enter the machine serial number using SP5-811, and then turn the power
on/off.
• Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.
M0AN 6-89 SM

02
Details:
Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM replacement or
malfunctioning.
• Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously.
• Download data on the NV-RAM using SP5-825.

03
Details:
Unable to recognize machine identification code because the controller was
replaced incorrectly or is malfunctioning.
Replace it with a compatible controller.

04
Return the parts to the original configuration, and then replace them according to
the manual.

SC997- D Application function selection error
00
The application selected by the operation panel key operated abnormally (No
response, abnormal ending).
Software bug (mainly the application)
• Check the optional RAM, DIMM, boards required by the application program.
• Check if the combination of downloaded programs are correct.

SC998- D Application start error
00
• No application was registered to system within a specified time after the main
power was turned on.
(No application starts/All applications have been terminated abnormally)
• Application started but cannot be drawn now for some reason.
• Software bug (mainly the application)
• The optional RAM, DIMM, boards required by the application program. Are not
SM 6-90 M0AN

installed correctly.
• Turn the main power OFF/ON.
• Check the optional RAM, DIMM, boards.
• Check the combination of programs.
5BTroubleshooti
ng
M0AN 6-91 SM
Jam Detection
6.12 JAM DETECTION

6.12.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY
When a jam occurs, the location is displayed on the operation panel.
SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.
• CODE: Indicates the jam code.

• SIZE: Indicates the paper size code.
• TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).
• DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.
• The 10 latest printer jams are displayed.

• Initial jams are not recorded.
6.12.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES
• Jam code: Shows the cause of a jam. Appears in the log data.
• Position code: Shows the location of a jam. Appears on the operation panel.
These are lists of jam codes for the main machine and peripheral devices. Please note:
• Late jam. The paper has failed to arrive within the prescribed time due to a jam that has occurred
upstream of the referenced sensor.
SM 6-92 M0AN
Jam Detection
• Lag jam. The paper has failed to leave the location of the referenced sensor within the prescribed
time due to a jam downstream of the referenced sensor.
Main Machine
Cause Cause of Jam Late Lag Stay Display
Code Jam Jam Jam Code
001 Transport Sensor 1 A
5BTroubleshooti
001 Registration Sensor B
ng
001 Fusing Entrance Sensor C
001 Fusing Exit Sensor C
001 Paper Exit Sensor C
001 Reverse Sensor C
001 Duplex Exit Sensor Z
001 Duplex Entrance Sensor Z
003 Paper not fed from tray 1 A1
004 Paper not fed from tray 2 A2
008 Paper not fed from bypass tray A
009 Paper not transported to duplex unit Z
096 Disappearance of the detection Timing
Only remaining paper position information displayed
017 Registration Sensor A
018 Fusing Entrance Sensor B
019 Fusing Exit Sensor C
051 Transport Sensor 1 (when paper not fed A
from Tray 1)
from Bypass Tray)
from Tray 2)
057 Registration Sensor B
025 Duplex Exit Sensor & No Paper at Duplex Z
Entrance Sensor
027 Duplex Entrance Sensor C
027 Duplex Entrance Sensor & No Paper at Z
Reverse Sensor
067 Duplex Entrance Sensor Z
021 Relay Exit Sensor D
022 Relay Transport Sensor D
061 Relay Exit Sensor D
062 Relay Transport Sensor D
M0AN 6-93 SM
Jam Detection
Paper Feed Unit PB3240

005 Paper not fed from tray 3 Y1
013 Transport Sensor 3 Y
053 Transport Sensor 3 (when paper not fed Y
from Tray 3)
from Tray 4)
LCIT PB3260
from Tray 3)
LCIT RT3030
007 Paper not fed from LCT U1
015 LCT Transport Sensor U
055 LCT Transport Sensor (when paper not U
fed from LCT)
001 LCT Transport Sensor U
Paper Feed Unit PB3240 and LCIT RT3030 configuration

Cause Cause of jam Late Lag Stay Display
code Jam Jam Jam code
from Tray 3)
from Tray 4)
LCIT PB3260 and LCIT RT3030 configuration

SM 6-94 M0AN
Jam Detection

from Tray 3)
Finisher SR3230
5BTroubleshooti
001 Entrance Sensor R1-R5
ng
001 Horizontal Transport Sensor R1-R5
001 Switchback Transport Sensor R1-R5
001 Proof Exit Sensor R1-R5
001 Shift Tray Exit Sensor R1-R5
001 Transport Path Paper Sensor R1-R5
162 Jam in Entrance Transport Motor R1-R5
163 Jam in Horizontal Transport Motor R1-R5
164 Jam in Pre-stack Transport Motor R1-R5
165 Jam in Relay Transport Motor R1-R5
166 Jam in Upper Tray Exit Motor R1-R5
167 Jam in Trailing Edge Pressure Plate R1-R5
Motor
168 Jam in Paper Exit Gate Motor R1-R5
169 Jam in Horizontal registration unit R1-R5
displace motor
170 Jam in Punch Drive Motor R1-R5
171 Jam in Punch Registration Motor R1-R5
172 Jam in Lower Junction Gate Motor R1-R5
173 Jam in Jogger Motor R1-R5
174 Jam in Positioning Roller Motor R1-R5
175 Jam in Feed-out Belt Motor R1-R5
M0AN 6-95 SM
Jam Detection

176 Jam in Corner Stapler Movement Motor R1-R5
177 Jam in Corner Stapler Motor R1-R5
185 Jam in Tray Lift Motor R1-R5
186 Jam in Shift Motor R1-R5
187 Jam in Shift Jogger Front Motor R1-R5
188 Jam in Shift Jogger Rear Motor R1-R5
189 Jam in Shift Jogger Retreat Motor R1-R5
190 Jam in Return Roller Motor R1-R5
191 Jam in Paper Stacking Holder Motor R1-R5
192 Jam in Positioning Roller Motor R1-R5
193 Jam in Paper Guide Motor R1-R5
194 Main instruction data defect R1-R5
Finisher SR 3210
200 Paper Entrance R1-R4
201 Paper Entrance R1-R4
202 Proof Exit R1-R4
203 Proof Exit R1-R4
204 Intermediate transport (right) R1-R4
205 Intermediate transport (left) R1-R4
206 Intermediate transport (left) R1-R4
207 Shift Exit R1-R4
208 Shift Exit R1-R4
209 Stack Transport R5-R10
210 Rear Edge Stopper Transport R5-R10
211 Rear Edge Stopper Transport R5-R10
212 Paper did not reach middle folding exit R5-R10
213 Middle Folding exit R5-R10
220 Jam in entrance transport motor R1-R4
221 Jam in proof transport motor R1-R4
222 Jam in paper exit transport R1-R4
motor/positioning roller motor
223 Jam in shift motor R1-R4
224 Jam in jogger motor R1-R4
225 Jam in paper exit guide plate open/close R1-R4
motor
SM 6-96 M0AN
Jam Detection

226 Jam in feedout pawl motor R1-R4
227 Jam in tray lift motor R1-R4
228 Jam in positioning roller motor R1-R4
229 Jam in stapler unit displacement motor R1-R4
5BTroubleshooti
230 Jam in stapler motor R1-R4
231 Jam in punch system motor R1-R4
ng
232 Jam in booklet transport motors R5-R10
233 Jam in rear edge stopper motor R5-R10
234 Jam in folding blade motor R5-R10
235 Jam in paper exit guide drive motor R1-R4
236 Jam in stapleless stapler transfer motor R1-R4
237 Jam in stapleless stapler motor R1-R4
238 Jam in paper guide drive motor R1-R4
248 Paper exit end is not responding R1-R4
249 Main instruction data defect R1-R4
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000

350 Registration sensor N1
351 Registration sensor N1
352 1st Fold sensor N1
353 1st Fold sensor N4-N5
354 2nd Fold Sensor N2-N3
355 2nd Fold Sensor N2-N3
356 Crease Sensor N2-N3
357 Crease Sensor N2-N3
358 Folder Tray Exit Sensor N4-N5
359 Folder Tray Exit Sensor N4-N5
360 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor N4-N5
361 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor N4-N5
370 Jam in mechanisms driven by Registration N1
Motor
371 Jam in mechanisms driven by JG Crease N4-N5
Motor
372 Jam in mechanisms driven by Transport N4-N5
Motor
373 Jam in mechanisms driven by 1st Fold N2-N3
Motor
374 Jam in mechanisms driven by 2nd Fold N2-N3
M0AN 6-97 SM
Jam Detection

Motor
375 Jam in mechanisms driven by JG Crease N2-N3
Motor
398 Paper exit end is not responding N1
399 Main instruction data defect N1
SM 6-98 M0AN
Jam Detection
Mail Box CS3010

Cause code Cause of jam Late Lag Jam Stay Jam Display code
Jam
001 Paper Entrance Sensor W1-W2
001 Paper Transport Sensor 1 W2
5BTroubleshooti
ng
408 Paper exit end is not responding W2
409 Main instruction data defect W2
M0AN 6-99 SM
Jam Detection
6.12.3 SENSOR LOCATIONS
SM 6-100 M0AN
6.12.4 PAPER SIZE CODES
Paper size codes are as follows.
Note: The unit of Main Scan/Sub Scan Length is 0.1 mm.
Size Code Paper Size Name Orientation Main Scan Length Sub Scan Length
132(84H) A3 SEF 2970 4200
5BTroubleshooti
005(05H) A4 LEF 2970 2100
133(85H) A4 SEF 2100 2970
ng
141(8DH) B4 SEF 2570 3640
006(06H) A5 LEF 2100 1480
134(86H) A5 SEF 1480 2100
014(0EH) B5 LEF 2570 1820
142(8EH) B5 SEF 1820 2570
135(87H) A6 SEF 1050 1480
143(8FH) B6 SEF 1280 1820
160(A0H) 11”x17”(DLT) SEF 2794 4318
164(A4H) 8 1/2”x14”(LG) SEF 2159 3556
166(A6H) 8 1/2”x11”(LT) SEF 2159 2794
038(26H) 8 1/2”x11”(LT) LEF 2794 2159
172(ACH) 5 1/2”x8 1/2”(HLT) SEF 1397 2159
175(AFH) 12” x 18” SEF 3048 4572
6.13
M0AN 6-101 SM
Other Problems
6.14 OTHER PROBLEMS

6.14.1 WHEN SC670 IS DISPLAYED
6.14.2 WHEN SC672 (CONTROLLER START UP ERROR) IS DISPLAYED
Symptom:
Note: CTL = Controller
The following occur:
SC672- Communication error between operation panel and CTL after machine is powered on.
00
SC672- Communication error (receive) between operation panel and CTL after machine is
10 powered on.
SC672- Communication error (send) between operation panel and CTL after machine is powered
11 on.
SC672- Communication error between operation panel and CTL after normal start-up.
12
SC672- Communication error between operation panel and CTL after normal start-up; Operation
13 panel not detected.
SM 6-102 M0AN
Other Problems
• SC672 does not appear on the SMC report, as it is not logged.

• The Smart Operation Panel communicates with the controller via a USB cable and IPU.
SC672 is triggered when the panel cannot communicate with the controller.
Cause:
5BTroubleshooti
Possible causes of SC672 include:
ng
• USB communication path failure (USB cable, IPU)
• CTL boot up error and/or operation panel boot up error due to abnormal break in operations of CTL.
Possible causes of operation panel cannot light include:
• USB communication path failure (USB cable, IPU)

Operation panel cannot communicate with CTL due to CTL boot-up error
[A]: Operation Panel

[B]: IPU
[C]: Controller board
[D]: USB cable
Solution:
Do the following.
1. Turn the machine power OFF/ON.

2. Do the action in the flowchart below to determine the cause and best course of action when SC672
occurs.
M0AN 6-103 SM
Other Problems
Flowchart to determine parts to replace when SC672 occurs
Parts How to determine the cause

USB cable LED on the controller board blinks once every second
Operation panel LED on the controller board blinks once every second
CTL LEDs on the controller board are lit constantly
Memory LEDs on the controller board are lit constantly
SM 6-104 M0AN
Other Problems
Flowchart to determine parts to replace when no display on operation panel
5BTroubleshooti
ng
Parts How to determine the cause
USB cable LED on the controller board blinks once every second
Operation panel LED on the controller board blinks once every second
IPU Fuse 3 on the IPU
CTL LED on the controller board does not blink
Memory LED on the controller board does not blink
M0AN 6-105 SM
Other Problems
[A]: LEDs on the controller board

Check the condition (lit, off, blinking) of the LED on the controller board.
Normal situation: POSTCODE LED 8 [A] and BIOS LED [B] blink once every second
• The LED remains lit or is off when there is a problem with the CPU.
[B]: Abnormal mode: LEDs on the controller board

POSTCODE LEDs 1 to 8 on the controller board are lit constantly
LED Note
POSTCODE 1. For self-diagnosis code (BIOS).
1-8 2. After the BIOS starts up, POSTCODE 4,5,7 turn off and POSTCODE 1,2,3 ,6
turn on and POSTCODE 8 blinks. POSTCODE 8 remains lit or off when there is a
problem with the CPU.
BIOS/OS - LED is lit when the BIOS is running.
- LED blinks when the OS is running.
[C]: Reconnecting and replacing the USB cable

Re-connect the USB cable between the IPU board and the operation panel.
1. Release the clamp, and then make the cable straight [A].
SM 6-106 M0AN
Other Problems
2. Remove the bracket [B].
5BTroubleshooti
ng
3. Re-connect the USB cable between the IPU board and the operation panel.
[A]: CABLE:USB3.0:AWG22:1600:ASS'Y
[B]: PCB:CHEETAHG2:NAIS:CO-P1.5:ASS'Y
When installing, attach the bracket [B] first, and then bend the cable [A] and secure it.
M0AN 6-107 SM
Other Problems
Do not apply excessive force on the connector part. Applying excessive upward force on the
connector may cause connection failure.
PCB for the operation panel
• 1, 3, 6, and 7 are ON for normal.
USB connector [A] (IPU)
SM 6-108 M0AN
Other Problems
5BTroubleshooti
ng
[D]: Replacing the Memory
1. Turn the machine power OFF.
2. Attach the memory on the controller board as shown (in a vertical orientation).
3. Lock the hook.
[E]: CMOS clear

1. Turn the machine power OFF.
2. Turn switch 5 ON for 10 seconds.
3. Turn switch 5 OFF.
4. Turn the machine power ON.
M0AN 6-109 SM
Other Problems
Location of Switch 5 [A] (Controller Board)
[F]: Fuse on the IPU

Check that switch 1 [A] is operating normally.
• In the normal operation, all of the switches in the SW1 block are OFF.
[G]: Replacing the USB cable and the operation panel

For details about replacing the USB cable, refer to USB Cable / Harness.
If the symptom is not resolved, escalate the issue using the normal process, together with the following
information for further investigation.
• SC sub code (SC672-10 or 99)

• Date/time of problem occurrence
• Factor(s) that trigger the problem (ex. SC672-11 occurred 3 minutes after tuning ON the main power
switch.)
• Occurrence frequency (ex. One out of ten times when turning ON the main power switch)
• Parts replaced
• Date/time when parts were replaced
SM 6-110 M0AN
Other Problems
6.14.3 FINISHER REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT

A side-to-side registration error can be produced when the paper is being fed from the mainframe to the
finisher.
5BTroubleshooti
For SR3230
ng
The docking bracket for SR3230 [A] (and its screw [B]) can adjust the side-to-side registration.
To adjust the side-to-side registration:

Change the position of the standard bracket [B] by rotating it 90 degrees as shown by the arrow. This
makes the docking bracket [A] easier to slide horizontally.
Then reattach the docking bracket [A] to the mainframe.
If the paper shifts toward the front
Slide the docking bracket forward by the amount which corresponds to that of the shift, to move the
finisher in the same direction.
e.g.: When paper has shifted by 4 mm from the center toward the front (2 mm/division of the scale),
move the docking bracket toward the front by 4 mm (2 divisions).
M0AN 6-111 SM
Other Problems
[A]: Proof tray

[B]: Docking Bracket Screw
If the paper shifts toward the rear
Slide the docking bracket backward by the amount which corresponds to that of the shift, to move the
finisher in the same direction.
e.g.: When paper has shifted by 4 mm from the center toward the rear (2 mm/division of the scale),
move the docking bracket backward by 4 mm (2 divisions).
[A]: Proof tray

• After the adjustment, check the side-to-side registration by feeding paper out to the proof tray.
If the shift has not been solved, adjust the docking bracket (screw for the docking bracket)
slightly again.
SM 6-112 M0AN
Other Problems
For SR3210
Side-to-side registration can be adjusted by the docking bracket for SR3210 [A] (and the docking
bracket screw [B]).
5BTroubleshooti
ng
1. Eject a sheet of A4(LEF) or A3 paper to the proof tray and check how many divisions of the scale the
edge of the paper has shifted from the center.
[A]: Scale marks for DLT

[B]: Scale marks for A3
[C]: 7 scale marks in 2mm intervals
[D]: Center mark
2. Change the position of the standard bracket by rotating it 180 degrees as shown below. This makes
the docking bracket easier to slide horizontally. Then reattach the docking bracket to the
M0AN 6-113 SM
Other Problems
mainframe.
[A]: Reverse
If paper shifts toward the front
Slide the docking bracket backward by the amount which corresponds to that of the shift, in order to
move the finisher in the same direction.
e.g.: When paper has shifted by 4 mm from the center toward the rear (2 mm/division of the scale),
[A]: Proof Tray

If paper shifts toward the rear
Slide the docking bracket backward by the amount which corresponds to that of the shift, in order to
move the finisher in the same direction.
SM 6-114 M0AN
Other Problems
e.g.: When paper has shifted by 4mm from the center toward the rear (2 mm/division of the scale),
5BTroubleshooti
ng
[A]: Proof Tray
• After the adjustment, check the side-to-side registration by feeding paper out to the proof tray.
If the shift has not been solved, adjust the docking bracket (screw for the docking bracket)
slightly again.
6.14.4 STACKING PROBLEM AT THE FINISHER SR3210

Stacking problems may occur due to paper curl depending on the paper type / size. In this case, it is
possible to avoid the problem by attaching the auxiliary tray.
M0AN 6-115 SM
Other Problems
Installation procedure for attaching the sheet

1. Clean the back [B] of the auxiliary tray [A] with alcohol.
2. Attach the fixing sheets [B] to the auxiliary tray [A].
• Place the sheets on the outer ends [A] of the auxiliary tray and hook the bent portion [B] at
the edge of the tray.
Installation procedure for attaching the auxiliary tray to the Finisher SR3210
1. Turn on the machine.
2. Manually lift the paper surface detection feeler [A] to keep the sensor “ON”.
Keep lifting the feeler until step 4.
SM 6-116 M0AN
Other Problems
5BTroubleshooti
ng
3. Open and close the upper cover [A] or the front cover [B]. The shift tray [C] starts to descend.
4. "JAM227" is displayed about 3 seconds later. The shift tray descent is stopped. Release your hand
from the feeler.
5. Clean the place [A] to attach the fixing sheet with alcohol.
6. Place the auxiliary tray [A] on the shift tray.

7. Attach the fixing sheet [B] on the shift tray and fasten the auxiliary tray.
8. Open and close the front cover or the upper cover. The shift tray starts to rise [C], and ”JAM227” is
M0AN 6-117 SM
Other Problems
cleared.
6.14.5 FINISHER JOGGER PROBLEM FOR FINISHER SR3210 (D3B8)
If a paper alignment problem occurs as shown below, do the following procedure to adjust the jogger
width.
1. Place one A4 paper (LEF) in the paper tray.

2. Select [Staple] in the printer driver and then execute printing (two or more originals).
3. Printing starts, but stops after one sheet because paper runs out.
4. The paper is put out on the staple tray. Put the paper next to the rear jogger [A].
SM 6-118 M0AN
Other Problems
5. Measure the distance between the aligning side of the front jogger and the edge of the paper with a
scale.
5BTroubleshooti
ng
6. Adjust the jogger width with SP6-143-004 (adjustable threshold: -1.5 to +1.5 mm for each paper
size). SP6-143-004 (Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN)
Adjust the jogger width to be slightly narrower (approximately -0.5 mm) than the paper width.
7. Repeat step 1 through step 5 to make the jogger width same as the paper width.
6.14.6 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SHEETS FOR STAPLING AND WHAT

HAPPENS WHEN THE JOB HAS TOO MANY PAGES
Behavior: When the number of sheets exceeds the maximum staple capability
When corner stapling
Sheets are fed out without being stapled. First, the maximum number of sheets (50) is stacked in the
staple tray and fed out. Following this, any remaining sheets that exceed this maximum are also
stacked and fed out without being stapled, in the same way.
Example:
If 60 sheets are set to be stapled, the first 50 are stacked in the staple tray and then fed out without
being stapled. The remaining 10 are then stacked in the tray and fed out without being stapled.
When the maximum number of originals for a stapled set has been scanned, "Stapling capacity
exceeded" is displayed on the LCD.
M0AN 6-119 SM
Other Problems
There is no message displayed prompting the user to cancel or continue with the 51st original.
Specifications: Maximum sheet capability for staple jobs

Model Corner Stapling
Finisher SR3210 50 sheets
Finisher SR3230 50 sheets
6.14.7 FUSING OFFSET OCCURS AT THE EDGE OR CENTER OF THE

PAPER
Symptom:
Fusing offset occurs at the edge or center of the paper.
The customer may report a strange odor coming from the machine.
Cause:
The temperature is too low at the edge or center of the paper when the paper enters the fusing unit.
Solution:
If the symptom occurs, do the procedure in the Flowchart below.
SM 6-120 M0AN
Other Problems
5BTroubleshooti
ng
Workaround A:
Change the paper tray setting (paper thickness setting) in User Tools to match the actual paper
thickness.
*1: User Tools > Tray paper setting > page 2 > Select tray > Select paper thickness
Workaround B:
Change the paper tray setting in User Tools.
• There is no workaround for Thick Paper 4.

Thin paper -> Plain paper
Plain paper -> Thick paper 1
• The print speed will be reduced from 60cpm to 50cpm.

Mid thick -> Thick paper 1
M0AN 6-121 SM
Other Problems
• The print speed will be reduced (See the chart below).

Thick paper 1 -> Thick paper 2
• The print speed will be reduced (See the chart below).

• Auto duplex cannot be used (See the chart below).

Postcards: Thick paper 2 -> Thick paper 3
Side effects: The following may occur, depending on the paper thickness.
• Paper curl
• Decreased productivity
Workaround C:
Increase the target fusing temperature by 5 degrees using the following SPs:
• SP 1-105-003
• SP 1-105-007
• SP 1-105-011
• SP 1-105-015
If the symptom occurs with 1200 dpi printing, also increase the target temperature by 5 degrees for
these SPs as well:
• SP 1-105-107
• SP 1-105-137
• SP 1-105-111
Side effects: Paper curl may occur.
Workaround D:
Change the target temperature using the following SPs as shown below.
• SP 1- 105-019: 145 deg -> 150 deg

• SP 1- 105-023: 130 deg -> 140 deg
• SP 1- 105-027: 135 deg -> 140 deg
• SP 1- 105-141: 140 deg -> 145 deg
• SP 1- 105-115: 120 deg -> 125 deg (For 1200 dpi mode)
SM 6-122 M0AN
Other Problems
Workaround C':
Increase the target fusing temperature by 5 more degrees using the following SPs:
• SP 1-105-003
• SP 1-105-007
• SP 1-105-011
5BTroubleshooti
• SP 1-105-015
ng
For 1200 dpi printing:
• SP 1-105-107
• SP 1-105-137
• SP 1-105-111
Workaround D':
Increase the target fusing temperature by 5 more degrees using the following SPs:
• SP 1- 105-019: 145 deg -> 150 deg -> 155 deg

• SP 1- 105-023: 130 deg -> 140 deg -> 145 deg
• SP 1- 105-027: 135 deg -> 140 deg -> 145 deg
• SP 1- 105-141: 140 deg -> 145 deg -> 150 deg
• SP 1- 105-115: 120 deg -> 125 deg -> 130 deg (For 1200 dpi mode)
CPM information
CPM
Plain paper 60
Mid-thick 50
Thick paper 1 30
Thick paper 2 18
Thick paper 3 18
Thick paper 4 18
6.14.8 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR TONER DENSITY

Symptom:
The image density decreases with continuous printing, especially in solid image areas (though it is
within specification).
• This does not occur in text areas.
Cause:
This may occur due to the condition of the developer, and also occurs more easily when repeat prints
M0AN 6-123 SM
Other Problems
are made from the same original.
Solution:
Change the following SP modes as shown.
• SP3-629-001 (Vc Vsp): Set to 530

• SP3-629-101 (Vb Vsp): Set to 330
• This will increase the amount of toner used to develop the image.
• As a side effect, this will shorten the yield of the toner bottle.
6.14.9 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR BLOTS ON MIDDLE THICK GLOSSY

OR COATED PAPER
Symptom:
Printed images contain blots when using middle thick (or thick) glossy or coated paper.
• This may occur when paper weight is 82 g/m2 or more and its smoothness is 100(S) or more.
Cause:
Glossy or coated paper contacts the PCU more closely than plain paper, and using middle thick or thick
paper increases the transfer pressure.
So more dust or blots on the PCU may be transferred to the paper than usual.
These may result in more blots appearing on printouts.
Solution:
1. Change the following SP modes as shown.

SP3-629-001 (Vc Vsp): Set to 630 (If the symptom still occurs, set to 680)
SP3-629-101 (Vb Vsp): Set to 430 (If the symptom still occurs, set to 480)
2. Enter SP3-011-001 (Manual ProCon :Exe), and then press [Execute].
Depending on the environment, the printout toner density may decrease.
SM 6-124 M0AN
Blown Fuse Conditions
6.15 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Fuses: EU/AA
Name Output connector Capacity Part number Field replacement
possible
Voltage Part name Remarks
FU101 CN902 (Fusing Lamp) 8A 11071346 Yes
5BTroubleshooti
AC FIH250V8A -
(EM/CR)
ng
FU102 CN904 (DHB) 5A 11071344 Yes
CN912-5,6 (BCU) AC FIH 250V 5A -
(TP/CR)
FU105 CN913-5, 12 (Zero cross circuit / 2A - No
DH Heater)
AC SCT250V2A -
FU11 CN911-3 (IPU) 5A - No
5V SLT250V5A -
FU12 CN912-4 (NC) 10A 11071216 Yes
24V FBT250V10A (EM) -
FU13 CN912-5 (BCU) 10A 11071216 Yes
24V FBT250V10A (EM) -
FU14 CN912-6 (BCU) 10A 11071216 Yes
24V FBT250V10A (EM) -
Fuses: NA
possible
FU101 CN902 (Fusing Lamp) 15A 11071241 Yes
AC TLC-15A-N4 -
FU102 CN904 (DHB) 10A 11071347 Yes
CN912-5,6 (BCU) AC FIH 250V 10A -
(EM/CR)
FU105 CN913-5, 12 (Zero cross circuit / 2A - No
DH heater)
AC SLT250V2A -
FU11 CN911-3 (IPU) 5A - No
5V SLT250V5A -
FU12 CN912-4 (NC) 10A 11071216 Yes
24V FBT250V10A (EM) -
FU13 CN912-5 (BCU) 10A 11071216 Yes
24V FBT250V10A (EM) -
FU14 CN912-6 (BCU) 10A 11071216 Yes
M0AN 6-125 SM
Blown Fuse Conditions

possible
24V FBT250V10A (EM) -
Fuse Locations
SM 6-126 M0AN
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
7.1 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH
PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS
7.1.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN SIMILAR MODELS AND PREVIOUS
Descriptions
6BDetailed
MODELS
The difference between this model and the previous (SP 8300DN, MP 6055/5055/4055) models are as
follows:
Laser Exposure
Items SP 8300DN SP 8400DN MP 6055/5055/4055
LD 1ch-LD 2ch-LD
Replacement unit Individual parts One unit
PCDU
Exchange unit PCU + Development unit + Developer PCU + Development unit (Developer preset)
Waste toner
Waste toner bottle - Available
Recycling system All recycled No recycling
Image Transfer
Method Transfer belt Transfer roller
(with Contact and Release mechanism)
Replacement unit Individual parts One unit
Feed / Transport Part

Bypass tray / - The following codes are used to isolate the cause;
Main machine • JAM048: Transport Sensor Lag Jam from Bypass Tray
jam code
• JAM051: Transport Sensor Lag Jam from 1st Feed Tray
Main tray - • Improved stacking performance after feedout by adding
paper exit resilience to the paper with the paper exit driven roller
(drum shape).
• To prevent paper jam when the paper is delivered from
the machine’s paper exit to the internal exit
peripherals, attach the paper support guide (supplied
with the peripherals).
• Replaced the paper exit driven roller to a flat type roller
M0AN 7-1 SM

to prevent jamming when paper is fed to the internal
exit peripherals.
Paper feed The paper exit driven The paper exit driven roller is a drum-shaped roller, which
transport roller is a flat roller. A have a diameter at a center side larger than both end
mechanism plurality of paper drive diameter, to add resilience to the paper. Depending on the
rollers are arranged internal exit peripherals to be installed, the paper exit
alternately to add driven roller must be replaced with the flat type roller which
resilience to the paper. is provided with the internal exit peripherals.
Main machine FRR (Feed and RF (Roller Friction)
tray Reverse Roller)
Fusing
System Fusing roller system QSU-direct heating fusing
Fusing web Available -
Electrical parts
OPU 4.3-inch uWVGA 2nd generation Smart Operation Panel
(10.1-inch WSVGA)
FFC With hooks Without hooks
Main power switch AC switch DC switch
Exterior Cover/Air Flows (Fan Control)

Rear Covers, 1 cover, 6 3 covers, 13 screws (upper 2 covers, 12 screws (upper part:
Screws screws part: 2 covers, 8 screws) 1 cover, 7 screws) (lower part: 1
(lower part: 1 cover, 5 cover, 5 screws)
screws)
Main Power Main power Right side of the 1st paper tray
Switch switch cover
(front side)
Fusing Fan 1 2
(EU only)
Odor Filter 1 2
(EU only)
Particulate Not available Available
Filter (EU
only)
Drive Mechanisms
Paper Spur gears Helical gears:
transport drive
By increasing the efficiency of engagement, the
rattling noise is reduced.
Stepping motor Inner rotor type DC brushless motor:
For resource saving and energy saving.
SM 7-2 M0AN

An electromagnetic clutch Electromagnetic clutch is not available:
is available.
To improve reliability.
Silencing - Grease is applied to the gears, shafts, and sliding
Grease parts, to reduce the drive noise.
PM
Descriptions
6BDetailed
System Logging counter Days remaining counter (New PM)
M0AN 7-3 SM
Others, Options
Items SP 8300DN SP MP 6055/5055/4055
8400DN
Finisher paper exit guide - Available
mechanism
Internal Multi-Fold Unit Attention Light Available Internal Multi-Fold Unit
FD3000, Attention Light AL3000: Available FD3000 : Available
AL3000, Mail Box CS3010 Attention Light AL3000, Mail
Internal Multi-Fold Unit
FD3000, Mail Box Box CS3010: Not available
CS3010: Not available
Paper feed accuracy - Productivity Mode/Silent Mode (the UP
selection is available)
Replacing a paper exit roller on - Replace to the flat roller and attach the
the main unit side when paper support guide depending on the
installing internal paper exit options.
options
NFC card R/W options - Available
Noise control - Equipped with the sound absorbing
material and the sound insulation sheet.
Stapleless Stapler Option Not available Available
SM 7-4 M0AN
Component Layout
7.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT

7.2.1 PAPER FEED UNIT
Descriptions
6BDetailed
1 1st paper feed sensor 10 2nd paper feed sensor
2 1st paper end sensor 11 1st paper feed tray set switch
3 1st vertical transport sensor 12 1st paper feed tray lift motor
4 1st paper feed tray limit sensor 13 2nd paper feed tray set switch
5 1st paper feed tray pick up solenoid 14 2nd paper feed tray lift motor
6 2nd paper feed tray pick up solenoid 15 Registration sensor
7 2nd paper feed tray limit sensor 16 1st paper feed tray size switch
8 2nd vertical transport sensor 17 2nd paper feed tray size switch
9 2nd paper end sensor 18 Anti-condensation heater *Option
M0AN 7-5 SM
Component Layout
7.2.2 LASER UNIT / PCDU

1 Laser Unit 3 TD sensor
2 Quenching lamp 4 PCL (Pre Cleaning Light)
SM 7-6 M0AN
Component Layout
7.2.3 FUSING UNIT
Descriptions
6BDetailed
1 Fusing thermopile (End) 6 Thermostat (End)
2 Fusing thermopile (Center) 7 Thermostat (Center)
3 Fusing exit sensor 8 Fusing roller temperature sensors (Center)
4 Pressure roller temperature sensor (End) 9 Fusing roller temperature sensors (End)
5 Pressure roller temperature sensor (Center) 10 Fusing lamp
M0AN 7-7 SM
Component Layout
No. Description
1 Toner collection full sensor
SM 7-8 M0AN
Component Layout
7.2.5 DUPLEX/BYPASS UNIT
Descriptions
6BDetailed
1 Right cover open/closed switch 6 Bypass length sensor
2 Duplex entrance sensor 7 Bypass pickup solenoid
3 Duplex entrance motor 8 Bypass width sensor
4 Duplex guide switch 9 Bypass paper end sensor
5 Duplex/bypass motor 10 Duplex exit sensor
M0AN 7-9 SM
Component Layout
7.2.6 PAPER EXIT/REVERSE UNIT

1 Paper exit switching solenoid 6 Transfer unit open/close sensor
2 Paper exit sensor 7 Fusing entrance sensor
3 Reverse sensor 8 ID sensor
4 Paper exit full sensor 9 Transfer Unit Open/Close LED
5 Reverse motor 10 Temperature / Humidity Sensor
SM 7-10 M0AN
Component Layout
7.2.7 AIR FLOW
Descriptions
6BDetailed
EU/AA:
M0AN 7-11 SM
Component Layout

1 Development bearing cooling fan 5 Front Development Cooling Fan
2 Temperature sensor 6 PSU cooling fan
3 Fusing fan (For EU/AA models, there are two fans.) 7 Development exhaust fan
4 Paper exit cooling fan
SM 7-12 M0AN
Component Layout
7.2.8 DRIVE UNIT
Descriptions
6BDetailed
1 Paper exit motor 5 Development motor
2 Fusing motor 6 Vertical transport motor
3 Drum/Waste toner motor 7 Paper feed motor
4 Registration motor
M0AN 7-13 SM
Component Layout
7.2.9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

1 Interlock switch (Front Cover) 6 IPU
2 PSU 7 Controller Board
3 DHB (Option) 8 Interlock Switch (Right Cover)
4 BCU 9 DC SW board
5 HVPS
SM 7-14 M0AN
Image Processing
7.3 IMAGE PROCESSING

7.3.1 STRUCTURAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
Descriptions
6BDetailed
M0AN 7-15 SM
Laser Exposure
7.3.2 IPU MECHANISM

Image processing function overview
The image signals from the controller (memory) are received via the PCI bus, and output to the LDB via
a GAVD (the LDB is provided in the laser unit).
7.4 LASER EXPOSURE

7.4.1 OVERVIEW
Name
1 Polygon Mirror
2 F-theta Lens
3 Synchronization Detector Lens
4 Synchronization Detector Mirror
5 Toner Shield Glass
6 LD Board
7 Cylindrical Lens
8 Shield Glass
• The LD drive board controls both the laser output and laser synchronization mechanism.
• The machine cuts off the power supply to the LD drive board if the front or right cover is
SM 7-16 M0AN
Laser Exposure
opened.
7.4.2 AUTO POWER CONTROL (APC)
Descriptions
6BDetailed
The LD driver IC drives the laser diode. To prevent the intensity of the laser beam from changing
because of the temperature, the machine monitors the current passing through the laser diode (LD).
The machine adjusts the current to the laser diode by comparing it with the reference level from the
reference circuit.
This auto power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during printing.
The laser diode power is adjusted on the production line.
• Do not touch the variable resistors on the LD unit in the field.
M0AN 7-17 SM
PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development
7.4.3 LD SAFETY SWITCH
“+24V” goes through the BCU and is converted to “+5VS” on the IPU. “+5VS” is supplied to the LD
Board. The interlock switch turns off when the front cover or the right door is opened. As a result, the
power supply (“+24VS”) to the BCU is cut off.
This system prevents unexpected laser emission, and ensures user safety and technician safety.
7.5 PCDU (PHOTO CONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT

7.5.1 OVERVIEW
SM 7-18 M0AN
No. Part Name No. Part Name

1 Cleaning Blade 7 ID Sensor
2 Toner Collection Coil 8 Development Sleeve
3 PCL (Pre Cleaning Light) *1 9 Charge Roller
4 Pick-off Pawl 10 Brush Roller
5 OPC Drum 11 Quenching Lamp
Descriptions
6 Transfer Roller
6BDetailed
*1 New feature. The PCL decreases the electro-static adhesion force generated between the OPC
drum and remaining toner to enhance cleaning efficiency.
7.5.2 OPC DRUM DRIVE MECHANISM
The drum/waste toner motor [B] drives the OPC drum [A] through gears and the drum drive shaft [C].
M0AN 7-19 SM
7.5.3 DRUM CHARGE
Charging to the drum is performed by the charge roller [B]. The charge roller always contacts the
surface of the drum and applies a charge bias.
A power pack applies the bias to the charge roller via a receptacle and electrode terminal. Dirt can
easily adhere to the charge roller because the roller always contacts to the drum with the pressure
spring. Therefore, the brush roller [A] is in contact with the charge roller for cleaning.
7.5.4 DRUM CLEANING, TONER DISCARDING
A counter blade cleaning system is used for drum cleaning. A cleaning blade [B] removes toner on the
drum by always contacting the drum against the drum rotation. Toner scraped off by the blade is
transferred by the toner collection coil [A] from the front to the rear, to be discarded into the waste toner
SM 7-20 M0AN
Development
bottle via the transportation route [C] to the rear of the drum. Depending on the job conditions, used
toner may be discarded by the toner recycle/discard switch mechanism. Paper dust that adheres to the
edge of the cleaning blade is removed by rotating the drum [D] in reverse after job end.
7.5.5 ID SENSOR
The ID sensor is used to keep image density by changing the value of ID sensor standard, development
Descriptions
6BDetailed
bias, drum potential and LD power with Vsp and Vsg.
The ID sensor operates at the following times:
1. When the machine has been unused beyond the time determined and the printed sheet count has
exceeded the predetermined value.
2. When the temperature and/or humidity has changed by more than a certain range, and the machine
restarts the engine (i.e. the main power is turned on, warming-up after the fusing-off mode, and the
front cover is closed.)
3. When the machine is processing a job that has more than a set number of sheets (job is interrupted)
or when the machine has completed a job that has the set number of sheets.
7.6 DEVELOPMENT
7.6.1 OVERVIEW
The development unit consists of the following parts.
M0AN 7-21 SM
Development
Description Description
1 Doctor Blade 4 Mixing Auger 2
2 OPC Drum 5 TD Sensor
3 Development Sleeve 6 Mixing Auger 1
7.6.2 DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM
This machine uses a dry two-component magnetic brush development system.

This machine uses 2 mixing augers [C] and [D] to keep the developer evenly mixed. Mixing auger 2 [C]
transports excess developer, scraped off the development roller by the doctor blade [B], towards the
rear of the machine. Mixing auger 1 [D] returns the excess developer, along with new toner, to the front
of the mixing assembly. Here the developer is reapplied to the development roller.
The TD sensor [A] detects the toner density in the development unit.
SM 7-22 M0AN
Development
7.6.3 DEVELOPMENT BIAS
Descriptions
6BDetailed
Development bias is generated by a power pack and is applied to the development sleeve [A] via the
development sleeve drive shaft and bias terminal [B].
7.6.4 DRIVE
The development motor [C] drives the mixing auger 1 [A], mixing auger 2 [E] and development sleeve
[B] through a serration gear [D].
M0AN 7-23 SM
Development
7.6.5 TONER SUPPLY
When the toner bottle [A] is set, the transport nozzle [B] on the side of the main machine is inserted into
the bottle (Hi-ACT system).
The drive of the toner supply motor is transmitted to the toner transport coil [C] through the drive gear
[D], which transports the toner in the bottle horizontally. Transporting by a coil provides a stable and
accurate toner supply and low toner remaining.
SM 7-24 M0AN
Development
Descriptions
6BDetailed
Toner transported by the coil [A] falls directly into the development unit from the sub-hopper via the
transport pipe [B]. To prevent toner from remaining, a coil is provided in the transport pipe.
When the PCDU is put in the machine, the sub-hopper [C] slides the shutter [D] on the bottle assembly
and the toner goes to the entrance [E] of the development unit.
7.6.6 TONER DENSITY CONTROL

There is only one toner density control mode, called PID mode.
Mode Toner supply TD Sensor Reference Toner Supply Amount Toner End
decision Value Detection
PID Compares Vt ID sensor control corrects The toner supply amount Is Available
with Vtref the TD sensor reference calculated with the difference
value. between Vt and Vtref.
7.6.7 TONER END DETECTION

The TD sensor detects toner near end.
If the difference between the TD sensor output and the target value is equal to or larger than the near
end threshold, the machine detects that a “possible” toner near end exists. As the machine continues to
operate, it starts to calculate an integrated value. If the integrated value is equal to or larger than the
near end total threshold, the machine determines that a “true” toner near end exists. The toner near end
indicator blinks on the operation panel at this time.
If the difference between the TD sensor output and the target value is less than the near end threshold
twice in a row, the toner near end indicator is turned off.
If the difference between the TD sensor output and the target is equal to or larger than the end
M0AN 7-25 SM
Transfer and Separation
threshold, the machine detects that a “possible” toner end exists. As the machine continues to operate,
it starts to calculate an integrated value. If the integrated value is equal or larger than the toner end total
threshold, the machine determines that a “true” toner end exists.
7.6.8 TONER END RECOVERY

In a toner end condition or toner near end condition, if the front cover is kept open for more than 5
seconds and then it is closed, the machine changes to a toner end recovery mode. You must keep the
main power on when you replace the toner bottle or toner end recovery will not work.
7.7 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION

7.7.1 OVERVIEW
Description Description
1 OPC Drum 4 Transfer Roller
2 Pick-off Pawl 5 ID Sensor
3 Discharge Plate
The machine uses a transfer roller [4], which touches the surface of the OPC drum [1]. The high voltage
supply board supplies a positive current to the transfer roller, which attracts the toner from the drum
onto the paper. The current depends on the paper width, paper type, and paper feed tray.
The curvature of the drum and the discharge plate [3] help the paper to separate from the drum. The
high voltage supply board also supplies a negative dc voltage to the discharge plate. The drum/waste
toner motor drives the transfer roller through the OPC drum [1].
SM 7-26 M0AN
7.7.2 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT CHARGE
Descriptions
6BDetailed
The high voltage supply board supplies a positive current to the transfer roller [A], which attracts the
toner from the drum onto the paper. The current depends on the paper width, paper type, and paper
feed tray.
The curvature of the drum and the discharge plate [B] help the paper to separate from the drum. The
high voltage supply board also supplies a negative dc voltage to the discharge plate [B], which helps
the paper to separate from the drum.
7.7.3 TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT AND RELEASE MECHANISM

The transfer roller contact and release mechanism prevents dirt and distortion. A transfer roller contact
cam [A] in the front right side of the mainframe is driven by the transfer roller contact motor [C]. The
transfer roller contact cam moves the transfer roller contact arm [C] by its rotation. The transfer roller [D]
and OPC drum [E] are separated by the movement of the transfer roller contact arm during process
control, discarding toner, or when the main power is turned off.
M0AN 7-27 SM
7.7.4 NEW UNIT DETECTION OF THE TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT

The new unit detection fuse is attached to the transfer roller unit.
When the transfer roller unit is replaced, new unit is detected.
SM 7-28 M0AN
Fusing
7.8 FUSING
7.8.1 OVERVIEW
This product uses a QSU-DH fusing system, in which a heater emits light to heat a fusing belt.
Descriptions
6BDetailed
1 Thermopile 6 Pressure Roller
2 Heating Sleeve Belt 7 Pressure Roller Temperature Sensor
3 Stripper Plate 8 Fusing Entrance Guide Plate
4 Fusing Exit Guide Plate 9 Thermostat
5 Pressurizing/depressurizing Lever 10 NC Sensor

1 Thermopile (edge) 6 Thermistor (center)
M0AN 7-29 SM
Fusing

2 Thermopile (center) 7 Thermostat (center)
3 Fusing lamp 8 Non-contact Thermistor (center)
4 Thermostat (edge) 9 Non-contact Thermistor (end)
5 Thermistor (edge)
7.8.2 MECHANISM
QSU-DH Fixing System

1 Halogen heater (Fusing Lamps) 5 Stay
2 Light Shielding Plate 6 Nip Pad (heat conduction plate method)
(at both ends)
3 Reflector 7 Pressure Roller
4 Heating Sleeve Belt
The heating sleeve belt is driven by drag rotation following the pressure roller, and presses a nip pad
against the pressure roller to fix toner to the paper.
The fusing lamp emits light, and the area of the fusing sleeve belt which is heated moves in an
anticlockwise direction so that heat is transmitted up to the contact point with the pressure roller.
• Fusing lamp
There are two lamps
Lamp power:
Center 800 W
Edge 412 W
• Nip pad
Presses against the Pressure roller to form a fusing nip. The top surface is covered with a slippery
sheet.
SM 7-30 M0AN
Fusing
Light Shielding plate and Heat Conduction Plate

The heating sleeve belt unit in this model has light shielding and heat conduction plates. These
prevent the fusing sleeve from damage caused by temperature increase. Otherwise, this could
happen at parts of the sleeve where paper does not pass by during a multi-page job using paper
widths that are less than the full width of the sleeve.
When handling an A3 (SEF) or A4 (LEF) sheet
Descriptions
6BDetailed
A cylindrical-shaped light shielding plate [C] covers the ends [D] of fusing lamp [A] where paper
does not pass by, to prevent the temperature from rising at those places.
Description
[A] Area where the fusing lamp lights up
[B] Print width of A3 (SEF) / A4 (LEF)
[C] Light shielding plates
[D] Areas where paper does not pass by and that would heat up without the light shielding
plates
When handling an A4 (SEF) or smaller sheet

The machine lights up only the fusing lamp for center [A]. At this time, the temperature increases
around the area [D] where paper does not pass. This is the gap between the lit part of the fusing
lamp [A] and the edge of the sheet being fed.
To prevent the heating sleeve belt unit from damage caused by the temperature increase, heat
conduction plates [C] which are made of a highly heat conductive material are attached to the nip
pad [B] to release the heat.
M0AN 7-31 SM
Fusing
Description
[A] Area where the fusing lamp lights up
[B] Nip pad
[C] Heat conductive plates
[D] Areas where paper does not pass by and that would heat up without the heat conducting
plates
[E] Print width of A4 (SEF)
[F] Print width of small size
• Reflector
Transmits heat efficiently to the left of the fusing belt.
• Flanges
Situated on both ends of the fusing belt. They maintain the shape of the belt.
SM 7-32 M0AN
Fusing
Fusing Drive
The pressure roller [B] is driven by the fusing motor or fusing/paper exit motor [A] (depending on the
model). The fusing belt [C] is driven by the pressure roller (drag rotation).
Descriptions
6BDetailed
Pressure Release Mechanism
To easily remove paper in the event of a jam in the fusing unit, a pressure release mechanism is
provided.
The pressing or releasing movement is applied together when the right cover [A] opens/closes: When
the right cover is closed, pressure is applied. When the right cover is open, the pressure is released.
M0AN 7-33 SM
Fusing
Fusing Temperature Control
• Warm-up mode
After power ON, fusing warm-up begins. The fusing motor or fusing/paper exit motor is switched
ON, the halogen heater is energized, and the fusing temperature is increased to the “reload target
temperature.”
When the fusing warm-up is completed, the fusing motor or fusing/paper exit motor is switched ON
for a certain time, and the fusing temperature is maintained at the “reload target temperature.”
• Standby mode
After fusing reload, when a certain time has elapsed, power supply to the halogen heater is
switched OFF, and the fusing motor or fusing/paper exit motor is switched OFF. At the same time,
the temperature is maintained at the “standby target temperature (SP1107-001)” by the halogen
heater.
In standby mode, the fusing motor or fusing/paper exit motor is switched ON intermittently.
• Printing ready mode

After returning to standby mode, the halogen heater is re-energized, and the fusing temperature is
raised to the “printing ready target temperature.” If printing is not required, the machine again
enters the standby mode after a certain time has elapsed.
If printing is required during return to standby, the halogen heater is energized, the fusing
temperature is increased to “target temperature after reload/after paper feed,” and the print job
starts.
CPM Down Control
To maintain image quality and printer quality, this printer has a low-temperature CPM mode and high-
temperature CPM mode, and implements 3 levels of CPM down according to the usage situation and
printer state.
• Low-temperature CPM mode

In a low-temperature environment, the fusing lamp cannot keep up, and it may be difficult to
maintain the target temperature. To handle this, the detection temperature of the fusing center
thermopile is checked at given intervals, and if the detected temperature is below a threshold
value, the CPM is decreased by 1 level.
This low temperature CPM reduction is performed in the following 3 levels:
CPM down level
Mode Level
Normal CPM 100%
CPM down 1 80%
CPM down 2 65%
CPM down 3 50%
SM 7-34 M0AN
Waste Toner
• Hot CPM mode

To shorten warm-up time and reduce the TEC value, this printer employs a fusing unit with a low
heat capacity.
For this reason, the temperature of those parts of the fusing belt where paper does not pass easily
increases, and outside of the paper width it may get extremely hot. In order to prevent the belt from
breaking due to this excessive temperature rise, CPM down is implemented depending on the
Descriptions
6BDetailed
usage conditions. CPM down can be implemented in the following 3 levels depending on the
detected temperature at the temperature sensor, or the paper passage time.
• The down level % is a value for the case where a typical paper (Normal paper:
A3/DLT/LT/A4) passes through the SEF. There may be some differences depending on
paper size/paper thickness.
CPM down level
Mode Level
Normal CPM 100%
CPM down 1 80%
CPM down 2 50%
CPM down 3 30%
CPM down determination using a temperature sensor

The temperature sensor is checked at given intervals, and if the detected temperature is above a
threshold value, the CPM is decreased by 1 level.
Since the points at which temperature tends to increase depend on the paper size, the sensor used
is changed depending on the paper size.
Paper width Sensor used
A3/DLT/B4 (SEF) Fusing thermistor (pressure roller end)
LT/A4 (SEF) Fusing thermopile (end)
B5/A5/B6/A6 (SEF) Fusing thermistor (pressure roller center)
• CPM down determination using paper passage time

Depending on the paper size, it may not be possible to use a sensor to determine the points on the
fusing belt which tend to rise in temperature.
Therefore, time conditions are also used to determine CPM down, and if continuous paper passage
time is above a threshold value, CPM is decreased by 1 level.
(When CPM down is performed by time conditions, CPM does not increase thereafter.)
7.9 WASTE TONER
M0AN 7-35 SM
Waste Toner
A: Silicone Pipe C: PCDU

B: Waste Toner Transfer Coil D: Waste Toner Bottle
The waste toner transfer coil transfers waste toner from the PCU to the waste toner bottle via a silicone
pipe. The silicone pipe is part of the main machine.
7.9.1 TONER DISCARDING

Overview
Printing with low toner coverage leaves a lot of uncharged toner in the development unit. This degrades
developer more quickly. To keep toner in the development unit fresh, the machine makes a belt pattern
on the drum at the end of a job when image coverage is less than 3%, to make sure that the equivalent
toner for 3% coverage is consumed. This supplies a certain amount of fresh toner to the development
unit. The belt pattern is cleaned off the drum, and the waste toner is stored in the cleaning unit and from
there it goes to the waste toner bottle.
For these examples, let us say that toner consumption at 3% is 10 mg/m.
6% Coverage (Toner consumption ratio = 20 mg/m)
In the first example, we have 6% coverage. 20 mg/m of toner is sent from the development unit to the
drum. 17 mg/m ends up on the paper and 3 mg/m is cleaned off the drum and goes to the waste toner
bottle. 3 mg/m = 20 mg/m x 0.15. This factor of 0.15 is a constant for this development mechanism. In
other words, at all times, 15% of the toner applied to the drum does not get on the paper, and is
discarded.
SM 7-36 M0AN
Waste Toner
Descriptions
6BDetailed
1.5% Coverage (Toner consumption ratio = 5 mg/m)
In this example, we have a lot less than 3% coverage. 1.5% coverage is only 5 mg/m of toner. The
development unit sends 5 mg/m of toner to the drum. 4.25 mg/m of this gets on the paper, and 0.75
mg/m is cleaned off the drum and sent to the waste toner bottle (this is the 15% factor we talked about
above). In this job, only 4.25 mg/m was consumed. The machine has to consume 10 mg/m for each job.
So, to make this 4.25 up to 10 mg/m for the preceding job, the machine then consumes 5 mg/m by
making patterns on the drum (shown in red in the diagram). This toner is cleaned off the drum and sent
to the waste toner bottle.
• Red letters indicate the toner amount that the belt patterns forcibly consume.
M0AN 7-37 SM
Waste Toner

Waste Toner Bottle Drive Mechanism
When the recycling shutter solenoid [A] moves the recycling shutter, collected toner is transported to
the left side by the waste toner transfer coil [B] and falls into the development unit.
The collected toner in the waste toner bottle is moved to the front side by the waste toner bottle coil [C].
As a result, the height of the collected toner is kept level.
The drum/waste toner motor drives the waste toner transfer coil [B] and waste toner bottle coil [C]. In
this model, there is a set detection mechanism for the waste toner bottle.
SM 7-38 M0AN
Waste Toner
Toner Collection Full Detection Mechanism
Descriptions
6BDetailed
The toner collection full sensor [A] is located above the feeler [B] of the waste toner bottle. When the
amount of collected toner in the waste toner bottle reaches about 90%, the feeler [B] is lifted and
interrupts the toner collection full sensor. After the machine detects that the waste toner bottle is full
based on the coverage counter or page counter, whichever comes first, the pixel counter calculates the
remaining days for the waste toner bottle replacement. When the machine prints 37,000 sheets after
detecting a bottle near full, the status is changed to bottle full. SP3-810-011 allows you to adjust the
duration between bottle near full and bottle full.
The remaining day counter = 15 days: The machine informs the status via @remote (if connected).
The remaining day counter = 5 days: The machine displays a message that indicates the near full
condition on the operation panel.
The remaining day counter = 0 days: The machine displays a warning on the operation panel and the
machine stops.
(Reference) Waste Toner Bottle Life (Sheet count)
Coverage 3%: 460K

Coverage 6%: 320K
Coverage 10%: 230K
M0AN 7-39 SM
Feed/ Transport part
7.10 FEED/ TRANSPORT PART

7.10.1 OVERVIEW

1 Pick-up roller (1st paper tray) 4 Feed roller (2nd paper tray)
2 Feed roller (1st paper tray) 5 Friction roller (2nd paper tray)
3 Friction roller (1st paper tray) 6 Pick-up roller (2nd paper tray)
7.10.2 FEED / TRANSPORT PART

The paper feed tray consists of 2 stages, i.e., a main double tray and a bypass feed tray. By using both
the 1st and 2nd tray as universal trays, a space-saving two-step feed is enabled.
Tray Paper size Loading number of sheets Corresponding paper thickness
1st/2nd paper tray A3 - postcard 550 sheets 60 – 300 g/m2
Bypass feed tray 12 x 18 - postcard 100 sheets 52 – 300 g/m2
Duplex unit A3 - postcard Interleave 52 – 256 g/m2
Tray bottom plate lifting

When the paper feed tray is set in the machine, the set switch at the rear of the tray switches ON, and it
is detected that the tray is set.
The coupling between the shaft at the rear of the tray and the lift motor then engages, the motor
rotates, and the tray bottom plate is lifted. The tray bottom plate lifts until the paper surface pushes up
the pick-up roller, the upper limit sensor switches OFF (interrupt), and the machine enters the paper
feed standby mode.
When the tray is removed, the coupling is released, and the tray bottom plate moves down. The lift
motor then rotates until the coupling returns to the home position.
SM 7-40 M0AN
Descriptions
6BDetailed
1 Tray lift motor 3 Tray rear axis
2 Coupling 4 Tray bottom plate

1 Upper limit sensor 2 Pick-up roller
M0AN 7-41 SM
Paper feed mechanism

1 Pickup arm 4 Feed roller
2 Upper limit sensor 5 Feed guide
3 Pick-up roller 6 Friction roller
The paper feed unit employs an RF system.

In a conventional FRR system, transport of 2 sheets at a time is prevented by reverse rotation of the
separating roller, but in the RF system, paper separation is assisted by the resistance of a separating
roller with a torque limiter (reverse drive is not performed).
When the paper feed tray is set in the machine, an arm [A] is pressed, the friction roller [B] comes in
contact with the feed roller, and the pick-up roller [C] contacts the top of the paper (to prevent paper
remaining, when the paper feed tray is withdrawn, the arm returns and contact with the rollers is
released).
The machine enters paper supply standby mode when the tray bottom plate moves up. When the paper
feed motor is switched ON, the rollers rotate and paper is supplied.
The roller holder functions as a paper guide and roller clip ring. The roller holder prevents the paper
from winding up.
SM 7-42 M0AN
Descriptions
6BDetailed
Paper feed transport mechanism
In order to maintain a proper interval of each paper, this machine has a paper feed sensor near the
paper feed roller to adjust the timing of paper feeding.
1. The Paper feed motor is switched ON, and the first sheet is supplied.
2. The paper feed motor switches OFF right before the rear edge of the first sheet completely passes
the paper feed roller.
3. The pick-up arm lowers the pick-up roller, which makes the pick-up roller contacting with the surface
of the paper when the rear edge of the first sheet finishes passing the paper feed roller.
4. The paper feed motor switches ON to supply the second sheet of paper when the first sheet is
transported for a predetermined distance by the downstream transport roller.
Paper size detection (1st / 2nd paper tray)

The end fence interlocking rotation detection plate is an automatic detection system which recognizes
patterns by a 4-position push switch.
Size is detected by the detection patterns of knobs 1, 2, 3, and 4. Tray set is detected by the tray set
switch.
If there has been a change in the pattern, “machine tray automatic size detection” control is performed
continuously.
If the paper size is selected manually by user setting, the automatic size detection is overridden.
M0AN 7-43 SM

1 Size detection switch 3 Tray set switch
2 Size detection feeler 4 End fence
• Tray detection sizes:

SRA3, A3, B4, A4 SEF, LT SEF, B5 SEF, A4 LEF, B5 LEF, and A5 LEF
• Tray size detection patterns

Size Knob
4 3 2 1
A3(DLT) 0 1 0 0
B4(LG) 0 0 1 1
0 1 1 1
A4 SEF 1 1 1 0
LT SEF 1 1 0 0
B5 SEF 1 0 0 0
A4 LEF (LT LEF) 0 0 0 1
B5 LEF (Exe LEF) 0 0 1 0
A5 LEF 0 1 0 1
* “0” is switch ON (PUSH), “1” is switch OFF.

* The figures in parentheses are automatic detection sizes which can be switched over in SP mode
(for SP settings, see “SP mode (paper supply transport)” : SP5-181-005 to 008, SP5-131-001).
* Exe LEF=10.5" x 7.25"
* If a pattern other than the above is detected, “Unknown Pattern” is displayed on the control panel.
Remaining paper detection

When the tray lift motor rotates, the remaining paper detection sensors 1, 2 [A] built into the motor
switch ON (pass) or OFF (interrupt). Paper remaining in the paper feed tray is detected by a
combination of this ON/OFF.
SM 7-44 M0AN
Descriptions
6BDetailed
These are the following 4 remaining paper detection levels:
Remaining paper status 100% 70% 30% 10%
Remaining paper status sensor 1 OFF OFF OFF ON
Remaining paper status sensor 2 OFF ON OFF OFF
Control panel remaining paper display Bar 4 Bar 3 Bar 2 Bar 1
M0AN 7-45 SM
Paper end detection

When there is no more paper in the paper feed tray, the leading edge of the paper end feeler falls into a
notch in the tray bottom plate, and the paper end detection sensor at the rear edge of the end feeler
switches ON (pass).

1 Paper end sensor 3 Notch
2 End feeler
Paper feed drive

The 1st/2nd pick-up rollers and 1st/2nd paper feed rollers are driven by the paper feed motor. The
1st/2nd separating rollers are driven by the vertical transport motor.
A bypass transport roller is driven by a duplex/bypass motor, and the registration roller is driven by the
registration motor.
SM 7-46 M0AN

1 Paper feed motor 6 Bypass transport roller
2 Vertical transport motor 7 Vertical transport roller (2nd tray)
3 Pick-up roller (1st tray) 8 Paper feed roller (2nd tray)
4 Paper feed roller (1st tray) 9 Pick-up roller (2nd tray)
5 Vertical transport roller (1st tray)
Descriptions
6BDetailed
Registration roller corrects skews of paper to match a leading edge of an image on the drum with paper
selections. The registration roller (Driven) employs a plastic roller to correct skews. The registration
roller (Drive) employs a rubber roller to enhance its transport capability. Registration buckle for each
tray or paper type can be adjustable with SP1-003.

1 Registration roller (Driven) 3 Registration motor
2 Registration roller (Drive)
M0AN 7-47 SM
Paper powder removal mechanism

The registration part of the machine removes paper scrap by 1 paper removal sheet in contact with the
driven roller (resin). Paper scrap removed by the paper removal sheet is collected in a paper removal
container.

1 Paper powder removal container 3 Registration roller (Driven)
2 Paper powder removal sheet 4 Registration roller (Drive)
7.10.3 BYPASS FEED SECTION

1 Bypass paper end sensor 4 Bypass/Duplex motor
2 Bypass paper feed roller 5 Bypass Reverse roller
3 Bypass pick-up roller 6 Paper detection feeler
Bypass feed paper/separation mechanism

The manual paper feed mechanism employs an FRR system. The bypass feed unit comprises a paper
SM 7-48 M0AN
feed roller, reverse roller and bypass pick-up roller.

When the paper feed tray is selected and the machine is started, the bypass pick-up solenoid is
switched OFF, and paper is supplied by the duplex/bypass motor (CCW).
*1 The bypass pick-up roller does not come in contact with the paper surface by default. It is opposite to
the paper feed tray.
Descriptions
Bypass feed paper size detection
6BDetailed
Paper size width detection is performed by a bypass feed size detection switch (rotary switch).
The bypass feed size detection switch has a rotation plate which rotates together with the side fence of
the bypass feed table, and detects the paper size.
Paper portrait/landscape is determined by a length detection sensor.
Two feelers [A] for the bypass length sensor [B] are added to the rear of the tray to prevent a false
detection in paper length detection caused by floating on the rear of paper when large size paper is set
without pulling out the extension bypass tray.
Bypass feed paper end detection

To detect bypass feed paper end, a paper detection feeler and bypass feed paper end sensor are
provided.
When the paper is set, the bypass paper end sensor switches ON (interrupt), and paper set is detected.
When there is no more paper, a detection filler falls into a hole in the bypass feed table, the bypass
paper end sensor switches OFF (pass), and paper end is detected.
Bypass paper feed drive

The paper feed roller, reverse roller and pick-up roller are driven by the duplex/bypass feed motor.
M0AN 7-49 SM
7.10.4 DUPLEX SECTION

1 Reverse sensor 6 Duplex entrance roller 2
2 Reverse roller 7 Duplex transport roller 1
3 Junction gate 8 Duplex transport roller 2
4 Duplex entrance roller 1 9 Duplex exit roller
5 Duplex entrance sensor 10 Duplex exit sensor
Transport reverse mechanism

The paper passes through the junction gate, and is transported to the reverse tray by the reverse roller.
After the trailing edge of paper has left the fusing exit sensor, the junction gate is moved to the duplex
path direction and the reverse motor starts rotating reversely.
SM 7-50 M0AN
Descriptions
6BDetailed
1 Fusing exit sensor 4 Junction gate
2 Reverse sensor 5 Duplex entrance roller 1
3 Reverse roller
Duplex drive
The rollers are driven by the following motors:
Rollers Drive sources
Reverse roller Reverse motor
Duplex entrance roller 1 Duplex entrance motor
Duplex entrance roller 2 Duplex entrance motor
Duplex transport roller 1 Duplex/bypass motor
Duplex exit roller Duplex/bypass motor
Interleave mechanism
The duplex unit performs interleave to reduce the overall duplex printing time.
Paper exit from machine
Length No. of interleaves
Less than 216 mm 3
216-432 mm 2
When bypass/duplexing (regardless of paper sizes) 1
1-bin tray exit from machine

Length No. of interleaves
Less than 216 mm 2
216-432 mm 1
M0AN 7-51 SM
• 3 sheet interleave
Back side of 1st sheet -> Back side of 2nd sheet -> Back side of 3rd sheet -> Front side of 1st
sheet -> Back side of 4th sheet -> Front side of 2nd sheet
• 2 sheet leave
Back side of 1st sheet -> Back side of 2nd sheet -> Front side of 1st sheet -> Back side of 3rd
sheet -> Front side of 2nd sheet
7.10.5 PAPER EXIT UNIT
SM 7-52 M0AN

1 Inverter guide cover sensor 6 Duplex entrance roller
2 Paper exit full sensor 7 Duplex entrance sensor
3 Reverse sensor 8 Paper exit sensor
4 Reverse roller 9 Paper exit full feeler
5 Junction gate 10 Paper exit roller
Descriptions
6BDetailed
Delivery location change-over
The paper transported from the fusing unit is changed over by the junction gate in the “machine paper
exit/bridge unit” direction or the “reverse tray/1 bin unit” direction.
Machine paper exit/bridge unit direction
1. The registration sensor switches ON.

2. The paper exit motor switches ON (CCW).
3. When the rear edge of the paper leaves the paper exit roller, the paper exit motor switches OFF.
No. Description
1 Paper exit roller
2 Paper exit sensor
3 Junction gate
Reverse tray/1 bin unit direction
M0AN 7-53 SM
1. Registration sensor switches ON.

2. The reverse motor switches ON (CCW).
3. Before the leading edge of the paper reaches the junction gate [A], the junction gate moves in the
reverse tray/1 bin unit direction.
* If the junction gate is in the reverse tray/1 bin unit direction, the junction gate is not changed over.
4. After the trailing edge of the paper has left the fusing exit sensor [B], the exit junction solenoid
switches OFF.
5. When the trailing edge of the paper leaves the reverse roller [C], the reverse motor switches OFF.
Paper Exit Full, Jam Detection, Open/close detection

The paper exit full sensor detects paper exit jam.
When outputs push up the paper exit full feeler, the paper exit full sensor detects that standard output
tray is full of outputs and a jam message is displayed after a job end.
Paper exit sensor
When a sheet of paper stays in the paper exit unit, the paper exit sensor detects the paper jam and a
jam message is displayed.
Reverse cover open/close sensor
The reverse cover open/close sensor detects opening and closing of the reverse cover.
SM 7-54 M0AN
7.10.6 PAPER PATH AND SENSOR LOCATIONS
Descriptions
6BDetailed
Intervals of Rollers
Module From To Interval (mm)
1st Paper Feed Unit Pick-up Roller (1st tray) Feed Roller (1st tray) 30.0
Feed Roller (1st tray) 1st Vertical Transport Roller 43.0
2nd Paper Feed Unit Pick-up Roller (2nd tray) Feed Roller (2nd tray) 30.0
Feed Roller (2nd tray) 2nd Vertical Transport Roller 43.0
2nd Vertical Transport Roller 1st Vertical Transport Roller 96.9
Registration Unit 1st Vertical Transport Roller Registration Roller 84.8
Registration Roller Transfer Roller 83.5
Fusing Unit Transfer Roller Heating Sleeve Belt 102.9
M0AN 7-55 SM
Air Flows (Fan Control)

Paper Exit Unit Heating Sleeve Belt Paper Exit Roller 138.5
Reverse Unit Heating Sleeve Belt Reverse Roller 138.5
Reverse Roller Duplex Entrance Roller 1 131.3
Duplex Unit Duplex Entrance Roller 1 Duplex Entrance Roller 2 120.1
Duplex Entrance Roller 2 Duplex Transport Roller 1 89.6
Duplex Transport Roller 1 Duplex Transport Roller 2 84.0
Duplex Transport Roller 2 Duplex Exit Roller 27.1
Duplex Exit Roller Registration Roller 88.0
Bypass Feed Unit Duplex Pick-up Roller Duplex Feed Roller 30.0
Duplex Feed Roller Duplex Transport Roller 24.5
Duplex Transport Roller 1st Vertical Transport Roller 56.0
Intervals of Sensors
1st Paper Feed Unit Feed Roller (1st tray) 1st Paper Feed Sensor 5.0
1st Vertical Transport Roller 1st Vertical Transport Sensor 16.8
2nd Paper Feed Unit Feed Roller (2nd tray) 2nd Paper Feed Sensor 5.0
2nd Vertical Transport Roller 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor 24.3
2nd Vertical Transport Sensor 1st Vertical Transport Sensor 88.7
Registration Unit Registration Sensor Registration Roller 17.0
Paper Exit Unit Paper Exit Sensor Paper Exit Roller 17.0
Reverse Unit Reverse Roller Reverse Sensor 14.0
Duplex Unit Duplex Entrance Roller 1 Duplex Entrance Sensor 34.0
Duplex Exit Roller Duplex Exit Sensor 17.1
1-bin Unit Reverse Sensor 1-bin Exit Roller -
7.11 AIR FLOWS (FAN CONTROL)

7.11.1 OVERVIEW
Around the Development Unit / Laser Unit

NA model
SM 7-56 M0AN
Descriptions
6BDetailed
M0AN 7-57 SM
EU/AA models
No. Part Name

1 Odor filter
2 Fusing fan (For EU/AA models, there are two fans.)
3 Paper exit fan
4 Development exhaust fan
5 Dust filter
SM 7-58 M0AN
Around the Fusing Unit and Development Unit

NA model
Descriptions
6BDetailed
M0AN 7-59 SM
EU/AA models
No. Part Name

1 Odor filter
2 Fusing fan (For EU/AA models, there are two fans.)
3 Paper exit fan
4 Front development cooling fan
5 Development bearing cooling fan
SM 7-60 M0AN
Around the PSU

Around the PSU
Descriptions
6BDetailed
No. Part Name
1 PSU board
2 PSU cooling fan
7.11.2 MECHANISM
By installing the duct corresponding to each fan, the air flow is efficiently controlled to a cooling target.
Moreover, improvement in quietness and energy-saving efficiency is achieved by performing stepwise
operation of the fan according to the imaging temperature.
Cooling of PSU
The PSU is cooled by the PSU cooling fan, cooling the PSU board directly.
Cooling of Development Unit

The cooling for development unit is provided by a development bearing cooling fan that takes air in from
the rear of the machine outside and applies the air to the bearing of mixing auger and bottom side of
the development unit.
M0AN 7-61 SM
Cooling of PCDU
Air taken in from the PCDU cleaning unit is taken out from the left rear exhaust. An air-flow duct is
installed at between the fusing unit and the toner bottle, to suppress excessive temperature rise of the
toner bottle.
The front development cooling fan takes in air from the front, and blows air over the PCDU to cool it.
Cooling of Fusing Unit

Air taken in from the paper exit fan at the front is discharged from the fusing fan at the rear to outside
the machine. By cooling the paper immediately after fusing, it is used for not only cooling of the paper
exit sensor but also reduction of stored heat of stack paper and reduction of curl are realized. This also
serves to prevent dew condensation of the paper discharge guide sheet. As a measure against odor, an
odor filter is installed downstream from the fusing fan.
Crisis management when temperature rises in the Printer

In order to suppress excessive temperature rise in the printer and maintain equipment quality, a
temperature detection sensor (imaging temperature sensor (thermistor)) [A] is installed in the printer.
The imaging temperature sensor (thermistor) detects the temperature environment in the printer, and
controls cooling.
Overview of cooling operation in the machine
The temperature in the machine is detected during output and after output, and the interior of the
machine is cooled by fan operation (stepwise operation of fan, prolonged fan rotation after paper has
passed through) according to the temperature inside the machine.
SM 7-62 M0AN
However, if the temperature inside the machine rises significantly due to passing a large volume of
paper, in addition to fan operation, the CPM is specified to control the temperature in the machine.
The Conditions of Fans Operation
The following table illustrates how/when the fans operate under the specific conditions of the main
machine.
Condition Development Paper Fusing Development PSU Front
Descriptions
6BDetailed
Exhaust Heat Exit Fan Fan Bearing Cooling Cooling Development
Fan Fan Fan Cooling Fan
Warm-up Stops Stops Stops Stops Stops Stops
Standby Rotates in low Stops Rotates Stops Stops Stops

speed in low
speed
During Rotates Rotates Rotates Rotates Rotates Rotates
printing
After Rotates in low Stops*1 Rotates Stops*1 Stops*1 Stops
printing speed *1 in low
speed*1
Abnormal Stops Stops Stops Stops Stops Stops
(Jams)
*1 When the temperature in the machine reaches 42 degrees, these fans keep revolving until the
temperature decreases by two degrees.
Print Duty Control
1. The machine repeats a 16-page-print and 25-second-pause. The following two messages will
alternatively appear on the operation panel.
“The printing speed is now being limited, because the internal cooling fan is active.”
“Internal cooling fan is active.”
2. All the fan motors in the machine works after printing and standby. The message will appear on the
operation panel.
“Internal cooling fan is active.”
3. If the temperature of the image processing unit reaches under the pre-set temperature, the machine
turns to the normal control.
M0AN 7-63 SM
Electrical parts
7.12 ELECTRICAL PARTS

7.12.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
SM 7-64 M0AN
Electrical parts
7.12.2 BOARD OUTLINE
Controller
Controls the printer system overall. Comprises an x86 CPU, controller ASIC, IO control ASIC, and RAM.
LDB
Descriptions
LD control circuit which drives the laser diode by a universal driver.
6BDetailed
BCU
Controls the engine, as well as printer engine sensors, motors and solenoids (the BCU has the IOB
functions).
IPU
Processes digital signals by an IPU.
OPU
Controls the control panel.
HVP
Generates the high-voltage power (Charge, Development, Transfer, Separation) required for process
control.
PSU
Generates DC power from a commercial AC power supply, and supplies it to each control circuit.
Comprises an A/C drive circuit for controlling the fusing lamp.
7.12.3 FEED TRAY DEHUMIDIFIER HEATER, PCDU ANTI-
M0AN 7-65 SM
CONDENSATION HEATER
Circuit configuration
If a heater is used in the main machine, it is required that the harness from the heater sub-board is
connected to the BCU. When this harness is connected to the BCU, the supply power is controlled
based on the main machine operation and the setting of SP5-805-001 as shown in the following table.
Heater SP5-805- Plug- Sleep JAM/ Stand-by Printing
001 in Mode Door Mode/
Open/ Fusing Unit Off
SC Mode
Dehumidification Heater 0 (OFF) On On Off Off Off
(Paper Feed Tray: 1 (ON) On On On On Off
Standard)
Dehumidification Heater 0 (OFF) On On Off Off Off
(Paper Feed Tray: Option) 1 (ON) On On On On Off
Anti-condensation heater 0 (OFF) On On Off Off Off
(PCDU) 1 (ON) On On On On Off
7.13
SM 7-66 M0AN
One-way Clutches
7.14 ONE-WAY CLUTCHES

This machine adapts one-way clutches, used for paper feed mechanism.
Each one-way clutch locations are pointed below.
7.14.1 PAPER FEED/BYPASS
Descriptions
6BDetailed
7.14.2 DUPLEX
No. Description
(1) Duplex exit roller
(2) Bypass Paper Feed Roller
(3) Bypass Pick-up Roller
M0AN 7-67 SM
Process Control
No. Description
(4) Bypass Separation Roller Drive Shaft
(5) Bypass Separation Roller
7.15 PROCESS CONTROL

7.15.1 IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL (PROCESS CONTROL)
Outline
Process control is a system that adjusts the image creation process to maintain a constant image
density. Process control is executed at the following conditions.
Trigger Operative Condition Notes
1 • Power ON • When a certain time passes after the previous job No retry if an SC
• Recovering end, and when a certain number of sheets are occurs during
from Energy printed after the last process control at the adjusting.
Saver previous Power ON, recovering from Energy Saver
mode or closing the front cover.
• Closing the
front cover • When a new PCDU is detected.
• When the TD sensor detects a toner end before
turning the power on.
2 Job End When the job end counter becomes more than the • Process Control
threshold. clears the Job
end counter.
3 Job Interruption When the job interrupt counter becomes more than the Process control
threshold. clears the job
interrupt counter.
4 Non-use (Idle) • When the non-use time counter becomes more than Available only
the threshold. when the energy
• When significant environmental changes occur after saver mode is off.
the last job end.
5 Manual process When SP 3-011-001 is executed. -
control
The process control consists of the following features.
• Potential Control (Charge/Development Bias and LD power Control)

• Vtref Compensation
Flowchart: From Process Control to Printing
SM 7-68 M0AN
Process Control
Descriptions
6BDetailed
Potential Control
Potential Control adjusts Charge/Development bias and LD power to maintain a constant image output.
Charge roller, development roller, OPC drum and laser unit involve with imaging process.
Charge bias (Vc) is a bias for charge roller. Applying a charge bias to the OPC drum increases the
potential of the OPC drum.
Development bias (Vb) is a bias for development roller. When a development bias is applied to
developer (carrier), the OPC drum which is charged the opposite bias from development part attracts
toner.
Development potential (Vd – Vb) is the ability to attract the toner to the OPC drum. A larger
development potential increases the amount of toner adhesion.
In image density adjusting, the potential control process creates an ID pattern patch using the “bias for
ID pattern creation” which has a lower density and lower Charge/Development bias than for printing.
With the results of Vsp (the ID sensor output from ID pattern patch) and Vsg (the ID sensor output from
bare surface of the OPC drum), the potential control process adjusts the development bias so that the
amount of toner adhesion becomes a specified target value.
Charge/Development Bias is done with the following operation. The operation time differs depending on
the line speed.
• ID sensor Vsg Adjustment

The machine adjusts the LED strength of the ID sensor so that the value of Vsg (the charge which
is detected from the bare surface of the OPC drum) is in the range of 4.0V ±0.5V. When Vsg is
detected as not within the target range three times, SC370 (ID sensor error) appears.
• Developer Stirring (0 to 5 seconds)
M0AN 7-69 SM
Process Control
The machine agitates the developer and reads the TD sensor (µ sensor) output.
• Bias Compensation
The machine compensates the development bias (Vb) using the Vsp/Vsg ratio. The machine also
compensates charge bias (Vc) and LD power based on the Vb result.
Vsp/Vsg Toner Density Vb Compensation SP
High High SP3-235-011
Slightly high Slightly high SP3-235-012
Correct Correct SP3-235-013
Slightly low Slightly low SP3-235-014
Low Low SP3-235-015
Fig. 1: Relation b/w Dev. bias and Toner adhesion amount
Vtref Compensation
To maintain a constant/proper toner density, the toner density in the developer must be controlled as
well as the bias control. Vtref is the target of the toner density in the developer.
• Vtref Determination
With the output of the ID sensor and the TD sensor (µ sensor) in ID sensor detection, the machine
determines the Vtref used for the reference value for the TD sensor (µ sensor).
TD sensor (µ sensor) Initial Setting When a New PCDU Is Installed

When a new PCDU is set in the mainframe, this is detected by the machine as a new PCDU, and the
initial µ count (the output from the TD sensor (µ sensor) of initial developer setting) is determined after
entering the TD sensor (µ sensor) initial setting mode. The TD sensor (µ sensor) initial setting is done
SM 7-70 M0AN
Process Control
as follows.
• Starting the developer initial setting

The new unit detecting mechanism performs the TD sensor (µ sensor) initial setting.
• Developer Agitation
The developer is stirred, with the development roller and the transport coil rotating (30 seconds).
• Initial µ Count Detection
Descriptions
6BDetailed
The machine detects the TD sensor (µ sensor) output while mixing the developer, and stores the
output as the initial µ count.
• SP3-030-061 Initial µ count (Line speed 1)

• Vt Calculation
The machine refers to the initial µ count with the above SP according to the machine type and
calculates Vt with the difference of the present µ count.
• If the initial µ count detected is out of the upper/lower output limit, the machine displays a TD sensor
(µ sensor) calibration error (SC360-01).
• After replacing a PCDU and performing the initial TD sensor (µ sensor) setting, the machine forcibly
executes the process control.
7.15.2 MECHANISM
Sensor Composition
Sensor Description
ID sensor Used to measure the amount of toner that adhered on the OPC drum
TD Sensor Used to measure the toner density in the developer
M0AN 7-71 SM
Process Control
ID Sensor
An ID sensor consists of a light-receiving element located at the opposite position of LED.
It detects the amount of toner adhered using reflection from the LED.
ID sensor is fixed in the right cover of the mainframe and detects the patch density formed on the
center of the OPC drum.
TD sensor (µ sensor)
In this model, a non-contact toner density (TD) sensor, which we call the TD sensor (µ sensor), is used
for the toner density control.
The TD sensor (µ sensor) is attached on the lower side of the development unit. Unlike HST sensor, the
board of the TD sensor (µ sensor) is exposed. So there is a cover around the sensor to protect the
sensor and to maintain a good contact condition of the sensor and development unit.
The TD sensor (µ sensor) measures the permeability of the developer without contacting from outside
of the case, and converts the measured value to the toner density.
According to the toner density measured by this sensor, the proper amount of toner is supplied to the
developer.
A counter corresponding to the frequency is used as the unit of TD sensor (µ sensor) output. Thus,
unlike HST sensor which directly detects Vt, the TD sensor (µ sensor) output is converted into Vt for the
toner supply control.
In the TD sensor (µ sensor), there is an ID chip storing the machine identification information, the
running distance information of Development unit and PCU, and other information used by the image
density control.
SM 7-72 M0AN
Energy Save
7.16 ENERGY SAVE

7.16.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES
Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment.
Descriptions
6BDetailed
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers
are at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different. For
example, if the timers are all set to 60 min., the grey area will disappear, and no energy is saved before
60 min. expires.
Setting items that are related to Energy Saving

The user can set these timers with User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)
Sleep Mode Timer
User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)

After a specified period has passed, or [Energy Saver] is pressed, the machine enters Sleep mode in
order to conserve energy. Specify the time to elapse before Sleep mode.
Default: [1 minute(s)]
Sleep Mode Timer may not work when error messages appear.
Depending on which Embedded Software Architecture application is installed on it, the machine might
take longer than indicated to enter Sleep mode.
Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off
User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)
M0AN 7-73 SM
Energy Save
Specifies whether Fusing Unit Off mode is enabled or not.

When Fusing Unit Off mode is enabled, the display is on but the fusing unit is off to save energy.
The machine requires roughly the same time as warm-up time to recover from Fusing Unit Off mode.
Default: [Off]
If [Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off] is set to [On], you can specify when to exit Fusing Unit
Off mode and the time to elapse before entering Fusing Unit Off mode.
If [Exit Fusing Unit Off Mode] is set to [On Printing], the machine exits Fusing Unit Off mode when
printing is performed.
If [Exit Fusing Unit Off Mode] is set to [On Operating Control Panel], the machine exits Fusing Unit Off
mode when a key is pressed on the control panel of the machine.
If the timer is set to [On], you can set the time from 10 seconds to 240 minutes, using the number keys.
Energy Saving Recvry. for Business Applicatn.
User Tools (System settings > General Settings)

Specify whether or not to enable low-energy recovery from Sleep mode to use applications independent
of the machine, such as Address Book Management or Browser.
Default: [Off]
If [On (Energy Saving)] is selected, it takes longer than usual to be ready to use the machine.
Recovery Time/Reduced Electrical Consumption

Reduced electrical consumption in Sleep Recovery time from Sleep
mode mode
Mainly Europe and 0.89 W 7 sec.
Asia
Mainly North America 0.79 W 7 sec.
• The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may
differ depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
SM 7-74 M0AN
Energy Save
7.16.2 POWER STATES OF THIS MACHINE
Descriptions
6BDetailed
State Description
1 Standby/Printing • State where normal operation is possible after warm-up
• State during printing
2 Printing State when printing with the backlight of the operation panel turned off
state/Panel OFF
3 Fusing OFF State where the Standby Fusing OFF state is entered when the time set
with the "Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off" setting of the
User Tools has elapsed.
• State where the operation panel is flashing and the fusing heater is OFF.
• The bottom plate of the paper feed tray is raised.
M0AN 7-75 SM
Energy Save
State Description
4 Quiet state Quiet state is entered when the Energy Saving key is pressed or the time
set with the "Sleep Mode Timer" of the User Tools has elapsed. This is a
temporary energy saving state before entering sleep mode.
• Basically, no homing (initialization) of peripheral devices is performed.
• The bottom plate of the paper feed tray is raised.
• The fusing heater is turned OFF.
5 Engine OFF Entered from Quiet state with internal timer.
(Sleep mode) • The relevant power systems (24V, 12V, 5V) are turned OFF at the same
time as the fusing heater.
• When printing is performed in engine OFF state, warm-up is started and
printing is performed while the backlight of the operation panel is turned
OFF.
6 STR state Supplying of power and clock to the CPU and peripheral chips on the
(Sleep mode) controller board is stopped.
Device state for each Energy Saving state

State Energy Saving Operation Engine HDD CTL
LED panel (Printer)
LCD
Standby/Printing ON ON ON ON ON
Printing state/Panel ON OFF ON ON ON
OFF
fusing OFF ON ON ON ON ON
(Printer is in the Quiet
state)
Quiet state ON OFF ON ON ON
ON*1 (Printer is in the Quiet
state)
Engine OFF Blinking Sleep OFF OFF ON
gradually OFF or ON*1 ON*1
ON*1
STR state Blinking Sleep OFF OFF STR
gradually
*1 When [Energy Saving Recvry. for Business Applicatn.] is [On (Energy Saving)], ON/OFF is
determined by the internal timer of the Smart Operation Panel.
Transition of operation panel to Energy Saving when [Energy Saving Recvry. for
Business Applicatn.] is [On (Energy Saving)]
Normally, the Energy Saving state of the operation panel LCD changes in step with the energy saving
state of the main unit, but to support the scenario where an application that does not use the engine
(printer) is executed from the operation panel, the Energy Saving state of the operation panel is
transitioned through the three states ON, OFF, and Sleep with its internal timer when [Energy Saving
Recvry. for Business Applicatn.] is [On (Energy Saving)].
SM 7-76 M0AN
Energy Save
7.16.3 VERIFICATION OF UP TIME FOR EACH ENERGY SAVING STATE

The up time for each power state of the machine can be checked with SP8-961 (Electricity Status). It is
also output on the SMC sheet.
SP Name Description
SP8-961- Ctrl Standby Time Cumulative time of Engine OFF mode, Quiet mode, and Standby
001 mode
Descriptions
6BDetailed
SP8-961- STR Time Cumulative time of STR mode
002
SP8-961- Main Power Off Cumulative time of state in which the power plug is connected to
003 Time the outlet but the main power is off
SP8-961- Reading and Cumulative time of state in which the printer engine is running or
004 Printing Time warming up
SP8-961- Printing Time Cumulative time of the state in which the printer engine is running
005
SP8-961- Eng Waiting Time Cumulative time of state in which the power state of the engine is
007 Standby state
SP8-961- Low Power State Not used for this machine
008 Time
SP8-961- Quiet State Time Cumulative time of the state in which the power state of the
009 engine is Quiet state
SP8-961- Heater Off State Cumulative time of the state in which the power state of the
010 Time engine is Fusing OFF state
SP8-961- LCD on Time Cumulative time of the state in which the backlight of the LCD is
011 on.
7.16.4 CHECKING THE UP TIME BY DEVICE STATE

SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each
mode.
SP8-941- Operation Cumulative time of the state in which the engine state notification is
001 Time enabled.
The state in which the engine is not running (such as when storing to
HD only with the controller) is excluded from the running state.
SP8-941- Standby Cumulative time of the state in which the engine state is not running.
002 Time
SP8-941- Low Power Not used for this machine
003 Time
SP8-941- Sleep mode Cumulative time in Sleep Mode state.
004 time
SP8-941- Off Mode Cumulative time in which the Energy Saving state of the device is
005 Time Engine OFF state.
SP8-941- Down time Cumulative time in which the device is disabled because itself or its
006 to 009 component is in the following state.
• SP8-941-006: SC (excluding mode SC)
M0AN 7-77 SM
Adobe PS vs. Clone PS
• SP8-941-007: Jam (plotter)

• SP8-941-009: Supply/PM unit end
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount
of energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are
measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customer’s site, a watt meter must be used to measure the actual
energy consumed.
To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed:
• At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005.
• At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005 again.
• Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later
measurement).
• Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.

• Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
7.16.5 RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that the default settings related to energy saving should be kept.
• If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy
costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy
use.
7.17 ADOBE PS VS. CLONE PS

7.17.1 OVERVIEW
This machine is equipped with a clone program for emulating Adobe PostScript/PDF (hereafter “Clone
PS”) as a standard feature. So, by default, it can perform printing using PostScript 3 and PDF Direct
Print, in addition to RPCS.
• What is Clone PS?

Based on the specifications of PostScript/PDF languages developed by Adobe, clone programs for
interpretation of PostScript and PDF documents have been created by various companies other
than Adobe. While the original program sold by the developer of the language is named Adobe PS,
compatible programs made by other manufacturers are called clones. Strictly speaking, these
clones must be fully compatible with the original program; however, they are called clones even if
they have some differences, because they cannot completely imitate the original.
Clone PS is basically designed to perform similar functions to Adobe PS, except for several
differences such as inability to use Adobe fonts.
SM 7-78 M0AN
Descriptions
6BDetailed
• Adobe PS, previously offered as an optional product for past models, is available again as
an option. (It comes in an SD card, as was the case for former models.)
• Clone PS and Adobe PS cannot be run simultaneously.

• The same printer driver can be used for Clone PS and Adobe PS.
• Clone PS emulates Adobe PostScript 3 version 3017. (The version of Adobe PS used in
the SD card option is v. 3018.)
• For the PDF Direct Print function, Clone PS emulates Adobe PDF version 1.7.
7.17.2 HOW TO DISTINGUISH ADOBE PS FROM CLONE PS

In the operation panel screen, it is difficult to tell whether Adobe PS or Clone PS is in use.
Both “PS3” and “PDF” are shown on the screen, regardless of whether Adobe PS or Clone PS is used.
Identification can be done as follows:
• Configuration Page
The description of the Firmware Version listed on the page varies as shown below:
PS type Description of Firmware Version
Adobe PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] Adobe PostScript 3 [x.xx], Adobe PDF [x.xx]
Clone PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] PS3 [x.xx], PDF [x.xx]
The manufacturers name “Adobe” is shown in the list if Adobe PS is used.
PS Configuration / Font Page
The “Adobe” logo is printed on the page if Adobe PS is used.
M0AN 7-79 SM
Web Image Monitor

Go to Status/Information > Device Info, and open the Printer Language menu.
If Adobe PS is used, the screen shows the program name “Adobe PostScript 3” and "Adobe PDF".
Operation Panel: Firmware Version

User Tools > Machine Features > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Firmware Version
When PostScript3 Unit Option (Adobe PS) is installed:
SM 7-80 M0AN
Descriptions
6BDetailed
Clone PS only:
No. Module Name Description

1 PDF (1st The Clone firmware number appears.
page)
The clone PS firmware number starts with "M0AN".
2 PDF (2nd The Adobe firmware number "M5135733" appears.
page) This module name appears in the firmware list only if PostScript3 Unit
Option is installed.
3 PS3 (Left) The Clone PS firmware number appears.
The clone PS firmware number starts with "M0AN".
4 PS3 (Right) The Adobe PS firmware number "M5135731" appears.
This module name appears in the firmware list only if PostScript3 Unit
Option is installed.
• Font Change Confirmation screen
The “Font Change Confirmation” screen is accessible only when Clone PS is used.
On the Home screen, select the User Tools icon > Machine Features > Printer Features > PS Menu
> Font Change Confirmation.
M0AN 7-81 SM
7.17.3 DIFFERENCE IN DEVICE FONTS

The variety and number of built-in fonts (device fonts) differ between Adobe PS and Clone PS.
PS type Number of European fonts
Adobe PS 136 fonts
Clone PS 93 fonts
For license reasons, the device fonts for Adobe PS cannot be handled by Clone PS. Instead, Clone PS
is equipped with fonts similar to Adobe device fonts under different names; when an Adobe PS font is
specified in the data to be printed, Clone PS will replace it with a similar font.
Use of a substitute font sometimes leads to different printing results, as shown in the table below.
SM 7-82 M0AN
Example 1
PS Helvetica
type
Adobe
PS
Clone
PS
When Helvetica is used in the original document, Clone PS applies a substitute font named
NimbusSans-Regular, maintaining almost the same appearance as the original data.
Descriptions
6BDetailed
Example 2
PS type LetterGothic
Adobe
PS
Clone
PS
When LetterGothic is originally used, Clone PS substitutes it with LetterGothic-Regular. In
this case, the character spacing differs from that in the original data.
Example 3
PS type Chicago
Adobe
PS
Clone
PS
Clone PS does not support alternative fonts for Chicago; instead, the Courier font (*) is
used. (The font shape differs significantly from Chicago.)
* Since Courier itself is named among the Adobe PS device fonts, Clone PS substitutes it
with an alternative font, NimbusMonoPS-Regular.
Font Change Confirmation Screen

Clone PS itself incorporates no Adobe fonts in it, and therefore replaces them with similar fonts when
Adobe PS fonts are specified in the print data output to the printer.
However, there is a possibility that a substitute font not desired by the customer may be used; to cope
with this issue, the operation panel shows a confirmation screen whenever an Adobe font is to be
replaced by a similar font.
If the customer often prints data containing Adobe fonts that are almost the same in terms of spacing
M0AN 7-83 SM
and shape as their substitutes, the confirmation screen appears every time printing is performed,
making the printing operation cumbersome. In such a case, the font change confirmation screen can be
hidden.
• User Tools icon on Home screen > Machine Features > Printer Features > PS Menu > Font Change
Confirmation
List of fonts and their replacements (Adobe PS -> Clone PS)

No. Adobe PS Clone PS
1 Courier NimbusMonoPS-Regular
2 Courier-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Bold
3 Courier-BoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-BoldItalic
4 Courier-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Italic
5 Helvetica NimbusSans-Regular
6 Helvetica-Bold NimbusSans-Bold
7 Helvetica-BoldOblique NimbusSans-BoldOblique
8 Helvetica-Oblique NimbusSans-Oblique
9 Symbol StandardSymL
10 Times-Bold NimbusRoman-Bold
11 Times-BoldItalic NimbusRoman-BoldItalic
12 Times-Italic NimbusRoman-Italic
13 Times-Roman NimbusRoman-Regular
14 AlbertusMT NimbusMonoPS-Regular
15 AlbertusMT-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
16 AlbertusMT-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
17 AntiqueOlive-Roman NimbusMonoPS-Regular
18 AntiqueOlive-Italic AntiqueOlive-Italic
19 AntiqueOlive-Bold AntiqueOlive-Bold
20 AntiqueOlive-Compact NimbusMonoPS-Regular
22 Apple-Chancery NimbusMonoPS-Regular
22 ArialMT NimbusSansNo2-Regular
23 Arial-ItalicMT NimbusSansNo2-Italic
24 Arial-BoldMT NimbusSansNo2-Bold
25 Arial-BoldItalicMT NimbusSansNo2-BoldItalic
SM 7-84 M0AN

26 AvantGarde-Book URWGothic-Book
27 AvantGarde-BookOblique URWGothic-BookOblique
28 AvantGarde-Demi URWGothic-Demi
29 AvantGarde-DemiOblique URWGothic-DemiOblique
30 Bodoni NimbusMonoPS-Regular
Descriptions
31 Bodoni-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
6BDetailed
32 Bodoni-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
33 Bodoni-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
34 Bodoni-Poster NimbusMonoPS-Regular
35 Bodoni-PosterCompressed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
36 Bookman-Light URWBookman-Light
37 Bookman-LightItalic URWBookman-LightItalic
38 Bookman-Demi URWBookman-Demi
39 Bookman-DemiItalic URWBookman-DemiItalic
40 Carta NimbusMonoPS-Regular
41 Chicago NimbusMonoPS-Regular
42 Clarendon NimbusMonoPS-Regular
43 Clarendon-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
44 Clarendon-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
45 CooperBlack NimbusMonoPS-Regular
46 CooperBlack-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
47 Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC NimbusMonoPS-Regular
48 Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC NimbusMonoPS-Regular
49 Coronet-Regular NimbusMonoPS-Regular
50 Eurostile NimbusMonoPS-Regular
51 Eurostile-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
52 Eurostile-ExtendedTwo NimbusMonoPS-Regular
53 Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo NimbusMonoPS-Regular
54 Geneva NimbusMonoPS-Regular
55 GillSans NimbusMonoPS-Regular
56 GillSans-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
57 GillSans-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
58 GillSans-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
59 GillSans-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
60 GillSans-BoldCondensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
61 GillSans-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
62 GillSans-LightItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
M0AN 7-85 SM

63 GillSans-ExtraBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
64 Goudy NimbusMonoPS-Regular
65 Goudy-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
66 Goudy-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
67 Goudy-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
68 Goudy-ExtraBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
69 Helvetica-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
70 Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
71 Helvetica-Condensed-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
72 Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
73 Helvetica-Narrow NimbusSansNarrow-Regular
74 Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique NimbusSansNarrow-Oblique
75 Helvetica-Narrow-Bold NimbusSansNarrow-Bold
76 Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique NimbusSansNarrow-BoldOblique
77 HoeflerText-Regular NimbusMonoPS-Regular
78 HoeflerText-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
79 HoeflerText-Black NimbusMonoPS-Regular
80 HoeflerText-BlackItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
81 HoeflerText-Ornaments NimbusMonoPS-Regular
82 JoannaMT NimbusMonoPS-Regular
83 JoannaMT-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
84 JoannaMT-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
85 JoannaMT-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
86 LetterGothic LetterGothic-Regular
87 LetterGothic-Slanted NimbusMonoPS-Regular
88 LetterGothic-Bold LetterGothic-Bold
89 LetterGothic-BoldSlanted NimbusMonoPS-Regular
90 LubalinGraph-Book NimbusMonoPS-Regular
91 LubalinGraph-BookOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
92 LubalinGraph-Demi NimbusMonoPS-Regular
93 LubalinGraph-DemiOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
94 Marigold Mauritius-Regular
95 Monaco NimbusMonoPS-Regular
96 MonaLisa-Recut NimbusMonoPS-Regular
97 NewCenturySchlbk-Roman URWCenturySchoolbook-Roman
98 NewCenturySchlbk-Italic URWCenturySchoolbook-Italic
99 NewCenturySchlbk-Bold URWCenturySchoolbook-Bold
SM 7-86 M0AN

100 NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic URWCenturySchoolbook-BdIta
101 NewYork NimbusMonoPS-Regular
102 Optima NimbusMonoPS-Regular
103 Optima-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
104 Optima-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
Descriptions
105 Optima-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
6BDetailed
106 Oxford NimbusMonoPS-Regular
107 Palatino-Roman Palladio-Roman
108 Palatino-Italic Palladio-Italic
109 Palatino-Bold Palladio-Bold
110 Palatino-BoldItalic Palladio-BoldItalic
111 StempelGaramond-Roman NimbusMonoPS-Regular
112 StempelGaramond-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
113 StempelGaramond-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
114 StempelGaramond-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
115 Tekton NimbusMonoPS-Regular
116 TimesNewRomanPSMT NimbusRomanNo9-Regular
117 TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-Italic
118 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT NimbusRomanNo9-Bold
119 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-BoldItalic
120 Univers NimbusMonoPS-Regular
121 Univers-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
122 Univers-Bold URWClassicSans-Bold
123 Univers-BoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
124 Univers-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
125 Univers-LightOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
126 Univers-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
127 Univers-CondensedOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
128 Univers-CondensedBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
129 Univers-CondensedBoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
130 Univers-Extended NimbusMonoPS-Regular
131 Univers-ExtendedObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
132 Univers-BoldExt NimbusMonoPS-Regular
133 Univers-BoldExtObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
134 Wingdings-Regular URWDingbats
135 ZapfChancery-MediumItalic URWChancery-MediumItalic
136 ZapfDingbats Dingbats
M0AN 7-87 SM
7.17.4 DIFFERENCES IN DRIVER FUNCTIONS

As shown below, there are differences in available driver functions between Adobe PS and Clone PS.
1. Font Substitution Table (Applicable only to driver for Windows OS)

Start > Device and Printer > Printer Properties > Device Settings
For Clone PS, the Font Substitution Table under the Device Settings menu will not be displayed.
Clone PS has font substitution table data similar to that of Adobe PS, and performs font
replacement as appropriate.
To disable font replacement, go to Printing Preferences > Detailed Settings > “Print Quality: Option”
> “True Type Font:” option, and select “Download as SoftFont”.
SM 7-88 M0AN
2. Fonts used for unauthorized copy prevention (Common to drivers for Windows OS and Mac
OS X)
The watermark text used for unauthorized copy prevention consists of a device font. The range of
available fonts varies between Adobe PS and Clone PS because of the difference in available
device fonts.
Adobe PS provides a choice from 136 fonts while 3 fonts are selectable for Clone PS.
Descriptions
6BDetailed
3. “User Setting” for dithering (Common to drivers for Windows OS and Mac OS X)
Clone PS ignores the “User Setting” option for dithering and performs dithering in the same manner
as when the “Automatic” setting (*) is selected.
* “Text Priority” is selected for text, and “Photo” for graphic objects and image objects.
In the driver menu for Mac OS X, the “User Setting” option is shown at half brightness and cannot
be selected.
M0AN 7-89 SM
M0AN
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDIX
Latest Release: Apr, 2017

Initial Release: Apr, 2017
Copyright (c) 2017 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.
Rev. 02/16/2022
M0AN APPENDIX
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................... 1-1

1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 MAINFRAME ................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................... 1-7
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ..................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.1 PAPER FEED .................................................................................................. 1-8
1.2.2 PAPER EXIT.................................................................................................. 1-13
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .................................................................................. 1-24
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ...................................................................................... 1-24
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................... 1-26
1.4.1 FINISHER SR3210 (D3B8) ............................................................................ 1-26
1.4.2 FINISHER SR3230 (D3BA)............................................................................ 1-28
1.4.3 MAIL BOX CS3010 (M481) ............................................................................ 1-32
1.4.4 BRIDGE UNIT BU3070 (D685) ...................................................................... 1-33
1.4.5 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE M25 (D3CJ) ................................................. 1-33
1.4.6 PUNCH UNIT PU3050 NA/EU/SC (D717)...................................................... 1-33
1.4.7 PUNCH UNIT PU3060 NA/EU/SC (D706)...................................................... 1-34
1.4.8 INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT FD3000 (M482) ............................................ 1-35
1.4.9 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3240 (M494) ............................................................. 1-36
1.4.10 LCIT PB 3260 (M496) .................................................................................... 1-36
1.4.11 LCIT RT 3030 (D696) .................................................................................... 1-37
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 2-1

2.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS............................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 OPTIONAL PERIPHERAL DEVICES ............................................................... 2-6
2.1.3 OTHER YIELD PARTS .................................................................................. 2-10
3. ENGINE SP MODE TABLES ......................................................... 3-1

3.1 ENGINE SP1-XXX (FEED) ........................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 ENGINE SP2-XXX (DRUM) ..................................................................................... 3-18
3.3 ENGINE SP3-XXX (PROCESS)............................................................................... 3-22
3.4 ENGINE SP4-XXX (LOCPP EDGE LEVEL) ............................................................. 3-30
3.5 ENGINE SP5-XXX (MODE) ..................................................................................... 3-31
3.6 ENGINE SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) ....................................................................... 3-37
M0AN i SM APPENDIX
3.7 ENGINE SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)............................................................................... 3-92
3.8 INPUT CHECK TABLE ........................................................................................... 3-103
3.8.1 MAIN MACHINE, PAPER FEED TRAY ........................................................ 3-103
3.8.2 FINISHER / MAIL BOX / FOLDING UNIT..................................................... 3-109
3.9 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ....................................................................................... 3-115
3.9.1 MAIN MACHINE, PAPER FEED TRAY ........................................................ 3-115
3.9.2 FINISHER / MAILBOX / FOLDING UNIT...................................................... 3-124
4. CONTROLLER SP MODE TABLES ............................................. 4-1

4.1 CONTROLLER SP5-XXX (MODE)............................................................................. 4-1
4.2 CONTROLLER SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)............................................................. 4-48
4.3 CONTROLLER SP7-XXX (DATA LOG1) .................................................................. 4-49
4.4 CONTROLLER SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2) .................................................................. 4-77
4.4.1 REMARKS..................................................................................................... 4-77
4.4.2 SP8-001 TO SP8-999 .................................................................................... 4-79
4.5 PRINTER SP MENU .............................................................................................. 4-107
4.5.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE) ....................................................................... 4-107
5. SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION .................................................... 5-1

5.1 PRINTING FEATURES .............................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 AUTO PDL DETECTION FUNCTION .............................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 PRINT IMAGES ROTATION ............................................................................ 5-5
5.1.3 PJL USTATUS ................................................................................................. 5-6
5.1.4 BEHAVIOR OF USB PRINTER DETECTION................................................... 5-8
5.2 SECURITY FEATURES ........................................................................................... 5-10
5.2.1 HOW TO RESTRICT ACCESS TO THE WIM JOB MENU ............................. 5-10
SM APPENDIX ii M0AN
SPECIFICATIONS
General Specifications
1. SPECIFICATIONS
0BSpecifications
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 MAINFRAME
Item Spec.
Configuration Desktop
Photosensitivity type OPC drum
Print process Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing
Development Dry two-component magnetic brush development system
Fusing Direct Heating (DH) fusing
Resolution 600 dpi
Warm-up time (23 °C 20.5 seconds

(73.4 °F), rated voltage)
Paper size (Tray 1-4) Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
(Paper sizes that can be detected automatically.)
• NA
A4 SEF, A5 LEF,B5 JIS SEF, 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x11
SEF/LEF, 7 1/4” x10 1/2” LEF, 8 1/2” x13 2/5” SEF
• EU/Asia
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 LEF, B4 JIS SEF,B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 8 1/2” x11

SEF
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
(Select the paper size using the Tray Paper Settings menu. Adjust the
supporting side fence before loading B4 JIS SEF, A3 SEF, or 11x17 SEF
paper into Trays 3–4.)
• NA
A3 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF,B5 JIS LEF, B6 JIS

SEF, 8 1/2” x13 SEF, 8 1/4” x14 SEF,8 1/4” x13 SEF, 8x13 SEF, 8x10
SEF, 7 1/4” x10 1/2” SEF, 5 1/2” x8 1/2” SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 11x15
SEF, 10x14 SEF
• EU/Asia
A5 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13
SEF, 8 1/2” x11 LEF, 8 1/4” x14 SEF, 8 1/4” x13 SEF, 8x13 SEF, 8x10
M0AN 1-1 SM APPENDIX

Item Spec.
SEF, 7 /4” x10 /2” SEF/LEF, 5 1/2” x8 1/2” SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF,
1 1
11x15 SEF, 10x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 2/5” SEF
Custom size
(When loading paper with a vertical length of more than 279.4 mm (11.0
inches) in Tray 1, use paper that has a horizontal width of 420 mm (16.6
inches) or less.)
• NA
Vertical: 3.55–11.69 inches
Horizontal: 5.83–17.00 inches
• EU/Asia
Vertical: 90.0–297.0 mm
Horizontal: 148.0–431.8 mm
Envelopes
(Select the paper size using the Tray Paper Settings menu)
4 1/8” x9 1/2” SEF/LEF, 3 7/8” x7 1/2” SEF, C5 Env SEF/LEF, C6 Env SEF/LEF,
DL Env SEF/LEF
Paper size (Bypass tray) Thin Paper–Thick Paper 4
(Paper sizes that can be detected automatically.)
• NA
A5 LEF,B5 JIS SEF, 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x11 SEF/LEF, 5 1/2” x8 1/2” SEF, 7
1
/4” x10 1/2” LEF, 12x18 SEF
• EU/Asia
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF,B5 JIS

SEF/LEF, B6 JIS SEF
Thin Paper–Thick Paper 4
(Select the paper size using the Tray Paper Settings menu.)
• NA
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF, B6

JIS SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 SEF, 8 1/4” x14 SEF, 8 1/4” x13 SEF,
8x13 SEF, 8x10 SEF, 7 1/4” x10 1/2” SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 11x15
SEF, 10x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 2/5” SEF
• EU/Asia
11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 SEF, 8 1/2” x11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4” x14
SEF, 8 1/4” x13 SEF, 8x13 SEF, 8x10 SEF, 7 1/4” x10 1/2” SEF/LEF, 5 1/2”
SM APPENDIX 1-2 M0AN

Item Spec.
1
x8 /2” SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12x18 SEF, 11x15 SEF, 10x14
0BSpecifications
SEF, 8 1/2” x13 2/5” SEF
Custom size
Vertical:
When only the Internal Multi-folding unit is installed, the vertical size range is
limited to 90.0–297.0 mm (3.55–11.69 inches).
Horizontal:
Paper that has a horizontal length of 432 mm (17.1 inches) or more is prone
to creasing, feed failures, and jamming.
• NA
Vertical: 3.55–12.00 inches
Horizontal: 5.83–23.62 inches
• EU/Asia
Vertical: 90.0–304.8 mm
Horizontal: 148.0–600.0 mm
OHP transparencies
A4 SEF/LEF, 8 1/2” x11 SEF/LEF
Translucent paper
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF
Label paper (adhesive labels)
A4 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF
Envelopes
(Select the paper size using the Tray Paper Settings menu.)
4 1/8” x9 1/2” SEF/LEF, 3 7/8” x7 1/2” SEF/LEF, C5 Env SEF/LEF, C6 Env

SEF/LEF, DL Env SEF/LEF
Paper size (Tray 3 (LCT)) Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
A4 LEF, 8 1/2” x11 LEF
Paper size (Large Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4

capacity tray (LCT))
A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2” x11 LEF
Paper size (Duplex) A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF,B5 JIS SEF/LEF,
B6 JIS SEF, 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2” x14 SEF, 8 1/2” x13 SEF, 8 1/2” x11 SEF/LEF,
8 1/4” x14 SEF, 8 1/4” x13 SEF, 8x13 SEF, 8x10 SEF, 7 1/4” x10 1/2” SEF/LEF,
5 1/2” x8 1/2” SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12x18 SEF, 11x15 SEF, 10x14

Item Spec.
1 2
SEF, 8 /2” x13 /5” SEF
• Custom size
Vertical: 90.0–297.0 mm (3.55–11.69 inches)
Horizontal: 148.0–431.8 mm (5.83–17.00 inches)
Paper weight • Trays 1-4
60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
• Bypass tray
• Tray 3 (LCT)
• Large capacity tray (LCT)
• Duplex
52–256 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–140 lb. Index)
Missing image area • Leading edge: 4.2 ± 1.5 mm (0.17 ± 0.06 inches)
• Trailing edge: 0.5–6.0 mm (0.02–0.24 inches)
• Left edge: 0.5–4.0 mm (0.02–0.16 inches)
• Right edge: 0.5–4.0 mm (0.02–0.16 inches)
First print time 2.7 seconds
(A4 LEF, 8 1/2” x11 LEF,

delivered face down,
feeding from tray 1)
Print speed (A4 LEF, 8 60 sheets/minute

1
/2” x11 LEF)
Paper capacity (80 g/m2, Trays 1–4
20 lb. Bond)
• Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
550 sheets
• Envelopes (LEF)
50 sheets
• Envelopes (SEF)
Double flap: 15 sheets
Single flap: 25 sheets

Item Spec.
Bypass tray
0BSpecifications
• Thin Paper–Thick Paper 4
100 sheets (up to 10 mm in height)
Thick Paper 1: 40 sheets
Thick Paper 2–Thick Paper 3: 20 sheets
Thick Paper 4: 16 sheets
• OHP transparencies
50 sheets
• Translucent paper
1 sheet
• Label paper (adhesive labels)
30 sheets
• Envelopes
10 sheets
Tray 3 (LCT)
1000 sheets x 2
Large capacity tray (LCT)
1500 sheets
Power requirements • NA
120–127 V, 12 A, 60 Hz
• EU/Asia
220–240 V, 8 A, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption NA
• Main unit only *1
Ready: 38.6 W
During printing: 790 W
Maximum: 1,600 W or less
• Complete system *2
EU/Asia
• Main unit only *1
Ready: 43.4 W

Item Spec.
During printing: 825 W
• Complete system *2
*1 The power level when the main switch is turned off and the power cord is
plugged into an outlet: 1 W or less
*2 The complete system consists of the main unit, lower paper trays, bridge
unit, and Finisher SR3230.
Dimensions(W x D x H) 587 x 653 x 720 mm (23.2 x 25.7 x 28.3 inches)
Space for main unit (W x 1,149 x 1,205 mm (45.2 x 47.4 inches)

D) (including the bypass
tray and output trays)
Weight Approx. 57 kg (125.7 lb.)
Noise emission
Sound power level
NA EU/Asia
Main unit only Stand-by 30.8 dB (A) 30.7 dB (A)
Printing 65.1 dB (A) 65.2 dB (A)
Complete system Stand-by 34.0 dB (A) 34.1 dB (A)
Sound pressure level
NA EU/Asia
Main unit only Stand-by 20.0 dB (A) 21.2 dB (A)
Complete system Stand-by 20.4 dB (A) 20.7 dB (A)
Sound power level and sound pressure level are actual values measured in accordance with ISO 7779.
Sound pressure level is measured from the position of the bystander.
The complete system consists of the main unit, lower paper trays, large capacity tray (LCT), Mailbox,
bridge unit, Finisher SR3230.

1.1.2 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
0BSpecifications
Item Spec.
Resolution 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
Printing speed 60 sheets/minute
1
(A4 LEF, 8 /2” x11 LEF,
plain paper)
Interface • Standard
Ethernet interface (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
USB 2.0 (Type A) port (on the control panel)
SD card slot (on the control panel)
• Option
IEEE 1284 parallel interface
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
Extended USB board
USB device server
Network protocol TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6)

Printer language • Standard
RPCS, PCL 5e/6, PDF, MediaPrint(JPEG, TIFF), PostScript 3
• Option
Adobe PostScript 3, IPDS, XPS
Fonts • Standard
PostScript 3: 93 fonts
• Option
Adobe PostScript 3: 136 fonts
IPDS: 108 fonts
Memory 2 GB
USB interface • Supported operating system
Windows Vista/7/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012
R2/2016, OS X 10.9 or later
• Transmission spec
USB 2.0 Standard
• Connectable device
Devices corresponding to USB 2.0 Standard
• The maximum length for the cable connecting the machine to an Ethernet network is 100 meters.

Supported Paper Sizes
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES
1.2.1 PAPER FEED
Tray 1 to 4, and the side LCT

Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3/4 Tray 3
2-drawer bank Tandem LCT
NA EU/AA NA EU/AA NA EU/AA NA EU/AA
A3 SEF (297 x 420) G2 A2 G2 A2 G2 A2 - -
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A A A A A - -
A4 LEF (297 x 210) G1 A1 G1 A1 G1 A1 K H
A5 SEF (148 x 210) B B B B B B - -
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A A A A A A - -
A6 SEF (105 x 148) B B B B B B - -
B4 SEF (257 x 364) G3 A3 G3 A3 G3 A3 - -
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A A A A A A - -
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) G4 A4 G4 A4 G4 A4 - -
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) B B B B B B - -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A2 G2 A2 G2 A2 G2 - -
Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") A3 G3 A3 G3 A3 G3 - -
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") B B B B B B - -
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") A A A A A A - -
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A1 G1 A1 G1 A1 G1 H K
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") B B B B B B - -
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") B B B B B B - -
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") B B B B B B - -
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") B B B B B B - -
Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") B B B B B B - -
Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") A4 G4 A4 G4 A4 G4 - -

Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3/4 Tray 3

2-drawer bank Tandem LCT
0BSpecifications
NA EU/AA NA EU/AA NA EU/AA NA EU/AA
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") B B B B B B - -
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) B B B B B B - -
Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) B B B B B B - -
Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) B B B B B B - -
Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) - - - - - - - -
C5 SEF (162 x 229) B B B B B B - -
C5 LEF (229 x 162) B B B B B B - -
C6 SEF (114 x 162) B B B B B B - -
C6LEF (162 x 114) B B B B B B - -
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) B B B B B B - -
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) B B B B B B - -
8K SEF (267 x 390) B B B B B B - -
16K SEF (195 x 267 ) B B B B B B - -
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) B B B B B B - -
12" x 18" SEF - - - - - - - -
11" x 15" SEF B B B B B B - -
10" x 14" SEF B B B B B B - -
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A3 B A3 B A3 B - -
Remarks:
A Auto detectable. Also can be selected with size button of initial setting.
B Can be selected with size button from initial setting.
C Select this size by setting the dial.
D Set dial to “*”, then select with size button from initial setting.
E Bypass setting
Printer window/Bypass/Standard size/Size select or select with the print bypass paper size/size button
from initial setting.

F Select with SP from preset paper sizes.
Cannot be selected from printer driver.
G Switches which size to set as auto detect with SP.
Example: The combination of A1-G1.
G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as B.
Combinations are only made from same region same tray.
Example: The combination of G1 and J1.
G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as E.
H Size fixed when shipping.
I Bypass setting
With bypass tray, after 1st sheet trailing edge goes through, auto detects size, then fixed to size
detected from the 2nd sheet.
J Bypass setting
Auto detect of Printer window/Bypass/Standard size/Select with size button.
K Select with SP from preset paper sizes.
Can be selected from printer driver.
- Not available
Side LCT and Bypass Tray

Size (W x L) [mm] Side LCT Bypass
NA EU/AA NA EU/AA
A3 SEF (297 x 420) - - E J
A4 SEF (210 x 297) - - E J
A4 LEF (297 x 210) K H E J
A5 SEF (148 x 210) - - E J
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) - - J J
A6 SEF (105 x 148) - - E J
B4 SEF (257 x 364) - - E J
B5 SEF (182 x 257) - - J J


NA EU/AA NA EU/AA
0BSpecifications
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) K K E J
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) - - E J
DLT SEF (11" x 17") - - J E
Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") - - G1 E
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") - - E E
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") - - J1 E
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") H K J E
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") - - E E
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") - - E E
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") - - E E
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") - - E E
Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") - - E E
Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") - - J E
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") - - J E
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) - - E*1 E*1
Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) - - E*1 E*1
Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) - - E*1 E*1
Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) - - E*1 E*1
C5 SEF (162 x 229) - - E*1 E*1
C5 LEF (229 x 162) - - E*1 E*1
C6 SEF (114 x 162) - - E*1 E*1
C6LEF (162 x 114) - - E*1 E*1
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) - - E*1 E*1
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) - - E*1 E*1
8K SEF (267 x 390) - - E E
16K SEF (195 x 267) - - E E


NA EU/AA NA EU/AA
16K LEF (267 x 195) - - E E
12" x 18" SEF - - J E
11" x 15" SEF - - E E
10" x 14" SEF - - E E
8.5” x 13.4” SEF - - E E
Remarks:
A Auto detectable. Also can be selected with size button of initial setting.
B Can be selected with size button from initial setting.
C Select this size by setting the dial.
D Set dial to “*”, then select with size button from initial setting.
E Bypass setting
Printer window/Bypass/Standard size/Size select or select with the print bypass paper size/size button
from initial setting.
F Select with SP from preset paper sizes.
Cannot be selected from printer driver.
G Switches which size to set as auto detect with SP.
Example: The combination of A1-G1.
G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as B.
Example: The combination of G1 and J1.
G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as E.
H Size fixed when shipping.
I Bypass setting
With bypass tray, after 1st sheet trailing edge goes through, auto detects size, then fixed to size
detected from the 2nd sheet.
J Bypass setting
Auto detect of Printer window/Bypass/Standard size/Select with size button.

K Select with SP from preset paper sizes.
0BSpecifications
Can be selected from printer driver.
- Not available
*1 Even the paper size is in the range or available sizes for duplex, envelopes cannot be done so.
1.2.2 PAPER EXIT

Remarks:
A Paper through, paper exit available.

B Will not guarantee, but paper can go through or exit.
- Not available.
*1 Out of the true up precision guarantee.

*2 Multi folding can be done up to 5 sheets.
*3 Envelopes can only go through each at a time.
*4 Except envelopes with triangle flap.
*5 Only one sheet can be half folded with saddle stitch mode.
Therefore, multi sheets/sets must be paginated and exit one at a time.
*6 Paper exit is available when using a folding option. If not using a folding option, paper exit is not
available.
*7 Plain paper can be delivered to the tray only when Z-fold or half fold is partially specified in the job.
*8 Paper exit is not available even when using a folding option.
Finisher SR3230
Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Staple Punch
Proof/shift shifting Single Stapling EU2 NA2 NA3
/Double amount SC4 Holes EU4
stitch Holes Holes
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A A A 50 A A A
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A A 50 A B -
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A A A 50 A A A
A5 SEF (148 x 210) A A - - A A -
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A A - - A B -
A6 SEF (105 x 148) A - - - - - -


stitch Holes Holes
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A A A 50 A A A
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A A A 50 A A -
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A A A 50 A A A
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) A B - - - - -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A A A 50 A A A
Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") A A A 50 A A
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x A A A 50 A A -

13")
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") A A A 50 A A
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A A A 50 A A A
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x A A A 50 A A -

14")
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") A A A 50 A A -
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") A A A 50 A A -
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x A A A 50 A A -

10")
Executive SEF (71/4" x A A A 50 A A -

1
10 /2")
Executive LEF (101/2" x A A A 50 A A A

71/4")
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") A A - - A A -
Com10 SEF (104.8 x - - - - - - -

241.3)
Com10 LEF (241.3 x - - - - - - -

104.8)
Monarch SEF (98.4 x - - - - - - -

190.5)
Monarch LEF (190.5 x - - - - - - -


0BSpecifications
stitch Holes Holes
98.4)
C5 SEF (162 x 229) - - - - - - -
C5 LEF (229 x 162) - - - - - - -
C6 SEF (114 x 162) - - - - - - -
C6LEF (162 x 114) - - - - - - -
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) - - - - - - -
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) - - - - - - -
8K SEF (267 x 390) A A A 50 A A A
16K SEF (195 x 267 ) A A A 50 A A -
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) A A A 50 A A A
12" x 18" SEF A A - - - - -
11" x 15" SEF A A A 50 A A A
10" x 14" SEF A A A 50 A A A
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A A A 50 A A -
Finisher SR3210
Proof Shift Shifting Single/Double Staple EU2 NA2 NA3
stitch amount SC4 Holes EU4
Holes Holes
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A A A A 30 A A A
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A A A 50 A B -
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A A A A 50 A A A
A5 SEF (148 x 210) A A A*1 - - A A -
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A A A - - A B -
A6 SEF (105 x 148) A B - - - - - -
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A A A A 30 A A A


Holes Holes
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A A A*1 A 50 A A -
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A A A A 50 A A A
B6 SEF (128 x 182 A A A*1 - - - - -

)
DLT SEF (11" x A A A A 30 A A A

17")
Legal SEF (81/2" x A A A A 30 A A -

14")
Foolscap SEF (81/2" A A A A 30 A A -

x 13")
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") A A A A 50 A A -
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A A A A 50 A A A
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" A A A A 30 A A -

x 14")
Folio SEF (81/4" x A A A A 30 A A -

13")
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") A A A A 30 A A -
Eng Quatro SEF (8" A A A A 50 A A -

x 10")
Executive SEF A A A A 50 A A -
1 1
(7 /4" x 10 /2")
Executive LEF A A A A 50 A A A
(101/2" x 71/4")
HLT SEF (51/2" x A A A*1 - - A A -

1
8 /2")
Com10 SEF (104.8 - - - - - - - -

x 241.3)
Com10 LEF (241.3 - - - - - - - -

x 104.8)


0BSpecifications
Holes Holes
Monarch SEF (98.4 - - - - - - - -

x 190.5)
Monarch LEF - - - - - - - -
(190.5 x 98.4)
C5 SEF (162 x 229) - - - - - - - -
C5 LEF (229 x 162) - - - - - - - -
C6 SEF (114 x 162) - - - - - - - -
C6LEF (162 x 114) - - - - - - - -
DL Env SEF (110 x - - - - - - - -

220)
DL Env LEF (220 x - - - - - - - -

110)
8K SEF (267 x 390) A A A A 30 A A A
16K SEF (195 x A A A A 50 A A -

267 )
16K LEF (267 x 195 A A A A 50 A A A

)
12" x 18" SEF - - - - - - - -
11" x 15" SEF A A A A 30 A A A
10" x 14" SEF A A A A 30 A A A
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A A A A 30 A A -
Bridge Unit BU3070

Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Bridge
Bridge upper paper exit Finisher Bridge
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A A
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A A


A5 SEF (148 x 210) A A
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A A
A6 SEF (105 x 148) A A
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A A
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A A
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A A
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) A A
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A A
Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") A A
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") A A
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") A A
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A A
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") A A
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") A A
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") A A
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") A A
Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") A A
Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") A A
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") A A
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) A*1, 3 -
Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) A*1, 3, 4 -
Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) A*1, 3 -
Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) A*1, 3, 4 -


0BSpecifications
C5 SEF (162 x 229) A*1, 3 -
C5 LEF (229 x 162) A*1, 3, 4 -
C6 SEF (114 x 162) A*1, 3 -
C6LEF (162 x 114) A*1, 3 ,4 -
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) A*1, 3 -
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) A*1, 3, 4 -
8K SEF (267 x 390) A A
16K SEF (195 x 267 ) A A
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) A A
12" x 18" SEF A A
11" x 15" SEF A A
10" x 14" SEF A A
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A A
Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3000

For the unit without a finisher
Size (W x L) [mm] Paper exit Fold-supporting paper size (for folding one sheet)
Z-fold Half fold Letter fold in/Letter fold out
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A A A A
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A A A
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A - - -
A5 SEF (148 x 210) A - - -
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A - - -
A6 SEF (105 x 148) A - - -
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A A A -
Z-fold Half fold Letter fold in/Letter fold out
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A - - -
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A - - -
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) A - - -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A A A A
1
Legal SEF (8 /2" x 14") A A A A
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") A - - -
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") A A A A
1
LT LEF (11" x 8 /2") A - - -
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") A - - -
1
Folio SEF (8 /4" x 13") A - - -
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") A - - -
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") A - - -
1 1
Executive SEF (7 /4" x 10 /2") A - - -
Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") A - - -
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") A - - -
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) B*1,3,4 - - -
Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) B*1,3,4 - - -
*1,3,4
Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) B - - -
Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) B*1,3,4 - - -
C5 SEF (162 x 229) B*1,3,4 - - -
*1,3,4
C5 LEF (229 x 162) B - - -
C6 SEF (114 x 162) B*1,3,4 - - -
C6LEF (162 x 114) B*1,3,4 - - -
*1,3,4
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) B - - -
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) B*1,3,4 - - -
8K SEF (267 x 390) A A A -
16K SEF (195 x 267 ) A - - -
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) A - - -
12" x 18" SEF - - - -
11" x 15" SEF A - - -
10" x 14" SEF A - - -
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A A A A
For the unit with a finisher

Fold tray Finisher Z-fold Half fold Letter fold in/Letter fold out
0BSpecifications
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A*6 A A A A
*6
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A A A A
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A*7 A - - -
A5 SEF (148 x 210) - A - - -
*7
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A A - - -
A6 SEF (105 x 148) - A - - -
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A*6 A A A -
B5 SEF (182 x 257) - A - - -
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A*7 A - - -
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) - A - - -
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A*6 A A A A
Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") A*6 A A A A
1
Foolscap SEF (8 /2" x 13") - A - - -
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") A*6 A A A A
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A*7 A - - -
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") - A - - -
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") - A - - -
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") - A - - -
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") - A - - -
Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") - A - - -
1 1
Executive LEF (10 /2" x 7 /4") - A - - -
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") - A - - -
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) B*1,3,4 - - - -
*1,3,4
Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) B - - - -
Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) B*1,3,4 - - - -
*1,3,4
Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) B - - - -
C5 SEF (162 x 229) B*1,3,4 - - - -
C5 LEF (229 x 162) B*1,3,4 - - - -
*1,3,4
C6 SEF (114 x 162) B - - - -
C6LEF (162 x 114) B*1,3,4 - - - -
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) B*1,3,4 - - - -
*1,3,4
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) B - - - -
8K SEF (267 x 390) A*6 A A A -
16K SEF (195 x 267 ) - A - - -
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) A*7 A - - -
12" x 18" SEF A*8 A - A -

Fold tray Finisher Z-fold Half fold Letter fold in/Letter fold out
11" x 15" SEF - A - - -
10" x 14" SEF - A - - -
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A*6 A A A A
Main unit tray, Mail Box CS3010

Size (W x L) [mm] Main unit tray Mail Box CS3010
Main unit tray Upper tray
A3 SEF (297 x 420) A A
A4 SEF (210 x 297) A A
A4 LEF (297 x 210) A A
A5 SEF (148 x 210) A A
A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A A
A6 SEF (105 x 148) A A*1
B4 SEF (257 x 364) A A
B5 SEF (182 x 257) A A
B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) A A
B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) A A*1
DLT SEF (11" x 17") A A
Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") A A
Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") A A
LT SEF (81/2" x 11") A A
LT LEF (11" x 81/2") A A
Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") A A
Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") A A
F/GL SEF (8" x 13") A A
Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") A A
Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") A A
Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") A A
HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") A A

Size (W x L) [mm] Main unit tray Mail Box CS3010

Main unit tray Upper tray
0BSpecifications
Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) A A*1, 3, 4
Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) A A*1, 3, 4
Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) A A*1, 3, 4
Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) A A*1, 3, 4
C5 SEF (162 x 229) A A*1, 3, 4
C5 LEF (229 x 162) A A*1, 3, 4
C6 SEF (114 x 162) A A*1, 3, 4
C6LEF (162 x 114) A A*1, 3, 4
DL Env SEF (110 x 220) A A*1, 3, 4
DL Env LEF (220 x 110) A A*1, 3, 4
8K SEF (267 x 390) A A
16K SEF (195 x 267 ) A A
16K LEF (267 x 195 ) A A
12" x 18" SEF - -
11" x 15" SEF A A
10" x 14" SEF A A
8.5” x 13.4” SEF A A

Software Accessories
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to
select which components to install.
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS

Operating System*1 Printer Language
PCL 5e PCL 6 PostScript 3
Windows Vista *2 Supported Supported Supported
Windows 7 *3 Supported Supported Supported
Windows 8.1 *4 Supported Supported Supported
Windows 10*5 Supported Supported Supported
Windows Server 2008 *6 Supported Supported Supported
OS X *9 Not available Not available Supported
*1 Windows operating system supports both versions (32/64 bit).

*2 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate/Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise/Microsoft Windows Vista
Business/Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium/Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
*3 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium/Microsoft Windows 7 Professional/Microsoft Windows 7
Ultimate/Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise
*4 Microsoft Windows 8.1/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro/Microsoft Windows 8.1 Enterprise
*5 Microsoft Windows 10 Home/Microsoft Windows 10 Pro/Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise/Microsoft
Windows 10 Education
*6 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise/Microsoft
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
*7 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Foundation/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Essentials/Microsoft
Windows Server 2012 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Foundation/Microsoft Windows
Server 2012 R2 Essentials/Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard
*8 Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Standard/Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Essentials/Microsoft
Windows Server 2016 Datacenter/Microsoft Windows Server 2016 MultiPoint Premium Server
*9 OS X 10.9 or later

Software Accessories
0BSpecifications
• Some applications may require installation of the PCL 5e printer driver. In this case, you can
install PCL 5e without having to install PCL 6.
• Adobe PostScript printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using a
printer language. PPD files allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.

Optional Equipment
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
1.4.1 FINISHER SR3210 (D3B8)

Item Specification
Paper size for the A3 SEF B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 JIS SEF,
finisher upper tray: A6 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF,
8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13
SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K
SEF/LEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Paper weight for the 52–169 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–90 lb. Index)
finisher upper tray:
Stack capacity for the 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller

finisher upper tray (80 50 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):
Paper size for the A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF, /LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 JIS
finisher shift tray: SEF, A6 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14
SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x
13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K
Paper weight for the 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
finisher shift tray:
Paper sizes that can be A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, B6 JIS SEF,
shifted when delivered 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x
to the finisher shift tray: 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SLF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF,
8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 8K SEF,

16K SEF/LEF, SRA4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Paper weight that can 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
be shifted when
delivered to the finisher
shift tray:
Stack capacity for the 1,000 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller

finisher shift tray (80 500 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
2
g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
Staple paper size: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15

Optional Equipment
Item Specification
SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
0BSpecifications
SEF/LEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10
SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Staple paper weight: • Stapling with staples: 52–105 g/m2 (14–28 lb. Bond)
• Staple-free stapling: 64–80 g/m2 (17–20 lb. Bond)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 216 g/m2 (80 lb. Cover) per set
as cover sheets.
Staple capacity (80 • Without Mixed Size:

g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 30 sheets:
A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13

LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8K SEF,
12 x 18 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF
50 sheets:
A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10

1/2 SEF/LEF, 16K SEF/LEF
• With Mixed Size:
22 sheets:
A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF/8 1/2 x 11SEF
Stack capacity after • Stapling with staples:

2
stapling (80 g/m , 20 lb. • 2–9 sheets: 100 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
Bond):
• 10–50 sheets: 100–20 sets (A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2 x 11LEF)
• 10–50 sheets: 50–10 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8 1/2 x 11SEF)
• 2–9 sheets: 50 sets (A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 11 x
17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
• 10–30 sheets: 50–10 sets (A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x
14 SEF)
• Staple-free stapling:
• 2–5 sheets: 100 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
• 2–5 sheets: 50 sets (A3 SEF, A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF, 11 x
17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
Staple position: 3 positions (Top, Bottom, 2 Staples)
Power consumption: 36 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)
Dimensions (W x D x • Tray is folded:

Optional Equipment
Item Specification
H): 575 x 620 x 960 mm (22.6 x 24.5 x 37.8 inches)
• Tray is extended:
658 x 620 x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.5 x 37.8 inches)
Weight: Approx. 34 kg (75.0 lb.)
1.4.2 FINISHER SR3230 (D3BA)

Item Specification
Paper size for the A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 JIS SEF,
finisher upper tray: A6 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF,
finisher upper tray:
Stack capacity for the 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller

finisher upper tray (80 50 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
2
g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
Paper size for the A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B6 JIS SEF,
finisher shift tray: A6 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF,
finisher shift tray:
Paper sizes that can be A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, B6 JIS SEF,
shifted when delivered 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x
to the finisher shift tray: 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x
10 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF,
SRA4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Paper weight that can 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
be shifted when
delivered to the finisher
shift tray:
Stack capacity for the • 3,000 sheets: A4 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF

Optional Equipment
Item Specification
finisher shift tray (80 • 1,500 sheets: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 12 x 18 SEF,
0BSpecifications
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF, SRA3LEF
• 500 sheets: A5 SEF
• 100 sheets: A5 LEF, B6 JIS SEF, A6 SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF
Staple paper size: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 11 x 15
SEF, 10 x 14LEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2
SEF/LEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10
SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF, custom size
Staple paper weight: 52–105 g/m2 (14–28 lb. Bond)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 256 g/m2 (140 lb. Index) per
set as cover sheets.
Staple capacity (80 • Without Mixed Size:

2
g/m , 20 lb. Bond): 50 sheets:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x

14 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7
1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x
14 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5 LEF
• With Mixed Size:
50 sheets:
A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF
• With Z-fold:
3 sheets (80 - 105g/m2)
6 sheets (52 - 80g/m2)
• Combination of with and without Z-fold
For this combination, one sheet to be Z-folded is converted to 8 sheets (52

- 80 g/m2) or 13 sheets (80 - 105 g/m2) without Z-fold, and the limit value
for no folding is used as the upper limit.
Stack capacity after Without Mixed Size:

2
stapling (80 g/m , 20 lb. • 2–19 sheets: 150 sets (A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
Bond):
• 20–50 sheets: 150–46 sets (A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF)
• 2–14 sheets: 100 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF/SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
• 15–50 sheets: 100–23 sets (A4 SEF, B5 JIS SEF/SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 ;SEF)
• 2–14 sheets: 100 sets (other size paper)

Optional Equipment
Item Specification
• 15–50 sheets: 100–23 sets (other size paper)
With Mixed Size:
• 2–50 sheets: 23 sets (A3 SEF/A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/B5 JIS SEF, 11 x 17
SEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF)
Staple position: 4 positions (Top, Top Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)
Dimensions (W x D x 657 x 613 x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.2 x 37.8 inches)

H):
Weight: • Approx. 34 kg (75.0 lb.) (without punch unit)
• Approx. 39 kg (86.0 lb.) (with punch unit)
Paper Specifications
Size Normal Thin Norm Norm Med Thk 1 Thk 2 Thk 3 Thk 4
(52- 1 (60- 2 (75- Thk (160- (170- (221- (257-
59) 74) 81) (82- 169) 220) 256) 300)
105)
A3 SEF
B4 SEF
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 SEF
B5 LEF
A5 SEF
A5 LEF
B6 SEF
A6 SEF
13”×19.2” SEF -
12”×18” SEF -
12.6”×17.7”(SRA3) -
SEF

Optional Equipment
11”×17” SEF -
0BSpecifications
8 1/2”×14” SEF -
8 1/2”×11” SEF -
81/2”×11” LEF -
51/2”×81/2” SEF -
51/2”×81/2” LEF -
Here is the key for the symbols.
: Corner stapling, paper shift, proof tray, punching possible

: Shift tray, proof tray, punching possible
: Shift tray, punching possible
: Shift tray, proof tray possible
: Shift tray possible
-:Incompatible
Color Translucent Label SA Postcard Transparencies
A3 SEF - - -
B4 SEF - -
A4 SEF
A4 LEF
B5 SEF - -
B5 LEF - -
A5 SEF - - - - -
A5 LEF - - - - -
B6 SEF - - - - -
B6 LEF - - - - -
12”×18” SEF *1 - - - -
11”×17” SEF - - -
8 1/2”×14” SEF - - -
8 1/2”×11” SEF - - -
81/2”×11” LEF - - -

Optional Equipment
51/2”×81/2” SEF - - - - -
51/2”×81/2” LEF - - - - -
*1 No corner stapling
Here is the key for the symbols.
: Corner stapling, paper shift, proof tray, punching possible

: Shift tray, proof tray, punching possible
: Shift tray, punching possible
-: Incompatible
1.4.3 MAIL BOX CS3010 (M481)

Item Specification
Number of trays: 4 trays
Paper size: A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, 11×17 SEF, 81/2×14
SEF, 81/2×13 SEF, 81/2×11 LEF/SEF, 81/4×14 SEF, 81/4×13 SEF, 8×13 SEF, 8×10
SEF, 71/4×10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 51/2×81/2 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 11×15 SEF,
10×14 SEF, SRA4 SEF, 81/2×132/5 SEF
Com10 SEF/LEF, Monarch SEF/LEF, C5 SEF/LEF, C6 SEF/LEF, DL Env SEF/LEF
Note: B6 SEF, A6SEF, Com10 SEF/LEF, Monarch SEF/LEF, C5 SEF/LEF, C6

SEF/LEF, and DL Env SEF/LEF paper can be loaded, although their stackability is
not ensured.
Paper weight: 52-169 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–90 lb. Index)
Paper capacity (80 125 sheets per tray

g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):
Power Power is supplied from the main unit.

requirements:
Power 27.2 W
consumption:
Dimensions (W × D 555 × 544 × 506 mm (21.9 × 21.5 × 20.0 inches) excluding the stabilizer
× H):
Weight: Approx. 13 kg (28.7 lb.) excluding the stabilizer
Approx. 20.5 kg including the stabilizer

Optional Equipment
1.4.4 BRIDGE UNIT BU3070 (D685)
0BSpecifications
Item Specification
Stack capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): • 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller
• 125 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger
Dimensions (W x D x H): 412 x 466 x 143 mm (16.3 x 18.4 x 5.7 inches)
1.4.5 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE M25 (D3CJ)

Item Specification
Paper size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 LEF, B4 SEF, B5 LEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2
× 11 SEF/LEF, 51/2 × 81/2 LEF, 12 × 18 SEF

requirements:
Power consumption: 15 W
Dimensions (W × D 169 × 539 × 203 mm (6.7 × 21.3 × 8.0 inches)

× H):
1.4.6 PUNCH UNIT PU3050 NA/EU/SC (D717)

Item Specification
2
Paper 52–256 g/m (14 lb. Bond–140 lb. Index)
weight
Paper Punch unit Paper size

size type
2 & 4 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 5 1/2 x 8
type: 2 holes 1/2, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8 x 13, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 8 1/4 x 14, 8 x 10,
11 x 15, 10 x 14
2 & 4 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 16K
type: 2 holes
2 & 4 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 x 17, 11 x 15, 8K

type: 4 holes
2 & 4 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 16K

Optional Equipment
Item Specification
type: 4 holes
4 holes type: 4 SEF: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 5 1/2 x 8
holes 1/2, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8 x 13, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 8 1/4 x 14, 8 x 10,
11 x 15, 10 x 14
4 holes type: 4 LEF: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 16K
holes
2 & 3 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 7
type: 2 holes 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8 x 13, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 8 1/4 x 14, 8 x 10, 11 x
15, 10 x 14
type: 2 holes
2 & 3 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 x 17, 11 x 15, 10 x 14, 8K

type: 3 holes
type: 3 holes
1.4.7 PUNCH UNIT PU3060 NA/EU/SC (D706)

Item Specification
Paper 52–256 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–140 lb. Index)
weight
Paper Punch unit Paper size

size type
2 & 4 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x 81/2, 71/4
type: 2 holes x 101/2, 8 x 13, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 81/4 x 14, 8 x 10, 11 x 15, 10 x
14, custom size
2 & 4 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 81/2 x 11, 71/4 x 101/2, 16K, custom size
type: 2 holes
2 & 4 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 x 17, 11 x 15, 8K, custom size
type: 4 holes
2 & 4 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 x 11,71/4 x 101/2, 16K, custom size
type: 4 holes
4 holes type: 4 SEF: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x 81/2, 71/4
holes x 101/2, 8 x 13, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 81/4 x 14, 8 x 10, 11 x 15, 10 x

Optional Equipment
Item Specification
14, custom size
0BSpecifications
4 holes type: 4 LEF: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 81/2 x 11, 71/4 x 101/2, 16K, custom size
holes
2 & 3 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, A5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x 81/2, 71/4 x
type: 2 holes 101/2, 8 x 13, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 8K, 16K, 81/4 x 14, 8 x 10, 11 x 15, 10 x 14,
custom size
2 & 3 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 x 11, 71/4 x 101/2, 16K, custom size
type: 2 holes
2 & 3 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 x 17, 11 x 15, 10 x 14, 8K, custom size
type: 3 holes
2 & 3 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 x 11,71/4 x 101/2, 16K, custom size
type: 3 holes
1.4.8 INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT FD3000 (M482)

Item Specification
Fold type Half Fold, Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in, Z-fold
Paper size: • With Z-fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 11 SEF, 8K

SEF, 81/2 × 132/5 SEF
• With Half Fold:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 11 SEF, 8K

SEF, 12 × 18 SEF*, SRA3 SEF*, 81/2 × 132/5SEF
*12×18 SEF and SRA3 SEF papers can be delivered only if the finisher is
connected beyond the internal multi-fold unit.
• With Letter Fold-out, and Letter Fold-in:
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, 11 × 17 SEF, 81/2 × 14 SEF, 81/2 × 11 SEF, 81/2 × 132/5 SEF
Paper weight: 64 - 105 g/m2 (17 - 28 lb. Bond)

requirements:
Power consumption: 40 W
Dimensions (W × D • Without Finisher:

× H): • When the tray is stowed:

Optional Equipment
Item Specification
612 × 555 × 184 mm (9.5 × 21.9 × 7.3 inches)
• When the tray is extended:
714 × 555 × 242 mm (28.2 × 21.9 × 9.6 inches)
• With Finisher:
420 × 555 × 152 mm (16.6 × 21.9 × 6.0 inches)
1.4.9 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3240 (M494)

Item Specification
Paper size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS SEF/LEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x
14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF/LEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13
SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 SEF/LEF, 8K SEF, 16K SEF/LEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x
15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 SEF, C5 Env SEF, SRA3 SEF, custom size
Paper weight: 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)
Paper capacity (80 550 sheets x 2 trays

2
g/m , 20 lb. Bond):
Power 21 W (Power is supplied from the main unit.)

consumption:
Dimensions (W x 587 x 685 x 247 mm (23.2 x 27.0 x 9.8 inches)

D x H):
1.4.10 LCIT PB 3260 (M496)

Item Specification
Paper size: A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF
Paper capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 1,000 sheets x 2 trays
Weight: Approx. 22 kg (44.1 lb.) Except the bundled items.

Optional Equipment
1.4.11 LCIT RT 3030 (D696)
0BSpecifications
Item Specification
Paper size: A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF
Paper capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 1,500 sheets

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Preventive Maintenance
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS
1BPreventive
Maintenance
User maintenance ("U or S" column: U)
User maintenance items are supplied as the maintenance kits. User maintenance is performed by
replacing these supplies.
Service maintenance ("U or S" column: S)
Service maintenance items are supplied as service parts. The table shows the expected yield figures for
this item. The target is expressed as an average, since the technician can replace the parts based on
continual monitoring of the printing condition.
The yield figures are based on the following conditions:
• A4 (LT) long-edge feed

• 5% image coverage ratio
• 3 prints/job
• Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect, U: Maintenance by User, S: Maintenance
by Service
PCDU
Item U or Maintenance PM Remarks

S Cycle Parts
PCDU U R Displayed on the panel.
160K Replace the unit.
Waste toner bottle U R Displayed on the panel.
160K Replace the waste toner bottle.
Developer S R Before replacing, set SP3-701-

024 to "1".
160K
Development roller S C/I
160K
Development filter S R Before replacing, set SP3-701-

025 to "1".

S Cycle Parts
160K
Development case S C/I
160K
Development case entrance S C/I Remove the paper dust.

seal
160K
As needed
Development side seal S R
160K
Doctor blade S C/I Remove adhering developer.
160K
Development Mixing Auger S R Before replacing, set SP3-701-

Bearings 320K 028 to "1".
Charge roller S R Before replacing, set SP3-701-

018 to "1".
160K
Cleaning roller S R Before replacing, set SP3-701-

019 to "1".
160K
Cleaning blade S R Before replacing, set SP3-701-

009 to "1".
160K
Cleaning blade side seal S C/I
160K
Cleaning entrance seal S C/I
160K
OPC drum S R Before replacing, set SP3-701-

021 to "1".
160K
Pick-off pawls S R Before replacing, set SP3-701-

022 to "1".
160K
Quenching Lamp S C/I
160K

Transfer

S Cycle Parts
Transfer roller U R Displayed on the panel.

unit 160K Replace the unit.
1BPreventive
Maintenance
Transfer exit S C/I
guide
160K
ID sensor S C/I Perform SP3-011-001 after cleaning with a

blower brush.
160K
As needed
Fusing

S Cycle Parts
Fusing unit U R Displayed on the panel
320K Replace the unit.
Replacement upper limit: 350K
Heating sleeve belt S R Before replacing, set SP3-701-116 to "1".

unit 320K Replacement upper limit: 350K
Fusing entrance S C/I Remove toner deposits

guide plate As needed
Fusing exit guide S C/I Remove toner deposits

plate As needed
Stripper plate S C/I Remove toner deposits
As needed
Pressure roller S R Before replacing, set SP3-701-118 to "1".
320K Replacement upper limit: 350K
Pressure roller S R Lubricate with FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE:

bearings 320K 100G.
Before replacing, set SP3-701-119 to "1".
Replacement upper limit: 350K
Fusing thermopile S C/I Clean the lens part with a blower brush
320K and a cotton swab.


S Cycle Parts
As needed
Pressure roller gears S C/I/L Replace if worn out.
As needed Lubricate with Grease Barrierta – S552R.
Pressure roller idler S C/I/L Replace if worn out.

gears As needed Lubricate with Grease Barrierta – S552R.
Fusing entrance S C/I Clean the sensor with a blower brush.

sensor 160K
As needed
Fusing exit sensor S C/I Clean the sensor with a blower brush.
160K
As needed
Paper Feed
Perform cleaning when the frequency of sensor failure, double feeding, or jam increases.
Item U or Maintenance Cycle PM Remarks

S Parts
Registration roller S When jams increased. Damp cloth
Remove paper dust.
Registration sensor S When sensor failure Clean sensors with a

occurred. blower brush.
Remove paper dust.
Paper dust collection unit S When the paper dust Clean with a blower
collection unit is full. brush.
Remove paper dust.
Paper feed roller 1/2 S When jams and double-feeds Damp cloth
increased. Remove paper dust.
Pick-up roller 1/2 S When jams and double-feeds Damp cloth

Separation roller 1/2 S When jams and double-feeds Damp cloth

Bypass paper feed roller S When jams and double-feeds Damp cloth


S Parts
Bypass pick-up roller S When jams and double-feeds Damp cloth

1BPreventive
Maintenance
Bypass transport roller S When jams and double-feeds Damp cloth
Vertical transport roller 1/2 S When jams increased. Damp cloth
Remove paper dust.
Vertical transport sensor 1/2 S When sensor failure Clean sensors with a
Remove paper dust.
Paper feed sensor 1/2 S When sensor failure Clean sensors with a
Remove paper dust.
Tray bottom plate (trays 1/2, S When jams increased. Damp cloth
bypass tray) Remove paper dust.
Duplex

S Parts
Duplex transport roller S When jams increased. Damp cloth

1/2 Remove paper dust.
Duplex exit sensor S When sensor failure Clean sensors with a blower
occurred. brush.
Remove paper dust.
Paper Exit

S Parts
Paper exit roller S When jams increased. Damp cloth
Remove paper dust.


S Parts
Reverse roller S When jams increased. Damp cloth
Remove paper dust.
Paper exit sensor S When sensor failure Clean sensors with a blower
occurred. brush.
Remove paper dust.
Reverse sensor S When sensor failure Clean sensors with a blower

occurred. brush.
Remove paper dust.
Fusing exit S When sensor failure Clean sensors with a blower

sensor occurred. brush.
Remove paper dust.
2.1.2 OPTIONAL PERIPHERAL DEVICES

Paper Feed Unit PB3240
Item Cycle Remarks

Paper feed roller C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
As needed
Pick-up roller C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
As needed
Separation roller C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
As needed
Relay rollers C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
As needed
Bottom plate pad C Remove dust with a dry cloth.
As needed
Sensors C Remove dust with a dry cloth.
As needed
LCIT PB3260/RT3030
Item Cycle Remarks
Transport roller C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.

Item Cycle Remarks

As needed
Friction pad C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
As needed
Transport sensor C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
1BPreventive
Maintenance
As needed
Paper feed sensor C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
As needed
Feed roller C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
As needed
Friction roller C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
As needed
Friction roller C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
As needed
Bridge Unit BU3070
Item Cycle Remarks
Paper exit roller C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
As needed
Transport roller 1 C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
As needed
As needed
As needed
Internal Multi-fold Unit FD3000
Item Cycle Remarks
Paper transport C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
rollers As
needed
Paper exit rollers C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.

Item Cycle Remarks

As
needed
Driven rollers C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
As
needed
Fold rollers C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
As
needed
Trays C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
As
needed
Paper sensor C Remove paper dust with a blower brush or the corner of a triangular-
As folded cloth.
needed
Bearings C Lubricate with Silicone Grease G-501 when noise occurs.
As
needed
Finisher SR3210
Item Cycle Remarks
Drive rollers C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
As
needed
Driven rollers C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
As
needed
Quenching C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.

brush As
needed
As
needed
Sensors C Clean with a blower brush.

Item Cycle Remarks

As
needed
Jogger fences C Lubricate with Silicone Grease G-501 when abnormal noise is generated or
As abnormal operation occurs.
needed
1BPreventive
Maintenance
Stapler R Replace when the staple counter in the logging data reached 500k.
500K Staple a few times to test after replacement.
Finisher SR3230
Item Cycle Remarks
Drive rollers C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
As
needed
Driven rollers C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
As
needed
Quenching C Wipe with a cloth dampened with ethyl alcohol.
brush As
needed
As
needed
Sensors C Clean with a blower brush.
As
needed
Stapler R Replace when the staple counter in the logging data reached 500k.
(Corner) Staple a few times to test after replacement.
Punch R Replace the unit when the punch reaches the end of life, i.e., when the
number of punched sheets exceeds one million.
Punch dust C Discard paper dust when the hopper is detected to be full.
As
needed

Mail Box CS3010
Item Cycle Remarks
Paper transport C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
rollers As
needed
Paper exit rollers C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
As
needed
Driven rollers C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
As
needed
Trays C Wipe with a damp cloth, then a dry cloth.
As
needed
Paper sensor C Remove paper dust with a blower brush or the corner of a triangular-
As folded cloth.
needed
As
needed
2.1.3 OTHER YIELD PARTS

Some of the parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total print volume made
by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine's targeted lifetime if the machine is
used under the target usage conditions. So, these parts are categorized not as PM parts but as yield
parts (EM parts). The parts with “R” in this table are yield parts.
The yield figures are based on the following conditions:
• A4 (LT) long-edge feed

• 5% image coverage ratio
• 3 prints/job
• Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect, U: Maintenance by User, S: Maintenance
by Service

Mainframe
Item U or S Maintenance Cycle Remarks
Development Unit S R
900k
1BPreventive
Maintenance

ENGINE SP MODE TABLES
Engine SP1-XXX (Feed)
3. ENGINE SP MODE TABLES
3.1 ENGINE SP1-XXX (FEED)
SP Large Category Small Category ENG or Min to
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
No. CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Plain ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
002 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Mid-thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
003 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thick 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
004 Registration
005 Registration
006 Registration
007 Registration
008 Registration
009 Registration
010 Registration
011 Registration
012 Registration
013 Registration
014 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
015 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Plain ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]


016 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Mid-thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
017 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thick 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
018 Registration
019 Registration
020 Registration
021 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
022 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Plain ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
023 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Mid-thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
024 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thick 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
025 Registration
026 Registration
027 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thin:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
028 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Plain:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
029 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
030 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray1: Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
031 Registration
032 Registration
033 Registration


034 Registration
035 Registration
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
036 Registration
037 Registration
038 Registration
039 Registration
040 Registration
041 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thin:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
042 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Plain:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
043 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
044 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge By-pass: Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
045 Registration
046 Registration
047 Registration
048 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thin:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
049 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Plain:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
050 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
051 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Duplex: Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]


052 Registration
053 Registration
054 Registration
055 Registration
056 Registration
057 Registration
058 Registration
059 Registration
060 Registration
061 Registration
062 Registration
063 Registration
064 Registration
065 Registration
066 Registration
067 Registration
068 Registration
069 Registration


070 Registration
071 Registration
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
072 Registration
073 Registration
074 Registration
075 Registration
076 Registration
077 Registration
078 Registration
079 Registration
080 Registration
081 Registration
082 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thin ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
083 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Plain ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
084 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Mid-thick ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
085 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thick 1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
086 Registration
087 Registration


088 Registration
089 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thin:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
090 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Plain:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
091 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
092 Registration
1-001- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT): Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
093 Registration
094 Registration
095 Registration
096 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side By-pass Tray ENG* [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side Paper Tray 1 ENG* [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
002 Registration
003 Registration
004 Registration
005 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side Duplex ENG* [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
006 Registration
1-002- Side-to-Side Large Capacity Tray ENG* [ -4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm]
007 Registration
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Thin ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Plain ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
002
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray 1: Mid-thick ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]


003
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Thick1 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -2 / 0.1mm]
004
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thin ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
005
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Plain ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
006
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray 2/3/4/5/LCT: Mid-thick ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
007
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -2 / 0.1mm]
008
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Thin ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
009
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Plain ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
010
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Mid-thick ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
011
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass:Thick1 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -1 / 0.1mm]
012
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Thin ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
013
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Plain ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
014
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex: Mid-thick ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
015
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Thick1 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -1 / 0.1mm]
016
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Thin:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
017
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Plain:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
018
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray 1: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
019
1-003- Paper Buckle Paper Tray1: Thick1:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -2 / 0.1mm]
020
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thin:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]


021
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Plain:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
022
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Mid:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
023
1-003- Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -2 / 0.1mm]
024
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Thin:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
025
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Plain:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
026
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
027
1-003- Paper Buckle By-pass:Thick1:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -1 / 0.1mm]
028
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Thin:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
029
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Plain:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
030
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex: Mid-thick:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / 0 / 0.1mm]
031
1-003- Paper Buckle Duplex:Thick1:1200 ENG [ -4 to 5 / -1 / 0.1mm]
032
1-007- By-Pass Size Switch LT SEF/LG SEF ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Detection 0: 8.5x11SEF
1: 8.5x14SEF
1-007- By-Pass Size By-Pass Jam Detection Set ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Detection 0: Normal
1: Simple Detect
1-009- Initial Operation Registration Gear Backlash Cut ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-010- Solenoid Initial Control ON/OFF 0:OFF/1:ON ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 movement 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Paper Tray1: Thin ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


001 Separate Setting 0: OFF
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Paper Tray1: Plain ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Paper Tray1: Thick ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Paper LCT: Thin ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Paper LCT: Plain ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1: ON
1-011- Pickup SOL Paper LCT: Thick ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1: ON
1-012- Operation Setting Paper Exit Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 0: OFF
1: ON
1-012- Operation Setting ExitLineSpdSetting: AfterSpdDown ENG [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
002 0: Standard Speed
1: 150mm/s
2: 128mm/s
3: 75mm/s
1-090- Leading Edge Tray1 ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
001 Registration User
1-090- Leading Edge By-pass Tray ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
1-090- Leading Edge Duplex ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
1-090- Leading Edge Tray5(LCT) ENG [ -9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1mm]
1-101- Flicker Control Flicker Control ENG* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
030
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain1:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 144 /
003 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain2:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 154 /
007 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thin:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 130 /


011 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. M-thick:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 154 /
015 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thick1:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 142 /
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
019 1deg]
023 1deg]
027 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special1:BW:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 149 /
031 1deg]
035 1deg]
039 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Envelop:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 132 /
041 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special1:BW:Center:Middle Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 138 /
053 1deg]
057 1deg]
061 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain1:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 109 /
103 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain2:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 109 /
107 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. M-thick:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 114 /
111 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thick1:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 118 /
115 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special1:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 109 /
119 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special2:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 118 /
123 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain1:Glossy:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 109 /


125 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain2:Glossy:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 109 /
127 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. M-thick:Glossy:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 114 /
129 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. OHP:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 157 /
131 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Envelop:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 133 /
133 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thin:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 109 /
137 1deg]
141 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Postcard:Center ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 128 /
143 1deg]
147 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain1:BW:Center:Mid.High Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 128 /
151 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Plain2:BW:Center:Mid.High Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 133 /
153 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Thin:BW:Center:Mid.High Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 118 /
155 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. M-thick:BW:Center:Mid.High Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 140 /
157 1deg]
1-105- Print Target Temp. Special1:BW:Center:Mid.High Speed ENG* [ 100 to 180 / 128 /
159 1deg]
161 1deg]
163 1deg]
1-106- Fusing Temp. Heat Center ENG [ -10 to 250 / 0 /
001 Display 1deg]
1-106- Fusing Temp. Heat End ENG [ -10 to 250 / 0 /
002 Display 1deg]
1-106- Fusing Temp. Press Center ENG [ -10 to 250 / 0 /


003 Display 1deg]
1-106- Fusing Temp. Press End ENG [ -10 to 250 / 0 /
004 Display 1deg]
1-113- Curl Correction Execute Pattern ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
001 0: OFF
1: ON(No Decurl)
2: ON
1-133- Voltage Detection Voltage Detection ENG* [ 0 to 350 / * / 0.1V]
001 *NA: 117
*EU/AA/CHN/KOR:
227
*TWN: 107
1-133- Voltage Detection Max ENG* [ 0 to 350 / 0 / 0.1V]
002
1-133- Voltage Detection Min ENG* [ 0 to 350 / 350 /
003 0.1V]
1-133- Voltage Detection Last ENG* [ 0 to 350 / 0 / 0.1V]
004
1-133- Voltage Detection SC ENG* [ 0 to 350 / 0 / 0.1V]
005
1-133- Voltage Detection Threshold Voltage ENG* [ 0 to 255 / * / 1V]
006 *NA: 96
*EU/AA/CHN/KOR:
178
*TWN: 88
1-135- Inrush Control Inrush Control ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
1-141- Fusing SC Error SC Number ENG* [ 0 to 99999 / 0 / 1]
001 Time Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Htg Roller:Ctr Det1 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
101 Time Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Htg Roller:End Det1 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
102 Time Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Press Roller:Ctr Det1 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]
103 Time Info
1-141- Fusing SC Error Press Roller:End Det1 ENG* [ -5 to 300 / 0 / 1deg]


104 Time Info
151 Time Info
152 Time Info
153 Time Info
154 Time Info
201 Time Info
202 Time Info
203 Time Info
204 Time Info
1-142- Fusing Jam SC Display ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Detection 0: OFF
1: ON
1-152- Fusing Nip Band Execute ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Check
1-153- Abnormal Noise Unit: Execute ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Confirmation
1-153- Abnormal Noise No Unit: Execute ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Confirmation
1-153- Abnormal Noise Operation Line Speed ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
003 Confirmation 0: Std Speed
1: Mid. High Speed
2: Middle Speed
3: Low Speed
1-301- Paper Thick Error Tray1 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Detect
002 Detect


003 Detect
004 Detect
1-301- Paper Thick Error LCT ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
005 Detect
1-301- Paper Thick Error Bypass Tray ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
006 Detect
1-306- Error Shiht Number Paper Thick Error Shiht Number of ENG* [ 1 to 999 / 1 / 1]
001 of Sheets Sheets
1-308- Paper Thikness Tray1 ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1]
001 Error Times
002 Error Times
003 Error Times
004 Error Times
1-308- Paper Thikness LCT ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1]
005 Error Times
1-308- Paper Thikness Bypass Tray ENG* [ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1]
006 Error Times
1-314- Paper Size Tray1 ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
001
002
003
004
1-314- Paper Size LCT ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
005
1-314- Paper Size Bypass Tray ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
006
1-316- Paper Thick Start Tray1 ENG* [ -50 to 50 / 0 /
001 Time 1msec]
1-316- Paper Thick Start Tray2 ENG* [ -50 to 50 / 0 /


002 Time 1msec]
1-316- Paper Thick Start Tray3 ENG* [ -50 to 50 / -20 /
003 Time 1msec]
1-316- Paper Thick Start Tray4 ENG* [ -50 to 50 / -20 /
004 Time 1msec]
1-316- Paper Thick Start LCT ENG* [ -50 to 50 / -20 /
005 Time 1msec]
1-316- Paper Thick Start Bypass Tray ENG* [ -50 to 50 / -20 /
006 Time 1msec]
1-907- Paper Feed Timing By-pass Size Decision Timing ENG* [ 1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
029 Adj.
1-907- Paper Feed Timing ExitLineSpdUp EndPos:StdSpd ENG [ -30 to 15 / 0 / 1mm]
030 Adj.
1-907- Paper Feed Timing ExitLineSpdUp EndPos:MidSpd ENG [ -30 to 15 / 0 / 1mm]
031 Adj.
1-907- Paper Feed Timing ExitLineSpdUp EndPos:LowSpd ENG [ -30 to 15 / 0 / 1mm]
032 Adj.
1-907- Paper Feed Timing ExitLineSpdUp ENG [ -30 to 15 / 0 / 1mm]
033 Adj. EndPos:LowSpd:1200:Plain
1-907- Paper Feed Timing ExitLineSpdUp EndPos:MidHighSpd ENG [ -30 to 15 / 0 / 1mm]
034 Adj.
1-907- Paper Feed Timing ENG [ 0 to 40 / 0 / 1mm]
109 Adj.
1-955- Fan Control Fusing Exit Fan High Temp Op Sw ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 40 /
008 Temp 0.1deg]
1-955- Fan ON/OFF Switch Front Development ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
021 Set
1-955- Fan ON/OFF Switch Toner Bottle ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
022 Set
1-955- Fan Control Fusing Exit Fan Low Speed Op ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 30 / 1%]
031 DUTY
1-955- Fan Control Fusing Exit Fan Middle Speed Op ENG* [ 0 to 100 / * / 1%]
032 DUTY *NA/TWN/KOR: 60
*EU/AA/CHN: 65
1-955- Fan Control Fusing Exit Fan Full Speed Op DUTY ENG* [ 0 to 100 / * / 1%]
033 *NA/TWN/KOR: 60


*EU/AA/CHN: 80
1-955- Fan Control Extra Fan Op Decision time ENG* [ 0 to 10000 / 480 /
041 1sec]
1-955- Fan Control Fusing Exit Fan Extra Cooling Time ENG* [ 0 to 900 / * / 1sec]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
042 Set *NA/TWN/KOR: 0
*EU/AA/CHN: 120
1-955- Fan Control Paper Exit Cooling Extra Cooling ENG* [ 0 to 900 / * / 1sec]
043 Time Set *NA/TWN/KOR: 0
*EU/AA/CHN: 120
1-955- Fan Control Condensation Prevent Fan Op ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
051 ON/OFF Setting
1-955- Fan Control Condensation Prevent Fan Op ENG* [ 0 to 30 / 3 / 0.1deg]
052 Execution Temp
1-955- Fan Control Front Development Fan Extra Op ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 40 /
061 Decision Temp 0.1deg]
1-955- Fan Control Front Development Fan Extra Op ENG* [ 0 to 900 / 120 /
062 Time Set 1sec]

Engine SP2-XXX (Drum)
3.2 ENGINE SP2-XXX (DRUM)
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
2-101- Reistration Main Dot ENG* [ -512 to 511 / 0 / 1dot]
001 Correction
2-102- LSU Adjustment Main Mag. ENG* [ -1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
001
2-103- Erase Margin Lead Edge Width ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1mm]
001 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Trail. Edge Width ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1mm]
002 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Left ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
003 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Right ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1mm]
004 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. L Size ENG [ -4 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
006 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. M Size ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
007 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. S Size ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
008 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Left Edge ENG [ 0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
009 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Right Edge ENG [ 0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
010 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick ENG [ -4 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
011 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
012 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
013 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Left Edge:Thick ENG [ 0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
014 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Right Edge:Thick ENG [ 0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1mm]
015 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. L Size:Thin ENG [ -4 to 4 / 1 / 0.1mm]
016 Adjustment


CTL
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. M Size:Thin ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm]
017 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Duplex Trail. S Size:Thin ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm]
018 Adjustment
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
2-103- Erase Margin Lead Edge Width:Thin ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1mm]
019 Adjustment
2-103- Erase Margin Trail. Edge Width:Thin ENG [ 0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1mm]
020 Adjustment
2-109- Test Pattern Pattern Selection ENG [ 0 to 24 / 0 / 1]
003 0: None
1: 1dot Vertical
2: 2dot Vertical
3: 1dot Horizontal Line
4: 2dot Horizontal Line
5: Grid Vert
6: Grid Horizontal
7: Grid Pattern Small
8: Grid Pattern Large
9: Argyle Pattern Small
10: Argyle P:L
11: 1dot Ind. Pttrn
12: 2dot Ind. Pttrn
13: 4dot Ind. Pttrn
14: Trimming Area
15: HoundstoothH
16: Houndstooth V
17: Black Band H
18: Black Band V
19: Checker Flag
Pattern
20: Grayscale V
21: Grayscale H
22: 2 Beam Density
Pttrn
23: Full Dot Pattern
24: All White Pattern
2-109- Test Pattern Density ENG [ 0 to 15 / 15 / 1]

CTL
006
2-110- LD Driver Error ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF /
001 0x0000 / 1]
2-110- LD Driver Memory Transfer ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005
2-152- Shad. Correct Setting Strandard Speed ENG* [ 50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
001
2-152- Shad. Correct Setting Middle Speed ENG* [ 50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
005
2-152- Shad. Correct Setting Low Speed ENG* [ 50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
009
2-160- Vertical Line Width 600dpi:Indet ENG* [ 10 to 15 / 15 / 1]
001
2-160- Vertical Line Width 1200dpi:Indet ENG* [ 10 to 15 / 15 / 1]
002
2-242- TS Operation Env. Log Clear ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
100 Log
2-250- Interval DownMode ON/OFF ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 0: OFF
1: ON
2-400- Paper Transfer Roller Detatch timing in waiting ENG* [ 0 to 600 / 240 / 1min]
002 Settings
2-906- Tailing Control Shift Range ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0.1mm]
004
2-906- Tailing Control Number of Sheets ENG* [ 0 to 10 / 0 / 1sheet]
005
2-970- Interrupt Transfer CL Low-temperature, low-humidity ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004
2-970- Interrupt Transfer CL Moderate temperature and ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 humidity
2-970- Interrupt Transfer CL High-temperature, high-humidity ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
006
2-980- Drum Idling Idle Time: Low-temperature, ENG* [ 0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
001 low-humidity
2-980- Drum Idling Idle Time: Moderate ENG* [ 0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
002 temperature and humidity


CTL
2-980- Drum Idling Idle Time: High-temperature, ENG* [ 0 to 60 / 0 / 1sec]
003 high-humidity
2-990- Print Duty Control Forced CPM Down Thresh: No ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1page]
004 Duty Control:MM
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
2-990- Print Duty Control Forced CPM Down Thresh: Duty ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 16 / 1page]
007 Control
2-990- Print Duty Control Down-time_BW: Duty Control ENG* [ 0 to 240000 / 25000 /
008 10msec]
2-990- Print Duty Control Execution Temp. Threshold ENG* [ 20 to 70 / 42 / 0.1deg]
011
101 Duty Control: LL
102 Duty Control: ML
103 Duty Control: HH

Engine SP3-XXX (Process)
3.3 ENGINE SP3-XXX (PROCESS)

CTL
3-011- Manual ProCon :Exe Normal ProCon ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
001
3-012- ProCon OK? History:Last 2 ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
3-030- Init TD Sensor :Exe Execute ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
3-030- InitTDSensor :Exe Init Temp: K ENG* [ -100 to 100 / 23 / 0.1deg]
071
3-030- InitTDSensor :Exe Init Rel Hum: K ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 50 / 0.1%RH]
081
3-030- InitTDSensor :Exe Init Abs Hum: K ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 10.3 /
091 0.01g/m3]
3-030- InitTDSensor :Exe Init Coverage: K ENG* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
101 1%]
3-030- InitTDSensor :Exe Total DC: Dev: K ENG* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
111 1%]


CTL
3-031- TD Sens Init OK? K ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
001
3-050- Force Tnr Supply :Exe Execute ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
3-050- Force Tnr Supply :Exe Supply Quantity ENG* [ 0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.1wt%]
021
3-072- T Sensor: Check Execute Check ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
3-073- T Sensor Measurement mu count ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
001 Value:
3-074- ID.Sens Check :Exe All Sensors ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
3-075- ID.Sens Chk :Disp Vsg reg ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
001
3-075- ID.Sens Chk :Disp Voffset ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
011
3-100- Tonner End Detection: Set ON/OFF ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 0: Enable
1: Disable
3-100- Tonner End Detection: Set TE Detection ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
003 0: Page & Vt
1: Vt Only
2: Page Counter Only
3-101- Toner Status :Disp K ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1]
001
3-133- TE Detect :Set Set Sheets ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 90 / 1sheets]
001
3-133- TE Detect :Set Page Cnt:K ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1sheets]
011
3-200- TnrDensity K ENG* [ 0 to 25.5 / 0 / 0.1wt%]
001
3-201- TnrDensity Upper TC ENG* [ 1 to 15 / 5.5 / 0.1wt%]
001
3-201- TnrDensity Lower TC ENG* [ 1 to 15 / 2.7 / 0.1wt%]
002
3-210- TD.Sens:Vt :Disp Current ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]


CTL
001
3-230- Vtref :Disp/Set Current ENG* [ 0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.01V]
001
3-250- ImgArea :Disp ImgArea ENG* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1cm2]
001
3-251- DotCoverage :Disp DotCoverage ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01%]
001
3-252- AccumImgArea :Disp ImgArea ENG* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1cm^2]
001
3-260- Temperature/Humidity: Temperature ENG [ -5 to 45 / 0 / 0.1deg]
001 Display
3-260- Temperature/Humidity: Relative Humidity ENG [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1%RH]
002 Display
3-260- Temperature/Humidity: Absolute Humidity ENG [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01g/m3]
003 Display
3-310- ID.Sens :Voffset Voffset reg ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
001
3-310- ID.Sens :Voffset Voffset TM(Front) ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
021
3-320- Vsg Adj: Execute P Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
3-320- Vsg Adj: Execute Vsg Error Counter ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 0 / 1times]
011
3-321- Adjusted Vsg Vsg reg ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
001
3-322- Adjusted Ifsg Ifsg ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 0.001mA]
001
3-322- Adjusted Ifsg Ifsg Min ENG* [ 0 to 50 / 27 / 0.001mA]
011
3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
001
3-323- Vsg Adj OK? Latest 2 ENG* [ 0 to 9 / 0 / 1]
002
003


CTL
004
005
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
006
007
008
009
010
3-331- ID.Sens Coef :Set Vsp Coef ENG* [ 0.5 to 1.5 / 1 / 0.001]
061
3-331- ID.Sens Coef :Set Vsdp Coef ENG* [ 0.5 to 1.5 / 1 / 0.001]
071
3-400- Toner Supply Type K ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1]
001 0: FIXED
2: PID
3-411- Toner Supply Qty K ENG [ 0 to 40000 / 0 / 0.1mg]
001
3-440- Fixed Supply Mode Fixed Rate ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 10 / 1%]
001
3-500- ImgQltyAdj :ON/OFF ProCon ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002 0: OFF
1: ON
3-510- ImgQltyAdj :ExeFlag Init Toner Replenish: K ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
031
3-520- ImgQltyAdj :Interval During Job ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 30 / 1pages]
001
3-520- ImgQltyAdj :Interval During Stand-by ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 5 / 1minute]
002
3-529- ProCon Interval Control Page Cnt:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1sheets]
006 :Set
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Non-use Time Setting ENG* [ 0 to 1440 / 360 /


CTL
001 1minute]
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Temperature Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 10 / 1deg]
002
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Relative Humidity Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 50 / 1%RH]
003
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Absolute Humidity Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 6 / 1g/m3]
004
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Interval:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
005 1sheets]
3-530- PowerON ProCon :Set Page Cnt:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 0 / 1sheets]
007
3-531- Non-useTime Procon :Set Non-use Time Setting ENG* [ 0 to 1440 / 360 /
001 1minute]
3-531- Non-useTime Procon :Set Temperature Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 10 / 1deg]
002
3-531- Non-useTime Procon :Set Relative Humidity Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 50 / 1%RH]
003
3-531- Non-useTime Procon :Set Absolute Humidity Range ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 6 / 1g/m3]
004
3-531- Non-useTime Procon :Set Maximum Execution ENG* [ 0 to 99 / 10 / 1times]
005 Number
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Interval:Set:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
001 1sheets]
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Interval:Disp:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
002 1sheets]
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Corr(Short):BW ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01]
003
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Corr(Mid):BW ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01]
004
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Interval:Set:BW(Mid- ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 200 /
005 High) 1sheets]
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Interval:Disp:BW(Mid- ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 200 /
006 High) 1sheets]
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Corr(Short):BW(Mid- ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01]
007 High)
3-533- Interrupt ProCon :Set Corr(Mid):BW(Mid-High) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01]


CTL
008
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Interval:Set:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
001 1sheets]
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Interval:Disp:BW ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
002 1sheets]
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Corr(Short):BW ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01]
003
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Corr(Mid):BW ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01]
004
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Interval:Set:BW(Mid- ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
005 High) 1sheets]
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Interval:Disp:BW(Mid- ENG* [ 0 to 5000 / 100 /
006 High) 1sheets]
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Corr(Short):BW(Mid- ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01]
007 High)
3-534- JobEnd ProCon :Set Corr(Mid):BW(Mid-High) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01]
008
3-551- Select Recycle/Waste Select Status ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
010
3-600- Select ProCon Potential Control ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001 0: OFF
1: ON
3-611- Chrg DC Control Std Speed ENG* [ 300 to 2000 / 790 / 1-V]
001
3-612- Dev DC Control Std Speed ENG* [ 200 to 800 / 590 / 1-V]
001
3-623- LD Power :Set UpperLimit ENG* [ 100 to 200 / 132 / 1%]
101
3-623- LD Power :Set LowerLimit ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 67 / 1%]
111
3-630- Vsp :Disp/Set Current ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
001
3-630- Dev gamma :Disp/Set Target:K ENG* [ 0.5 to 2.55 / 0.95 /
011 0.01mg/cm2/-kV]
3-630- Dev gamma :Disp/Set TnrDensity ENG* [ 0 to 25.5 / 0 / 0.1wt%]
061


CTL
3-631- Vsdp :Disp Current ENG* [ 0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V]
001
3-700- New Unit Detection ON/OFF Setting ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
001
3-701- Manual New Unit Set #PCU(residual life) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
3-701- Manual New Unit Set #PCU ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Cleaning Blade ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
009
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Charge Roller ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
018
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
019
3-701- Manual New Unit Set OPC ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
021
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Separation Pawl ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
022
3-701- Manual New Unit Set #Development Unit ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
023
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Development ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
024
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Development Filter ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
025
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Bearing:Development ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
028 Screw
3-701- Manual New Unit Set #PTR Unit ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
108
3-701- Manual New Unit Set #Fusing Unit ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
115
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Fusing Belt ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
116
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Pressure Roller ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
118
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Pressure Roller Bearings ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
119


CTL
3-701- Manual New Unit Set Waste Toner bottle ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
142
3-710- mu Concentration Control: mu sensor resolution ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
011 Set
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
3-710- mu Concentration Control: Ini mu count offset ENG* [ 0 to 10000 / 5912 / 1]
012 Set
3-800- Waste Toner Full Threshold : Remainder ENG* [ 1 to 255 / 15 / 1day]
014 Detection days
3-903- Adjust Toner Remains Bottle Motor Time ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
001 1msec]
3-903- Adjust Toner Remains Toner Level ENG* [ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1%]
002
3-903- Adjust Toner Remains Reset-Bottle Motor Time ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
004
3-903- Adjust Toner Remains 0:OFF 1:ON ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005

Engine SP4-XXX (LoCPP edge level)
3.4 ENGINE SP4-XXX (LOCPP EDGE LEVEL)
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or CTL Min to Max/Init./Step]

4-201-005 LoCPP edge level:K 600dpi 1bit edge1 ENG* [ 0 to 15 / 11 / 1]
4-201-006 LoCPP edge level:K 600dpi 1bit edge23 ENG* [ 0 to 15 / 11 / 1]
4-201-011 LoCPP edge lv:K 1200dpi1bit edge12 ENG* [ 0 to 15 / 12 / 1]
4-201-012 LoCPP edge lv:K 1200dpi1bit edge34 ENG* [ 0 to 15 / 12 / 1]

Engine SP5-XXX (Mode)
3.5 ENGINE SP5-XXX (MODE)

CTL
5-126- Set F-size Document ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
001 0: 8 1/2x13
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
1: 8 1/4x13
2: 8x13
5-131- Paper Size Type ENG* [ 0 to 2 / * / 1]
001 Selection 0: JP
1: NA
2: EU
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
2
5-135- LG_Oficio Change ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
5-181- Size Adjust TRAY 1: 1 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / * / 1]
001 0: A4 LEF
1: 8 1/2x11 LEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
002 0: A3
1: 11x17
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
003 0: B4
1: 8 1/2x14 SEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
004 0: B5 LEF
1: 7 1/4x10 1/2 LEF


CTL
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
005 0: A4 LEF
1: 8 1/2x11 LEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
006 0: A3
1: 11x17
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
007 0: B4
1: 8 1/2x14 SEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
008 0: B5 LEF
1: 7 1/4x10 1/2 LEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
5-181- Size Adjust TRAY 3/T-LCT: 1 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / * / 1]
009 0: A4LEF
1: LTLEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
010 0: A3
1: DLT
*NA: 1

CTL
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
011 0: B4
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
1: LG
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
012 0: B5LEF
1: ExeLEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
013 0: 12.6x17.7
1: 12x18
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
014 0: A4LEF
1: LTLEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
015 0: A3
1: DLT
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
016 0: B4
1: LG
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:

CTL
0
017 0: B5LEF
1: ExeLEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
018 0: 12.6x17.7
1: 12x18
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
019 0: A4LEF
1: LTLEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
020 0: A3
1: DLT
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
021 0: B4
1: LG
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
022 0: B5LEF
1: ExeLEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0

CTL
023 0: 12.6x17.7
1: 12x18
*NA: 1
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
5-181- Size Adjust LCT ENG* [ 0 to 2 / * / 1]
024 0: A4LEF
1: LTLEF
2: B5LEF
*NA: 1
*EU/AA/CHN/TWN/KOR:
0
5-186- RK4 ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
5-801- Memory Clear Engine ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002
5-805- Anti-Condensation 0:OFF / 1:ON ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Heater
5-810- SC Reset Fusing SC Reset ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001
5-810- SC Reset Hard High Temp. ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Detection
5-811- MachineSerial Display ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
002
5-811- MachineSerial Set BCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004
5-811- Machine Serial Update Latest ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
021 Date
5-811- Machine Serial Update Previous ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
022 Date
5-811- Machine Serial Previous ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
023
5-811- Machine Serial Update Latest(BCU) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
024 Date
5-811- Machine Serial Update Previous(BCU) ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


CTL
025 Date
5-811- Machine Serial Previous(BCU) ENG* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
026
5-894- External Mech Count Mech Counter Switch ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
001 Setting Setting
5-900- Engine Log Upload Pattern ENG* [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
001
5-900- Engine Log Upload Trigger ENG* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
002
5-930- MeterClick Ch. MeterClick Ch. ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 0: OFF
1: ON
5-930- MeterClick Ch. PCU ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
010 0: OFF
1: ON
5-930- MeterClick Ch. Paper Transfer Roller ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
014 Unit 0: OFF
1: ON
5-930- MeterClick Ch. Fusing Unit ENG* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
016 0: OFF
1: ON

Engine SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
3.6 ENGINE SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only
SP Large Category Small Category ENG Min to

No. or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
001
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 3-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
002
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Europe: 4-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
003
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NEU: 4-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
004
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 2-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
005
6- Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN: 1-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
100- 0.5mm]
006
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]
001
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 3-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]
002
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Europe: 4-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]
003
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NEU: 4-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]
004
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 2-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]


CTL
005
6- Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN:1-1Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
101- 0.4mm]
006
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
001
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
002
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
003
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
004
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
005
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
006
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
007
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
008
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
009
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
010
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /


CTL
102- 0.2mm]
011
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
102- 0.2mm]
012
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
013
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
014
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
015
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
016
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
017
6- SkewCorrectBuckleAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
102- 0.2mm]
018
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103- 0: BuckleAdj On
001 1: BuckleAdj Off
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

CTL
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


CTL
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6- SkewCorrectCtrlSW:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
001
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
002
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
003
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
004
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
005
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
006
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
007
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
008
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
009
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
010

CTL
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
011
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
012
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
013
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
014
6- ShiftTrayJogPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
104- 0.5mm]
015
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
001
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
002
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
003
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
004
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
005
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
006
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]


CTL
007
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
008
6- ShftTJogRtrctAngAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
105- 5deg]
009
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
001 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
002 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
003 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
004 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
005 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
006 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
007 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
008 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
009 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On

CTL
010 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
011 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
012 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
013 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
014 1: Jogging Off
6- Use Paper Jogger: 2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106- 0: Jogging On
015 1: Jogging Off
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
001
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
002
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
003
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
004
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
005
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
006
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /


CTL
107- 0.5mm]
007
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
107- 0.5mm]
008
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
009
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
010
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
011
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
012
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
013
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
014
6- JogPosAdj(CrnrStplr):2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
107- 0.5mm]
015
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- (DFU) 0.5mm]
001
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- (DFU) 0.5mm]
002
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- (DFU) 0.5mm]
003
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /

CTL
108- (DFU) 0.5mm]
004
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- (DFU) 0.5mm]
005
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- (DFU) 0.5mm]
006
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- (DFU) 0.5mm]
007
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- (DFU) 0.5mm]
008
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- (DFU) 0.5mm]
009
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- (DFU) 0.5mm]
010
6- JogPosAdj(BookStplr):2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
108- (DFU) 0.5mm]
011
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
001
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
002
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
003
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
004


CTL
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
005
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
006
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
007
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
008
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
009
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
010
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
011
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
012
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
013
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
014
6- CrnrStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
109- 1times]
015
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- (DFU) 1times]
001

CTL
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- (DFU) 1times]
002
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- (DFU) 1times]
003
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- (DFU) 1times]
004
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- (DFU) 1times]
005
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- (DFU) 1times]
006
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- (DFU) 1times]
007
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- (DFU) 1times]
008
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- (DFU) 1times]
009
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- (DFU) 1times]
010
6- BookStplrJogTimeAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 /
110- (DFU) 1times]
011
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
001
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]


CTL
002
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
003
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
004
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
005
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
006
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
007
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
008
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
009
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
010
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
011
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
012
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
013
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]

CTL
014
6- Staple Position Adj: 2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
111- 0.5mm]
015
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- (DFU) 0.2mm]
001
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- (DFU) 0.2mm]
002
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- (DFU) 0.2mm]
003
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- (DFU) 0.2mm]
004
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- (DFU) 0.2mm]
005
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- (DFU) 0.2mm]
006
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- (DFU) 0.2mm]
007
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- (DFU) 0.2mm]
008
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -1.8 to 1.8 / 0 /
112- (DFU) 0.2mm]
009
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
112- (DFU) 0.2mm]
010
6- BookletStaplerPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -1.8 to 1.8 / 0 /


CTL
112- (DFU) 0.2mm]
011
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
001
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
002
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
003
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
004
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
005
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
006
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
007
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
008
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
009
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
010
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
011
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /

CTL
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
012
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
013
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
014
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A3 SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
015
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
016
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
017
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
018
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B4 SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
019
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
020
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
021
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
022
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN A4 SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
023


CTL
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
024
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
025
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
026
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN B5 SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
027
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
028
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
029
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
030
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN DLT SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
031
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
032
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
033
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
034
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LG SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
035

CTL
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
036
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
037
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
038
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Oficio SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
039
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
040
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
041
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
042
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN LT SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
043
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18"(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
044
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
045
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
046
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 12"x18"(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]


CTL
047
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
048
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
049
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
050
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN 8K SEF(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
051
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
052
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
053
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
054
6- BookletFolderPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Other(16-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
113- (DFU) 0.2mm]
055
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN (DFU) A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
001 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN (DFU) B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
002 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN (DFU) A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
003 1: Middle Speed

CTL
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN (DFU) B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
004 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN (DFU) DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
005 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN (DFU) LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
006 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN (DFU) Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
007 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN (DFU) LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
008 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN (DFU) 12"x18" ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
009 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN (DFU) 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
010 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Fold Speed Adj.: 2K/3K FIN (DFU) Other ENG [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
114- 0: Std Speed
011 1: Middle Speed
2: Low Speed
6- Finisher Free Run: 2K/3K FIN Free Run 5 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
115-
005

CTL
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
001
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
002
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
003
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 LEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
004
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
005
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 LEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
006
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
007
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
008
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
009
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
010
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN LT LEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
011
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
012

CTL
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K SEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
013
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K LEF ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
014
6- CrnrStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ -1 to 0 / 0 /
116- 1sheets]
015
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- (DFU) 1sheets]
001
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- (DFU) 1sheets]
002
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- (DFU) 1sheets]
003
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- (DFU) 1sheets]
004
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- (DFU) 1sheets]
005
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- (DFU) 1sheets]
006
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- (DFU) 1sheets]
007
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- (DFU) 1sheets]
008
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN 12"x18" ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- (DFU) 1sheets]


CTL
009
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -7 to 0 / 0 /
117- (DFU) 1sheets]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
010
6- BookStplrMxPrstkShAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ -2 to 0 / 0 /
117- (DFU) 1sheets]
011
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
001
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
002
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
003
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 LEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
004
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
005
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 LEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
006
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
007
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
008
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
009
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]

CTL
010
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LT LEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
011
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
012
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K SEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
013
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K LEF ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
014
6- CrnrStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ -16 to 16 / 0 /
118- 2mm]
015
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- (DFU) 2mm]
001
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- (DFU) 2mm]
002
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- (DFU) 2mm]
003
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- (DFU) 2mm]
004
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- (DFU) 2mm]
005
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- (DFU) 2mm]
006
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /


CTL
119- (DFU) 2mm]
007
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
119- (DFU) 2mm]
008
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 12"x18" ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- (DFU) 2mm]
009
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- (DFU) 2mm]
010
6- BookStplrPrstkOffsAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ -30 to 30 / 0 /
119- (DFU) 2mm]
011
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
001
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
002
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
003
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 LEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
004
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
005
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
006
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
007
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /

CTL
120- 10mm]
008
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
009
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
010
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN LT LEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
011
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
012
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K SEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
013
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN 16K LEF ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
014
6- CrnStpPosExFeedAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ 0 to 30 / 0 /
120- 10mm]
015
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. Jogger Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
121- 0.5mm]
001
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. Folding Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -1.4 to 1.4 / 0 /
121- 0.2mm]
002
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- (DFU) 1mm]
001
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- (DFU) 1mm]
002


CTL
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- (DFU) 1mm]
003
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- (DFU) 1mm]
004
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- (DFU) 1mm]
005
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- (DFU) 1mm]
006
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- (DFU) 1mm]
007
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- (DFU) 1mm]
008
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN 12"x18" ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- (DFU) 1mm]
009
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- (DFU) 1mm]
010
6- BkFoldJogSolMovAmtAdj:2K/3KFIN Other ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
122- (DFU) 1mm]
011
6- Use Paper Guide(Big Size) All Size ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
125- 0: Guide On
001 1: Guide Off
6- Use Paper Guide(Small Size) All Size ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
126- 0: Guide On
001 1: Guide Off
6- Paper Guide PossAdj:2K/3K FIN All Size ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
127- 1mm]
001

CTL
6- Paper Guide RetraAdj:2K/3K FIN All Size ENG [ -50 to 50 / 0 /
128- 5mm]
001
6- Paper Guide AceptAdj:2K/3K FIN All Size ENG [ -50 to 50 / 0 /
129- 5msec]
001
6- Staple Position Adj: 1K FIN Staple Stapler ENG [ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 /
140- 0.5mm]
001
6- Staple Position Adj: 1K FIN Stapleless Stapler ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
140- 0.3mm]
002
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- (DFU) 0.2mm]
001
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- (DFU) 0.2mm]
002
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- (DFU) 0.2mm]
003
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- (DFU) 0.2mm]
004
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- (DFU) 0.2mm]
005
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- (DFU) 0.2mm]
006
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- (DFU) 0.2mm]
007
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- (DFU) 0.2mm]


CTL
008
6- Booklet Stapler Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
141- (DFU) 0.2mm]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
009
6- Sub-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
142- 0.5mm]
001
6- Sub-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NA: 3-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
142- 0.5mm]
002
6- Sub-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN Europe: 4-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
142- 0.5mm]
003
6- Sub-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NEU: 4-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
142- 0.5mm]
004
6- Sub-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NA: 2-Hole ENG [ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 /
142- 0.5mm]
005
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
001
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
002
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
003
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
004
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
005
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]

CTL
006
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
007
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
008
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
009
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
010
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
011
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
012
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
013
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
014
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
015
6- Jogger Pos Adj:1K FIN Other ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
143- 0.5mm]
016
6- Main-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
144- 0.4mm]
001
6- Main-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NA: 3-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /


CTL
144- 0.4mm]
002
6- Main-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN Europe: 4-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
144- 0.4mm]
003
6- Main-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NEU: 4-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
144- 0.4mm]
004
6- Main-scan Punch Pos Adj:1K FIN NA: 2-Hole ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
144- 0.4mm]
005
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
001
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
002
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
003
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
004
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
005
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
006
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
007
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
008
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /

CTL
145- 0.2mm]
009
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
010
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
011
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN LT LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
012
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
013
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
014
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
015
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
016
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
017
6- Skew Correct Buckle Adj:1K FIN Other ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
145- 0.2mm]
018
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
001
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
002


CTL
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
003
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN A4 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
004
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
005
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN B5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
006
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN A5 LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
007
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
008
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
009
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
010
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
011
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN LT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
012
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN HLT LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
013
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
014

CTL
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
015
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN 16K SEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
016
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN 16K LEF ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
017
6- Skew Correct Ctrl SW:1K FIN Other ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
146-
018
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
001
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
002
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
003
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
004
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
005
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
006
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
007
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]


CTL
008
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18" ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
009
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
010
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
011
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A3 SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
012
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
013
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
014
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B4 SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
015
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
016
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
017
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN A4 SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
018
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
019
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]

CTL
020
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN B5 SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
021
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
022
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
023
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN DLT SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
024
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
025
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
026
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LG SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
027
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
028
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
029
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN Oficio SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
030
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
031
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /


CTL
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
032
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN LT SEF(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
033
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18"(1-5) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
034
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18"(6-10) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
035
6- Booklet Folder Pos Adj:1K FIN 12"x18"(11-over) ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
147- (DFU) 0.2mm]
036
6- Fold Times Adj: 1K FIN (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 29 / 0 /
148- 1sec]
001
6- Last Paper Pos Time Adj:1K FIN ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 /
149- 1times]
001
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
001
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
002
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
003
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN A4 LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
004
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
005
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN B5 LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0

CTL
150- / 10msec]
006
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
007
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
008
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
009
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
010
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN LT LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
011
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN 12"x18" ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
012
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
013
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN 16K SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
014
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN 16K LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
015
6- PositioningStrtTimingAdj:1KFIN Other ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
150- / 10msec]
016
6- PosTimeAdj(LstPr2ndTime):1KFIN ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
151- / 10msec]
001


CTL
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN A3 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
001
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN B4 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
002
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN A4 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
003
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN A4 LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
004
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN B5 SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
005
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN B5 LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
006
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN DLT SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
007
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN LG SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
008
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN Oficio SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
009
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN LT SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
010
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN LT LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
011
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN 12"x18" ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
012

CTL
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN 8K SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
013
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN 16K SEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
014
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN 16K LEF ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
015
6- PosTiAdj(ExcLstPr3rdTi):1KFIN Other ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
152- / 10msec]
016
6- Pos Time Adj By Sheet: 1K FIN 1 - 10 Sheets ENG [ -100 to 100 / 0
154- / 10msec]
001
154- / 10msec]
002
154- / 10msec]
003
154- / 10msec]
004
154- / 10msec]
005
6- Paper Guide Poss Adj: 1K FIN ENG [ -10 to 10 / 0 /
155- 1mm]
001
6- Paper Guide Retra Adj: 1K FIN ENG [ -50 to 50 / 0 /
156- 5mm]
001
6- Paper Guide Acept Adj: 1K FIN ENG [ -50 to 50 / 0 /
157- 5msec]


CTL
001
6- Bind Speed Setting: 1K FIN_HY ENG [ 1 to 3 / 3 / 2]
158- 1: Bind Speed
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
001 1(Low)
3: Bind Speed
3(High)
6- Bind Times: 1K FIN_HY ENG* [ 1 to 2 / 2 / 1]
159- 1: Once
001 2: Twice
6- Finisher Free Run: 1K FIN Maintenance Part Positioning ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
160- Free Run
004
6- Use Paper Guide Big Size ENG [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
163- 0: Guide On
001 1: Guide Off
6- Use Paper Guide Small Size ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
163- 0: Guide On
002 1: Guide Off
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1KShtFIN Jogger Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -1.5 to 1.5 / 0 /
164- 0.5mm]
001
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1KShtFIN Stapling Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
164- 0.5mm]
002
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1KShtFIN HY Stapling Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -2.1 to 2.1 / 0 /
164- (HY) 0.3mm]
003
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1KShtFIN HY Stapleless Stapling Pos. ENG [ -2.1 to 2.1 / 0 /
164- Factory Adj. 0.3mm]
004
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1KShtFIN Folding Pos. Factory Adj. ENG [ -2 to 2 / 0 /
164- 0.1mm]
005
6- Free Run Print Post Free Run1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
202-
001

CTL
202-
002
202-
003
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ProcessSpeed:Plain:Low ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
001
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ProcessSpeed:Plain:MidHigh ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
002
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ProcessSpeed:Plain:Std ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
003
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ProcessSpeed:Mid-thick:Low ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
004
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ProcessSpeed:Mid- ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- thick:MidHigh 0.1%]
005
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ProcessSpeed:Mid-thick:Std ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
006
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ProcessSpeed:Thick 1:Low ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
007
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ProcessSpeed:Thick 1:Mid ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
008
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ExitSpeed:Plain:Low ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
009
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ExitSpeed:Plain:MidHigh ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]


CTL
010
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ExitSpeed:Plain:Std ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
011
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ExitSpeed:Mid-thick:Low ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
012
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ExitSpeed:Mid-thick:MidHigh ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
013
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ExitSpeed:Mid-thick:Std ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
014
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ExitSpeed:Thick 1:Low ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
015
6- MotorSpeedAdj. PrintPost ExitSpeed:Thick 1:Mid ENG [ -5 to 5 / 0 /
203- 0.1%]
016
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
001
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st B4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
002
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
003
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
004
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
005
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]

CTL
006
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st 8K SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
007
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
008
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 1st Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
301- 0.1mm]
009
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
001
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd B4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
002
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
003
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
004
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
005
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
006
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd 8K SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
007
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
302- 0.2mm]
008
6- Z-Fold:FineAdj 2nd Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /


CTL
302- 0.2mm]
009
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
304- 0.1mm]
001
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld B4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
002
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
003
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
004
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
005
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
006
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 8K SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
007
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld 12"x18" ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
008
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
009
6- Equal 1/2:FineAdjFld Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
304- 0.1mm]
010
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
001
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /

CTL
307- 0.1mm]
002
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
003
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
004
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
005
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
006
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 1st Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
307- 0.1mm]
007
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
001
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
002
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
003
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
004
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
005
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
006


CTL
6- Equal 3rds:Fine Adj 2nd Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
308- 0.1mm]
007
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
001
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
002
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
003
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
004
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
005
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
006
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 1st Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
311- 0.1mm]
007
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd A3 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
001
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd DLT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
002
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd A4 SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
003
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd LG SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
004

CTL
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd LT SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
005
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd Oficio SEF ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
006
6- 3rds 1 Flap:Fine Adj 2nd Other ENG [ -4 to 4 / 0 /
312- 0.1mm]
007
6- Registration Buckle Adjust A3 SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
001
6- Registration Buckle Adjust B4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
002
6- Registration Buckle Adjust A4 SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
003
6- Registration Buckle Adjust DLT SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
004
6- Registration Buckle Adjust LG SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
005
6- Registration Buckle Adjust LT SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
006
6- Registration Buckle Adjust 8K SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
007
6- Registration Buckle Adjust 12"x18" ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
008
6- Registration Buckle Adjust Oficio SEF ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]


CTL
009
6- Registration Buckle Adjust Other ENG [ 0 to 5 / 2 /
313- 0.5mm]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
010
6- Registration Buckle Select ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
314- 0: Mode1
001 1: Mode2
6- Set Number of Creasing ENG [ 0 to 4 / 1 /
315- 1times]
001 0: -1
1: 0
2: 1
3: 2
4: 3
6- Silent Mode Select ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
316- 0: OFF
001 1: ON
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Plain: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
001 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Plain: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 2 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
002 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Plain: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 1 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
003 1(Low)

CTL
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thick: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
004 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thick: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
005 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thick: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 1 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
006 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thin: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 4 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
007 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed

CTL
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thin: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 4 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
008 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Not Fold Exit Speed Thin: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 1 / 1]
317- 1: Exit Speed
009 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Z-Fold Exit Speed Plain: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
318- 1: Exit Speed
001 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Z-Fold Exit Speed Plain: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
318- 1: Exit Speed
002 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Z-Fold Exit Speed Plain: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
318- 1: Exit Speed
003 1(Low)

CTL
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Equal 1/2 Exit Speed Plain: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
319- 1: Exit Speed
001 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Equal 1/2 Exit Speed Plain: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
319- 1: Exit Speed
002 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Equal 1/2 Exit Speed Plain: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
319- 1: Exit Speed
003 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Equal 3rds Exit Speed Plain: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
320- 1: Exit Speed
001 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed

CTL
5(High)
6- Equal 3rds Exit Speed Plain: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
320- 1: Exit Speed
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
002 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- Equal 3rds Exit Speed Plain: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
320- 1: Exit Speed
003 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- 3rds 1 Flap Exit Fold Plain: Large-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
321- 1: Exit Speed
001 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- 3rds 1 Flap Exit Fold Plain: Middle-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
321- 1: Exit Speed
002 1(Low)
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- 3rds 1 Flap Exit Fold Plain: Small-Size ENG [ 1 to 5 / 3 / 1]
321- 1: Exit Speed
003 1(Low)

CTL
2: Exit Speed 2
3: Exit Speed 3
4: Exit Speed 4
5: Exit Speed
5(High)
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 1st Fold Pos. Factory Setting ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
324- 0.1mm]
001
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. 2nd Fold Pos. Factory Setting ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
324- 0.1mm]
002
6- NV Adj. Data Mod. Crease Pos. Factory Setting ENG [ -3 to 3 / 0 /
324- 0.1mm]
003
6- Folder. Free Run Free Run1(Not Fold) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
325-
001
6- Folder. Free Run Free Run2(Z-Fold) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
325-
002
6- Folder. Free Run Free Run3(Equal 1/2) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
325-
003
6- Folder. Free Run Free Run4(Equal 3rds) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
325-
004
6- Folder. Free Run Free Run5(3rds 1 Flap ) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
325-
005
6- Z-Fold Full Detact Adjust Large Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
326- 0.2v]
001
6- Z-Fold Full Detact Adjust Middle Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
326- 0.2v]
002


CTL
6- Z-Fold Full Detact Adjust Small Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
326- 0.2v]
003
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6- Equal 1/2 Full Detact Adjust Large Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
327- 0.2v]
001
6- Equal 1/2 Full Detact Adjust Middle Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
327- 0.2v]
002
6- Equal 1/2 Full Detact Adjust Small Size ENG [ -1 to 1 / 0 /
327- 0.2v]
003

Engine SP7-XXX (Data Log)
3.7 ENGINE SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)

CTL
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages #PCU ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
002 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
009 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Charge Roller ENG* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
018 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
019 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages OPC ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
021 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Stripper ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
022 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
023 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Developer ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
024 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
025 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Bearing:Development ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
028 Screw 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Paper Transfer Roller ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
108 Unit 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
115 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
116 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
118 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
119 1page]
7-621- PM Counter Display:Pages Waste Toner bottle ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
142 1mg]
7-622- PM Counter Reset #PCU ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002


CTL
7-622- PM Counter Reset Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
009
7-622- PM Counter Reset Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
018
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
7-622- PM Counter Reset Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
019
7-622- PM Counter Reset OPC ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
021
7-622- PM Counter Reset Stripper ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
022
7-622- PM Counter Reset #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
023
7-622- PM Counter Reset Developer ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
024
7-622- PM Counter Reset Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
025
7-622- PM Counter Reset Bearing:Development ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
028 Screw
7-622- PM Counter Reset Paper Transfer Roller ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
108 Unit
7-622- PM Counter Reset Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
115
7-622- PM Counter Reset Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
116
7-622- PM Counter Reset Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
118
7-622- PM Counter Reset Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
119
7-622- PM Counter Reset SCS ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
250
7-628- PM Counter Reset SCS ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002
7-801- ROM No. Engine ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-801- ROM No. Finisher ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
007


CTL
7-801- ROM No. PTU ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
009
7-801- ROM No. LCT ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
010
7-801- ROM No. MailBox ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
011
7-801- ROM No. PTU2 ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
019
7-801- ROM No. Folder ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
025
7-801- Firmware Version Engine ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
102
7-801- Firmware Version Finisher ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
107
7-801- Firmware Version PTU ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
109
7-801- Firmware Version LCT ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
110
7-801- Firmware Version MailBox ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
111
7-801- Firmware Version Folder ENG [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
125
7-904- Near End Setting PCU ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
001
7-904- Near End Setting Paper Transfer Roller ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
004 Unit
7-904- Near End Setting Fusing Unit ENG* [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
006
7-942- PM Counter #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
002 Display:Distance(%)
7-942- PM Counter Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-942- PM Counter Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-942- PM Counter Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]


CTL
7-942- PM Counter OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-942- PM Counter Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
7-942- PM Counter #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-942- PM Counter Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-942- PM Counter Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-942- PM Counter Bearing:Development ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
028 Display:Distance(%) Screw
7-942- PM Counter Paper Transfer Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
108 Display:Distance(%) Unit
7-942- PM Counter Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-942- PM Counter Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-942- PM Counter Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-942- PM Counter Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-944- PM Counter #PCU ENG* [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
002 Display:Distance 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
7-944- PM Counter Charge Roller ENG* [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
7-944- PM Counter Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
7-944- PM Counter OPC ENG* [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
7-944- PM Counter Stripper ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
7-944- PM Counter #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /


CTL
7-944- PM Counter Developer ENG* [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
7-944- PM Counter Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
7-944- PM Counter Bearing:Development ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
028 Display:Distance Screw 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Paper Transfer Roller ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
108 Display:Distance Unit 1mm]
7-944- PM Counter Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
7-944- PM Counter Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
7-944- PM Counter Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
7-944- PM Counter Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 4294967295 / 0 /
7-951- Remain Day #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
002 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
009 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
018 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
019 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
021 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
022 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
023 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
024 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
025 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day Bearing:Development ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
028 Counter:Pages Screw


CTL
7-951- Remain Day Paper Transfer Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
108 Counter:Pages Unit
7-951- Remain Day Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
115 Counter:Pages
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
7-951- Remain Day Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
116 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
118 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
119 Counter:Pages
7-951- Remain Day Waste Toner bottle ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
142 Counter:Pages
7-952- Remain Day #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
002 Counter:Distance
7-952- Remain Day Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
7-952- Remain Day OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
7-952- Remain Day #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Bearing:Development ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
028 Counter:Distance Screw
7-952- Remain Day Paper Transfer Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
108 Counter:Distance Unit
7-952- Remain Day Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]


CTL
7-952- Remain Day Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
7-952- Remain Day Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
7-954- PM Counter #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
002 Display:Pages(%)
7-954- PM Counter Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954- PM Counter Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954- PM Counter Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954- PM Counter OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954- PM Counter Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954- PM Counter #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954- PM Counter Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954- PM Counter Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954- PM Counter Bearing:Development ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
028 Display:Pages(%) Screw
7-954- PM Counter Paper Transfer Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
108 Display:Pages(%) Unit
7-954- PM Counter Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954- PM Counter Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954- PM Counter Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-954- PM Counter Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]


CTL
7-954- PM Counter Waste Toner bottle ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages #PCU ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
002 1page]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
009 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
018 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
019 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages OPC ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
021 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Stripper ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
022 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
023 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Developer ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
024 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
025 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Bearing:Development ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
028 Screw 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Paper Transfer Roller ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
108 Unit 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
115 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
116 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
118 1page]
7-955- Estimated Remain Pages Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
119 1page]
7-956- Estimated Remain Days #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
002
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
009


CTL
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
018
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
019
7-956- Estimated Remain Days OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
021
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
022
7-956- Estimated Remain Days #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
023
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
024
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
025
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Bearing:Development ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
028 Screw
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Paper Transfer Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
108 Unit
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
115
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
116
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
118
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
119
7-956- Estimated Remain Days Waste Toner bottle ENG [ 0 to 255 / 255 / 1days]
142
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate #PCU ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
002
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Cleaning Blade ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
009
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
018
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Cleaner:Charge Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
019


CTL
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate OPC ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
021
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Stripper ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
022
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate #Dev Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
023
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Developer ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
024
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Development Filter ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
025
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Bearing:Development ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
028 Screw
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Paper Transfer Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
108 Unit
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Fusing Unit ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
115
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Fusing Belt ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
116
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
118
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Bearing:Pressure Roller ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
119
7-960- Estimated Usage Rate Waste Toner bottle ENG [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1%]
142
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data1 ENG* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0x00 / 1]
001
7-979- CPU Reset Log Data2 ENG* [ 0x0000 to 0xFFFF /
002 0x0000 / 1]
003 0x0000 / 1]
004 0x0000 / 1]
005 0x0000 / 1]
006 0x0000 / 1]


CTL
007 0x0000 / 1]
008 0x0000 / 1]
009 0x0000 / 1]
010 0x0000 / 1]
011 0x0000 / 1]
012 0x0000 / 1]
013 0x0000 / 1]
014 0x0000 / 1]
015 0x0000 / 1]
016 0x0000 / 1]
017 0x0000 / 1]
018 0x0000 / 1]
019 0x0000 / 1]
020 0x0000 / 1]
021 0x0000 / 1]

Input Check Table
3.8 INPUT CHECK TABLE
3.8.1 MAIN MACHINE, PAPER FEED TRAY

5803 [INPUT Check]
5-803- Registration Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
001 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Paper Feed Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Transport Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
003 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Paper Feed Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Transport Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
005 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Fusing Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
006 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Fusing Entrance Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
007 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Paper Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
008 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Inverter Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
009 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Duplex Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
010 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Duplex Entrance Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
011 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist

Input Check Table
5803 [INPUT Check]

5-803- Paper Exit Tray Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
012 0: Not full
1: full
5-803- Tray 1 Remain Switch ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
013 When full is 100%,
11: 71 to 100%
01: 31 to 70%
00: 11 to 30%
10: 1 to 10%
5-803- Tray 1 Upper Limit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
014 0: less then limit
1: high then limit
5-803- Tray 1 Paper End Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
015 0: No paper
1: paper remaining
5-803- Tray 1 Set Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
016 0: set
1: not set
5-803- Tray 2 Remain Switch ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
017 When full is 100%,
11: 71 to 100%
01: 31 to 70%
00: 11 to 30%
10: 1 to 10%
5-803- Tray 2 Upper Limit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
018 0: less then limit
1: high then limit
5-803- Tray 2 Paper End Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
019 0: No paper
1: paper remaining
5-803- Tray 2 Set Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
020 0: set
1: not set
5-803- Tray 2 Size Switch ENG [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1]
021
5-803- Bypass Paper End Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
022 0: No paper
1: paper remaining
Input Check Table
5803 [INPUT Check]

5-803- Bypass Main Scan Length Switch ENG [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1]
023
5-803- Bypass Sub Scan Length Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
024
5-803- Main Door Interlock Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
025 00: Unlocked
11: Locked
5-803- Right Door Open/Close Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
026 0: close
1: open
5-803- Duplex Guide Plate Open/Close Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
027 0: close
1: open
5-803- Transfer Open/Close Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
028 0: open
1: close
5-803- Transfer Contact Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
029 0: Abutting
1: Alienate
5-803- Waste Toner Bottle Near Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
032 0: Not full
1: full
5-803- Toner Bottle Set Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
033 0: set
1: not set
5-803- Fusing Set & Country Detection ENG [ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1]
038 0111:200V System
1011:100V System
5-803- Fusing New Fuse Blown Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
039 0: New
1: Old
5-803- Fusing Exit Fan1:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
048 0: Running
1: Stopped, or locked
5-803- Fusing Exit Fan2:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
049 0: Running

Input Check Table
5803 [INPUT Check]

5-803- PSU Cooling Fan:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
051 0: Running
5-803- Main Exhaust Fan:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
057 0: Running
5-803- Paper Exit Cooling Fan:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
058 0: Running
5-803- Toner Bottle Cooling Fan:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
060 0: Running
5-803- Development Motor:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
061 0: Running
5-803- Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
065 0: Running
5-803- Drum Motor:Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
066 0: Running
5-803- HVP/Separation DC/(-):Abnormal Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067 0: SC detected
1: Normal
5-803- HVP/ChargeDC/(-):Abnormal Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
068 0: SC detected
1: Normal
5-803- HVP/PTR DC/(+)&(-):Abnormal Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
069 0: SC detected
1: Normal
5-803- HVP/Development DC/(-):Abnormal ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
070 Detection 0: SC detected
1: Normal
5-803- 1-Bin Remain Paper Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
075 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- 1-Bin Set Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Input Check Table
5803 [INPUT Check]

076 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Bridge Relay Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
077 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
5-803- Bridge Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
078 0: paper exist
1: paper non exist
5-803- Relay Set Detection Mechanism ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
079 0: set
1:not set
5-803- RelayTransCov OP Detect/LeftTransCov ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
082 OP Sn 0: close
1: open
5-803- RelayPprExitCovOP ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
083 Detect/UpperTransCovOP Sn 0: close
1: open
5-803- Shift Tray Set Detection Mechanism ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
084 01: set
11:not set
5-803- Shift Tray Position Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
085 0: Stop on this side. during moving
towards inner
1: Stop on inner side. during moving
towards this side
5-803- GAVD Open/Close Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
094
5-803- Relay Fuse Blown Detection +24V ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
095 0: Not cut
1: Cut
5-803- Relay Fuse Blown Detection +5V ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
096 0: Not cut
1: Cut
5-803- PCB Ver Management ENG [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1]
100
5-803- Tray 1 Size Switch ENG [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1]
101

Input Check Table
5803 [INPUT Check]

5-803- Front Development Cooling Fan: Lock ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
102
5-803- Transfer New Fuse Blow Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
103
5-803- Reverse Guide Plate Open/Close Switch ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
104
5-803- Waste Toner Bottle Set Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
105
5-803- HP Senser ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
200
5-803- Platen Cover Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
201
5-803- Bank: Tray3: Feed Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
211 0: paper not detected
1: paper detected
1: paper detected
1: paper detected
5-803- Bank: Tray3: Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1: paper detected
1: paper detected
1: paper detected
5-803- Bank: Feed Cover Open Detection 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
217 0: cover open
1: cover closed
5-803- Bank: Feed Cover Open Detection 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
218 0: cover open
1: cover closed
5-803- LCT Paper Supply Open/Close ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Input Check Table
5803 [INPUT Check]

219 0: cover open
1: cover closed
5-803- LCT Slide Open/Close ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
220 0: slide open
1: slide closed
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
3.8.2 FINISHER / MAIL BOX / FOLDING UNIT
3000-sheet finisher
6123 [INPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN]

6-123-001 Entrance Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-002 Horizontal Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-003 Switchback Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-004 Proof Tray Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-005 Shift Tray Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-006 Booklet Stapler Exit Sensor (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-007 Paper Exit Open/Close Guide HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-008 Punch HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-009 Punch Move HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-010 S-to-S Registration Detection HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-011 Lower Junction Solenoid HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-012 Jogger HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-013 Positioning Roller HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-014 Feed-out HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-015 Stapler Moving HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-016 Booklet Stapler HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-017 Booklet Jogger HP Sensor (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-018 Booklet Jog Solenoid HP Sensor (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-019 Booklet Standard Fence HP Sensor (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-020 Booklet Stapler HP Sensor (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-022 Folder Blade Cam HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-023 Folder Blade HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-024 Shift Roller HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-028 Drag Roller Vibrating HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-029 LE Guide HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-030 TE Stack Plate HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-031 Staple Tray Paper Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Input Check Table

6-123-032 ITB Paper Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-033 Booklet Stapler Transport Paper Sn: Upper (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-034 Booklet Stapler Transport Paper Sn: Lower (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-035 Paper Height Sensor: Shift ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-036 Corner Stapler Paper Height Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-037 Corner Stapler Paper Height Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-038 Proof Tray Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-039 Booklet Stapler Full Sensor 1 (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-040 Booklet Stapler Full Sensor 2 (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-041 S-to-S Registration Detection Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-042 Punch RPS Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-043 Corner Stapler Leading Edge Detection Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-044 Corner Stapler Staple End Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-045 Booklet Stapler Staple End Sensor: Front (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-046 Booklet Stapler Staple End Sensor: Rear (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-047 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-052 Punch Chad Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-053 Punch Set Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: connected
1: not connected
6-123-054 Shift Jogger Set Detection ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: connected
1: not connected
6-123-055 Booklet Stapler Set Detection (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: not connected
1: connected
6-123-056 Front Door SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

6-123-057 Dynamic Roller Open/Close Guide Plate Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-058 Tray Upper Limit SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-059 Paper Exit Open/Close Guide Plate Limit SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-060 Punch Selection DIPSW 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Input Check Table

6-123-065 Paper Guide HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-066 Shift Jogger HP Sensor: Front ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-067 Shift Jogger HP Sensor: Rear ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-123-068 Shift Jogger Retraction HP Sensor: Upper ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6-123-069 Shift Jogger Retraction HP Sensor: Lower ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
1000-sheet finisher
6161 [FIN (1K FIN) INPUT Check]

6-161-001 Entrance Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-002 Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-003 Proof Tray Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-004 Proof Tray Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-005 Shift HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-006 Exit Guide Plate Open/Close HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-007 Shift Paper Exit (Lift Tray Exit) Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-008 Positioning Roller HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-009 Lift Tray Paper Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-010 Jogger HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-011 Feed Out HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-012 Lift Tray Lower Limit Sensor (Upper) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-013 Lift Tray Lower Limit Sensor (Lower) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-014 Staple Tray Paper Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-015 Stapler Transfer HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-016 Near End Sensor (Common: Corner/Bklt Stplr) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-017 Self Priming Sensor (Common:Crnr/Bklt Stplr) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-018 Driver HP Sensor (Corner/Booklet Stapler) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-020 Clincher HP Sensor (Corner/Booklet Stapler) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-022 Stapler Retraction Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-023 Stapleless Stapler Transfer HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-024 Stapleless Stapler HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-025 Staple: Stacking Guide Plate HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-026 Punch HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-027 Punch RP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-028 Punch Hopper Full Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-029 Punch Move HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-030 S-to-S Registration Detection HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-031 S-to-S Registration Detection Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Input Check Table
6161 [FIN (1K FIN) INPUT Check]

6-161-034 ITB Transport Sensor: Right ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-035 ITB Transport Sensor: Left ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-036 Stack Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-037 Stack Trans Upper Pressure Release HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-038 Stack Trans Lower Pressure Release HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-039 Fold Blade HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-040 Fold Cam HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-041 TE Stopper Transport Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-042 TE Stopper HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-043 Booklet Folder Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-044 Booklet Folder Tray Full Sensor: Upper ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-045 Booklet Folder Tray Full Sensor: Lower ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-046 Door Open/Close SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-047 Lift Tray Upper Limit SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
6-161-048 Paper Guide HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
Mail Box
6200 [INPUT Check Print Post]

6-200-001 Entrance Sn ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Paper detected
1: No paper detected
6-200-002 Relay Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Paper detected
6-200-003 Relay Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Paper detected
6-200-004 Paper Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Paper detected
0: Paper detected
0: Paper detected

Input Check Table
6200 [INPUT Check Print Post]

0: Paper detected
6-200-008 Full Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not full
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
1: Full
0: Not full
1: Full
0: Not full
1: Full
0: Not full
1: Full
6-200-012 Right Cover Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Open
1: Close
6-200-013 Left Lower Cover Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Open
1: Close
Folding Unit
6322 [INPUT Check]

6-322-001 Registration Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Paper detected
6-322-002 Folding Junction HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not HP
1: HP
6-322-003 1st 2-direction Paper Feed SN ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Paper detected
6-322-004 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed SN ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Paper detected

Input Check Table
6322 [INPUT Check]

6-322-005 Crease Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Paper detected
6-322-006 Crease HP Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: HP
1: Not HP
6-322-007 Top Tray Exit Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Paper detected
6-322-008 Top Tray Full Sensor 1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Full
1: Not full
6-322-009 Top Tray Full Sensor 2 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not full
1: Full
6-322-010 Bridge Exit ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Paper detected
6-322-011 Cover SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Close
1: Open
6-322-012 Exit Unit Open/Close SW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Close
1: Open

Output Check Table
3.9 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE
3.9.1 MAIN MACHINE, PAPER FEED TRAY

5804 [OUTPUT Check]
5-804-001 Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
OFF/ON
5-804-002 Tray 2 Pickup Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-003 Bypass Pickup Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-004 Paper Exit Junction Gate Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-005 Tray 1 Lift Motor:CW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-006 Tray 1 Lift Motor:CCW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-007 Tray 2 Lift Motor:CW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-008 Tray 2 Lift Motor:CCW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-009 Registration Motor:CCW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-010 Registration Motor:CCW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-011 Registration Motor:CCW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-012 Registration Motor:CCW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-013 Registration Motor:CCW:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON

Output Check Table
5804 [OUTPUT Check]

5-804-015 Registration Motor:CCW:Position Hold ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-016 Feed Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-017 Feed Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-018 Feed Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-019 Feed Motor:CW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-020 Feed Motor:CW:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-022 Feed Motor:CCW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-023 Feed Motor:CCW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-024 Feed Motor:CCW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-025 Feed Motor:CCW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-026 Feed Motor:CCW:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-028 Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-029 Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-030 Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-031 Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON

Output Check Table
5804 [OUTPUT Check]

5-804-032 Vertical Transport Motor:CW:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-034 Vertical Transport Motor:Position Hold ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
5-804-041 Paper Exit Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-042 Paper Exit Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-043 Paper Exit Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-044 Paper Exit Motor:CW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-045 Paper Exit Motor:CW:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-047 Inverter Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-048 Inverter Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-049 Inverter Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-050 Inverter Motor:CW:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-052 Inverter Motor:CW:Std Speed:Feed Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-054 Inverter Motor:CW:Low Speed:Feed Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-055 Inverter Motor:CW:Mid Speed:Feed Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-056 Inverter Motor:CCW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON

Output Check Table
5804 [OUTPUT Check]

5-804-057 Inverter Motor:CCW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-058 Inverter Motor:CCW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-059 Inverter Motor:CCW:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-061 Inverter Motor:CCW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-062 Inverter Motor:CCW:Mid Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-063 Inverter Motor:CCW:Low Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-064 Duplex Entrance Motor:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-065 Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-066 Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-067 Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-068 Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Std Speed:FeedSpeed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-069 Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Low Speed:FeedSpeed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-070 Duplex Entrance Motor:CW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-071 Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-072 Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON

Output Check Table
5804 [OUTPUT Check]

5-804-073 Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-074 Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Std Speed:Feed Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
5-804-075 Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Low Speed:Feed Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-076 Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-077 Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-078 Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-079 Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-080 Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Std Speed:Feed Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-081 Duplex Bypass Motor:CCW:Low Speed:Feed Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-082 Duplex Bypass Motor:CW:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-083 Duplex Bypass Motor:Position Hold ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-084 Duplex Bypass Motor:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-092 Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CCW:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
*See Important below the table
5-804-093 Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CCW:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON

Output Check Table
5804 [OUTPUT Check]

5-804-094 Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CCW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-095 Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CCW:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-098 Fusing/Fusing Exit Motor:CW:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-104 Polygon Motor: L ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-105 Polygon Motor: M ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-106 Polygon Motor: H ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-108 Front Development Cooling Fan:Half Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-109 Front Development Cooling Fan:Full Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-110 Fusing Fan:Middle Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-111 Fusing Fan:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-113 PSU Cooling Fan ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-114 Toner Bottle Cooling Fan ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-115 Main Exhaust Fan:Half Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-116 Main Exhaust Fan:Full Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Output Check Table
5804 [OUTPUT Check]

OFF/ON
5-804-118 Paper Exit Cooling Fan:Half Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-119 Paper Exit Cooling Fan:Full Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
OFF/ON
5-804-120 Development Motor:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-121 Development Motor:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-122 Development Motor:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-123 Development Motor:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-124 Drum Motor:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-125 Drum Motor:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-126 Drum Motor:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-127 Drum Motor:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-140 Transfer Contact Motor:CW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-141 Transfer Contact Motor:CCW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-162 Toner Bottle Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-163 Bridge Relay/Left Paper Feed Motor:Std Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-164 Bridge Relay/Left Paper Feed Motor:Mid Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Output Check Table
5804 [OUTPUT Check]

OFF/ON
5-804-165 Bridge Relay/Left Paper Feed Motor:Low Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-166 BridgeRelay/LefExit Motor:Std Speed:IncSpd ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-167 BridgeRelay/LefExit Motor:Mid.High Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-169 BridgeRelay/LeftExit Junction Gate Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-170 <Shift Tray> Lift Motor:CW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-171 <Shift Tray> Lift Motor:CCW ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-179 HVP/ChargeDC/(-):PWM ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-187 HVP/Development DC/(-):PWM ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-194 HVP/Separation DC/(-):PWM ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-199 HVP/PTR DC/(+):PWM ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-200 HVP/PTR DC/(-):PWM ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-202 Scanner Lamp ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-206 Transfer Open/Close LED ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-209 ID Sensor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-211 ID Tag Power ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

Output Check Table
5804 [OUTPUT Check]

OFF/ON
5-804-241 Bank: Tray3: Feed Mt: Standard Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
5-804-244 Bank: Tray3: Transport Mt: Standard Speed ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
5-804-247 Bank: Tray3: PU Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
5-804-251 OPC Quenching LCD ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
5-804-253 Anti-Condensation Heater Relay ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
Important: Use the procedure below to do the output checks for the fusing exit motor in SP5-804-092
to 098. If you do not follow this procedure, a kink will form in the fusing belt sleeve, and the fusing
sleeve belt unit will need to be replaced.
1. Do one of the following:
• Open the right cover of the paper bank

• Remove one of the toner bottles
• Pull out the waste toner bottle half-way
• Remove the fusing unit

Output Check Table
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Do the following out output checks:
• SP5-804-092 (Fusing Motor:CW:Standard Speed)

• SP5-804-093 (Fusing Motor:CW:Middle Speed)
• SP5-804-094 (Fusing Motor:CW:Low Speed)
• SP5-804-098 (Fusing Motor:CCW:Low Speed)
4. Without exiting SP mode, turn the main power switch off and then on again.
Important: If you exit SP mode before you turn the main power switch off, the fusing exit motor will stay
off when the machine warms up. Heat will be concentrated in one area of the fusing belt sleeve and
cause a kink to form. If this happens, you will need to replace the fusing sleeve belt unit.
5. Do the reverse of what you did in step 1 (for example, reattach the fusing unit).
3.9.2 FINISHER / MAILBOX / FOLDING UNIT

3000-sheet finisher
6124 [OUTPUT Check: 2K/3K FIN]

6-124-001 Entrance Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-002 Horizontal Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-003 Pre-Stack Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-004 ITB Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-005 Paper Exit Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-006 Upper Junction Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-007 TE Stack Plate Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-008 Paper Exit Open/Close Guide Plate Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON

Output Check Table

6-124-009 Punching Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-010 Punch Move Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6-124-011 S-to-S Registration Detection Move Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-012 Lower Junction Solenoid Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-013 Jogger Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-014 Positioning Roller Rotation Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-015 Feed-out Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-016 Booklet Stapler Move Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-017 Corner Stapler Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-018 Booklet Stapler Jogger Motor (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-019 Booklet Stapler Jog Solenoid Move Motor (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-020 Booklet Stapler Standard Fence Motor (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-021 Booklet Stapler Motor (DFU) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-022 Dynamic Roller Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-023 Folder Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON

Output Check Table

6-124-025 Square-fold Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-026 Tray Lift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-027 Shift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-028 Front Shift Jogger Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-029 Rear Shift Jogger Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-030 Shift Jogger Retraction Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-031 Drag Roller Vibrating Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-032 LE Guide Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-033 Navigation LED (All) ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-037 Positioning Roller Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-124-038 Paper Guide Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
1000-sheet finisher
6162 [FIN (1K FIN) OUTPUT Check]

6-162-001 Entrance Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-002 Proof Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-003 Paper Feed/Positioning & Move Roller Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON

Output Check Table

6-162-004 Junction Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-005 Shift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6-162-006 Jogger Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-007 Exit Guide Plate Open/Close Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-008 Feed-out Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-009 Tray Lift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-010 Paper Guide Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-011 Positioning Roller Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-012 Stapler Shift Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-013 Stapler Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-014 Stapleless Stapler Transfer Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-015 Stapleless Stapler Drive Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-016 Staple: Stacking Guide Plate Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-017 Punch Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-018 Punch Move Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON

Output Check Table

6-162-019 S-to-S Registration Detection Move Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-020 Stack Transport Motor: Upper ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-021 Stck Trns Uppr Prss Rls/Stndrd Fence Rtrct M ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-022 Stack Lower Pressure Release Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-023 Folder Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-024 TE Stopper Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-162-025 Folder Blade Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Mail Box
6201 [OUTPUT Check Print Post]

6-201-001 Entrance Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-201-002 Vert Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-201-003 Junction Gate SOL ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-201-004 Turn Gate SOL1 ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON

Output Check Table
6201 [OUTPUT Check Print Post]

6-201-007 Entrance Fan Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
Folding Unit
6323 [OUTPUT Check]
2BEngine SP
Mode Tables
6-323-001 Transport Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-323-002 Registration Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-323-003 Folding Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-323-004 2nd 2-direct Paper Feed Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-323-005 JG/Crease Motor ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
6-323-006 Junction Solenoid ENG [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
OFF/ON
OFF/ON

CONTROLLER SP MODE TABLES
Controller SP5-XXX (Mode)
4. CONTROLLER SP MODE TABLES
4.1 CONTROLLER SP5-XXX (MODE)
3BController SP
Mode Tables
SP Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to
CTL
5- Add display language 1-8 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009-
201
009-
202
009-
203
009-
204
009-
205
009-
206
009-
207
5- mm/inch Display Selection 0:mm 1:inch CTL* [ 0 to 1 / * / 1]
024- *NA: 1
001 *EU/AA: 0
5- Status Lamp Mode CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
037-
001
5- Paper Display Backing Paper CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
047-


CTL
001
5- Display IP address CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
055-
001
5- Toner Remaining Window CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 3 / 1]
061- Display Change
101
5- Part Replacement Alert Display #PCU CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
002
5- Part Replacement Alert Display Cleaning Blade CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
009
5- Part Replacement Alert Display Charge Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
018
5- Part Replacement Alert Display Cleaner:Charge Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
019
5- Part Replacement Alert Display OPC CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
021
5- Part Replacement Alert Display Stripper CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
022
5- Part Replacement Alert Display #Dev Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
023
5- Part Replacement Alert Display Developer CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
024
5- Part Replacement Alert Display Development Filter CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
025
5- Part Replacement Alert Display Bearing:Development Screw CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


CTL
062-
028
5- Part Replacement Alert Display #Paper Transfer Roller Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
062-
108
5- Part Replacement Alert Display #Fusing Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
115
5- Part Replacement Alert Display Fusing Belt CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
116
5- Part Replacement Alert Display Pressure Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
118
5- Part Replacement Alert Display Bearing:Pressure Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
119
5- Part Replacement Alert Display #Waste Toner Bottle CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
062-
142
5- PM Parts Display CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
066-
001
5- Part Replacement Operation #PCU CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
002
5- Part Replacement Operation Cleaning Blade CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
009
5- Part Replacement Operation Charge Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
018
5- Part Replacement Operation Cleaner:Charge Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
019
5- Part Replacement Operation OPC CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

CTL
067- Type
021
5- Part Replacement Operation Stripper CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
022
5- Part Replacement Operation #Dev Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
023
5- Part Replacement Operation Developer CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
024
5- Part Replacement Operation Development Filter CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
025
5- Part Replacement Operation Bearing:Development Screw CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
028
5- Part Replacement Operation #Paper Transfer Roller Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
108
5- Part Replacement Operation #Fusing Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
115
5- Part Replacement Operation Fusing Belt CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
116
5- Part Replacement Operation Pressure Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
118
5- Part Replacement Operation Bearing:Pressure Roller CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
119
5- Part Replacement Operation #Waste Toner Bottle CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
067- Type
142


CTL
5- Supply Part Replacement Waste Tonner Bottle CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
073- Operation Type
001
3BController SP
Mode Tables
5- Supply Part Replacement Fuser Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
073- Operation Type
003
5- Supply Part Replacement Transfer Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
073- Operation Type
004
5- Supply Part Replacement Drum Unit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
073- Operation Type
005
5- Home Key Customization Login Setting CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
074-
002
5- Home Key Customization Show Home Edit Menu CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
074-
050
5- Home Key Customization Function Setting CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
074-
091
5- Home Key Customization Product ID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
074-
092
5- Home Key Customization Application Screen ID CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
074-
093
5- USB Keyboard Display setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
075-
003
5- ServiceSP Entry Code Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
081-
001
5- LED Light Switch Setting Toner Near End CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
083-
001

CTL
5- LED Light Switch Setting Waste Toner Near End CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
083-
002
5- Counter Size Setting A3/DLT Double Count CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
104-
001
5- Counter Size Setting Bypass Paper Size CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
104- Undetection
002
5- Length Setting Bypass(0:OFF 1:Long) CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
150-
001
5- CE Login CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
169-
001
5- Mode Set Power Str Set CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
191-
001
5- Limitless SW CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
195-
001
5- Paper Exit After Staple End Staple(1:Without 2:After CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
199- 0:Auto)
001
5- Paper Exit After Staple End Saddle(1:Without 2:After CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
199- (DFU) 0:Auto)
002
5- Paper Exit After Staple End Stapless(1:Without 2:After CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]

199- 0:Auto)
003
5- Set Time Time Difference CTL* [ -1440 to 1440 / * /
302- 1]
002 *NA: -300
*EU: 60
*AA: 480


CTL
5- Auto Off Set Auto Off Limit Set CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
305-
101
3BController SP
Mode Tables
5- Daylight Saving Time Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
307-
001
5- Daylight Saving Time Rule Set(Start) CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / * / 1]
307- *NA: 0x03200210
003 *EU: 0x03500010
*AA: 0x10500010
5- Daylight Saving Time Rule Set(End) CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / * / 1]
307- *NA: 0x11100200
004 *EU: 0x10500100
*AA: 0x03100000
5- Access Control Authentication Time CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1sec]
401-
104
5- Access Control Extend Certification Detail CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
401-
162
5- Access Control SDK1 UniqueID CTL* [ 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF /
401- 0 / 1]
200
5- Access Control SDK1 Certification Method CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
401-
201
401- 0 / 1]
210
401-
211
401- 0 / 1]
220

CTL
401-
221
5- Access Control SDK Certification Device CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
401-
230
5- Access Control Detail Option CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
401-
240
5- Access Control SDKJ1 Limit Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0 / 1]
402-
101
402-
102
402-
103
402-
104
402-
105
402-
106
402-
107
402-
108
402-
109


CTL
402-
110
3BController SP
Mode Tables
402-
111
402-
112
402-
113
402-
114
402-
115
402-
116
402-
117
402-
118
402-
119
402-
120
402-
121

CTL
402-
122
402-
123
402-
124
402-
125
402-
126
402-
127
402-
128
402-
129
402-
130
5- Access Control SDKJ1 ProductID CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
402-
141
402-
142
402-


CTL
143
402-
3BController SP
Mode Tables
144
402-
145
402-
146
402-
147
402-
148
402-
149
402-
150
402-
151
402-
152
402-
153
402-
154
402-

CTL
155
402-
156
402-
157
402-
158
402-
159
402-
160
402-
161
402-
162
402-
163
402-
164
402-
165
402-
166


CTL
402-
167
3BController SP
Mode Tables
402-
168
402-
169
402-
170
5- User Code Count Clear User Code Count Clear CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
404-
001
5- User Code Count Clear User Code Count Clear Permit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
404- Setting
101
5- LDAP-Certification Simplified Authentication CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
411-
004
5- LDAP-Certification Password Null Not Permit CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
411-
005
5- LDAP-Certification Detail Option CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
411-
006
5- Krb-Certification Encrypt Mode CTL* [ 0 to 0xFF / 0x1F /
412- 1]
100
5- Lockout Setting Lockout On/Off CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
413-
001
5- Lockout Setting Lockout Threshold CTL* [ 1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
413-
002
5- Lockout Setting Cancelation On/Off CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]

CTL
413-
003
5- Lockout Setting Cancelation Time CTL* [ 1 to 9999 / 60 /
413- 1min]
004
5- Access Mitigation Mitigation On/Off CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
414-
001
5- Access Mitigation Mitigation Time CTL* [ 0 to 60 / 15 / 1min]
414-
002
5- Password Attack Permissible Number CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 30 / 1]
415-
001
5- Password Attack Detect Time CTL* [ 1 to 10 / 5 / 1]
415-
002
5- Access Information Access User Max Num CTL* [ 50 to 200 / 200 / 1]
416-
001
5- Access Information Access Password Max Num CTL* [ 50 to 200 / 200 / 1]
416-
002
5- Access Information Monitor Interval CTL* [ 1 to 10 / 3 / 1]
416-
003
5- Access Attack Access Permissible Number CTL* [ 0 to 500 / 100 / 1]
417-
001
5- Access Attack Attack Detect Time CTL* [ 10 to 30 / 10 / 1sec]
417-
002
5- Access Attack Productivity Fall Waite CTL* [ 0 to 9 / 3 / 1sec]
417-
003


CTL
5- Access Attack Attack Max Num CTL* [ 50 to 200 / 200 / 1]
417-
004
3BController SP
Mode Tables
5- User Authentication Printer CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
420-
041
5- User Authentication SDK1 CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
420-
051
420-
061
420-
071
5- User Authentication Browser CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
420-
081
5- Auth Dialog Message Change Message Change On/Off CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
430-
001
5- Auth Dialog Message Change Message Text Download CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
430-
002
5- Auth Dialog Message Change Message Text ID CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
430-
003
5- Authentication Error Code System Log Disp CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
481-
001
5- Authentication Error Code Panel Disp CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
481-
002
5- PM Alarm PM Alarm Level CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
501-
001

CTL
5- Jam Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
504-
001
5- Jam Alarm Threshold CTL* [ 1 to 99 / 10 / 1]
504-
002
5- Error Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 16 / 1]
505-
001
5- Error Alarm Threshold CTL [ 1 to 99 / 5 / 1]
505-
002
5- Supply/CC Alarm Paper Supply Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
507-
001
5- Supply/CC Alarm Staple Supply Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
507-
002
5- Supply/CC Alarm Toner Supply Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
507-
003
5- Supply/CC Alarm DrumLifeRemain Supply Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
507-
005
5- Supply/CC Alarm WasteTonerBottle CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
507-
006
5- Supply/CC Alarm Tensya Supply Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
507-
007
5- Supply/CC Alarm Fuser Supply Alarm CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
507-
008
5- Supply/CC Alarm Toner Call Timing CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
507-


CTL
080
5- Supply/CC Alarm Toner Call Threshold CTL* [ 10 to 90 / 10 / 10%]
507-
3BController SP
Mode Tables
081
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: Others CTL* [ 250 to 10000 /
507- 1000 / 1]
128
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: A3 CTL* [ 250 to 10000 /
507- 1000 / 1]
132
507- 1000 / 1]
133
507- 1000 / 1]
134
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: B4 CTL* [ 250 to 10000 /
507- 1000 / 1]
141
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: B5 CTL* [ 250 to 10000 /
507- 1000 / 1]
142
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: DLT CTL* [ 250 to 10000 /
507- 1000 / 1]
160
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: LG CTL* [ 250 to 10000 /
507- 1000 / 1]
164
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: LT CTL* [ 250 to 10000 /
507- 1000 / 1]
166
5- Supply/CC Alarm Interval: HLT CTL* [ 250 to 10000 /
507- 1000 / 1]
172
5- CC Call Jam Remains CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
508-

CTL
001
5- CC Call Continuous Jams CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
508-
002
5- CC Call Continuous Door Open CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
508-
003
5- CC Call Jam Detection: Time Length CTL* [ 3 to 30 / 10 / 1]
508-
011
5- CC Call Jam Detection: Continuous CTL* [ 2 to 10 / 5 / 1]
508- Count
012
5- CC Call Door Open: Time Length CTL* [ 3 to 30 / 10 / 1]
508-
013
5- PartsAlermlevelCount Normal CTL [ 1 to 9999 / 300 / 1]
513-
001
5- PartsAlermlevelCount Df CTL [ 1 to 9999 / 300 / 1]
513-
002
5- PartsAlermlev Normal CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
514-
001
5- PartsAlermlev Df CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
514-
002
5- SC/Alarm Setting SC Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515-
001
5- SC/Alarm Setting Service Parts Near End Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
515-
002
5- SC/Alarm Setting Service Parts End Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]


CTL
515-
003
5- SC/Alarm Setting User Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
515-
004
5- SC/Alarm Setting Communication Test Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515-
006
5- SC/Alarm Setting Machine Information Notice CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515-
007
5- SC/Alarm Setting Alarm Notice CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
515-
008
5- SC/Alarm Setting Supply Automatic Ordering CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- Call
010
5- SC/Alarm Setting Supply Management Report CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
515- Call
011
5- SC/Alarm Setting Jam/Door Open Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
515-
012
5- SC/Alarm Setting Timeout:Manual Call CTL* [ 1 to 255 / 5 / 1min]
515-
050
5- SC/Alarm Setting Timeout:Other Call CTL [ 1 to 255 / 10 /
515- 1min]
051
5- Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery Execution CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
517- Setting
061
517- Interval
062

CTL
517- Weekday
063
5- Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery Execution Hour CTL [ 0 to 23 / 0 / 1]
517-
064
517- Minute
065
5- Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery SNMP CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
517- Community Name
066
5- Network Setting NAT Machine Port1 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 49101
728- / 1]
001
5- Network Setting NAT UI Port1 CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 55101
728- / 1]
002
728- / 1]
003
728- / 1]
004
728- / 1]
005
728- / 1]
006
728- / 1]
007
728- / 1]
008


CTL
728- / 1]
009
3BController SP
Mode Tables
728- / 1]
010
728- / 1]
011
728- / 1]
012
728- / 1]
013
728- / 1]
014
728- / 1]
015
728- / 1]
016
728- / 1]
017
728- / 1]
018
728- / 1]
019
728- / 1]
020

CTL
5- Network Setting PacketCapture CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
728-
101
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:mode CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
728-
102
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:interface CTL [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
728-
103
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:length CTL [ 54 to 65535 / 128 /
728- 1]
104
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:broadcast CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
728-
105
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:specify port CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
728-
106
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:portnumber CTL [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
728-
107
5- Network Setting PacketCapture:time CTL [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
728-
108
5- Extended Function Setting Expiration Prior Alarm Set CTL* [ 0 to 999 / 20 /
730- 1days]
010
5- Counter Effect Change Mk1 Cnt(Paper- CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
731- >Combine)
001
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Controller Standby CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
211
5- DeemedPowerConsumption STR CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-


CTL
212
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Main Power Off CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
3BController SP
Mode Tables
213
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Scanning and Printing CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
214
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Printing CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
215
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Scanning CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
216
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Engine Standby CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
217
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Low Power Consumption CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
218
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Silent condition CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
219
5- DeemedPowerConsumption Heater Off CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
745-
220
5- OpePanel Setting Op Type Action Setting CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
748-
101
5- OpePanel Setting Cheetah Panel Connect CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
748- Setting
201
5- Import/Export Export CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
749-
001
5- Import/Export Import CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
749-

CTL
101
5- Key Event Encryption Setting Password CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
751-
001
5- RemoteUI Setting Authentication CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
758-
001
5- SmartOperationPanel Setting Restore the default Home CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
761- screen
001
5- Memory Clear All Clear CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
001
5- Memory Clear SCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
003
5- Memory Clear IMH Memory Clr CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
004
5- Memory Clear MCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
005
5- Memory Clear Printer Application CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
008
5- Memory Clear Web Service CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
010
5- Memory Clear NCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
011
5- Memory Clear Clear DCS Setting CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
014
5- Memory Clear Clear UCS Setting CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


CTL
801-
015
5- Memory Clear MIRS Setting CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
801-
016
5- Memory Clear CCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
017
5- Memory Clear SRM Memory Clr CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
018
5- Memory Clear LCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
019
5- Memory Clear ECS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
021
5- Cleae Memory websys CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
025
5- Memory Clear PLN CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
026
5- Memory Clear SAS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
027
5- Memory Clear Rest WebService CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
801-
028
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Service CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
812-
001
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Facsimile CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
812-
002
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Supply CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

CTL
812-
003
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Operation CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
812-
004
5- Service Tel. No. Setting Disp Inquiry CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
812-
101
5- Remote Service I/F Setting CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1]
816-
001
5- Remote Service CE Call CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
002
5- Remote Service Function Flag CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
003
5- Remote Service SSL Disable CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
007
5- Remote Service RCG Connect Timeout CTL* [ 1 to 90 / 30 / 1sec]
816-
008
5- Remote Service RCG Write Timeout CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 60 / 1sec]
816-
009
5- Remote Service RCG Read Timeout CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 60 / 1sec]
816-
010
5- Remote Service Port 80 Enable CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
011
5- Remote Service RFU Timing CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
816-
013


CTL
5- Remote Service RCG Error Cause CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
816-
014
3BController SP
Mode Tables
5- Remote Service RCG-C Registed CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
021
5- Remote Service Connect Type(N/M) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
023
5- Remote Service Cert Expire Timing CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
816-
061
5- Remote Service Use Proxy CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
062
5- Remote Service Proxy Host CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
063
5- Remote Service Proxy PortNumber CTL* [ 0 to 0xffff / 0 / 1]
816-
064
5- Remote Service Proxy User Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
065
5- Remote Service Proxy Password CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
066
5- Remote Service CERT:Up State CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
067
5- Remote Service CERT:Error CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
068
5- Remote Service CERT:Up ID CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
069

CTL
5- Remote Service Firm Up Status CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
083
5- Remote Service Firm Up User Check CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
085
5- Remote Service Firmware Size CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]
816-
086
5- Remote Service CERT:Macro Ver. CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
087
5- Remote Service CERT:PAC Ver. CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
088
5- Remote Service CERT:ID2Code CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
089
5- Remote Service CERT:Subject CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
090
5- Remote Service CERT:SerialNo. CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
091
5- Remote Service CERT:Issuer CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
092
5- Remote Service CERT:Valid Start CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
093
5- Remote Service CERT:Valid End CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
094
5- Remote Service CERT:Encrypt Level CTL* [ 1 to 2 / 1 / 1]
816-


CTL
102
5- Remote Service Client Communication Method CTL* [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
816-
3BController SP
Mode Tables
103
5- Remote Service Client Communication Limit CTL* [ 1 to 7 / 7 / 1]
816-
104
5- Remote Service Network Information Waiting CTL* [ 5 to 255 / 5 / 1sec]
816- timer
115
5- Remote Service Manual Polling CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
200
5- Remote Service Regist Status CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
201
5- Remote Service Letter Number CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
816-
202
5- Remote Service Confirm Execute CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
203
5- Remote Service Confirm Result CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
204
5- Remote Service Confirm Place CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
205
5- Remote Service Register Execute CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
206
5- Remote Service Register Result CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
207
5- Remote Service Error Code CTL [ -2147483647 to
816- 2147483647 / 0 / 0]

CTL
208
5- Remote Service Instl Clear CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
816-
209
5- Remote Service CommErrorTime CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
816-
240
5- Remote Service CommErrorCode 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff /
816- 0x00000000 / 1]
241
816- 0x00000000 / 1]
242
816- 0x00000000 / 1]
243
5- Remote Service CommErrorState 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0xffff / 0x0000 /
816- 1]
244
816- 1]
245
816- 1]
246
5- Remote Service SSL Error Count CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
247
5- Remote Service Other Err Count CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
816-
248
5- Remote Service CommLog Print CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
816-
250
5- Remote Service RCG Setting RCG IPv4 Address CTL* [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1]


CTL
821-
002
5- Remote Service RCG Setting RCG Port CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 443 /
3BController SP
Mode Tables
821- 1]
003
5- Remote Service RCG Setting RCG IPv4 URL Path CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
821-
004
5- Remote Service RCG Setting RCG IPv6 Address CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
821-
005
5- Remote Service RCG Setting RCG IPv6 URL Path CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
821-
006
5- Remote Service RCG Setting RCG Host Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
821-
007
5- Remote Service RCG Setting RCG Host URL Path CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
821-
008
5- NV-RAM Data Upload CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
824-
001
5- NV-RAM Data Download CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
825-
001
5- Network Setting User Class CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
039
5- Network Setting Class Id CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
040
5- Network Setting 1284 Compatiblity (Centro) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828-
050
5- Network Setting ECP (Centro) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]

CTL
828-
052
5- Network Setting Job Spooling CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
828-
065
5- Network Setting Job Spooling Clear: Start Time CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828-
066
5- Network Setting Job Spooling (Protocol) CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xff / 0x7f /
828- 0]
069
5- Network Setting Protocol usage CTL* [ 0x00000000 to
828- 0xffffffff /
087 0x00000000 / 1]
5- Network Setting TELNET(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828-
090
5- Network Setting Web(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828-
091
5- Network Setting Active IPv6 Link Local Address CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
145
5- Network Setting Active IPv6 Stateless Address CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828- 1
147
828- 2
149
828- 3
151
828- 4
153


CTL
828- 5
155
3BController SP
Mode Tables
5- Network Setting IPv6 Manual Address CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
156
5- Network Setting IPv6 Gateway Address CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
158
5- Network Setting IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828-
161
5- Network Setting IPsec Aggressive Mode CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
828- Setting
219
5- Network Setting Web Item visible CTL* [ 0x0000 to 0xffff /
828- 0xffff / 1]
236
5- Network Setting Web shopping link visible CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828-
237
5- Network Setting Web Supplies Link visible CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828-
238
5- Network Setting Web Link1 Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
239
5- Network Setting Web Link1 URL CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
240
5- Network Setting Web Link1 visible CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828-
241
5- Network Setting Web Link2 Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
242

CTL
5- Network Setting Web Link2 URL CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
243
5- Network Setting Web Link2 visible CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
828-
244
5- Network Setting DHCPv6 DUID CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
828-
249
5- HDD HDD Formatting (ALL) CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
832-
001
5- IEEE 802.11 Channel MAX CTL* [ 1 to 14 / 14 / 1]
840-
006
5- IEEE 802.11 Channel MIN CTL* [ 1 to 14 / 1 / 1]
840-
007
5- IEEE 802.11 WEP Key Select CTL* [ 0x00 to 0x11 / 0x00
840- / 0]
011
5- IEEE 802.11 WPA Debug Lvl CTL* [ 1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
840-
045
5- IEEE 802.11 11w CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
840-
046
5- IEEE 802.11 PSK Set Type CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
840-
047
5- Supply Name Setting Toner Name Setting: Black CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
841-
001
5- Supply Name Setting StapleStd1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
841-


CTL
011
841-
3BController SP
Mode Tables
012
841-
013
841-
014
5- Supply Name Setting DrumUnit: Black CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
841-
101
5- GWWS Analysis Setting 1 CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0 /
842- 1]
001
5- GWWS Analysis Setting 2 CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF / 0 /
842- 1]
002
5- USB Transfer Rate CTL* [ 1 to 4 / 4 / 0]
844-
001
5- USB Vendor ID CTL* [ 0x0000 to 0xffff /
844- 0x05ca / 0]
002
5- USB Product ID CTL* [ 0x0000 to 0xffff /
844- 0x0403 / 0]
003
5- USB Device Release Number CTL* [ 0 to 9999 / 100 / 1]
844-
004
5- USB Fixed USB Port CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
844-
005
5- USB PnP Model Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
844-

CTL
006
5- USB PnP Serial Number CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
844-
007
5- USB Mac Supply Level CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
844-
008
5- USB USB Toggle Clear Mode CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
844-
009
5- USB Notify Unsupport CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
844-
100
5- Delivery Server Setting Retry Interval CTL* [ 60 to 900 / 300 /
845- 1sec]
003
5- Delivery Server Setting Number of Retries CTL* [ 0 to 99 / 3 / 1]
845-
004
5- Delivery Server Setting Rapid Sending Control CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
845-
022
5- UCS Setting LDAP Search Timeout CTL* [ 1 to 255 / 60 / 1]
846-
010
5- UCS Setting Fill Addr Acl Info CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
041
5- UCS Setting Addr Book Media CTL* [ 0 to 30 / 0 / 1]
846-
043
5- UCS Setting Initialize Local Addr Book CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
047
5- UCS Setting Initialize LDAP Addr Book CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


CTL
846-
049
5- UCS Setting Initialize All Addr Book CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
846-
050
5- UCS Setting Backup All Addr Book CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
051
5- UCS Setting Restore All Addr Book CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
052
5- UCS Setting Clear Backup Info CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
846-
053
5- UCS Setting Search option CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xff / 0x0f /
846- 1]
060
5- UCS Setting Complexity option 1 CTL* [ 0 to 32 / 0 / 1]
846-
062
846-
063
846-
064
846-
065
5- UCS Setting Encryption Stat CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
846-
094
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: udirectory (Lower CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF /
848- 4bits) 0x00 / 0]
004
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF /

CTL
848- 4bits) 0x00 / 0]
009
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF /
848- Devicemanagement(Lower 0x00 / 0]
011 4bits)
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: uadministration CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF /
848- (Lower 4bits) 0x00 / 0]
022
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Log Service CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF /
848- (Lower 4bits) 0x00 / 0]
024
5- Web Service Access Ctrl: Rest WebService CTL* [ 0x00 to 0xFF /
848- (Lower 4bits) 0x00 / 0]
025
5- Web Service Log Operation Mode CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
848-
150
5- LogTrans Setting: Timing CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
848-
217
5- Installation Date Display CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
849-
001
5- Installation Date Switch to Print CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
849-
002
5- Installation Date Total Counter CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 /
849- 1]
003
5- Bluetooth Mode CTL* [ 0x00 to 0x01 / 0x00
851- / 1]
001
5- Remote ROM Update Local Port CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
856-
002


CTL
5- Collect Machine Info 0:OFF 1:ON CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
858-
001
3BController SP
Mode Tables
5- Collect Machine Info Save To (0:HDD 1:SD) CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
858-
002
5- Collect Machine Info Make Log Trace Dir CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
003
5- Collect Machine Info Failure Occuring Date CTL [ 0 to 20371212 / 0 /
858- 1]
101
5- Collect Machine Info Tracing Days CTL [ 1 to 180 / 2 / 1day]
858-
102
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Fax Address(0:OFF CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
858- 1:ON)
103
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire All Info & Logs CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
111
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Configuration Page CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
121
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Font Page CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
122
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Print Setting List CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
123
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Error Log CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
124
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Fax Info CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
131

CTL
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire All Debug Logs CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
141
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Controller Debug Logs CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858- Only
142
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Engine Debug Logs CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858- Only
143
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Opepanel Debug Logs CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858- Only
144
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire FCU Debug Logs Only CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
145
5- Collect Machine Info Acquire Only Network Packets CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 0]
858-
146
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Server Port Number CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 25 / 1]
860-
002
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Authentication CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
860-
003
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. Encryption CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
860-
006
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 POP before SMTP CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
860-
007
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 POP to SMTP Waiting Time CTL* [ 0 to 10000 / 300 /
860- 1ms]
008
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 Mail Receive Protocol CTL* [ 1 to 3 / 1 / 1]
860-


CTL
009
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 POP3/IMAP4 Auth. Encryption CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
860-
3BController SP
Mode Tables
013
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 POP3 Server Port Number CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 110 /
860- 1]
014
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 IMAP4 Server Port Number CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 143 /
860- 1]
015
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Receive Port Number CTL* [ 1 to 65535 / 25 / 1]
860-
016
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 Mail Receive Interval CTL* [ 2 to 1440 / 3 /
860- 1min]
017
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 Mail Keep Setting CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
860-
019
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 Partial Mail Receive Timeout CTL* [ 1 to 168 / 72 /
860- 1hour]
020
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 MDN Response RFC2298 CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
860- Compliance
021
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. From Field CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
860- Replacement
022
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting CTL* [ 0 to 0xff / 0 / 1]
860-
025
5- SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 S/MIME:MIME Header Setting CTL* [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
860-
026
5- E-Mail Report Report Validity CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
866-

CTL
001
5- E-Mail Report Add Date Field CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
866-
005
5- RAM Disk Setting Mail Function CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
869-
001
5- Common KeyInfo Writing Writing CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
870-
001
5- Common KeyInfo Writing Initialize CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
870-
003
5- Common Key Info Writing Writing: 2048bit CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
870-
004
5- SDCardAppliMove MoveExec CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
873-
001
5- SDCardAppliMove UndoExec CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 1]
873-
002
5- SC Auto Reboot Reboot Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
875-
001
5- SC Auto Reboot Reboot Type CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
875-
002
5- Option Setup Data Overwrite Security CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
878-
001
5- Option Setup HDD Encryption CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
878-
002
5- Fixed Phrase Block Erasing CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


CTL
881-
001
5- Set WIM Function MonitorDisable CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
885-
205
5- Farm Update Setting Skip Version Check CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
886-
100
5- Farm Update Setting Skip LR Check CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
886-
101
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
886-
111
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Term CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
886- Setting
112
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Start CTL* [ 0 to 23 / 9 / 1hour]
886- hour
113
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit End hour CTL* [ 0 to 23 / 17 / 1hour]
886-
114
5- Farm Update Setting SFU Auto Download Setting CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
886-
115
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Next Date CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
886-
116
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Retry Interval CTL* [ 1 to 24 / 1 / 1hour]
886- Hour
117
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update @Remote Using CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
886- Setting
119
5- Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Day of CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]

CTL
886- Week Setting
120
5- Farm Update Setting Restore Date CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
886-
201
5- Farm Update Setting Save Old Version List CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
886-
202
5- SD GetCounter CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
887-
001
5- Personal Information Protect CTL* [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
888-
001
5- SDK Application Counter SDK-1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
893-
001
893-
002
893-
003
893-
004
893-
005
893-
006
893-
007


CTL
893-
008
3BController SP
Mode Tables
893-
009
893-
010
893-
011
893-
012
5- Plug & Play Maker/Model CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
907- Name
001
5- SP Print Mode All (Data List) CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
001
5- SP Print Mode SP (Mode Data List) CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
002
5- SP Print Mode User Program CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
003
5- SP Print Mode Logging Data CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
004
5- SP Print Mode Diagnostic Report CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
005
5- SP Print Mode Non-Default CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
006

CTL
5- SP Print Mode NIB Summary CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
990-
007
5- SP Print Mode SDK/J Summary CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
990-
024
5- SP Print Mode SDK/J Application Info CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
990-
025
5- SP Print Mode Printer SP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
026
5- SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
027
5- SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
990-
028
5- SP Text Mode All (Data List) CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
001
5- SP Text Mode SP (Mode Data List) CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
002
5- SP Text Mode User Program CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
003
5- SP Text Mode Logging Data CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
004
5- SP Text Mode Diagnostic Report CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
005
5- SP Text Mode Non-Default CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-


CTL
006
5- SP Text Mode NIB Summary CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
992-
3BController SP
Mode Tables
007
5- SP Text Mode SDK/J Summary CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
992-
024
5- SP Text Mode SDK/J Application Info CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
992-
025
5- SP Text Mode Printer SP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
026
5- SP Text Mode SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
027
5- SP Text Mode SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 0]
992-
028

Controller SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
4.2 CONTROLLER SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to

CTL Max/Init./Step]
6-830- Extra Staples 0 to 50 (Initial:0) CTL* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 1]
001
6-830- Extra (DFU) Saddles 0 to 50 (Initial:0) CTL* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 1]
002
6-830- Extra Half-Fold 0 to 50 (Initial:0) CTL* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 1]

003
6-830- Extra StaplessStaples 0 to 50 (Initial:0) CTL* [ 0 to 50 / 0 / 1]
005
6-890- Function Z-Fold 0:No Punch 1:Punching CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Enabled OK

Controller SP7-XXX (Data Log1)
4.3 CONTROLLER SP7-XXX (DATA LOG1)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
3BController SP
7-401- Total SC SC Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
Mode Tables
001
7-401- Total SC Total SC Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
002
7-403- SC History Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-403- SC History Latest 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
7-404- Software Error History Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-404- Software Error History Latest 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
003
004

CTL Max/Init./Step]
005
006
007
008
009
010
7-502- Total Paper Jam Jam Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
001
7-502- Total Paper Jam Total Jam Counter CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
002
7-504- Paper Jam Location At Power On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
001
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray1: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
003
004
005
006
7-504- Paper Jam Location LCT: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
007
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bypass: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
008
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
009
7-504- Paper Jam Location Transport 1: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
011
7-504- Paper Jam Location Transport 2: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
012
7-504- Paper Jam Location Vertical Trans. 3: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
013
7-504- Paper Jam Location Vertical Trans. 4: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
014
7-504- Paper Jam Location LCT Transport: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
015
7-504- Paper Jam Location Registration: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
017
7-504- Paper Jam Location Fusing Entrance: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
018
7-504- Paper Jam Location Fusing Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
019
7-504- Paper Jam Location Paper Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
020
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bridge Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
021
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bridge Relay: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
022
7-504- Paper Jam Location Inverter: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
024
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex Exit Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
025
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex Entrance Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
027
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bypass Transport Sensor 1: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
048
7-504- Paper Jam Location Tray1: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
051
052
053
054
7-504- Paper Jam Location LCT Transport: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
055
7-504- Paper Jam Location RegistratiOff: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
057
7-504- Paper Jam Location Paper Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
060
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bridge Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
061
7-504- Paper Jam Location Bridge Relay: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
062
7-504- Paper Jam Location Inverter: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
064
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex Exit Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
065
7-504- Paper Jam Location Duplex Entrance Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
067
7-504- Paper Jam Location Timing: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
096
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
150
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
151
7-504- Paper Jam Location Horizontal Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
152 On
7-504- Paper Jam Location Horizontal Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
153 Off
7-504- Paper Jam Location Switchback Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
154 On
7-504- Paper Jam Location Switchback Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
155 Off
7-504- Paper Jam Location Proof Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
156
7-504- Paper Jam Location Proof Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
157
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
158
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
159
7-504- Paper Jam Location Enrance Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
162
7-504- Paper Jam Location Horizontal Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
163
7-504- Paper Jam Location Pre-Stack Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
164
7-504- Paper Jam Location ITB Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
165
7-504- Paper Jam Location Exit Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
166
7-504- Paper Jam Location TE Press Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
167
7-504- Paper Jam Location Ext Plate Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
168
7-504- Paper Jam Location Punching Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
169
7-504- Paper Jam Location Punch Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
170
7-504- Paper Jam Location S-to-S Registration Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
171
7-504- Paper Jam Location Lower Junction Solenoid Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
172
7-504- Paper Jam Location Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
173
7-504- Paper Jam Location Positioning Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
174
7-504- Paper Jam Location Feed Out Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
175
7-504- Paper Jam Location Corner Stapler Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
176
7-504- Paper Jam Location Corner Stapler Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
177
7-504- Paper Jam Location Output Tray Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
185
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
186
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Jogger Front Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
187
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Jogger Rear Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
188
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Jogger Retraction CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
189 Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stack Roller Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
190
7-504- Paper Jam Location Leading Edge Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
191
7-504- Paper Jam Location Positioning Roller Transport CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
192 Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location Paper Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
193
7-504- Paper Jam Location Main Machine Setting Incorrect CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
194
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
200
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
201
7-504- Paper Jam Location Proof Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
202
7-504- Paper Jam Location Proof Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
203
7-504- Paper Jam Location Right Relay: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
204
7-504- Paper Jam Location Left Relay: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
205
7-504- Paper Jam Location Left Relay: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
206
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
207
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
208
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stack: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
209
7-504- Paper Jam Location TE Stopper: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
210
7-504- Paper Jam Location TE Stopper: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
211
7-504- Paper Jam Location Booklet Folder Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
212
7-504- Paper Jam Location Booklet Folder Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
213
7-504- Paper Jam Location Entrance Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
220
7-504- Paper Jam Location Proof Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
221
7-504- Paper Jam Location Exit Transport/ Positioning CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
222 Roller Motor
7-504- Paper Jam Location Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
223
7-504- Paper Jam Location Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
224
7-504- Paper Jam Location Exit Guide Plate Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
225
7-504- Paper Jam Location Feed Out Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
226
7-504- Paper Jam Location Output Tray Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
227
7-504- Paper Jam Location Positioning Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
228
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stapler Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
229
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stapler Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
230
7-504- Paper Jam Location Punch Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
231
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stack Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
232
7-504- Paper Jam Location LE Stopper Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
233
7-504- Paper Jam Location Folder Blade Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
234
7-504- Paper Jam Location Paper Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
235
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stapler Shift Motor(without CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
236 staples)
7-504- Paper Jam Location Stapler Motor(without staples) CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
237
7-504- Paper Jam Location Movable Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
238
7-504- Paper Jam Location No Exit Response CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
248
249
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A4 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
005
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A5 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
006
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size B5 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
014
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size LT LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
038
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size HLT LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
044
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size A3 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
132
133
134
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size B4 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
141
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size B5 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
142
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size DLT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
160
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size LG SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
164
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size LT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
166
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size HLT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
172
7-506- Jam Count by Paper Size Others CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
255
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-507- Plotter Jam History Latest 1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
7-509- Paper Jam Location Registration: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
095
7-509- Paper Jam Location Registration: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
096
7-509- Paper Jam Location 1st 2-direction Paper Feed SN: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
097 On
7-509- Paper Jam Location 1st 2-direction Paper Feed SN: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
098 Off
7-509- Paper Jam Location 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed SN: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
099 On
7-509- Paper Jam Location 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed SN: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
100 Off
7-509- Paper Jam Location Crease: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
101
7-509- Paper Jam Location Crease: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
102
7-509- Paper Jam Location Top Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
103
7-509- Paper Jam Location Top Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
104
7-509- Paper Jam Location Bridge Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
105
7-509- Paper Jam Location Bridge Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
106
7-509- Paper Jam Location Registration Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
115
7-509- Paper Jam Location Folding Junction Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
116
7-509- Paper Jam Location Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
117
7-509- Paper Jam Location Folding Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
118
7-509- Paper Jam Location 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
119 Motor
7-509- Paper Jam Location Crease Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
120
143
144
7-509- Paper Jam Location Entrance Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
145
7-509- Paper Jam Location Entrance Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
146
7-509- Paper Jam Location Transfer Sensor 1: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
147
7-509- Paper Jam Location Transfer Sensor 1: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
148
7-509- Paper Jam Location Transfer Sensor 2: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
149
7-509- Paper Jam Location Transfer Sensor 2: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
150
153
154
7-514- Paper Jam Count by At Power On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
001 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray1: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
003 Location
004 Location
005 Location
006 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by LCT: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
007 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bypass: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
008 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
009 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Transport 1: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
011 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Transport 2: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
012 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Vertical Trans. 3: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
013 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Vertical Trans. 4: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
014 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by LCT Transport: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
015 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Registration: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
017 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Fusing Entrance: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
018 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Fusing Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
019 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Paper Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
020 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
021 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Relay: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
022 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Inverter: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
024 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex Exit Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
025 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex Entrance Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
027 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bypass Transport Sensor 1: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
048 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Tray1: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
051 Location
052 Location
053 Location
054 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by LCT Transport: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
055 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by RegistratiOff: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
057 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Paper Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
060 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
061 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Relay: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
062 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Inverter: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
064 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex Exit Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
065 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Duplex Entrance Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
067 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Timing: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
096 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
150 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
151 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Horizontal Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
152 Location On
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Horizontal Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
153 Location Off
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Switchback Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
154 Location On
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Switchback Transport Sensor: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
155 Location Off
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Proof Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
156 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Proof Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
157 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
158 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
159 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Enrance Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
162 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Horizontal Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
163 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Pre-Stack Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
164 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by ITB Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
165 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Exit Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
166 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by TE Press Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
167 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Ext Plate Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
168 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Punching Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
169 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Punch Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
170 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by S-to-S Registration Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
171 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Lower Junction Solenoid Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
172 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
173 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Positioning Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
174 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Feed Out Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
175 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Corner Stapler Move Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
176 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Corner Stapler Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
177 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Output Tray Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
185 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
186 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Jogger Front Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
187 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Jogger Rear Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
188 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Jogger Retraction CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
189 Location Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stack Roller Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
190 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Leading Edge Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
191 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Positioning Roller Transport CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
192 Location Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Paper Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
193 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Main Machine Setting Incorrect CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
194 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
200 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
201 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Proof Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
202 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Proof Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
203 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Right Relay: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
204 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Left Relay: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
205 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Left Relay: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
206 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
207 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
208 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stack: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
209 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by TE Stopper: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
210 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by TE Stopper: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
211 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Booklet Folder Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
212 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Booklet Folder Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
213 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Entrance Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
220 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Proof Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
221 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Exit Transport/ Positioning CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
222 Location Roller Motor
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
223 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Jogger Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
224 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Exit Guide Plate Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
225 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Feed Out Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
226 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Output Tray Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
227 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Positioning Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
228 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stapler Shift Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
229 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stapler Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
230 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Punch Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
231 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stack Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
232 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by LE Stopper Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
233 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Folder Blade Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
234 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Paper Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
235 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stapler Shift Motor(without CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
236 Location staples)
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Stapler Motor(without staples) CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
237 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by Movable Guide Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
238 Location
7-514- Paper Jam Count by No Exit Response CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
248 Location
249 Location
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count A4 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
005
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count A5 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
006
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count B5 LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
014
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count LT LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
038
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count HLT LEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
044
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count A3 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
132
133
134
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count B4 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
141
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count B5 SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
142
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count DLT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
160
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count LG SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
164
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count LT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
166
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count HLT SEF CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
172
7-516- Paper Size Jam Count Others CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
255
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Registration: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
095 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Registration: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
096 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by 1st 2-direction Paper Feed SN: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
097 Location On
7-519- Paper Jam Count by 1st 2-direction Paper Feed SN: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
098 Location Off
7-519- Paper Jam Count by 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed SN: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
099 Location On
7-519- Paper Jam Count by 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed SN: CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
100 Location Off
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Crease: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
101 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Crease: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
102 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Top Tray Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
103 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Top Tray Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
104 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Exit: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
105 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Bridge Exit: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
106 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Registration Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
115 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Folding Junction Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
116 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Transport Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
117 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Folding Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
118 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by 2nd 2-direction Paper Feed CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
119 Location Motor
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Crease Motor CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
120 Location
3BController SP
Mode Tables
143 Location
144 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Entrance Sensor: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
145 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Entrance Sensor: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
146 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Transfer Sensor 1: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
147 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Transfer Sensor 1: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
148 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Transfer Sensor 2: On CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
149 Location
7-519- Paper Jam Count by Transfer Sensor 2: Off CTL* [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 0]
150 Location
153 Location
154 Location
7-520- Update Log ErrorRecord1 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
001
002
003
004
005
006


CTL Max/Init./Step]
007
008
009
010
7-520- Update Log Auto:StartDate1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
011
012
013
014
015
7-520- Update Log Auto:EndDate1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
021
022
023
024
025
7-520- Update Log Auto:Piecemark1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
031
032
033
034


CTL Max/Init./Step]
035
7-520- Update Log Auto:Version1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
041
3BController SP
Mode Tables
042
043
044
045
7-520- Update Log Auto:Result1 CTL* [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
7-617- PM Parts Counter Display Normal CTL* [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
001 0]
7-617- PM Parts Counter Display Df CTL* [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
002 0]
7-618- PM Parts Counter Reset Normal CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
001
7-618- PM Parts Counter Reset Df CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-624- Part Replacement #PCU CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002 Operation ON/OFF
7-624- Part Replacement Cleaning Blade CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement Charge Roller CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement Cleaner:Charge Roller CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement OPC CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement Stripper CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement #Dev Unit CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement Developer CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement Development Filter CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement Bearing:Development Screw CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement #Paper Transfer Roller Unit CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement #Fusing Unit CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement Fusing Belt CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement Pressure Roller CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement Bearing:Pressure Roller CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-624- Part Replacement #Waste Toner Bottle CTL [ 0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
7-801- ROM No./ Firmware CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
255 Version
7-803- PM Counter Display Paper CTL* [ 0 to 9999999 / 0 /
001 0]
7-804- PM Counter Reset Paper CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
001
7-807- SC/Jam Counter Reset CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-832- Self-Diagnose Result CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001 Display
7-836- Total Memory Size CTL [ 0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
001 0MB]
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Chg Change Time :Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001 Hist
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Chg Change Time :Last1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002 Hist
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Chg Initialize Time :Latest CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
101 Hist
7-840- ServiceSP Entry Code Chg Initialize Time :Last1 CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
102 Hist
7-901- Assert Info. File Name CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-901- Assert Info. Number of Lines CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-901- Assert Info. Location CTL* [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003
7-910- ROM No System CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-910- ROM No Engine CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-910- ROM No Lcdc CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003
7-910- ROM No (DFU) ADF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
005
7-910- ROM No Finisher1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

007
7-910- ROM No Bank CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
009
7-910- ROM No LCT CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
010
7-910- ROM No Mail Box CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
011
7-910- ROM No NetworkSupport CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
018
7-910- ROM No Bank2 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
019
7-910- ROM No BIOS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
022
7-910- ROM No HDD Format Option CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
023
7-910- ROM No Folding Unit CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
025
7-910- ROM No RPCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
150
7-910- ROM No PS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
151
7-910- ROM No RPDL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
152
7-910- ROM No R98 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
153
7-910- ROM No R16 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
154
7-910- ROM No RPGL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
155
7-910- ROM No R55 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
156
7-910- ROM No RTIFF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
157
7-910- ROM No PCL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
158
7-910- ROM No PCLXL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
159
7-910- ROM No MSIS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
160
7-910- ROM No PDF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
162
7-910- ROM No PJL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
165
7-910- ROM No IPDS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
166
7-910- ROM No MediaPrint:JPEG CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
167
7-910- ROM No MediaPrint:TIFF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
168
7-910- ROM No XPS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
169
7-910- ROM No FONT CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
180
7-910- ROM No FONT1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
181
7-910- ROM No FONT2 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
182
7-910- ROM No FONT3 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
183
7-910- ROM No FONT4 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
184
7-910- ROM No FONT5 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
185
7-910- ROM No FONT6 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
186
7-910- ROM No FONT7 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
187
7-910- ROM No Factory CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
200
7-910- ROM No NetworkDocBox CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
202
7-910- ROM No Printer CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
204
7-910- ROM No MIB CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
210
7-910- ROM No Websupport CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
211
7-910- ROM No SDK1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
213
7-910- ROM No SDK2 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
214
7-910- ROM No SDK3 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
215
7-910- ROM No Package CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
250
7-911- Firmware Version System CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
001
7-911- Firmware Version Engine CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
002
7-911- Firmware Version Lcdc CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
003
7-911- Firmware Version (DFU) ADF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
005
7-911- Firmware Version Finisher1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]

007
7-911- Firmware Version Bank CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
009
7-911- Firmware Version LCT CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
010
7-911- Firmware Version Mail Box CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
011
7-911- Firmware Version NetworkSupport CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
018
7-911- Firmware Version Bank2 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
019
7-911- Firmware Version BIOS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
022
7-911- Firmware Version HDD Format Option CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
023
7-911- Firmware Version Folding Unit CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
025
7-911- Firmware Version RPCS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
150
7-911- Firmware Version PS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
151
7-911- Firmware Version RPDL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
152
7-911- Firmware Version R98 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
153
154
7-911- Firmware Version RPGL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
155
156
7-911- Firmware Version RTIFF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
157
7-911- Firmware Version PCL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
158
7-911- Firmware Version PCLXL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
159
7-911- Firmware Version MSIS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
160
7-911- Firmware Version PDF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
162
7-911- Firmware Version PJL CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
165
7-911- Firmware Version IPDS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
166
7-911- Firmware Version MediaPrint:JPEG CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
167
7-911- Firmware Version MediaPrint:TIFF CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
168
7-911- Firmware Version XPS CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
169
7-911- Firmware Version FONT CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]


CTL Max/Init./Step]
180
7-911- Firmware Version FONT1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
7-911- Firmware Version Factory CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
200
7-911- Firmware Version NetworkDocBox CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
202
7-911- Firmware Version Printer CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
204
7-911- Firmware Version MIB CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
210
7-911- Firmware Version Websupport CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
211
7-911- Firmware Version SDK1 CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
213
214
215
7-911- Firmware Version Package CTL [ 0 to 0 / 0 / 0]
250

4.4 CONTROLLER SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2)
4.4.1 REMARKS
Overview
3BController SP
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of
Mode Tables
operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that
you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F, P,
etc.).
P: Print application.
O: Other applications (external Refers to network applications such as Web Image Monitor.
network applications, for Utilities developed with the SDK (Software Development Kit)
example) will also be counted with this group in the future.
Keys and Abbreviations

Abbreviation What it means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to store the job on
the document server, for example.

Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count up. For jobs
larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g.,
for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border removal, adding
stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines remotely.
"NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs to be
distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and allows files to moved around,
combined, and converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages count as two
pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This machine is under
development and currently not available.
3BController SP
Mode Tables
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are recorded in the SMC
report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
4.4.2 SP8-001 TO SP8-999

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]

CTL
8-001- T:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-004- P:Total Jobs CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-061- T:FIN Jobs (DFU) Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
004
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-061- T:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-061- T:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-061- T:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-061- T:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-064- P:FIN Jobs (DFU) Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
006
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
008
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-064- P:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-064- P:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-064- P:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-064- P:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-067- O:FIN Jobs (DFU) Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
008
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-067- O:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-067- O:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-067- O:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-067- O:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
003
004
005
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
007
008
009


CTL
010
011
3BController SP
Mode Tables
012
013
8-071- T:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
003
004
005
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
8-074- P:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
014
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
003
004
005
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
8-077- O:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-081- T:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-084- P:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-381- T:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-384- P:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
001
8-387- O:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-391- LSize PrtPGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
001
8-411- Prints/Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
007
008
009
010
011
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
015
016


CTL
017
018
8-421- T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
019
020
021
022
023
024
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
007
008
009
010
011
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
013
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
3BController SP
Mode Tables
015
016
017
018
8-424- P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
019
020
021
022
023
024
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Simplex> Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Comb
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Simplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 Comb
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Duplex Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005 Comb
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup 2in1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006 Comb
007 Comb
008 Comb


CTL
009 Comb
010 Comb
011 Comb
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012 Comb
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013 Comb
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014 Comb
015 Comb
016 Comb
017 Comb
018 Comb
8-427- O:PrtPGS/Dup 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
019 Comb
020 Comb
021 Comb
022 Comb
023 Comb
024 Comb
8-431- T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-431- T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-431- T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
003
8-434- P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-434- P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
002
8-434- P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-437- O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-437- O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-437- O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
002
003
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-441- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
255
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
002
003
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-444- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
002
003
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
006
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
008
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
254
8-447- O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
255
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Bypass Tray CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011


CTL
012
013
014
015
016
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray LC Inserter CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101
8-451- PrtPGS/Ppr Tray 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
102
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-461- T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
004
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
006
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-464- P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag ~49% CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 50%~99% CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 100% CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 101%~200% CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-471- PrtPGS/Mag 201% ~ CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-481- T:PrtPGS/TonSave CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-484- P:PrtPGS/TonSave CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul RPCS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul RPDL CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PS3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul R98 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
005
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul GL/GL2 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006


CTL
007
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul RTIFF CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PDF CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PCL5e/5c CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul PCL XL CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul IPDL-C CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul BM-Links CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul IPDS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-511- T:PrtPGS/Emul XPS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul RPCS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul RPDL CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PS3 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul R98 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
005
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul GL/GL2 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
007
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul RTIFF CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PDF CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
009
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PCL5e/5c CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul PCL XL CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
011
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul IPDL-C CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul BM-Links CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul IPDS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-514- P:PrtPGS/Emul XPS CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN (DFU) Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
011
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
015
8-521- T:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN (DFU) Booklet CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
013
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
014
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
015
8-524- P:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
016
8-531- Staple Staples CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-531- Staple Stapless CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-551- T:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-551- T:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-551- T:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-554- P:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-554- P:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-554- P:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-561- T:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
003
8-564- P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-567- O:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-581- T:Counter Total CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-581- T:Counter Total(A3) CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
032
8-591- O:Counter A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-591- O:Counter Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-601- T:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1%]
8-601- T:Coverage Counter B/W Printing Pages CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-604- P:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /
001 1%]
8-617- SDK Apli Counter SDK-1 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
002
003
004
005


CTL
006
007
3BController SP
Mode Tables
008
009
010
011
012
8-621- Func Use Counter Function-001 CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011


CTL
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029


CTL
030
031
3BController SP
Mode Tables
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047


CTL
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
8-771- Dev Counter Total CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-781- Toner_Botol_Info. BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
001
8-801- Toner Remain K CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
001
8-811- Eco Counter Eco Total CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
001
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-811- Eco Counter Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
008
8-811- Eco Counter Combine(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
009
8-811- Eco Counter Paper Cut(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
010
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Eco Total CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
051
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
054
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
055
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
058
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
059
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Paper Cut(%) CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
060
8-811- Eco Counter Eco Totalr:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
104
8-811- Eco Counter Combine:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
105
8-811- Eco Counter Duplex(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
108
8-811- Eco Counter Combine(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]


CTL
109
8-811- Eco Counter Paper Cut(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
110
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Eco Totalr:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
151
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
154
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine:Last CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
155
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Duplex(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
158
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Combine(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
159
8-811- Eco Counter Sync Paper Cut(%):Last CTL* [ 0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
160
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 0~2%:BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 3~4%:BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
021
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 5~7%:BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
031
8-851- Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
041
8-861- Cvr Cnt:11-20% BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-871- Cvr Cnt:21-30% BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-881- Cvr Cnt:31%- BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-891- Page/Toner Bottle BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-901- Page/Toner_Prev1 BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-911- Page/Toner_Prev2 BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-921- Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage(%):BK CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 /


CTL
001 1%]
8-921- Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage/P:BK CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-941- Machine Status Operation Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
001
8-941- Machine Status Standby Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-941- Machine Status Energy Save Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-941- Machine Status Low Power Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004
8-941- Machine Status Off Mode Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-941- Machine Status SC CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-941- Machine Status PrtJam CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-941- Machine Status OrgJam CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008
8-941- Machine Status Supply PM Unit End CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-961- Electricity Status Ctrl Standby Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-961- Electricity Status STR Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-961- Electricity Status Main Power Off Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-961- Electricity Status Reading and Printing CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 Time
8-961- Electricity Status Printing Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
005
8-961- Electricity Status Reading Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006
8-961- Electricity Status Eng Waiting Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-961- Electricity Status Low Pawer State Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]


CTL
008
8-961- Electricity Status Silent State Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009
8-961- Electricity Status Heater Off State Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010
8-961- Electricity Status LCD on Time CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011
8-961- Electricity Status Silent Print CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101
8-971- Unit Control Engine Off Recovery CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Count
8-971- Unit Control Power Off Count CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002
8-971- Unit Control Force Power Off Count CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003
8-999- Admin. Counter List Total CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001
8-999- Admin. Counter List Printer: BW CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007
8-999- Admin. Counter List A3/DLT CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
012
8-999- Admin. Counter List Duplex CTL* [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
013
8-999- Admin. Counter List Printer: BW(%) CTL* [ 0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
027

Printer SP Menu
4.5 PRINTER SP MENU
4.5.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE)
1001 [Bit Switch]
3BController SP
1- Bit Switch 1 0 1
Mode Tables
001-
bit DFU - -
001
0
bit Responding with the hostname as the sysName Model Hostname

1 name
(PnP name)
This BitSwitch can change the value of the sysName.
0 (default): Model name (PnP name) such as "MP C401SP"
1: Host name
bit DFU - -
2
bit No I/O Timeout Disabled Enabled

3
Enables/Disables MFP I/O Timeouts. If enabled, the MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no
affect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit SD Card Save Mode Disabled Enabled

4
If this bit switch is enabled, print jobs will be saved to the GW SD slot and not output to
paper.
bit [PS and PDF] Paper size error margin ±5pt ±10pt
5
When a PS job is printed by using a custom paper size, the job might not be printed
because of a paper size mismatch caused by a calculation error. By default, the error margin
for matching to a paper size is ±5 points. By enabling this BitSwitch, the error margin for
matching to a paper size can be extended to ±10 points.
bit DFU - -
6
bit [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border Disabled Enabled

7
Prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border around the printable area.

Printer SP Menu
1001 [Bit Switch]
1-001- Bit Switch 2 0 1

002
bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit Applying a Collate Type Shift Collate Normal Collate

2
A collate type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not explicitly define a
collate type.
Note: If #5-0 is enabled, this BitSwitch has no effect.
bit [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching Enabled Disabled

3
Enables/Disables the MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.
Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL switching
is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit DFU - -
4
bit DFU - -
5
bit DFU - -
6
bit DFU - -
7
1001 [Bit Switch]
1-001- Bit Switch 3 0 1

003
bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility Disabled Enabled

2
Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed

Printer SP Menu
to "<ESC>*r1A".
bit DFU - -
3
bit DFU - -
4
3BController SP
Mode Tables
bit DFU - -
5
bit DFU - -
6
bit DFU - -
7
1001 [Bit Switch]
1-001- Bit Switch 4 0 1

004
bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
bit IPDS print-side reversal Disabled Enabled

3
If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side because of
printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce printing speed.
bit DFU - -
4
bit DFU - -
5
bit DFU - -
6
bit DFU - -
7

Printer SP Menu
1001 [Bit Switch]
1-001- Bit Switch 5 0 1

005
bit Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch Disabled Enabled
0 Type" buttons on the operation panel.
If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch Type
from the operation panel. The available Types will depend on the device and configured
options.
After enabling this BitSw, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch Disabled Enabled

1 occurs (single copy) (multiple)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a single
copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device can be configured to print all copies
even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit Prevent SDK applications from altering the contents Disabled Enabled
2 of a job.
If this BitSw is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print data. This is
achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a module called the "GPS Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this BitSw is for troubleshooting the effects of SDK applications
on data.
bit [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1

3
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a job is
PS data or not.
For details, refer to “Printing Features”.
bit Increase max. number of stored jobs. Disabled Enabled (750)

4 (100)
Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD. The default
(disabled) is 100. If this is enabled, the max. will be raised to 750 or 1000 depending on the
model.
bit DFU - -
5

Printer SP Menu
bit Method for determining the image rotation for the Disabled Enabled
6 edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of older
models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs.
The old models are below:
3BController SP
Mode Tables
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit Letterhead mode printing Disabled Enabled

7 (Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit.
If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex job, are not
routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems with letterhead/pre-printed
pages.
Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper.
1001 [Bit Switch]
1-001-006 Bit Switch 6 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 [Bit Switch]
1-001- Bit Switch 7 0 1

007
bit Print path Disabled Enabled
0
If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and the last page of
an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the duplex unit. Not

Printer SP Menu
having to switch paper paths increases the print speed slightly.
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
bit DFU - -
3
bit DFU - -
4
bit DFU - -
5
bit DFU - -
6
bit DFU - -
7
1001 [Bit Switch]
1-001- Bit Switch 8 0 1

008
bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
bit [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print Disabled Enabled (allow BW jobs to print
3 without requiring User Code without a user code)
BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if usercode authentication is
enabled.
Note: Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit DFU - -
4
bit DFU - -
5

Printer SP Menu
bit DFU - -
6
bit [PDF]: Orientation Auto Detect Enabled Disabled

7 Function
Automatically chooses page orientations of PDF jobs (Landscape or Portrait) based on
3BController SP
Mode Tables
the content.
1001 [Bit Switch]
1- Bit Switch 9 0 1
001-
bit PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted via Disabled Enabled
009
0 USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (Immediately) (10 seconds)
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL auto detection doesn't necessarily
mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device whether to time-out
immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit DFU - -
1
bit Job Cancel Disabled Enabled

2 (Not cancelled) (Cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in
problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit DFU - -
3
bit Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack (JOB END) Disable Enable
4 when printing multiple collated copies.
This bitsw determines the timing of the PJL USTATUS JOB END sent when multiple
collated copies are being printed.
0 (default): JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the first copy has completed
printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented after the first copy and then again
at the end of the job.
1: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has finished printing. This

Printer SP Menu
causes the page counter to be incremented at the end of each job.
bit Display UTF-8 text in the operation panel Enabled Disabled

5
Enabled (=0):
Text composed of UTF-8 characters can be displayed in the operation panel.
Disabled (=1):
UTF-8 characters cannot be displayed in the operation panel.
For example, job names are sometimes stored in the MIB using UTF-8 encoded characters.
When these are displayed on the operation panel, they will be garbled unless this BitSw is
enabled (=0).
bit Disable super option Enabled Disabled

6
Switches super option disable on / off. It this is On, multiple jobs are grouped at LPR port.
PJL settings are enabled even jobs that are specified queue names are sent.
bit Enable/Disable Print from USB/SD's Preview Enabled Disabled

7 function
Determines whether Print from USB/SD will have the Preview function.
Enabled (=0): Print from USB/SD will have the Preview function.
Disabled (=1): Print from USB/SD will not have the Preview function.
1001 [Bit Switch]
1-001- Bit Switch A 0 1

010
bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
bit DFU - -
3
bit DFU - -
4
bit Store and Skip Errored Job locks the queue Queue is not Queue locked

Printer SP Menu
5 locked after SSEJ after SSEJ
If this is 1, then after a job is stored using Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ), new jobs
cannot be added to the queue until the stored job has been completely printed.
bit Allow use of Store and Skip Errored Job if Does not allow Allows SSEJ
6 connected to an external charge device. SSEJ with ECD with ECD
3BController SP
Mode Tables
If this is 0, Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ) will be automatically disabled if an external
charge device is connected.
Note: We do not officially support enabling this bitsw (1). Use it at your own risk.
bit DFU - -
7
1001 [Bit Switch]

1- Bit Switch B 0 1
001- bit Show Menu List Hide Menu List Show Menu
011 0 List
If this is 0, the Menu List button will be removed from Printer Features.
bit Print job interruption Does not allow Allow
1 interruption interruption
0 (default): Print jobs are not interrupted. If a job is promoted to the top of the print queue, it
will wait for the currently printing job to finish.
1: If a job is promoted to the top of the queue, it will interrupt the currently printing job and
start printing immediately.
bit DFU - -
2
bit DFU - -
3
bit Add "Apply Auto Paper Select" is the condition Disabled Enabled
4 that decides if the device's paper size or paper
type should be overwritten.
If this BitSwitch is set to "1" (enabled), the "Apply Auto Paper Select" setting will decide if
the paper size or paper type that is specified in the device settings should be overwritten by
the job's commands when "Tray Setting Priority" is set to "Driver/Command" or "Any Type".
- Apply Auto Paper Select = OFF: Overwritten (priority is given to the job’s commands)
- Apply Auto Paper Select = ON: Not overwritten (priority is given to the device settings)

Printer SP Menu
bit DFU - -
5
bit The tray selection setting when a paper size or Disabled Enabled
6 paper type mismatch occurs.
If the tray selection setting is enabled, selecting the tray that the "Apply Auto Paper Select"
setting is configured to "Off" cannot be done when a paper size or paper type mismatch
occurs.
bit DFU - -
7
1001 [Bit Switch]
1-001- Bit Switch C 0 1

012
bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit DFU - -
2
bit DFU - -
3
bit DFU - -
4
bit Change the user ID type displayed on the operation Disabled Enabled
5 panel
As of 15S models, the Login User Name can be displayed on the operation panel. The user
ID type displayed on the operation panel can be changed by configuring BitSwitch #12-5 as
follows:
- 0 (default): Login User Name
- 1: User ID. If this is enabled, User ID will be displayed, which is equivalent to the behavior
exhibited in 14A and earlier models.
bit AirPrint Enabled Disabled

6
For 15S and later models that support AirPrint, AirPrint can be disabled by changing this
Bit Switch from 0 (default) to 1.

Printer SP Menu
bit DFU - -
7
1003 [Clear Setting]
1-003-001 Initialize Printer System CTL* [- / - / -]
3BController SP
Mode Tables
[Execute]
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1-003-003 Delete Program CTL* [- / - / -]
[Execute]
1004 [Print Summary]
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1-004-001 Print Printer Summary CTL [- / - / -]
[Execute]
1005 [Display Version]
1-005-001 Printer Version CTL [-/-/-]
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1007 [Supply Display]

Sets displaying remaining supply amount information or not.
0: Displays remaining supply amount information
1: Does not display remaining supply amount information
2 PCU CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
4 Int. Transfer CTL*
6 Fuser CTL*
1110 [Media Print Device Setting]
Selects the setting for the media print device.
1-110-002 0: Disable 1: Enable CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

Printer SP Menu
1111 [All Job Delete Mode]
1-111- 0:excluding New Job 1:including New Job CTL* [ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step ]

001
Selects whether to include an image processing job in jobs subject to full cancellation from the
SCS job list.
1112 [Supply End]
1-112-001 0:continue 1:stop CTL* [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step ]

SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Printing Features
5. SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
5.1 PRINTING FEATURES
5.1.1 AUTO PDL DETECTION FUNCTION
Configuration
4BSoftware
Overview
The Auto PDL Detection function gives the MFP/LP the ability to determine the PDL of a job or of
specific parts of a job. This can be especially useful in cases where the PDL is not specified or if the job
contains multiple PDLs. This is only possible if the job was not created using a driver.
Conditions for detection of the PDL

The MFP will only attempt to detect a job's PDL if all of the following conditions are met.
• No @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command is contained in the job

• No submission protocol options (lpr, ftp, rcp, or rsh options) have been used to specify the PDL
• User Tools > Printer > System > Printer Language = Auto
• The printer is unable to detect PCL6 or RPCS. However these are almost always created
using a driver and therefore contain the PJL command specifying the PDL.
PDL detection by the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter

There are 3 components in the printer which can perform Auto PDL Detection:
1. Printer system:
Uses a set of triggers unique to PCL5, PS or PDF. Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be
searched for triggers.
2. PCL interpreter:
It can detect PS triggers in PCL data. If a PS trigger is detected, the PCL interpreter will abort
processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. Up to 256 bytes
from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
3. PS interpreter:
It can detect PCL5 triggers in PS data. If a PCL trigger is detected, the PS interpreter will abort
processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. The entire page
(regardless of the number of bytes) is searched for triggers.
• 2. and 3. can be disabled using Printer Bit Switch 2-3=1.

Printing Features
• If the "Printer Language" is configured to anything other than Auto, all detection will be
disabled.
• An interpreter submits a job page by page to the rasterizer. Therefore, when an interpreter
detects a trigger mid-job, the previous pages will have already been submitted and will be
output using the previously detected PDL.
• If the PDL cannot be detected by the printer system, then the PDL defaults to the one
configured in "Configuration > Printer Basic Settings > Default Printer Language".
The Printer Language setting and Default Printer Language setting in WIM:
PDL selection and switching

3 types of PDL selection/switching are performed:
1. PDL selection (PCL5 or PS (including PDF)) at the beginning of the job: performed by the printer
system

Printing Features
2. PDL switching from PCL5 to PS: performed by the PCL interpreter and the printer system
Configuration
4BSoftware
3. PDL switching from PS to PCL5: performed by the PS interpreter and the printer system
Triggers
Printer system
PCL5 triggers [ESC]E

[FF]
PS triggers %!PS-Adobe-3.1
"%!"
"dict begin"
"bind def"
"findfont"
"showpage"
"/statusdict"
"0 startjob"
[EOT]
"}" + space character + "def"
"userdict" (*)
Printing Features
PDF triggers %PDF-
%!PS-Adobe-M.nPDF- (*M, n=numeric)
* "userdict" is excluded by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1.
• Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be searched for triggers.
• "%%" can be added to the PS triggers by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1
• If a job is identified as PDF, it will be sent to the PS interpreter to be processed as a regular PS
job.
PS interpreter
PCL5 trigger [ESC]E and 2 or more continuous PCL commands
• Up to 256 bytes from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
Some possible problems

Garbled output:
If a string of characters (or binary data) is mistaken as a trigger and an incorrect PDL is applied, the
output will be garbled.
Incorrect printer settings:
Printer settings, for example the paper size, is incorrectly applied. This can happen when the printer
settings at the beginning of the job are initialized before a PDL switch occurred and no settings were
configured for the rest of the job.
Printer Bit Switch description

Bit Switch 2-3
This controls Auto PDL Detection by the PCL interpreter and PS interpreter.
BitSW 2-3=0 (default):
If PDL switching is applied to the job, all of the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter will
search for switching criteria (triggers).
BitSW 2-3=1:
Only the printer system will search for switching criteria (triggers). PCL/PS interpreters will not.
Bit Switch 5-3
This affects the PDL switching criteria (triggers) used by the printer system.
"%%" is not used as a printer system PS trigger. "%%" will not call the PS interpreter.
Printing Features
BitSW 5-3=1:
"%%" is used as a printer system PS trigger.
The reason that "%%" is not included as a trigger by default, is that a string of text in the body of the job
such as the below, could result in a false positive. This would trigger a switch and result garbled output.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
However some customers prefer that "%%" be included as a switching criteria. BitSW5-3=1 should be
Configuration
4BSoftware
used in such a case.
• A side effect of BitSW5-3=1 is that "userdict" will no longer be used as a PS trigger.

Bit Switch 9-0
These determine whether Auto PDL Detection for print jobs transmitted via USB/parallel will wait 10
seconds to make sure the first 2KB of the job has been sent.
The Printer system portion of the Auto PDL Detection function is only performed on the first 2KB of a job
and can wait up to 10 seconds for that first 2KB to arrive. As the printer is unable to detect the end of
jobs submitted over a USB/Parallel connection, it might be preferable to not wait 10 seconds if jobs of
less than 2KB are going to be printed. Enabling/disabling this waiting time is the purpose of BitSw 9-0.
BitSw 9-0=0 (default):
The printer system will not wait 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
BitSw 9-0=1:
The printer system will wait up to 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
5.1.2 PRINT IMAGES ROTATION

Bit Switch 5-6
This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will be applied to every page of every job. Pages will
always be rotated as if they were to be bound on that edge.
BitSW 5-6=1:
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will only be applied if the job is stapled, punched, or Z-
folded. Otherwise, the bound edge might differ from page to page.
Example:
A 3-page job. Page 1 has the PCL simplex command. Page 2 and 3 have the PCL duplex long-edge
bind commands.
No finishing options (staple, punch, z-fold) are used.
Printing Features
Bit Switch #5-6=0:
Bit Switch #5-6=1:
• Used in conjunction with Bit Switch #5-6, Orientation Auto Detect for PS/PDF jobs might cause
unexpected results.
5.1.3 PJL USTATUS

Bit Switch 9-4
These control the way PJL USTATUS returns page count totals in cases where multiple copies of a job
are being printed.
BitSw 9-4=0 (default):
This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
1. The page count for a single copy is returned after the first copy is printed.
2. The page count for the rest of the copies, excluding the first copy, is returned after all copies have
been printed.
3. This emulates an older HP PCL firmware spec. It is only needed for compatibility with legacy
software.
Printing Features
BitSw 9-4=1:
The page count for all copies is output after all copies have been printed.
This emulates more recent HP PCL firmware specs.
For example, consider 3 copies of a 3 page job:
9-4 = 0
Configuration
@PJL USTATUS JOB
4BSoftware
START
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=3
<comment> The page count of the first copy is returned.</comment>
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6
<comment> The page count of the remaining two copies is returned.</comment>
9-4 = 1
@PJL USTATUS JOB
Printing Features
START
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6@PJL USTATUS PAGE
7
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
8
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
9
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=9
<comment> The page count of all three copies is returned.</comment>
5.1.4 BEHAVIOR OF USB PRINTER DETECTION

An MFP/LP connected via USB sends its product name and unique serial number. With the data, the
machine determines whether requires a printer driver for the USB device to be installed.
SP5-844-005 allows you to change how to determine the MFP/LP requires a printer driver installation:
• OFF
If SP5-844-005 is set to OFF, the unique serial number of the device is sent to the computer. As a
result, if the device is swapped out for a device of the same product, pop-up messages will appear,
because the serial numbers between the two are different.
• Level 1

Printing Features
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 1, a common serial number for the product such as “RICOH MP
305+” series is sent to the computer. As a result, if the device is swapped out for a device of the
same product, pop-up messages will not appear because the devices are recognized as having the
same serial number.
• Level 2
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 2, a common serial number for all GW/GW+ models is sent to the
Configuration
4BSoftware
computer. As a result, if a GW/GW+ device is swapped out for a different GW/GW+ device, pop-up
messages will not appear because the devices are both recognized as being based on GW/GW+.

Security Features
5.2 SECURITY FEATURES
5.2.1 HOW TO RESTRICT ACCESS TO THE WIM JOB MENU
1. Enter Printer SP mode.

2. Set SP5-888-001
0: (default): The Job menu is enabled.
1: The Job menu is disabled.
• This setting takes effect only if user authentication (other than User Code authentication)
is disabled.

D3C9
2nd Generation
SERVICE MANUAL
Revision 1
SMART OPERATION PANEL
2nd GENERATION
(D3C9)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1

1.1 SMART OPERATION PANEL ........................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 OPERATION PANEL UNIT..................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 CPU BOARD .......................................................................................................... 3
1.1.3 MICRO COMPUTER BOARD ................................................................................ 6
1.1.4 WI-FI MODULE ...................................................................................................... 8
1.1.5 LCD......................................................................................................................... 9
1.1.6 SPEAKER ............................................................................................................. 11
1.1.7 MICROPHONE ..................................................................................................... 12
2. MECHANISM................................................................................ 14
2.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................................... 14
2.1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS .................................................................................... 14
Hardware Specifications ........................................................................................... 14
Software Specifications ............................................................................................ 18
Communication specifications.................................................................................. 20
Application Specifications......................................................................................... 22
2.1.2 PANEL COMPONENTS/SCREEN LAYOUT ........................................................ 26
Components of the Control Panel ............................................................................ 26
Panel display ............................................................................................................ 28
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............................................................................ 30
Touch panel .............................................................................................................. 30
2.2 CONTROLLING THE POWER SUPPLY ........................................................................ 32
2.2.1 EXITING ENERGY SAVING MODES .................................................................. 32
2.2.2 SCREEN STARTUP MODE ................................................................................. 34
Startup Modes .......................................................................................................... 34
Changing the Screen Startup Mode ......................................................................... 34
How the Control Panel Starts Up ............................................................................. 35
How the Screen Shuts Down When Quick mode Is Selected ................................. 35
2.2.3 SHUTDOWN FUNCTIONS .................................................................................. 36
Normal Shutdown ..................................................................................................... 36
SM i D196
Other Shutdown Functions ....................................................................................... 36
3. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................................................ 37

3.1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................. 37
3.1.1 MAINTENANCE MODES ..................................................................................... 37
3.1.2 LOGIN TO/LOGOUT FROM CONTROL PANEL SERVICE MODE .................... 38
Login ......................................................................................................................... 38
Login Status Indicator ............................................................................................... 38
Logout....................................................................................................................... 39
When Entry to Service Mode Is Prohibited by the Administrator ............................. 39
3.1.3 SERVICE MODE MENU ...................................................................................... 40
WIRELESS & NETWORKS ..................................................................................... 40
DEVICE .................................................................................................................... 41
SYSTEM ................................................................................................................... 43
3.1.4 PANEL SELF CHECK .......................................................................................... 45
LED Check ............................................................................................................... 46
Key Check ................................................................................................................ 46
LCD Check ............................................................................................................... 47
Speaker Check ......................................................................................................... 48
TouchPanel Check ................................................................................................... 49
TouchPanel Calibration ............................................................................................ 50
MultiTouch Calibration .............................................................................................. 51
Wireless LAN Check ................................................................................................ 52
Bluetooth Check ....................................................................................................... 53
3.1.5 RECOVERY MODE.............................................................................................. 54
3.2 SOFTWARE UPDATE .................................................................................................... 55
3.2.1 UPDATING THE SMART OPERATION PANEL................................................... 55
3.2.2 INSTALLATION/UPDATE FROM AN SD CARD .................................................. 56
Updating the Smart Operation Panel Firmware ....................................................... 56
Installing/Updating an Application ............................................................................ 59
3.2.3 PACKAGE UPDATE ............................................................................................. 59
When Installation/Update Is Prohibited .................................................................... 59
3.2.4 INSTALLATION/UPDATE FROM THE EDC SERVER ........................................ 60
Check Server Connect ............................................................................................. 60
Installation ................................................................................................................ 61
Activation .................................................................................................................. 61
Update ...................................................................................................................... 62
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 63
4.1 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................... 63
D196 ii SM
4.1.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE ERRORS ......................................................................... 63
Errors that occur during application update from an SD card.................................. 63
Errors that occur during update from the eDC Server ............................................. 65
Errors that occur during remote (batch file) update ................................................. 66
4.1.2 ERRORS THAT OCCUR WHEN THE CONTROL PANEL DOWNLOADS DATA
FROM THE CONTROLLER AT STARTUP ..................................................................... 72
SM iii D196
READ THIS FIRST
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed

Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
PANEL
(D3C9)
1.1 SMART OPERATION PANEL
1.1.1 OPERATION PANEL UNIT
 Turn off the main power switch of the MFP and disconnect the power cord.
 After replacing, make sure that all disconnected harnesses are connected up again and
secured in their clamps (if the MFP has harnesses).
1. Remove the operation panel unit from the MFP.
 For details about how to remove the operation panel unit, refer to the service manual
for the MFP.
2. Operation panel arm bracket [A] ( ×4)
 By factory default, switches No.3 and No.7 of the DIP switch [A] on the micro computer
board are set to ON. When installing the operation panel unit, make sure that the DIP
switch setting is correct for the MFP on which you are installing the panel.
SM 1 D3C9
Smart Operation Panel Rev. 05/24/2019
⇒
Note the DIP switch settings for
the old operation panel unit before
replacing it, and then apply the
same settings to the new Smart
Operation Panel. These settings
are common to all MFP models.
 The correct DIP switch setting depends on the MFP. Note the DIP switch settings of the
old operation panel unit before replacing, and apply the same settings to the new Smart
Operation Panel. (Below are two examples for DIP switch settings.)
When No.3 and No.7 are set to ON

 This is the factory default setting of a When only No.3 is set to ON
service part
 If the DIP switch setting is wrong, SC672 will be displayed.

 After replacing the operation panel unit, make sure that the latest version of the firmware
is installed on the Smart Operation Panel. Update it if necessary (page 55 "Updating the
Smart Operation Panel").
D3C9 2 SM
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
1.1.2 CPU BOARD
PANEL
(D3C9)
1. Operation panel unit (page 1)
2. Bottom cover [A] ( ×4)
 There are four hooks inside the operation panel unit. Before removing the operation
panel bottom cover, check the photos below.
3. Base bracket [A] ( ×9)
4. Remove the fixing screws ( ×4) on the CPU board [A], and remove the CPU board
from the micro computer board.
SM 3 D3C9
 Make sure that the orientation of the connector is correct when attaching the CPU
board.
5. Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable on the CPU board side.
6. CPU board [A] (LCD I/F cable ×1)
D3C9 4 SM
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
PANEL
(D3C9)
 After replacing the CPU board, make sure that the latest version of the firmware is
installed on the Smart Operation Panel. Update it if necessary. (page 55 "Updating the
Smart Operation Panel")
SM 5 D3C9
1.1.3 MICRO COMPUTER BOARD

2. CPU board (page 3)
3. Remove the FFC from the micro computer board ( ×1).
 Pull out the black part to unlock the connector, and then remove the FFC.
4. Micro computer board [A] ( ×1, ×2)
 By factory default, switches No.3 and No.7 of the DIP switch [A] on the micro computer
board are set to ON. When installing the operation panel unit, make sure that the DIP
switch setting is correct for the MFP on which you are installing the panel.
D3C9 6 SM
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
PANEL
(D3C9)
 The correct DIP switch setting depends on the MFP. Note the DIP switch settings of the
old operation panel unit before replacing, and apply the same settings to the new Smart
Operation Panel. (Below are two examples for DIP switch settings.)
When No.3 and No.7 are set to ON

 This is the factory default setting of a When only No.3 is set to ON
service part
 If the DIP switch setting is wrong, SC672 will be displayed.

 After replacing the micro computer board, perform the following checks:
 LED Check (page 46)
 Key Check (page 46)
SM 7 D3C9
1.1.4 WI-FI MODULE

3. Base bracket [A] ( ×9)
4. Wi-Fi module [A] ( ×1)
D3C9 8 SM
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
 After replacing the Wi-Fi module, perform the following checks:
 Wireless LAN Check (page 52)
PANEL
(D3C9)
 Bluetooth Check (page 53)
1.1.5 LCD
3. Micro computer board (page 6)
4. Speaker [A] ( ×2)
5. Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable.
6. LCD I/F cable (cable ×1)
SM 9 D3C9
7. Remove the tapes for fixing the microphone harness (tape ×3).
8. LCD [A] ( ×4)
 After replacing the LCD, perform the following checks.

 LCD Check (page 47)
 TouchPanel Check (page 49)
 Perform "TouchPanel Calibration" and "MultiTouch Calibration" of the Self Check
function.
D3C9 10 SM
1.1.6 SPEAKER
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
PANEL
(D3C9)
3. Speaker [A] ( ×2, ×1)
 After replacing the speaker, perform the following check.

 Speaker Check (page 48)
SM 11 D3C9
1.1.7 MICROPHONE
3. Micro computer board (page 6)
4. Lift up the securing wire of the LCD I/F cable.
5. LCD I/F cable (cable ×1)
6. Remove the tapes for fixing the microphone harness (tape ×3).
D3C9 12 SM
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
PANEL
(D3C9)
7. LCD [A] ( ×4)
8. Microphone [A] (cushioning ×1)
SM 13 D3C9
Overview
2. MECHANISM
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Hardware Specifications
Components
No. Name No. Name
1 Speaker 13 [Check Status] indicator
2 [Login/Logout] key 14 [Check Status] key
Data In indicator (facsimile and printer

3 Main power indicator 15
modes)
4 [Energy Saver] key 16 Fax indicator
5 USB slot for digital cameras 17 Extended Feature key (EX3)
6 HDMI slot 18 Extended Feature key (EX2)
7 USB slot for NFC card readers 19 Extended Feature key (EX1)
8 Microphone 20 Control panel reboot key
9 [Stop] key 21 SD card slot
D3C9 14 SM
Overview
No. Name No. Name
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
10 [Menu] key 22 Media access lamp
PANEL
(D3C9)
11 [Home] key 23 USB slot
12 [Back] key
Basic Specifications
Category Specification
LCD panel  Size

10.1 inch panel
 Resolution
WSVGA (1024x600)
 Bit width
RGB666 (18 bit color)
 Brightness
200cd/m2 (typ.)
 Backlight
LED Backlight (life: 15,000 hours)
CPU ARM Cortex-A9 Dual Core 1GHz (SoC: MCIMX6D5EYM10AC)
Touch panel Low load touch panel (recognizes touches to two points)
Memory  Volatile Memory

RAM (DDR3-1066), 2G
 Non-Volatile Memory
eMMC NAND, 8GB
 Uses a 16GB product in SLC Mode.

 Program area and data area for the operating
system and applications.
SM 15 D3C9
Overview
External interfaces  USB Memory

USB2.0 Host Type-A
 SD Card
SD card slot 1ch (SD*1/SDHC*2)
*1 Up to 2GB
*2 Up to 32GB
 USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-A
(for camera, USB keyboard, USB card reader)
 USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-miniB
(for NFC expansion)
 HDMI
HDMI 1.4
(for large screens available as custom order)
Internal interfaces  Extended Features

microSD card slot
Network  Wireless LAN

802.11b/g/n
 Bluetooth
Bluetooth4.0
Audio input/output Monaural speaker 1ch (output: 1 to 2 W), Microphone
±52.56 seconds per month (using external crystal oscillator, 20

RTC accuracy
ppm)
 Extended Feature keys (EX1, EX2, and EX3)

Use for startup in extended mode etc.
Hard keys
 Control panel reboot key
Use to reboot the control panel when it freezes.
D3C9 16 SM
Overview
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
 Main power indicator (blue)
PANEL
(D3C9)
Lights when the power is on. Flashes slowly in Sleep
mode.
 [Check Status] indicator lamp (red/blue)
Lights when an error occurs.
 Data In indicator (blue)
Flashes when the machine receives data from a printer
LED types
driver or LAN-Fax driver.
 Fax indicator (blue)
Flashes while sending or receiving a fax. Lights when there
is a received fax document in the fax memory.
 Media access lamp (blue)
Lights when there is an SD card inserted in the SD card
slot.
Maximum power 4 W or less

consumption (excluding external interfaces and internal feature expansions)
Power 0.35 W or less

consumption in (When in Sleep mode, power is not supplied to USB devices
Sleep mode connected to the USB slots.)
Specification comparison with the previous model
Item This model Previous model
Appearance
Control panel size

267 × 160 mm 345 × 161 mm
(Width × Height)
CPU operating frequency 1 GHz 533 MHz
RAM size 2 GB 1 GB
LCD panel size 10.1 inch 10.1 inch
SM 17 D3C9
Overview
Item This model Previous model
Android OS Version. 4.2 Version. 2.3
Types of the following

keys
 [Home] key
 [Stop] key Soft keys Hard keys
 [Check Status] key
 [Back] key
 [Menu] key
Seven types
 Main power indicator
Four types  [Check Status]
 Main power indicator indicator
LED types  [Check Status] indicator  Data In indicator
 Data In indicator  Media access lamp
 Media access lamp  [Home] key
 [Menu] key
 [Back] key
Wireless LAN interface IEEE802.11bgn IEEE802.11bgn
 USB port (type A/mini)  USB port (mini)

Types of external
 USB media slot  USB media slot
interfaces
 SD card slot  SD card slot
Bluetooth Available Not available
Available languages
Japanese, English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Danish, Swedish,
Polish, Portuguese, Hungarian, Czech, Finnish, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese,
Russian, Greek, Korean, Catalan, Turkish, Brazilian Portuguese
Software Specifications
A software package consisting of the Android Firmware and the manufacturer’s own pre-installed
applications is installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
D3C9 18 SM
Overview
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
PANEL
(D3C9)
The following three types of software are installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
1. Android Firmware (Android OS)
2. Pre-installed applications
3. Applications that can be installed additionally
Android Firmware (Android OS)
The Android Firmware (Android OS) consists of the following modules that are called
“stacks”.
 Linux kernel
 Android Runtime
 Library
 Application Framework
Pre-installed applications
On the Smart Operation Panel, applications such as the GW applications
(Copy/Printer/Document Server/Scanner/Fax), Control Panel Browser, the standard keyboard,
Installer, Gallery, Self Check are pre-installed. Unlike those installed on the controller board of
the MFP, GW applications that are installed on the Smart Operation Panel are for controlling
operation and display of the Smart Operation Panel.
Pre-installed applications are provided as part of the control panel firmware (Cheetah
System) together with the Android firmware. When you update the control panel firmware
using the recovery mode or another method, the pre-installed applications will also be
updated.
SM 19 D3C9
Overview
Applications that can be installed

On the Smart Operation Panel, applications can be installed in addition to the pre-installed
applications.
Applications that can be installed include optional applications that customers can purchase,
applications that are installed only on machines sold in specific regions, and custom-made
applications.
On an MFP, applications such as Simple UI applications (Quick Copy, Quick Fax, and Quick
Scanner) and Scan to Me are installed.
Communication specifications
The Smart Operation Panel and the GW controller are connected by a USB 2.0 cable. They
communicate with each other via the Android OS on the Smart Operation Panel, using protocols
called “OCS Library” and “Flair-API (System/Application)”.
System block diagram
D3C9 20 SM
Overview
Overview of Components
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
PANEL
(D3C9)
Communication
Details
module/signal name
OSC stands for Operating Control Service. It is a module that

controls the control panel. The set of signals used by this
module to control the control panel are called the OCS Library.
It is used during communication between the Legacy UI
(system) module on the Smart Operation Panel and the GW
OCS Library
module for the following processes.
 Deciding on the display format suitable for a particular
model of the control panel, so that the intended image data
can be converted to actual image data.
 Converting touch panel operations to commands.
Flair is the manufacturer's own communication interface

between software modules. The interface uses a generic
WebAPI.
Flair-API It is divided into two parts: a part that communicates directly with
(System/Application) applications such as the application manager, Home,
Authentication, Banner, Check Status, and Widgets, and a part
that monitors applications. It communicates with the GW
controller via the CATS module.
CATS stands for Cheetah Application Total System. It is a

module in the GW controller.
Because the Smart Operation Panel uses the Android OS, the
contents and protocols of communication are not the same as
those of the conventional control panel. CATS serves as an
CATS intermediary between the GW controller and the Smart
Operation Panel.
It also controls the power status of the control panel.
CATS communicates with the Smart Operation Panel using the
Flair-API, and communicates with the GW module using the
GW-API.
The name of the interface used among modules in the GW

GW-IPC
controller. The role is the same as that of the Flair-API.
SM 21 D3C9
Overview
 API stands for Application Programming Interface. An API is an interface that software
modules use in order to communicate with each other.
Application Specifications
The pre-installed applications and applications that can be additionally installed on the Smart
Operation Panel can be classified into the following 3 categories.
 System applications
Applications that operate in conjunction with multiple functions (operating regardless of the
application)
 Program applications
Applications that provide a single additional function
 Widget applications
Applications that provide a widget
The following table explains the function of each application.
Application Functions
Settings Provides the Android OS’s standard settings.
Screen Features Provides the manufacturer’s own settings.
Authentication Monitors login to/logout from the MFP, and transmits

authentication information to other services and
applications.
Monitoring service Monitors the status of the MFP. This service is used by
widgets and applications including Banner, Check Status,
Authentication, and Home.
Launcher (Legacy This application provides an application switching function

Application Manager) when there is no Home application.
Installer Provides the installer UI. Internal operation is controlled by

the Package Installer application.
D3C9 22 SM
Overview
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
Server service Provides server functions for application installation.
PANEL
(D3C9)
Remote control Works together with the server service and provides the
functions and displays of RFU and import/export of
settings, including the UI.
Manual Provides connection to the server where manuals are

stored (HTTP server). Manuals are displayed using the
Web Browser application.
Splash screen Provides the image that is displayed immediately after the
MFP is turned ON.
Startup animation Provides the startup animation for the operation screen.
Validation Performs validation when the machine is started in CC

certified mode.
* CC stands for Common Criteria. It is the evaluation
criteria for IT security (ISO15408).
LUI system LUI stands for Legacy User Interface. The conventional
control panel display is displayed by this application.
Model-specific settings are included in this application
Package Installer Provides installation and update functions for applications.

Also provides the screen for uninstallation.
Self Check Provides a self-check function for the control panel

hardware.
See page 45 "Panel Self Check" for contents of the
self-check.
Initialization Initializes settings of the MFP or the control panel.
Web Browser Android OS’s standard Browser application
Gallery Reads images from SD cards or other media, and sets

them as wallpaper or live wallpaper.
Standard keyboard Android OS’s standard operation panel that is called up

when the user enters characters or numbers.
SM 23 D3C9
Overview
Home screen Provides the Home screen. Also provides screen

customization and application switching.
Banner Displays balloon messages in the banner area at the

bottom of the panel display.
OCS emulator This application serves as an intermediary between the

control panel and the controller board. (The emulator
allows the controller board to work the same way
regardless of the type of control panel.)
Simple UI applications Simple (Quick) applications.

 Quick Copy
Provides the Quick Copy function.
 Quick Fax
Provides the Quick Fax function.
 Quick Scanner
Provides the Quick Scanner function.
Widgets Resident applications that display information on the

screen as configured.
 Date/time indicator
Displays the date and time.
 Supply information
Displays toner status.
 Change Languages
Provides the language switching function.
 Eco-friendly
Displays detailed information about the eco functions.
 Fax Received File
Displays the fax reception status.
 Stop
Provides a [Stop] key on the application screen. Used
by functions such as Quick Copy and Scan to Me.
D3C9 24 SM
Overview
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
IME (excluding the standard Multiple settings can be configured (the user can select
PANEL
(D3C9)
keyboard) one when using the keyboard).
 iWnn IME Chinese (Simplified) Pack
Chinese (simplified) language pack for iWnnIME
 iWnn IME Chinese (Traditional) Pack
Chinese (traditional) language pack for iWnnIME
 iWnn IME Korean Pack
Korean language pack for iWnnIME
NFC dispatcher Host application for NFC (Near Field Communication).

Transmits card information to authentication applications.
Quick Card Authentication Provides simple authentication using an IC card.
Standard IC card plugin A plugin for using IC cards. Examples of IC cards are the
FeliCa (Lite) and Mifare card systems.
SM 25 D3C9
Overview
2.1.2 PANEL COMPONENTS/SCREEN LAYOUT
Components of the Control Panel
No. Name Description
1 Speaker There is currently no function that uses this.
Displays icons for functions and applications.

2 Display panel Displays the operation screens, operation keys and
other information.
3 Main power indicator Indicates power OFF/ON status.
4 USB slot for digital cameras A digital camera can be connected here.
USB slot for NFC card A near field communication (NFC) device can be
5
readers connected here.
6 Microphone There is currently no function that uses this.
7 [Check Status] indicator Indicates system status.
Flashes when the machine receives data from a

8 Data In indicator
printer driver or LAN-Fax driver.
D3C9 26 SM
Overview
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
Indicates fax status.
PANEL
(D3C9)
 During communication: Flashes
 When fax documents have been received using
9 Fax indicator
Substitute Reception: Lights
 When the machine has received a confidential
fax document: Lights
Extended Feature key Used for system maintenance, such as control panel
10
(EX3) self-check.
11
(EX2) self-check.
12
(EX1) self-check.
13 Control panel reboot key Used when rebooting the control panel.
14 SD card slot Insert an SD card here.
Lights when an external media is inserted into the SD

15 Media access lamp
card slot or the USB slot.
16 USB slot Insert a USB memory device here.
SM 27 D3C9
Overview
Panel display
Screen Layout
1 Login information area Login information is displayed.
Application icons, widgets, and system messages are

2 Icon display area
displayed.
D3C9 28 SM
Overview
Soft keys displayed on the screen
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
PANEL
(D3C9)
Displayed when authentication is enabled. The login

screen appears if you press [Login]. [Logout] is
1 [Login/Logout] key
displayed if you have already logged in. You will be
logged out when you press [Logout].
2 [Energy Saver] key Enters Sleep mode.
3 [Application List] key Displays the list of installed applications.
Stops the scanning of a document, fax transmission,

4 [Stop] key
or printing to paper.
Displays the menu screen of the application in use.

5 [Menu] key
May not be available depending on the application.
6 [Home] key Displays the Home screen.
Use this to go back to the previous screen when the

7 [Back] key Screen Features screen or the screen of an
application is displayed.
You can check the status of the MFP, each function,

8 [Check Status] key and the current job. You can also check the job
history and maintenance information of the MFP.
SM 29 D3C9
Overview
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
 The CPU board has a CPU, memory, and a flash drive.

 The Microcomputer board has various interfaces, Wi-Fi module and other devices.
Touch panel
The touch panel of this machine uses a 4-wire resistive film method (low load resistive film analog
4-wire method). It can detect two points for flick/drag/pinch-in/pinch-out operations. Resistive
touch panel has been adopted in order to allow operation with a prosthetic hand.
Basic Structure
An analog 4-wire resistive film touch panel has 2 layers. Two materials (mainly film or glass)
with transparent conductive film (ITO) are attached such that the transparent conductive film
layers face each other.
When the film is pressed with a finger or a pen, the transparent conductive films contact each
other and the touch panel operation is recognized.
Insulators (spacing dots) secure space between the two transparent conductive film layers to
prevent short-circuiting.
Because the transparent conductive film has a uniform resistance characteristic, the
resistance value reflects the distance of contact.
D3C9 30 SM
Overview
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
PANEL
(D3C9)
[A]: Spacing dot
[B]: PET film
[C]: Transparent conductive film
[D]: Base glass
[E]: LCD panel
Self-Check (multi-touch calibration) mechanism
With the Multi-touch calibration in the self-check function, the touch panel is automatically
calibrated using the results of touches to the top left and bottom right positions.
The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are used for internal processing.
They do not indicate the positions or distance of the touched points. There is no problem
unless there is a huge difference between the values of the first calibration and the second
calibration.
SM 31 D3C9
Controlling the Power Supply
2.2 CONTROLLING THE POWER SUPPLY
2.2.1 EXITING ENERGY SAVING MODES

Because this model of Smart Operation Panel has no hardware keys, the MFP exits from energy
saving mode when the user does one of the following:
 Touches the display panel
 Lifts the ADF
 Sets an original in the ADF
With the Smart Operation Panel, recovery from energy saving modes differs from that of the
conventional control panel as follows.
Smart Operation Panel Conventional
This model Previous model control panel
The machine exits the

The machine does
energy saving mode
[Home] key Not available not exit the energy
and displays the
saving mode.
[Home] screen.
The machine exits

the energy saving
energy saving mode
[Check Status] key Not available mode and displays
and displays the
the [Check Status]
[Check Status] screen.
screen
The machine exits

the energy saving
[Energy Saver] mode and displays
Not available Not available
key the screen
selected in
Function Priority*1.

energy saving mode
[Back] key Not available Not available
and displays the
[Home] screen.
D3C9 32 SM
SMART OPERATION
Conventional
2ND GENERATION
This model Previous model control panel
PANEL
(D3C9)
energy saving mode
[Menu] key Not available Not available
and displays the
[Home] screen.

The machine does
energy saving mode
[Stop] key Not available not exit the energy
and displays the
saving mode.
[Home] screen.
The machine does

[Login/Logout] key Not available Not available not exit the energy
saving mode.
The machine exits the The machine exits the

The machine does
Touching the energy saving mode energy saving mode
not exit the energy
display panel and displays the and displays the
saving mode.
[Home] screen. [Home] screen.
The machine exits the energy saving mode and displays the [Home]
Lifting the ADF
screen.
Setting an original The machine exits the energy saving mode and displays the [Home]
in the ADF screen.
*1 When exiting Low Power mode, the machine displays the screen of the function that had been
selected before entering Low Power mode.
SM 33 D3C9
2.2.2 SCREEN STARTUP MODE
Startup Modes
There are two screen startup modes. The factory default setting is Normal.
1. Normal
This is the standard startup mode. When the main power of the MFP is turned ON, the control
panel starts up using less power compared to Quick mode.
2. Quick
By preparing for the next startup when the machine shuts down, the control panel starts up
faster than in Normal mode.
Changing the Screen Startup Mode

Screen Startup Mode can be changed in Screen Features.
Select [Screen Features] > [SYSTEM] > [Screen Device Settings] > [Screen Startup Mode], and
then select [Normal] or [Quick].
 In the following cases, the control panel starts up in Normal mode even if [Quick] is
selected.
 The power cord has been disconnected from the power outlet after the last
shutdown.
 The MFP is turned ON after being turned OFF due to reasons such as a power
failure.
 The MFP was not properly shut down the last time it was turned OFF.
D3C9 34 SM
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
How the Control Panel Starts Up
In Normal mode
PANEL
(D3C9)
The startup screen is displayed on the display panel, followed by the startup animation.
In Quick mode
The [Home] screen is displayed immediately after the main power of the MFP is turned ON.
The startup screen displayed when starting in Normal mode is not displayed.
How the Screen Shuts Down When Quick mode Is Selected

When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down The
main power indicator flashes during preparation for the next startup. The indicator turns off when
preparation is completed.
If the MFP is turned ON during shutdown, the preparation for the next startup continues. When
preparation for the next startup is completed, the control panel starts up in Quick mode.
 When Quick mode is selected, the control panel starts up faster than in Normal mode but
shutdown takes longer than in Normal mode.
SM 35 D3C9
2.2.3 SHUTDOWN FUNCTIONS
Normal Shutdown
The MFP is equipped with a function to shut down safely in order to:
 Prevent damage to the file systems in the HDD and the NAND flash memory.
 Prevent paper from being left inside the body of the MFP (except when paper is jammed).
If the main power switch is a rocker switch, the shutdown process begins when the rocker switch
is moved to the OFF position.
If the main power switch is a push switch, the shutdown process begins when the switch is
pressed. To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the push switch for 6 seconds. However, if
you force a shutdown during the shutdown process, data being processed may be lost. Forced
shutdown is to be used to shut down the MFP without disconnecting the power cord when the
shutdown process cannot be completed.
Other Shutdown Functions

This MFP has two additional shutdown functions to facilitate maintenance.
Shutting down the MFP for parts replacement (Starting up in Normal mode when Quick
mode is selected)
When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down.
This causes the shutdown process to take longer than when Normal mode is selected.
If you need to disconnect the power cord after shutdown in order to replace parts or for other
reasons, you can use the following procedure to shut down the MFP just like you do in Normal
mode. This shortens the time it takes to shut down the MFP.
 Procedure
Turn the main power switch OFF while holding down the [Stop] key on the control panel.
Continue to hold down the [Stop] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.
Shutting down the MFP for software updates (Shutting down the MFP with the control
panel in Sleep mode)
If you are going to turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes, you can use the following procedure to
shut down the MFP with the control panel in Sleep mode.
 Procedure
Turn the main power switch OFF while holding down the [EX1] key. Continue to hold
down the [EX1] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.
 You must turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes.

 If more than 5 minutes has elapsed after shutting down the MFP using the above
procedure, the machine starts up in Normal mode even if Quick mode is selected.
D3C9 36 SM
System Maintenance
SMART OPERATION
3. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
2ND GENERATION
PANEL
(D3C9)
3.1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
3.1.1 MAINTENANCE MODES

Service program (SP) modes for the Smart Operation Panel are as follows:
Mode Use Notes
The numeric keys are

required to enter this
mode. Display the soft
SP Mode (MFP) SP modes for the MFP (controller, engine)
keys of the GW
application or of the SP
mode.
SP modes for the Smart Operation Panel.

 Changing SP mode settings in the
Service mode
Screen Features menu. Same as above
(control panel)
 Installing and updating applications
that can be installed
Maintenance modes for the Android OS

Recovery mode  Updating firmware -
 Initializing all data
SM 37 D3C9
System Maintenance
3.1.2 LOGIN TO/LOGOUT FROM CONTROL PANEL SERVICE MODE
Login
In the same way as you log in to the SP Mode on the MFP, you use the soft keys to enter a
combination of numbers in order to login to the service mode of the control panel.
 You cannot log in to the service mode of the control panel when one of the following
screens is displayed.
 Stop All Jobs
 User Tools
 Address Book Management
Use the numeric keys on one of the following screens.
 Soft keys on the GW application screen
 Soft keys for the control panel’s service mode (displayed by pressing both the [EX3] key and
[Check Status] at the same time)
 To exit the soft keys, press [EXIT] on the screen.
Login Status Indicator

When you log in to the control panel’s service mode, the Screen Features screen is displayed.
 “Service” is displayed in the login information area [A].
 [Logout] is displayed in the Login key area [B] to allow logout from the service mode.
D3C9 38 SM
System Maintenance
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
Logout
Press [Logout] to log out from the control panel’s service mode.
PANEL
(D3C9)
 You need to logout manually because the Auto Logout function does not work.
Depending on the authentication settings of the MFP, the following screen is displayed when you
log out.
Authentication settings
Administrator Administrator Administrator

authentication: OFF authentication: ON authentication: ON
User authentication: OFF User authentication: OFF User authentication: ON
Screen of the function Screen of the function

selected in [Function selected in [Function [Home] screen
Priority] Priority]
When Entry to Service Mode Is Prohibited by the Administrator

The administrator of the MFP can prohibit entry into the control panel’s service mode by enabling
[Service Mode Lock] in [System Settings].
When [Service Mode Lock] is enabled, the machine does not enter the service mode even if you
enter the number combination for the control panel’s service mode. There will be no error
messages or beeping sounds to indicate login failure.
 The machine can enter the recovery mode even if [Service Mode Lock] is enabled.
SM 39 D3C9
System Maintenance
3.1.3 SERVICE MODE MENU

You can configure the following settings.
 WIRELESS & NETWORKS
 DEVICE
 SYSTEM
WIRELESS & NETWORKS
Menu level
Description
1st level 2nd level 3rd level
Wireless
Group Owner
Direct You can only view the setting.
Mode
Settings
Connection
You can only view the setting.
Password
DHCP Server IP
Address
DHCP IP Address
Range
Select Channel You can only view the setting.
View and configure devices that

PEER DEVICES
can be connected.
D3C9 40 SM
System Maintenance
Menu level
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
Description
PANEL
(D3C9)
REMEMBERED Displays groups that have been
GROUPS previously connected.
Bluetooth ON/OFF You can only view the setting.
SEARCH FOR Scans for Bluetooth devices in the

DEVICES vicinity.
(name of this
device)
PAIRED DEVICES View and configure paired devices.
AVAILABLE View and configure available

DEVICES devices.
Requests sent to the wireless LAN

unit of the Smart Operation Panel
Port Port
Port Forwarding can be forwarded to the controller
Forwarding Forwarding
Settings of the MFP. You can enable or
to Machine Cinfig 1-20
disable ports to forward these
requests.
DEVICE
Menu level
Description
INTERNAL Displays the total size of the

Storage Total space
STORAGE internal storage.
Displays the available space of the

Available
internal storage.
Apps (app data

Displays the size of applications in
& media
the internal storage.
content)
SM 41 D3C9
System Maintenance
Menu level
Description
Displays the total size of the SD

SD CARD *1 Total space
card.
Displays the available space of the

Available
SD card.
Apps (app data

Displays the size of applications in
& media
the SD card.
content)
Erase SD card Erase data written to the SD card.
Install from SD Install or update applications from

Apps Install
Card an SD card.
Enter a product key to install or

Install from
update applications from the
Server
server.
Activate Activate applications that have

Applications been installed from the server.
Update Update applications that have

Applications been installed.
Uninstall Uninstall applications.
Check Server Check if you can connect to the

Connect Server.
*1 Displayed only when an SD card is inserted into the SD card slot of the control panel.
D3C9 42 SM
System Maintenance
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
SYSTEM
PANEL
(D3C9)
Menu level
Description
Displays the following:

Screen
 Wi-Fi MAC address
Device
Status  Bluetooth address
Settings
 Interface Settings
Information
 Wi-Fi settings (ON/OFF)
Open source Displays the open source license

Legal information
licenses information.
Displays the versions of control

panel firmware and installed
applications.
Software Version When saving the software version
List list on an SD card, insert an SD
card into the SD card slot of the
control panel, and then press
[Save to SD Card].
Input a port number for

communication with the
Screen import/export and RFU server. The
Device Server Settings Port number input number is used for both
Settings HTTP and HTTPS connections.
(Normally, input a number within
55101-55111.)
Displays a list of installed

applications.
If you press [Settings] for an
Application
application, the setting screen for
Settings
the CE is displayed. The screen
does not change if the application
has no setting items.
SM 43 D3C9
System Maintenance
Menu level
Description
This setting gives priority to the

recovery time from energy saving
modes when an IC card
authentication device is
Authentication Authentication
connected.
priority mode priority mode
When this setting is selected, the
MFP does not enter Engine OFF
mode, and always recovers from
Silent mode.
You can specify the start time of

Authentication priority mode.
Start
* This can be changed only when
time(hhmm)
[Authentication priority mode] is
deselected.
You can specify the period of

validity of Authentication priority
Expiration mode.
time(hours) * This can be changed only when
[Authentication priority mode] is
deselected.
This setting prevents the control

panel from entering Sleep mode,
so that Bluetooth and other
Screen device communication devices remain
always-connection connected.
Setting When this setting is selected, the
control panel does not enter Sleep
mode. Only the LCD (display
panel) turns OFF.
Starts self-diagnosis of the control

Panel Self Check panel.
(page 45 "Panel Self Check")
D3C9 44 SM
System Maintenance
3.1.4 PANEL SELF CHECK
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
The following are available as self-diagnostics functions of the control panel:
PANEL
(D3C9)
 LED Check
 Key Check
 LCD Check
 Speaker Check
 TouchPanel Check
 TouchPanel Calibration
 MultiTouch Calibration
 Wireless LAN Check
 Bluetooth Check
 The [Self Check] menu is displayed in either English or Japanese. The language can be
changed using [Change Language] in the Home screen.
 If an unavailable language is selected, English will be displayed.
 With some diagnostic items, press [Back] [A] at the bottom of the screen to return to the
top menu of [Self Check].
SM 45 D3C9
System Maintenance
LED Check
Select the [All Light On] check box, and make sure the following LEDs light:
 Data In indicator (facsimile and printer modes)
 Fax indicator
 [Check Status] indicator (flashes in red and orange alternately)
When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].
Key Check
Check if the Extended Feature keys on the left side of the control panel (EX1, EX2, EX3 from top
to bottom) are functioning normally. If they are functioning normally, the key will turn green when
pressed.
[FOOT SW] is not used.
When the check is completed, press [End] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].
D3C9 46 SM
System Maintenance
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
LCD Check
Visually inspect the color of the LCD. The displayed colors are white/black/red/green/blue. The
PANEL
(D3C9)
LCD changes to the next color when you press it.
The check is completed when all colors have been displayed. The screen returns to the top menu
of [Self Check].
SM 47 D3C9
System Maintenance
Speaker Check
Tests the speaker by playing the reference sound.
1. Select the frequency (220Hz, 440Hz, 880Hz, 1760Hz, or 2000Hz).
2. Press [START/STOP] to play the sound.
3. Touch the volume bar, and play the sound at minimum and maximum volumes.
4. Press [START/STOP] to stop the sound.
D3C9 48 SM
System Maintenance
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
TouchPanel Check
For each of the nine reference points on the screen, the distance between the detected position
PANEL
(D3C9)
and the nearest reference point is displayed.
SM 49 D3C9
System Maintenance
TouchPanel Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel by touching the center of each of the five “+” signs.
The five “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left, bottom right, bottom left, center, and top
right.
After you have touched the five “+” signs, the display switches to the [Retry/OK] screen.
 If you want to calibrate again, press [EX1].
 If you want to confirm the calibration results, press the [EX3] key to return to the top menu of
[Self Check].
D3C9 50 SM
System Maintenance
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
MultiTouch Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel for multi-tap input methods such as pinch-in/pinch-out.
PANEL
(D3C9)
Touching the center of both “+” signs. The two “+” sign are displayed in the order of top left and
bottom right. Repeat the procedure. The touch panel will be calibrated.
 If you want to adjust it again, press the [EX1] key.
 If you want to confirm the calibration results, press the [EX3] key to return to the top menu of
[Self Check].
The “Back Key” in the message is actually the [EX1] key and the “Menu Key” in the message is
actually the [EX3] key.
 The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are for internal processing
and do not indicate the positions or distance of the points touched. There is no problem
unless there is a huge difference between the values of the first calibration and the
second calibration.
SM 51 D3C9
System Maintenance
Wireless LAN Check

Checks the condition of the wireless LAN connection.
When you select the connected access point, the signal strength, IP address and other
information are displayed.
D3C9 52 SM
System Maintenance
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
Bluetooth Check
Check and configure the Bluetooth device connection.
PANEL
(D3C9)
 You cannot switch Bluetooth to [ON] or [OFF] from the [Self Check] menu. Before
checking the Bluetooth device connection, specify [ON] for [Bluetooth] in [Screen
Features] > [WIRELESS & NETWORKS] > [Bluetooth].
SM 53 D3C9
System Maintenance
3.1.5 RECOVERY MODE

The recovery mode menu is as follows. Ask your manager for details on how to enter Recovery
mode.
Menu Description
reboot system now Reboots the Android OS.
Updates the Cheetah System firmware by specifying the

apply update from sdcard
folder path.
Deletes all installed applications and all settings on the

wipe data/factory reset
Cheetah-G1.
Deletes all data that is stored on the cache partition.

wipe cache partition Currently, Cheetah does not use the cache partition, so
nothing happens when this menu item is accessed.
Deletes all data that is stored on the free partition. Cheetah

wipe free area partition stores the version history on the free partition. When this
menu item is selected, it will then disappear.
wipe LegacyUI area Deletes Legacy UI.
micon update from sdcard Updates Keymicon by specifying the folder path.
 If [Update Firmware] is set to [Prohibit] in [System Settings] of the MFP, the control panel
cannot enter the recovery mode.
 Ask your manager for information on how to enter the recovery Mode.
D3C9 54 SM
Software Update
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
3.2 SOFTWARE UPDATE
PANEL
(D3C9)
3.2.1 UPDATING THE SMART OPERATION PANEL
There are three methods to update the Smart Operation Panel. The method is different depending
on what you want to update.
1. Installation/update from an SD card
2. Package update
3. Installation/update from the eDC Server
Control
Update method Features panel Applications
firmware
Update using an SD card.

 This is the only method to install an older
version of currently installed software.
 Enter the recovery mode to update the control
Installation/update panel firmware.
Yes Yes
from an SD card  Use the installation screen in the control
panel’s service mode to update applications.
 You can install or update multiple applications
at once.
 You can also uninstall an application.
Uses the Package update function of the GW+

controller to update the software.
 The software is updated in the following order:
controller firmware, applications, and then the
Package update Yes Yes
control panel firmware.
 The procedure for updating the control panel
firmware is the same as when updating from an
SD card using Recovery mode.
Downloads applications from the eDC Server for

Installation/update installation or update.
from the eDC This method is mainly for paid applications. A No Yes
Server product key is required when an application is
installed for the first time.
SM 55 D3C9
Software Update
The following two methods can be used for updating the firmware.
 Update from an SD card (recovery mode)
 Package update
The following three methods can be used for updating an application.
 Installation/update from an SD card
 Package update
 Installation/update from the eDC Server
3.2.2 INSTALLATION/UPDATE FROM AN SD CARD
Updating the Smart Operation Panel Firmware

Enter the recovery mode to update the firmware of the Smart Operation Panel.
 When [Quick] is selected for [Screen Startup Mode], the control panel cannot enter the
recovery mode. Change the startup mode to [Normal]. When update is completed,
restore the startup mode setting because the setting affects startup time.
 Shut down the MFP with [Normal] selected for [Screen Startup Mode], or shut it down
using the special shutdown procedure used for maintenance.
 If [Prohibit] is selected for [Update Firmware] in [System Settings], the machine cannot
enter Recovery mode. Ask the administrator of the MFP to change the setting.
Creating an SD card for firmware update
1. Download the update module “Cheetah System” from the Firmware Download
Center.
2. Execute the downloaded file.
A file named “part number + suffix.zip” will be created.
 Do not unzip the created file.

3. Copy the “part number + suffix.zip” file to the root directory of the SD card.
Updating the firmware (for the Cheetah System)
1. Turn OFF the MFP.
 Shut down the MFP with [Normal] selected for [Screen Startup Mode], or shut it
down using the special shutdown procedure used for maintenance.
2. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the control panel and start up the MFP in
Recovery mode.
 Ask your manager for details on how to enter the recovery mode.
 In the recovery mode, key functions are shown on the screen. However, the key
functions for moving/selecting directories are different for executing an update.
Check the key functions while operating.
D3C9 56 SM
Software Update
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
When moving/selecting
Keys When executing an update
PANEL
(D3C9)
directories
[EX1] Moves the cursor up. Executes updating.
[EX2] Moves the cursor down.

Cancels updating.
[EX3] Selects the item.
3. Select “apply update from sdcard” in the “Android system recovery” screen, and
then press the [EX3] key.
4. The contents of the SD card is displayed. Select “part number + suffix.zip” with the
[EX1] or [EX2] key, and then press the [EX3] key.
Example: “D1961400A.zip”
5. The installation screen is displayed.
SM 57 D3C9
Software Update
6. The version of the firmware installed in the control panel is displayed as “Current
version” and the version of the firmware saved on the SD card is displayed as
“Update version”. Make sure that you have the correct version.
7. When “Continue Update?” is displayed, press [OK] ([EX1] key).
The update process starts.
 To cancel the firmware update, press the [EX2] or [EX3] key.

8. When “Install from sdcard complete.” is displayed, select “reboot system now”
and then press the [EX1] key to reboot the system.
D3C9 58 SM
Software Update
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
Installing/Updating an Application
Creating an SD card for update
PANEL
(D3C9)
1. Download the update modules from the Firmware Download Center.
2. Unzip the downloaded file.
3. Create a folder named “romdata” in the root directory of the SD card.
4. Put the unzipped file in the “romdata” folder.
Update procedure
1. Log in to the control panel in service mode.
2. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the control panel.
3. Select [Apps] > [Install] > [Install from SD Card].
4. Select the application you want to install or update, and then press [Install]
5. The installation or update results are displayed.
6. Check that the application is correctly installed or updated, and then press [reboot
operation panel].
3.2.3 PACKAGE UPDATE

This method uses the package update function to update the control panel firmware and/or
applications. The package update function is provided by the controller.
Update is done in the following order:
1. Controller firmware
2. Applications
3. Control panel firmware
If the control panel firmware has to be updated, the control panel starts in the recovery mode and
the firmware is automatically updated.
The control panel restarts when updating is completed. The result notification is processed after
the control panel restarts.
When Installation/Update Is Prohibited

If [Prohibit] is selected for [Update Firmware] in [System Settings], the execution key is grayed out
and installation/update cannot be executed.
When trying to update from a PC, updating fails and the result is recorded as “Failed”.
SM 59 D3C9
Software Update
3.2.4 INSTALLATION/UPDATE FROM THE EDC SERVER

Downloads applications from the eDC Server, and installs or updates them.
This method is mainly for paid applications. A product key is required when an application is
installed for the first time.
 Installation/activation/update of applications from the server can only be done in the

service mode.
Check Server Connect

1. Log in to the control panel’s service mode.
2. Select [Apps] > [Install].
3. Press [Check Server Connect] and make sure that “Connect Server Succeeded!” is
displayed.
 The server address is stored in the firmware of the Smart Operation Panel.
 To connect to the server, the network settings of the MFP must be configured
correctly. For the required configuration, see the Field Service Manual of the MFP.
 If server connection fails, see page 63 "Troubleshooting" for error codes.
D3C9 60 SM
Software Update
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
Installation
PANEL
(D3C9)
3. Select [Install from Server].
4. Enter the product key and press [Execute].
5. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
 An application cannot be installed unless it is digitally signed by Ricoh.
Activation
3. Select [Activate Applications].
4. Select the application to be activated, and then enter the activation key and press
[Execute].
SM 61 D3C9
Software Update
 Except for onerous applications, there is no problem that the activation status is
"Unfinished".
Update
3. Select [Update Applications].
4. Select the application to be updated, and then press [Check Update Status].
D3C9 62 SM
Troubleshooting
SMART OPERATION
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
2ND GENERATION
PANEL
(D3C9)
4.1 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1.1 SOFTWARE UPDATE ERRORS
Errors that occur during application update from an SD card
Error message /
Explanation Solution
screen display
 Remove the SD card and

insert it again.
 Make sure that the directory
Insert a correct SD of the SD card is correct. You
-
card. must create the "app" folder
in the root directory of the SD
card and put the zip file in the
"app" folder.
You are trying to

Displayed when you attempt
install the same
to update an application that Check the file, and select [OK] or
application with a
is the same but has a [Cancel].
different part number.
different part number.
Is it OK to continue?
Displayed in the following

cases.
 You attempted to update
Some applications Restart the control panel and
a module (application) in
could not be installed. repeat the update procedure.
use.
 The application is
corrupted.
SM 63 D3C9
Troubleshooting
Error message /
Explanation Solution
screen display
 Make sure that the directory

of the SD card is correct. You
-
must create the "app" folder
(The application you
in the root directory of the SD
want to update is not -
card and put the zip file in the
displayed in the list of
"app" folder.
applications.)
 Check the application file in
the SD card.
D3C9 64 SM
Troubleshooting
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
Errors that occur during update from the eDC Server
PANEL
(D3C9)
Error code Explanation
101 Server connection error
102 Signature verification error
103 License error (for example, the product key was keyed in wrongly)
Dependency check error

Displayed when the control panel firmware version does not meet the
215 installation requirement of the application.
Example: The firmware version of the control panel is 1.02 and you
attempted to install an application that requires firmware version 1.03.
20X Other errors
Example of an error code display
 An additional 3-digit code may be displayed to indicate the details.

Example: 101-805
SM 65 D3C9
Troubleshooting
Errors that occur during remote (batch file) update

When the update is completed, a result report file (install_result_yyyymmddhhmm.txt) is created
in the same folder as the batch file.
The result report file shows the IP address of the MFP and whether the update process was
successful or not. “yyyymmddhhmm” shows the date and time according to the clock of the MFP.
Result Explanation
Succeed Updated the machine successfully.
Failed Failed to update the machine. An error code follows.
Not connected Failed to connect to the machine.
Can't get result Failed to obtain the result (occurs only with firmware updates).
Example of a result report file

 Name: install_result_201512041005.txt
 Contents:
192.168.0.100: Succeed
192.168.0.102: Failed error:XX (XX indicates an error code.)
192.168.0.103: Not connected
Error codes
The meanings of error codes recorded after "error:" in the result file are as follows:
Error codes recorded during firmware update
Error
Explanation Access Log
code
-2 Invalid file Recorded
-3 The target application cannot be found. Recorded
-501 Installation has already been requested. Recorded (*1)
-602 Invalid signature Recorded
-603 Updating is prohibited. Recorded
-604 Failed to put the application offline. Not recorded
-610 Authentication failed. Not recorded
D3C9 66 SM
Troubleshooting
Error
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
code
PANEL
(D3C9)
-699 Unknown error Recorded (*2)
-701 Version of the micro computer firmware is invalid. Recorded
-709 File structure error (invalid file) Recorded
-710 Writing failure Recorded
Error codes recorded during application update
Error
code
-2 Invalid file Recorded
-3 The target application cannot be found. Recorded
-4 The storage capacity is not enough. Recorded
-12 The version of the Android application cannot be Recorded

installed.
-602 Invalid signature Recorded
-603 Updating is prohibited. Recorded
-604 Failed to put the application offline. Not recorded
-610 Authentication failed. Not recorded
-699 Unknown error Recorded (*2)
*1 The error code recorded in the Access Log will be "223: machine-busy".
*2 If the error occurs during preparation for configuration change, it will not be recorded in the
Access Log.
 If the preparation for configuration change (putting the application offline,

authentication, file size check) cannot be carried out, an error code is displayed on
the screen. However, it is not recorded in the Access Log as a firmware
update/installation error.
SM 67 D3C9
Troubleshooting
Error codes recorded in the Access Log
Error
Error name Explanation Solution
code
Firmware update is Enable firmware update, and

49 fwu-prohibit
prohibited. repeat the procedure.
 Turn the main power OFF

and ON, and then repeat
60 other:E60 The HDD cannot be used. the procedure.
 If the HDD is damaged,
replace it.
The structure of the

application or control
62 other:E62 Prepare a valid package file.
panel firmware in the
package is invalid.
 If a job is under way in the

target application, wait until
Failed to terminate an
the job is finished, and then
application when
221 terminate-fail repeat the procedure.
attempting to update or
uninstall it.
the procedure.
Failed to verify the

Repeat the procedure using a
222 signature-invalid signature attached to the
valid signature.
application or firmware.
 Wait a while and repeat the

Failed to execute
procedure.
installation because
223 machine-busy  Turn the main power OFF
another function was
being used on the MFP.
the procedure.
 Reduce the number of

The storage capacity is applications to be installed.
224 capacity-lack
not enough.  Uninstall unnecessary
applications.
D3C9 68 SM
Troubleshooting
Error
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
code
PANEL
(D3C9)
The product ID is
225 download-fail Use a correct product key.
incorrect.
The control panel does Check the installation

not meet the installation requirements of the application.
226 dependency-check-fail
requirements of the Update the control panel as
application. necessary.
There are no remaining

licenses. The product key
that you are trying to use Use an unused product key to
has already been activate the application.
activated for another
device.
An invalid product key

Update the application using an
was used to issue the
activated product key.
license.
227 license-invalid
The number of licenses
Deactivate the application, and
issued has exceeded the
then activate it again.
limit.
The license has expired.

Use an unused product key to
The product key being
activate the application.
used is no longer valid.
The license contract is Use a valid product key to

invalid. activate the application.

the procedure.
 Check the file in the SD
The target firmware file
228 file-not-found * card.
cannot be found.
 Check the SD card slot. If
there is a problem with the
hardware, replace the
control panel PCB.
SM 69 D3C9
Troubleshooting
Error
code
The target update file is

invalid. Occurs in the
following cases.
 Failed to decompress
the file.
Repeat the procedure using a
229 file-invalid *  Failed to obtain
valid file.
application
information.
 Failed to read the
public key for
signature verification.
The folder directory of the

wrong-folder-structure Repeat the procedure using a
230 control panel firmware is
* valid directory.
invalid.
 Failed to write data

Turn the main power OFF and
when updating the
ON, and then repeat the
control panel
231 write-fail * procedure. If updating fails
firmware.
again, replace the control
 There is a problem
panel.
with the hardware.
 Check whether the network

The application could not is configured correctly.
be uninstalled because  If the server is under
deactivation failed. maintenance, wait a while
232 deactivate-fail  Failed to connect to and repeat the procedure.
the server.  Check the activation status
 The license has not of the application. If it has
been issued. not been activated, activate
it.

ON, and then repeat the
Failed to uninstall an
233 uninstall-fail procedure. If updating fails
application.
again, replace the control
panel.
D3C9 70 SM
Troubleshooting
Error
SMART OPERATION
2ND GENERATION
code
PANEL
(D3C9)
You attempted to uninstall
234 fixed-app an application that cannot Cancel uninstallation.
be uninstalled.
 Repeat the procedure

using a valid file.
The target file is invalid,
 If the same application has
235 install-fail and the Android OS
already been installed,
returns an error.
uninstall it and then repeat
the procedure.
The Android SDK version Check that the Android SDK

required by the version required by the
236 sdk-incompatible
application is not installed application is installed on the
on the control panel. control panel.
 Check the network

connection (SSL) settings.
Failed to connect to the  Check the proxy settings.
237 server-disconnect
eDC server.  If the server is under
maintenance, wait a while
and repeat the procedure.

255 panel-system * Software malfunction. ON, and then repeat the
procedure.
* These errors are not expected to occur.
SM 71 D3C9
Troubleshooting
4.1.2 ERRORS THAT OCCUR WHEN THE CONTROL PANEL

DOWNLOADS DATA FROM THE CONTROLLER AT STARTUP
Some of the graphic data used in the control panel display is model-specific. Model-specific
components are stored in the controller board of the MFP.
During startup, the control panel checks if it is necessary to update the model-specific data. If it is
necessary, the control panel downloads the data from the MFP controller board and installs it in
the control panel.
During update, a dialog appears to inform you that the settings are being changed. When the
update process is completed, a dialog indicates whether update was success or not.
Error code Explanation
E1 An error has occurred when downloading data from the controller

board of the MFP.
E2 An error has occurred when installing data on the control panel.

An additional error code is displayed after "E2".
D3C9 72 SM
D3CJ
(OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE M25)
Ver 1.5
(D3CJ)
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE M25
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS.............................................................. 1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 MECHANISM DESCRIPTIONS .................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ..................................................................................... 3
1.3 MECHANISM DETAILS ................................................................................................ 4
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 5

2.1 JOGGER UNIT REMOVAL ........................................................................................... 5
2.2 SENSORS .................................................................................................................... 9
2.2.1 FRONT FENCE SENSOR, REAR FENCE SENSOR .......................................... 9
2.2.2 LIFT SENSORS................................................................................................ 11
2.3 MOTORS .................................................................................................................... 16
2.3.1 FRONT FENCE MOTOR .................................................................................. 16
2.3.2 REAR FENCE MOTOR .................................................................................... 18
2.3.3 FENCE LIFT MOTOR ....................................................................................... 21
2.4 BOARD....................................................................................................................... 25
2.4.1 MAIN BOARD................................................................................................... 25
SM i D3CJ
SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS
Clip ring
Screw
Screw: Blue
Screw: binding screw (round flathead)
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
Hook (sensors)
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
FC Full color

Specifications
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper size:
Punch unit type Paper size
2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes SEF: A3, A4, A5, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2 ×
11, 81/4 × 14, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 8 × 10, 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K,
16K, 11 × 15, 11 × 14, 10 × 15, 10 ×14, SRA4, 226 × 310, 81/2 × 13
2
/5 , 81/2 × 131/2 , custom size
2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes LEF: A4, A5, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 16K, custom
size
2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 × 17, 8K, 11 × 15, 11 × 14, custom size
2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2 , 16K, custom size
4 holes type: 4 holes SEF: A3, A4, A5, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, B6 JIS, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 ×
13, 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 8 × 10, 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 8K, 16K, 11 × 15, 11 × 14, 10 × 15, 10 × 14, SRA4, 226 × 310,
81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 131/2 , custom size
4 holes type: 4 holes LEF: A4, A5, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 16K, custom
size
2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes SEF: A3, A4, A5, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, B6 JIS, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 ×
13, 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14, 81/4 × 13, 8 × 13, 8 × 10, 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 ×
81/2 , 8K, 16K, 11 × 15, 11 × 14, 10 × 15, 10 × 14, SRA4, 226 × 310,
81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 131/2 , custom size
2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes LEF: A4, A5, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2 , 16K, custom
size
2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes SEF: A3, B4 JIS, 11 × 17, 8K, 11 × 15, 11 × 14, 10 × 15, 10 × 14,
custom size
2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2 , 16K, custom size
Paper weight:
52.3–256.0 g/m 2 (14.0 lb. Bond–79.9 lb. Cover)
SM 1 D3CJ
Specifications
D3CJ 2 SM
Mechanism Descriptions
1.2 MECHANISM DESCRIPTIONS
1.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT

1 Fence Lift Motor Lowers/raises the shift jogger fences.
2 Rear Fence Shifts the rear shift jogger fence to the aligning position.
Motor
3 Front Fence Shifts the front shift jogger fence to the aligning position.
Motor
4 Front Fence Detects the home position of the front shift jogger fence.
Sensor
5 Rear Fence Detects the home position of the rear shift jogger fence.
Sensor
6 Main Board Controls the operation of the output jogger unit.
7 Lift Sensor 2 Detects the home position of the shift jogger fences.
8 Lift Sensor 1 Detects the home position of the shift jogger fences for the paper
aligning operation.
SM 3 D3CJ
Mechanism Details
1.3 MECHANISM DETAILS
The shift jogger fences wait at the home position (above the paper exit of the finisher shift tray),
and then they are lowered just before the finisher discharges the paper. After the paper is
discharged, the shift jogger fences align the side edges of the paper. After the discharge of the
copy sets is finished, the shift jogger fences are raised in order to return to its home position.
The shift jogger fences are lowered/raised whenever the finisher discharges the copy sets.
D3CJ 4 SM
Jogger Unit Removal
2.1 JOGGER UNIT REMOVAL
2. Remove the shift tray.
3. Disconnect the jogger unit cover at the front [A] and rear [B].
4. Below the front end of the jogger unit cover [A], loosen the screw (do not remove).
SM 5 D3CJ
Jogger Unit Removal
5. Pull the V-notch of the arm [B] out from under the loosened screw.
6. Remove the jogger unit cover.
7. Remove rear end cover [A] and front end cover [B].
D3CJ 6 SM
Jogger Unit Removal
8. At the rear, disconnect the jogger unit.
9. Disconnect the jogger unit at the front and rear.
10. The jogger unit hangs on two shoulder screws [A] (one at the front and one at the end).
11. Lift the jogger unit [B] off the shoulder screws and remove it.
SM 7 D3CJ
Jogger Unit Removal
12. Lay the jogger unit on a flat, clean surface.
D3CJ 8 SM
Sensors
2.2 SENSORS
2.2.1 FRONT FENCE SENSOR, REAR FENCE SENSOR

1. Remove the jogger unit. (Jogger Unit Removal)
2. The front fence sensor and rear fence sensor are mounted on the sensor bracket at the
center of the unit.
3. Remove the top cover.
4. Disconnect the sensor bracket.
SM 9 D3CJ
Sensors
5. Disconnect the sensors.
6. Disconnect the sensors from the sensor bracket.
7. The sensors are identical, but when reconnecting, connect the Black connector at B and
the White connector at W.
D3CJ 10 SM
Sensors
2.2.2 LIFT SENSORS

The lift sensors (the up sensor [1] and the down sensor [2]) are located at the rear end of
the jogger unit.
SM 11 D3CJ
Sensors
3. Disconnect the harness clamp from the plate.
4. Disconnect the lift motor and free the harnesses.
5. Disconnect the lift sensors.
D3CJ 12 SM
Sensors
6. Pull the freed harnesses away from the rear end of the unit.
7. Remove the rear end plate.
8. Set the plate aside with the actuator of the down sensor [1] and up sensor [2].
9. Remove bushing [3] so that it does not fall out and get lost accidentally.
SM 13 D3CJ
Sensors
10. Disconnect the first sensor.
11. Disconnect the second sensor.
Reinstallation
1. Set the long side of the actuator on the tip of the shaft [A].
2. Rotate it slightly until it fits over the "D" so that you can see the end of the shaft [B].
D3CJ 14 SM
Sensors
3. Set the bushing in the end plate.
4. Reattach the end plate so that the actuator is in the gap of the down sensor.
SM 15 D3CJ
Motors
2.3 MOTORS
2.3.1 FRONT FENCE MOTOR

2. The front fence motor is on the front end of the unit.
4. Loosen the tension bracket of the front fence drive belt. This will create some slack in the
belt so it is easier to remove.
D3CJ 16 SM
Motors
5. Disconnect the front fence motor.
6. Disconnect the drive belt.
7. Pull the motor out and disconnect it.
SM 17 D3CJ
Motors
8. Be sure to tighten the belt tension bracket after you reinstall the motor.
2.3.2 REAR FENCE MOTOR

2. The rear fence motor is on the rear end of the unit.
D3CJ 18 SM
Motors
4. Open the clamp and free the harness laying on top of the motor
5. Loosen the tension bracket of the rear fence drive belt. This will create some slack in the
belt so it is easier to remove.
6. Disconnect the motor.
SM 19 D3CJ
Motors
7. Disconnect the drive belt.
8. Pull the motor out and disconnect it.
9. Be sure to tighten the belt tension bracket after you reinstall the motor.
D3CJ 20 SM
Motors
2.3.3 FENCE LIFT MOTOR

1. Remove the jogger unit.(Jogger Unit Removal)
2. The fence lift motor is on the rear end of the unit.
4. Disconnect the harness clamp from the plate.
SM 21 D3CJ
Motors
5. Disconnect the lift motor and free the harnesses.
6. Disconnect the lift sensors.
7. Pull the freed harnesses away from the rear end of the unit.
D3CJ 22 SM
Motors
8. Remove the rear end plate.
9. Set the plate aside with the actuator of the down sensor [1] and up sensor [2].
10. Remove bushing [3] so that it does not fall out and get lost accidentally.
11. Disconnect the lift motor.
SM 23 D3CJ
Motors
12. Remove the motor.
D3CJ 24 SM
Board
2.4 BOARD
2.4.1 MAIN BOARD

2. The jogger unit control board is under the top cover.
4. Open the clamps and free the harnesses.
SM 25 D3CJ
Board
5. Disconnect the rear end of the board.
6. Disconnect the front end of the board.
7. Unfasten the board from the unit.
D3CJ 26 SM
Board
8. Remove the board.
SM 27 D3CJ
D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220
Finisher SR3210
BOOKLET FINISHER SR3220
FINISHER SR3210 (D3B8/D3B9)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 EXTERIOR PARTS ....................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 FRONT COVER ................................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 INNER COVER .................................................................................................. 2
1.1.3 REAR COVER.................................................................................................... 3
1.1.4 FRONT LEFT COVER ........................................................................................ 4
1.1.5 UPPER COVER ................................................................................................. 4
1.1.6 UPPER FRONT COVER .................................................................................... 5
1.1.7 UPPER REAR COVER....................................................................................... 6
1.1.8 PAPER EXIT GUIDE COVER ............................................................................. 7
1.1.9 UPPER LEFT COVER ........................................................................................ 7
1.1.10 PROOF TRAY .................................................................................................... 8
1.1.11 SHIFT TRAY ....................................................................................................... 8
1.1.12 BOOKLET TRAY (SR3220) ................................................................................ 8
1.1.13 LEFT CENTER COVER...................................................................................... 9
1.1.14 LEFT LOWER COVER ..................................................................................... 10
1.2 MAIN UNIT ................................................................................................................. 11
1.2.1 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE OPEN/CLOSE MOTOR ....................................... 11
1.2.2 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE OPEN/CLOSE HP SENSOR ............................... 11
1.2.3 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR ......................................................................... 12
1.2.4 PROOF TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR ............................................................. 12
1.2.5 ENTRANCE SENSOR ...................................................................................... 13
1.2.6 INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT SENSOR RIGHT ............................................. 13
1.2.7 INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT SENSOR LEFT ............................................... 14
1.2.8 SHIFT TRAY PAPER SURFACE SENSOR ....................................................... 14
1.2.9 SHIFT TRAY UPPER LIMIT SWITCH ............................................................... 15
1.2.10 SHIFT TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR ................................................................ 16
1.2.11 PAPER EXIT GUIDE HP SENSOR ................................................................... 16
1.2.12 ENTRANCE TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................................. 17
1.2.13 PROOF TRANSPORT MOTOR ........................................................................ 17
1.2.14 POSITIONING ROLLER MOTOR ..................................................................... 18
SM i D3B0
1.2.15 SHIFT MOTOR ................................................................................................. 19
1.2.16 PAPER EXIT TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................................ 20
1.2.17 PAPER EXIT GUIDE DRIVE MOTOR ............................................................... 21
1.2.18 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER MOTOR (SR3220) ............................. 22
1.2.19 STAPLER TRAY ............................................................................................... 23
1.2.20 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR ................................................................... 25
1.2.21 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER PRESSURE RELEASE HP SENSOR 26
1.2.22 FEEDOUT PAWL HP SENSOR ........................................................................ 27
1.2.23 JOGGER HP SENSOR .................................................................................... 27
1.2.24 JOGGER MOTOR ............................................................................................ 28
1.2.25 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER PRESSURE RELEASE MOTOR ....... 28
1.2.26 FEEDOUT PAWL MOTOR ................................................................................ 29
1.3 STAPLELESS STAPLER UNIT/STAPLER UNIT (SR3210) ......................................... 30
1.3.1 STAPLELESS STAPLER UNIT ......................................................................... 30
1.3.2 STAPLER UNIT ................................................................................................ 30
1.3.3 STAPLELESS STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR ................................................ 32
1.3.4 STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR ....................................................................... 33
1.3.5 PAPER GUIDE DRIVE MOTOR........................................................................ 33
1.3.6 STAPLELESS STAPLER HP SENSOR............................................................. 34
1.3.7 STAPLER HP SENSOR.................................................................................... 35
1.3.8 PAPER GUIDE HP SENSOR............................................................................ 36
1.4 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT (SR3220) ......................................................................... 37
1.4.1 STAPLER UNIT ................................................................................................ 37
1.4.2 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT............................................................................... 43
1.4.3 CENTER-FOLDING UNIT................................................................................. 44
1.4.4 CENTER-FOLDING TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR ........................................... 45
1.4.5 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER TRANSPORT SENSOR ...................................... 46
1.4.6 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER HP SENSOR....................................................... 47
1.4.7 CENTER-FOLDING BLADE HP SENSOR ........................................................ 48
1.4.8 CENTER-FOLDING CAM HP SENSOR ........................................................... 48
1.4.9 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER MOTOR .............................................................. 49
1.4.10 FOLDING BLADE MOTOR ............................................................................... 50
1.4.11 FOLDING TRANSPORT MOTOR ..................................................................... 50
1.4.12 BOOKLET TRAY FULL SENSOR 1, 2 .............................................................. 51
1.4.13 STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR (MIDDLE) ....................................................... 52
1.4.14 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT LOWER PRESSURE RELEASE HP SENSOR52
1.5 BOARDS .................................................................................................................... 54
1.5.1 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD .......................................................................... 54
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............................................................ 56
D3B0 ii SM
2.1 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3220 / FINISHER SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8) ............................. 56
2.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE ................................................ 56
Paper exit guide ................................................................................................... 56
2.1.2 STAPLELESS STAPLER (FINISHER SR3210 ONLY) ...................................... 57
2.1.3 SP6-160-004 (REPLACEMENT MODE FOR SERVICE)................................... 67
2.1.4 PARTS LAYOUT ............................................................................................... 68
2.1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................................... 69
2.1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................. 70
2.2 MECHANISMS ........................................................................................................... 76
2.2.1 SEPARATION MECHANISM ............................................................................ 76
2.2.2 PROOF TRAY TRANSPORT ............................................................................ 77
2.2.3 PROOF TRAY FULL DETECTION .................................................................... 77
2.2.4 SHIFT TRAY ASCENT/DESCENT MECHANISM .............................................. 78
2.2.5 SHIFT TRAY FULL DETECTION ...................................................................... 79
2.2.6 SHIFT MECHANISM ........................................................................................ 79
2.2.7 BOOKLET TRAY .............................................................................................. 80
2.2.8 STAPLED PAPER EJECT MECHANISM .......................................................... 81
2.2.9 BOOKLET STITCHING MECHANISM .............................................................. 87
2.3 PUNCH UNIT PU3050 (D717) .................................................................................... 91
2.3.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE ................................................ 91
2.3.2 PARTS LAYOUT ............................................................................................... 91
2.3.3 MECHANISM ................................................................................................... 92
Skew Correction ................................................................................................... 92
2.3.4 REGISTRATION ............................................................................................... 93
2.3.5 PUNCH HOLE ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 93
2.3.6 PAPER POSITION DETECTION ...................................................................... 94
2.3.7 PUNCH UNIT MOVEMENT .............................................................................. 95
2.3.8 PUNCH DRIVE................................................................................................. 95
2.3.9 PUNCH SCRAP COLLECTION/FULL DETECTION ......................................... 96
SM iii D3B0
READ THIS FIRST

Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
FC Full color
Trademarks
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
iOS® is a registered trademark or trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the
United States and certain other countries.
countries.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other
countries.
PictBridge is a trademark.
countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 6, 7, and 8 are as follows:
 Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6
 Windows® Internet Explorer® 7
 The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
 The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8
 The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
 The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Exterior Parts
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.1 EXTERIOR PARTS
1.1.1 FRONT COVER
1. Open the front cover [A].
2. Front cover [A] ( ×1)
SM 1 D3B8/D3B9
Exterior Parts
1.1.2 INNER COVER

1. Open the front cover
2. Remove the three knobs [A] (hook×1 for each).
 Use a flathead screwdriver to release the hooks.
3. Remove the three screws on the inner cover [A] ( ×3).
4. Pull the booklet stapler unit [A].
D3B8/D3B9 2 SM
Exterior Parts
5. Inner cover [B] ( ×1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.1.3 REAR COVER
1. Rear cover [A] ( ×3)
SM 3 D3B8/D3B9
Exterior Parts
1.1.4 FRONT LEFT COVER

1. Front cover
2. Inner cover
3. Paper exit guide cover
4. Front left cover [A] ( ×2)
1.1.5 UPPER COVER

1. Open the upper cover [A].
2. Upper cover [A] ( ×1, tab ×1)
D3B8/D3B9 4 SM
Exterior Parts
 When reattaching the upper cover, attach the clips so that their tabs face upward.
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.1.6 UPPER FRONT COVER
1. Front left cover
2. Upper cover
3. Upper front cover [A] ( ×3)
SM 5 D3B8/D3B9
Exterior Parts
1.1.7 UPPER REAR COVER

1. Rear cover
3. Upper left cover
4. Upper cover
5. Upper rear cover [A] ( ×3)
D3B8/D3B9 6 SM
Exterior Parts
1.1.8 PAPER EXIT GUIDE COVER
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1. Paper exit guide cover (front) [A]
2. Paper exit guide cover (rear) [B] ( ×4)
If the view of the screw hole is obstructed by the paper exit guides [C], hold the paper exit guides
on the sides and move them inward.
1.1.9 UPPER LEFT COVER

2. Upper left cover [A] ( ×2)
SM 7 D3B8/D3B9
Exterior Parts
1.1.10 PROOF TRAY

1. Upper front cover
2. Upper rear cover
3. Proof tray [A] ( ×2)
1.1.11 SHIFT TRAY

1. Shift tray [A] ( ×1)
1.1.12 BOOKLET TRAY (SR3220)

1. Booklet tray [A]
D3B8/D3B9 8 SM
Exterior Parts
1.1.13 LEFT CENTER COVER
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
1. Front cover
SR3220
SR3210
2. Rear cover
3. Shift tray
4. Shift tray front bracket [B] ( ×2)
5. Shift tray bracket [A] with the shift tray rear bracket [C]
6. Left center cover [A] ( ×2)
SM 9 D3B8/D3B9
Exterior Parts
1.1.14 LEFT LOWER COVER

For SR3220
1. Booklet tray
2. Left lower cover [A] ( ×2)
For SR3210
1. Left lower cover [A] ( ×2)
D3B8/D3B9 10 SM
Main Unit
1.2 MAIN UNIT
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.2.1 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE OPEN/CLOSE MOTOR
1. Proof tray
2. Paper exit guide plate open/close motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
1.2.2 PAPER EXIT GUIDE PLATE OPEN/CLOSE HP SENSOR

1. Proof tray
2. Paper exit guide plate HP sensor [A] ( ×1, x1)
SM 11 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit
1.2.3 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR

1. Proof tray
2. Proof tray full sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1)
1.2.4 PROOF TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR

1. Inner cover
2. Proof tray
3. Proof transport bracket [A] ( ×4)
D3B8/D3B9 12 SM
Main Unit
4. Proof tray paper exit sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.2.5 ENTRANCE SENSOR
1. Entrance sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1)
1.2.6 INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT SENSOR RIGHT

1. Upper cover
2. Intermediate transport sensor right [A] ( ×1, ×1,)
SM 13 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit
1.2.7 INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT SENSOR LEFT

1. Proof tray
2. Intermediate transport sensor left [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1)
1.2.8 SHIFT TRAY PAPER SURFACE SENSOR

1. Left center cover
2. Bracket [A] ( ×4)
D3B8/D3B9 14 SM
Main Unit
3. Shift tray paper surface sensor [A] ( ×1, x1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.2.9 SHIFT TRAY UPPER LIMIT SWITCH
1. Bracket of the shift tray
2. Shift tray upper limit switch [A] ( x2, hook × 1)
SM 15 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit
1.2.10 SHIFT TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR

1. Left center cover
2. Shift tray paper exit sensor [A] (hook ×1, x1, ×1)
1.2.11 PAPER EXIT GUIDE HP SENSOR

1. Upper left cover
2. Paper exit guide HP sensor with bracket [A] ( ×1)
3. Paper exit guide HP sensor [A] ( ×1, hook ×2)
D3B8/D3B9 16 SM
Main Unit
1.2.12 ENTRANCE TRANSPORT MOTOR
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
1. Rear cover
SR3220
SR3210
2. Entrance transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
1.2.13 PROOF TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Rear cover
2. Proof transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
SM 17 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit
1.2.14 POSITIONING ROLLER MOTOR

For SR3220
1. Rear cover
2. Positioning roller motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
For SR3210
1. Rear cover
2. Move the harness guide [A] to the right. ( ×2)
D3B8/D3B9 18 SM
Main Unit
3. Positioning roller motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.2.15 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Rear cover
2. Paper exit guide cover (rear)
3. Shift motor [A] ( ×2, x1)
SM 19 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit
1.2.16 PAPER EXIT TRANSPORT MOTOR

For SR3220
1. Rear cover
2. Paper exit transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
For SR3210
1. Rear cover
2. Harness guide [A] ( ×2, ×6)
D3B8/D3B9 20 SM
Main Unit
3. Paper exit transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.2.17 PAPER EXIT GUIDE DRIVE MOTOR
1. Upper left cover
2. Paper exit guide HP sensor bracket [A] ( ×1)
3. Paper exit guide drive motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
SM 21 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit
1.2.18 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER MOTOR (SR3220)

1. Rear cover
2. Feeler [A] ( ×1)
3. Controller board bracket [A] ( ×5, ×21, ×17, ground plate×1)
D3B8/D3B9 22 SM
Main Unit
4. Paper bundle transport upper motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.2.19 STAPLER TRAY
1. Inner cover
2. Front left cover 4)
3. Booklet stapler unit 43)
4. Harness guide [A] ( ×2, ×6) (SR3210 only)
SM 23 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit
5. Paper exit transport motor bracket [A] ( ×3, ×1)
6. Reverse roller (front) [A], reverse roller (rear) [B]
 Be careful not to damage the shape of the hook enclosed by the blue circle when
removing the reverse rollers.
D3B8/D3B9 24 SM
Main Unit
7. Stapler tray [A] ( ×7, ×2, ×1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.2.20 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR
1. Stapler tray
2. Stapler tray paper sensor bracket ( ×1)
SM 25 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit
3. Stapler tray paper sensor [A] ( x1, x1, x1)
1.2.21 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER PRESSURE RELEASE

HP SENSOR
1. Stapler tray
2. Paper bundle transport upper pressure release HP sensor [A] ( ×1)
D3B8/D3B9 26 SM
Main Unit
1.2.22 FEEDOUT PAWL HP SENSOR
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1. Stapler tray
2. Feedout pawl HP sensor [A] ( ×1)
1.2.23 JOGGER HP SENSOR

1. Stapler tray
2. Separate the jogger fence [A] from the jogger HP sensor [B].
3. Jogger HP sensor ( ×1)
 Release and remove the tab with a small driver, etc.
SM 27 D3B8/D3B9
Main Unit
1.2.24 JOGGER MOTOR

1. Stapler tray
2. Jogger motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
1.2.25 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT UPPER PRESSURE RELEASE

MOTOR
1. Stapler tray
2. Paper bundle transport upper pressure release motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
D3B8/D3B9 28 SM
Main Unit
1.2.26 FEEDOUT PAWL MOTOR
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1. Stapler tray
2. Feedout Pawl motor bracket [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×2)
3. Feedout Pawl motor [A] ( ×2)
SM 29 D3B8/D3B9
Stapleless Stapler Unit/Stapler Unit (SR3210)
1.3 STAPLELESS STAPLER UNIT/STAPLER UNIT (SR3210)

1.3.1 STAPLELESS STAPLER UNIT
1. Rear cover
2. Stapleless stapler unit [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×2)
1.3.2 STAPLER UNIT

1. Inner cover
2. Inner middle cover [A] ( ×2)
D3B8/D3B9 30 SM
3. Paper Guide Drive Motor with Bracket [A] ( ×2, ×1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
4. Unhook the spring of the stapler unit.
5. Bracket [A] and harnesses ( ×1, ×1, ×2)
SM 31 D3B8/D3B9
6. Bracket [A], Stapler unit [B] ( ×2)
1.3.3 STAPLELESS STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR

1. Move the stapleless stapler [A] to the recess.
D3B8/D3B9 32 SM
2. Stapleless stapler transfer motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.3.4 STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR
1. Move the stapleless stapler to the recess.
2. Stapler transfer motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
1.3.5 PAPER GUIDE DRIVE MOTOR

1. Inner cover
SM 33 D3B8/D3B9
3. Paper guide drive motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
1.3.6 STAPLELESS STAPLER HP SENSOR

1. Move the stapleless stapler to the recess
2. Stapleless stapler HP sensor bracket [A] ( ×1)
3. Stapleless stapler HP sensor [A] ( ×1)
D3B8/D3B9 34 SM
1.3.7 STAPLER HP SENSOR
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
2. Inner middle cover [A] ( ×2)
4. Stapler HP sensor [A] ( ×1)
SM 35 D3B8/D3B9
1.3.8 PAPER GUIDE HP SENSOR

1. Rear cover
2. Paper guide HP sensor [A] ( ×1, ×1, hook ×2)
D3B8/D3B9 36 SM
Booklet Stapler Unit (SR3220)
1.4 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT (SR3220)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.4.1 STAPLER UNIT
1. Open the front cover, and then remove two knobs [A] ( x1 for each)
2. Booklet stapler unit cover [A] ( x4, x1)
3. Stopper [A] ( ×2)
4. Disconnect three connectors and one clamp at the rear side of the booklet stapler unit.
SM 37 D3B8/D3B9
5. Pull out the booklet stapler unit, and then release three clamps.
6. Bring the stapler unit [A] near the center.
7. Small guide plate [A]
D3B8/D3B9 38 SM
8. Guide plate [A]
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
9. Stapler cartridge [A]
10. Cover [A] ( ×2)
SM 39 D3B8/D3B9
11. Stapler unit (clincher side) [A] ( ×3, ×2)
12. Disconnect three connectors and release four clamps on the stapler unit (driver side).
13. Stapler unit (driver side) [A] ( ×3, ×4)
D3B8/D3B9 40 SM
14. Attach the special tool* to the stapler unit to adjust the staple position of the stapler unit.
Check that four pins ([A] and [B]) on the special tool are fixed in the slots [C] on the stapler
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
unit as shown below.
[A]: Two pins for driver
[B]: Two pins for clincher
*Use the following part numbers to get the special tool

 HOLDER FLONT(B7936410)
 HOLDER: REAR (B7936420)
 ROD: CLAMP (B7936431)
 ADJUSTING SCREW: M4 (B7936432)
-or-
 B7936400 STAPLER:SERVICE PARTS ASSY
15. Tighten the wing screw [A] on the special tool to secure the stapler and special tool.
SM 41 D3B8/D3B9
16. Tighten the screws completely to secure the clincher side [A] of the stapler ( ×3).
17. Loosen the wing screw to remove the special tool.

18. Reattach all the removed parts.
 Make sure that the harnesses [B] are routed behind the resin part [A]. Otherwise, the
harnesses block the route of the stapler, which causes a stapler transfer motor error.
19. Check that the stapler works properly.
 All staple patterns must be checked.

 If there are any problems with the clincher, adjust the staple position with the special
tool again.
D3B8/D3B9 42 SM
1.4.2 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1. Rear cover
2. Remove the connectors of controller board [A] ( ×9, ×2, : ground plate×1)
3. Stopper [A] ( ×2)
4. Front cover
5. Pull out the booklet stapler unit [A].
6. Booklet stapler unit ( ×2)
 When you remove the booklet stapler unit from the main frame, be careful not to catch
the cable on the frame.
SM 43 D3B8/D3B9
1.4.3 CENTER-FOLDING UNIT

1. Booklet stapler unit
2. Knobs [A] ( ×2)
3. Booklet stapler unit cover [A] ( ×4, ×1)
4. Remove connectors ( ×1, ×4, ×4, ground plate×1)
D3B8/D3B9 44 SM
5. Bracket [A] ( ×1, ×3, ×1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
6. Center-folding unit [A] ( ×5)
1.4.4 CENTER-FOLDING TRAY PAPER EXIT SENSOR

1. Center-folding unit
2. Center-folding tray paper exit sensor bracket [A] ( ×1, ×1)
SM 45 D3B8/D3B9
3. Center-folding tray paper exit sensor [A]
1.4.5 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER TRANSPORT SENSOR

2. Trailing edge stopper transport sensor bracket [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×4)
D3B8/D3B9 46 SM
3. Trailing edge stopper paper surface sensor [A] ( ×1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.4.6 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER HP SENSOR
2. Trailing edge stopper HP sensor [A] ( ×1)
SM 47 D3B8/D3B9
1.4.7 CENTER-FOLDING BLADE HP SENSOR

2. Center-folding blade HP sensor [A] ( ×1)
1.4.8 CENTER-FOLDING CAM HP SENSOR

2. Center-folding cam HP sensor bracket [A] ( ×1, ×2)
D3B8/D3B9 48 SM
3. Center-folding cam HP sensor [A] ( ×1)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1.4.9 TRAILING EDGE STOPPER MOTOR
2. Trailing edge stopper motor [A] ( ×2, x1)
SM 49 D3B8/D3B9
1.4.10 FOLDING BLADE MOTOR

2. Folding blade motor [A] ( ×2)
1.4.11 FOLDING TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Center-folding
2. Folding transport motor [A] ( ×2)
D3B8/D3B9 50 SM
1.4.12 BOOKLET TRAY FULL SENSOR 1, 2
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1. Pull out the booklet stapler unit
2. Booklet tray full sensor bracket [A] ( ×2, ×2, ×2)
3. Booklet tray full sensor 1 [A], 2 [B]
SM 51 D3B8/D3B9
1.4.13 STAPLER TRANSFER MOTOR (MIDDLE)

1. Controller board bracket
2. Stapler transfer motor (Mid.) [A] ( ×2, ×1)
3. Damper [A] ( ×2)

Attach it in the correct orientation as shown below.
1.4.14 PAPER BUNDLE TRANSPORT LOWER PRESSURE RELEASE

HP SENSOR
1. Controller board bracket
2. Paper bundle transport lower pressure release HP sensor bracket [A] ( ×1, ×1)
D3B8/D3B9 52 SM
3. Paper bundle transport lower pressure release HP sensor [A]
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
SM 53 D3B8/D3B9
Boards
1.5 BOARDS
1.5.1 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD
 Make sure to set the SP provided on the metal plate of the main controller board after
replacing the main controller board.
 An EEPROM [A] is installed in the controller board to record the drive frequency and
number of sheets. When the controller board is replaced, take the EEPROM off the old
board and install it on the new one.
 There is an EEPROM on the new main controller board, but this is not needed and can
be discarded or kept as a spare part.
D3B8/D3B9 54 SM
Boards
1. Rear cover
2. Main controller board [A] ( ×4, ×23)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
SR3220
SR3210
SM 55 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet Finisher SR3220 / Finisher SR3210 (D3B9/D3B8)
2.1 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3220 / FINISHER SR3210
(D3B9/D3B8)
2.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE
Paper exit guide

Overview
To achieve stable stacking of printouts and to prevent users from touching the printouts,
paper exit guide [A] and paper exit guide cover [B] have been added.
Drive
With the paper exit guide drive motor [A] and the timing belt, the paper exit guides on both
sides move at the same time.
Home position is detected by the paper exit guide HP sensor [B].
D3B8/D3B9 56 SM
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
2.1.2 STAPLELESS STAPLER (FINISHER SR3210 ONLY)
Location of the stapleless stapler unit
The stapleless stapler unit [A] is on the same shaft as the conventional stapler unit [B], which
uses staples.
The stapleless stapler unit is at the back and the conventional stapler unit is at the front.
A spacer [C] on the shaft functions as a stopper, preventing the units from colliding.
SM 57 D3B8/D3B9
Paper stack mechanism for stapling

The maximum thickness of the stack is 50 sheets for the conventional stapler, and 5 sheets
for the stapleless stapler.
In order for the stapleless stapler to stack the paper smoothly, cam [C] and paper guide [B]
adjusts the gap [A] of the stapler tray [E].
The cam [C] controlled by the paper guide motor [D] pushes the paper guide [B] down during
the stapleless staple operation.
D3B8/D3B9 58 SM
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
Stapleless stapler unit movement mechanism
The stapleless stapler transfer motor [A] moves the stapleless stapler unit to the stapling
position from its home position when stapling with the stapleless stapler.
The home position is detected by the stapleless stapler HP sensor [B].
The stapler transfer motor [C] and the stapler HP sensor [D] are attached to the base plate.
SM 59 D3B8/D3B9
There is a gap at the paper guide when the stapleless stapler unit is at the home position
when stapling with the conventional stapler.
Because of this, paper will be guided with the paper guide [B] which works together with the
lever [A] when the stapleless stapler unit moves to its home position.
Stapleless Stapler mechanism

The staple operation in this option applies a crimping method. V-shaped teeth press
the sheets, applying a pressure of 220 kg.
D3B8/D3B9 60 SM
This option performs two stapling operations for a single stapling operation as follows.
[Moving to the first stapling position =>Stapling => Moving to the second stapling position =>
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
Stapling => Moving back to the home position]
Stapling is done by engaging the pressure cam [D] to stretch the pressure link [A], which
applies pressure between to the upper tooth [C] and the lower tooth [B]. Moving and stapling
operation for the stapler are driven by the stapler drive motor. The home position is detected
by the stapleless stapler HP sensor.
 Double/Single
The bond strength depends on the degree of entwining of fibers between sheets of the
paper bundle. Setting to Single or Double stapling allows you change the bond strength.
Single applies one staple operation.
Double applies one more, with the same operation as the first staple, at 4mm from the
first. The stapleless stapler drive motor moves the paper after the first stapling.
 Bundle ejection
After stapling, the trailing edge presser is released. The bundle of paper is ejected by
the paper output roller.
SM 61 D3B8/D3B9
Stapler movement mechanism

This stapler needs to staple twice for a single staple position, and must be moved to do this
stapling.
A cam [A], which is located in the stapler unit and has a groove on the body, and a securing
pin perform the moving operation when stapling.
The moving and stapling is done by the stapleless stapler drive motor [B] and the home
position is detected by the stapler HP sensor [C].
D3B8/D3B9 62 SM
Stapler movement process

The movement differs between Single and Double stapling.
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
[A]: Paper
[B]: Stapleless stapler unit
[P1]: Pre-stapling position
[P2]: Stapling position 1 (Single)
[P3]: Stapling position 2 (Double)
[P4]: Home position
Single stapling operation

1. The stapleless stapler unit is at the home position before receiving paper.
SM 63 D3B8/D3B9
2. The stapleless stapler unit moves to the pre-stapling position when starting a stapleless
stapling job.
3. After receiving the first sheet, the stapleless stapler unit moves from the Stapling Position 1
towards the rear by 2.2 mm. After stacking the sheets, stapling is performed. (Stapling
Position 1)
4. When stapling on multiple copies, the stapleless stapler unit moves towards the front by 2.2
mm from the pre-stapling position after the paper is delivered.
When stapling on multiple copies, Steps 3 and 4 are repeated.
D3B8/D3B9 64 SM
5. The stapleless stapler unit returns to the home position after completing the job.
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
Double stapling operation
6. The stapleless stapler unit is at the home position before receiving paper.
7. The stapleless stapler unit moves to the pre-stapling position when starting a stapleless
stapling job.
SM 65 D3B8/D3B9
8. After receiving the first sheet, the stapleless stapler unit moves from the Stapling Position 1
towards the rear by 2.2 mm. After stacking the sheets, stapling is performed. (Stapling
Position 1)
9. The stapleless stapler unit moves further towards the rear by 4 mm and performs stapling.
(Stapling Position 2)
10. When stapling multiple copies, the stapleless stapler unit moves towards the front by 6.4 mm
from the pre-stapling position after the paper is delivered.
When stapling multiple copies, Steps 3 to 5 are repeated.
D3B8/D3B9 66 SM
11. The stapler returns to the home position after completing the job.
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
2.1.3 SP6-160-004 (REPLACEMENT MODE FOR SERVICE)
It is easier to access the following parts for replacement after running SP-6-160-004.
 Positioning Roller [A]
The paper exit guide plate moves upwards and the positioning roller pops up in front for
easier access.
 Reverse Roller [B]
The paper exit guide plate moves upwards and the reverse roller can be accessed.
SM 67 D3B8/D3B9
2.1.4 PARTS LAYOUT
1 Booklet tray 7 Proof tray
2 Paper surface detecting arm 8 Junction gate
3 Stapler tray 9 Relay Guide Plate
4 Shift tray 10 Stapler unit
5 Paper exit guide plate 11 Booklet unit
6 Paper exit guide
D3B8/D3B9 68 SM
2.1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1 Edge stopper motor 12 Paper exit transport motor
2 Folding blade motor 13 Feedout Pawl motor
3 Folding transport motor 14 Stapler unit displacement motor
SM 69 D3B8/D3B9
Booklet transport (lower) pressure

4 15 Tray lift motor
release motor
Booklet bundle transport (upper) Paper exit guide drive motor*

5 16
motor
6 Shift motor 17 Paper guide drive motor*
7 Entrance transport motor 18 Stapleless stapler transfer motor*
8 Junction gate solenoid 19 Stapler transfer motor
9 Proof transport motor
Paper exit guide plate open/close

10
motor
11 Positioning roller motor
* Finisher SR3210 only
2.1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

Transport system
D3B8/D3B9 70 SM
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
Intermediate transport (right)
1 9 Upper cover open/close sensor
paper surface sensor
Intermediate transport (left) paper

2 10 Proof tray full sensor
surface sensor
3 Controller 11 Proof paper exit sensor
4 Shift HP sensor 12 Entrance paper surface sensor
5 Shift motor 13 Straight transport LED
6 Junction gate solenoid 14 Entrance jam detection LED
7 Proof transport motor 15 Stapler jam detection LED
8 Entrance transport motor
Shift system
SM 71 D3B8/D3B9
1 Tray lower limit sensor (upper) 8 Paper exit guide HP sensor
2 Tray lower limit sensor (lower) 9 Paper exit guide drive motor
3 Shift tray upper limit switch 10 Paper exit guide plate open/close motor
4 Shift tray paper surface sensor 11 Paper exit guide plate HP sensor
5 Paper Exit Transport Motor 12 Front door switch
6 Positioning roller HP sensor 13 Tray lift motor
7 Positioning roller motor
Jogger system
1 Jogger motor 5 Booklet stitch transport (upper) motor
2 Paper exit sensor 6 Stapler tray paper surface sensor
Booklet transport (upper)

3 7 Feedout Pawl HP sensor
pressure release motor
4 Jogger HP sensor 8 Feedout Pawl motor
D3B8/D3B9 72 SM
Stapler/Intermediate transport system
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1 Stapler transfer motor 6 Booklet transport jam detection LED
Paper Bundle Transport Lower Booklet unit jam detection LED1

2 7
Pressure Release HP Sensor
Booklet transport (lower) Stopper jam detection LED

3 8
pressure release motor
4 Stapler unit 9 Booklet unit jam detection LED2
5 Stapler HP sensor
SM 73 D3B8/D3B9
Stapleless stapler unit (Finisher SR3210 only)
1 Paper guide drive motor 6 Stapler transfer motor
2 Paper guide HP sensor 7 Stapler HP sensor
3 Stapleless stapler transfer motor 8 Stapleless Stapler drive motor
4 Stapleless stapler HP sensor
5 Stapler transfer motor
D3B8/D3B9 74 SM
Paper folding system
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1 Booklet tray full sensor 1 6 Folding cam HP sensor
2 Booklet tray full sensor 2 7 Folding blade HP sensor
3 Edge stopper motor 8 Center-folding paper exit sensor
4 Folding blade motor 9 Edge stopper paper surface sensor
5 Folding transport motor 10 Edge stopper HP sensor
SM 75 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms
Punch system
1 Hopper full sensor 6 Horizontal registration unit HP sensor
Horizontal registration correction unit HP

2 Punch unit drive motor 7
sensor
3 Punch unit HP sensor 8 Horizontal registration correction motor
4 Controller 9 Horizontal registration correction sensor
Horizontal registration unit

5
transfer motor
2.2 MECHANISMS
2.2.1 Separation mechanism
In the separation unit, the transport path of the paper is changed with the junction gate [A] by the
junction gate solenoid [B].
The change-over action of the junction gate is as follows.
D3B8/D3B9 76 SM
Mechanisms
Mode Proof mode Shift mode
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
Paper transport
path
Junction gate
ON OFF
solenoid
2.2.2 Proof tray transport

The proof paper exit roller, proof transport roller and the intermediate transport roller are driven by
the proof transport motor. The entrance transport roller is driven by the entrance transport motor.
2.2.3 Proof tray full detection

The proof tray full sensor [A] is above the proof tray. When a fixed amount of paper is ejected, it
switches OFF (blocked), and "Full" is detected.
SM 77 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms
2.2.4 Shift tray ascent/descent mechanism

Ascent/descent is performed according to the number of sheets of paper (paper surface height)
released to the shift tray. This height is detected by the shift tray paper surface sensor [B]
switching OFF/ON due to the rear end press lever [A], and is adjusted up and down by the tray lift
motor [C] so that the shift tray paper surface sensor switches OFF (blocked).
Ascent
The shift tray paper surface sensor detects the movement upper limit of the shift tray, and
disconnects the control circuit of the tray lift motor.
When paper is removed from the shift tray and the shift tray paper surface sensor switches
ON (unblocked), the shift tray ascends, and when the sensor switches OFF (blocked), it
stops.
Descent
 In shift mode
When every 5 sheets of paper are delivered to the shift tray, the tray moves up and down.
The shift tray first descends until the shift tray paper surface sensor switches ON
(unblocked), and the shift tray then ascends until the sensor switches OFF (blocked).
 In stapling mode
When exiting the paper to the shift tray, the tray lift motor switches ON/OFF for a definite
time, and the tray height is adjusted.
D3B8/D3B9 78 SM
Mechanisms
2.2.5 Shift tray full detection
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
Small size (Smaller than A4 SEF, LT LEF)
When the shift tray descends and the actuator [A] under the shift tray switches the lower limit
sensor (lower) [B] OFF (blocked), shift tray "Full" is detected.
Large size (Larger than B4, LG)
When the shift tray descends and the actuator [A] under the shift tray switches the lower limit
sensor (upper) [C] OFF (blocked), shift tray "Full" is detected.
2.2.6 Shift mechanism

The paper is shifted from side to side by the shift roller in the transport path.
The paper exit guide plate floats up from the paper exit roller, and waits for the paper. After the
shift paper exit sensor [A] switches ON, the paper exit guide plate is closed, and after the paper is
ejected to the tray, the shift roller returns to the home position (center).
This operation is performed for every sheet, and when the shift direction changes (this happens
when a new set of prints is fed out), the shift roller shifts in the opposite direction.
The shift roller [C] is moved to left and right by the shift motor [B].
The shift roller HP sensor [D] detects the home position of the shift roller.
SM 79 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms
2.2.7 Booklet tray

The paper surface detecting arm [A] detects the top of the pile of stapled booklets ejected to the
booklet tray.
The arm press [B] presses the bulge of the edges of the booklets from the top. The booklet tray
full sensor 1[C] and the booklet tray full sensor 2 [D] detect booklet tray "Full".
Tray full detection changes with the size of paper that has been stapled, and the number of sheets
in one bundle. If the tray is full, the machine stops.
D3B8/D3B9 80 SM
Mechanisms
Tray status detection
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
Tray status Booklet tray full sensor 1 Booklet tray full sensor 2
Standby position ON OFF
Full 1 ON ON
Full 2 OFF ON
Full 3 OFF OFF
2.2.8 Stapled paper eject mechanism

Paper must first be stored in the stapler tray [A]. After the stapler tray paper surface sensor
detects the paper sheet rear edge, the approach roller [C] descends, and transports the paper to
the stapler tray.
[A] Stapler tray [C] Approach roller
[B] Jogger fence
SM 81 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms
Stacking mechanism (approach roller operation)

The rear edges of the paper stacked in the stapler tray are aligned one sheet at a time.
The paper is transferred to the reverse roller [B] by the approach roller [A], driven by the
positioning roller motor, after the intermediate transport (left) paper surface sensor turns OFF.
The paper is then continuously pressed against the trailing edge fence by the reverse roller
[B].
 Trailing edge fence operation

The trailing edge fence used depends on the binding mode of the stapler. There are two
trailing edge fences, upper and lower.
Upper trailing edge fence
Operated by the booklet transport (upper) pressure release motor.
Binding modes: Edge binding mode (one position)/edge binding mode (two positions),
and booklet stitch mode (small sizes: B5, A4, LT)
D3B8/D3B9 82 SM
Mechanisms
Lower trailing edge fence

When the stapler moves to the center, the trailing edge fence is depressed by hitting the
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
stapler.
Binding modes: booklet stitch mode (large sizes: LG, B4, A3, DLT, 12"×17.7")
Jogger operation
After the paper rear edges have been aligned by stacking, jogger operation is then performed
to align the width.
The jogger fences [B] are opened and closed by the jogger motor [A]. At the start of jogging,
the jogger fences [B] stand by in a state where they are opened wider than the paper width.
When the rear edge of the transported paper is pressed against the trailing edge fence by the
reverse roller, the jogger fences move close to the edges of the paper.
Next, the jogger fences move to the edges, to align the paper.
After jogging is complete, the jogger fences again open, and stand by to receive the next
sheet.
The home position of the jogger fences is detected by the jogger HP sensor [C].
SM 83 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms
Paper exit guide plate open/close mechanism

When paper is stacked in the stapler tray, the paper exit guide plate [A] is opened to cancel
the load on the paper exit roller.
When paper is stacked in the stapler tray, the paper exit guide plate remains open from the
first page to the last page, and after the stapling operation is finished, the paper exit guide
plate is closed, and the paper is ejected by the paper exit roller and release belt.
The switching action of the paper exit guide plate is driven by the paper exit guide plate
open/close motor [B] via a link.
The home position of the paper exit guide plate is detected by the paper exit guide plate
open/close HP sensor [C].
D3B8/D3B9 84 SM
Mechanisms
Stapler displacement mechanism

The stapler unit [A] staples the stack of sheets.
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
The stapling position changes with the stapling mode and paper size.
When the operation starts after power is switched on, or the front door opens and closes, the
main controller board drives the stapler transfer motor [B] to return the stapler unit to the
home position.
The stapler unit starts to transfer the paper to the front side of the stapler frame, and when the
stapler HP sensor [C] under the stapler unit detects the screen, it temporarily stops. Then, the
stapler transfer motor is driven for a predetermined number of pulses. The stapler unit
moves to the rear side, and stands by.
To prevent the stapler unit colliding with the feedout pawl and trailing edge fences, a stapler
retreat sensor is provided.
Edge binding mode (one position):
SM 85 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms
Edge binding mode (two positions):
Booklet stitch mode (small sizes: B5, A4, LT):
Booklet stitch mode (large sizes: LG, B4, A3, DLT, 12"×17.7"):
Release mechanism
Paper exits to the shift tray by the feedout pawl and the paper exit roller after the stapling is
done.
When the feedout pawl motor [A] turns ON, the release belt is driven and the paper is moved
upwards by the feedout pawl [D].
When the stapled stack touches the paper exit roller, the paper exit guide plate [B] closes and
the paper is released. To prevent the stack from moving up too much, the feedout pawl motor
is stopped temporarily.
The home position of the release belt is detected by the feedout pawl HP sensor [C].
D3B8/D3B9 86 SM
Mechanisms
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
2.2.9 Booklet stitching mechanism
Paper which has been stitched in the center is pressed in by the booklet stitch folding roller with
the folding blade.
The paper folded by the folding roller is released by the paper exit shutter, and is stacked in the
booklet tray one sheet at a time.
A compact layout is achieved by sharing the edge binding stapler, booklet tray, transport, and
stack.
The stapler unit and the folding process unit are divided.
Booklet stitch bundle transport and pressure release
In the case of booklet stitching, the paper must be transported to the stapling position.
Booklet transport rollers are provided at two positions, upper and lower. The transport and
timing of the rollers which transport the bundle differ according to the paper size.
A3, DLT, 12"×17.7"
After booklet stitching is complete, the (upper) booklet transport pressure release motor
operates, and at the same time, the (lower) booklet transport roller starts applying pressure.
B4 or smaller
The (lower) booklet transport roller starts to pressurize after a certain amount of paper (as
much as the leading edge goes through the nip of the (lower) booklet transport roller) for each
size is transferred after booklet stitching is done.
SM 87 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms
The booklet transport rollers transport the paper and apply pressure.
They transport the paper to the stapling position, and thence to the folding unit.
Transport and pressure/release are driven by upper and lower motors.
Upper: Booklet transport (upper) pressure release motor [A] (also performs trailing edge
fence retreat)
Lower: Booklet transport (lower) pressure release motor [B]
D3B8/D3B9 88 SM
Mechanisms
Edge stopper operation

The paper is transported to the leading edge stopper of the paper folding unit.
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
The leading edge stopper moves to the standby position according to the folding size.
Folding blade operation

The binding position is pressed by the movement of the folding blade, and pushed in until the
folding roller grips.
The movement is performed by front and rear folding cams, and the folding blade moves
horizontally.
The rotation of the folding cam is controlled by the folding cam HP sensor, and the folding
blade is controlled by the folding blade HP sensor.
This is driven by the folding blade motor.
SM 89 D3B8/D3B9
Mechanisms
Folding roller operation

The folding rollers apply pressure up and down by springs, and press the binding parts.
When the stitching position reciprocates back and forth, the paper is folded again, and the
paper is then ejected.
D3B8/D3B9 90 SM
Punch Unit PU3050 (D717)
2.3 PUNCH UNIT PU3050 (D717)
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
2.3.1 Changes from the Previous Machine
To prevent fire spreading from the circuit board, a cover [A] is placed over the controller board.
2.3.2 Parts Layout
1 Hopper full sensor 6 Punch unit HP sensor
Horizontal registration correction unit

2 Punch drive motor 7
HP sensor
Horizontal registration correction

3 Punch HP sensor 8
motor
SM 91 D3B8/D3B9
Horizontal registration correction

4 Controller 9
sensor
5 Punch unit movement motor
2.3.3 Mechanism
The punch unit is in the finisher paper feed unit, and when paper transported from the main
machine stops, it makes two punch holes in the rear edge of the paper one sheet at a time.
Offset in the angle of the paper is corrected by skew correction, and offset in the lateral direction is
corrected by moving the punch unit.
Skew Correction
1. Paper is output from the main machine.
2. The entrance sensor [A] detects the paper.
3. The paper is brought into contact with the entrance roller [B].
4. Skew correction is applied to the paper, and it is transported.
D3B8/D3B9 92 SM
2.3.4 Registration
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
1. The horizontal registration correction sensor [A] detects the lateral offset of the paper.
2. The punch unit moves by the lateral offset detection amount, and completes punching.
2.3.5 Punch hole alignment adjustment
SP Description
SP6-100-001 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole
SP6-100-002 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 3-Hole
SP6-100-003 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Europe: 4-Hole
SP6-100-004 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NEU: 4-Hole
SP6-100-005 Sub-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 2-Hole
SP6-101-001 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN JPN/EU: 2-Hole
SP6-101-002 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 3-Hole
SP6-101-003 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN Europe: 4-Hole
SP6-101-004 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NEU: 4-Hole
SP6-101-005 Main-scanPunchPosAdj:2K/3K FIN NA: 2-Hole
SM 93 D3B8/D3B9
2.3.6 Paper position detection

When the horizontal registration correction sensor [A] of the punch unit detects the leading edge
of the paper from the MFP, the horizontal registration correction motor [B] is driven, and starts to
move the punch unit to the front.
After the horizontal registration correction sensor detects the paper rear edge (as viewed from the
front of the machine), the machine compares it with the paper size set in the MFP. The horizontal
registration correction motor is then driven to a predetermined position at the front, and stops the
punch unit.
D3B8/D3B9 94 SM
2.3.7 Punch unit movement
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3220
SR3210
The punch unit moves towards the front or the rear according to the paper size. The front-rear
movement is driven by the punch unit movement motor [A]. The home position of the punch unit is
detected by the punch unit HP sensor [B].
2.3.8 Punch drive

Punching is driven by the punch drive motor [A]. The punch home position is detected by the
punch HP sensor [B].
Punch drive motor rotation control feeds back the encoder wheel rotation speed detected by the
punch pulse wave count sensor [C] to the punch drive motor.
Punching is performed by moving the punch unit once back and forth, by rotating the punch shaft
180 degrees from the home position.
In the home position, the punch HP sensor is ON. The first sheet is punched by rotating the punch
shaft 180 degrees in the forward direction, and is completed when the punch HP sensor switches
from OFF to ON. The 2nd sheet is punched by rotating the punch shaft 180 degrees in the reverse
direction, and is completed when the punch HP sensor switches from OFF to ON.
For 2 hole punch [D] and 3 hole punch [E], the timings are different.
SM 95 D3B8/D3B9
2.3.9 Punch scrap collection/full detection

Punch scraps are collected by the hopper [A] provided under the punch unit. There is a hopper full
sensor [B] in the hopper unit, and when punch scraps fill up to the sensor, the hopper is detected
to be full.
D3B8/D3B9 96 SM
D685
BRIDGE UNIT BU3070
Latest Release: -
Initial Release: November, 2016
Rev. 08/12/2021
BRIDGE UNIT BU3070 (D685)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 DRIVE MOTOR UNIT ................................................................................... 1
1.2 PAPER EXIT SENSOR................................................................................. 4
1.3 BRIDGE UNIT TRANSPORT SENSOR ........................................................ 7
1.4 PAPER EXIT TRAY SET DETECTION SWITCH .......................................... 8
1.5 PAPER EXIT SWITCHING UNIT SET SWITCH ........................................... 9
SM i D685
READ THIS FIRST
Safety and Symbols

Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed

Trademarks
Drive Motor Unit
BU3070 (D685)
BRIDGE UNIT
1.1 DRIVE MOTOR UNIT
1. Separate the finisher, and remove the connecting bracket.

2. Bridge unit [A] ( ×2)
3. Drive motor unit cover [A] ( ×2)
SM 1 D685
Drive Motor Unit
4. Bridge unit rear cover [A] ( ×1)
5. Drive motor unit [A] ( ×3, ×2)
D685 2 SM
SM
3
D685
Drive Motor Unit
BRIDGE UNIT
BU3070 (D685)
Paper Exit Sensor
1.2 PAPER EXIT SENSOR
1. Bridge unit ( page 1 "Drive Motor Unit" )

2. Drive motor unit cover ( page 1 "Drive Motor Unit")
3. Bridge unit rear cover ( page 1 "Drive Motor Unit")
4. Paper exit tray [A]
5. Paper exit cover [A] ( ×1)
6. Paper exit switching unit [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×1)
D685 4 SM
Paper Exit Sensor
BU3070 (D685)
BRIDGE UNIT
7. Paper exit switching unit cover [A] ( ×3)
8. Guide plate [A]
SM 5 D685
Paper Exit Sensor
9. Guide plate [A] ( ×1)
10. Paper exit sensor [A]
D685 6 SM
Bridge Unit Transport Sensor
BU3070 (D685)
BRIDGE UNIT
1.3 BRIDGE UNIT TRANSPORT SENSOR
1. Bridge unit ( page 1 "Drive Motor Unit")

2. Upside down.
3. Bridge unit transport sensor [A] ( ×1)
SM 7 D685
Paper Exit Tray Set Detection Switch
1.4 PAPER EXIT TRAY SET DETECTION SWITCH
1. Paper exit tray

2. Paper exit tray set switch cover [A]
3. Paper exit tray set switch [A]
D685 8 SM
Paper Exit Switching Unit Set Switch
BU3070 (D685)
BRIDGE UNIT
1.5 PAPER EXIT SWITCHING UNIT SET SWITCH
1. Open the Paper exit switching unit [A]
2. Paper exit switching unit set switch cover [A]
3. Paper exit switching unit set switch [A]
SM 9 D685
D696
LCIT RT3030
Latest Release: -
Rev. 08/12/2021
LCIT RT3030 (D696)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 REAR COVER .............................................................................................. 1
1.2 FRONT COVER ........................................................................................... 4
1.3 UPPER COVER ........................................................................................... 5
1.4 RIGHT COVER............................................................................................. 6
1.5 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER............................ 7
1.6 PAPER FEED MOTOR................................................................................. 9
1.7 TRANSPORT MOTOR ............................................................................... 10
1.8 TRAY LIFT UNIT ........................................................................................ 11
1.9 CONTROLLER BOARD.............................................................................. 12
1.10 LCT SET SWITCH (FRONT)................................................................. 13
1.11 LCT SET SWITCH (REAR) ................................................................... 14
1.12 PAPER FEED SENSOR, PAPER END SENSOR, LIMIT SENSOR,
TRANSPORT SENSOR ................................................................................... 15
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................... 18

2.1 LCIT RT3030 (D696) .................................................................................. 18
2.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE ................................. 18
2.1.2 PARTS LAYOUT ............................................................................... 19
2.2 MECHANISM .............................................................................................. 21
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATING MECHANISM...................................... 21
2.2.2 DRIVE MECHANISM ......................................................................... 22
2.2.3 TRAY LIFT/DESCENT MECHANISM ................................................ 23
2.2.4 REMAINING PAPER/PAPER END DETECTION .............................. 24
SM i D696
READ THIS FIRST
Safety and Symbols

Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed

Trademarks
SM 3 D696
The Aim of Anti-tip Components and Precautions
The anti-tip components are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the
international standard for safety.
The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy in weight, from toppling
as a result of people running into or leaning onto the products, which can lead to serious
accidents such as persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe:
EN60950-1)
Therefore, removal of such components must always be with the consent of the customer.
Do not remove them at your own judgment.
SM 4 D696
Rear Cover
LCIT RT3030
1.1 REAR COVER
(D696)
1. Pull out the LCT [A].
2. Cable cover [A] ( ×1)
SM 1 D696
Rear Cover
3. Cable bracket [A] ( ×1, ×1)
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
4. Open the right cover [A].
SM 2 D696
Rear Cover
5. Rear cover [A] ( ×3)
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
SM 3 D696
Front Cover
1.2 FRONT COVER
LCIT RT3030
1. Open the right cover ( page 6)
(D696)
2. Front cover [A] ( ×4)
SM 4 D696
Upper Cover
1.3 UPPER COVER
LCIT RT3030
1. Front cover ( page 4)
(D696)
2. Rear cover ( page 1)
3. Upper cover [A] ( ×2)
SM 5 D696
Right Cover
1.4 RIGHT COVER
LCIT RT3030
1. Front cover ( page 4 )
(D696)
2. Right cover [A] ( ×1, ×1)
SM 6 D696
Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller, Friction Roller
1.5 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
3. Pick-up roller [A] ( ×1)
4. Sensor bracket [A] ( ×2)
SM 7 D696
2. Feed roller [A] ( ×1)
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
5. Friction roller [A] ( ×1)
SM 8 D696
Paper Feed Motor
1.6 PAPER FEED MOTOR
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
2. Paper feed motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
SM 9 D696
Transport Motor
1.7 TRANSPORT MOTOR
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
2. Transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1)
SM 10 D696
Tray Lift Unit
1.8 TRAY LIFT UNIT
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
2. Tray lift unit [A] ( ×3, ×1, ×10)
SM 11 D696
Controller Board
1.9 CONTROLLER BOARD
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
2. Controller board [A] ( ×4, ×9, ×2)
SM 12 D696
LCT Set Switch (Front)
1.10 LCT SET SWITCH (FRONT)
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
2. LCT set switch (front) [A] ( ×1)
SM 13 D696
LCT Set Switch (Rear)
1.11 LCT SET SWITCH (REAR)
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
2. LCT set switch (rear) [A] ( ×1)
SM 14 D696
Paper Feed Sensor, Paper End Sensor, Limit Sensor, Transport Sensor
1.12 PAPER FEED SENSOR, PAPER END SENSOR, LIMIT

SENSOR, TRANSPORT SENSOR
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
1. Upper cover ( page 5)
2. Paper feed unit [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×2)
3. Paper feed unit cover [A] ( ×5)
SM 15 D696
4. Paper feed sensor [A] ( ×1)
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
5. Paper end sensor [A] ( ×1)
6. Limit sensor [A] ( ×1)
SM 16 D696
7. Transport sensor [A] ( ×1)
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
SM 17 D696
LCIT RT3030 (D696)
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
2.1 LCIT RT3030 (D696)
2.1.1 CHANGES FROM THE PREVIOUS MACHINE
The maximum paper quantity is increased.
The bottom part [B] of the tray holder [A] which holds the paper tray and the timing belt has been
shortened to increase the maximum paper quantity ([C]: The tray holder for increasing the LCIT capacity).
A maximum of 1500 sheets of paper (thickness: 0.11 mm) can now be set, but only after changing some of
the parts (a paper tray, a belt pulley, and side fences). For the modification procedure, refer to
“Modification for Increasing the LCIT Capacity” in the installation procedure for LCIT RT3030 (D696) in the
main service manual.
• Tray horizontal adjustment
SM 18 D696
LCIT RT3030 (D696)
For the previous machine, the paper tray [C] could not be placed on the bottom plate [B], so a jig [A] was
placed in between to make the tray horizontal. For this machine, the paper tray can be placed on the base
plate so the jig is removed.
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
2.1.2 PARTS LAYOUT
1 Friction roller 6 Feed roller
2 Transport sensor 7 Paper end sensor
3 Transport roller 8 Pickup roller
SM 19 D696
LCIT RT3030 (D696)
LCIT RT3030
4 Paper feed sensor 9 Remaining paper sensor (inside lift unit)
(D696)
5 Upper limit sensor 10 Lower limit sensor
1 Tray set switch (front) 8 Transport motor
2 Paper feed sensor 9 Paper feed motor
3 Upper limit sensor 10 Remaining paper sensor (inside lift unit)
4 Transport sensor 11 Tray lift motor (inside tray lift unit)
5 Pick-up roller solenoid 12 Interlock switch
6 Paper end sensor 13 Controller board
7 Tray set switch (rear) 14 Lower limit sensor
SM 20 D696
Mechanism
2.2 MECHANISM
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATING MECHANISM
The tray unit and paper feed transport unit are integrated. The pick-up roller, feed roller and
reverse roller are common with the main frame’s paper feed unit. Both paper feed and paper
separation mechanisms use the same RF paper feed system.
In order to feed the paper at regular intervals, there is a paper feed sensor between the pick-up roller and
the feed roller, and this sensor is used to adjust the paper feed timing.
1. The paper feed motor turns ON, and feeds the first sheet of paper.
2. To prevent the next sheet from being transported, the pick-up solenoid turns ON just
before the trailing edge of the first sheet passes through the pick-up roller, and the pick- up
roller leaves the paper surface.
3. Just before the trailing edge of the first sheet leaves the paper feed roller, the paper feed
motor turns OFF.
However, at this time, if the paper feed sensor does not detect paper (the second sheet is not transported
to the paper feed sensor position), the paper feed motor does not turn OFF. Pre-feed is performed as
follows:
1. The pick-up solenoid turns OFF, and the second sheet of paper is transported to the paper
feed sensor position.
2. When the trailing edge of the second sheet passes the feed roller, the paper feed motor is
turned OFF. The pick-up solenoid remains OFF.
3. Just before the trailing edge of the first sheet passes the feed roller, the pick-up solenoid
turns OFF. The pick-up roller is brought into contact with the paper surface.
If paper is pre-fed, the pick-up solenoid will remain OFF, and this operation will not performed.
1. When the first sheet is transported a specified distance by the downstream transport roller,
the paper feed motor turns ON to feed the second sheet.
SM 21 D696
Mechanism
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
1 Friction roller 5 Feed roller
2 Transport sensor 6 Paper end sensor
3 Transport roller 7 Pick-up roller
4 Paper feed sensor
2.2.2 DRIVE MECHANISM

The pick-up roller and feed roller are driven by the paper feed motor. The transport roller is driven by the
transport motor. The friction roller is not driven.
SM 22 D696
Mechanism
2.2.3 TRAY LIFT/DESCENT MECHANISM
LCIT RT3030
The tray lift motor is coupled with the lift shaft, so that when the shaft rotates, the tray bottom plate
(D696)
rises.
Conditions for tray lift
• The main power is turned ON.
• During copying, the tray upper limit sensor is ON (the sensor is not blocked)
• The top cover is closed and the tray upper limit sensor is ON.
• The main machine recovers from low power mode.
• The tray lifts until the upper limit sensor turns OFF (the sensor is blocked).
No. Description
1 Upper limit sensor
2 Actuator
Conditions for tray descent

• The right cover is opened.
• Paper end is detected.
• The tray descends until the lower limit sensor turns OFF (the sensor is blocked).
SM 23 D696
Mechanism
LCIT RT3030
(D696)
No. Description
1 Remaining paper sensor (inside lift

unit)
2 Tray lift motor
3 Lower limit sensor
4 Tray
2.2.4 REMAINING PAPER/PAPER END DETECTION

Remaining paper in the paper feed tray is detected using a pulse count by the remaining paper sensor.
The paper remaining is displayed on the control panel.
Control panel
Remaining paper Paper end sensor
display
100% OFF 4 bars
70% OFF 3 bars
30% OFF 2 bars
10% OFF 1 bar
Paper end ON None
SM 24 D696
Mechanism
Paper end detection
There is a reflector-type sensor in the upper stay that detects the upper surface of the paper in the
tray.
1 Paper end sensor 2 Remaining paper sensor
SM 25 D696
M496
LCIT PB3260
Latest Release: -
Rev. 08/12/2021
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 PRECAUTIONS CONCERNING STABILIZERS ............................................................ 1
1.2 REAR COVER .............................................................................................................. 2
1.3 LEFT AND RIGHT TRAYS ............................................................................................ 3
1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER SENSOR ...................................................................................... 4
1.5 PAPER TRANSFER HOME POSITION SENSOR ......................................................... 5
1.6 CONTROLLER BOARD................................................................................................ 6
1.7 PAPER FEED UNIT ...................................................................................................... 7
1.8 LOWER LIMIT SENSOR............................................................................................... 9
1.9 LEFT TRAY SET SENSOR SWITCH .......................................................................... 10
1.10 RIGHT TRAY SET SENSOR SWITCH.................................................................. 11
1.11TRAY LIFT/PAPER TRANSFER UNIT ........................................................................ 12
1.12 TRAY LIFT MOTOR.............................................................................................. 13
1.13 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR ............................................................................... 14
1.14 REMAINING PAPER SENSOR ............................................................................ 15
1.15 PAPER FEED MOTOR ......................................................................................... 16
1.16 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR............................................................................. 17
1.17 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER .................................... 18
1.18 PAPER TRANSPORT SENSOR, PAPER FEED SENSOR, PAPER END SENSOR,
UPPER LIMIT SENSOR .................................................................................................... 20
1.19 RIGHT TRAY SIDE FENCE .................................................................................. 22
2.1 PARTS LAYOUT ......................................................................................................... 23
2.2 MECHANISM.............................................................................................................. 25
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATION MECHANISM...................................................... 25
2.2.2 DRIVE MECHANISM ........................................................................................ 25
2.2.3 FRICTION ROLLER/PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM .................... 25
2.2.4 PAPER FEED TRANSPORT MECHANISM ...................................................... 25
2.2.5 TRAY LIFT/DESCENT MECHANISM................................................................ 26
2.2.6 LEFT TRAY TRANSFER FENCE MECHANISM ............................................... 27
2.2.7 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION ................................................................... 28
SM i D787
D787 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST


Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable

Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
FC Full color
Trademarks
countries.
countries.

countries.
D787 4 SM
other countries.
• Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6













D787 6 SM
Precautions Concerning Stabilizers
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1.1 PRECAUTIONS CONCERNING STABILIZERS
Stabilizers are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the international standard
for safety.
The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy, from toppling as a
result of people running into or leaning onto them, which can lead to serious accidents such as
persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1)
Do not remove them under your own judgment.
SM 1 M495
Rear Cover
1.2 REAR COVER

1. Remove the connecting brackets [A] (2 brackets, ×2).
2. Remove the rear cover [A] ( ×2).
M495 2 SM
Left and Right Trays
1.3 LEFT AND RIGHT TRAYS
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Open the paper tray [A].
2. Remove the left tray [A].
3. Remove the right tray [A].
SM 3 M495
Left Tray Paper Sensor
1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER SENSOR

1. Remove the left tray. (Left and Right Trays)
3. Remove the left tray paper sensor [A] ( ×1).
M495 4 SM
Paper Transfer Home Position Sensor
1.5 PAPER TRANSFER HOME POSITION SENSOR
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Open the paper tray.
2. Remove the left cover [A] ( ×1).
3. Remove the paper transfer home position sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1, ×2).
4. Remove the paper transfer home position sensor [A].
SM 5 M495
Controller Board

2. Remove the controller board [A] ( ×4, ×9).
M495 6 SM
Paper Feed Unit
1.7 PAPER FEED UNIT
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Open the paper tray.
2. Open the paper transport cover [A].
3. Remove the interlock switch cover [A] ( ×1).
4. Remove the paper feed guide plate [A].
SM 7 M495
Paper Feed Unit
5. Remove the paper feed unit [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×1).
M495 8 SM
Lower Limit Sensor
1.8 LOWER LIMIT SENSOR
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Remove the right tray. (Left and Right Trays)
3. Remove the tray lift/paper transfer unit. (Tray Lift/Paper Transfer Unit)
4. Remove the lower limit sensor [A] ( ×1).
SM 9 M495
Left Tray Set Sensor Switch
1.9 LEFT TRAY SET SENSOR SWITCH

1. Remove the left tray. (Left and Right Trays)
3. Remove the left tray set sensor switch [A] ( ×1).
M495 10 SM
Right Tray Set Sensor Switch
1.10 RIGHT TRAY SET SENSOR SWITCH
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Remove the right tray. (Left and Right Trays)
3. Remove the right tray set sensor switch [A] ( ×1).
SM 11 M495
Tray Lift/Paper Transfer Unit
1.11 TRAY LIFT/PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

2. Remove the tray lift/paper transfer unit [A] ( ×4, ×3, ×14).
M495 12 SM
Tray Lift Motor
1.12 TRAY LIFT MOTOR
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
1. Remove the tray lift/paper transfer unit. (Tray Lift/Paper Transfer Unit)
2. Remove the tray motor unit [A] ( ×5).
3. Remove the tray lift motor [A] ( ×2).
SM 13 M495
Paper Transfer Motor
1.13 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR

1. Remove the tray motor unit. (Tray Lift Motor)
2. Remove the paper transfer motor [A] ( ×2, ×1).
M495 14 SM
Remaining Paper Sensor
1.14 REMAINING PAPER SENSOR
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
2. Remove the remaining paper sensor unit [A] ( ×2, ×1, ×3).
3. Remove the actuator [A].
4. Remove the remaining paper sensor [A].
SM 15 M495
Paper Feed Motor
1.15 PAPER FEED MOTOR

2. Remove the paper feed motor [A] ( ×2, ×1).
M495 16 SM
Paper Transport Motor
1.16 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
2. Remove the paper transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1).
SM 17 M495
1.17 PICK-UP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER, FRICTION ROLLER

2. Remove the holder [A] ( ×1).
3. Remove the pick-up roller [A].
4. Remove the feed roller [A].
M495 18 SM
5. Remove the friction roller [A] ( ×1).
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
SM 19 M495
Paper Transport Sensor, Paper Feed Sensor, Paper End Sensor, Upper Limit Sensor
1.18 PAPER TRANSPORT SENSOR, PAPER FEED SENSOR,

PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
2. Remove the paper transport sensor unit [A] ( ×1, ×1).
3. Remove the paper transport sensor [A].
4. Remove the paper feed sensor unit [A] ( ×1).
M495 20 SM
Paper Transport Sensor, Paper Feed Sensor, Paper End Sensor, Upper Limit Sensor
5. Remove the paper feed sensor [A].
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
6. Press the claw shown by the blue circle, and remove the paper end sensor [A] ( ×1).
7. Remove the upper limit sensor [A] ( ×1).
SM 21 M495
Right Tray Side Fence
1.19 RIGHT TRAY SIDE FENCE

1. Open the left and right trays.
2. Remove the right tray side fence (front) [A], right tray side fence (rear) [B], and right tray end
fence [C] ( ×3).
M495 22 SM
Parts Layout
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
2.1 PARTS LAYOUT

1 Pick-up roller 3 Paper transport roller
2 Feed roller 4 Friction roller
SM 23 M495
Parts Layout

1 Paper transfer home position sensor 10 Paper transport cover open/closed switch
2 Left tray set switch 11 Right tray set switch
3 Left tray paper end sensor 12 Lower limit sensor
4 Transfer fence home position sensor 13 Anti-condensation heater
5 Controller board 14 Paper feed sensor
6 Paper transfer motor 15 Paper end sensor
7 Paper lift motor 16 Paper transport sensor
8 Paper feed motor 17 Upper limit sensor
9 Paper transport motor 18 Pick-up solenoid
M495 24 SM
Mechanism
2.2 MECHANISM
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATION MECHANISM
The feed system is a RF paper feed system. The paper feed unit has a pick-up roller, feed roller,
and friction roller. The feed roller and friction roller are high durability rollers.

The pick-up roller and feed roller are driven by the paper feed motor. The transport roller is driven
by the transport motor. The friction roller is not driven.
2.2.3 FRICTION ROLLER/PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM

When the right tray is set, the friction roller comes in contact with the feed roller. The pick-up roller
touches the top sheet of paper that is to be fed.
When the right tray is opened, contact between the feed roller and friction roller, and contact
between the pick-up roller and paper are released.
2.2.4 PAPER FEED TRANSPORT MECHANISM

In order to feed the paper at regular intervals, there is a paper feed sensor between the pick-up
roller and the feed roller, and this sensor is used to adjust the paper feed timing.
SM 25 M495
Mechanism
2.2.5 TRAY LIFT/DESCENT MECHANISM
Tray lift
When the right tray is set, the tray set switch on the rear plate turns ON, and the tray lift motor
starts rotating. Simultaneously, the remaining paper sensor performs a pulse count to determine
the amount of paper in the tray.
The tray lift motor and rotation shaft are joined by a coupling, so that when the rotation shaft
rotates, the tray bottom plate rises. The tray bottom plate rises until the actuator turns OFF the
upper limit sensor (the sensor is blocked). If there is paper, lifting stops. If there is no paper, the
tray bottom plate descends.
• After the right tray is set, if the upper limit sensor is OFF, it will turn ON. The tray
descends until the lower limit sensor turns OFF. After stopping temporarily, the tray
bottom plate then rises to the upper limit.
No. Description
1 Upper limit sensor
2 Pick-up roller
Tray descent
If there is no paper when the upper limit operation is completed, the tray bottom plate descends
until the lower limit sensor turns OFF (the sensor is blocked). The tray bottom plate will descend if
paper end is detected during paper transport.
M495 26 SM
Mechanism
LCIT PB3260
(M496)
No. Description
1 Remaining paper sensor (inside lift/transfer unit)
2 Tray lift motor (inside lift/transfer unit)
3 Lower limit sensor
4 Actuator
5 Tray bottom plate
2.2.6 LEFT TRAY TRANSFER FENCE MECHANISM

After the right tray has finished descending, if there is paper in the left tray, the left tray transfer
fence shifts, and the paper in the left tray is transferred to the paper feed tray. When the paper has
been transferred to the right tray, the left tray transfer fence returns to its original position, until the
transfer home position sensor turns OFF (the sensor is blocked).
The left tray end fence is moved by the transfer motor (DC motor inside the lift/transfer unit).
When the right tray has finished descending, the transfer motor is driven, and the left tray transfer
fence begins to shift.
After the left tray paper sensor detects no paper (detection is by a feeler), the left tray transfer
fence shifts for a certain time that depends on the paper size. After shifting, the transfer motor
turns OFF.
• The time for which the left tray transfer fence shifts is set for either A4 or LT paper, so
that the paper stops at the feed position of the right tray
SM 27 M495
Mechanism
No. Description
1 Left tray transfer fence
2 Paper transfer home position sensor
3 Left tray paper sensor
4 Paper transfer motor (inside lift transfer unit)
2.2.7 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION
Right tray remaining paper detection

The remaining paper sensor in the lift/transfer unit performs a pulse count.
Left tray remaining paper detection

The left tray paper sensor is turned ON/OFF using a feeler.
If there is paper in the left tray, paper end will not be displayed even if there is no paper in the right
tray.
Remaining paper Left tray paper sensor Display

100% OFF 4 bars
Paper end ON None
M495 28 SM
D3BA/D3BB
Finisher SR3230
Booklet Finisher SR3240
Latest Release: -
Rev. 08/12/2021
FINISHER SR3230
BOOKLET FINISHER SR3240
(D3BA/D3BB)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 REAR UPPER COVER, REAR LOWER COVER, UPPER COVER .................... 1
1.1.2 FRONT COVER, FRONT LEFT SIDE COVER ................................................... 3
1.1.3 PAPER GUIDE COVER ...................................................................................... 4
1.1.4 PROOF TRAY .................................................................................................... 6
1.1.5 SHIFT TRAY ....................................................................................................... 7
1.1.6 LEFT COVER ..................................................................................................... 7
1.2 BOARDS ...................................................................................................................... 9
1.2.1 MAIN BOARD..................................................................................................... 9
When replacing the main board .............................................................................. 9
1.3 PAPER GUIDE ........................................................................................................... 11
1.3.1 PAPER GUIDE UNIT ........................................................................................ 11
1.4 MAIN MOTORS .......................................................................................................... 14
1.4.1 CORNER STAPLING UNIT .............................................................................. 14
1.4.2 PAPER EXIT GATE MOTOR ............................................................................ 19
1.4.3 LEADING EDGE GUIDE MOTOR..................................................................... 20
1.4.4 TRAILING EDGE PRESSURE PLATE MOTOR ................................................ 20
1.4.5 STACKING ROLLER MOTOR .......................................................................... 21
1.4.6 FEED OUT MOTOR ......................................................................................... 21
1.4.7 JOGGER MOTOR ............................................................................................ 21
1.4.8 PAPER GUIDE MOTOR ................................................................................... 22
1.5 SENSORS .................................................................................................................. 24
1.5.1 SHIFT TRAY PAPER SENSOR......................................................................... 24
1.5.2 TRAILING EDGE PRESSURE PLATE HP SENSOR ........................................ 25
1.5.3 STACKING ROLLER HP SENSOR................................................................... 26
1.5.4 STAPLE TRAY PAPER SENSOR ..................................................................... 27
1.5.5 PAPER GUIDE HP SENSOR............................................................................ 28
1.6 STAPLER UNIT .......................................................................................................... 30
SM i D3B0
1.7 PUNCH UNIT ............................................................................................................. 33
2.1 LAYOUT ..................................................................................................................... 36
2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 36
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................. 37
2.1.3 TRANSPORT LAYOUT..................................................................................... 40
2.1.4 PROOF TRANSPORT LAYOUT (DRIVE) ......................................................... 41
2.1.5 PROOF TRANSPORT LAYOUT (SENSORS) ................................................... 41
2.1.6 SHIFT TRANSPORT LAYOUT (DRIVE) ............................................................ 42
2.2 OPERATION DETAILS ............................................................................................... 43
2.2.1 SHIFT OPERATION (SHIFT TRANSPORT)...................................................... 43
2.2.2 PRE-STACK OPERATION (IN CORNER STAPLING) ....................................... 43
2.2.3 UPPER TRAY SHIFT DRIVE / LIMIT SENSOR / FULL SENSOR ..................... 44
2.2.4 PULL-IN ROLLER / PAPER STACK HOLDER .................................................. 46
Components ......................................................................................................... 46
Operation ............................................................................................................. 46
2.2.5 CORNER STAPLING........................................................................................ 48
Components ......................................................................................................... 48
Edge Guide .......................................................................................................... 49
Stapler Movement ................................................................................................ 50
Positioning Roller / Drag Roller ............................................................................. 50
Jogger .................................................................................................................. 51
Stapling ................................................................................................................ 52
Feeding-out .......................................................................................................... 52
2.2.6 PAPER EXIT GUIDE ........................................................................................ 53
Paper Guide Unit .................................................................................................. 53
Related SP Codes ................................................................................................ 53
Paper Guide Removal .......................................................................................... 53
2.2.7 SP6-160-004 (REPLACEMENT MODE FOR SERVICE)................................... 54
D3B0 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST

Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
FC Full color
Trademarks
countries.
countries.
countries.
other countries.
 Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 6
 The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
 The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Covers
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover
1. Remove the rear upper cover [A].
SM 1 D3BA/D3BB
Covers
3. Open the front door [A], and remove the screws of the upper cover.
4. Remove the upper cover [A] (hook x 2).
D3BA/D3BB 2 SM
Covers
1.1.2 Front Cover, Front Left Side Cover
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
1. Open the front door [A], and then remove the front door bracket [B] ( x 1).
2. Remove the front door [A].
3. Remove the front left side cover [A] ( x 2).
SM 3 D3BA/D3BB
Covers
1.1.3 Paper Guide Cover

1. Remove the rear upper cover.
2. Remove the shift tray [A] ( x1).
3. Push the guides in to the center.
D3BA/D3BB 4 SM
Covers
4. Remove the rear paper guide cover [A] ( x2).
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
5. Remove the front paper guide cover [A] ( x2).
6. Remove the paper guide cover [A] screws ( x2).
SM 5 D3BA/D3BB
Covers
7. Disconnect the front tab, and then remove the cover.
1.1.4 Proof Tray

1. Remove the following covers.
• Rear upper cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
• Upper cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
2. Remove the proof tray [A] ( x 2).
D3BA/D3BB 6 SM
Covers
1.1.5 Shift Tray
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
1. Remove the shift tray [A] ( x 1).
1.1.6 Left Cover

1. Remove the shift tray [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the rear mold bracket [A] ( x 1).
SM 7 D3BA/D3BB
Covers
3. Remove the front mold bracket [A] ( x 1).
4. Remove the shift tray bracket [A] ( x 4).
5. Remove the left cover [A] ( x 3).
D3BA/D3BB 8 SM
Boards
1.2 BOARDS
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
1.2.1 Main Board
• Rear lower cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
2. Remove the main board [A] ( x 8, connector x all).
When replacing the main board

This board has two blocks of dip switches. When you reinstall the main board, follow the
procedure below regarding the dip switch settings.
1. Check the settings of dip switch [A] on the old main board.
2. Replace the main board.
3. Change the settings of dip switch [A] on the new main board to match the settings on the old
main board.
4. Make sure the switches of dip switch [B] on the new main board are all OFF.
SM 9 D3BA/D3BB
Boards
5. Remove the EEPROM [C] from the old board and install it on the new board.
6. Locate the label [A] attached near the right corner of the board.
7. Go into the SP mode, open these SP codes, and then enter the numbers you see on the
label.
• SP6121-001 NV Adj. Data: Jog Position: Factory Adj.
• SP6121-002 NV Adj. Data: Fold Position: Factory Adj.
D3BA/D3BB 10 SM
Paper Guide
1.3 PAPER GUIDE
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
1.3.1 Paper Guide Unit
1. Remove the paper guide covers. (Paper Guide Cover)
2. Disconnect the cover support bracket.
3. Remove the cover support bracket.
4. Loosen (do not remove) the screws on both ends of the paper exit. This will loosen the tray
so that you can move the tray slightly side-to-side; then you can remove the bracket screws
more easily.
5. Disconnect the rear end of the paper guide unit bracket [A].
SM 11 D3BA/D3BB
Paper Guide
6. Disconnect the front end of the paper guide unit bracket [B].
7. At the rear, open the clamps and disconnect the motor and sensor harnesses.
8. Hold the unit bracket with both hands, lower the rear end [A], roll it toward you slightly, and
then disconnect the harnesses [B].
D3BA/D3BB 12 SM
Paper Guide
9. Lay the unit on a flat clean surface so that you can see the paper guide motor [1] and paper
guide position sensor bracket [2].
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
SM 13 D3BA/D3BB
Main Motors
1.4 MAIN MOTORS

1.4.1 Corner Stapling Unit
• Front cover (Front Cover, Front Left Side Cover)
• Front left side cover (Front Cover, Front Left Side Cover)
• Left cover (Left Cover)
• Rear lower cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
2. Remove the inner upper cover [A] ( x 3).
• Disconnect the harness from the back side of the inner upper cover when you
remove the inner upper cover.
D3BA/D3BB 14 SM
Main Motors
3. Remove 6 screws from the front side of the finisher ( x 6).
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
4. Remove the bushing [A] from the front side of the finisher (C-ring x 1).
5. Remove the pressure release motor bracket [A] from the rear side of the finisher ( x 2).
SM 15 D3BA/D3BB
Main Motors
6. Remove the gear [A] from the rear side of the finisher (snap-fit x 1).
7. Remove the pulley [A] from the rear side of the finisher (C-ring x 1).
D3BA/D3BB 16 SM
Main Motors
8. Remove 6 screws from the rear side of the finisher ( x 6).
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
9. Open the clamps shown below ( x 6).
SM 17 D3BA/D3BB
Main Motors
10. Disconnect the ground wire [A] of the main board ( x 1).
11. Disconnect the connectors shown below ( x 8).
12. Pull out the harnesses disconnected in step 11 to the right side of the finisher through the
hole [A].
13. Remove the harness from the clamps ( x 4).
D3BA/D3BB 18 SM
Main Motors
14. Remove the corner stapling unit [A] from between the front and left plate.
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
1.4.2 Paper Exit Gate Motor
1. Remove the corner stapling unit. (Corner Stapling Unit)
2. Remove the stapler bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1).
3. Remove the paper exit gate motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).
SM 19 D3BA/D3BB
Main Motors
1.4.3 Leading Edge Guide Motor

3. Remove the leading edge guide motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).
1.4.4 Trailing Edge Pressure Plate Motor

2. Remove the trailing edge pressure plate motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).
D3BA/D3BB 20 SM
Main Motors
1.4.5 Stacking Roller Motor
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
1. Remove the rear upper cover. (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
2. Remove the stacking roller motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).
1.4.6 Feed Out Motor

2. Remove the feed out motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 2).
1.4.7 Jogger Motor

SM 21 D3BA/D3BB
Main Motors
3. Remove the feed out motor. (Feed Out Motor)

4. Remove the jogger motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).
1.4.8 Paper Guide Motor

1. Remove the paper guide unit. (Paper Guide Unit)
2. The paper guide motor is at [A].
3. Remove the sensor bracket ( x1).
D3BA/D3BB 22 SM
Main Motors
4. Unfasten the motor, and disconnect the belt ( x2, x1).
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
5. Disconnect the motor harness, and then remove the motor ( x1).
6. When you re-install the motor, make sure that the connector is pointing to the back of the unit.
SM 23 D3BA/D3BB
Sensors
1.5 SENSORS
1.5.1 Shift Tray Paper Sensor
3. Remove the shift tray paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
4. Remove the shift tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1).
D3BA/D3BB 24 SM
Sensors
1.5.2 Trailing Edge Pressure Plate HP Sensor
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
3. Turn back the stapler bracket, and remove the trailing edge pressure plate HP sensor bracket
[A] ( x 1).
4. Remove the trailing edge pressure plate HP sensor [A] ( x 1).
SM 25 D3BA/D3BB
Sensors
1.5.3 Stacking Roller HP Sensor

3. Turn back the stapler bracket, and remove the paper exit gate motor bracket [A] ( x 1,
x 1).
4. Remove the stacking roller HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
D3BA/D3BB 26 SM
Sensors
5. Remove the stacking roller HP sensor [A] ( x 1).
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
1.5.4 Staple Tray Paper Sensor
3. Remove the staple tray paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1).
SM 27 D3BA/D3BB
Sensors
4. Remove the staple tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1).
1.5.5 Paper Guide HP Sensor

1. Remove the paper guide unit. (Paper Guide Unit)
2. The paper guide HP sensor is located at [A].
3. Remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
D3BA/D3BB 28 SM
Sensors
4. Open the clamp and disconnect the sensor ( x1, x1).
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
5. Separate the sensor and bracket (tab x3).
SM 29 D3BA/D3BB
Stapler Unit
1.6 STAPLER UNIT

1. Remove the rear upper cover [A] ( x 2).
2. Open the front door and push the stapler unit [A] towards the rear side of the finisher.
3. At the rear side, remove the screw circled in the photo below from the stapler unit [A] ( x 1).
4. Push the stapler unit to the front side of the finisher.
D3BA/D3BB 30 SM
Stapler Unit
5. Remove the inner upper cover [A] ( x 3).
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
6. Remove the bracket [B] from the stapler unit [A] ( x 1).
7. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 1).
SM 31 D3BA/D3BB
Stapler Unit
8. Remove the stapler unit [A] ( x 2).
D3BA/D3BB 32 SM
Punch Unit
1.7 PUNCH UNIT
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
The punch unit is already adjusted in the factory, so you don’t need to adjust it. When you need to
SR3230
SR3240
replace the parts of the punch unit, replace the whole unit.
• Do not disassemble the punch unit. This unit is precisely adjusted in the factory.
• Do not drop or give a shock to the unit when you replace it. The unit could be damaged.
• Rear Upper Cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
• Rear Lower Cover (Rear Upper Cover, Rear Lower Cover, Upper Cover)
2. Remove the side-to-side detection unit [A] ( x 2, x 3, x 2).
SM 33 D3BA/D3BB
Punch Unit
3. Remove the stepper motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2).
4. Remove the punch unit control board [A] ( x1, tab x2).
5. Pull out the punch unit [A] ( x 2, x 3, x 2).
D3BA/D3BB 34 SM
SM
35
D3BA/D3BB
Punch Unit
FINISHER
SR3230
BOOKLET
FINISHER
SR3240
Layout
2.1 LAYOUT
2.1.1 General Layout
No. Name
1 Punch Unit
2 Corner Stapler
3 Shift Tray
4 Proof Tray
D3BA/D3BB 36 SM
Layout
2.1.2 Electrical Component Layout
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
No. Part
1 Exit Motor
2 Transport Motor
3 Main Control Board
4 Pre-stack Transport Motor
5 Entrance Transport Motor
6 Horizontal Transport Motor
7 Tray Lift Motor
8 Paper Guide Motor
9 Paper Guide HP Sensor
SM 37 D3BA/D3BB
Layout
No. Part No. Part

1 Shift Motor 10 LED 3
2 Upper Junction Gate Solenoid 11 LED 2
3 Lower Junction Gate Motor 12 Horizontal Transport Sensor
4 Proof Tray Full Sensor 13 Switchback Transport Sensor
5 Entrance Sensor 14 Transport Path Paper Sensor
6 LED 5 15 Proof Tray Exit Sensor
7 LED 1 16 Lower Junction Gate HP Sensor
8 LED 4 17 Shift Roller HP Sensor
9 Front Door Switch
No. Part No. Part

1 Jogger Fence HP Sensor 8 Stapler HP Sensor
2 Jogger Motor 9 Leading Edge Guide Motor
3 Corner Stapler Movement Motor 10 Leading Edge Guide HP Sensor
4 Feed-out Belt Motor 11 Positioning Roller HP Sensor
D3BA/D3BB 38 SM
Layout
No. Part No. Part

5 Staple Tray Paper Sensor 12 Positioning Roller Motor
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
6 Feed-out Belt HP Sensor 13 Shift Tray Exit Sensor
7 Corner Stapler Motor
No. Part No. Part

1 Paper Exit Guide Plate Motor 9 Return Roller HP Sensor
2 Paper Exit Guide Plate Limit Switch 10 Return Roller Motor
3 Booklet Stack Height Sensor 1 11 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 5
4 Booklet Stack Height Sensor 2 12 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 4
5 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor 13 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 3
6 Trailing Edge Press HP Sensor 14 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 2
7 Shift Paper Height Sensor 15 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 1
8 Upper Tray Height Limit Switch 16 Trailing Edge Press Motor
Punch Unit
SM 39 D3BA/D3BB
Layout
No. Part
1 Punch Unit Movement Motor
2 Punch Unit HP Sensor
3 Punch Registration HP Sensor
4 Punch Registration Motor
5 Punch Registration Sensor
6 Punchout Hopper Full Sensor
7 Punch HP Sensor
8 Punch Drive Motor
9 Punch Motor Rotation Sensor
10 Punch Unit Control Board
2.1.3 Transport Layout
Red Straight Through Path
D3BA/D3BB 40 SM
Layout
Orange Proof Path

Green Pre-stacking Path
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
Purple Stapling Path
2.1.4 Proof Transport Layout (Drive)
No. Name No. Name

A Proof Exit Motor C Entrance Transport Motor
B Junction Gate Solenoid D Horizontal Transport Motor
2.1.5 Proof Transport Layout (Sensors)
No. Name No. Name

A Proof Tray Full Sensor C Horizontal Transport Sensor
B Proof Exit Sensor D Entrance Sensor
SM 41 D3BA/D3BB
Layout
2.1.6 Shift Transport Layout (Drive)
No. Name No. Name

A Shift Roller Motor (shift only) D Relay Transport Motor
B Entrance Transport Motor E Upper Tray Exit Motor
C Horizontal Transport Motor
D3BA/D3BB 42 SM
Operation Details
2.2 OPERATION DETAILS
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
2.2.1 Shift Operation (Shift Transport)
To separate the output stacks, the shift roller motor [A] moves the shift roller [B] side-to-side while
the shift roller is driven. The shift roller HP sensor [C] is used to control this mechanism.
2.2.2 Pre-stack Operation (In Corner Stapling)

• Pre-stack Capacity: 1 sheet
• Pre-stack Size: A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, LT SEF/LEF
There are four steps as follows:
6. The upper tray exit guide plate [A] moves up (opens). Paper comes through the entrance
transport path and reaches the relay transport path.
SM 43 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details
7. After paper passes the pre-stack junction gate [A], the pre-stack junction gate [A] moves
down (closes) and the relay transport roller [C] rotates in reverse. The pre-stack roller [B]
rotates to transport paper to the pre-stack position.
8. The rotation of the relay transport roller [C] and the pre-stack roller [B] stops, and the
pre-stack junction gate [A] moves up (opens). The shift roller [D] also moves up to release the
pressure between itself [D] and the relay transport roller [C].
9. The following sheet comes through the entrance and reaches the relay transport path. After
that, the shift roller [A] drops to press the pre-stacked sheet and the following sheet. Then
with the pre-stacked sheet, the following sheet goes to the next process (corner stapling).
2.2.3 Upper Tray Shift Drive / Limit Sensor / Full Sensor

Upper Tray Shift Up/down
The upper tray lift motor [A] moves the upper tray up/down.
Upper-position Detection
With the actuator, the shift paper height sensor [B] detects the upper position of the tray (without
output paper). The upper tray height limit switch [C] prevents the tray from moving up too much.
When the upper tray moves up to the upper position but doesn’t stop, the upper tray height limit
switch is pushed and the tray shift motor [A] stops.
Upper Tray Full Detection
Condition 1
D3BA/D3BB 44 SM
Operation Details
There are five tray full sensors [D] on the rear side of the machine, but Shift Tray Lower Limit
Sensor 2 and 4 are not used for this finisher.
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
State Sensors Paper Size Length
500 Shift Tray Lower A5 SEF, A5 LEF, B6 SEF, HLT SEF, A6 SEF 148 to
sheets Limit Sensor 5 182 mm
1,000 Shift Tray Lower Not used for this finisher.
sheet Limit Sensor 4
1,500 Shift Tray Lower A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, DLT SEF, 182 to
sheets Limit Sensor 3 LG SEF, LT SEF, 12"x18" SEF, SRA3 SEF, 13"x19.2" 488 mm
SEF
2,000 Shift Tray Lower Not used for this finisher.
sheets Limit Sensor 2
3,000 Shift Tray Lower A4 LEF, LT LEF
sheets Limit Sensor 1
Condition 2
When the feeler rises up to position "1", The booklet stack height sensor 1 [A] is "OFF" and the
booklet stack height sensor 2 [B] is "ON".
If this feeler remains in position "1" for 13 seconds continuously, the shift tray is detected full .
The purpose is to accurately detect tray full for stacks of Z-folded paper, or incorrectly stacked
documents.
SM 45 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details
Condition 3
Shift tray detection input check: SP6123-35 normally set to "0" (default), tray not full.
2.2.4 Pull-in Roller / Paper Stack Holder
Components
No. Name No. Name

A Paper Stacking Holder E Stacking Sponge Roller Fluctuation Motor
B Holder HP Sensor F Stacking Sponge Roller Cam
C Stacking Sponge Roller G Stacking Sponge Roller HP Sensor
D Paper Stacking Holder Cam H Paper Stacking Holder Motor
Operation
There are five steps in the operation:
10. When a job starts, the paper stacking holder motor rotates the paper stacking holder cam [B]
to move the paper stacking holder [A] down.
11. The stacking sponge roller fluctuation motor rotates the stacking sponge roller cam [D] to
D3BA/D3BB 46 SM
Operation Details
move the stacking sponge roller [E] down. The paper stacking holder motor rotates the paper
stacking holder cam [B] to lift the paper stacking holder [A] up to its HP (until the paper
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
stacking holder interrupts the paper stacking holder HP sensor [C]).
12. The paper stacking holder motor drives in reverse to let the stacking sponge roller [A] pull the
output paper in.
13. The paper stacking holder motor rotates the paper stacking holder cam [C] to drop the paper
stacking holder [B] (until job end, the machine repeats step 3 and step 4).
SM 47 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details
14. After job end, the stacking sponge fluctuation motor rotates the stacking sponge roller cam
[D] to lift the stacking sponge roller [A] up to its HP position. At the same time, the paper
stacking holder motor rotates the holder cam [E] to lift the paper stacking holder [B] up to its
HP (until the paper stacking holder HP sensor [C] detects the end of the paper stacking
holder [B]).
2.2.5 Corner Stapling
Components
No. Name No. Name

A Positioning Roller Lift Motor E Drag Roller
B Positioning Roller F Stapler
C Exit Motor G Stapler HP Sensor
D Stapler Movement Motor H Positioning Roller HP Sensor
D3BA/D3BB 48 SM
Operation Details
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
No. Name No. Name
A Edge Guide E Jogger Fence
B Upper Tray Exit Sensor F Staple Tray Paper Sensor
C Jogger HP sensor G Edge Guide HP Sensor
D Jogger Motor H Edge Guide Motor
No. Name No. Name

A Stack Feed-out Belt (with stack feed-out pawl) C Trailing Edge Fence
B Stack Feed-out Motor D Stack Feed-out Pawl HP
Edge Guide
This machine applies a corner staple to the paper stack while it is hanging out of the exit. At this
time, to prevent the paper stack from dropping to the upper tray, the edge guide [D] comes out of
the unit. The edge guide operates as follows:
15. When a job starts, the upper tray guide plate [A] shifts up.
SM 49 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details
16. The edge guide motor [B] drives to push the edge guide [D] out. The edge guide retreats into
the machine when the last sheet of a job is output (the edge guide HP sensor [C] detects the
edge guide).
Stapler Movement
The stapler movement motor [A] moves the stapler [C] along the guide rod [B]. After a job finishes,
the stapler [C] returns to its HP (the stapler HP sensor [D] detects the base of the stapler).
Positioning Roller / Drag Roller

The positioning roller and drag roller operate as follows:
17. The positioning roller shift motor [A] moves the positioning roller [D] down at the start of every
job.
18. The positioning roller motor [B] rotates the positioning roller [D] to transport paper to the
staple tray.
19. The positioning roller motor [B] also rotates the drag roller [C]. The drag roller [C] is a sponge
D3BA/D3BB 50 SM
Operation Details
roller that pushes paper against the trailing edge fence, in order to hold paper in the stapling
position.
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
Jogger
The jogger motor [A] moves the jogger fences [C] to the ready position, where they wait for the
first sheet. As each sheet enters, the jogger fences push toward the center. At the end of the job,
the jogger fences return to their HP and stop. The jogger fence HP sensor [B] detects the jogger
fence at the home position.
SM 51 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details
Stapling
The staple hammer motor [B] pushes the staple hammer [A] down in order to staple the paper
stack. The stapling positions are as follows:
• For oblique stapling: [1]
• For horizontal stapling: [2]
• For horizontal stapling at 2 points: [3]
Feeding-out
The trailing edge fence [B] moves paper up to the proper position to output. Then the stack
feed-out pawl [A] that is attached to the stack feed-out belt [C] pushes the paper out. The stack
feed-out motor [D] moves the stack feed-out pawl [A] and the trailing edge fence [B]. After a stack
is output, both the trailing edge fence [B] and stack feed-out pawl [A] return to their HP.
There are two types of stack output.
• 1. Pawl, exit roller: Small sizes (A4, LT, B4 SEF)
Output is done by the exit roller, and by the trailing edge fence and the stack feed-out pawl as
described above.
• 2. Roller exit: A4, LT, B5 LEF
Only the exit roller is used to output the stack, without using the trailing edge fence and the
stack feed-out pawl.
For Large Sizes (A3, B4, LG, DLT)
• 1 to 10 sheets: Roller exit method
D3BA/D3BB 52 SM
Operation Details
• More than 11 sheets: Pawl, exit roller method
BOOKLET
FINISHER
FINISHER
SR3230
SR3240
2.2.6 Paper Exit Guide
Paper Guide Unit

As each stapled copy exits the finisher, it contacts the copy ahead of it already on the shift tray,
and the paper guide unit [A] prevents the copies from becoming entangled on the shift tray.
The paper guide motor drives the paper guide cover to reduce the amount of curl and prevent the
leading edges [B] from curling and to improve the output of stapled copies on the shift tray.
Related SP Codes
Selects whether or not to operate the paper guide in jobs other than corner stapling jobs.
0: Paper guide operates for all paper sizes
1: Paper guide does not operate
• SP6126-001 Use Paper Guide (Small sizes up to 300 mm)
• SP6125-001 Use Paper Guide (Large sizes large than 300 mm)
Paper Guide Removal

The paper guide unit is provided with the paper guide covers [A] at the initial position for users
who want to take advantage of the improved stacking, but these covers can be removed. (Even
with the covers removed, output will be done correctly even if the paper guides touch during
SM 53 D3BA/D3BB
Operation Details
operation.)
2.2.7 SP6-160-004 (Replacement Mode for Service)

It is easier to access the following parts after running SP-6-160-004.
• Positioning Roller [A]
The paper exit guide plate moves upwards and the positioning roller pops up in front for
easier access.
• Reverse Roller [B]
The paper exit guide plate moves upwards and the reverse roller can be accessed.
D3BA/D3BB 54 SM
M481
MAIL BOX CS3010
Latest Release: Sep, 2016

Initial Release: Sep, 2016
.
Rev. 08/18/2021
INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT FD3000
(M482)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 HOW TO REMOVE THE MAILBOX .............................................................................. 1
1.2 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................................... 5
1.2.1 REAR COVER.................................................................................................... 5
1.2.2 TOP COVER ...................................................................................................... 6
1.2.3 FRONT COVER ................................................................................................. 7
1.2.4 PAPER EXIT COVERS 1-4 ................................................................................. 8
1.3 MOTORS .................................................................................................................... 10
1.3.1 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR ......................................................................... 10
1.3.2 PAPER EXIT MOTOR....................................................................................... 11
1.4 SOLENOIDS............................................................................................................... 13
1.4.1 JUNCTION GATE SOLENOIDS 1-3 ................................................................. 13
1.4.2 INVERTER SOLENOID .................................................................................... 14
1.5 SENSORS .................................................................................................................. 15
1.5.1 DOOR SENSOR............................................................................................... 15
1.5.2 INVERTER GUIDE DOOR SENSOR ................................................................ 15
1.5.3 PAPER EXIT TRAY FULL SENSORS 1-3 ......................................................... 16
1.5.4 PAPER EXIT TRAY FULL SENSOR 4............................................................... 16
1.5.5 PAPER SENSORS 1-4 ..................................................................................... 17
1.5.6 PAPER TRANSPORT SENSORS 1, 2 .............................................................. 17
1.5.7 PAPER ENTRANCE SENSOR ......................................................................... 18
1.6 CONTROLLER BOARD.............................................................................................. 20
1.7 PAPER EXIT DRIVEN ROLLERS 1-4 ......................................................................... 21
1.7.1 INSTALLING THE PAPER EXIT DRIVEN ROLLER .......................................... 22
2.1 PARTS LAYOUT ......................................................................................................... 25
2.2 PAPER PATH.............................................................................................................. 27
2.3 MECHANISM.............................................................................................................. 28
2.3.1 DRIVE AND INVERTER MECHANISM ............................................................. 28
2.3.2 PAPER SEPARATION AND TRANSPORT MECHANISM ................................. 29
2.3.3 TRAY FULL DETECTION ................................................................................. 30
SM i D787
D787 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST


Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable

Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
FC Full color
Trademarks
countries.
countries.

countries.
D787 4 SM
other countries.













D787 6 SM
How to Remove the Mailbox
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
1.1 HOW TO REMOVE THE MAILBOX
1. Remove the rear cover of the mailbox. (Rear Cover)
3. Unlock the lever [A], and then open the right door [B].
SM 1 M482
4. First remove a screw. Then release the hooks on the inside of the front upper cover [A] by
pulling the cover’s sides outward, and remove the front upper cover.
5. Remove the right upper cover [A].
6. Close the mailbox door [A] and then remove the cover [B].
M482 2 SM
7. Remove two fixing brackets [A].
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
8. Remove the fixing screw, disconnect the connector, and open the clamp on the machine rear
side.
9. Hold the parts indicated in red in the image below, slide the mailbox [A] forward, and remove
it upward.
SM 3 M482
10. Lay down the mailbox on a flat surface.
M482 4 SM
Exterior Covers
1.2 EXTERIOR COVERS
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
1.2.1 REAR COVER
1. Remover the mailbox trays 1–4 [A] and the inverter tray [B].
2. Open the mailbox door [A].

Remove the upper part first, and then the lower part.
SM 5 M482
Exterior Covers
1.2.2 TOP COVER

2. Open the mailbox door [A].
3. Remove the top cover [A].

Lift the the top cover slightly first, and then slide to the front side.
Be careful not to damage the hooks on the inside of the top cover when you remove or install
the top cover.
M482 6 SM
Exterior Covers
1.2.3 FRONT COVER
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
1. Remove the mailbox. (How to Remove the Mailbox)
2. Place the mailbox in a standing position on a flat surface.
• Be careful not to apply an excessive force to the mailbox in a standing position to

avoid damage and deformation.
3. Remove the top cover. (Top Cover)

4. Open the inverter guide door [A] and mailbox door [B].
SM 7 M482
Exterior Covers
5. Slide the front cover [A] upward and remove it.

Disconect the connector [B] on the back of the cover.
1.2.4 PAPER EXIT COVERS 1-4

1. Remove the paper exit covers 1-4 [A] (2 tabs per cover).
M482 8 SM
Exterior Covers
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
• When installing the cover, hang the cover by both holes [A] onto the hooks [B] inside the
INTERNAL
(M482)
paper exit of the mailbox, then attach the front hooks [C]..
SM 9 M482
Motors
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR
2. Remove the paper transport motor unit [A].
3. Remove the paper transport motor [A].
M482 10 SM
Motors
1.3.2 PAPER EXIT MOTOR
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
2. Remove the controller board bracket [A].
3. Remove the paper exit motor unit [A].
SM 11 M482
Motors
4. Remove the paper exit motor [A].
M482 12 SM
Solenoids
1.4 SOLENOIDS
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
1.4.1 JUNCTION GATE SOLENOIDS 1-3
2. Remove the controller bracket [A]. (For junction gate solenoids 1-2 only.)
3. Remove the junction gate solenoids 1-3 [A].
SM 13 M482
Solenoids
1.4.2 INVERTER SOLENOID

1. Remove the mailbox. (How to Remove the Mailbox)
2. Remove the inverter solenoid unit [A].
3. Remove the inverter solenoid [A].
M482 14 SM
Sensors
1.5 SENSORS
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
1.5.1 DOOR SENSOR
2. Remove the door sensor bracket [A].
3. Remove the door sensor [A].
1.5.2 INVERTER GUIDE DOOR SENSOR

2. Lay down the mailbox.
3. Remove the inverter guide door sensor bracket [A].
SM 15 M482
Sensors
4. Remove the inverter guide door sensor [A].
1.5.3 PAPER EXIT TRAY FULL SENSORS 1-3

1. Remove the paper exit covers 2-4. (Paper Exit Covers 1-4)
2. Remove the paper exit tray full sensors 1-3 [A].
1.5.4 PAPER EXIT TRAY FULL SENSOR 4

2. Remove the paper exit tray full sensor 4 [A].
M482 16 SM
Sensors
1.5.5 PAPER SENSORS 1-4
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
2. Remove the paper sensors 1-4 [A].
1.5.6 PAPER TRANSPORT SENSORS 1, 2

1. Remove the paper exit covers 1, 3. (Paper Exit Covers 1-4)
2. Remove the paper transport sensor bracket [A].
3. Remove the paper transport sensor [A].
SM 17 M482
Sensors
1.5.7 PAPER ENTRANCE SENSOR

2. Lay down the mailbox upside down.
3. Remove three screws at the front side, and remove the inverter guide door sensor bracket
[A].
4. Remove two screws at the rear side.
M482 18 SM
Sensors
5. Remove the inverter guide plate [A] by pulling it out in the direction of the arrow.
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
6. Remove the paper entrance sensor bracket [A].
7. Remove the paper entrance sensor [A].
SM 19 M482
Controller Board

2. Remove the controller board [A].
M482 20 SM
Paper Exit Driven Rollers 1-4
1.7 PAPER EXIT DRIVEN ROLLERS 1-4
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
Positions of the paper exit driven rollers 1-4 [A]
2. Remove the paper exit driven roller [A].
Push up the right and left springs using a flat-headed screwdriver to remove the paper exit
driven roller.
The paper exit driven roller [A] and the bearings [B] are detached.
SM 21 M482
1.7.1 INSTALLING THE PAPER EXIT DRIVEN ROLLER

1. Hold the paper exit driven roller and position the right end of the shaft at the ground plate [A].
• When attaching the roller shaft, pass it through the exterior protrusion [A] and position
it as shown below.
M482 22 SM
2. Mount the bearing [A] on the left-hand mounting position.
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
3. Keep holding the bearing.
4. Push up the end of the spring toward the circular indentation [A] in the bearing, using a
flat-headed precision screwdriver.
SM 23 M482
5. Push up the spring further, and mount it on the embossed part [A] under the spring.
6. Mount the right-hand bearing and spring in the same manner.
M482 24 SM
Parts Layout
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
2.1 PARTS LAYOUT
1 Door Sensor 11 Inverter Guide Door Sensor
2 Paper Exit Tray Full Sensor 4 12 Paper Exit Tray Full Sensor 1
3 Paper Exit Tray Full Sensor 3 13 Paper Exit Tray Full Sensor 2
4 Paper Sensor 4 14 Inverter Solenoid
5 Paper Transport Sensor 2 15 Paper Transport Motor
6 Paper Sensor 3 16 Paper Exit Motor
7 Paper Sensor 2 17 Controller Board
8 Paper Transport Sensor 1 18 Junction Gate Solenoid 1
SM 25 M482
Parts Layout
9 Paper Sensor 1 19 Junction Gate Solenoid 2
10 Paper Entrance Sensor 20 Junction Gate Solenoid 3
M482 26 SM
Paper Path
2.2 PAPER PATH
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
A Paper Exit Roller 4 E Paper Exit Roller 1
B Paper Exit Roller 3 F Paper Transport Roller 1
C Paper Transport Roller 2 G Paper Entrance Roller
D Paper Exit Roller 2
SM 27 M482
Mechanism
2.3 MECHANISM
2.3.1 DRIVE AND INVERTER MECHANISM
The following rollers are driven by the paper exit motor [A] via a timing belt.
• Paper Exit Roller 1 [E]

• Paper Exit Roller 2 [F]
• Paper Exit Roller 3 [H]
• Paper Exit Roller 4 [I]
The following rollers are driven by the paper transport motor [B] via a timing belt.
• Paper Entrance Roller [C]

• Paper Transport Roller 1 [D]
• Paper Transport Roller 2 [G]
M482 28 SM
Mechanism
When installing the mailbox, the machine’s inverter guide is removed. Because of this, the
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
mailbox contains an inverter tray in the bottom part.
INTERNAL
(M482)
The paper fed to the mailbox via the machine’s junction gate [A] is fed to the inverter tray by the
junction gate [B] in the mailbox, and then sent back by the reverse roller [C] and delivered to the
duplex unit.
2.3.2 PAPER SEPARATION AND TRANSPORT MECHANISM

The paper is fed by the paper transport rollers [A] and [B].
SM 29 M482
Mechanism
To deliver paper to a particular tray, the solenoid [A] for that tray opens the junction gate [B] to
deliver the paper.
2.3.3 TRAY FULL DETECTION

If the paper delivered to the tray exceeds the capacity, the paper jams at the paper exit.
To prevent this, each tray has a sensor to detect when the tray is full. If the tray becomes full, the
print job is suspended. The print job resumes if you remove the paper from the tray.
M482 30 SM
M482
Latest Release: -
Rev. 08/12/2021
(M482)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 HOW TO HOLD THE INTERNAL MULTI-FOLDING UNIT ............................................. 1
1.2 REMOVING THE INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT ......................................................... 2
1.3 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................................... 5
1.3.1 REAR COVER.................................................................................................... 5
1.3.2 DOOR ................................................................................................................ 5
1.3.3 FRONT RIGHT COVER...................................................................................... 6
1.3.4 FRONT LEFT COVER ........................................................................................ 7
1.3.5 TOP COVER ...................................................................................................... 8
1.3.6 EXIT UNIT COVER............................................................................................. 9
1.4 MOTORS, SOLENOID................................................................................................ 10
1.4.1 JG CREASE MOTOR ....................................................................................... 10
1.4.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR ..................................................................................... 10
1.4.3 REGISTRATION MOTOR ................................................................................. 11
1.4.4 2ND FOLD MOTOR.......................................................................................... 11
1.4.5 1ST FOLD MOTOR .......................................................................................... 12
1.4.6 JUNCTION GATE SOLENOID .......................................................................... 12
1.5 SWITCHES................................................................................................................. 14
1.5.1 EXIT UNIT SWITCH ......................................................................................... 14
1.5.2 FRONT DOOR SWITCH................................................................................... 14
1.6 SENSORS .................................................................................................................. 15
1.6.1 CREASE HP SENSOR ..................................................................................... 15
1.6.2 JUNCTION GATE HP SENSOR ....................................................................... 16
1.6.3 REGISTRATION SENSOR ............................................................................... 17
1.6.4 CREASE SENSOR........................................................................................... 18
1.6.5 1ST FOLD SENSOR ........................................................................................ 20
1.6.6 2ND FOLD SENSOR ........................................................................................ 20
1.6.7 FOLDER TRAY EXIT SENSOR ........................................................................ 21
1.6.8 FOLDER TRAY FULL SENSOR........................................................................ 22
1.6.9 FOLDER TRAY FULL SENSOR 2..................................................................... 23
1.6.10 HORIZONTAL PATH EXIT SENSOR ................................................................ 24
SM i D787
1.7 PCB ............................................................................................................................ 26
2.1 SENSOR LAYOUT...................................................................................................... 27
2.2 ROLLER LAYOUT ...................................................................................................... 28
2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT.......................................................................................................... 29
2.4 PARTS LAYOUT ......................................................................................................... 30
2.5 MECHANISM.............................................................................................................. 31
2.5.1 FOLD TYPES ................................................................................................... 31
2.5.2 JUNCTION GATE / CREASE MECHANISM ..................................................... 31
2.5.3 NUMBER OF FOLD OPERATIONS .................................................................. 34
2.5.4 FOLDING MECHANISM ................................................................................... 35
Letter Fold-in / Letter Fold-out / Z-fold .................................................................. 37
Half Fold............................................................................................................... 38
D787 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST

Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
SEF Short Edge Feed [A]
LEF Long Edge Feed [B]
Trademarks
countries.
countries.

countries.
other countries.


D787 4 SM










D787 6 SM
How to Hold the Internal Multi-folding Unit
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
1.1 HOW TO HOLD THE INTERNAL MULTI-FOLDING UNIT
When lifting the internal multi-folding unit, be sure to hold the side frames, as shown in the image
below. Holding the exterior or other parts might damage or deform the unit.
SM 1 M482
Removing the Internal Multi-fold Unit
1.2 REMOVING THE INTERNAL MULTI-FOLD UNIT

1. When a finisher is connected, first remove the finisher and then proceed to step 3.
2. When no finisher is connected, perform the following steps.
2. Open the front cover, and then remove the left upper cover [A].
Slide the cover in the direction of the blue arrow.
3. Remove the left rear cover [A].
M482 2 SM
4. Open the door [A] and remove the coin screw [B].
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
5. Disconnect the connector [A].
6. Remove the fixing screw [A] and bracket [B].

When removing the bracket [B], remove the top screw first, and then the bottom one.
SM 3 M482
7. Open the front cover of the internal multi-fold unit, and then, holding the exit tray frame [A]
and the top part of the opening [B], lift the internal multi-fold unit and remove it.
• Lower the lever [C] to keep the paper guide plate open during operation, because the
plate might be deformed if a strong force is applied while the guide plate is closed.
• Hold the metal frame part [B], not the exterior cover, to avoid damaging the cover.
• Be careful not to touch the mylar sheet [D] located behind.
M482 4 SM
Exterior Covers
1.3 EXTERIOR COVERS
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
1.3.1 REAR COVER
1.3.2 DOOR
1. Remove the small cover [A] and clip ring.
SM 5 M482
Exterior Covers
2. Open the door [A] and remove it by sliding upward.
1.3.3 FRONT RIGHT COVER

1. Open the door [A].
2. Remove the knobs [A], and then lower the lever [B].
M482 6 SM
Exterior Covers
3. Remove the front right cover [A].
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
Remove the connector [B] connected to the LED on the back of the cover.
INTERNAL
(M482)
1.3.4 FRONT LEFT COVER
1. Open the door [A].
SM 7 M482
Exterior Covers
2. Open the exit unit [A].
3. Remove the front left cover [A].
1.3.5 TOP COVER

1. Remove the front right cover. (Front Right Cover)
2. Slide the top cover [A] to the left, turn the left side, and then remove the cover.
M482 8 SM
Exterior Covers
1.3.6 EXIT UNIT COVER
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
1. Remove the front left cover. (Front Left Cover)
2. Remove the exit unit cover [A].
Disconnect the connector and open the clamp for the LED [B] on the back of the cover.
SM 9 M482
Motors, Solenoid
1.4 MOTORS, SOLENOID

1.4.1 JG CREASE MOTOR
2. Remove the JG crease motor [A].
1.4.2 TRANSPORT MOTOR

3. Remove the transport motor [A].
M482 10 SM
Motors, Solenoid
1.4.3 REGISTRATION MOTOR
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
2. Remove the registration motor [A].
1.4.4 2ND FOLD MOTOR

2. Remove the 2nd fold motor [A]
SM 11 M482
Motors, Solenoid
1.4.5 1ST FOLD MOTOR

2. Remove the 1st fold motor [A].
1.4.6 JUNCTION GATE SOLENOID

1. Remove the exit unit cover. (Exit Unit Cover)
2. Remove the junction gate solenoid unit [A].
M482 12 SM
Motors, Solenoid
3. Remove the junction gate solenoid [A].
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
SM 13 M482
Switches
1.5 SWITCHES
1.5.1 EXIT UNIT SWITCH
2. Remove the exit unit switch [A].
1.5.2 FRONT DOOR SWITCH

2. Remove the front door switch bracket [A].
3. Remove the front door switch [A].
M482 14 SM
Sensors
1.6 SENSORS
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
1.6.1 CREASE HP SENSOR
2. Remove the crease HP sensor bracket [A].
3. Remove the crease HP sensor [A].
SM 15 M482
Sensors
1.6.2 JUNCTION GATE HP SENSOR

2. Remove the junction gate HP sensor bracket [A].
3. Remove the junction gate HP sensor [A].
M482 16 SM
Sensors
1.6.3 REGISTRATION SENSOR
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
2. Remove the registration sensor bracket [A].
3. Remove the registration sensor [A].
SM 17 M482
Sensors
1.6.4 CREASE SENSOR

2. Remove the N5 cover [A].
3. Remove the fixing plate [A].
4. Lift the N5 cover [A], slide it to the left, and then remove it by pulling.
M482 18 SM
Sensors
5. Remove the crease roller cover [A].
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
6. Remove the crease sensor bracket [A].
7. Remove the crease sensor [A].
SM 19 M482
Sensors
1.6.5 1ST FOLD SENSOR

1. Remove the crease sensor bracket. (Crease Sensor)
2. Remove the 1st fold sensor bracket [A].
3. Remove the 1st fold sensor [A].
1.6.6 2ND FOLD SENSOR

2. Raise the N1 lever [A].
M482 20 SM
Sensors
3. Remove the screw [A] with a short screwdriver, and remove the bracket [B].
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
4. Remove the 2nd fold sensor [A].
1.6.7 FOLDER TRAY EXIT SENSOR

2. Raise the exit unit [A] and remove the folder tray exit sensor bracket [B].
SM 21 M482
Sensors
3. Remove the folder tray exit sensor [A].
1.6.8 FOLDER TRAY FULL SENSOR

2. Remove the exit fence [A].
3. Remove the folder tray full sensor bracket [A].
M482 22 SM
Sensors
4. Remove the folder tray full sensor [A].
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
1.6.9 FOLDER TRAY FULL SENSOR 2
2. Remove the exit fence [A].
3. Remove the folder tray full sensor 2 bracket [A].
SM 23 M482
Sensors
4. Remove the folder tray full sensor 2 [A].
1.6.10 HORIZONTAL PATH EXIT SENSOR
1. Put the internal multi-fold unit upside down.
Do not turn over the unit with the top cover removed, as shown in the image below, to avoid
damage to the circuit board [A].
M482 24 SM
Sensors
2. Remove the horizontal path exit sensor cover [A].
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
3. Remove the horizontal path exit sensor bracket [A].
4. Remove the horizontal path exit sensor [A].
SM 25 M482
PCB
1.7 PCB
2. Remove the PCB [A].
What to do After Replacing the PCB

After replacing the PCB, set the unit to the adjustment values that are specified in the label [A] on
the left frame, in the following SP modes.
• 6-324-001 (NV Adj. Data Mod. 1st Fold Pos. Factory Setting)
• 6-324-002 (NV Adj. Data Mod. 2nd Fold Pos. Factory Setting)
• 6-324-003 (NV Adj. Data Mod. Crease Pos. Factory Setting)
M482 26 SM
Sensor Layout
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
2.1 SENSOR LAYOUT
1 Registration sensor 5 Folder tray exit sensor
2 2nd fold sensor 6 Folder tray full sensor 1
3 1st fold sensor 7 Folder tray full sensor 2
4 Crease sensor 8 Horizontal path exit sensor
SM 27 M482
Roller Layout
2.2 ROLLER LAYOUT
A Paper entrance roller G Folding roller 3
B Registration roller H Crease roller
C 1st fold roller (F/R) I Relay transport roller
D Folding roller 1 J Folder tray exit roller
E 2nd fold roller (F/R) K Horizontal path exit roller
F Folding roller 2
M482 28 SM
Drive Layout
2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
1 Registration motor 4 JG crease motor
2 1st fold motor 5 Transport motor
3 2nd fold motor 6 Junction gate solenoid
SM 29 M482
Parts Layout
2.4 PARTS LAYOUT
1 Registration sensor 10 Folder tray full sensor 2
2 1st fold sensor 11 Horizontal path exit sensor
3 Crease sensor 12 Folder tray exit sensor
4 Junction gate HP sensor 13 Folder tray full sensor 1
5 Front door open/closed switch 14 PCB
6 JG crease motor 15 Crease HP sensor
7 Transport motor 16 2nd fold motor
8 Exit unit switch 17 1st fold motor
9 Junction gate solenoid 18 Registration motor
M482 30 SM
Mechanism
2.5 MECHANISM
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
2.5.1 FOLD TYPES
This unit is capable of the following fold types:
[A] : Half Fold
[B] : Letter Fold-out
[C] : Letter Fold-in
[D] : Z-fold
2.5.2 JUNCTION GATE / CREASE MECHANISM

The JG crease motor [A] rotates clockwise/counterclockwise to operate the junction gate / crease
roller.
SM 31 M482
Mechanism
Junction Gate
• When the JG crease motor [A] rotates clockwise, the junction gates 1, 2, and 3 operate.
• The cam moves the levers 1, 2, and 3 to switch the corresponding junction gates on and off.
Paper feeding Junction Gate Status

When feeding paper without folding
[1]: Junction Gate 1
When entering Folding Roller 1
M482 32 SM
Mechanism
Paper feeding Junction Gate Status
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
When adjusting the letter fold position
INTERNAL
(M482)
When performing half fold
Crease
• When the JG crease motor [A] rotates counterclockwise, the crease motor [B] operates.
SM 33 M482
Mechanism
2.5.3 NUMBER OF FOLD OPERATIONS

You can change the strength of the fold by changing the number of times that the crease roller
mechanism presses the paper to make the fold. To do this, use SP6-315-001.
SP No. Name [Min to Max/Init./Step]

6-315-001 Set Number of Creasing [0 to 4 / 1 / times]
0: -1
1: 0
2: 1
3: 2
4: 3
For each fold, you can specify the number of times that the mechanism presses the paper from 0
to 4.
As the default, the number of times is set to 1. You can change the number with this SP setting.
• If you set the SP value to 0 (-1), the number of times is set to 0.
• If the number of times increases, the throughput decreases.
The internal multi-fold unit makes a crease fold by rotating the crease roller [A], which has a
protrusion [B] as shown below, along the fold of the paper [C]. (Paper feed direction [D])
M482 34 SM
Mechanism
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
2.5.4 FOLDING MECHANISM
By the bidirectional movement of the roller, the paper is fed to the fold position, and the paper
stays in close contact with the roller when folding. This enables precise folding regardless of the
characteristics of the paper.
After feeding the paper to the 1st fold roller (F/R), the machine can control precisely where to stop
the paper [A] by using a proportional-integral-differential (PID) controller.
The distance [D] between the folding position [C] and the fold-assessment position [B] is short
(about 30 mm regardless of the fold type or paper size). Furthermore, folding is performed with
the paper in contact with the folding roller, preventing arching regardless of the paper curl,
thickness, grain, and stiffness.
SM 35 M482
Mechanism
In the previous multi-fold unit, the folding position was determined by the stopper [B]. The
distance [A] from the folding position [C] to the stopper is long (about 100 to 240 mm, depending
on the fold type and paper size). Furthermore, the arch of the paper in the space to the stopper
was influenced by the paper curl, thickness, grain, and stiffness.
Even if the stop position was accurate, the arch of the paper influenced the fold length.
M482 36 SM
Mechanism
UNIT FD3000
MULTI-FOLD
INTERNAL
(M482)
Letter Fold-in / Letter Fold-out / Z-fold
[1] The leading edge of the paper passes the registration roller.
[2] The leading edge of the paper passes the 1st fold roller (F/R).
[3] When the paper is fed to the fold-assessment position, the 1st fold roller (F/R) reverses,
forming an arch in the paper.
[4] When this arched part passes through the nips of the folding rollers 1 and 2, the first fold is
performed.
[5] After the paper passes the folding roller, the 2nd fold roller pulls in the paper and feeds it to the
2nd fold position.
[6] At the fold position, the 2nd fold roller (F/R) rotates in reverse to form an arch in the paper.
[7] The 2nd fold is formed when this arched part is fed through the nips of the folding rollers 2 and
3. Depending on the difference in the fold positions, Letter Fold-In, Letter Fold-Out, or Z-Fold is
performed.
The following diagrams show a Letter Fold-In example.
SM 37 M482
Mechanism
Half Fold
[1] The leading edge of the paper passes the registration roller.
[2] The paper is fed to the folding rollers 1 and 2 by the junction gate [A].
[3] The leading edge of the paper passes the 2nd fold roller (F/R) and is fed to the fold position.
[4] At the fold position, the 2nd fold roller (F/R) rotates in reverse to form an arch in the paper.
[5] The 2nd fold is formed when this arched part is fed through the nips of the folding rollers 2 and
3.
M482 38 SM
M494
PAPER FEED UNIT PB3240
Latest Release: -
Rev. 08/12/2021
PAPER FEED UNIT PB3240
(M494)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 EXTERIOR COVER...................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 PRECAUTIONS CONCERNING STABILIZERS .................................. 1
1.1.2 REAR COVER ..................................................................................... 1
1.2 MOTORS ...................................................................................................... 2
1.2.1 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (UPPER) ............................................................. 2
1.2.2 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (LOWER) ............................................................ 2
1.2.3 TRANSPORT MOTOR ........................................................................ 3
1.2.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR........................................................................ 3
1.3 BOARD......................................................................................................... 4
1.3.1 CONTROLLER BOARD....................................................................... 4
1.4 SENSORS .................................................................................................... 5
1.4.1 TRANSPORT SENSOR....................................................................... 5
1.4.2 PAPER FEED SENSOR ...................................................................... 6
1.4.3 PAPER END SENSOR ........................................................................ 7
1.4.4 UPPER LIMIT SENSOR ...................................................................... 7
1.5 PAPER FEED UNIT...................................................................................... 8
1.5.1 2ND PAPER FEED UNIT..................................................................... 8
1.5.2 1ST PAPER FEED UNIT ................................................................... 12
1.6 ROLLERS ................................................................................................... 13
1.6.1 PICK-UP ROLLER ............................................................................. 13
1.6.2 FEED ROLLER .................................................................................. 14
1.6.3 FRICTION ROLLER .......................................................................... 14
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................... 15

2.1 PARTS LAYOUT ........................................................................................ 15
2.2 MECHANISM .............................................................................................. 17
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATION MECHANISM...................................... 17
2.2.2 DRIVE MECHANISM ......................................................................... 17
2.2.3 FRICTION ROLLER/PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM .... 17
2.2.4 PAPER FEED TRANSPORT MECHANISM....................................... 17
2.2.5 TRAY BOTTOM PLATE LIFT ............................................................ 18
SM i M494
2.2.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ................................................................ 20
2.2.7 REMAINING PAPER/PAPER END DETECTION .............................. 21
M494 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST


Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable

Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
FC Full color
Trademarks
countries.
countries.

countries.
M494 4 SM
other countries.













M494 6 SM
Exterior Cover
PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3240
(M494)
1.1 EXTERIOR COVER
1.1.1 PRECAUTIONS CONCERNING STABILIZERS

Stabilizers are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the international standard
for safety.
The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy, from toppling as a
result of people running into or leaning on them, which can lead to serious accidents such as
persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1)
Do not remove them under your own judgment.
1.1.2 REAR COVER

1. Remove the securing brackets [A] ( ×2).
2. Remove the rear cover [A] ( ×2).
SM 1 M494
Motors
1.2 MOTORS
1.2.1 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (UPPER)

1. Remove the rear cover (Rear Cover).
2. Remove the tray lift motor (upper) [A] ( ×2, ×1).
1.2.2 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (LOWER)

2. Remove the tray lift motor (lower) [A] ( ×2, ×1).
M494 2 SM
Motors
1.2.3 TRANSPORT MOTOR
PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3240
(M494)
2. Remove the transport motor [A] ( ×2, ×1).
1.2.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR

2. Remove the paper feed motor [A] ( ×2, ×1).
SM 3 M494
Board
1.3 BOARD
1.3.1 CONTROLLER BOARD

2. Remove the controller board [A] ( ×4, ×10).
M494 4 SM
Sensors
1.4 SENSORS
PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3240
(M494)
1.4.1 TRANSPORT SENSOR
1. Remove the paper feed unit. (2nd Paper Feed Unit, 1st Paper Feed Unit)
2. Remove the transport sensor bracket [A] ( ×1).
3. Remove the transport sensor [A] ( ×1).
SM 5 M494
Sensors
1.4.2 PAPER FEED SENSOR

2. Remove the paper feed sensor bracket [A] ( ×1).
3. Remove the paper feed sensor [A] ( ×1).
M494 6 SM
Sensors
1.4.3 PAPER END SENSOR
PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3240
(M494)
1. Paper feed unit (2nd Paper Feed Unit, 1st Paper Feed Unit)
2. Paper end sensor [A] ( ×1)
1.4.4 UPPER LIMIT SENSOR

2. Remove the upper limit sensor [A] ( ×1).
SM 7 M494
Paper Feed Unit
1.5 PAPER FEED UNIT
1.5.1 2ND PAPER FEED UNIT

1. Pull out the paper trays.
3. Remove the right front cover [A] ( ×1).
4. Remove the right rear cover [A] ( ×1).
M494 8 SM
Paper Feed Unit
5. Remove the stabilizer covers [A] ( ×2).
PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3240
(M494)
6. Remove the right lower cover [A] ( ×2).
7. Open the transport cover [A].
SM 9 M494
Paper Feed Unit
8. Remove the stopper [A] ( ×1).
9. Remove the interlock switch cover [A] ( ×1).
10. Remove the paper feed guide plate [A].
M494 10 SM
Paper Feed Unit
11. Remove the harness cover [A] ( ×2).
PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3240
(M494)
12. Remove the harness [A] ( ×1, ×4).
13. Remove the 2nd paper feed unit [A] ( ×2).
SM 11 M494
Paper Feed Unit
1.5.2 1ST PAPER FEED UNIT

1. Remove the 2nd paper feed unit. (2nd Paper Feed Unit)
2. Remove the harness [A] ( ×1, ×6).
3. Remove the guide plate [A] ( ×1).
4. Remove the 1st paper feed unit [A] ( ×2).
M494 12 SM
Rollers
1.6 ROLLERS
PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3240
(M494)
1.6.1 PICK-UP ROLLER
2. Remove the holder [A] ( ×1).
3. Remove the pick-up roller [A].
SM 13 M494
Rollers
1.6.2 FEED ROLLER

1. Remove the pick-up roller. (Pick-up Roller)
2. Remove the feed roller [A].
1.6.3 FRICTION ROLLER

1. Remove the feed roller. (Feed Roller)
2. Remove the friction roller [A] ( ×1).
M494 14 SM
Parts Layout
PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3240
(M494)
2.1 PARTS LAYOUT

1 Paper size switch 4 Feed roller
2 Tray set switch 5 Transport roller
3 Pick-up roller 6 Friction roller
SM 15 M494
Parts Layout

1 Paper size switch 8 Anti-condensation heater
2 Controller board 9 Paper feed sensor
3 Tray set switch 10 Paper end sensor
4 Tray lift motor 11 Vertical transport sensor
5 Paper feed motor 12 Upper limit sensor
6 Transport motor 13 Pick-up solenoid
7 Vertical transport cover open/closed switch
M494 16 SM
Mechanism
2.2 MECHANISM
PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3240
(M494)
2.2.1 PAPER FEED SEPARATION MECHANISM
The feed system is a RF paper feed system. The paper feed unit has a pick-up roller, feed roller,
and friction roller. The feed roller and friction roller are high durability rollers.

The pick-up roller and feed roller are driven by the paper feed motor [A]. The transport roller is
driven by the transport motor [B]. The friction roller is not driven.
2.2.3 FRICTION ROLLER/PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM

When the tray is set, the friction roller comes in contact with the feed roller. The pick-up roller
touches the top sheet of paper.
When the tray is opened, contact between the feed roller and friction roller, and contact between
the pick-up roller and paper are released.
2.2.4 PAPER FEED TRANSPORT MECHANISM

In order to feed the paper at regular intervals, there is a paper feed sensor near the pick-up roller,
and this sensor is used to adjust the paper feed timing.
SM 17 M494
Mechanism
1. The paper feed motor turns ON, and feeds the first sheet of paper.
2. To prevent the next sheet from being fed, the pick-up solenoid turns ON just before the
trailing edge of the first sheet passes through the pick-up roller, and the pick-up roller leaves
the paper surface.
3. Slightly before the trailing edge of the first sheet leaves the paper feed roller, the paper feed
motor turns OFF.
However, at this time, if the paper feed sensor does not detect paper (the second sheet is not
fed to the paper feed sensor position), the paper feed motor does not turn OFF. Pre-feed is
performed as follows:
1. The pick-up solenoid turns OFF, and the second sheet of paper is fed to the paper feed
sensor position.
2. When the trailing edge of the second sheet passes the feed roller, the paper feed motor
is turned OFF. The pick-up solenoid remains OFF.
4. Just when the trailing edge of the first sheet passes the feed roller, the pick-up solenoid turns
OFF. The pick-up roller is brought into contact with the paper surface.
5. When the first sheet has been fed a specified distance by the downstream transport roller, the
paper feed motor turns ON to feed the second sheet.
2.2.5 TRAY BOTTOM PLATE LIFT

When the paper feed tray is set in the main frame, the tray set sensor switch turns ON. The
coupling of the lift motor connects with the shaft at the rear of the tray, and the motor rotates to lift
the tray bottom plate. The tray bottom plate rises until the paper surface lifts up the pick-up roller
and the upper limit sensor turns OFF (the sensor is blocked). The tray is now ready to feed.
When the paper feed tray is removed, the coupling is disengaged, and the bottom plate descends.
At this time, the lift motor rotates until the coupling returns to the home position.
M494 18 SM
Mechanism
PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3240
(M494)
1 Lift motor 3 Tray shaft (rear)
2 Coupling 4 Tray bottom plate

1 Upper limit sensor 2 Pick-up roller
SM 19 M494
Mechanism
2.2.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

The end fence is linked mechanically with the size detection actuator. When the end fence is
moved, the size detection actuator also moves.
When the paper feed tray is set, 4 paper size switches turn ON/OFF depending on the position of
the size detection actuator. Paper size is detected by the detected combination of these switches.

1 End fence 3 Size detection actuator
2 Paper size switch 4 Tray set switch
Paper size switch operation

Paper size Paper size switch
SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
SRA3 (12”×18”) 1 0 1 0
A3 (DLT) 0 1 0 0
B4 (LG) 0 0 1 1
0 1 1 1
A4_SEF 1 1 1 0
LT_SEF 1 1 0 0
B5_SEF 1 0 0 0
A4_LEF (LT_LEF) 0 0 0 1
B5_LEF (Exe_LEF) 0 0 1 0
M494 20 SM
Mechanism
Paper size Paper size switch
PAPER FEED
UNIT PB3240
SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
(M494)
A5_LEF 0 1 0 1
2.2.7 REMAINING PAPER/PAPER END DETECTION

Remaining paper in the paper feed tray is detected by a combination of ON/OFF status
(contact/non-contact) of contact-type remaining paper sensors (boards) CN-3 and CN-5.
When the amount of remaining paper decreases, and the lift motor rotates, the remaining paper
sensors CN-3 and CN-5 in the motor are turned ON/OFF.
The following 4 levels of remaining paper can be detected.
Remaining paper 100% 70% 30% 10%

CN-3 OFF ON ON OFF
CN-5 OFF OFF ON ON
Control panel display 4 bars 3 bars 2 bars 1 bar
Paper end detection

When there is no more paper in the paper feed tray, the paper end feeler turns ON the paper end
sensor (the sensor is unblocked).

1 Paper end sensor 3 Slot in the tray base plate
2 End feeler
SM 21 M494

SP8400 Services Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SP8400 Services Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SP8400 Services Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M0AN

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

 2022 RICOH USA, Inc. All rights reserved.

Ricoh USA, Inc.

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

• Windows® Internet Explorer® 7

• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:

• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:

• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:

• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:

• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:

• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:

• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:

1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................................... 1-1

2. INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 2-1

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ..................................................... 3-1

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 4-1

5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................................................. 5-1

6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................... 6-1

7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................... 7-1

No. Description No. Description

1.1.2 PAPER PATH

No. Description No. Description

1.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

No. Description No. Description

1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS CONFIGURATION

• Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.

2.1.2 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS

2.1.3 MACHINE DIMENSIONS

W x D x H: 587 x 653 x 720 mm (23.2 x 25.7 x 28.3 inches)

A 1105.3mm (43.51") L 668mm (26.29")

2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

• Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.

2.2 WHO INSTALLS THE PERIPHERALS AND OPTIONS

2.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION

• Finisher SR3210 (D3B8-17)

2.3.2 ACCESSORY CHECK

2.3.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• Be sure to secure space around the machine in advance.

Removal of Packing Materials and Shipping Retainers

dropping it may cause an injury.

4. Remove the orange tape and retainers on the outside.

7. Close the front cover.

Pulling out the Feeler of the Paper Exit Full Sensor

Checking the Position of the Paper Exit Feeler

• It can move in line with the ejection of paper.

Paper will get jammed in the following cases.

Attaching the Decals

2. Attach the inkjet decals provided with the machine accessories.

Toner Bottle Installation

1. Open the front cover.

4. Push the toner bottle [A] into the machine slowly.

7. Turn ON the main power.

2.3.4 CHECK IMAGE QUALITY / SETTINGS

[B]" at the same time, until the number keyboard is displayed.

• SP1-002 (Side-to-Side Registration)

Settings Relevant to the Service Contract

SP No. Function Default

Installation is now completed.